Square D




Square D
ID: 682077
Model: 2NR600
Price: $119.79

Qty:
Square D
ID: 682076
Model: ZB5AVM3
Price: $37.03

Qty:
Square D
ID: 682075
Model: ZB4BW0M35
Price: $58.46

Qty:
Square D
ID: 682074
Model: ZB4BW0M33
Price: $118.77

Qty:
Square D
ID: 682073
Model: XB5AVM3
Price: $47.94

Qty:
Square D
ID: 682072
Model: XB4BVM3
Price: $43.27

Qty:
Square D
ID: 682071
Price: $80.10

Qty:
Square D
ID: 682070
Model: ZB4BVM1
Price: $37.03

Qty:
Square D
ID: 682069
Model: XB4BVM1
Price: $43.27

Qty:
Square D
ID: 682068
Model: 9999DN2
Price: $306.13

Qty:
Square D
ID: 682067
Model: XUDA1PSMM8
Price: $149.47

Qty:
Square D
ID: 682066
Model: XB4BS542
Price: $145.17

Qty:

Manufacturer Catalog Data

page 1

2015 Digest 177 $22 digestplus-us.schneider-electric.com


page 2

Schneider Electric brands that deliver the solutions you demand. Square D power solutions – ready for the future. Square DTM by Schneider ElectricTM brand NEMA power and control solutions have been trusted over 100 years for performance, reliability, and energy-saving design. From residential load centers and metering products to commercial panelboards, energy conserving transformers, and safety switches, Square D brand products provide you with quality solutions for distributing and monitoring electrical power. It’s more than an electrical system. It’s the backbone of today’s energy-demanding homes and businesses. Taking lighting technology to a new level. JunoTM by Schneider Electric is a leading manufacturer of energy-efficient commercial and residential lighting solutions and advanced system controls. Since 1976, we have been serving customers throughout North America, including electrical distributors, lighting showrooms, contractors, architects, engineers, lighting designers, and commercial establishments, offering them high-quality, innovative products, designed and engineered in the United States. The Juno Lighting Group product family includes over 50,000 items for commercial and residential construction, and includes a rapidly expanding line of eco-friendly LED fixtures for outdoor, recessed, track, decorative, and under-cabinet applications. Delivering the best image quality in video security. PelcoTM by Schneider Electric is a world leader in the design, development, and manufacture of video and security systems ideal for any industry. From megapixel cameras to video management and recording to display, Pelco solutions deliver the best image quality in video security. > pelco.com Committed to data center critical power and cooling. TM APCTM by Schneider Electric is a global leader in critical power and cooling, providing industry-leading hardware, software, and services designed to ensure availability and higher energy efficiency across the residential, business network, data center, and manufacturing environments. The position of APC on the cutting edge of data center thought leadership for over two decades has changed the way the world designs, installs, operates, and maintains data centers. APC has unparalleled commitment to innovation and the world’s leading R&D investment (more than $90 million annually) dedicated to critical power and cooling issues. Telemecanique Sensors Simply easyTM. Founded over 90 years ago, Telemecanique Sensors is an independent brand of Schneider Electric, specializing in sensors and sensor-related technology. Telemecanique Sensors is a global player, present in more than 20 countries, with products distributed worldwide through a broad network of partners. As a global leader in the sensors business, we help our customers select the right technology to get the best performance and reliability from their machines. Focused on three core values – Simplicity, Proximity, and Expertise – we have become experts in factory automation sensors as well as specialists in demanding applications, making our customers’ lives “simply easy!” © 2015 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. Schneider Electric, Square D, Juno, Pelco, and APC are trademarks owned by Schneider Electric Industries SAS or its affiliated companies. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. • www.schneider-electric.com • 998-19128217_GMA-US


page 3

How to Use Digest 177 Welcome to the Schneider Electric Digest! Over a thousand pages of technical product information to help you specify and select Schneider Electric products. A key element of the Digest 177 is its color-coded Table of Contents, shown at the right, and matching product section tabs throughout the Digest. This colorful approach aids navigation and helps you quickly find the major product categories. A detailed Table of Contents is provided at the beginning of each product section and two indexes are available in the back of the book: an alphabetical listing and an alphanumeric listing. To ensure you have the latest pricing information, list prices are now available online only. This meets our customer and market driven demand to merge technical information with functionality. Finally, the Supplemental and Obsolescence Digest 177 contains additional product information for our international product offer, our legacy products in the obsolescence process, and more. DigestPLUS DigestPLUS provides one location to access the technical product information you need to specify and select Schneider Electric products, right at your fingers. With links to over 22,000 orderable parts and over 17,000 pages of the most up-to-date product data, including: the Digest, Supplemental and Obsolescence Digest, related product catalogs, CAD drawings, circuit breaker time-current characteristic curves, white papers, product cross reference, and locator services tools. DigestPLUS is powerful, yet simple. DigestPLUS offers you the option to install a mobile app (iOS or Android), which ensures you have access to the latest Schneider Electric technical and product selection information. www.digestplus-us.schneider-electric.com Other Exciting Tools PROficient For Electrical Contractors PROficient: is a Suite of Free Digital Tools, designed for electrical contractors, by electrical contractors, to help increase efficiency in everything you do. (cid:129) Easy to use, on your desktop, smartphone, and tablet (cid:129) Faster, more accurate (cid:129) Quick response to change (cid:129) Project history visible and accessible (cid:129) One log-in, one suite of tools (cid:129) Your 24/7 pathway to generating more business www.schneider-electric.us/proficient LayoutFAST: a Revit MEP Plugin that's going to help you select, configure and insert the most updated Schneider Electric Product Models from the cloud into your design without leaving your Revit Project. Depending on your project stage, build the most accurate Revit family simply by answering a few questions. Turn minutes of design work into seconds. Customer Care Center Need technical support or onsite service? Have questions? 1-888-778-2733 Customer Care App Support is right at your fingertips: (cid:129) Check pricing and availability (cid:129) Look up Frequently Asked Questions (cid:129) Access documents (cid:129) Email or call our Customer Care Center (cid:129) Check the status of an order (cid:129) . . . and more www.schneider-electric.us/en/support/ Access to all our Support, Training and Tools, including: Product Cross Reference: Enter an obsolete or competitive part number to receive the Schneider Electric equivalent. Frequently Asked Questions: Access our Knowledge Base for answers to thousands of our most frequently asked questions, updated daily. https://www.schneider-electric.us/en/faqs Calculators and Configurators: Simplify your product selection. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Table of Contents Product Section Listing Load Centers Metering Equipment Safety Switches Power Monitoring and Control Advanced Products Surge Protective Devices Miniature and Molded Case Circuit Breakers Operator Mechanisms and Disconnect Switches Panelboards Power Solutions: Integrated Switchboards and Switchgear Busway Wire Management Transformers Medical Products NEMA Contactors and Starters Motor Control Centers IEC Contactors and Starters Push Buttons and Operator Interface Electronic Sensors and Machine Cabling Limit Switches Pressure, Vacuum, and Float Switches Relays and Timers Terminal Blocks Machine Safeguarding Products AC Drives and Soft Starts Automation Products Enclosures Uninterruptible Power Supplies Alphabetical Listing Alpha-Numeric Listing


page 4

schneider-electric.us Section 1 Load Centers QO Plug-On Neutral Load Centers with Qwik-Grip ................. 1-12 QO and HOM Plug-On Neutral Load Centers with Qwik-Grip.. 1-16 HOM Plug-On Neutral Load Centers with Qwik-Grip ............... 1-23 Section 4 Power Monitoring and Control PowerLogic ION7400 Utility Feeder Meter.............................. 4-10 PowerLogic PM8000 Power and Energy Meters...................... 4-11 Series 5000 Power Meters ...................................................... 4-13 PowerLogic PM3000 Power and Energy Meters..................... 4-15 iEM3000 Energy Meters.......................................................... 4-16 PowerLogic EM4200 Enercept Meter....................................... 4-19 Com’X Data Loggers and Energy Servers ............................... 4-25 VAMP V321 Arc Flash Mitigation System................................. 4-35 VAMP V321 I/O Units .............................................................. 4-35 AccuSine PCS+ Active Harmonic Filter (AHF) ......................... 4-42 AccuSine PFV+ Active Harmonic Filter (AHF) ......................... 4-43 VarSet Low Voltage Capacitor Banks....................................... 4-46 Section 5 Advanced Products EVlink DC Quick Charging ......................................................... 5-8 Wiser Air................................................................................... 5-10 Section 6 Surge Protective Devices (SPDs) EMA Series SPDs ...................................................................... 6-2 EBA Series SPDs....................................................................... 6-4 SDSA1175 and SDSA 3-Phase Surge Protective Devices ........ 6-8 Section 7 Miniature and Molded Case Circuit Breakers Multi 9 C60BP and C60BPR Miniature Circuit Breakers............. 7-23 Multi 9 C60SP Miniature Circuit Breakers ................................. 7-24 Multi 9 C60H-DC Miniature Circuit Breakers for DC Circuits ..... 7-25 Multi 9 GFP Ground Fault Protectors ....................................... 7-26 C60BP (UL489) Comb Busbars ............................................... 7-27 PowerPact B-Frame Circuit Breakers ..................................... 7-31 500 Vdc Circuit Breakers.......................................................... 7-50 Section 8 Operating Mechanisms and Disconnect Switches Disconnect Switches, 16–25 A................................................... 8-9 Cable Operator Kits for GS2 Switches ..................................... 8-27 Section 9 Panelboards Fingersafe IP2X Barriers for NQ Panelboards ......................... 9-20 I-Line Combo Panelboard ........................................................ 9-35 Section 11 Switchboards and Switchgear Power-Zone™ 4 Arc Resistant Switchgear with ArcBlok Technology ............................................................................. 11-10 Section 12 Busway H- , J-, and L-Frame Plug-In Units with Electronic Trip and Communication ...................................................................... 12-15 Section 14 Transformers Energy Efficient Three Phase................................................... 14-4 Medium Voltage Distribution Transformers ............................ 14-21 Dry Type Medium Voltage ...................................................... 14-22 NEW 1,201–15,000 Vac Three-Phase Indoor Transformers.. 14-22 1,201–15,000 Vac Single-Phase Indoor Transformers............14-23 Enclosures.............................................................................. 14-23 Section 15 Medical Products IG2000CBM.............................................................................. 15-3 i-1 New and Enhanced Products in Digest 177 Section 16 NEMA and Definite Purpose Contactors & Starters TeSys N Non-Reversing Contactors....................................... 16-14 TeSys N Reversing Contactors............................................... 16-15 TeSys N Non-Reversing Starters............................................ 16-16 TeSys N Reversing Starters.................................................... 16-17 LTMR Controller.................................................................... 16-102 Components ............................................................16-104, 16-105 Adapted Bimetallic Overload Relay Mounting Bracket Adapter (NEMA Sizes 00–1) .............................................................. 16-107 TeSys T Motor Management System (NEMA Sizes 1–6)....... 16-32 TeSys T Motor Management System ................................... 16-101 Adapted Bimetallic Overload Relay Mounting Adapter......... 16-107 Section 19 Push Buttons and Operator Interface XB6E Flush, Spring Return Push Buttons ................................ 9-21 XB6E Pilot Lights.................................................................... 19-21 XB6E Illuminated Push Buttons, Spring Return...................... 19-22 XB6E Illuminated Push Buttons, Latching .............................. 19-22 XB6E Selector Switches......................................................... 19-23 XB6E Accessories ................................................................. 19-23 XB5R Plastic and XB4R Metal Wireless, Batteryless Push Buttons ................................................................................... 19-63 XB5R and XB4R Accessories. ............................................... 19-64 ZBRN1 and ZBRN2 Access Points ........................................ 19-65 XB7 Push Buttons .................................................................. 19-68 XB7 Illuminated Push Buttons with Projecting Push .............. 19-69 XB7 Pilot Lights ...................................................................... 19-69 XB7 Selector Switches and Key Switches.............................. 19-70 XB7 Mushroom Head Push Buttons....................................... 19-70 XB7 Legend Holders and Legends ........................................ 19-71 XB7 Accessories .................................................................... 19-71 Point of Purchase—PoP Products........................................ 19-114 XVU 60 mm Diameter Tower Lights Description................... 19-120 XVU Illuminated LED Units: IP 65 ........................................ 19-121 XVU Audible Units: IP 54...................................................... 19-121 XVU Body Units: IP 65 ......................................................... 19-121 XVU Accessories.................................................................. 19-121 XVGU Multi-color USB Tower Lights .................................... 19-122 Harmony eXLhoist Operator Control Stations. ..................... 19-125 Section 23 Relays and Timers Zelio™ RXG Interface Relays .................................................. 23-4 Zelio™ RUM Plug-In Relays .................................................. 23-11 Square D™ Universal Relays ................................................ 23-14 Zelio™ SSL Relays ................................................................ 23-33 Zelio™ SSM Relays ............................................................... 23-34 Zelio™ SSP Relays ................................................................ 23-37 Zelio™ RTC48 Temperature Controllers ................................ 23-44 Section 25 Machine Safety Products Safety Chain Solutions and Functions...................................... 25-3 Section 26 AC Drives and Soft Starters Altivar™ Process 630 ............................................................. 26-21 Section 27 Automation Products Magelis GTU Universal Panels................................................. 27-9 Magelis Simple Box PC .......................................................... 27-12 Magelis Rack PC .................................................................... 27-12 Magelis iDisplay Industrial Multi-Touch Monitor...................... 27-13 Section 29 Uninterruptible Power Supplies © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 10/30/2017


page 5

Table of Contents Section 1 Load Centers 1-2 S R E T N E C D A O L 1 1-3 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-7 1-8 1-9 1-10 EZ Selector - Selection Assistance QO™ Load Centers Indoor, 1Ø, Main Lugs Indoor, 1Ø, Main Circuit Breaker Indoor, 1Ø, Main Lugs and Main Breaker Rainproof, 1Ø, Main Lugs and Main Circuit Breaker 3Ø, Main Lugs and Main Circuit Breaker 1Ø, Backup Power Solutions 1Ø, Special Applications QO™ Miniature Circuit Breakers 1Ø, Value Packs and Riser Panels QO Plug-On Circuit Breakers Accessories 1-10 1-14 QO™ and Homeline™ Load Centers and Circuit Breakers 1-16 1-16 1-16 1-16 1-17 1-17 1-17 QO and Homeline Plug-On Neutral Load Centers with Qwik-Grip 1Ø3W—120/240 Vac—UL Listed QO Riser Panels Panelboard-style Covers for Riser Panels Load Center Accessories QO and Homeline Load Center Accessories QO Load Center Accessories QO and HOM Qwik-Grip Load Center Accessories Homeline Load Center Accessories Surge Protective Devices Homeline™ Load Centers Indoor, 1Ø, Main Lugs and Main Circuit Breaker Rainproof, 1Ø, Main Lugs and Main Circuit Breakers 1Ø, Field-Installed Mains Kits Homeline™ Circuit Breakers QO™ and Homeline™ Load Centers Indoor, Dimensions and Knockouts Rainproof, Dimensions, Knockouts and Bolt-on Hubs Combination Service Entrance Devices Rainproof, Meter Mains Rainproof, All-In-Ones, 100 to 225 A Maximum Rainproof, Meter Mains and All-In-Ones, 300–400 A Circuit Breakers for CSEDs Accessories and Hubs for CSEDs Dimensions RC/QC Solar Ready CSEDs Homeline Solar Ready PoN CSEDs Rainproof, Meter Mains and All-In-Ones, 125 to 225 A Maximum Enclosed Devices Servicepak™ Power Outlet Panels 1-17 1-17 1-18 1-18 1-19 1-19 1-19 1-20 1-20 1-21 1-24 1-24 1-26 1-26 1-26 1-30 1-31 1-32 1-33 1-34 1-35 1-36 1-36 1-37 1-39 1-1 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved QO Miniature Circuit BreakersQO Load CentersHomeline Circuit BreakersQO Circuit Breakers11/10/2017


page 6

1 L O A D C E N T E R S EZ Selector - Selection Assistance Load Center EZ Selector - Selection Assistance schneider-electric.us QO Load Center QO™ and Homeline™ Load Center EZ Selector - Selection Assistance EZ Selector Steps to select a load center. 1. Select product type: • Homeline™ 1 inch format (HOM) • QO™ 3/4 inch format with plug-on neutral (QO) (P) • QO™ 3/4 inch format (QO) 2. Select enclosure type: indoor or outdoor (RB = rainproof) 3. Select single phase (1) or three phase (3) 4. Select type of main: • Main circuit Breaker (M) • Main lugs (L) • Generator panel (GP) 5. Select main ampacity rating 6. Select pole spaces and max. number of 1-pole, single-phase circuits 7. Select cover style: • Surface (box mounted on surface) • Surface (box mounted on surface, hinged cover included) • Flush (box recessed, cover is flush to wall) 8. Value pack (VP) 9. Select ground bar option: • Ground bar factory installed (T) • Ground bar included, field installation (G) 10. Select special application: • Riser panel with gutter • Mfg housing, single phase 3-wire, convertible mains • Manufactured housing, single phase, 3-wire • Manufactured housing, single phase, 2-wire QO™ and Homeline™ Load Centers — Catalog Number Construction Additional Information • Search “Load Centers” from our technical FAQs page: www.schneider-electric.us/en/ • Refer to catalog 1100CT0501. faqs/home/ 1-2 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 7

Indoor, 1Ø, Main Lugs Class 736, 1130 / Refer to Catalog 1100CT0501 schneider-electric.us QO™ Load Centers 1Ø3W—120/240 Vac—UL Listed Main Lugs S R E T N E C D A O L QO120L125G QO816L100F or S without cover Table 1.1: Main Lugs (Accepts Only QO Plug-On Circuit Breakers) s Space- Max. 1P Circuits Mains Rat- ing Fixed Mains—Factory-Installed Main Lugs—10 kA Short Circuit Current Rating [3]  30 A  70 A Box and Interior QO2L30S [4] [5] Load Center Max. Tandem Circuit Breakers [1] Equipment Ground Bar Kit (Order Separately) Box No. [2] 1 125 A Convertible Mains—Factory-Installed Main Lugs—65 kA Short Circuit Current Rating QOM1 Main Frame Size—Convertible to Main Circuit Breaker—Cu Bus [3] [12] Cover Included—Without Door QO148L125GF/S [6] [10] PK7GTA [11] 12–2/0 14–2/0 100 A 125 A 150 A 200 A I N D O O R  2  2  6  6  8  8  6  8 4 12 12 16 16 20 20 24 32 20 24 30 12 24 30 30 40 40 42 42  2  4 12 12 16 16 12 16 8 12 24 16 24 20 24 24 32 30 24 30 12 36 30 40 40 60 52 42  0  2  6  6  8  8  6  8  4  0 12  0  8  0  4  0  0 10  0  0  0 12  0 10  0 20 10  0 Indoor Cover with Door (Order Separately) Flush Surface Cover Included—Without Door Cover Included—Without Door Cover Included—Without Door Cover Included—With Door Cover Included—Without Door Cover Included—With Door Cover Included—With Door Cover Included—With Door Main Wire Size AWG/kcmil Al Cu 12–10 12–3 14–10 14–4 8–1 QOC16UF QOC16UF QOC24UF QOC24UF QOC16US QOC16US QOC24US QOC24US 6–2/0 QOC20U100F QOC20U100F QOC20U100S QOC20U100S 6–2/0 6–2/0 6–1 6–1 QOC24UF QOC32UF QOC30UF QOC30UF QOC30UF QOC30UF QOC40UF QOC30UF QOC30UF QOC40UF QOC40UF QOC42UF QOC42UF QOC24US Use Flush QOC30US QOC30US QOC30US QOC30US QOC40US QOC30US QOC30US QOC40US QOC40US QOC42US QOC42US 6–2/0 6–250 6–250 PK3GTA1 PK4GTA PK7GTA PK7GTA PK7GTA PK7GTA PK7GTA PK9GTA [11] PK15GTA [11] PK12GTA [11] PK15GTA [11] PK15GTA [11] PK15GTA [11] PK15GTA [11] PK23GTA, LK100AN [11] PK23GTA, LK100AN [11] PK15GTA [11] PK23GTA, LK100AN [11] PK15GTA [11] PK23GTA, LK100AN [11] PK23GTA, LK100AN [11] PK23GTA, LK100AN [11] PK23GTA, LK100AN [11] (2) PK15GTA [11] (2) PK15GTA [11] QO24L70F/S [6] [7] QO612L100F/S [6] [8] QO612L100DF/S [6] [8] QO816L100F/S [6] [8] QO816L100DF/S [6] [8] QO612L100DFCU/SCU [6] [8] [9] QO816L100DFCU/SCU [6] [8] [9] QO112L125G QO11224L125G QO116L125G QO11624L125G QO120L125G QO12024L125G QO124L125G QO132L125G QO12030L150G QO124L150G QO130L150G QO112L200G QO12436L200TFT [13] QO130L200G QO13040L200G QO140L200G QO14060L200G QO14252L200G QO142L225G Convertible Mains—Factory-Installed Main Lugs—65 kA Short Circuit Current Rating —Convertible To Main Circuit Breaker—Cu Bus [3] [12] 225 A Fixed Mains—Factory-Installed Main Lugs—65 kA Short Circuit Current Rating [3] [12] 6–300 PK23GTA, LK100AN [11] PK27GTA [15] or PK15GTA6 400 A 30 42 30 42  0  0 QONQ30LS400 (Int) [14] MH50 (box) [16] QONQ42LS400 (Int) [14] MH50 (box) [16] NC50NQVF NC50NQVS NC50NQVF NC50NQVS (1) 1/0–750 or (2) 1/0–300 Above listings through 200 A mains rating meet Federal Specification W-P-115C as Type 1, Class 2. Maximum single pole branch circuits utilizing QO and/or QOT circuit breakers. See Table 1.57 Knockout Information, page 1-24 UL short circuit current rating depends on lowest interrupting rating of circuit breaker installed. Mains rated 25 A when Al wire is used. Order F for flush device or S for surface device. Use 10 AWG maximum size wire for GFI and AFI circuit breakers. 70 A Max. branch circuit breaker and 100 A max. back fed main circuit breaker. CU indicates copper bus. [1] [2] [3] [4] Will not accept QO-EPD or Qwik-Gard™ QO-GFI or QO-AFI circuit breakers. [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] Copper bus. [11] [12] UL Listed 5000 A short circuit current rating for corner grounded Delta systems. Use QO-H circuit breakers only. [13] Supplied with feed-thru lugs. [14] [15] PK27GTA includes a 6–2/0 AWG Al/Cu lug. [16] PE1A Discount Schedule. Interior only, order box separately. Factory-included. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 1 2 4 4 4 4 4 21 6 6 7 7 6 6 7 8 9 9 9 9 10 9 9 10 10 11 11 15 15 1-3 11/10/2017


page 8

1 L O A D C E N T E R S QO™ Load Centers QOM1 Frame Size 50–125 Amperes QOM2 Frame Size 100–225 Amperes Indoor, 1Ø, Main Circuit Breaker Class 1130 / Refer to Catalog 1100CT0501 1Ø, Field-Installed Main Circuit Breaker Kits Table 1.2: QOM1 Frame Size—Use with Convertible Main Load Centers Only schneider-electric.us Main Circuit Breaker Rating [17] Convertible Load Center Mains Rating 50 A 60 A 70 A 80 A 90 A 100 A 110 A 125 A 100–125 100–125 100–125 100–125 100–125 100–125 125 125 Lug Wire Size [19] AWG/ kcmil 12–2/0 Al or Cu 22 k AIR [18] Main Circuit Breaker QOM50VH QOM60VH QOM70VH QOM80VH QOM90VH QOM100VH QOM110VH QOM125VH Table 1.3: QOM2 Frame Size—Use with Convertible Main Load Centers Only Main Circuit Breaker Rating [17] 100 A 125 A 150 A 175 A 200 A 225 A Convertible Load Center Mains Rating 150–225 150–225 150–225 200–225 200–225 225 22 k AIR [18] Main Circuit Breaker [20] Lug Wire Size [19] AWG/kcmil QOM2100VH QOM2125VH QOM2150VH QOM2175VH QOM2200VH QOM2225VH 4–300 Al or Cu Table 1.4: Main Circuit Breaker (Accepts Only QO Plug-On Circuit Breakers.) 1Ø3W—120/240 Vac—UL Listed Main Circuit Breaker Mains Rating Spaces Max. Single Pole Circuits [21] Max. Tandem Circuit Breakers Load Center Box and Interior Indoor Cover with Door (Order Separately) Flush Surface Main Wire Size AWG/kcmil Al or Cu Convertible Mains—Factory-installed Main Circuit Breaker, 22 kA Short Circuit Current Rating, Convertible to Main Lugs (see below) or Lower Amperage Main Circuit Breaker. (See1-5, page 1-3), [18] QOM1 Main Circuit Breaker Frame Size—Copper Bus Equipment Ground Bar Kit (Order Separately) 6–1 6–2/0 6–2/0 4–250 4–250 4–300 PK9GTA PK12GTA PK15GTA PK15GTA PK18GTA PK15GTA PK18GTA PK18GTA PK15GTA PK18GTA PK18GTA PK23GTA PK15GTA PK23GTA and LK100AN[23] PK18GTA PK23GTA PK23GTA PK23GTA PK23GTA PK23GTA PK23GTA PK23GTA Box No. See 1–17, page 1-24  5  6  6  7 8  7 8  9  9  9 10  9  9 10  9  9 10 10 11 11 11 11 16 16 QO112M100 QO116M100 QO120M100 QO124M100 QO132M100 QO124M125 QO132M125 QOC12UF QOC20U100F QOC20U100F QOC24UF QOC32UF QOC24UF QOC32UF QOC12US QOC20U100S QOC20U100S QOC24US Use Flush QOC24US Use Flush Convertible Mains —Factory-Installed Main Circuit Breaker, 22 kA Short Circuit Current Rating Convertible to Main Lugs (see below) or Lower Amperage Main Circuit Breaker (See page 1–5, page 1-3), [18] QOM2 Main Circuit Breaker Frame Size—Copper Bus 20 24 30 32 20 24 24 30 24 30 32 40 24 36 10  0  0  0 20  0 12 QO12030M150 QO124M150 QO130M150 QO132M150 QO12040M200 QO124M200 QO12436M200TFT[22] QOC30UF QOC30UF QOC30UF QOC40UF QOC30UF QOC30UF QOC40UF QOC30US QOC30US QOC30US QOC40US QOC30US QOC30US QOC40US 100 A 125 A I N D O O R 150 A 200 A QO140M200 225 A 12 16 20 24 32 24 32 30 30 40 40 42 42 40 42 12 16 20 24 32 24 32 30 40 40 60 42 52 40 42  0  0  0  0 0  0 0  0 10  0 20  0 10  0  0 QO130M200 QO13040M200 QO140M200 QO14060M200 QO142M200 QO14252M200 QO140M225 QO142M225 QOC30UF QOC30UF QOC40UF QOC40UF QOC42UF QOC42UF QOC42UF QOC42UF QOC30US QOC30US QOC40US QOC40US QOC42US QOC42US QOC42US QOC42US Fixed Mains—Factory-installed LAL Main Circuit Breaker, 42 kA Short Circuit Current Rating [24] 300 A 400 A 42 42 42 42  0  0 QONQ42MS300 (int)[25] MH62 (box)[27] QONQ42MS400 (int)[25] MH62 (box)[27] NC62NQVF NC62NQVS NC62NQVF NC62NQVS (1) 4–500 or (2) 4–3/0 (1) 4–500 or (2) 4–250 Above listings through 200 A mains rating meet Federal Specification W-P-115c as Type 1, Class 2. PK27GTA [26] or PK15GTA6 [17] Do not exceed the load center mains rating. 22 k AIR main circuit breaker UL Listed for use ahead of QO, QOT and QO-PL 10 k AIR branch circuit breakers to permit their application on systems with up to 22 kA available fault current. [18] [19] Wire range listed for QOM circuit breaker kits is the wire range of that circuit breaker. To find out maximum wire size permitted in a particular load center per UL, see pages 1-5 through 1-11 under Main Wire Size. [20] Add suffix 1021 for 120, 208 or 240 Vac shunt trip. [21] Maximum single pole branch circuits utilizing QO and/or QOT circuit breakers. [22] Supplied with feed-thru lugs. [23] [24] UL short circuit current rating depends on lowest interrupting rating of circuit breakers installed. Also, UL Listed 5000 A short circuit current for corner grounded Delta systems. Use QO-H Factory included. circuit breakers only. Interior only, order box separately. [25] [26] PK27GTA includes a 6–2/0 Al/Cu lug. [27] PE1A Discount Schedule. 1-4 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 9

Indoor, 1Ø, Main Lugs and Main Breaker Class 736, 1130 / Refer to Catalog 1100CT0501 QO™ Load Centers schneider-electric.us 1Ø, Field-Installed Main Lugs Kits Table 1.5: Use with Convertible Main Load Centers Only Main Lugs Rating [28] 125 A 225 A Use on Convertible Load Center with Mains Rating 100–125 A 150–225 A Cat. No. QOL125 [30] QOL225 [30] Lug Wire Size [29] AWG/kcmil Al or Cu 6–2/0 6–300 QOL125 QOL225 Indoor, 1Ø, Main Lugs and Main Breaker QO Plug-on Neutral Load Centers and CAFI Breakers connect are engineered for a quick Plug-on Neutral connection on every unit. S R E T N E C D A O L Table 1.6: QO Plug-on Neutral CAFI Load Center (accepts QO Circuit Breakers only) Mains Rating Spaces Max. 1P Circuits Max. Tandem Breakers Load Center Box and Interior Indoor Cover with Door (Order Separately) Flush Surface Main Wire AWG/kcmil Size Al/Cu Equipment Ground Bar Kit [31] (Order Separately) QOC24US 6–2/0 PK15GTA Box No. [32] 1 7 9 11 12 7 9 11 12 24 4R 6R 8R 4R 6R 6R 8R 6–250 6–300 PK23GTA, LK100AN (2) PK15GTA PK23GTA, LK100AN 6–2/0 PK15GTA 4–250 PK18GTA PK23GTA PK23GTA PK23GTA 6–2/0 PK15GTA 6–250 6–300 PK23GTA, LK100AN (2) PK15GTA 6–2/0 PK15GTA 4–250 PK18GTA PK18GTA PK23GTA I N D O O R O U T D O O R QO154M200P 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Convertible Mains — Factory-Installed Main Lugs — 65 kA Short Circuit Current Rating — Copper Bus QOM1 Main Frame Size, Convertible to Main Circuit Breaker 125 A Convertible Mains — Factory-Installed Main Lugs — 65 kA Short Circuit Current Rating — Copper Bus QOM2 Main Frame Size, Convertible to Main Circuit Breaker 200 A QO124L125PG QOC24UF 24 24 0 QO130L200PG QO142L225PG QO154L225PG QOC30UF QOC42UF QOC54UF QOC30US QOC42US — Convertible Mains — Factory-Installed Main Circuit Breaker — 22 kA Short Circuit Current Rating — Copper Bus QOM1 Main Circuit Breaker Frame Size, Convertible to Main Lugs or Lower Amperage Main Circuit Breaker 100 A Convertible Mains — Factory-Installed Main Circuit Breaker — 22 kA Short Circuit Current Rating — Copper Bus QOM2 Main Circuit Breaker Frame Size, Convertible to Main Lugs or Lower Amperage Main Circuit Breaker QO124M100P QOC24UF 24 24 0 QOC24US 225 A 200 A 30 42 54 30 42 54 60 30 42 54 30 42 54 60 QO130M200P QO142M200P QO154M200P QO160M200PC [33] QOC30UF QOC42UF QOC54UF — QOC30US QOC42US — — — 24 24 30 42 30 42 QO124L125PGRB Convertible Mains — Factory-Installed Main Lugs — 65 kA Short Circuit Current Rating — Cu Bus QOM1 Main Circuit Breaker Frame Size, Convertible to Main Circuit Breaker — Equipment Ground Bar Included 125 A — Convertible Mains — Factory-Installed Main Lugs — 65 kA Short Circuit Current Rating — Cu Bus QOM2 Main Circuit Breaker Frame Size, Convertible to Main Circuit Breaker — Equipment Ground Bar Included 200 A — 225 A — Convertible Mains — Factory-Installed Main Circuit Breaker — 22 kA Short Circuit Current Rating — Copper Bus Convertible to Main Lugs (see below) or Lower Amperage Main Circuit Breaker (See Indoor, 1Ø, Main Lugs, page 1-3), QOM1 Main Circuit Breaker Frame Size 100 A — Convertible Mains — Factory-Installed Main Circuit Breaker — 22 kA Short Circuit Current Rating — Copper Bus Convertible to Main Lugs (see below) or Lower Amperage Main Circuit Breaker (See Indoor, 1Ø, Main Lugs, page 1-3), QOM2 Main Circuit Breaker Frame Size 150 A 200 A QO130L200PGRB QO142L225PGRB QO124M100PRB — — 0 0 24 24 — QO130M150PRB QO130M200PRB QO142M200PRB 0 0 0 0 30 30 42 30 30 42 — — — — — — [28] Do not exceed the load center mains rating. [29] Wire range listed for QOL lug kits is the wire range of that lug. To find out maximum wire size permitted in a particular load center per UL, see Tables in QO™ Load Centers, page 1-7 and QO™ and Homeline™ Load Centers and Circuit Breakers, page 1-13 under main wire size. If main circuit breaker knockout has been removed from the load center’s trim, order appropriate filler plate from Table 1.51, page 1-20 [30] [31] Any catalog number containing the suffix ‘G”, ground bar factory is included. In addition to LK100AN where listed. [32] See Indoor Knockout Information and Enclosure Dimensions, page 1-24 [33] Flush cover without a door is included. Door kit available separately, order QOCDK60. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 1-5 11/10/2017


page 10

QO™ Load Centers Rainproof, 1Ø, Main Lugs and Main Circuit Breaker Class 1130 / Refer to Catalog 1100CT0501 schneider-electric.us Table 1.7: Main Lugs (Accepts Only QO Plug-On Circuit Breakers.) 1Ø3W—120/240 Vac—UL Listed Main Lugs and Main Circuit Breakers 1 L O A D C E N T E R S R A I N P R O O F R A I N P R O O F  2  0  2  6  6  8  6  8 4  0 12  8  0 12 16 20 24 30 30 40 30 40 40 60 42 52 42 Mains Rating Spaces Max. Single Pole Circuits [34] Max. Tandem Circuit Breakers Non-Metallic Enclosure Fixed Mains—Factory-installed Main Lugs—10 kA Short Circuit Current Rating Metallic Enclosure Fixed Mains—Factory-installed Main Lugs—10 kA Short Circuit Current Rating Load Center Box and Interior QO24L60NRNM  60 A  40 A  70 A 100 A 125 A 125 A  2  2  2  6  6  8  6  8 4 12 12 16 24  4  2  4 12 12 16 12 16 8 12 24 24 24 QO2L40RB [36] QO24L70RB [36] QO612L100RB[37] QO612L100TRB[37] QO816L100RB [37] QO612L100RBCU[37] [38] QO816L100RBCU[37] [38] QO148L125GRB [38] QO112L125GRB QO11224L125GRB QO11624L125GRB QO124L125GRB Convertible Mains—Factory-installed Main Lugs—65 kA Short Circuit Current[39][40][41] QOM1 Main Frame Size—Convertible to Main Circuit Breaker—Copper Bus Convertible Mains—Factory-installed Main Lugs—65 kA Short Circuit Current[39][40][41] QOM2 Main Frame Size—Convertible to Main Circuit Breaker—Copper Bus 150 A 200 A 225 A 30 12 30 30 40 40 42 42 30 12 30 40 40 60 52 42  0  0  0 10  0 20 10  0 QO130L150GRB QO112L200GRB QO130L200GRB QO13040L200GRB QO140L200GRB QO14060L200GRB QO14252L200GRB QO142L225GRB Table 1.8: Main Circuit Breaker (Accepts Only QO Plug-On Circuit Breakers.) Mains Rating Spaces Max. Single Pole Circuits [34] Max. Tandem Circuit Breakers Convertible Mains —Factory-installed Main Circuit Breaker, 22 kA Short Circuit Current Rating Convertible to Main Lugs (see 1Ø3W—120/240 Vac—UL Listed Main Circuit Breaker, page 1-4) or Lower Amperage Main Circuit Breaker (see 1Ø3W—120/240 Vac—UL Listed Main Lugs, page 1-3)[41][42] QOM1 Main Circuit Breaker Frame Size—Copper Bus 100 A 125 A 150 A 200 A 225 A 12 16 20 24 20 30 20 30 30 40 40 42 42 42  0  0  0  0 10  0 20  0 10  0 20 0 10  0 Main Wire Size AWG/kcmil Al Cu Equipment Ground Bar Kit (Order Separately) 14–4 14–4 Factory-installed 12–6 12–3 14–6 14–4 8–1 12–2/0 14–2/0 6–2/0 4–250 4–250 4–300 PK3GTA1 PK4GTA PK7GTA Factory-installed PK7GTA PK7GTA PK7GTA PK7GTA Factory-included PK9GTA Factory-included PK15GTA Factory-included PK15GTA Factory-included PK15GTA Factory-included PK23GTA, LK100AN Factory-included PK9GTA Factory-included PK23GTA, LK100AN Factory-included PK23GTA, LK100AN Factory-included PK23GTA, LK100AN Factory-included (2) PK15GTA Factory-included (2) PK15GTA Factory-included PK23GTA, LK100AN Factory-included Load Center Box and Interior QO112M100RB QO116M100RB QO120M100RB QO124M125RB QO12030M150RB QO130M150RB QO12040M200RB QO130M200RB QO13040M200GRB QO140M200RB QO14060M200RB QO142M200RB QO14252M200RB QO142M225RB Main Wire Size AWG/kcmil Al or Cu 6–2/0 6–2/0 4–250 4–250 4–300 Equipment Ground Bar Kit (Order Separately) PK9GTA PK12GTA PK15GTA PK15GTA PK18GTA PK18GTA PK23GTA PK18GTA PK23GTA PK23GTA PK15GTA PK23GTA PK15GTA PK23GTA Box No. [35]  1NM  1R  1R  2R  2R  2R  2R  2R 15R 3R 3R 4R 4R 6R 5R 6R 6R 7R 7R 8R 8R Box No. [35] 3R 4R 4R 4R 5R 6R 5R 6R 6R 7R 7R 8R 8R 8R Convertible Mains —Factory-installed Main Circuit Breaker, 22 kA Short Circuit Current Rating Convertible to Main Lugs (see 1Ø3W—120/240 Vac—UL Listed Main Circuit Breaker, page 1-4) or Lower Amperage Main Circuit Breaker (see 1Ø3W—120/240 Vac—UL Listed Main Lugs, page 1-3) [41][42] QOM2 Main Circuit Breaker Frame Size—Copper Bus Convertible Mains—Factory-installed Main Circuit Breaker, 22 kA Short Circuit Current Rating Convertible to Main Lugs (see 1Ø3W—120/240 Vac—UL Listed Main Circuit Breaker, page 1-4) or Lower Amperage Main Circuit Breaker (see 1Ø3W—120/240 Vac—UL Listed Main Lugs, page 1-3) [41][42] QOM1 or QOM2 Main Circuit Breaker Frame Size—Copper Bus  6  8  8 QO1612M125FTRB[43] QO1816M150FTRB[43] QO1816M200FTRB [43] PK12GTA PK15GTA-L PK15GTA-L 4–2/0 4–250 4–250 125 A 150 A 200 A 3R 6R 6R 12 16 16 6 8 8 Above listings through 200 A mains rating meet Federal Specification W-P-115c as Type 1, Class 2. 70 A Max. branch circuit breaker and 70 A max. back fed main circuit breaker. [34] Maximum single pole branch circuits utilizing QO and/or QOT circuit breakers. [35] See Table 1.59 Enclosure Dimensions, page 1-26Indoor Knockout Information and Enclosure Dimensions, page 1-24 [36] Use 10 AWG maximum size wire for GFI and AFI circuit breakers. [37] [38] Copper bus. [39] UL short circuit current rating depends on lowest interrupting rating of circuit breaker installed. [40] UL Listed 5000 A short circuit current rating for corner grounded Delta systems. Use QO-H circuit breakers only. [41] Side hinge door device; allow 1-1/4 in. on left side for door to open. [42] 22 k AIR main circuit breaker UL Listed for use ahead of QO, QOT, QO-GFI, QO-AFI, QO-EPD and QOPL 10 k AIR branch circuit breakers to permit their application on systems up to 22 kA available fault current. [43] QO1612M125FTRB provided with QOM1 frame main circuit breaker. QO1816M150FTRB and QO1816M200FTRB provided with QOM2 frame main circuit breaker. 1-6 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 11

3Ø, Main Lugs and Main Circuit Breaker Class 1130 / Refer to Catalog 1100CT0501 QO™ Load Centers schneider-electric.us Table 1.9: Main Lugs and Main Breakers (Accepts Only QO Plug-On Circuit Breakers) 3Ø4W—208Y/120 Vac, 3Ø4W—240/120 Vac Delta and 3Ø3W—240 Vac Delta—UL Listed Mains Rating Max. Number of 1P QO circuit breakers Load Center Box and Interior Cat. No. Indoor Cover with Door (Order Separately) Flush Surface Fixed Mains—Factory-installed Main Lugs—Copper Bus—65 kA Short Circuit Current Rating [44] Cover Included With Load Center (No Door) Convertible Mains—Factory-installed QDL Main Circuit Breaker—Copper Bus—25 kA Short Circuit Current Rating [48] QOC30UF QOC30US Fixed Mains—Factory-installed Main Lugs—Copper Bus—65 kA Short Circuit Current Rating [44] [51] Main Wire Size AWG/kcmil Al — 6–2/0 6–250 6–300 4–2/0 4–300 4–300 4–300 4–300 — 6–2/0 6–250 6–300 4–2/0 4–300 4–300 4–300 4–300 Cu 10–6 6–2/0 6–250 6–300 4–2/0 4–300 4–300 4–300 4–300 10–6 6–2/0 6–250 6–300 4–2/0 4–300 4–300 4–300 4–300 S R E T N E C D A O L 1 Equipment Ground Bar Kit (Order Separately) Box No. Pages 1-17, See 1–18 PK4GTA Factory-incl. [46] Factory-incl. [46] Factory-incl. [46] Factory-incl. [47] Factory-incl. [47] Factory-incl. [47] PK15GTA PK18GTA PK18GTA PK23GTA PK18GTA PK23GTA PK23GTA PK4GTA Factory Incl. [46] Factory Incl. [46] Factory Incl. [47] Factory Incl. [47] Factory Incl. [47] PK15GTA PK18GTA PK18GTA PK18GTA PK23GTA PK23GTA 13 6  7  7  9  9 11  9 12 12 12 12 12 12 10R  3R  4R  6R  6R  8R  6R 14R 14R 14R 14R 14R 100 k AIR [52] QO403L60NF/S QO312L125G [45] QO320L125G [45] QO324L125G [45] QO318L200G [45] QO330L200G [45] QO342L225G [45] QO327M100 [49] QO330MQ125[50] [45] QO330MQ150[50] [45] QO342MQ150[50] [45] QO330MQ200[50] [45] QO342MQ200[50] [45] QO342MQ225[50] [45] QO403L60NRB QO312L125GRB QO320L125GRB QO318L200GRB QO330L200GRB QO342L225GRB QOC16UF QOC24UF QOC24UF QOC30UF QOC30UF QOC42UF QOC342MQF QOC342MQF QOC342MQF QOC342MQF QOC342MQF QOC342MQF QOC16US QOC24US QOC24US QOC30US QOC30US QOC42US QOC342MQS QOC342MQS QOC342MQS QOC342MQS QOC342MQS QOC342MQS Cover Included  60 A 125 A 200 A 225 A 100 A 125 A 150 A 200 A 225 A 60 A 125 A 200 A 225 A 100 A 125 A 150 A 200 A 225 A I N D O O R R A I N P R O O F  3 12 20 24 18 30 42 27 30 30 42 30 42 42 3 12 20 18 30 42 27 30 30 30 42 42 Convertible Mains—Factory-installed QDL Main Circuit Breaker—Copper Bus—25 kA Short Circuit Current Rating [48] [51] QO327M100RB [49] QO330MQ125RB [50] QO330MQ150RB [50] QO330MQ200RB[50] QO342MQ200RB [50] QO342MQ225RB [50] Cover Included Above listings through 200 A mains rating meet Federal Specification W-P-115C as Type 1, Class 2. Table 1.10: 3Ø, Main Circuit Breakers Amperage 25 k AIR 65 k AIR Field-installed alternate main circuit breakers for QO 3Ø main circuit breaker load centers rated 70–225 A. Do not exceed the load center main rating. 70 A 80 A  90 A 100 A 110 A 125 A 150 A 175 A 200 A 225 A QDL32070 QDL32080 QDL32090 QDL32100 QDL32110 QDL32125 QDL32150 QDL32175 QDL32200 QDL32225 QGL32070 QGL32080 QGL32090 QGL32100 QGL32110 QGL32125 QGL32150 QGL32175 QGL32200 QGL32225 QJL32070 QJL32080 QJL32090 QJL32100 QJL32110 QJL32125 QJL32150 QJL32175 QJL32200 QJL32225 Table 1.11: 3Ø, Main Lugs Kits Main Lugs Amperage Rating Cat. No. Field-installed main lugs for convertible 3Ø main circuit breaker load centers 125 A 225 A QOL3125 QOL3225 Lug Wire Size AWG/kcmil 6–2/0 Cu/Al 6–300 Cu/Al QO342MQ200 QO312L125G [44] UL short circuit current rating depends on lowest interrupting rating of circuit breaker installed. [45] For Certification to IEC 60439-1 contact the local Square D sales office; otherwise panels are NOT CE marked. (For use on 415Y/240 Vac 3-phase 4-wire, 3,000 Short Circuit Current Rating when QOXD...branch circuit breakers are used and 10,000 Short Circuit Current Rating when QO...VS branch circuit breakers are used). [46] PK15GTA. [47] PK23GTA and LK100AN. [48] 25 kA short circuit current rating SSCR maximum with Square D Type QDL main circuit breaker, or 22 kA SCCR maximum with back-fed Type QO-VH main circuit breaker, feeding QO 10 k AIR branch circuit breakers. Includes factory-installed back fed QO3100VH main circuit breaker. 65 kA Short Circuit Current Rating maximum with field-installed Square D type QGL 65 k AIR minimum main circuit breaker feeding QO and Q1 10 k AIR minimum branch circuit breakers. [49] [50] [51] Side hinge door device allow 1-1/4 in. on left side for door to open. [52] When these 3P circuit breakers are used as the main circuit breaker of a 3Ø load center, the maximum AIR rating is 65 kA at 240 Vac and 100 kA at 208 Vac. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 1-7 11/10/2017


page 12

1 L O A D C E N T E R S QO™ Load Centers 1Ø, Backup Power Solutions Class 1130 / Refer to Catalog 1100CT0501 schneider-electric.us Table 1.12: Backup Power Solutions (Accept Only QO Plug-On Circuit Breakers.) 1Ø3W—120/240 Vac—UL Listed Backup Power Solutions Mains Rating (A) Spac- es Max. Single Circuits [53] Pole Max. Tandem Circuit Breakers Load Center Box, Interior and Cover Equipment Grounding Bar Kit (Order Separately) I N D O O R R A I N P R O O F I N D O O R 3 R Generator Panels—Manual Transfer for Sub-Feed Applications NEMA 1 (Indoor) Factory-Installed Main Circuit Breakers with Mechanical Interlock—10 kA Short Circuit Current Rating 30 60 4 4 8 8 4 4 QO48M30DSGP QO48M60DSGP PK7GTA Generator Panels—Manual Transfer with Generator Power Inlet Plug for Sub-Feed Applications NEMA 3R (Outdoor) Factory-Installed Main Circuit Breakers with Mechanical Interlock—10 kA Short Circuit Current Rating 100 4 4 4 8 8 8 4 4 4 QO1DM10020TRBR QO1DM10030TRBR QO1DM10050TRBR Factory-Installed Generator Panel—Automatic Transfer Switch (Contact your local Square D Field Sales office for more information.) [55] Factory- or Field-Installed Main Circuit Breaker—22 kA Short Circuit Current Rating 150 200 225 150 200 38 38 38 38 14 14 14 42 42 42 42 28 28 28 42 42 42 42 28 28 28 QO13842MX150 QO13842MX200 QO13842MX225 QO13842UX225 [56] QOC38MXUF (Cover) QO11428MX150FTRB [57] [58] QO11428MX200FTRB [57] [58] QO11428UX200FTRB [56] [57] [58] PK23GTA PK23GTA PK23GTA — PK23GTA PK23GTA PK23GTA Table 1.13: QO Load Center Manual Power Transfer Accessories Description Manual Transfer Equipment Kit Generator Circuit Breaker Interlock Kit For interlocking the handles of two 2P or one 2P and one 1P QO and Q1 circuit breakers mounted side-by-side so that only one circuit breaker can be “ON’’ at a time. QO2DTI mechanical interlock attachment with retaining kits for securing two adjacent back-fed circuit breakers in dual power supply applications. Can be used with (2) 2P or (1) 2P and (1) 1P QO circuit breakers in QO816L100 load centers. Secures two 2P circuit breakers to right side of interior when used as back-fed mains, a QO2DTI Kit included for back-up power supply applications. For 1Ø 100–125 ampere convertible main load centers. Series S01 and S02. Secures two 2P circuit breakers to right side of interior when used as back-fed mains, a QO2DTI Kit included for back-up power supply applications. For 1Ø 150–225 ampere convertible main load centers. Series S01 and S02. Secures two 2P circuit breakers to left side of interior when used as back-fed mains, a QO2DTI Kit included for back-up power supply applications. For 1Ø 100–125 ampere convertible main load centers. Series S01 and S02. For use on “G” and “S” Series NEMA 1 and “G”, “S1” and “S2” Series NEMA 3R load centers. Interlocks a QOM1 2P main circuit breaker of a load center (100–125 A) with a QO 2P (15–125 A) branch circuit breaker. Includes a retaining kit. For use on “G” and “S” Series NEMA 1 and “G” and “S1” Series NEMA 3R load centers. Interlocks a QOM2 2P main circuit breaker of a load center (150–225 A) with a QO 2P (15–125 A) branch circuit breaker. Includes a retaining kit. For use on “S2” Series NEMA 3R load centers. Interlocks a QOM2 2P main circuit breaker of a load center (150–225 A) with a QO 2P (15–125 A) branch circuit breaker. Includes a retaining kit. Main Wire Size AWG/kcmil Cu 14–8 8–2 8–2 4–250 4–250 4–250 4–250 4–250 4–250 4–250 Al 14–8 8–2 — — — 4–250 4–250 4–250 4–250 4–250 4–250 4–250 Cat. No. QO2DTI QO2DTIM PK4DTIM4LA PK4DTIM4HA PK4DTIM4LAL QOCRBGK1C QOCGK2C QORBGK2C Box No. [54] 4 4 17R 17R 17R 12 12 12 12 7R 7R 7R Schedule DE2E DE2E DE3A DE3A DE3A DE3A DE3A DE3A [53] Maximum single pole branch circuits utilizing QO and/or QOT circuit breakers. [54] See Indoor Knockout Information and Enclosure Dimensions, page 1-24 orRainproof, Dimensions, Knockouts and Bolt-on Hubs, page 1-26 [55] One main circuit breaker is included with panel. NEMA 1 indoor device requires cover ordered separately. Alternate source main circuit breaker (QO 125 A max.) ordered separately. Automatic Transfer Switch and Generator for secondary power source are ordered through a Kohler authorized dealer or contractor. [56] Universal mains – No factory-installed main circuit breaker or main lugs. QOM2 frame size, field-install 22 k AIR. Main circuit breaker or main lugs (see Table 1.10 3Ø, Main Circuit Breakers, page 1-7 and Table 1.11 3Ø, Main Lugs Kits, page 1-7. [57] Supplied with feed-thru lugs. [58] Device is rated NEMA 3R and can be used for indoor or outdoor applications. 1-8 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 13

1Ø, Special Applications Class 1130 / Refer to Catalog 1100CT0501 schneider-electric.us QO™ Load Centers Table 1.14: QO Special Application (Accepts Only QO Plug-On Circuit Breakers.) 1Ø2W—120Vac—1Ø3W—120/240 Vac—UL Listed Mains Rating Circuit Current Short Rating Spaces Max. 1P Circuits [59] Max. Tandem Circuit Breakers Manufactured Housing: 1Ø2W 120 Vac—Main Lugs Only—CSA Certified 1Ø2W 120 Vac—Main Circuit Breaker—CSA Certified 1Ø3W 120/240 Vac—Main Lugs Only—CSA Certified  30 A[62]  50 A  30 A 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA  70 A 100 A 10 kA 10 kA 2 4 5 0 2 2 2 2 3 2 6 6 8 8  12  12  20 30 30 12 12 16 20 32 20 30 20 30 30 40 4 12 12 16 16  12  24  20 30 40 12 20 16 20 32 30 30 40 30 40 40 2 6 6 8 8 0 12 0 0 10 0 8 0 0 0 10 0 20 0 10 0 Load Center [60] Box, Interior, and Cover QO2L30TTS[63] QO24L50TTS [64] Equipment Ground Bar Kit (Order Separately) Main Wire Size AWG/kcmil Al Cu Factory-installed 12–10 — 14–10 14–6 QO35FM30TTF/S Factory-installed [65] QO24L70TS [64] QO612L100TF/S [66] QO612L100DTF/S [66] QO816L100TF/S [66] QO816L100DTF/S [66] Factory Installed QO112L125GC QO11224L125GC QO120L125GC PK12GTA Incl. PK15GTA Incl. PK15GTA Incl. QO130L150TC QO13040L200GC PK23GTA, LK100AN Installed PK23GTA, LK100AN Incl. QO112M100C QO11220M100C QO116M100C QO120M100C QO132M125C QO12030M150C QO130M150C QO12040M200C QO130M200C QO13040M200C QO140M200C PK9GTA PK15GTA PK12GTA PK15GTA PK18GTA PK18GTA PK18GTA PK23GTA PK18GTA PK23GTA PK23GTA 12–3 14–4 6–2/0 6–1 4–1 6–2/0 6–2/0 6–250 6–250 4–1/0 4–1/0 4–1/0 4–1/0 6–2/0 4–250 4–250 4–250 4–250 4–250 4–250 S R E T N E C D A O L 1 Box No. [61] 1 2 3 2 4 4 4 4 6 6 6 9 9 5 5 6 6 8 9 9 9 9 9 10 Load Center with Cover: 1Ø3W 120/240 Vac—UL Listed Complete QO Load Center—Box, Interior and Combination Cover in One Package Convertible Mains—Factory-Installed Main Lugs [67]—QOM1 Main Frame Size—Convertible to Main Circuit Breaker (See page 1-4)—Copper Bus Convertible Mains—Factory-Installed Main Lugs [67]—QOM2 Main Frame Size—Convertible to Main Circuit Breaker (See page 1-4)—Copper Bus Convertible Mains—Factory-Installed Main Circuit Breaker— QOM1 Main Frame Size—Convertible to Main Lugs (See page 1-5) or Lower Amperage Main Circuit Breaker (See page 1-4)—Copper Bus [68] Convertible Mains—Factory-Installed Main Circuit Breaker— QOM2 Main Frame Size—Convertible to Main Lugs (Seepage 1-5) or Lower Amperage Main Circuit Breaker (See page 1-4)—Copper Bus [68] I N D O O R 125 A 150 A 200 A 100 A 125 A 150 A 200 A 65 kA 65 kA 65 kA 65 kA 65 kA 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA Above listings through 200 A mains rating meet Federal Specification W-P-115c as Type 1, Class 2. Table 1.15: Service Upgrade Load Centers: 1Ø3W 120/240Vac—UL Listed Load Center with Removable End Walls Convertible Mains—Factory-Installed Main Breaker—22KA QOM2 Main Frame Size—Convertible to Main Lugs or Lower Amperage Main Circuit Breaker (See page 1-8) [68] I N D O O R Mains Rating 200 A Spaces 30 40 Max. 1P Circuits [59] 60 40 Table 1.16: Auxiliary Gutter Max. Tandem Circuit Breakers Load Center Box and Interior Extra Long Cover with Door (Order Separately) Flush Surface 30 0 HOM3060M200PCEP [69] QO140M200EP[70] HOMC30UFL QOC40UFL — — Cat. No. Cover Conduit Riser Size Width UL Listed for use with standard 1Ø and 3Ø load centers for riser applications [71]. For auxiliary gutter-load center compatibility, see catalog number 1100CT0501 SDAG26 Flush 1-3/4, 2, 2-1/2 or [72]3 13.50 26.12 Equipment Ground Bar Kit (Order Separately) PK23GTA PK23GTA Main Wire Size AWG / kcmil Al Cu 4-250 Height Box No. [61] 10 10 Depth 3.75 Table 1.17: Tap Kits 120/240 Vac—UL Listed for use with Auxiliary Gutter SDAG26 Cat. N0. SDGT30020 SDGT300300 SDGT300C10C SDGT300C300C QOGL20Grounding Terminals Use with Auxiliary Gutter Cat. No. SDAG26 SDAG26 SDAG26 SDAG26 SDAG26 Riser Wire Lug Type Mechanical (Included) Mechanical (Included) Anderson VCEL030516H1 (Not included) Anderson VCEL030516H1 (Not included) Al/Cu Wire Size (2) 6 AWG–300 kcmil (2) 6 AWG–300 kcmil (2) 4 AWG–300 kcmil (2) 4 AWG–300 kcmil Tap Off Wire Lug Type Mechanical (Included) Mechanical (Included) Anderson VCEL02114S1 (Not Included) Anderson VCEL030516H1 (Not included) Al/Cu Wire Size (1) 6–2/0 AWG (1) 6 AWG–300 kcmil (1) 8–1/0 AWG (1) 4 AWG–300 kcmil Mechanical (Included) (2) 6–2/0 AWG — — [59] Maximum single pole branch circuits utilizing QO and/or QOT circuit breakers. [60] Order F for flush device or S for surface device. [61] See Table 1.57 Knockout Information, page 1-24 [62] Mains rating 25 A when Al wire is used. [63] Will not accept Qwik-Gard™ QO-GFI or QO-AFI circuit breaker. [64] Use 10 AWG maximum size wire for GFI and AFI circuit breakers. [65] Main circuit breaker is a field-installed standard QO single pole circuit breaker. Order separately from page 1-2, page 1-10. [66] [67] UL Listed 5000 A short circuit current rating for corner grounded Delta systems. Use QO-H circuit breakers only. [68] [69] Ships with standard length cover. [70] Copper Bus, order cover separately QOC40UF/S or QOC40UFL. [71] One tap kit required for each riser wire. [72] When used with B300 bolt-on hubs. 70 A max. branch circuit breaker and 70 A max. back fed main circuit breaker. 22 k AIR main circuit breaker UL Listed for use ahead of QO, QOT and QO-PL 10 k AIR branch circuit breakers to permit their application on systems with up to 22 kA available fault current. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 1-9 11/10/2017


page 14

QO™ Miniature Circuit Breakers QO Plug-On Circuit Breakers Class 730, 731, 733 / Refer to Catalog: 0730CT9801 schneider-electric.us QO Plug-On Circuit Breakers Square D brand QO miniature circuit breakers are plug-on products for use in QO load centers, NQOD and NQ panelboards, NQOD and NQ OEM interiors or Speed-D™ switchboard distribution panels. Bolt-on QOB circuit breakers are for use in NQOD and NQ panelboards or interiors. [1] The Square D exclusive Qwik-Open™ mechanism, with a trip reaction within 1/60th of a second, is standard on all 1P 15 A and 20 A QO circuit breakers. Table 1.18: Plug-On Circuit Breakers Amperes Rating [2] 1P—120/240 Vac 2P—120/240 Vac Common Trip 2P—240 Vac [3] Common Trip 3P—240 Vac Common Trip 1 L O A D C E N T E R S QO 1P 1 Space Required QO 2P 2 Spaces Required QO 3P 3 Spaces Required QO2200 2P 200 A 4 Spaces Required QO210 QO215 [4] QO220 [4] QO225 [4] QO230 [4] QO235 [4] QO240 [4] QO245 [4] QO250 [4] QO260 [4] QO270 [4] QO280 [4] QO290 [4] QO2100 [4] QO2110 [4] QO2125 [4] QO2150 [4] [6] [7] QO2175 [4] [6] [7] QO2200 [4] [6] [7] — — QO215VH [9] QO220VH [9] QO225VH [9] QO230VH [9] QO240VH [9] QO250VH [9] QO260VH [9] QO270VH [9] QO280VH [9] QO290VH [9] QO2100VH [9] [10] QO2110VH [9] [10] QO2125VH [9] [10] QO2150VH [6] [9] [7] QO2175VH [6] [9] [7] QO2200VH [6] [9] [7] QOH240 [8] QOH245 [8] QOH250 [8] QOH26 [8] QOH270 QOH280 QOH290 QOH2100 QOH2110 [8] QOH2125 QH215 QH220 QH225 [8] QH230 — QO215H QO220H QO225H QO230H — QO240H — QO250H QO260H QO270H QO280H QO290H QO2100H QO310 QO315 [4] QO320 [4] QO325 [4] QO330 [4] QO335 [4] QO340 [4] QO345 [4] QO350 [4] QO360 [4] QO370 [4] QO380 [4] QO390 [4] QO3100 [4] — — — — — QO200 QO2000 [8] — — — — — QO300 QO3000 [8] — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — QO315VH [9] QO320VH [9] QO325VH [9] QO330VH [9] QO340VH [9] QO350VH [9] QO360VH [9] QO370VH [9] QO380VH [9] QO390VH [9] QO3100VH [9] — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — QH315 [4] QH320 QH325 [8] QH330 10 k AIR 10 A 15 A 20 A 25 A 30 A 35 A 40 A 45 A 50 A 60 A 70 A 80 A 90 A 100 A 110 A 125 A 150 A 175 A 200 A QO110 QO115 [4] [5] QO120 [4] [5] QO125 [4] QO130 [4] QO135 [4] QO140 [4] QO145 [4] QO150 [4] QO160 [4] QO170 [4] — — — — — — — — QO115VH [5] QO120VH [5] QO125VH QO130VH QO140VH QO150VH QO160VH QO170VH Molded Case Switch 60 A max.–240 Vac Molded Case Switch 100 A max.–240 Vac 22 k AIR [4] 15 A 20 A 25 A 30 A 40 A 50 A 60 A 70 A 80 A 90 A 100 A 110 A 125 A 150 A 175 A 200 A — — — — — — — — 42 k AIR [4]  40 A  45 A  50 A  60 A  70 A  80 A  90 A 100 A 110 A 125 A 65 k AIR [4] — — — — — — — — — —  15 A  20 A  25 A  30 A QH115 [5] QH120 [5] QH125 [8] QH130 Refer topage 7-2 for Interrupting Ratings, Accessories, and Dimensions. [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] 1-10 See Digest Section 1 for load centers, and Section 9 for panelboards and interiors. 10–30 A circuit breakers are suitable for use with 60oC or 75oC conductors. 35–125 A circuit breakers are suitable for use with 75oC conductors. UL Listed 5 k AIR on corner grounded Delta systems. UL Listed as HACR type for use with air conditioning, heating and refrigeration equipment haing motor group combinations and marked for use with HACR type circuit breakers. UL Listed as SWD (switching duty) rated. Suitable for switching 120 Vac fluorescent lighting loads. Requires four spaces (1 AWG–300 kcmil Al/Cu.) Suitable for switching 120 Vac fluorescent lighting loads. Not suitable for use in 3Ø panels. Use only in 1Ø panel rated 150 A or greater. Order only. Contact your local Field Office. UL Listed for use ahead of QO, QO-GFI, QO-EPD, QOT, QO-AFI, and QO-PL 10 k AIR circuit breakers to permit their application at 22 kA fault level. 100 A maximum branch mounted opposite. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 15

QO Plug-On Circuit Breakers Class 730, 731, 733 / Refer to Catalog: 0730CT9801 QO™ Miniature Circuit Breakers schneider-electric.us QO/QOB Ring Terminal Table 1.19: QO/QOB Ring Terminal—Factory-installed only Ampere Rating 10–30 A 35–60 A 35–50 A  70–110 A  60–100 A Poles 1, 2, 3 1,2 3 2 3 Wire Sizes for QO/QOB Circuit Breakers Table 1.20: Wire Sizes Circuit Breaker Type Ampere Rating [11] QO 1P QO 2P QO 3P QOB-VH QOT QO-AFI, QO-GFI or QO-EPD QO-PL 10–30 A 10–30 A 35–70 A 10–30 A 10–30 A 35–70 A 80–125 A 150–200 A 10–30 A 35–70 A 80–125 A 110–150 A 15–20 A 15–30 A 40, 50, 60 A 10–60 A S R E T N E C D A O L 1 Suffix 5237 5238 5273 Wire Size (AWG/kcmil) 14–8 Al/Cu (2) 14–10 Cu 8–2 Al/Cu 14–8 Al/Cu (2) 14–10 Cu 8–2 Al/Cu 4–2/0 Al/Cu 4–300 Al/Cu 14–8 Al/Cu, (2) 14-10 Cu 8–2 Al/Cu 4–2/0 Al/Cu 4–300 Al/Cu 12–8 Al 14–8 Cu 12–8 Al 14–8 Cu 12–4 Al 14–6 Cu 12–2 Al 14–2 Cu QOT Tandem Circuit Breakers Circuit limiting QOT tandem circuit breakers have a mounting cam as shown. Installation into a QO load center can only be made in those positions having a mounting pan rail slot. Meets Paragraph 408.54 of the NEC®. UL Listed as Class CTL Table 1.21: QOT Tandem Circuit Breakers Ampere Rating [12] Cat. No. [13] 1P—120/240 Vac 15 A and 15 A 15 A and 20 A 20 A and 20 A 2P—120/240 Vac Common Trip Order two QOT1515 or QOT2020 circuit breakers and handle tie QOTHT for common switching of center two poles. QOT1515 QOT1520 QOT2020 QOT 1P Tandem 1 Space Required Replacement Tandem Circuit Breakers Includes two circuit breakers (one QO2030 and one QO3020) and handle tie QOTHT. Table 1.22: Replacement Tandem Circuit Breakers Ampere Rating [12] 1P—120/240 Vac—1 Space Required 15 A and 15 A 15 A and 20 A 20 A and 20 A 20 A and 30 A 30 A and 20 A Two 1P Individual Trip—120/240 Vac—2 Spaces Required Cat. No. [13] QO1515 QO1520 QO2020 QO2030 QO3020 15 A and 15 A 15 A and 20 A 20 A and 20 A 20 A and 30 A 30 A and 20 A Order Two QO1515 or QO2020 circuit breakers and handle tie QOTHT — QO20303020 [14] — 10–30 A circuit breakers are suitable for use with 60oC or 75oC conductors. 35–125 A circuit breakers are suitable for use with 75oC conductors. 10–30 A circuit breakers are suitable for use with 60oC or 75oC conductors. 35–125 A circuit breakers are suitable for use with 75oC conductors. [11] [12] [13] UL Listed as HACR type for use with air conditioning, heating and refrigeration equipment haing motor group combinations and marked for use with HACR type circuit breakers. [14] Includes two circuit breakers (one QO2030 and one QO3020) and handle tie QOTHT. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 1-11 Pan Rail SlotRail BeadMounting Cam11/10/2017


page 16

QO™ Miniature Circuit Breakers QO Plug-On Circuit Breakers Class 685, 690, 730, 912, 950 / Refer to Catalog: 0730CT9801 QO Plug-On Neutral Load Centers with Qwik-Grip Qwik-Grip simplifies rough-in by eliminating the need for most knockout removals and eliminates the use of most box connectors. With a quick bend of the NM-B wire using the wire bend guide on the Qwik-Grip. schneider-electric.us 1 L O A D C E N T E R S QO Plug-on Neutral Load Center with Qwik-Grip Table 1.23: QO Plug-on Neutral Load Centers with Qwik-Grip Spaces Mains Rating Convertible Mains—Factory-Installed Main Lugs, 65 kA Short Circuit Current Rating—Copper Bus, QOM1 Main Frame Size, Convertible to Main Circuit Breaker AWG/kcmil Al Max. Single Pole Circuits Load Center Box and Max. Tandem Circuit Seperately) Breakers Surface Interior Flush Cu Indoor Cover with Door (Order Main Wire Size Equipment Gound Bar Kit Box No. I N D O O R 24 30 24 30 125 A Convertible Mains-Factory—Installed Main Lugs, 65 kA Short Circuit Current Rating—Copper Bus, QOM2 Main Frame Size, Convertible to Main Circuit Breaker 200 A QO130L200PQG QOC30U125C QOC30U125C QOC30US QOC30UF 6–2/0 30 30 0 0 0 QO124L125PQG QO130L125PQG QOC24UF QOC24US 225 A 42 42 0 QO142L225PQG QOC42UF QOC42US 6–300 PK15GTAL PK23GTAL PK23GTAL PK15GTAL and PK15GTA included 7Q 9Q 9Q 9Q Convertible Mains—Factory-Installed Main Circuit Breaker, 22 kA Short Circuit Current Rating—Copper Bus, QOM2 Main Frame Size, Convertible to Main Lugs or Main Circuit Breaker 200 A 30 42 30 42 0 0 QO130M200PQ QO142M200PQ QOC30UF QOC42UF QOC30US QOC42US 4–250 PK23GTA (Order seperately) PK23GTA (Order seperately) 11Q 11Q QO Arc-Fault Circuit Breaker QO arc-fault circuit breakers provide protection for Series and Parallel Type Arcing as required by the NEC and local code adoption, and comply with UL1699. Table 1.24: QO Arc Fault Circuit Breakers (One-Pole) Circuit Breaker Type [15] Ampere Rating 10 k AIR 1 Space Required One–Pole 120 Vac Two–Pole 120/240 Vac 22 k AIR 1 Space Required 10 k AIR 2 Space Required 22 k AIR 2 Space Required 1P QO-CAFI Plug-On Neutral 1P QO-CAFI Pigtail Combination Arc-fault Interrupter (Pigtail Neutral) Plug-On Neutral Combination Arc-fault Interrupter 15 20 15 20 QO115CAFI QO120CAFI QO115VHCAFI QO120VHCAFI QO215CAFI [16] QO220CAFI [16] QO215VHCAFI [16] QO220VHCAFI [16] QO115PCAFI QO120PCAFI QO115VHPCAFI QO120VHPCAFI QO-Dual Function Circuit Breaker QO Combination Arc Fault and Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters (Dual Function) provide overload and short circuit protection, plus arc fault and ground fault protection in accordance with the NEC, UL1699 and UL943. Table 1.25: QO-Dual Function Arc Fault Circuit Breakers Circuit Breaker Type [17] Combination Arc-fault and Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (Pigtail Neutral) Plug-On Neutral Combination Arc-fault and Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Ampere Rating 15 20 15 20 1P QO-DF Plug-on Neutral 1P QO-DF Pigtail 1P 120 Vac 10 k AIR 1 Space Required 1P 120 Vac 22 k AIR 1 Space Required QO115DF QO120DF QO115PDF QO120PDF QO115VHDF QO120VHDF QO115VHPDF QO120VHPDF For 120/240 V only, not for 208Y/120 V. [15] UL Listed as HACR type for use with air conditioning, heating and refrigeration equipment haing motor group combinations and marked for use with HACR type circuit breakers. [16] [17] UL Listed as HACR type for use with air conditioning, heating and refrigeration equipment haing motor group combinations and marked for use with HACR type circuit breakers. 1-12 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 17

QO Plug-On Circuit Breakers Class 685, 690, 730, 912, 950 / Refer to Catalog: 0730CT9801 QO™ Miniature Circuit Breakers schneider-electric.us QO-GFI Qwik-Gard™ circuit breakers provide overload and short circuit protection, combined with Class A ground fault protection. Class A denotes a ground fault circuit interrupter that will trip when a fault current to ground is 6 mA or more, for people protection. Do not connect to more than 250 feet of load conductor for the total one-way run to prevent nuisance tripping. Table 1.26: QO-GFI Circuit Breakers 1P QO-GFI 2P QO-GFI Ampere Rating [18] 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 Qwik-Gard Circuit Breakers With Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter 1P 120 Vac 10 k AIR 1 Space Required 22 k AIR 1 Space Required 2P Common Trip 120/240 Vac 10 k AIR 3P Common Trip 208Y/120 Vac 10 k AIR 2 Spaces Required 3 Spaces Required QO115GFI QO120GFI QO125GFI QO130GFI — — — QO115VHGFI QO120VHGFI QO125VHGFI QO130VHGFI — — — QO215GFI QO220GFI QO225GFI QO230GFI QO240GFI QO250GFI QO260GFI [19] QO315GFI QO320GFI QO330GFI QO340GFI QO350GFI — — S R E T N E C D A O L 1 QO-EPD/EPE QO-EPD/EPE circuit breakers provide overload and short circuit protection combined with Class B ground fault protection. They are designed to provide ground fault protection of equipment at a 30 mA level (EPD) or 100 mA level (EPE). They are not designed to protect people from electrical shock. Table 1.27: QO-EPD Circuit Breakers QO 1P With Shunt Trip Ampere Rating [20] 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 1P 120 Vac 10 k AIR 1 Space Required 2P Common Trip 120/240 Vac 10 k AIR 2 Spaces Required 3P Common Trip 240 Vac 10 k AIR 3 Spaces Required QO115EPD QO120EPD QO125EPD QO130EPD — — — QO215EPD QO220EPD QO225EPD QO230EPD QO240EPD QO250EPD QO260EPD [22] QO315EPD [21] QO320EPD [21] — QO330EPD [21] QO340EPD [21] QO350EPD [21] — QO315EPE [21] QO320EPE [21] — QO330EPE [21] QO340EPE [21] QO350EPE [21] — QO-SWN Switch Neutral Common Trip 2008 NEC® 514.11 Table 1.28: QO-SWN Circuit Breakers Ampere Rating [23] 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 Two-wire QO-SWN Three-wire QO-SWN 2 Wire 120 Vac 10 k AIR 2 Spaces Required QO210SWN QO215SWN QO220SWN QO225SWN QO230SWN QO240SWN QO250SWN 3 Wire 120/240 Vac 3 Spaces Required 10 k AIR QO310SWN QO315SWN QO320SWN QO325SWN QO330SWN QO340SWN QO350SWN QO-HID HID circuit breakers are for use on circuits feeding fluorescent and high intensity discharge (HID) lighting systems such as mercury vapor, metal halide, or high pressure sodium. These circuit breakers are physically interchangeable with QO circuit breakers. Table 1.29: QO-HID Circuit Breakers 1P 120/240 Vac 1 Space Required Ampere Rating [23] 10 k AIR 2P Common Trip 120/240 Vac 10 k AIR 2 Spaces Required 3P Common Trip 240 Vac 10 k AIR 3 Spaces Required 15 20 25 30 40 50 QO115HID [24] QO125HID QO130HID QO140HID QO150HID QO215HID QO220HID QO225HID QO230HID QO240HID QO250HID QO315HID QO320HID QO325HID QO330HID — — 10–30 A circuit breakers are suitable for use with 60oC or 75oC conductors. 35–60 A circuit breakers are suitable for use with 75oC conductors. 10–30 A circuit breakers are suitable for use with 60oC or 75oC conductors. 35–60 A circuit breakers are suitable for use with 75oC conductors. [18] [19] Suitable only for feeding 240 Vac and 208 Vac two-wire loads. Does not contain load neutral connection. [20] [21] See note in Instruction Bulletin when using in an enclosure with a QO403 or QON prefix. [22] Suitable only for feeding 240 Vac and 208 Vac two-wire loads. Does not contain load neutral connection. [23] [24] UL Listed as SWD (switching duty) rated. Suitable for switching 120 Vac fluorescent lighting loads. 10–30 A circuit breakers are suitable for use with 60oC or 75oC conductors. 35–60 A circuit breakers are suitable for use with 75oC conductors. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 1-13 11/10/2017


page 18

1 L O A D C E N T E R S QO™ Miniature Circuit Breakers Accessories Class 1130 / Refer to Catalog 1100CT0501 schneider-electric.us QO-K Key operated QO circuit breakers are available in single-pole construction and can be mounted in any single-pole space which will accept a standard QO. These circuit breakers can be turned ON or OFF or to RESET with a special key (catalog number QOK10) included with the circuit breaker. These circuit breakers are UL Listed and available as shown in the table. Table 1.30: QO-K Circuit Breakers 120 Vac—10 k AIR (1 Space Required) Ampere Rating [25] 10 15 20 Cat. No. QO110K QO115K QO120K Ampere Rating [25] 25 30 Cat. No. QO125K QO130K QO-HM High magnetic trip circuit breakers are recommended for applications where high initial inrush may occur and for individual dimmer applications. QO-K Key Operated Table 1.31: QO-HM Circuit Breakers 120 Vac—10 k AIR Ampere Rating [25] 15 A 20 A 1P QO115HM [26] [27] QO120HM [26] [27] Non-Automatic (Standard) Miniature Switches Miniature non-automatic switches have the same physical packaging as miniature circuit breakers, but open only when the handle is switched to the OFF position. Non-automatic switches provide no overcurrent protection or short circuit protection. They must not be used on systems that have an available fault current greater than the values listed in the table. Non-automatic switches are UL Listed per UL 1087 and are CSA certified. Table 1.32: QO Non-Automatic Miniature Switches, 240 Vac 10 kA Ampere Rating  60 100 2P QO200 QO2000 3P QO300 QO3000 10–30 A circuit breakers are suitable for use with 60oC or 75oC conductors. 35–60 A circuit breakers are suitable for use with 75oC conductors. [25] [26] UL Listed as HACR type for use with air conditioning, heating and refrigeration equipment haing motor group combinations and marked for use with HACR type circuit breakers. [27] UL Listed as SWD (switching duty) rated. Suitable for switching 120 Vac fluorescent lighting loads. 1-14 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 19

Accessories Class 1130 / Refer to Catalog 1100CT0501 QO™ Miniature Circuit Breakers schneider-electric.us Table 1.33: Accessories for use with QO and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers Description Accessories for QO/QOB Circuit Breakers Handle Attachments Handle Tie Handle Clamp Handle Padlock Attachment for Padlocking in ON or OFF position Handle Padlock Attachment for Padlocking in OFF position Ring Terminal Sub-feed Lugs Mechanical Interlock Attachment With Retaining Kit Converts any two adjacent 120/240 Vac 1P QO circuit breakers to independent trip 2P Converts any two adjacent 120/240 Vac1P side-by-side QOT circuit breakers to independent trip 2P Clamp for holding QO 1P handle in ON or OFF position Clamp for holding QO or Q1 either 1P, 2P or 3P circuit breaker handles in ON or OFF position For padlocking 1P QO circuit breaker in ON or OFF position    Loose attachment    Fixed attachment For padlocking 1P side-by-side QOT circuit breaker in ON or OFF position For padlocking 2P QO-GFI circuit breakers in either ON or OFF position, fixed attachment. For 2P and 3P QO and Q1 standard circuit breakers which require padlocking in either ON or OFF position.    Loose attachment    Fixed attachment For padlocking 1P QO circuit breaker in OFF position only, fixed attachment. For padlocking 2P and 3P QO circuit breakers in OFF position only, fixed attachment. For padlocking 1P QO-GFI, QO-CAFI, QO-DF and QO-EPD circuit breakers in OFF position only, fixed attachment. For padlocking 2P QO-GFI, QO-CAFI and QO-EPD circuit breakers in OFF position only, fixed attachment. Ring terminals are available as a factory-installed option. 60 A 2P plug-on – 2 spaces required (6–2 Al/Cu) 125 A 2P plug-on – 2 spaces required (12–2/0 Al/Cu) 225 A 2P plug-on – 4 spaces required (4–300 Al/Cu) 125 A 3P plug-on – 3 spaces required (12–2/0 Al/Cu) For interlocking the handles of two 2P or one 2P and one 1P QO and Q1 circuit breakers mounted side-by-side so that only one circuit breaker can be ON at a time (Not QOU) QO2DTI mechanical interlock attachment with retaining kits for securing two adjacent back-fed circuit breakers in dual power supply applications. Can be used with (2) 2Ps or (1) 2P and (1) 1P QO circuit breakers in QO816L100 load centers. Cat. No. QO1HT QOTHT QO1LO HLO1 QOHPL QO1PA QOTHPA GFI2PA QO1HPL QO1PL QO1PAF QO2PAF QOGFI1PAF QOGFI2PAF See page 7–10 QO60SL QO2125SL QO2225SL [28] QO3125SL QO2DTI QO2DTIM S R E T N E C D A O L 1 Schedule DE2E DE2E DE2E DE2E DE2E DE2E DE2E DE2A DE2E DE2E DE2E DE2E DE2E DE2E DE2A DE2A DE2A DE2A DE3 DE2E DE2E Factory-Installed Accessories for use with QO and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers Factory-installed electrical accessories take up an additional pole space on QO, QO- GFI, QO-EPD, QO-SWN and QOU circuit breakers. All AC electrical accessories shown below are rated for 50/60 Hz. Accessories are not available for QOB-VH (2P 150 A and 3P 110–150 A) circuit breakers or QO, QOU molded case switches. QO circuit breakers will accept only one accessory per circuit breaker. Undervoltage trip is not available on miniature circuit breakers. Factory-installed accessories are not available for QO-AFI or QO-CAFI Arc Fault Circuit Breakers or on QO2150, QO2175, or QO2200 circuit breakers. Table 1.34: Factory-Installed Accessories Accessory Description Rated Voltage Coil Burden Cat. No. Suffix Accesso- ry Shunt Trip Trips the circuit breaker from a remote location by means of a trip coil energized from a separate circuit. A 120 Vac shunt trip will operate at 55% or more of rated voltage. All other shunt trips will operate at 75% or more of rated voltage. Application • For use with momentary or maintained push button. • Not available on QO-GFI, QO- • Shunt trip terminals accept (2) 0.14– 0.12 AWG Cu. EPD. 12 Vac/Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc 60 VA 168 VA -1042 Auxiliary Switches 120 Vac 208 Vac 240 Vax 72 VA 228 VA 288 VA -1021 Alarm Switches Description AWG Cu leads. Monitors circuit breaker contact status and provides a remote signal indicating the circuit breaker contacts are OPEN or CLOSED. Application • Auxiliary switch terminals accept (2) 14–12 • Leads (EH): Yellow for “A’’, Blue for “B’’, Used with control circuits and is actuated only when the circuit breaker has tripped. Standard construction includes a normally-open contact. Application • Leads: Alarm switch terminals accept (2) Striped common 18 AWG Cu. 14–12 AWG Cu leads. Contact Comb. Max. Voltage Max. Cat. No. Suffix 1A 1B 1A 120 Vac 120 Vac 120 Vac 5 A 5 A -1200 -1201 5 A -2100 [28] Not suitable for use in 3Ø panels. Use only in 1Ø panel rated 150 A or greater. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 1-15 11/10/2017


page 20

QO™ and Homeline™ Load Centers and Circuit Breakers 1 1Ø, Value Packs and Riser Panels Class 1130, 1170 / Refer to Catalog 1100CT0501 schneider-electric.us QO and Homeline Plug-On Neutral Load Centers with Qwik-Grip Qwik grip simplifes rough-in by elimininating the need for most knockout removals and eliminates the use of most box connectors. With a quick bend of the NM-B wire using the wire bend guide on the Qwik-Grip insert, the wire easily slides into the slot. Solution is UL listed. I N D O O R R A I N P R O O F [1] [2] [3] 1-16 See Indoor knockout information and Enclosure Dimensions for Qwik Grip Loadcenters, page 1-24 Maximum single pole branch circuits utilizing QO and/or QOT circuit breakers. See Indoor, Dimensions and Knockouts, page 1-24 or Rainproof, Dimensions, Knockouts and Bolt-on Hubs, page 1-26 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved L O A D C E N T E R S I N D O O R Table 1.35: Value Packs Contains Complete Load Center (Box, Interior and Cover) with Selected Branch Circuit Breakers Main Load Center Equipment Box, Interior, Cover and Branch Circuit Breakers Cat. No. Included Load Center/Circuit Breakers Ground Bar Kit (Order Separately) Cat. No. Wire Size AWG/kcmil Al/Cu Main Ratings Spaces Max. 1P Circuits Max. Tandem Circuit Breakers QO Convertible Mains—Factory-Installed Main Lugs, up to 65 kA Short Circuit Current Rating—Copper Bus, QOM1 Main Frame Size, Convertible to Main Circuit breaker 125 A 24 24  0 QO124L125PQGCVP (1) QO124L125PQGC, (3) QO120, (2) QO230 and (1) PKQGA Qwik-Grip assembly kit PK15GTAL Included 6–2/0 QO Convertible Mains—Factory-Installed Main Circuit Breaker, 22 kA Short Circuit Current Rating—Copper Bus, QOM2 Main Frame Size, Convertible to Main Lugs or Main Circuit breaker 200 A 42 42 0 QO142M200PQCVP (1) QO142M200PQC, (3) QO120, (2) QO230 and (1) PKQGA Qwik-Grip assembly kit PK23GTA (Order seperately) 4–250 Homeline Convertible Mains—Factory-Installed Main Circuit breaker, 22kA Short Circuit Current Rating—Copper Bus, QOM1 Main Frame Size, Convertible to Main Lugs or Main Circuit Breaker 100 A 200 A 20 30 40 40 60 80 20 30 40 HOM2040M100PQCVP HOM3060M200PQCVP HOM4080M200PQCVP (1) HOM2040M100PQC, (2) HOM120, (1) HOM230 and (1) PKQGA Qwik-Grip assembly kit (1) HOM3060M200PQC, (3) HOM120, (2) HOM230 and (1) PKQGA Qwik-Grip assembly kit (1) HOM2040M100PQC, (2) HOM120, (1) HOM230 and (1) PKQGA Qwik-Grip assembly kit PK18GTA (Order seperately) PK23GTA (Order seperately) PK27GTA (Order seperately) 6–2/0 6–1 4–250 4–250 Table 1.36: Value Packs Contains Complete Load Center (Box, Interior and Cover) with Selected Branch Circuit Breakers 1Ø3W—120/240 Vac—UL Listed Mains Rating Spaces Max. 1P Cir- cuits [2] Max. Tandem Circuit Breakers Box, Interior, Cover and Branch Circuit Breakers Load Center Equipment Ground Bar Kit (Order Separately) Cat. No. Included Load Center/Circuit Breakers Cat. No. Main Wire Size AWG/kcmil Al/Cu QO (Accepts Only QO Plug-On Circuit Breakers) QO—Copper Bus Convertible Mains—Factory-Installed Main Circuit Breaker, 22 kA Short Circuit Current Rating Convertible appropriate to Main Lugs (See 1Ø, Field-Installed Main Lugs Kits, page 1-5) or QOM Main Circuit Breaker (See 1Ø, Field-Installed Main Circuit Breaker Kits, page 1-4) 125 A 225 A Convertible Mains—Factory-Installed Main Circuit Breaker, 22 kA Short Circuit Current Rating Convertible appropriate to Main Lugs or Main Circuit Breaker (See 1Ø3W—120/240 Vac—UL Listed, page 1-20) (1) QO124L125PGC, (3) QO120, (2) QO230 (1) QO142L225PGC, (3) QO120, (2) QO230 QO124L125PGCVP QO142L225PGCVP (2) PK15GTA 6–2/0 6–300 PK15GTA 24 42 24 42  0 0 125 A 200 A 24 32 30 42 42 24 32 40 42 42  0  0 10  0  0 QO124M100PCVP QO32M100VP QO3040M200VP QO142M200PCVP QO142M200PCAFVP (1) QO124M100PC, (3) QO120, (2) QO230 (1) QO132M100C, (3) QO120, (2) QO230 (1) QO13040M200C, (3) QO120, (2) QO230 (1) QO142M200PC, (3) QO120, (2) QO230 (1) QO142M200PC, (3) QO120, (2) QO230, (3) QO115PCAFI PK15GTA PK18GTA PK23GTA PK23GTA PK23GTA 6–2/0 4–2/0 4–250 Homeline (Accepts Only HOM Plug-On Circuit Breakers) Convertible Mains—Factory-Installed Main Lugs, 10 kA Short Circuit Current Rating Convertible to appropriate QOM 22 kA Short Circuit Current Rating Main Circuit Breaker (See 1Ø3W—120/240 Vac—UL Listed, page 1-20) 6–1 125 A 4–250 225 A Convertible Mains—Factory-Installed Main Circuit Breaker, 22 kA Short Circuit Current Rating Convertible appropriate to Main Lugs or Main Circuit Breaker (See 1Ø3W—120/240 Vac—UL Listed, page 1-20) (1) HOM1224L125PGC, (2) HOM120 (1) HOM3060L225PGC, (3) HOM120, (2) HOM230 HOM1224L125PGCVP HOM3060L225PGCVP PK15GTAL PK15GTAL PK15GTA 6–2/0 4–300 12 30 12 30 24 60 100 A 150 A 200 A 20 20 24 30 20 30 30 30 40 40 40 40 40 48 30 40 60 60 60 80 80 80 20 20 24 30 20 30 30 30 40 40 40 HOM2040M100PCVP HOM2040M100PC1AVP HOM2448M100PCVP HOM3060M150PCVP HOM2040M200PCVP HOM3060M200PCVP HOM3060M200PC1AVP HOM3060M200PCAFVP HOM4080M200PCVP HOM4080M200PC1AVP HOM4080M200PCAFVP (1) HOM2040M100PC, (2) HOM120, (1) HOM230 (1) HOM2040M100PC, (2) HOM120, (1) HOM230, (1) HOM115PCAFI (1) HOM2448M100PC, (3) HOM120, (2) HOM230 (1) HOM3060M150PC, (3) HOM120, (2) HOM230 (1) HOM2040M200PC, (3) HOM120, (2) HOM230 (1) HOM3060M200PC, (3) HOM120, (2) HOM230 (1) HOM3060M200PC, (3) HOM120, (2) HOM230, (1) HOM115PCAFI (1) HOM3060M200PC, (3) HOM120, (2) HOM230, (3) HOM115PCAFI (1) HOM4080M200PC, (3) HOM120, (2) HOM230 (1) HOM4080M200PC, (3) HOM120, (2) HOM230, (1) HOM115PCAFI (1) HOM4080M200PC, (3) HOM120, (2) HOM230, (3) HOM115PCAFI 6–1 6–1 6–2/0 6–3 6–3 6–1/0 4–250 4–250 PK18GTA PK18GTA PK23GTA PK23GTA PK18GTA PK23GTA PK23GTA PK23GTA PK27GTA PK27GTA PK27GTA Homeline (Accepts Only HOM Plug-On Circuit Breakers) Convertible Mains—Factory-Installed Main Circuit Breaker, 22 kA Short Circuit Current Rating Convertible to Main Lugs or Lower Amperage QOM2 Main Circuit Breaker (See 1Ø3W—120/240 Vac—UL Listed, page 1-20) 125 A (1) HOM1224M125PRB, (3) HOM120, (2) HOM230 HOM1224M125PRBVP PK23GTA 12 12 24 6–2/0 6–1 200 A 30 60 30 HOM3060M200PRBVP (1) HOM3060M200PRB, (3) HOM120, (2) HOM230 PK23GTA 4–250 Box No. [1] 7Q 11Q  6 10Q 12Q Box No. [3] 7 12 7 8 9 11 11  6 10  7  7  8  9 10 10 10 12 12 12 3R 7R 11/10/2017


page 21

QO and Homeline Load Center Accessories Class 1130 / Refer to Catalog 1100CT0501 Load Center Accessories schneider-electric.us Table 1.37: Offset Interior for Wide Gutter—30 A Maximum Branch Circuit Breaker on left side of interior [4] [5] (Accepts Only QO Plug-On Circuit Breakers) QO Riser Panels Spaces Mains Rating Convertible Mains—Factory-Installed Main Lugs, 65 kA Short Circuit Current Rating Convertible to QOM1 22 kA Short Circuit Current Rating Main Circuit Breaker (See Indoor, 1Ø, Main Lugs, page 1-3) when used with QOC cover below—Copper Bus Load Center Box and Max. Tandem Circuit (Order Separately) Ground Bar Kit Load Center Breakers Interior Cover kcmil Box No. [7] Cu Al Equipment Main Wire Size AWG/ Max. Single Pole Circuits I N D O O R 125 A 200 A 12 20 30 [6] 24 30 40 12 10 10 Convertible Mains-Factory—Installed Main Lugs, 65 kA Short Circuit Current Rating Convertible to QOM2 22 kA Short Circuit Current Rating Main Circuit Breaker (See Indoor, 1Ø, Main Lugs, page 1-3) when used with QOC cover below—Copper Bus Convertible Mains—Factory-Installed Main Circuit Breaker, 22 kA Short Circuit Current Rating Convertible to Main Lugs (See Indoor, 1Ø, Main Circuit Breaker, page 1-4) or Lower Amperage QOM2 Main Circuit Breaker (See Indoor, 1Ø, Main Lugs, page 1-3) when used with QOC cover below—Copper Bus QO124M200WG125 [8] Above listings through 200 A mains rating meet Federal Specification W-P-115c as Type 1, Class 2. 200 A 24 24 0 QOC30UFWG PK23GTA 4–250 QO13040L200WG QOC30UFWG PK23GTA QO11224L125WG QO12030L125WG QOC20UFWG QOC20UFWG PK15GTA PK15GTA S R E T N E C D A O L 14 14 23 23 6–2/0 4–250 Mains Rating of Load Center 125 A 200 A Cat. No. NQC20FWG NQC30FWG Table 1.38: QO Load Center Accessories Panelboard-style Covers for Riser Panels Mono-Flat™ Front available for riser panels as an alternative to standard load center cover listed above. Provides a low-profile, aesthetically pleasing solution for high-traffic areas in upscale multi-family applications. Deadfront included. Lock kit not provided. Cover NQC30FWG CANNOT be used when panel has been converted to a main circuit breaker panel. [9] QO Load Center Accessories 1 Description Retaining Kit for Breakers Used as Back-fed Mains Cover Sealing Strap Replacement Cover Directory Label Circuit Identification Stickers Filler Plates Door Lock Kits Neutral / Ground Lugs Ground Bar Kits Handle Padlock Attachment Service Entrance Barriers Secures circuit breaker to interior when used as a back-fed main. For QO612L100F/S, RB, QO612L100DF/S, QO816L100F/S, RB, QO816L100DF/S and QO148L125GF/S, GRB load centers Secures 3P circuit breaker without accessories to left side of interior when used as a back-fed main. For 3Ø load centers Secures circuit breaker to interior when used as a back-fed main for 2P QO 150–200 A circuit breakers Secures ONE circuit breaker with or without electrical accessories to right side of interior when used as a back-fed main For 1Ø 100–125 ampere convertible main load centers. Series S01 and S02 Secures ONE circuit breaker with or without electrical accessories to right side of interior when used as a back-fed main For 1Ø 150–225 ampere convertible main load centers. Series S01 and S02 Provides means of sealing trim mounting screws on QO load center covers 1 through 42 numbered universal replacement directory label for load center covers Circuit identification stickers for use on cover directory labels to identify branch circuits Fills opening in covers if twistout is removed in error Fills main circuit breaker opening in convertible load center covers 100–125 A Fills main circuit breaker opening in convertible load center covers 150–225 A Fills main circuit breaker opening in 3Ø load center covers (S01 and S02 Series) Fills main circuit breaker opening in “Q” style 3Ø load center covers (S03 Series) Use with QO612L100DF/S, QO612L100DFCU/SCU, QO612L100DTF/S, QO816L100DF/S, QO816L100DFCU/SCU, QO816L100DTF/S, QO48M30DSGP, or QO48M60DSGP Use with convertible mains, 1Ø and 3Ø 100–225 A, and fixed mains, 3Ø 125–225 A indoor load centers Use with 300 and 400 ampere indoor load centers Field-installed for 12– 2 Al or 14–4 Cu AWG wire Field-installed for 6–2/0 Al/Cu AWG wire Field-installed for 14–2/0 Al/Cu AWG wire Field-installed for 2–3/0 Al/Cu AWG wire Field-installed for 4 AWG to 300 kcmil Al/Cu wire. Use in Series S, 150-225A QO load center or S03 and below, 150-225A HOM load center Standard PK15GTA with a 1–4/0 Al/Cu Lug Standard PK18GTA with a 1–4/0 Al/Cu Lug Standard PK23GTA with a 1–4/0 Al/Cu Lug Insulator Kit for PK7GTA through PK27GTA For padlocking main circuit breakers in convertible load centers OFF QO / Homeline 1Ø 100–125 A QOM1 convertible main load centers QO / Homeline 1Ø 150–225 A QOM2 convertible main load centers QO 3Ø convertible main load centers QO 1Ø back-fed main breaker applications QO 3Ø back-fed main breaker applications QO Load Center Manual Power Transfer Accessories Manual Transfer Equipment Kit For interlocking the handles of two 2P or one 2P and one 1P QO and Q1 circuit breakers mounted side-by-side so that only one circuit breaker can be “ON’’ at a time. QO2DTI mechanical interlock attachment with retaining kits for securing two adjacent back-fed circuit breakers in dual power supply applications. Can be used with (2) 2P or (1) 2P and (1) 1P QO circuit breakers in QO816L100 load centers. Secures two 2P circuit breakers to right side of interior when used as back-fed mains, a QO2DTI Kit included for back-up power supply applications. For 1Ø 100–125 ampere convertible main load centers. Series S01 and S02. Secures two 2P circuit breakers to right side of interior when used as back-fed mains, a QO2DTI Kit included for back-up power supply applications. For 1Ø 150–225 ampere convertible main load centers. Series S01 and S02. [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [1] UL short circuit current rating depends on lowest interrupting rating of circuit breaker installed. UL Listed 5000 A short circuit current rating for corner grounded Delta systems. Use QO-H circuit breakers only. Maximum single pole branch circuits utilizing QO and/or QOT circuit breakers. See Indoor Knockout Information and Enclosure Dimensions, page 1-24 Comes with 125 A main circuit breaker factory installed. Order catalog number PK4FL for field-installed lock kit. QO403L60NF/S does not have provisions for a field-installed lock. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Cat. No. PK2MB PK3MB PK5RK PK4MB2LA PK4MB2HA QO1SE LSDL PSDS QOFP QOM1FP QOM2FP KFP Q2FP PK8FL [1] PK6FL PK4FL LK70AN LK100AN LK125AN LK150AN LK225AN LK225ANHOM PK15GTAL PK18GTAL PK23GTAL PKGTAB 50–125 A QOM1PA 100–225 A QOM2PA PKSB1LA PKSB1HA PKSB3 PKSB1QOBF PKSB3BF QO2DTI QO2DTIM PK4DTIM4LA PK4DTIM4HA Schedule DE3A DE3A DE3A DE3A DE3A DE3A DE5 DE5 DE3A DE3A DE3A DE3A DE3A DE3A DE3A PE1A DE3A DE3A DE3A DE3A DE3A DE3A DE3A DE3A DE3A DE2E DE2E DE3A DE3A DE3A DE3A DE3A DE2E DE2E DE3A DE3A 1-17 11/10/2017


page 22

Load Center Accessories QO and Homeline Load Center Accessories Class 1130 / Refer to Catalog 1100CT0501 Table 1.38 QO Load Center Accessories (cont'd.) Description Generator Circuit Breaker Interlock Kit Secures two 2P circuit breakers to left side of interior when used as back-fed mains, a QO2DTI Kit included for back-up power supply applications. For 1Ø 100–125 ampere convertible main load centers. Series S01 and S02. For use on “G” and “S” Series NEMA 1 and “G”, “S1” and “S2” Series NEMA 3R load centers. Interlocks a QOM1 2P main circuit breaker of a load center (100–125 A) with a QO 2P (15–125 A) branch circuit breaker. Includes a retaining kit. For use on “G” and “S” Series NEMA 1 and “G” and “S1” Series NEMA 3R load centers. Interlocks a QOM2 2P main circuit breaker of a load center (150–225 A) with a QO 2P (15–125 A) branch circuit breaker. Includes a retaining kit. For use on “S2” Series NEMA 3R load centers. Interlocks a QOM2 2P main circuit breaker of a load center (150–225 A) with a QO 2P (15–125 A) branch circuit breaker. Includes a retaining kit. schneider-electric.us Cat. No. Schedule PK4DTIM4LAL QOCRBGK1C QOCGK2C QORBGK2C DE3A DE3A DE3A DE3A 1 L O A D C E N T E R S QO and HOM Qwik-Grip Load Center Accessories Table 1.39: Qwik-Grip Load Center Accessories Description Qwik-Grip replacement shield Qwik-Grip fillers Qwik-Grip replacement insert Qwik-Grip assembly kit (1) Qwik-Grip shield (4) Qwik-Grip fillers (1) Qwik-Grip insert (4) Qwik-Grip shields, (12) Qwik-Grip fillers Cat. No. PKQGS PKQGFP PKQGI PKQGA Schedule DE3A DE3A DE3A DE3A Table 1.40: Homeline Load Center Accessories Homeline Load Center Accessories Description 50–125 A 100–225 A For padlocking main circuit breakers in convertible load center, “OFF” Fills opening in covers if twistout is removed in error Fills main circuit breaker opening in convertible load centers Field-installed for 14–2 AWG Al or 14–4 AWG Cu wire Field-installed for 6–2/0 AWG Al/Cu wire Field-installed for 14–2/0 AWG Al/Cu wire Field-installed for 4 AWG to 300 kcmil Al/Cu wire. Use in Series S, 150-225A QO load center or S03 and below, 150- 225A HOM load center Field-installed for 4 AWG–300 kcmil Al/Cu wire. Use in Series S04, 150–225 A HOM load center Secures circuit breaker to interior when used as a back-fed main. For HOM612L100F/S, RB and HOM48L125GC, GRB load centers Secures ONE circuit breaker right side of interior when used as a back-fed main For 100–125 A convertible main load centers, Series S01 and S02 Secures ONE circuit breaker right side of interior when used as a back-fed main For 150–225 A convertible main load centers, Series S01 and S02 Secures circuit breaker to interior when used as a back-fed main For 2P 150–200 A circuit breakers Use with convertible indoor load center covers (Series S-1) 1 through 42 numbered universal replacement directory label for load center covers 100–125 A 150–225 A Circuit identification stickers for use on cover directory labels to identify branch circuits For use on “S” Series NEMA 1 and NEMA 3R load centers. Interlocks a QOM1 2P main circuit breaker of a load center (100–125 A) with a Homeline 2P (15–125 A) branch circuit breaker For use on “S” Series NEMA 1 and “S1” Series NEMA 3R load centers. Interlocks a QOM2 2P main circuit breaker of a load center (150–225 A) with a Homeline 2P (15–125 A) branch circuit breaker For use on “S2” and “S3” Series NEMA 3R QOM2 load centers. Interlocks a QOM2 2P main circuit breaker of a load center (150–225 A) with a Homeline 2P (15–125 A) branch circuit breaker QO / Homeline 1Ø 100–125 A QOM1 convertible main load centers QO / Homeline 1Ø 150–225 A QOM2 convertible main load centers Homeline back-fed main breaker applications Handle Padlock Attachment Filler Plates Neutral / Ground Lugs Retaining Kit for Breakers Used as Back-fed Mains Door Lock Kit Replacement Cover Directory Label Circuit Identification Stickers Generator Circuit Breaker Interlock Kit Service Entrance Barriers 1-18 Cat. No. QOM1PA QOM2PA HOMFP QOM1FP QOM2FP LK70AN LK100AN LK125AN LK225AN LK225ANHOM HOM1RK HOM4RK2LA HOM4RK2HA HOM5RK PK6FL LSDL PSDS HOMCRBGK1C HOMCGK2C HOMRBGK2C PKSB1LA PKSB1HA PKSB1HOMBF Schedule DE2E DE2E DE3C DE3A DE3A DE3B DE3B DE3B DE3A DE3A DE3C DE3C DE3C DE3C DE3A DE5 DE5 DE3D DE3D DE3D DE3A DE3A DE3A © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved PK3MBPK2MBPK6FL and PK8FLPK4FLPKGTABQOFP11/10/2017


page 23

schneider-electric.us Indoor, 1Ø, Main Lugs and Main Circuit Breaker Class 1170 / Refer to Catalog 1100CT0501 Homeline™ Load Centers Surge Protective Devices Table 1.41: Load Center and CSED Surge Protection Devices Description For use on 1Ø3W, 150 Vac maximum For use on 3Ø4W, 650 Vac maximum QO Surgebreaker CULUS Listed Secondary Surge Arrester 150 Vac line-to-ground maximum Homeline Surgebreaker CULUS Listed Secondary Surge Arrester 150 Vac line-to-ground maximum UL Listed for mounting SDSA1175 surge arrester into ground bar mounting holes on 1Ø convertible main circuit breaker load centers Cat. No. SDSA1175 SDSA3650 QO2175SB HOM2175SB QOSAMK Schedule DE1B DE1B DE1B DE1B DE3A S R E T N E C D A O L Surge Arresters Surge Arrester Mounting Kit QOSAMK Indoor, 1Ø, Main Lugs and Main Circuit Breaker 1Ø3W—120/240 Vac—UL Listed Table 1.42: Convertible Main Load Centers (Accepts Only HOM Plug-On Circuit Breakers) Mains Rating Spaces Max. Single Pole Circuits [1] Max. Tandem Circuit Breakers Load Center Box, Interior and Cover [2] Main Wire Size AWG/kcmil Al Cu Equipment Ground (Order Separately) Bar Kit Box No. [3] 1 Main Lugs—10 kA Short Circuit Current Rating Order HOM Circuit Breakers (See Homeline™ Circuit Breakers, page 1-21) Factory-installed Fixed Main Lugs  70 A 100 A 125 A 4 12 8 Convertible Mains—Factory-installed Main Lugs QOM1 Main Frame Size—Convertible to Main Circuit Breaker (See 1Ø3W—120/240 Vac—UL Listed, page 1-20) HOM24L70F/S [4] [5] HOM612L100F/S [4] [6] HOM48L125GC 2 6 4 2 6 4 125 A 16 24 32 40 60 Convertible Mains—Factory-installed Main Lugs QOM2 Main Frame Size—Convertible to Main Circuit Breaker (See 1Ø3W—120/240 Vac—UL Listed, page 1-20) HOM816L125PC HOM1224L125PC HOM1632L125PC HOM2040L125PC HOM3060L125PC 8 12 16 20 30 8 12 16 20 30 Convertible Mains—Factory-installed Main Lugs—Ground Bar Included QOM1 Main Frame Size—Convertible to Main Circuit Breaker (See 1Ø3W—120/240 Vac—UL Listed, page 1-20) HOM3060L225PC HOM4080L225PC HOM4284L225PC HOM60120L225PC [7] HOM816L125PGC HOM1224L125PGC HOM2040L125PGC HOM2448L125PGC 12–3 12–2/0 8–1 6–2/0 14–4 14–2/0 6–1 6–1 6–1/0 6–1/0 6–2/0 4–300 4–250 PK3GTA1 PK7GTA PK7GTA Included PK9GTA PK15GTA PK15GTA PK18GTA PK23GTA PK23GTA PK27GTA PK27GTA PK27GTA 6–2/0 6–1 6–1 6–1/0 6–1/0 PK15GTAL Included PK15GTAL Included PK15GTAL Included PK15GTAL Included I N D O O R Convertible Mains—Factory-installed Main Lugs—Ground Bar Included QOM2 Main Frame Size—Convertible to Main Circuit Breaker (See 1Ø3W—120/240 Vac—UL Listed, page 1-20) 225 A 30 16 20 40 42 60 32 40 80 84 30 16 20 40 42 HOM3060L225PGC HOM1632L225PGC HOM2040L225PGC HOM4080L225PGC HOM4284L225PGC 4–300 4–250 Main Circuit Breaker—22 kA Short Circuit Current Rating Convertible Mains—Factory-installed Main Circuit Breaker QOM1 Main Frame Size—Convertible to Main Lugs or Lower Amperage Main Circuit Breaker (See 1Ø3W—120/240 Vac—UL Listed, page 1-20) PK15GTAL & PK15GTA Included PK15GTAL Included PK15GTAL Included PK15GTAL & PK15GTA Included PK15GTAL & PK15GTA Included 225 A 125 A 100 A 125 A 30 40 42 60 8 12 20 24 8 12 20 24 30 24 30 60 80 84 120 16 24 40 80 16 24 40 48 60 48 60 30 40 42 60 8 12 20 24 8 12 20 24 30 24 30 PK9GTA PK15GTA PK18GTA PK23GTA PK23GTA PK23GTA PK23GTA PK23GTA PK18GTA PK23GTA PK27GTA PK27GTA PK27GTA PK27GTA HOM816M100PC HOM1224M100PC HOM2040M100PC HOM2448M100PC HOM3060M100PC HOM2448M125PC HOM3060M125PC 6–1 6–2/0 6–1 6–2/0 6–2/0 6–2/0 6–1/0 6–2/0 Convertible Mains—Factory-installed Main Circuit Breaker QOM2 Main Frame Size—Convertible to Main Lugs or Lower Amperage Main Circuit Breaker (See 1Ø3W—120/240 Vac—UL Listed, page 1-20) 150 A HOM3060M150PC HOM2040M200PC HOM3060M200PC HOM4080M200PC HOM4284M200PC HOM60120M200C [7] HOM4284M225PC Above listings through 200 A mains rating meet Federal Specification W-P-115c as Type 1, Class 2. 60 40 60 80 84 120 84 30 20 30 40 42 60 42 30 20 30 40 42 60 42 200 A 225 A 4–250 4–250 4–300 4–250 [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] Maximum single pole branch circuits utilizing HOM and/or HOMT circuit breakers. C at end of catalog number indicates combination flush/surface cover included with device. See Indoor Knockout Information and Enclosure Dimensions, page 1-24 F/S at end of catalog number indicates to order F for flush device or S for surface device. The cover does not have a door. HOM-GFI and HOM-AFI branch circuit breakers are limited to number 10 maximum wire. 70 A maximum branch circuit breaker, 100 A maximum back feed main circuit breaker. Door kit available separately. Order QOCDK60. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 2 4 21 6  6 8 8 10 10 12 12 25 6 6 8 8 10 9 9 12 12 5 6 7 8 10 8 10 10 9 10 12 12 25 12 1-19 11/10/2017


page 24

Homeline™ Load Centers Rainproof, 1Ø, Main Lugs and Main Circuit Breakers Class 1170 / Refer to Catalog 1100CT0501 schneider-electric.us Rainproof, 1Ø, Main Lugs and Main Circuit Breakers 1Ø3W—120/240 Vac—UL Listed Table 1.43: Convertible Main Load Centers (Accepts Only HOM Plug-On Circuit Breakers.) Mains Rating Spaces Max. Single Circuits [8] Pole Max. Tandem Circuit Breakers Load Center Box, Interior and Cover Cat. No. (DE3C) Main Lugs—10 kA Short Circuit Current Rating Factory-installed Fixed Main Lugs, 10 kA Short Circuit Current Rating Bar Kit Equipment Ground (Order Separately) Cat. No. (DE3A) Box No. [9] 1 L O A D C E N T E R S Convertible Mains with Factory-installed Main Lugs [12], QOM1 Main Frame Size—Convertible to Main Circuit Breaker (See Below) Convertible Mains with Factory-installed Main Lugs [12], QOM2 Main Frame Size—Convertible to Main Circuit Breaker (See Below) Main Circuit Breaker—22 kA Short Circuit Current Rating Convertible Mains with Factory-Installed Main Circuit Breaker, QOM1 Main Frame Size—Convertible to Main Lugs or Lower Amperage Main Circuit Breaker (See Below) [13] Convertible Mains with Factory-installed Main Circuit Breaker , QOM2 Main Frame Size—Convertible to Main Lugs or Lower Amperage Main Circuit Breaker (See Below) Main Wire Size AWG/kcmil Al 12–3 12–2/0 Cu 14–4 14–2/0 8–1 6–2/0 6–1 4–300 4–250 6–2/0 6–2/0 6–1 6–1 4–250 4–250 4–250 4–250 R A I N P R O O F R A I N P R O O F 70 A 100 A 125 A 125 A 225 A 100 A 125 A 150 A 200 A 150 A   200 A  2  6 4  8 12 20 24 12 16 20 30 40 42  8 12 20 8 24 30 12 20 30 40  8  8  4 12 8 16 24 40 48 12 32 40 60 80 84 16 24 40 16 48 60 12 40 60 80 16 16  2  6 4  8 12 20 24  0 16 20 30 40 42  8 12 20 8 24 30 0 20 30 40  8  8 HOM24L70RB [10] HOM612L100RB [11] HOM48L125GRB HOM816L125PRB HOM1224L125PRB HOM2040L125PRB HOM2448L125PRB HOM12L225PRB HOM1632L225PRB HOM2040L225PRB HOM3060L225PRB HOM4080L225PRB HOM4284L225PRB HOM816M100PRB HOM1224M100PRB HOM2040M100PRB HOM816M125PRB HOM2448M125PRB HOM3060M150PRB HOM12M200PRB HOM2040M200PRB HOM3060M200PRB HOM4080M200PRB HOM816M150PFTRB HOM816M200PFTRB Convertible Mains with Factory-installed Main Circuit Breaker with Feed-thru Lugs, QOM2 Main Frame Size—Convertible to Main Lugs or Lower Amperage Main Circuit Breaker (See Below) [12] Above listings through 200 A mains rating meet Federal Specification W-P-115c as Type 1, Class 2. 1Ø, Field-Installed Mains Kits Table 1.44: For Convertible Load Centers Only QOL125 QOL225 Field- Installed Main Type Main Lugs [16] Main Circuit Breaker [13] Frame Size Main [14] Ampere Rating — QOM1 QOM2 [17] 125 A 225 A  50 A  60 A  70 A  80 A  90 A 100 A 110 A 125 A 100 A 125 A 150 A 175 A 200 A 225 A Use on Convertible Load Center with Mains Rating 100–125 A 150–225 A 100–125 A 100–125 A 100–125 A 100–125 A 100–125 A 100–125 A 125 A 125 A 150–225 A 150–225 A 150–225 A 200–225 A 200–225 A 225 A PK4GTA PK7GTA PK7GTA Included PK9GTA PK15GTA PK18GTA PK23GTA PK9GTA PK15GTA PK18GTA PK23GTA PK27GTA PK27GTA PK9GTA PK15GTA PK18GTA PK9GTA PK23GTA PK23GTA PK9GTA PK18GTA PK23GTA PK27GTA PK15GTA PK15GTA Cat. No. QOL125 QOL225 QOM50VH QOM60VH QOM70VH QOM80VH QOM90VH QOM100VH QOM110VH QOM125VH QOM2100VH QOM2125VH QOM2150VH QOM2175VH QOM2200VH QOM2225VH 1R 2R 15R 3R 3R 4R 6R 5R  6R 6R 7R 14R 14R 3R 3R 4R 3R 6R 7R 5R 6R 7R 14R 6R 6R [15] Lug Wire Size AWG/kcmil 6–2/0 Al or Cu 6–300 Al or Cu 12–2/0 Al or Cu 4–300 Al or Cu 70 A maximum branch circuit breaker, 100 A maximum back feed main circuit breaker. Maximum single pole branch circuits utilizing HOM and/or HOMT circuit breakers. See Rainproof, Dimensions, Knockouts and Bolt-on Hubs, page 1-26 [8] [9] [10] HOM-GFI and HOM-AFI branch circuit breakers are limited to number 10 maximum wire. [11] [12] Side hinge door device allow 1-1/4 in. on left side for door to open. [13] [14] Do not exceed the load center mains rating. [15] Wire range listed for main device kits is the wire range of that device. To find out maximum wire size permitted in a particular load center per UL, see tables in QO™ Load Centers, page 1-3 22 k AIR main circuit breaker UL Listed for use ahead of HOM and HOMT 10 k AIR branch circuit breakers to permit their application on systems with up to 22 kA available fault current. and QO™ and Homeline™ Load Centers and Circuit Breakers, page 1-16 under Main Wire Size. If main circuit breaker knockout has been removed from the load center’s trim, order appropriate filler plate from QO and Homeline Load Center Accessories, page 1-17. [16] [17] Add suffix 1021 for 120, 208, 240 Vac shunt trip. 1-20 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 25

S R E T N E C D A O L 1 Plug-On Circuit Breakers Class 1170 / Refer to Catalog 1100CT0501 schneider-electric.us Homeline™ Circuit Breakers Homeline Plug-On Circuit Breakers The Square D Homeline circuit breakers are in a 1 in. wide format for 1-pole circuit breakers. They are designed to plug into Homeline load centers. Table 1.45: HOM Ampere Rating  15 A  20 A  25 A  30 A  35 A  40 A  45 A  50 A  60 A  70 A  80 A  90 A 100 A 110 A 125 A 150 A 175 A 200 A AIR 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA HOM 1P 1 Space Required HOM 2P 2 Spaces Required HOM2200BB Branch Circuit Breaker 4 Spaces Required 1P—120/240 Vac Cat. No. HOM115 [1][2] HOM120 [1][2] HOM125 [2] HOM130 [2] — HOM140 [2] — HOM150 [2] — — — — — — — — — — 2P—120/240 Vac Common Trip Cat. No. HOM215 [2] HOM220 [2] HOM225 [2] HOM230 [2] HOM235 [2] HOM240 [2] HOM245 [2] HOM250 [2] HOM260 [2] HOM270 [2] HOM280 [2] HOM290 [2] HOM2100 [2] HOM2110 [2] HOM2125 [2] HOM2150BB [2][3] HOM2175BB [2][3] HOM2200BB [2][3] Homeline High Magnetic (HM) Circuit Breakers High magnetic trip circuit breakers are recommended for applications where high initial inrush current may occur. Table 1.46: HOM-HM Amperes 15 A 20 A 1P—120/240 Vac HOM115HM [4] HOM120HM [4] 2Ps — — Homeline Combination Arc Fault Circuit Interruptors (HOM-CAFI) Homeline Combination Arc Fault Circuit Interrupters—Provide overload and short circuit protection, plus arc fault protection in accordance with the NEC and UL1699. Table 1.47: HOM-CAFI Circuit Breaker Type One-Pole Combination Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter with Pigtail Neutral Plug-On Neutral Combination Arc-Fault Interrupter Two-Pole Combination Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter with Pigtail Neutral Ampere Rating Poles 120 Vac 15 A 20 A 15 A 20 A 15 A 20 A 1 1 1 1 2 2 Cat. No. HOM115CAFI [4] HOM120CAFI [4] HOM115PCAFI [4] HOM120PCAFI [4] HOM215CAFI [4] [5] HOM220CAFI [4] [5] Homeline Dual Function Circuit Breaker (HOM-DF) Homeline Combination Arc Fault and Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters (Dual Function)— Provide overload and short circuit protection, plus arc fault and ground fault protection in a single device in accordance with the NEC, UL1699 and UL943. Table 1.48: HOM-DF Circuit Breaker Type Combination Arc-Fault and Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter with Pigtail Neutral Plug-On Neutral Combination Arc-Fault and Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Ampere Rating 15 A 20 A 15 A 20 A Poles 120 Vac 1 1 1 1 Cat. No. HOM115DF [4] HOM120DF [4] HOM115PDF [4] HOM120PDF [4] HOM 1P CAFI Plug-on Neutral HOM 1P CAFI Pigtail HOM 1P DF Plug-on Neutral HOM 1P DF Pigtail [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] UL Listed as SWD (switching duty) rated. Suitable for switching 120 Vac fluorescent lighting loads. UL Listed as HACR type for use with air conditioning, heating and refrigeration equipment haing motor group combinations and marked for use with HACR type circuit breakers. Requires four spaces (1 AWG–300 kcmil Al/Cu). Use only in 1Ø panel rated 150 A or greater. UL Listed as HACR type for use with air conditioning, heating and refrigeration equipment haing motor group combinations and marked for use with HACR type circuit breakers. For 120/240 V only, not for 208Y/120 V. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 1-21 11/10/2017


page 26

1 L O A D C E N T E R S Homeline™ Circuit Breakers Plug-On Circuit Breakers Class 1170 / Refer to Catalog 1100CT0501 Homeline GFI (HOM-GFI) HOM-GFI circuit breakers provide overload and short circuit protection, combined with Class A ground fault protection. Class A denotes a ground fault circuit interrupter that will trip when a fault current to ground is 6 milliamperes or more. schneider-electric.us Table 1.49: HOM-GFI Ampere Rating 15 A 20 A 30 A 40 A 50 A AIR 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 1P—120 Vac 1 Space Required HOM115GFI HOM120GFI — — — 2P—120/240 Vac Common Trip 2 Spaces Required HOM215GFI HOM220GFI HOM230GFI HOM240GFI HOM250GFI Homeline Equipment Protection Device (HOM-EPD) Homeline Equipment Protection Device—Circuit Breakers with 30 mA Equipment Ground Fault Protection (UL Listed). HOM 1P GFI (With Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter) 1 Space Required HOM 2P GFI (With Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter) 2 Spaces Required Table 1.50: HOM-EPD—10 k AIR Amperes 15 A 20 A 25 A 30 A 40 A 50 A 1P—120 Vac HOM115EPD HOM120EPD 2P—120/240 Vac Common Trip HOM215EPD HOM220EPD HOM225EPD HOM230EPD HOM240EPD HOM250EPD HOMT Tandem and HOMT Quad Tandem Circuit Breakers Table 1.51: HOMT Tandem Circuit Breakers Ampere Rating [6] 1P Tandem—120/240 Vac (One Space Required) — — — — AIR 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA AIR 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA HOMT1515 [7] HOMT1520 [7] HOMT2020 [7] HOMT3015 [7] HOMT3020 [7] 2P Tandem—120/240 Vac (Two Spaces Required) HOMT1515215 [7] HOMT1515220 [7] HOMT1515225 [7] HOMT1515230 [7] HOMT1515240 [7] HOMT1515250 [7] HOMT2020220 [7] HOMT2020225 [7] HOMT2020230 [7] HOMT2020240 [7] HOMT2020250 [7] Table 1.52: HOMT Quad Tandem Circuit Breakers Ampere Rating [6] 15 and 15 A 15 and 20 A 20 and 20 A 30 and 15 A 30 and 20 A 1P (2) 15 A (2) 15 A (2) 15 A (2) 15 A (2) 15 A (2) 15 A (2) 20 A (2) 20 A (2) 20 A (2) 20 A (2) 20 A 2P 15 A 20 A 25 A 30 A 40 A 50 A 20 A 25 A 30 A 40 A 50 A NOTE: Typical catalog number (e.g. HOMT 1515230) represents two 1P, outer poles (two 15 A 1P CBs) and one 2P inner circuit breaker with common trip (one 30 A 2P CB). HOMT Quad Circuit Breaker 2 Spaces Required [6] [7] 1-22 15– 20 A tandem or quad tandem circuit breakers are suitable for use with 60oC or 75oC conductors. 25–50 A tandem or quad tandem circuit breakers are suitable for use with 75oC conductors only. UL Listed as HACR type for use with air conditioning, heating and refrigeration equipment haing motor group combinations and marked for use with HACR type circuit breakers. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 27

Plug-On Circuit Breakers Class 1170 / Refer to Catalog 1100CT0501 schneider-electric.us Homeline™ Circuit Breakers HOM Plug-On Neutral Load Centers with Qwik-Grip Qwik grip simplifes rough-in by elimininating the need for most knockout removals and eliminates the use of most box connectors. With a quick bend of the NM-B wire using the wire bend guide on the Qwik-Grip insert, the wire easily slides into the slot. Solution is UL listed. HOM Plug-on Neutral Load Center with Qwik-Grip Table 1.53: HOM Plug-on Neutral Load Centers with Qwik-Grip Load Center Breakers Cat. No. Max. Tandem Circuit Breakers Max. 1P Circuits Main Ratings Spaces Box, Interior, Cover and Branch Circuit 125 A 24 30 48 60 24 30 HOM2448L125PQGC HOM3060L125PQGC Main Wire Size AWG/kcmil Al 6–2/0 6–2/0 Cu 6–1/0 6–2/0 Convertible Mains—Factory-Installed Main Lugs, 10 kA Short Circuit Current Rating— QOM2 Main Frame Size, Convertible to Main Circuit Breaker I N D O O R 225 A 30 40 60 80 30 40 HOM3060L225PQGC HOM4080L225PQGC 4–250 4–250 Equipment Ground Bar Kit Cat. No. PK15GTAL Included PK23GTAL Included PK15GTAL and PK15GTA Included PK15GTAL and PK15GTA Included Box No. 8Q 10Q  10Q  12Q Convertible Mains—Factory-Installed Main Circuit Breaker, 22 kA Short Circuit Current Rating— QOM2 Main Circuit Breaker Frame Size, Convertible to Main Lugs or Main Circuit Breaker 10Q HOM3060M200PQC PK23GTA 4–250 60 30 30 (Order seperately) 40 80 40 HOM4080M200PQC 4–250 PK27GTA (Order seperately) 12Q 200 A S R E T N E C D A O L 1 Homeline Circuit Breaker Wire Sizes Table 1.54: Circuit Breaker Wire Sizes Ampere Rating Breaker Type Wire Size (AWG/kcmil) [8] HOM 1P HOM 2P 15–30 A 40–50 A 15–30 A 35–70 A  80–125 A 150–200 A 15–30 A 40–50 A 15–20 A 15–50 A 4 AWG–300 kcmil 4 AWG–300 kcmil Quad Only HOMT and Quad 14–8 AWG 6–12 AWG 14–10 AWG 12–4 AWG Accessories for Homeline Circuit Breakers HOM-GFI - 1P HOM-GFI - 2P Aluminum 14–8 AWG 8–2 AWG 14–8 AWG 8–2 AWG 4–2/0 AWG Copper 14–8 AWG or (2) 14–10 AWG 8–2 AWG 14–8 AWG or (2) 14–10 AWG 8–2 AWG 4–2/0 AWG 14–8 AWG 6–14 AWG 14–10 AWG 14–6 AWG Table 1.55: Accessories Description Handle Attachments Handle Tie: Converts any two adjacent 120/240 Vac single HOM circuit breakers to independent trip 2P Handle Tie: Converts any two adjacent 120/240 Vac 1P side-by-side HOMT circuit breakers to independent trip 2P Handle Clamp: Clamp for holding HOM 1P handle in the ON or OFF position Handle Blocking Device: Attaches to standard HOM 2P circuit breakers for holding the handle in the OFF position Handle Padlock Attachment: For padlocking 1P Standard HOM breakers in the ON or OFF position Handle Padlock Attachment: For padlocking 2P Standard HOM circuit breakers in ON or OFF position Handle Padlock Attachment: For padlocking 1P CAFI, DF, GFI, and EPD HOM breakers in ON or OFF position Handle Padlock Attachment: For padlocking 2P CAFI, GFI, and EPD HOM breakers in ON or OFF position Handle Padlock Attachment: For padlocking center poles of Homeline Quad breakers in the OFF position Handle Padlock Attachment: For padlocking main circuit breakers in convertible load center in OFF position Sub-Feed Lugs 125 A 2P plug-on—2 spaces required 225 A 2P plug-on—4 spaces required 15–70 A 80–125 A 150–200 A 50–125 A 100–225 A Cat. No. HOM1HT HOMTHT QO1LO HOM2HBD HOM1PA HOM2PALA HOM2PAHA HOM2PAVHA HOMELEC1PA HOMELEC2PALA HOMQPA QOM1PA [9] QOM2PA [9] HOML2125 HOML2225 [10] 15–30 A circuit breakers are suitable for use with 60oC or 75oC conductors. 40–125 A circuit breakers are suitable for use with 75oC conductors. 50–125 A QOM1 frame size; 100–225 A QOM2 frame size. [8] [9] [10] Requires four spaces (1 AWG–300 kcmil Al/Cu). Use only in 1Ø panel rated 150 A or greater. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 1-23 11/10/2017


page 28

QO™ and Homeline™ Load Centers Indoor, Dimensions and Knockouts Class 1130, 1170 / Refer to Catalog 1100CT0501 schneider-electric.us Indoor Knockout Information and Enclosure Dimensions Table 1.56: Enclosure Dimensions D in. 3.00 3.19 3.19 3.80 3.75 3.75 3.75 3.75 3.75 3.75 3.75 3.75 mm 76 81 81 97 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 Box No. 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 W in.  5.88 14.25 20.00 20.00 20.00  5.88  7.56  9.62 8.88 8.55 14.25 14.25 14.25 mm 149 362 508 508 508 149 192 244 226 217 362 362 362 Dimensions H in. 13.12 20.92 50.00 62.00 53.00 16.12 23.12 26.12 14.80 23.92 29.86 43.15 48.50 mm  333  531 1270 1727 1346 409 587 663 376 608 758 1096 1235 D in. 3.38 3.75 5.75 5.75 5.75 3.38 4.25 4.75 3.80 3.95 3.75 3.75 3.75 mm  86  95 146 146 146  86 108 121 97 100  95 95 95 1 L O A D C E N T E R S Box No. 1 2 3  4  5  6  7 8  9 10 11 12 W in.  3.81  4.81  4.81  8.88 14.25 14.25 14.25 14.25 14.25 14.25 14.25 14.25 mm  97 122 122 226 362 362 362 362 362 362 362 362 Dimensions H in.  6.72  9.30  9.30 12.57 14.92 17.92 20.92 26.04 29.86 33.78 37.98 39.37 mm 171 236 236 319 379 455 531 661 758 858 965 1000 Table 1.57: Knockout Information Symbol Conduit Size A 1/2 B 3/4 C 1 Knockouts D 1-1/4 E 1-1/2 F 2 G 2-1/2 H 3 I 3-1/2 1-24 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved B,C,D,EB,C,D,ED,E,F,GD,E,F,GB,C,D,EB,C,D,ED,E,F,GD,E,F,GD,E,F,GC,D,E,F11/10/2017


page 29

Indoor, Dimensions and Knockouts Class 1130, 1170 / Refer to Catalog 1100CT0501 QO™ and Homeline™ Load Centers schneider-electric.us Table 1.58: Indoor knockout information and Enclosure Dimensions for Qwik Grip Loadcenters H mm  531  661  758  858  965  1000 D in. 3.75 3.75 3.75 3.75 3.75 3.75 mm 95 95 95 95 95 95 S R E T N E C D A O L 1 Box No.  7Q  8Q  9Q  10Q 11Q 12Q W in. 14.25 14.25 14.25 14.25 14.25 14.25 mm 362 362 362 362 362 362 Dimensions in. 20.92 26.04 29.86 33.78 37.98 39.37 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 1-25 A,BA,BAC,D,E,FA,BA,B,CB,C,D,EC,D,E,FA,BAA,B,C,DA,BA,BA,BC,D,E,FAC,D,E,FB,C,D,EA,B,CA,BAB,C,D,EA,B,C,DAB,CC,D,E,FA,BAC,D,E,FD,E,F,GA,BA,B,CD,E,F,GA,B,C,DC,D,E,FD,E,F,GBox 7QBox 8QBox 9QD,E,F,GA,BAC,D,E,FD,E,F,GC,D,E,FD,E,F,GA,BA,B,CD,E,F,GB,CA,BAD,E,F,GC,D,E,FA,B,C,DD,E,F,G AA,BB,CD,E,F,GC,D,E,FA,BAC,D,E,FD,E,F,GA,BA,B,CD,E,F,GA,B,C,DC,D,E,FD,E,F,GAA,BB,GD,E,F,GB,C,D,EA,BAC,D,E,FD,E,F,GA,BA,B,CD,E,F,GA,B,C,DC,D,E,FBox 10QBox 11QBox 12Q11/10/2017


page 30

1 L O A D C E N T E R S Combination Service Entrance Devices Rainproof, Dimensions, Knockouts and Bolt-on Hubs Class 1130, 1170 / Refer to Catalog 1100CT0501 schneider-electric.us Enclosure Dimensions and Knockout Information Table 1.59: Enclosure Dimensions Dimensions Box No.  1NM  1R [1]  2R  3R  4R  5R  6R  7R  8R 9R 10R 11R 12R 13R 14R 15R 16R 17R W in. 6.52  4.88  8.88 14.75 14.75 14.75 14.75 14.75 14.75  4.56  6.92  7.56  9.62  6.92 14.75 8.88 8.55 8.88 mm 166 124 226 375 375 375 375 375 375 116 176 192 244 176 375 226 217 226 in. 8.79  9.38 12.65 18.92 22.06 26.04 29.86 33.78 37.98  6.50 13.18 23.24 26.24 16.18 39.37 14.80 24.75 12.65 H mm 223  238  321  481  560  661  758  858  965  165  335  590  666  411 1000 376 629 321 D in. 3.90 4.00 4.27 4.52 4.52 4.52 4.52 4.52 4.52 3.88 4.12 4.75 5.50 4.12 4.52 4.27 4.16 4.27 mm 99 102 108 115 115 115 115 115 115 99 105 121 140 105 115 108 106 108 Table 1.60: Knockout Information Symbol Conduit Size A 1/2 in. B 3/4 in. Knockouts D 1-1/4 in. C 1 in. E 1-1/2 in. F 2 in. G 2-1/2 in. H 3 in. Bolt-On Hubs Square D equipment with “R’’ or “RB’’ suffix, designated NEMA 3R rainproof construction, utilizes bolt-on hubs listed below. “RB’’ devices will accept 3/4 in. through 2- 1/2 in. bolt-on hubs without the use of reducers. Off-center conduit thread openings and elongated mounting holes provide quick and easy adjustment to eliminate costly conduit offsets and bends. Catalog suffix “R’’ devices require 3 in. through 4 in. field cut opening. Hubs are suitable for use with conduit having ANSI standard taper pipe thread. Table 1.61: Bolt-On Hubs UL Listed for “RB” Devices Conduit Size Hub Cat. No. 3/4 in. B075 1 in. B100 1-1/4 in. B125 1-1/2 in. B150 2 in. B200 2-1/2 in. B250 NOTE: Closing cap (Cat. No. BCAP) is provided factory-installed on each device having “RB’’ suffix. Table 1.62: Bolt-On Hubs UL Listed for Mounting in Field-Cut Opening Conduit Size Hub Cat. No. 3 in. B300 4 in. B400 Designed for mounting in field cut opening. Includes gasket and four mounting bolts and nuts. HOME250SPA and QO260NATR top endwall has no hub opening. [1] 1-26 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 31

Rainproof, Meter Mains Class 4119, 4120 schneider-electric.us Combination Service Entrance Devices Catalog Number Logic for CSED Table 1.63: Catalog Numbers for Combination Service Entrance Devices R Number Segment C 8 16 D 200 C H X S S R E T N E C D A O L 1 Socket Type Service Disconnect Install Service Feed Spaces (Service Discounts or Branches) Interior Amperage Rating Enclosure Mounting Style Meter Socket Bypass Type Application Character Q R C S Blank Q Blank C O U RA RB # # D F L M 100 125 150 200 225 400 C F R S PF PS H K L N B Blank X S FMG MEG Q Description QO Ringless HOM Ringless QO Ring type HOM Ring type Field Installed Factory Installed Combination overhead/underground Combination overhead/underground Overhead only Underground only “A” Hub provision in top endwall “B” Hub provision in top endwall Maximum # of 1-pole circuits Maximum # of 1-pole spaces Dual main service disconnects (feed-thru lugs on meter mains only) Single main service disconnect with feed-thru lugs Main lug interior (service disconnects field installed) Single main service disconnect 100 A 125 A 150 A 200 A 225 A 400 A Surface mount or convertible to semi-flush (use appropriate flange kit) Semi-flush mount only Reverse mount only Surface mount only Home PoN semi-flush mount device Home PoN surface mount device Horn by-pass K-4 bolt-on, no by-pass Class 320 with lever by-pass Class 320, No by-pass Class 320 with test block by-pass No by-pass 2 piece lever by-pass cover Solar ready Florida Meter Group Meter Equipment Group This table is for interpreting existing part number only. All possible combinations are not available. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 1-27 11/10/2017


page 32

Combination Service Entrance Devices Rainproof, Meter Mains Class 4119, 4120 Table 1.64: Rainproof Meter Mains Rainproof Meter Mains Service Disconnect(s) schneider-electric.us Line Side Main Lugs AWG/ kcmil (Al/ Cu) Service Ground Lug AWG/ kcmil (Al/Cu) Weight Each (Lbs) and Pallet Qty. r e d r O ) ] 2 [ l y ( e p y T b u H e t a r a p e s Load Center and Branch Circuit Breakers (Order separately [1]) Max. Quantity 1P Circuits Tan- dems . x a M g n i t a R e r e p m A Service (Type of Feed) g n i t a R t i u c r i C t n e r r u C t r o h S UL and EU- SERC Cat. No. 2P Circuits (Max.) Type (Order separately [3]) 1 L O A D C E N T E R S UL e p y T s s a p y B g n i t a R e r e p m A Ring Type, QOTM Surface Mount Only 125 A None 200 A None OH/UG OH/UG OH/UG OH/UG Ring Type, HomelineTM Surface Mount Only 125 A None OH/UG None OH/UG 200 A Semiflush Mount only 125 A None OH/UG OH [6]/ UG None 200 A — — — — — 10 kA 22 kA 22 kA 10 kA C125RB CM200S C2M200S C4L200S OH/UG 10 kA SC8L125S OH/UG 10 kA SC12L200S OH/UG OH [6]/ UG 10 kA 10 kA SC8L125F SC12L200F 1 1 1 1 2 4 6 4 6 QOM1-VH QOM2-VH QOM2-VH QO-VH QO HOM HOM HOM HOM None [4] Surface Mount—Supplied with Feed-Thru Lugs and provisions for Branch Circuit Breakers UG UG 22 kA SC816F200F [8] 1 OH [6]/ OH [6]/ QOM2200VH 150 A None OH/UG 200 A None UG Ringless, QOTM Surface Mount Only OH/UG 22 kA SC816F150S [8] — UG 10 kA SC816D150C [8] [11] SU816D150C [8] [11] OH/UG 22 kA SC816F200S [8] — UG 10 kA SC816D200C [8] [11] SU816D200C [8] [11] 200 A None Lever None Horn Lever None None OH/UG — 22 kA 10 kA 22 kA 10 kA 22 kA 22 kA RC200S [14] RCM200SL [14] [15] RC2M200S [14] RC2M200SH [14] RC2M200SL [14] [15] QC12L200S [14] [15] [16] QC12L200C [14] 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 6 6 QOM2150VH [9] HOM2150 [9] HOM QOM2200VH [9] HOM2200 [9] HOM QOM2-VH QOM2-VH QOM2-VH QO-VH QOM2-VH QO-VH QO-VH QO-VH Surface Mount Only, Supplied with Feed-Thru Lugs and provisions for Branch Circuit Breakers QOM2100VH 100 A QC816F100SH [8][14] OH/UG Horn — 1 100 A Horn OH/UG None OH/UG 125 A None OH/UG Horn OH/UG None OH/UG None OH/UG Horn OH/UG Lever OH/UG 150 A — — — — — — — — [15] [16] 22 kA 22 kA QC816F100CH [8] [14] QC816F125S [8][14] [15] 22 kA [15] 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA QC816F125C [8][14] QC816F125SH [8][14] [15] [16] QC816F150S [8][14] [15] [16] QC816F150C [8][14] QC816F150SH [8][14] [15] [16] QC816F150SL [18] [14] [15] [16] [9] 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 QOM2100VH [9] QOM2125VH [9] QOM2125VH [9] QOM2125VH [9] QOM2150VH [9] QOM2150VH [9] QOM2150VH [9] QOM2150-VH [9] . x a M g n i t a R e r e p m A s e c a p S 125 A — 200 A — 200 A —  50 A — 100 A — 125 A [4] — 200 A — [5] 110 A — 200 A — [7] 8 8 8 8 8 200 A 150 A 150 A  50 A 200 A 200 A  50 A 200 A 200 A 200 A  50 A 200 A 50 A 200 A 200 A [7] 100 A 100 A 125 A 125 A 125 A 150 A 150 A 150 A 200 A — — — — — — — — — 16 16 16 16 16 — — — — — — — — — 8 8 8 8 8 — — — — — — — — — 200 A [7] 150 A [10] 100 A [12] 200 A [13] 100 A [12] B A A A A 4–1/0 4–250 4–250 4–250 8–1/0 (2)8–2/0 (2)8–2/0 (2)8–2/0 6–2/0 6–2/0 A–L 4–250 8–2/0 A or B300 A–L 6–2/0 6–2/0 4–250 8–2/0 A–L 4–250 8–2/0 A–L 4–250 8–2/0 A or A–L 6–300 8–1/0 A–L 4–250 8–2/0 A or A–L 6–300 8–1/0 — — — — 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 100 100 100 100 100 150 A [17] 150 A [17] 150 A [17] 150 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 6–350 6–350 6–350 6–350 6–350 6–350 (2)8–2/0 8-1/0 (2)8–2/0 (2)8–2/0 8-1/0 8-1/0 8–2/0 6–350 12-2/0 6–350 8–2/0 6–350 12-2/0 6–350 8–2/0 6–350 12-2/0 6–350 8–2/0 6–350 8–2/0 6–350 12-2/0 6–350 8–2/0 15, 54 26, 24 27, 20 27, 28 31, 24 40, 10 37, 20 47, 10 51, 10 40, 10 48, 18 40, 10 48, 18 26, 24 60 / 14 27, 20 27, 20 60 / 14 43, 21 40, 21 43, 21 40, 21 43, 21 40, 21 43, 21 43, 21 40, 21 43, 21 To order branch circuit breakers, see QO Plug-On Circuit Breakers, page 1-10 To order hubs, see Accessories and Hubs for CSEDs, page 1-33 To order service disconnects, see Circuit Breakers for CSEDs, page 1-32 except as noted) Service disconnect supplied factory-installed. Use only 15–110 A and 150–200 A breakers. Suitable for OH service with addition of tunnel kit (SCTK20). Order separately. Use only 15–100 A and 150–200 A circuit breakers. Supplied with load side feed-thru lugs, for 4 AWG–250 kcmil (Al/Cu) conductors. Service disconnect supplied factory-installed. [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] Use only 15–110 A and 150 A breakers. [11] Convertible to semiflush with SC200F flange kit (order separately). [12] A 100 A circuit breaker can be installed in bottom position only, all other positions are limited to 70 A max. [13] Use only 15–110 A and 150–200 A breakers. [14] Device supplied with barrel lock provisions factory-installed. [15] [16] Suitable for load wires to exit top endwall with addition of Tunnel Kit OHBS, see Table 1.70 Accessories, page 1-33, check with local utility for approval. [17] Use only 15–100 A and 150 A circuit breakers. [18] Supplied with load side feed-thru lugs, for 4 AWG–250 kcmil (Al/Cu) conductors. 1-28 5th jaw factory-installed. 6–350 8-2/0 74 / 12 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 33

Rainproof, Meter Mains Class 4119, 4120 schneider-electric.us Table 1.64 Rainproof Meter Mains (cont'd.) Combination Service Entrance Devices e p y T s s a p y B Service (Type of Feed) UL UL and EU- SERC g n i t a R t i u c r i C t n e r r u C t r o h S Cat. No. 2P Circuits (Max.) Service Disconnect(s) Circuit Breakers Load Center and Branch (Order separately [19]) Max. Quantity . x a M g n i t a R e r e p m A 200 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 125 A [29] 200 A [27] 200 A [27] 100 A 100 A 125 A 125 A 150 A 150 A 150 A 150 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 200 A  50 A s e c a p S 8 8 8 8 — — — 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 1P Circuits Tan- dems 16 16 16 16 — — — 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 8 8 8 8 — — — 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 . x a M e r g e n p i m t a A R 200 A [27] 200 A [27] 200 A [27] 200 A — — — 100 A 100 A 100 A 100 A 150 A [30] 150 A [30] 150 A [30] 150 A [30] 150 A 200 A [27] 200 A [27] 200 A [27] 200 A [27] 200 A 100 A [33] Line Side Main Lugs AWG/ kcmil (Al/ Cu) 6–350 6–350 Service Ground Lug AWG/ kcmil (Al/Cu) Weight Each (Lbs) and Pallet Qty. 8–2/0 43, 21 S R E T N E C D A O L 6–350 12-2/0 40, 21 6–350 8–2/0 74 / 12 6–2/0 6–2/0 27, 32 1 r e d r O ) ] 0 2 [ l y ( e p y T b u H e t a r a p e s A A A A A A A 6–350 8–2/0 6–350 12-2/0 8–2/0 12-2/0 8–2/0 12-2/0 8–2/0 12-2/0 8–2/0 12-2/0 8-2/0 8–2/0 12-2/0 8–2/0 12-2/0 6–350 A 43, 21 40, 21 43, 21 40, 21 43, 21 40, 21 43, 21 40, 21 43, 21 40, 21 72 / 12 43, 21 40, 21 43, 21 40, 21 8-2/0 72 / 12 6–300 6–1/0 48, 18 g n i t a R e r e p m A 200 A None OH/UG Horn OH/UG Horn OH/UG Lever OH/UG Ringless, HomelineTM Surface Mount Only 125 A None OH/UG 200 A None OH/UG — — — — — — 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA QC816F200S [22] [23] [24] [25] QC816F200SH [22] [23] [24] [25] QC816F200CH [22] [23] QC816F200SL [22] [23] [24] [25] 10 kA 10 kA RC8L125S [28] RC12L200S [23] [24] [25] 1 1 1 1 4 6 Type (Order [21]) separately QOM2200VH [26] QOM2200VH [26] QOM2200VH [26] QOM2200-VH [26] HOM HOM None OH/UG 200 A Surface Mount Only, Supplied with Feed-Thru Lugs and provisions for Branch Circuit Breakers QOM2100VH 100 A RC816F100SH [22] RC12L200C [23] OH/UG 22 kA 22 kA HOM Horn — — 6 1 [23] [24] [25] [26] 100 A Horn OH/UG 125 A Horn OH/UG 125 A Horn OH/UG None OH/UG None OH/UG 150 A Horn OH/UG Horn OH/UG Lever OH/UG None OH/UG None OH/UG 200 A Horn OH/UG Horn OH/UG Lever OH/UG 200 A Horn OH/UG — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA 10 kA RC816F100CH[22] [23] [24] RC816F125SH [22] [24] [25] RC816F125CH [22] [23] RC816F150S [22] [23] [25] RC816F150C [22] [23] RC816F150SH [22] [23] [24] [25] RC816F150CH [22] [23] [24] RC816F150SL [23] [24] [31] RC816F200S [22] [23] [24] [25] RC816F200C [22] [23] RC816F200SH[22] [23] [24] [25] RC816F200CH [22] [23] [24] RC816F200SL [22] [23] [24] [31] RC816D200CH [32] [22] [24] [28] 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 QOM2100VH [26] QOM2125VH [26] QOM2125VH [26] QOM2150VH [26] QOM2150VH [26] QOM2150VH [26] QOM2150VH [26] QOM2150-VH [26] QOM2200VH [26] QOM2200VH [26] QOM2200VH [26] QOM2200VH [26] QOM2200-VH [26] HOM2200 [26] HOM 5th jaw factory-installed. To order branch circuit breakers, see QO Plug-On Circuit Breakers, page 1-10 To order hubs, see Accessories and Hubs for CSEDs, page 1-33 To order service disconnects, see Circuit Breakers for CSEDs, page 1-32 except as noted) [19] [20] [21] [22] Supplied with load side feed-thru lugs, for 4 AWG–250 kcmil (Al/Cu) conductors. [23] Device supplied with barrel lock provisions factory-installed. [24] [25] Suitable for load wires to exit top endwall with addition of Tunnel Kit OHBS, see Table 1.70 Accessories, page 1-33, check with local utility for approval. [26] Service disconnect supplied factory-installed. [27] Use only 15–100 A and 150–200 A circuit breakers. [28] Knockout provided in cover for use with barrel lock kit SCBRLLOCK (see Accessories). [29] [30] Use only 15–100 A and 150 A circuit breakers. [31] Suitable for load wires to exit top endwall with addition of Tunnel Kit OHBL, see Table 1.70 Accessories, page 1-33, check with local utility for approval. [32] Convertible to semiflush with SC200F flange kit (order separately). [33] A 100 A circuit breaker can be installed in bottom position only, all other positions are limited to 70 A max. 125 A Homeline™ 2P circuit breaker can be installed in top position only. All other positions are limited to 100 A max. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 1-29 11/10/2017


page 34

1 L O A D C E N T E R S Combination Service Entrance Devices Rainproof, All-In-Ones, 100 to 225 A Maximum Class 4120 schneider-electric.us • Ring or ringless type meter socket designs available • UL Listed, suitable only for use as service equipment • Meets EUSERC standards Table 1.65: All-In-One Combination Service Entrance Devices where noted • Service disconnect(s) are supplied factory-installed, except • Semiflush-reverse design available, supplied with load center (indoor access) • Supplied with 100% branch neutrals, all unused terminals • Meets Federal Specification W-P-115c as Type 1, Class 2 may be used for equipment grounding wires. Meter Mains and All-In-Ones (100 to 225 A Maximum) Service Disconnect(s) 2P Circuits (Max.) Type (Factory Installed) Ampere Rating Max. s e c a p S 1P Circuits Tan- dems Circuit Breakers Load Center and Branch (Order separately [34]) Max. Quantity ) y l e t a r a p e s r e d r O ( ] 5 3 [ e p y T b u H Line Side Main Lugs AWG/ kcmil (Al/Cu) Service Ground Lug AWG/ kcmil (Al/Cu) Weight Each (Lbs) and Pallet Qty. . x a M g n i t a R e r e p m A Service (Type of Feed) UL and EUSERC e p y T s s a p y B g n i t a R e r e p m A Ring Type, Homeline™™ Surface Mount Only 100 A 125 A None None OH/UG OH/UG 200 A None 200 A None OH/UG OH/UG None 200 A Semiflush Mount Only 100 A None UG g n i t a R t i u c r i C t n e r r u C t r o h S Cat. No. (DE3A) 10 kA 10 kA 22 kA 10 kA 10 kA SC1624M100S SC1624M125S SC2040M200S SC2040M200C [38] SU2040M200C [38] 125 A None 200 A None 10 kA OH/UG OH/UG 10 kA OH[39]/UG 22 kA OH[39]/UG 22 kA OH[40]/UG 22 kA OH[40]/UG None 225 A Surface Mount Only 100 A 200 A None None OH[42] OH[42] 22 kA 10 kA 22 kA SC1624M100F SC1624M125F SC2040M125F SC2040M200F SC2636M200FPV [41] SC3040M200F SC3040M225F SC2636M225FPV [41] SO1020M100S SO2040M200S SC3040M200S SC40M200S None 22 kA OH/UG UG UG None None 10 kA 10 kA 200 A REVERSE All-In-One—Semiflush Mount with Service Disconnect (outdoor access) and Load Center (indoor access) 200 A 225 A Ringless, Homeline Surface Mount Only 100 A 125 A 125 A 125 A RC1624M100S RC1624M125S SU3040M200R SU3040M225R QOM2200VH QOM2225VH HOM2100 HOM2125 OH/UG [42] 200 A 225 A 10 kA None 1 1 30 16 OH/UG[42] OH/UG[42] OH/UG[42] OH/UG[42] OH/UG[42] OH/UG[42] OH/UG[42] OH/UG[42] OH/UG[42] OH/UG[42] OH/UG[42] 150 A Horn Horn Horn Horn Lever None None Horn Horn Lever None Ringless, QO Surface Mount Only 150 A 200 A 22 kA RC2040M125SH [43] [44] 22 kA RC2040M125CH [43][45] 22 kA RC2040M150SH [43] [44] 22 kA RC2040M150CH [43][45] RC3040M150SL [46] 22 kA 22 kA RC2040M200S [43] [44] 22 kA 22 kA RC2040M200SH [43] [44] 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA RC2040M200CH [43] RC3040M200SL [46] RC2040M200CGP RC2040M200C [43] QOM2125VH QOM2125VH QOM2150VH QOM2150VH QOM2150VH [36] QOM2200VH QOM2200VH QOM2200VH QOM2200VH QOM2200VH [36] QOM2200VH Horn None None Horn Horn None Hom OH/UG[42] OH/UG[42] OH/UG[42] OH/UG[42] OH/UG[42] OH/UG[42] OH/UG[42] [44] QC2442M150SH [43] QC2442M200C [43] QC2442M200SH [43] 22 kA 22 kA QC2442M200S [43] [44] 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA QC2442M200CH [43][45] 22 kA 22 kA QC3040M200S [44] QC3040M200SH [44] [44] 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 QOM2150VH QOM2200VH QOM2200VH QOM2200VH QOM2200VH QOM2200VH QOM2200VH 150 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 24 24 24 24 24 30 30 200 A 200 A HOM2100 HOM2125 QOM2200VH HOM2200 HOM2200 HOM2100 HOM2125 QOM2125VH QOM2200VH QOM2200VH QOM2200VH QOM2225VH QOM2225VH HOM2100 QOM2200VH QOM2200VH QOM2200VH 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 100 A 125 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 100 A 125 A 125 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 225 A 225 A 16 16 20 20 20 16 16 20 20 26 30 30 26 100 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 10 20 30 40 100 A 125 A 125 A 125 A 150 A 150 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 20 20 20 20 30 20 20 20 20 30 20 24 24 40 40 40 24 24 40 40 36 40 40 36 20 40 40 40 40 24 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 42 42 42 42 42 40 40 8 8 20 20 20 8 8 20 20 10 10 10 10 10 20 10 0 10 8 20 20 20 20 10 20 20 20 20 10 20 18 18 18 18 18 10 10 100 A 125 A [36] 200 A [37] 100 A 100 A 100 A 110 A 110 A 200 A [37] 100 A 200 A 200 A 100 A 80 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 200 A [37] 100 A  125 A [36] 125 A 125 A 150 A 150 A 150 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 150 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 200 A A 6–2/0 6–2/0 32, 24 A-L A or A-L A or A-L A or B30- 0 4–250 6–300 6–300 6–2/0 8–1/0 8–1/0 45, 10 47, 18 47, 18 6–2/0 6–2/0 44, 20 A-L 4–250 8–2/0 51, 10 A-L 4–250 8–2/0 56, 10 A A A-L A or B30- 0 6–1 6–350 4–250 4–250 8–4 8–2/0 8–2/0 8–2/0 20, 42 43, 21 50, 10 52, 10 6–300 12–1/0 60, 15 6–2/0 6–2/0 32, 24 A 6–350 8–2/0 A 6–350 8–2/0 43, 21 40, 21 43, 21 40, 21 76 / 12 43, 21 40, 21 43, 21 40, 21 76 / 12 48 / 21 43, 21 43, 21 40, 21 43, 21 40, 21 40, 21 40, 21 To order branch circuit breakers, see QO Plug-On Circuit Breakers, page 1-10 To order hubs, see Accessories and Hubs for CSEDs, page 1-33 125 A Homeline™ 2P circuit breaker can be installed in top position only. All other positions are limited to 100 A max. [34] [35] [36] [37] Use only 15–110 A and 150–200 A circuit breakers. [38] Convertible to semiflush with SC200F flange kit (order separately). [39] Suitable for OH service with addition of tunnel kit (SCTK20). Order separately. [40] Suitable for OH service with addition of tunnel kit (SCTK30). Order separately. [41] [42] Device does not meet EUSERC Specifications. [43] Device supplied with barrel lock provisions factory-installed. [44] Suitable for load wires to exit top endwall with addition of Tunnel Kit OHBS, (see Table 1.70 Accessories, page 1-33, check with local utility for approval. [45] [46] Suitable for load wires to exit top endwall with addition of Tunnel Kit OHBL, (see Table 1.70 Accessories, page 1-33, check with local utility for approval. 1-30 5th jaw factory-installed. For use with Photovoltaic Systems. Provisions for field-installed CT. If required by adopted code, order retaining kit PK2SCPV separately, see Table 1.70 Accessories, page 1-33. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 35

schneider-electric.us Rainproof, Meter Mains and All-In-Ones, 300–400 A Class 4119, 4120 Combination Service Entrance Devices Meter Mains and All-in-Ones (300–400 A Devices) • Service disconnects are supplied factory-installed, except where noted • Supplied with 100% branch neutrals; all unused terminals may be used for equipment • Meets Federal Specification W-P-115c as Type 1, Class 2 grounding wires Meter Mains: Meets Federal Specification W-P-115c as Type 1, Class 2, UL Listed, suitable only for use as service equipment, 120/240 Vac, 1Ø3W, NEMA 3R Enclosure S R E T N E C D A O L Meter Mains and All-in-Ones • Ring or ringless type meter socket designs available • UL Listed, suitable only for use as service equipment • Meets EUSERC standards where indicated. Table 1.66: Meter Mains Service (Type of Feed) e p y T s s a p y B g n i t a R e r e p m A Ring Type, QO Surface and Semiflush Mount [47] UL and EU- SERC UL g n i t a R t i u c r i C t n e r r u C t r o h S None UG UG 25 kA 400 A 400 A 400 A 400 A 400 A Class 320 Manual Bypass None Class 320 Manual Bypass Class 320 Manual Bypass CU12L400CN [51] CU12L400FN [51] CU12L400CB [51] [56] CU12L400FB [51] [56] UG — 25 kA UG UG UG UG 25 kA CU816D400CN [51] [57] — — 25 kA CU816D400CB [51] [55] [56] 65 kA [47] CUM400CB [51] [56] Service Disconnect(s) [47] Circuit Breakers Load Center and Branch (Order separately [48]) Max. Quantity Cat. No. 2P Cir- cuits (Max.) (Order separately Type [50]) Ampere Rating (Max.) s e c a p S 1P Circuits Tan- dems 200 A 200 A — — 125 A [55] — — — 125 A [55] — 200 A 200 A — — — — — — — — — — — — QDL22200 [52] QDL, QGL, QJL [53] QO, QO-VH or QOH [54] QDL22200 [52] QDL, QGL, QJL [53] QO, QO-VH or QOH [54] QDL22200 [52] QDL, QGL, QJL [53] 200 A 8 16 8 200 A LJL36400U31X [52] 400 A — 2 [58] 200 A A–L Ringless Type, QO 400 A Class 320 Lever UG — 25 kA QU12L400SL [59] [56] QDL22200 [52] QDL, QGL, QJL [53] QO, QO-VH or QOH [54] 200 A 200 A — — 125 A [55] — Surface Mount Only, Supplied with Feed-Thru Lugs and Provisions for Branch Circuit Breakers QDL22200 [52] 400 A QU816D400SL [55] [59] 25 kA [60] [56] UG — QU816D400CK [57] [56] QDL, QGL, QJL [53] 200 A 8 Surface and Semiflush Mount [47] 400 A 400 A 400 A 400 A Class 320 Lever Class 320 Lever K-4 Bolt- On None UG — 25 kA QU12L400CL [59] [61] [56] UG UG UG — — — 25 kA 65 kA [47] 65kA [47] QU816D400CL [59] [55] [61] [56] QU816D400FL [59] [55] [61] [56] QUM400CL [59] [56] QUM400CK [51] [56] 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 QDL22200 [52] QDL, QGL, QJL [53] QO, QO-VH or QOH [54] QDL22200 [52] QDL, QGL, QJL [53] 200 A 200 A — — 125 A [55] — 200 A 8 LJL36400U31X [52] 400 A — 2 [58] LJL36400U31X [52] 400 A — 2 [58] — — — 16 — — — 16 1 1 4 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 4 1 ) ] 9 4 [ y l e t a r a p e s r e d r O ( e p y T b u H Line Side Main Lugs AWG/ kcmil (Al/ Cu) Service Ground Lug AWG/ kcmil (Al/Cu) Weight Each (Lbs) and Pallet Qty. 1 A–L (2) Studs 4–250 98, 4 . x a M g n i t a R e r e p m A — — — — — — A–L A–L A–L (2) Studs (2) Studs (2) Studs (2) Studs 4–250 98, 4 4–250 98, 4 4–250 98, 4 4–250 115, 4 — — — A–L (2) Studs 4–250 98, 4 200 A A–L (2) Studs 4–250 98, 4 — — — A–L (2) Studs 4–250 98, 4 200 A A–L 200 A A–L 200 A A–L (2) Studs (2) Studs (2) Studs 4–250 98, 4 4–250 120, 4 4–250 123, 4 — — — — 8 — — — 8 — — To order branch circuit breakers, see QO Plug-On Circuit Breakers, page 1-10 To order hubs, see Accessories and Hubs for CSEDs, page 1-33 To order service disconnects, see Circuit Breakers for CSEDs, page 1-32 except as noted) For use only on 120/240 Vac 1Ø3W system (4-jaw meter socket). [47] UL short circuit current rating is equal to the lowest interrupting rating of any circuit breaker installed. [48] [49] [50] [51] [52] Service disconnect supplied factory-installed. [53] Additional service disconnect for field-installation: order prefix QBL at 10 kA, QDL at 25 kA, QGL at 65 kA, or QJL at 100 kA. Order separately. For complete circuit breaker catalog number, see Digest Section 7. [54] Order two pole circuit breakers for field installation: order catalog designation QO for 10 kA, QO-VH for 22 kA or QOH for 42 kA short circuit current rating. See Table 1.18 Plug-On Circuit Breakers, page 1-10 or Table 1.68 Circuit Breakers for use with Meter Mains and All-In-One Devices, page 1-32. [55] QO panel is rated 200 A maximum. [56] Device configuration is not included in EUSERC standards. Consult applicable utility for acceptance. [57] Supplied with load side feed-thru lugs for 6 AWG–250 kcmil (Al/Cu) conductors. [58] Option for field installation of two Q-frame, 200 A max. 2-pole branch circuit breakers used as mains for two downstream load centers. Purchase installation kit BMK2Q400 and two Q-frame circuit breakers separately. Order QBL prefix at 10 kA, QDL prefix at 25 kA, or QGL prefix at 65 kA. Fifth jaw factory-installed. [59] [60] Device with suffix L has Class 320 lever bypass and device with suffix K has a K-4 bolt-on, no bypass. [61] Knockout provided in cover for use with barrel lock kit SCBRLLOCK (see Table 1.70 Accessories, page 1-33). © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 1-31 11/10/2017


page 36

Combination Service Entrance Devices 1 Table 1.67: All-in-One Combination Service Entrance Devices Surface and Semiflush Mount[62] Ring Type, Homeline Circuit Breakers for CSEDs Class 4119, 4120 schneider-electric.us L O A D C E N T E R S 300 A Class 320 Manual UG — 25 kA 400 A None UG UG 25 kA 400 A Class 320 Manual UG — 25 kA Ringless, Homeline 400 A Class 320 Lever 400 A K-4 Bolt- on UG UG — — 25 kA 25 kA SU3040D300CB[63][64] [65] SU3040D300FB[63][64] [65] SU3040D400CN[63][64] SU3040D400FN[63][64] SU3040D400CB[63][64] [65] SU3040D400FB[63][64] [65] RU3040D400CL[64][68] [65] RU3040D400FL[64][68] [65] RU3040D400CK[64][65] RU3040D400FK[64][65] 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 QDL22200 [66] QDL, QGL, QJL [67] QDL22200 [66] QDL, QGL, QJL [67] QDL22200 [66] QDL, QGL, QJL [67] 200 A 100 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 30 30 30 QDL22200 [66] 200 A 30 200 A QDL22200 [66] QDL, QGL, QJL [67] 1 1 1 Circuit Breakers for CSEDs QDL, QGL, QJL [67] 200 A 200 A 30 Table 1.68: Circuit Breakers for use with Meter Mains and All-In-One Devices Type: HOM, 1P Type: HOM, 2P Type: QO, 1P 40 40 40 40 40 10 10 10 10 10 200 A A–L (2) Studs 4–250 100, 4 200 A A–L (2) Studs 4–250 100, 4 200 A A–L (2) Studs 4–250 100, 4 200 A A–L (2) Studs 4–250 100, 4 200 A A–L (2) Studs 4–250 100, 4 Ampere Rating [69] 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 125 150 175 200 Cat. No. (DE3D) Cat. No. (DE3D) — HOM115 HOM120 HOM125 HOM130 HOM140 HOM150 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — HOM230 HOM235 HOM240 HOM245 HOM250 HOM260 HOM270 HOM280 HOM290 HOM2100 HOM2110 HOM2125 HOM2150BB HOM2175BB HOM2200BB Cat. No. (DE2A) QO110 QO115 QO120 QO125 QO130 QO135 QO140 QO145 QO150 QO160 QO170 — — — — — — — — Type: QO, 2P Cat. No. (DE2A) Type: QO-VH, 1P Type: QO-VH, 2P Cat. No. (DE2A) Cat. No. (DE2A) — — — — QO230 QO235 QO240 QO245 QO250 QO260 QO270 QO280 QO290 QO2100 QO2110 QO2125 QO2150 QO2175 QO2200 — QO115VH QO120VH QO125VH QO130VH — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — QO230VH QO240VH QO250VH QO260VH QO270VH QO280VH QO290VH QO2100VH QO2110VH QO2125VH QO2150VH QO2175VH QO2200VH Ampere Rating [69] 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 125 150 175 200 225 Type: QOM1-VH, 2P Cat. No. (DE3D) QOM50VH [71] QOM60VH QOM70VH QOM80VH QOM90VH QOM100VH QOM110VH QOM125VH — — — — Type: QOM2-VH, 2P Cat. No. (DE3D) Type: QDL, 2P [70] Cat. No. (DE2A) — — — — — — QOM2100VH QOM2125VH QOM2150VH QOM2175VH QOM2200VH QOM2225VH — — QDL22070 QDL22080 QDL22090 QDL22100 QDL22110 QDL22125 QDL22150 QDL22175 QDL22200 — For use only on 120/240 Vac 1Ø3W system (4-jaw meter socket). [62] UL short circuit current rating is equal to the lowest interrupting rating of any circuit breaker installed. [63] [64] Knockout provided in cover for use with barrel lock kit SCBRLLOCK (see Accessories). [65] Device configuration is not included in EUSERC standards. Consult applicable utility for acceptance. [66] Service disconnect supplied factory-installed. [67] Additional service disconnect for field-installation: order prefix QBL at 10 kA, QDL at 25 kA, QGL at 65 kA, or QJL at 100 kA. Order separately. For complete circuit breaker catalog number, see Digest Section 7. 5th jaw factory-installed. [68] [69] Do not exceed mains rating of device [70] [71] Reference National Electrical Code Article 230-79. 1-32 For additional interrupting rating circuit breakers, order circuit breaker prefix QBL at 10 kA, QGL at 65 kA or QJL at 100 kA. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 37

Accessories and Hubs for CSEDs Class 4119, 4120 Combination Service Entrance Devices schneider-electric.us Table 1.69: Hubs and Closing Plates Closing Plate for “A” Hub opening Conduit Size (inches) Cat. No. Hub Series A A-L Adapter plate to allow use of “A” Hubs on “A-L” size hub openings Closing Plate for “A-L” Hub opening 1.00 1.25 1.50 2.00 2.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00 Closing Plate for “B” Hub opening B B300 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 Accessories and Hubs for CSEDs Table 1.70: Accessories Description ACP A100 A125 A150 A200 A250 AAP ACPL A200L [72] A250L A300L A350L A400L BCAP B075 B100 B125 B150 B200 B250 B300 S R E T N E C D A O L 1 Disc. Sch. DE4 DE4 DE4 DE4 DE4 DE4 DE4 DE4 DE4 DE4 DE4 DE4 DE4 DE1A DE1A DE1A DE1A DE1A DE1A DE1A DE1A Cat. No. Disc. Sch. RCGK2 QCGK3 PK2SCPV 5J MMHB 29007 2920910001 29008W ARP00026 MMLRK SU2X6TRIM SCBRLLOCK SC200F FK400 R400L DE4 DE4 DE4 DE4 DE4 DE4 DE5 DE4 DE4 DE4 DE4 DE4 DE4 DE4 DE4 CMELK4 DE4 BMK2Q400 DE4 OCK400 PK49SP PK15GTA QOFP HOMFP LK100AN OHBS OHBL DE4 DE1 DE3A DE3A DE3A DE3A DE4 DE4 1-33 Generator Kit: Interlocks main service disconnect and generator circuit breaker (order separately). For : Homeline™ CSED Devices RC816F-, RC2040M-, SO2040M- containing suffix -C or -CH QO CSED Devices QC816F-, QC2442M- containing suffix -C or -CH Backfed inverter circuit breaker retaining kit for SC2636M200FPV and SC2636M225FPV Meter Main Types: C, RC, SC, QC Fifth Jaw Kit for: All-In-One Types: SC, SU (100–225 A), QC, RC, SO Bypass (Horn Type) for Ringless Type Meter Mains and All-In-Ones (100–200 A) (except for RC8L125S, RC1624M100S and RC1624M125S–use RCHB). Lexan Meter Socket Cover Plate for: Ring and Ringless Type Meter Mains Ring and Ringless Type All-In-Ones Meter Socket Sealing Rings for Ring Type Meter Mains and All-In Ones: Snap Type Aluminum (Std.) Screw Type Aluminum Snap Type Stainless Steel Meter Mains: SC816D150/200C and RC816D200CH All-In-Ones: SC2040M200C Anti-Inversion Kit . For use ONLY on 400 A Meter Mains and All-In-Ones with lever bypass. Trim Kit for 2 in. X 6 in. stud wall, used with Reverse All-In-Ones, SU3040M200R, and SU3040M225R Barrel Lock Kit (Barrel Lock not included), supplied with bracket and mounting screw, refer to listings for where used. Semiflush Flange Kit for: Semiflush Flange Kit for ring- and ringless-type Meter Mains and All-In-Ones (400 A Only) Ringless Type Utility Cover for RU3040D400CL/FL, QU12L400CL/FL, and QU816D400CL/FL. Includes one piece meter socket and pull box cover with handles and closing plate. Lug Kit includes (4) lugs, for use with 2 AWG–600 kcmil Al/Cu conductors. Lugs are for standard 2-Hole mounting. Meter Main and All-In-One units supplied with (2) studs per phase and neutral will accept one lug per phase and neutral. Not for use on 400 A devices with “K” suffix. Branch Circuit Breaker Field Installation Kit for two Q-Frame Circuit Breakers (QBL, QDL, or QGL, order separately). For CUM400CB, QUM400CL or QUM400CK - includes (2) mounting pans, (4) wires. Overhead Feed Trough for 400 A ring- and ringless-type Meter Mains and All-In-Ones. Touch-Up Paint (ASA49 Gray) Ground Bar Kit, Meter Mains and All-In-Ones QC, RC, and SC (100–225 A) Filler Plate for: Filler Plate for: Neutral Lug (6-2/0 AWG) for: Overhead Barrier Tunnel Kit for Ringless & Horn Bypass in RC/QC Devices Overhead Barrier Tunnel Kit for Lever Bypass RC/QC Devices Meter Main Types: QC, CU All-In-One Types: QC Meter Main Types: RC, SC All-In-One Types: SC, RC, SU Meter Main Types: RC, SC, QC All-In-One Types: SC, SU, QC, RC [72] Supplied with AAP adapter plate and “A” hub. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 38

1 L O A D C E N T E R S Combination Service Entrance Devices Dimensions Class 4119, 4120 schneider-electric.us Dimensions for CSEDs Table 1.71: Knockouts A 1/2 B 3/4 C 1 D E 1-1/4 1-1/2 F 2 G 2-1/2 H 3 I 3-1/2 J 4 Symbol Conduit Size (in.) ▲ Driphood supplied factory-installed and is required for surface mount installation. For semi-flush installation, remove driphood and install flange kit SC200F (order separately). ■ Unit supplied with blank top endwall (factory-installed) for surface mount installation. For semi-flush installation, install flange kit FK400 (order separately). Kit includes replacement top endwall (with knockouts) and flanges. ♦ Unit supplied with semi-flush top endwall factory installed and semi-flush flanges factory included. 1-34 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7.1418114.97380“A” HubDrip HoodC,D,FAB,C,D7.50191Semi-Flush End Wall28.287184.6011712.803257.4418913.82351“B” HubC125RB (Shown)CQRB100A,BC,D,E,FRing Type:CM200SC2M200S (Shown)C4L200SRingless Type:RC200SRC2M200SRC2M200SHA,BE,F,G,HD,F,G18.2346310.7027219.58497“A” Hub4.60117A,BB,CA21/2" Max “A” Hub13.463424.56116SO1020M100SC,D,E,F20.795286.441647.501918.0020341.25104828.25718C,D,FAB,CCU12L400CNcCU12L400CBcQU12L400CLcQU12L400SLCU12L400FNfCU12L400FBfCU816D400FNfCU816D400FBfQU816D400CKQU12L400FLfQU816D400FLfCU816D400CBcCU816D400CNcQU816D400CLcQU816D400SL (Shown)Blank End WallG,H,I,J“A-L” HubSU816D150Cq (Shown)SU816D200CqSU2040M200CqRC816D200CHSC816D150CSC816D200Cq32.2381914.813766.9517614.50368B,CC,D,F21/2" Max “A” HubD,F,GA,BC,E,F,G,H21/2" Max“A-L” HubC,D,E,FB,CB,CA10.8727625.1263814.77375SC8L125S (Shown)RC8L125SSC1624M100SSC1624M125SRC1624M100SRC1624M125S4.80122C,D,FAA,BB,C21/2" Max “A” Hub21/2" Max“A” HubD,F,GSurface21/2" Max “A” Hub10.9427840.93104018.35466RC816F100SHRC816F125SHRC816F150S,SHRC816F200S,SHRC12L200SRC2040M125SHRC2040M150SHRC2040M200S,SHQC816F100SHQC816F125SHQC816F150S,SH (Shown)QC816F200S,SHQC12L200SQC2442M150SHQC2442M200S,SHSO2040M200S5.32135C,D,E,FE,F,G,HA,B,CA,BC,D,E,FSC8L125F (Shown)SC1624M100FSC1624M125F25.1263810.872763.398614.50368B,CA,BC,D,FAAA,BB,CD,F,G21/2" Max“A” Hub orB300SU3040M200R (Shown)SU3040M225R14.6237131.6180348.001219B,CBBBD,F,GC,DC,D,FA,BAA7.902014.401123.508927.00686CLMeterSocketCLTopBranchCircuitBreaker“A” Hub orB300 Hub3.4086C,E,F,G,H21/2" Max“A-L” HubSC816F200FSC2040M125FSC2040M200F (Shown)SC3040M200FSC3040M2225FSC2636M200FPV SC2636M225FPV14.8537710.3026235.4089939.601006AA,BC,D,E,F35.40899C,D,E,FB,CAB,CB39.60100621/2" Max “A” Hub29.50749SC12L200SSC816F150SSC816F200SSC40M200SSC2040M200S (Shown)SC3040M200S5.8014721.50546C,E,F,G,H21/2" Max“A-L” HubAB,CBC,D,E,F11.1028232.3082037.30947SC40M200SSC3040M200SG,H,I,J“A-L” Hub8.00203SU3040D400CBc (Shown)RU3040D400CLcRU3040D400CKcSU3040D300FBfSU3040D400FBfSU3040D400FNf7.5019141.25104828.25718C,D,FAB,CBlank End WallSU3040D300CBcSU3040D400CNcRU3040D400FLfRU3040D400FKCUM400CB QUM400CL QUM400CKcqqfccc12.5731948.621235Lever ByPass DevicesQC3040M200SHQC816F150SLQC816F200SLRC816F150SLRC816F200SLRC3040M150SLRC3040M200SL21/2" Max “A” Hub10.0425535.1389214.373654.67119C,D,E,FD,E,F,GA,B,CA,BQC12L200CQC816F100CHQC816F150CQC816F200CHRC12L200CRC816F100CHRC816F125CHRC816F200CRC816F200CHRC2040M125CHRC2040M200CHQC2442M200CQC2442M200CHRC816F150CRC816F150CHRC2040M150CHRC2040M200CQC816F125CQC816F200CLever ByPass Devices11/10/2017


page 39

schneider-electric.us Rainproof, Meter Mains and All-In-Ones, 150 to 200 A Maximum Class 4120 RC/QC Solar Ready CSEDs • Ringless Meter Sockets with barrel lock provisions factory installed except for Cat. No. SO2040M200SS which is a Ring Style meter socket with no provisions for barrel lock to secure the meter cover • UL Listed, suitable only for use as service equipment where noted Meter Mains and All-In-Ones • Service disconnect(s) are supplied factory-installed, except • Supplied with 100% branch neutrals, all unused terminals • Meets Federal Specification W-P-115c as Type 1, Class 2 may be used for equipment grounding wires • All devices have a 3" KO in the bottom endwall • Provisions for Field Installed CTs All Devices • Solar Ready kit SR69064A fits All Devices Below, order from Table 1.66 S R E T N E C D A O L 1 Ampere Rating s e c a p S s t i u c r i C 1P Tan- dems 150 A 150 A 200 A 200 A 150 A 150 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Hub Type (Order Sepa- rately [2]) Line Side Main Lugs AWG/ kcmil (Al/Cu) Service Ground Lug AWG/ kcmil (Al/Cu) A A A A A A 350 8–2/0 6-350 6-350 6-350 6-350 6-350 8–2/0 8–2/0 8–2/0 8–2/0 8–2/0 . x a M g n i t a R e r e p m A 150 A 150 A 200 A 200 A 150 A 150 A 200 A 200 A 200 A Load Center and Branch Circuit Breakers (Order Separately [1]) Max. Quantity Table 1.72: All-In-One Combination Service Entrance Devices Service Type Short Circuit Cur- rent Rating Cat. No. g n i t a R e r e p m A e p y T s s a p y B 2P Circuits (Max.) Service Disconnect(s) Type (Factory Installed except where noted) Meter Mains[3] Surface Mount Only Surface Mount—Supplied with Feed-Thru Lugs and Provisions for Branch Circuit Breakers 150 A 200 A QC816F150SS [4] [5] QC816F150SLS [4] [6] QC816F200SS [4] [5] QC816F200SLS [4] [6] OH/UG OH/UG OH/UG OH/UG 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA None Lever None Lever QOM2150VH QOM2150VH QOM2200VH QOM2200VH 1 1 1 1 Surface Mount—Supplied with Feed-Thru Lugs and provisions for Branch Circuit Breakers 150 A None Lever None Horn Lever 200 A OH/UG OH/UG OH/UG OH/UG OH/UG 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA RC816F150SS [4] [5] RC816F150SLS [4] [6] RC816F200SS [4] [5] RC816F200SHS [4] [7] [5] RC816F200SLS [4] [6] 1 1 1 1 1 QOM2150VH QOM2150VH QOM2200VH QOM2200VH QOM2200VH All-in-One Combination Service Entrance Devices [3] Surface Mount Only 200 A 150 A QC2442M200SS [5] OH/UG OH/UG OH/UG OH/UG OH/UG OH/UG None Horn Horn Lever None Horn None Lever QC2442M200SHS [7] [5] RC2040M150SHS [7] [5] 8–2/0 8–2/0 8–2/0 8–2/0 8–2/0 8–2/0 8–2/0 8–2/0 * Kit is to be installed between meter socket and Main Disconnect. May be used with Solar PV, Wind, fuel generators, and other power generation sources up to 80% of Mains Rating Maximum 160 A. QOM2200VH QOM2200VH QOM2150VH QOM2150VH QOM2200VH QOM2200VH QOM2200VH QOM2200VH 200 A 200 A 150 A 150 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 150 A 150 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 6-350 6-350 6-350 6-350 6-350 6-350 6-350 6-350 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA SO2040M200SS [5] RC3040M200SLS [6] RC3040M150SLS [6] RC2040M200SS [5] RC2040M200SHS [7] [5] 42 42 40 40 40 40 40 40 24 24 20 30 20 20 20 30 18 18 20 10 20 20 20 10 A A A A A A A A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 OH/UG 200 A OH Table 1.73: Knockouts Symbol B Conduit Size 3/4 (in.) A 1/2 C 1 D 1-1/4 E 1-1/2 F 2 G 2-1/2 H 3 I 3-1/2 J 4 RC816F150SS RC816F200SS RC816F200SHS QC816F150SS QC816F200SS RC2040M150SHS RC2040M200SS RC2040M200SHS SO2040M200SS QC2442M200SS QC2442M200SHS QC816F150SLS RC816F150SLS RC3040M150SLS QC816F200SLS RC816F200SLS RC3040M200SLS Table 1.74: All-in-One Combination Service Entrance Devices—Plug on Neutral r e k a e r B n a M i g n i t a R e r e p m A r a B s u B e p y T s s a p y B Service Type g n i t a R t n e r r u C t i u c r i C t r o h S Service Disconnect(s) Load Center and Branch Circuit Breakers (Order Separately ) Max. Quantity Cat. No. 2P Circuits (Max.) Type (Factory Installed except where noted) s e c a p S s t i u c r i C 1P Tandems . x a M g n i t a R e r e p m A Line Side Main Lugs AWG/ kcmil (Al/Cu) Service Ground Lug AWG/ kcmil (Al/Cu) r e d r l O ) y e t a r a p e S ( e p y T b u H Homeline Surface Mount Only None 200 A 200 A OH/UG 22 kA RC3042M200PS [5] 1 QOM2200VH 30 42 12 200 A A 6-350 12–2/0 [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] To order load centers and branch circuit breakers, see QO Plug-On Circuit Breakers, page 1-10 and Homeline Plug-On Circuit Breakers, page 1-21 See Bolt-On Hubs, page 1-26 Solar Ready Kit Part Number SR69064A * (This Kit Fits All Solar Ready Devices) Supplied with load side feed-thru lugs, for 4AWG-250 kcmil Al/Cu conductors. Suitable for load wires to exit top endwall with addition of Tunnel Kit OHBS. See (see Table 1.70 Accessories, page 1-33, check with local utility for approval. Suitable for load wires to exit top endwall with addition of Tunnel Kit OHBL. See(see Table 1.70 Accessories, page 1-33, check with local utility for approval. Device supplied with horn bypass and 5th jaw factory installed © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 1-35 21/2" Max “A” Hub10.9427840.93104018.354665.32135C,D,E,FE,F,G,HA,B,CA,B12.5731948.621235Lever ByPass Devices11/10/2017


page 40

Homeline Solar Ready PoN CSEDs Rainproof, Meter Mains and All-In-Ones, 125 to 225 A Maximum Class 4120 schneider-electric.us • Ring-type Meter Sockets • UL Listed, suitable only for use as service equipment • Service disconnect(s) are supplied factory-installed, except where noted Homeline Solar Ready PoN CSEDs circuit breakers • Interiors accept plug-on neutral and pigtail style branch • Supplied with a fully distributed neutral bar, all unused terminals may be used for equipment grounding wires • Meets Ferderal Specification W-P-115c as Type 1, Class 2 • Solar Ready kit SR69064A fits all devices below • All devices have a 3" KO in the bottom endwall • Provisions for field installed CTs on All devices • Meets EUSERC requirements 1 L O A D C E N T E R S Table 1.76: Knockouts Symbol B Conduit Size 3/4 (in.) A 1/2 C 1 D 1-1/4 E 1-1/2 G 2-1/2 H 3 I 3-1/2 J 4 Table 1.75: All-In-One Combination Service Entrance Devices Main Breaker Bus Bar Ampere Rating Bypass Type Service Type Short Circuit Current Rating Cat. No. [1] Semiflush Mount Only 200 A 125 A 200 A 225 A 225 A Surface Mount Only 150 A 200 A 225 A None None None None None None None None None None OH[3]/UG OH[3]/UG OH[3]/UG OH[5]/UG OH[5]/UG OH/UG OH/UG OH/UG OH/UG OH/UG 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA SC816F200PF [4] SC2040M125PF SC2040M200PF SC3042M200PF SC3042M225PF SC816F150PS [4] SC816F200PS [4] SC2040M200PS SC3042M200PS SC42M200PS Service Disconnect(s) Load Center and Branch Circuit Breakers (Order Separately Pages 1-2, 1-3, 1-4) Max. Quantity 2P Circuits (Max.) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 (Factory Installed except where Type noted) QOM2200VH QOM2125VH QOM2200VH QOM2200VH QOM2225VH QOM2150VH QOM2200VH QOM2200VH QOM2200VH QOM2200VH s e c a p S 8 20 20 30 30 8 8 20 30 42 s t i u c r i C 16 40 40 42 42 16 16 40 42 42 Hub Type (Order Sepa- rately [2]) Line Side Main Lugs AWG/ kcmil (Al/Cu) Service Ground Lug AWG/ kcmil (Al/Cu) A-L 4-250 8-2/0 A-L 4-250 8-2/0 . x a M g n i t a R e r e p m A 200 A 110 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 150 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 1P s m e d n a T 8 20 20 12 12 8 8 20 12 0 F 2 Semiflush Mount Surface Mount Accepts Solar Ready Kit Part Number SR69064A. Check with local utility for approval and order separately. See Bolt-On Hubs, page 1-26 Suitable for OH service with addition of tunnel kit (SCTKP20). Check with local utility for approval and order separately. Supplied with load side feed-thru lugs, for 4AWG-250 kcmil Al/Cu conductors. Suitable for OH service with addition of tunnel kit (SCTKP30). Check with local utility for approval and order separately. [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] 1-36 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 3.408614.85377AA,BC,D,E,FB,C10.3026242.60100638.408998/16 - 20/4030/42C,E,F,G,H21/2" Max“A-L” HubC,D,E,FAB,CB21/2" Max “A” Hub29.507495.8014721.50546C,E,F,G,H21/2" Max“A-L” HubAB,CBC,D,E,F11.1028232.3082037.30947SC42M200PSSC3042M200PS11/10/2017


page 41

schneider-electric.us Class 1130 / Refer to Catalog 1100CT0501 Enclosed Devices 1Ø3W—120/240 Vac—240 Vac—UL Listed Table 1.77: Enclosed Molded Case Switch, Switch Included, Does NOT provide overcurrent protection Service 240 Vac 120/240 Vac Ampere Rating 60 A [2] [3] General Purpose QO260NATS Rainproof QO200TR QO200TRNM QO260NATR 100 A [5] QO2000NS QO2000NRB Table 1.78: Housing Bracket Description Bracket used with QO200TR for stucco, aluminum and vinyl siding. (This item is obsolete) Box. No. [1] 2, 9R [4] 1NM 1R 13, 10R Cat. No. PKHB S R E T N E C D A O L Table 1.79: Enclosed GFCI Circuit Breakers, GFCI Circuit Breaker Included—10 kA Short Circuit Current Rating 1 Service 120/240 Vac Ampere Rating 50 A Type 3R— Rainproof QOE250GFINM HOME250SPA Circuit Breaker Included QO250GFI HOM250GFI Box. No. [1] 1NM (Non- metallic) 1R (Metallic) Table 1.80: 2-Pole Circuit Breaker Enclosures—22 kA Short Circuit Current Rating Service [6] 120/240 Vac 240 Vac Ampere Rating 100 A 125 A 100 A General Purpose [7] Rainproof QO2100BNF/S QO2125BNF/S QO2100BNRB QO2125BNRB Box. No. [1] 13, 10R 18, 13R QO3100BNF/S QO3100BNRB 13, 10R 60A Max. Circuit Breaker Enclosures—10 kA Short Circuit Current Rating Circuit breaker not included. Order separately from QO Plug-On Circuit Breakers, page 1-10. Will not accept QO- GFI circuit breaker nor QO circuit breakers with factory-installed accessories. 240 Vac 60 A [2] — QO2TR 9R [4] QO200TRNM QO3100BNF With Cover Removed Table 1.81: Q Frame Enclosures and Q Frame Circuit Breakers Service Type 1—General Purpose [7] Enclosure Only [8] Type 3R— Rainproof Circuit Breaker (Order Separately) Ampere Rating  70 A  80 A  90 A 100 A 110 A 125 A 150 A 175 A 200 A 225 A  70 A  80 A  90 A 100 A 110 A 125 A 150 A 175 A 200 A 225 A 10 k AIR QBL22070 QBL22080 QBL22090 QBL22100 QBL22110 QBL22125 QBL22150 QBL22175 QBL22200 QBL22225 QBL32070 QBL32080 QBL32090 QBL32100 QBL32110 QBL32125 QBL32150 QBL32175 QBL32200 QBL32225 25 k AIR QDL22070 QDL22080 QDL22090 QDL22100 QDL22110 QDL22125 QDL22150 QDL22175 QDL22200 QDL22225 QDL32070 QDL32080 QDL32090 QDL32100 QDL32110 QDL32125 QDL32150 QDL32175 QDL32200 QDL32225 65 k AIR QGL22070 QGL22080 QGL22090 QGL22100 QGL22110 QGL22125 QGL22150 QGL22175 QGL22200 QGL22225 QGL32070 QGL32080 QGL32090 QGL32100 QGL32110 QGL32125 QGL32150 QGL32175 QGL32200 QGL32225 100 k AIR QJL22070 QJL22080 QJL22090 QJL22100 QJL22110 QJL22125 QJL22150 QJL22175 QJL22200 QJL22225 QJL32070 [10] QJL32080 [10] QJL32090 [10] QJL32100 [10] QJL32110 [10] QJL32125 [10] QJL32150 [10] QJL32175 [10] QJL32200 [10] QJL32225 [10] Box No. [1] 19, 11R 20, 12R Q22200NS [9] or Q23225NF/S Q22200NRB [9] or Q23225NRB Q23225NF/S Q23225NRB 20, 12R 2P 240 Vac Maximum 3P 240 Vac [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] See Table 1.57 Knockout Information, page 1-24 Not suitable for service equipment. Maximum 10 hp 240 Vac. Top endwall has no hub opening. Maximum 20 hp 240 Vac. Not for use with one pole QO circuit breakers. Circuit breakers not included. Order QO type circuit breakers separately from pages 1-2 and 1-3. Accepts QO circuit breakers with factory- installed accessories. Order equipment ground bar PKOGTA2, if required. Order F for flush, S for surface. Factory-installed groundable neutral assembly includes (2) ground lugs and (2) neutral lugs. Equipment ground kit PKOGTA2 also included. Accepts 200 A max. 2P Q Frame circuit breakers. [7] [8] [9] [10] Equipment ground bar kit PKOGTA2 factory-included. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 1-37 11/10/2017


page 42

Enclosed Devices 1 L O A D C E N T E R S Class 1130 / Refer to Catalog 1100CT0501 Table 1.82: QOM2 Enclosures and QOM2 Circuit Breakers Enclosure Only [11] schneider-electric.us QOM2 Circuit Breaker (Order Separately) [12] Type 1 General Purpose [13] Cat. No. Type 3R Rainproof Cat. No. Box No. [14] Ampere Rating Service 2P 240 Vac Maximum QOM22225NF/S QOM22225NRB 22, 16R 22 k AIR Cat. No.[15] QOM2100VH QOM2125VH QOM2150VH QOM2175VH QOM2200VH QOM2225VH 100 A 125 A 150 A 175 A 200 A 225 A QOM22225NS With Cover Removed Q22200NS With Cover Removed Q23225NF (Order Q-Frame circuit breaker separately) Equipment ground bar kit PKOGTA2 factory-included. [11] [12] Add suffix 1021 for 120, 208 or 240 Vac shunt trip. [13] Order F for flush, S for surface. [14] See Table 1.57 Knockout Information, page 1-24 [15] DE3A Discount Schedule. 1-38 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 43

schneider-electric.us Class 1140 Servicepak™ Power Outlet Panels requirements. Power Outlet Panels for Construction Sites • Provide temporary power at construction sites. • Each receptacle protected by QO-GFI circuit breaker in compliance with NEC® • Each enclosure is rainproof. • 10 kA short circuit current rating. • UL Listed as suitable for use as temporary site service equipment. • Provided with neutral bonding provisions. • Boxes have provisions for type “B’’ hubs to be field-installed. Table 1.83: Construction Site Panels S R E T N E C D A O L 1 Power Outlet Configuration Service [1] Mains Ampere Rating Circuit Breaker (Included) 1C 2C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C 8C 9C 1Ø2W 1Ø2W 1Ø2W 1Ø3W 1Ø3W 1Ø3W 1Ø3W 1Ø3W 1Ø3W 1Ø3W  40 A  40 A  40 A  70 A  70 A  70 A  70 A  70 A  70 A 100 A (1) QO120GFI (2) QO120GFI (2) QO120GFI (1) QO120GFI (1) QO230GFI (1) QO120GFI (1) QO220GFI (1) QO120GFI (1) QO250GFI (1) QO120GFI (1) QO250GFI (2) QO120GFI (1) QO220GFI (2) QO120GFI (1) QO250GFI (1) QO120GFI (2) QO250GFI Cat. No. [2] PAK10C1 PAK11C [4] PAK11C1 PAK31CGFI PAK36C1GFI 1 PAK51CGFI PAK55CGFI PAK72CGFI PAK76CGFI Size Main Wire AWG [3] Cu Al 12–6 14–6 12–6 14–6 14–6 12–6 8–1 8–1 8–1 8–1 8–1 8–1 8–1 8–1 8–1 8–1 8–1 8–1 PAK1004CGFI 14–1 12–1 F Receptacles (Included) A C D E 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 20 A 125 V 2W and Grd. NEMA 5-20R 30 A 125 V 2W and Grd ANSI 73.13 50 A 125/250 V 3W and Grd. NEMA 14-50R 20 A 250 V 2W and Grd. NEMA 6-20R 30 A 125/250 V 3W and Grd. NEMA 14-30R 50 A 250 V 2W and Grd. NEMA 6-50R All non-pedestal devices have provisions to field-install a Type “B’’ hub on the bottom endwall for bottom feed from a conduit riser. Order Type “B’’ bolt-on hub (B250 Max.) and two mounting screws (Cat. No. 8002505501) and two hex nuts (Cat. No. 2340102000). Power Outlet Panels for Recreational Vehicle Parks • Provide electrical power to individual recreational vehicle park sites. • Each receptacle protected by appropriate GFI or Standard QO™ circuit breaker. • All receptacles and circuit breakers included. • 10 kA short circuit current rating. • UL Listed. • All enclosures are rainproof. • No neutral bonding provisions. • Loop-feed provisions. Table 1.84: Recreational Vehicle Park Panels Power Outlet Configura- Receptacles (Included) [5] C A Underground or Overhead Loop-Feed Terminals—Non-Pedestal Mains Am- pere Rating Circuit Breaker Serv- ice [1] (Included) Cat. No. tion B 11C 12C 1Ø2W  40 A 1Ø2W  50 A 14C 1Ø3W 100 A (2) QO120GFI (1) QO120GFI (1) QO130 (2) QO130 (1) QO120GFI (1) QO250 (1) QO130 2 1 1 1 1 1 Pedestal Mounted—Underground Loop-Feed Terminals [9] [10] [2] [7] PAK11CTG PAK41CTG [8] PAK75CTG (Not Loop Feed) [8] Main Wire Size AWG/kcmil [6] Phase and Neutral Cu Al 14–6 14–1 12–6 12–1 12–1 11C 12C 13C 14C 1Ø2W  40 A 1Ø2W  50 A 1Ø2W  75 A 1Ø3W 100 A (2) QO120GFI (1) QO120GFI (1) QO130 (1) QO120GFI (2) QO130 (1) QO120GFI (1) QO250 (1) QO130 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 PAK11PG PAK41PG [8] PAK61PG [8] (2)6–250 (2)6–250 1 PAK75PG [8] (1Ø2W 120 Vac) (1Ø3W 120/240 Vac) Devices have a bolt-on factory-installed closing cap. Order type “B’’ bolt-on hub separately from page 1-18. Equipment ground terminal suitable for (2) 14 or 12 AWG Cu or (2) 12 or 10 AWG Al. Receptacles in this device are in bottom endwall and are accessible with outer door padlocked. “Order Only’’ from Lexington—Minimum order quantity is 50 devices. 20 A receptacles protected by 20 A GFI circuit breaker. Two wires each per phase, neutral, and equipment ground—for loop feed (except PAK75CTG). Equipment ground terminal suitable for (2) 14–12 AWG Cu or (2) 12–10 Al. GFI circuit breaker can be substituted for standard 30 A circuit breaker. Add suffix "FI’’ to catalog number. Example: PAK41CTGFI. Stabilizer foot available for use in unstable ground, order HNPSF [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] Equipment ground terminals suitable for (2) 10–2/0 AWG Cu or (2) 6–2/0 AWG Al. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 1-39 TTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTT1C2C3C4C5C6C8CTTT7C9C10C11C12C13C14CA BCDEF11/10/2017


page 44

Servicepak™ Power Outlet Panels Class 1140 schneider-electric.us 1 L O A D C E N T E R S 1-40 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 45

Table of Contents Section 2 Metering Equipment 2-2 Meter Sockets Ring and Ringless Type Individual Meter Sockets Horizontal Ganged, Test Block Bypass Sockets and Accessories Dimensions MP Meter-Pak™ Meter Centers Ring and Ringless Devices Ring and Ringless Type Devices Tenant Circuit Breakers Accessories for MP Meter-Pak Meter Centers Dimensions and Knockouts for MP Meter-Pak Meter Centers EZ Meter-Pak™ Meter Centers Indoor/Rainproof EZM General Information Selection Information 1 Phase Main Devices 1 Phase Branch Devices 3 Phase Main Devices 3 Phase Branch Devices 3 Phase Main Devices (Busway Side Tap) 3 Phase Main Devices (Busway Center Tap) Tenant Circuit Breakers and EZM Accessories Dimensions 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-5 2-5 2-7 2-7 2-9 2-10 2-10 2-12 2-13 2-15 2-16 2-18 2-20 2-21 2-22 2-24 T N E M P I U Q E G N R E T E M I 2 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 2-1 Individual Meter SocketMP Meter-Pak Metering EquipmentEZ Meter-Pak Metering Equipment11/10/2017


page 46

Meter Sockets utility approval). • Available single or three phase, 600 Vac max., with and without horn or lever bypass, overhead and underground service feed. • 10 kA short circuit current rating (or higher with • UL Listed, NEMA 3R enclosure. • Units supplied with bonded neutral. • Units supplied with hub opening in top endwall require the use of a bolt-on hub, or closing plate. • Units supplied with solid top are for underground • For accessories, refer to page 2-3. feed only. Ring and Ringless Type Individual Meter Sockets Class 4131 / Refer to Catalog 4100CT0701 schneider-electric.us Individual Meter Sockets This metering is generally utility specific. Always check with local utility company before installing. Contact your nearest Field Sales Office for additional catalog numbers, if required by utility. UTRS101B UTRS202B (Cover not shown) UTH5203T (Cover not shown) URTRS213B Table 2.1: Individual Meter Sockets Ampere Rating [1] Jaw Qty. Service Type Cat. No. [2] Lug Wire Range (Al/Cu) Line, Load, and Neutral (AWG/kcmil) Wire Binding Gnd. (AWG) Material Ringless Type, 1Ø3W 600 Vac Max., Without Bypass or Jaw Release Enclosure Information Top Endwall Conf. Hub Opening [4] Closing Plate [4] Box No. [3] 1R 1R 1R 1R 1R 3R 3R 5R 5R 5R 7R 1R 1R 1R 4R 4R 3R 4R 5R 2R 4R  8R  9R  8R  9R 11R  9R 10R 12R 12R 1R 5R 4 4 4 4 5 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 4 5 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 4 7 7 125 125 125 125 125 200 200 200 200 200 200 UG OH OH OH OH OH UG OH/UG OH/UG OH/UG OH/UG UTZRS101A [5] UTRS101B UATRS101B URS101BCPL 1003880A [6] UTRS202B UATRS202B UTRS213A [5] UTRS213B [6] UATRS213B [6] U92197CCCPL [7] 8–2/0 8–2/0 8–2/0 8–2/0 8–2/0 8–250 8–250 1/0–350 1/0–350 1/0–350 1/0–350 Ringless Type, 1Ø3W 600 Vac Max., With Horn Bypass, Without Jaw Release OH OH OH OH/UG OH/UG OH/UG 125 125 125 125 200 200 200 200 200 200 UHTRS101B UGHTRS101L [8] URS101BDQ [9] UGHTRS111C [10] UBHMRS212B [6] UHTRS202B UHTRS212B [6] UHTRS213B [6] UHTRS223A [5] URS212ADQ [9] 8–2/0 8–2/0 8–2/0 8–2/0 8–250 8–250 8–250 1/0–350 1/0–350 8–250 Ringless Type, 1Ø3W 600 Vac Max., With Lever Bypass and Jaw Release 6–350 6–350 6–350 6–350 OH/UG OH/UG OH/UG UG UG UTH4203T UTH4213T [6] UTH5203T UTH5213T [6] UTH4330T [11] 200 200 200 200 320 OH/UG OH/UG OH OH Ringless Type, 3Ø4W 600 Vac Max., With Lever Bypass and Jaw Release 6–350 OH/UG Studs Only UTH7213T [6] UTH7300T [11] OH Studs Only 200 320 Ringless Type, 3Ø4W 600 Vac Max., Bolt-On Socket Without Bypass 400 400 7 7 OH/UG OH/UG UK7T [11] UAK7T [11] Ring Type, 1Ø3W 600 Vac Max., Without Bypass or Jaw Release 125 200 4 4 OH/UG OH/UG URTRS101B [6] URTRS213B [6] Studs Only Studs Only 8–2/0 1/0–350 1/2 in. Hex Slotted Slotted Slotted Slotted 1/2 in. Hex 1/2 in. Hex 1/2 in. Hex 1/2 in. Hex 1/2 in. Hex 1/2 in. Hex Slotted Slotted 1/2 in. Hex Slotted 1/2 in. Hex 1/2 in. Hex 1/2 in. Hex 1/2 in. Hex 1/2 in. Hex 1/2 in. Hex 1/2 in. Hex 1/2 in. Hex 1/2 in. Hex 1/2 in. Hex 3/8 in. dia. studs 1/2 in. Hex 3/8 in. dia. studs 1/2 in.–20 dia. studs 1/2 in.–20 dia. studs Slotted 1/2 in. Hex 14–2 14–2 14–2 14–2 14–2 14–2 14–2 14–2 14–2 14–2 14–2 14–2 14–2 None 14–2 None 14–2 14–2 14–2 14–2 None 14–2 14–2 14–2 14–2 14–1/0 14–2 14–1/0 1/2 in.–20 dia. studs 1/2 in.–20 dia. studs 14–2 14–2 Aluminum Steel Steel Steel Steel Steel Steel Steel Aluminum Aluminum Steel Steel Steel Steel Steel Steel Steel Steel Steel Steel Steel Steel Steel Steel Steel Steel Steel Steel Steel Aluminum Steel Steel Solid Top [5] Series A Series A Series A Series A Series A Series A Solid Top [5] Series A Series A (2) Series A Series A A125 [8] Series A Series A Series A Series A Series A Series A Solid Top [5] Solid Top [5] Series A-L Series A-L Series A-L Series A-L Series A-L Series A-L Series A-L Series A-L Series A-L Series A Series A — ACP ACPA ACP ACP ACP ACPA — ACP ACPA (2) ACP[7] ACP — ACP ACP [10] ACP ACP ACP ACP — — ACPL ACPL ACPL ACPL ACPL ACPL ACPL ACPL ACPLA ACP ACP Rating is continuous. Device requires approval from the serving utility, consult your nearest Schneider Electric sales office. For box dimensions, see page 2-4 Order appropriate bolt-on hub or closing plate separately and install on TOP endwall. Device supplied with solid top endwall (without hub opening). [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] When unit is installed for underground feed, the appropriate closing plate must be ordered separately and installed over hub opening in TOP endwall of device. [7] [8] [9] [10] Device supplied with closing plate ACP mounted on TOP endwall. [11] Order lugs separately, see page 2-3 2-2 Device supplied with two closing plates ACP mounted in TOP endwall. Device supplied with 1-1/4 in. bolt-on hub (Cat. No. A125) mounted on TOP endwall. Contains “Duquesne Light Co.” approved label. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 47

schneider-electric.us Horizontal Ganged, Test Block Bypass Sockets and Accessories Class 4131 / Refer to Catalog 4100CT0701 Meter Sockets horn or lever bypass, end or center feed, overhead and underground service feeds. Horizontal Ganged Meter Sockets • 1Ø, 600 Vac max., main lugs only, 2 through 6 meter positions, with and without • 10 kA short circuit current rating (or higher with utility approval). • UL Listed, NEMA 3R enclosure. • Supplied with ground lugs. • Supplied with hub opening in top endwall, requires the use of a bolt-on hub, or closing This metering is generally utility specific. Always check with local utility company before installing. Contact your nearest Field Sales Office for additional catalog numbers, if required by utility. plate. UT2R1121B Table 2.2: Ringless Type, 1Ø3W, 600 Vac Max., Without Bypass or Jaw Release Branch Ratings Amperes [14] No. of Positions 100 A 200 A 2 3 4 5 6 2 4 5 6 Socket Jaw Qty. [15] 4 4 Service Type OH/UG OH/UG Mains Rating (A) 200 205 205 250 300 205 360 500 620 Cat. No. UT2R1121B UT3R1121B UT4R1131B UT5R1131B UT6R1131B UT2R2122B UT4R2352T UT5R2392TU UT6R2392TU Main Lugs Phase and Neutral Al/Cu (AWG/kcmil) 6–250 6–250 6–350 6–350 6–350 6–250 1/0–500 1/0–500 or (2)1/0–350 1/0–500 or (2)1/0–350 Phase and Neutral Branch Lugs Al/Cu (AWG) Top Endwall [12] Hub Type (Order Separately) Closing Plate Separately) (Order Box No. [13] 8–2/0 Series A 8–250 Series A Series A-L Series A-L Series A-L ACP ACP ACPL ACPL ACPL 13R  13R1 14R 15R 16R 17R 18R 19R 20R T N E M P I U Q E G N R E T E M I 2 Meter Mains with Test Block Bypass Table 2.3: Ring Type, 1Ø3W and 3Ø4W, Meter Main with Test Block Bypass (Meets EUSERC Requirements) Meter Socket Type System (Incoming) Service (Outgoing) Main Circuit Breaker Type (Order Separately) [18] Ampere Rating (Max.) Cat. No. [16][17] and 120/240 Vac 1Ø3W 5-Jaw 225 A EMT1225CB 2P Type QB, QD, QG, QJ (QO, QO-VH, QOH) [19] Short Circuit Current Rating 100 kA max. 208Y/120 Vac 3Ø4W[20] 240/120 Vac 3Ø4W or Delta 7-Jaw 225 A 65 kA max. EMT3225CB 3P Type QB, QD, QG or QJ EMT3225CB EMT1225CB Without Covers Table 2.4: EMT Terminal Wire Size [21] Line Phase Lug 6 AWG–300 kcmil Al/Cu Line Neutral Lug 6 AWG–350 kcmil Al/Cu Service Ground Lug 4 AWG–300 kcmil Al/Cu Equipment Ground Lug Load Neutral Lug 4 AWG–300 kcmil 6 AWG–300 kcmil Al/Cu Al/Cu Table 2.5: Adapter Plate, Lug Kits, and Sealing Rings Accessory Description Adapter Plate Cat. No. AAP To allow the use of a Series A Hub on a device that is setup for a series A-L Hub. For use on meter sockets supplied with Line, Load, and Neutral Studs only. Be sure to order enough lugs for each device (a typical 1Ø device requires 6 lugs). Includes one, two-barrel lug (6-250 kcmil) Includes one, single barrel lug (4-600 kcmil) Includes three, two-barrel lugs (6-350 kcmil) Snap-on Aluminum (Standard) Snap-on Stainless Steel (Non-standard) ARP00026 Screw Type Aluminum (Non-standard) ARP00427 2920910001 ARP00129 ARP00118 29008W Lug Kits Sealing Ring Meter Socket Accessories Table 2.6: Fifth-Jaw Kit, Closing Plates, and Hubs Accessory Fifth-Jaw Kit Closing Plates (to seal hub openings) Hubs (listed by conduit size) Series A Series A-L Series B Description Converts a 4-jaw meter socket to a 5-jaw meter socket. For use on meter sockets supplied without lever bypass or jaw release only. For Series A (steel) For Series A (aluminum) For Series A-L (steel) For Series A-L (aluminum) 1.00 inch 1.25 inch 1.50 inch 2.00 inch 2.50 inch 2.00 inch 2.50 inch 3.00 inch 3.50 inch 4.00 inch 3.00 inch Cat. No. A5J ACP ACPA ACPL ACPLA A100 A125 A150 A200 A250 A200L A250L A300L A350L A400L B300 For hubs and closing plates, see page 2-3. For box dimensions, see page 2-4 [12] [13] [14] Rating is continuous. [15] [16] [17] Supplied with bondable neutral, suitable for use as service equipment , suiteable for overhead or underground service. UL Listed E6294. [18] See page 2-22 to select main circuit breaker. [19] Requires use of an EZM125QOA adapter (order separately), when using QO (40 A–125 A, 2-pole) 10 kA max. SCCR, QO-VH (40 A–60 A, 2-pole) 22 kA max. SCCR, or QOH (40 A–60 A, Fifth jaw kit available to convert 4-jaw socket to a 5-jaw socket. See page 2-3. For box dimensions, see page 2-4 2-pole) 42 kA max. SCCR. 100 kA max. [20] [21] Refer to circuit breaker listings for usable load lug wire sizes. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 2-3 11/10/2017


page 48

Meter Sockets Table 2.7: Enclosure Dimensions Dimensions (Inches) Dimensions Class 4131 / Refer to Catalog 4100CT0701 schneider-electric.us Dimensions and Knockouts for Meter Sockets H W D Hub Opening (Max. Conduit Size) [22] Box No.  1R  2R  3R  4R  5R  6R 7R  8R  9R 10R 11R 12R 13R  13R1 14R 15R 16R 17R 18R 19R 20R 10.88 13.00 14.00 14.00 15.00 15.50 17.13 19.00 19.00 34.50 36.62 43.00 14.12 14.12 14.12 14.12 14.12 14.12 14.12 14.12 14.12  8.00 13.00  8.00 11.00 11.00  8.00 13.00 10.50 13.00 15.00 15.00 20.25 24.31 32.50 40.62 48.75 57.00 24.31 40.62 54.75 63.00 3.50 4.94 4.38 4.38 4.38 4.36 4.94 4.94 4.94 5.68 5.68 6.00 4.50 4.50 4.50 4.50 4.50 5.38 5.38 5.38 5.38 Series A Solid Top Series A Series A Series A Series A (2) Series A Series A-L Series A-L Series A-L Series A-L Series A-L Series A Series A Series A Series A Series A Series A Series A-L (2) Series A-L (2) Series A-L C 1 H 3 D 1-1/4 I 3-1/2 J 4 Table 2.8: Knockout Information Symbol Conduit Size (in.) Symbol Conduit Size (in.) S 5/16 [23] E 1-1/2 Knockouts B A 3/4 1/2 F G 2 2-1/2 [22] Refer to page 2-3 for closing plates and hubs. [23] Knockout for grounding conductor. 2-4 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved DWHA,B,C,D,ESC,D,E,FA,B,C,DHubOpening1RA,B,C,DMeterSocketDWHF,G,HSolidTop2RC,D,E,F,GMeterSocketOffsetSADWHSHubOpening3R, 6RMeterSocketAE,F,GDWHC,D,E,F,GSD,E,F,G4R, 5RMeterSocketAHubOpeningDWHD,E,F,GS7RMeterSocketOffsetF,G,HAHubOpeningDWHF,G,HS8RMeterSocketF,G,HAA,BA,BHubOpeningDWHF,G,HS9RMeterSocketF,G,HAA,BA,BHubOpeningDWHF,G,H,IS10RMeterSocketF,G,H,IAHubOpeningDWHF,G,H,IS11RMeterSocketOffsetF,G,H,IAHubOpeningHubOpeningDWHG,H,I,J12RMeterSocketA,BDWHub OpeningHMainLugsMeterSocketSAC,D,E,F,G (13R)F,G,H (17R)C,D,E,F,G(13R, 17R)C,D,E,F,G(13R, 17R)13R and 17RHub OpeningMeterSocketDWHMainLugsSAC,D,E,F,G(14R, 18R)14R and 18RC,D,E,F,G (14R)F,G,H (18R)C,D,E,F,G(14R, 18R)Hub OpeningMeterSocketDWHMainLugsSAC,D,E,F,G13R1C,D,E,F,GC,D,E,F,GDWHMainLugsSAC,D,E,F,G15R and 16RHub OpeningC,D,E,F,GC,D,E,F,GMeter SocketLeft position omitted on5-Gang unit (15R)EMT1225CB and EMT3225CBSupplied with (2)ACP Closing Plates.Order A-Hubsseparately foroverhead servicefeed.7.50191C,D,E (3 Locations)E,F,G,H (8 Locations)A,B22.4457030.00762Meter SocketLeft position omitted on5-Gang unit (19R)DWHMainLugsSAC,D,E,F,G(19R, 20R)C,D,E,F,G(19R, 20R)19R and 20RF,G,H(19R, 20R)Hub Opening (2 Locations)11/10/2017


page 49

Ring and Ringless Devices Class 4141 / Refer to Catalog 4100CT0701 schneider-electric.us MP Meter-Pak™ Meter Centers Ring and Ringless Type Devices • Consult local utility for approval before installation. • 120/240 Vac 1Ø3W. • Main lugs only—two to six meter sockets. • Enclosures are indoor/rainproof NEMA 3R construction. • Suitable only for use as service equipment. • Swingable mounting feet supplied at bottom of device. • Factory-installed mechanical lugs, alternate lugs and NEMA/EUSERC lug landing kits • Surface mount, convertible to semi-flush with field installed flange kit. • Ring type devices supplied with 4-jaw meter sockets (5th jaw kits available, order • Ringless type devices supplied with 5-jaw meter sockets, available with and without • Provisions for mounting 2-pole circuit breaker for each meter socket position (order • Mounting channel supplied, except for box 1R (125 A, 2-position). • Combination overhead/underground feed. circuit breakers separately). horn or lever bypass. available. separately). MP H 4 4 125 Description Meter-Pak Meter Center Ring Type Ringless Type with 5th Jaw Ringless with Horn Bypass and 5th Jaw Ringless with Lever Bypass, Jaw Release and 5th Jaw 200 A 300 A 400 A 500 A 600 A 800 A 2-Positions MP, MPH, MPL, and MPR 3-Positions MP, MPH, MPL, and MPR 4-Positions MP, MPH, MPL, and MPR 5-Positions MP, MPH and MPR 6-Positions MP, MPH, MPL and MPR 125 A 200 A 225 A T N E M P I U Q E G N R E T E M I 2 MP44125 Table 2.9: MP Catalog Number Description Number Segment Device Name Socket/Bypass Type Bus Ampacity Number of Meter Sockets Max. Tenant Circuit Breaker Amperage Character MP Blank R H L 2 3 4 5 6 8 2 3 4 5 6 125 200 225 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 2-5 11/10/2017


page 50

MP Meter-Pak™ Meter Centers Ring and Ringless Devices Class 4141 / Refer to Catalog 4100CT0701 schneider-electric.us Table 2.10: Ring Type MP Meter-Pak Metering Equipment with 125 A (42 kA Maximum SCCR) or 200 A (22 kA Maximum SCCR) Meter Socket Positions Amperes per Pos. Semi-Flush Flange Kit Main Lugs Ampacity Factory-Installed Main Bus Ampacity Breaker Type Hub Prov. [2] Cat. No. Wt Lbs No. of Positions Box No. Circuit (2P) (alternate lugs [1]) 2 3 4 5 6 2 3 4 5 6 200 300 400 400 Al 500 Cu 400 Al 500 Cu 400 400 400 600 Al, 750 Cu 600 Al, 750 Cu Line Lug Wire Size Al/Cu AWG/kcmil (1) 4–250 (1) 1/0–600 or (2) 1/0–250 (1) 1/0–600 or (2) 1/0–250 (1) 1/0–600 or (2) 1/0–250 (1) 1/0–600 or (2) 1/0–250 (1) 1/0–600 or (2) 1/0–250 (1) 1/0–600 or (2) 1/0–250 (1) 1/0–600 or (2) 1/0–250 (2) 3/0–500 (2) 3/0–500 MP22125 [3] MP33125 [4] MP44125 [4] MP55125 [4] MP66125 [4] MP42200 [4] MP43200 [4] MP64200 [4] MP85200 [4] MP86200 [4] (A) 200 300 400 500 600 400 400 600 800 800 QO, QO-VH, QOH A/B300 A-L A-L (4) A-L (4) A-L QOM2-MM, QOM2-MVH (4) A-L MPSF12 MPSF14 MPSF14 MPSF16 MPSF16 MPSF23 MPSF23 MPSF24 MPSF26 MPSF26 46 95 97 130 132 99 99 135 173 173 2 125 200 I M E T E R N G E Q U I P M E N T 1R 2R 2R 3R 3R 4R 4R 5R 6R 6R Box No. 1R 2R 2R 3R 3R 4R 4R 5R 7R 8R 9R 6R 6R Table 2.11: Ringless Type MP Meter-Pak Metering Equipment with 125 A (42 kAMaximum SCCR) or 200 A Type MPR, MPH (22 kA Maximum SCCR) or 225 A Type MPL (100 kA Maximum SCCR) Meter Socket Positions Line Lug Amperes Wire Size AWG/kcmil (1) 4–250 Semi-Flush Flange Kit Lever Bypass Cat. No. (alternate lugs [1]) Main Lugs Ampacity Factory-Installed Main Bus Ampacity Circuit Breaker Type (2P) [5]. No. Bypass No. of Pos. Prov. [2] Cat. No. Per Pos. Al/Cu Hub A/B300 2 3 200 300 200 300 MPR22125 MPR33125 Horn Bypass Cat. No. MPH22125 MPH33125 — — MPR44125 MPH44125 MPR55125 MPH55125 MPR66125 MPR42200 MPR43200 MPR64200 — — MPH66125 MPH42200 MPH43200 MPH64200 — — — — — — MPL32225 MPL53225 — — MPL64225 (1) 1/0–600 or (2) 1/0–250 (1) 1/0–600 or (2) 1/0–250 (1) 1/0–600 or (2) 1/0–250 (1) 1/0–600 or (2) 1/0–250 (1) 1/0–600 or (2) 1/0–250 (1) 1/0–600 or (2) 1/0–250 Wt Lbs 46 95 MPSF12 MPSF14 MPSF14 MPSF16 MPSF16 MPSF23 MPSF23 MPSF24 N/A N/A N/A 97 130 132 99 99 135 105 147 200 A-L (2) A-L (2) A-L QO, QO-VH, QOH QOM2-MM, QOM2-MVH QBP-TM, QDP-TM, QGP-TM or QJ-TM QO [6], QO-VH [6] or QOH [6] QOM2-MM, QOM2-MVH MPR85200 MPR86200 MPH85200 MPH86200 NOTE: UL Listed short circuit current rating depends on lowest interrupting rating of circuit breaker installed. MPSF26 MPSF26 (2) 3/0–500 (2) 3/0–500 173 173 — — 125 200 225 200 4 5 6 2 3 4 2 3 4 5 6 400 400 Al 500 Cu 400 Al 500 Cu 400 400 400 350 400 400 600 Al, 750 Cu 600 Al, 750 Cu 400 500 600 400 400 600 350 500 600 800 800 See page 2-7 for alternate lugs. For A and A-L Hubs see page 2-3, for B Hubs see Digest Section 3. Meets EUSERC standards. Meets EUSERC standards with addition of lug landing kit, MMSK2. See page 2-7 Requires use of EZM125QOA adapter (order separately). [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] 2-6 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 51

Ring and Ringless Devices Class 4141 / Refer to Catalog 4100CT0701 schneider-electric.us MP Meter-Pak™ Meter Centers Tenant Circuit Breakers UL Listed Short Circuit Current Rating depends on lowest interrupting rating of circuit breaker installed. (Refer to page 2-12 for Square D certified ratings for downstream panelboards and load centers.) QO2100VH 2P, Plug-on Type Circuit Breaker QOM2200MVH QDP22200TM 2P, Plug-on Type Circuit Breaker MMLK500 T N E M P I U Q E G N R E T E M I 2 Table 2.12: Tenant Circuit Breakers Amperes For use in 125 A Max. Type MP, MPR and MPH Meter-Pak Metering Equipment 120/240 Vac 120/240 Vac 22 k AIR 10 k AIR 42 k AIR 120/240 Vac 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 125 QO240 QO250 QO260 QO270 QO280 QO290 QO2100 QO2125 QO240VH [7] QO250VH [7] QO260VH QO270VH QO280VH QO290VH QO2100VH QO2125VH QOH240 QOH250 [7] QOH260 [7] QOH270 [7] QOH280 [7] QOH290 QOH2100 QOH2125 For use in 200 A Max. Type MP, MPR and MPH Meter-Pak Metering Equipment — — — — — QOM2100MVH QOM2125MVH QOM2150MVH QOM2175MVH QOM2200MVH QOM2100MM QOM2125MM QOM2150MM QOM2175MM QOM2200MM 100 125 150 175 200 Amperes For use in 225 A MPL Lever Bypass Meter-Pak Metering Equipment 120/240 Vac 120/240 Vac 25 k AIR 10 k AIR 65 k AIR 120/240 Vac 100 k AIR 120/240 Vac — — — — — — — — — — — — — 100 k AIR 120/240 Vac 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 125 150 175 200 225 QO240 [8] QO250 [8] QO260 [8] QBP22070TM QBP22080TM QBP22090TM QBP22100TM QBP22110TM QBP22125TM QBP22150TM QBP22175TM QBP22200TM QBP22225TM QO240VH [7] [9] [8] QO250VH [7] [9] [8] QO260VH [7] [9][8] QDP22070TM QDP22080TM QDP22090TM QDP22100TM QDP22110TM QDP22125TM QDP22150TM QDP22175TM QDP22200TM QDP22225TM QOH240 [10] [8] QOH250 [10] [7] [8] QOH260 [10] [7] [8] QGP22070TM QGP22080TM QGP22090TM QGP22100TM QGP22110TM QGP22125TM QGP22150TM QGP22175TM QGP22200TM QGP22225TM — — — QJP22070TM QJP22080TM QJP22090TM QJP22100TM QJP22110TM QJP22125TM QJP22150TM QJP22175TM QJP22200TM QJP22225TM Accessories for MP Meter-Pak Meter Centers Table 2.13: Accessories Accessory Description Fifth Jaw Kit Horn Bypass Kit QO Adapter Slider Type Manual Circuit Closing: Sealing Rings: Meter Cover- Lexan™ Optional Lug Kits: Semiflush Kits: NEMA/EUSERC Lug Landing Kit: NEMA Lug Landing Kit: Fifth Jaw Kit For MPR and MPH only For Bolt-on Q2M tenant circuit breakers (40–125 A, 2P) 125 A Ring Style 2 Position Top Meter (Only) 125 and 200 A Ring Style Snap-on Aluminum Screw Type Aluminum Snap-on Type Stainless Steel Meter Cover-Lexan™ (1) 1/0–600 AWG/kcmil or (2) 1/0–250 AWG/kcmil per phase (2) 3/0–500 AWG/kcmil per phase (2) 2–600 AWG/kcmil per phase 125 A 2 Position 125 A 3–4 Position 125 A 5–6 Position 200 A 2–3 Position 200 A 4 Position 200 A 5–6 Position For 3 through 6 position 125 A and 200 A devices. Each pad rated 600 A maximum and includes (2) 1/2-13 studs and mounting hardware. For use ONLY on MPL43225, MPL53225 and MPL64225 with optional lugs. See wiring diagram of each device for optional lugs. Cat. No. 5J MMHB EZM125QOA MM125MB [11] MM200MB [11] 2920910001 29008W ARP00026 29007 MMLK250 [12][13] MMLK500 [13] MMLK600 [13] MPSF12 MPSF14 MPSF16 MPSF23 MPSF24 MPSF26 MMSK2 [13] MMSK4 Order only. Not stocked in PDS. Order Point: Lincoln. Requires use of EZM125QOA adapter (order separately). QO-VH tenant circuit breakers are rated 22 kAIR at 120/240 Vac. [7] [8] [9] [10] QOH tenant circuit breakers are rated 42 k AIR at 120/240 Vac. [11] [12] Standard lug for 3 through 6 position 125 A and 2 through 4 position 200 A devices. [13] Cannot be installed on 2 position 125 A device. The meter center short circuit current rating is 10 kA when manual circuit closing is used. Not rated for continuous duty. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 2-7 11/10/2017


page 52

MP Meter-Pak™ Meter Centers Ring and Ringless Devices Class 4141 / Refer to Catalog 4100CT0701 Table 2.13 Accessories (cont'd.) Accessory MP Meter-Pak Wireway: (Wall Mount Pedestal) MP Meter-Pak Wireway Extensions: Description 125 A 2 Position ONLY 125 A 3–6 Position 200 A 2–6 Position MPL32-225 MPL53-225 MPL64-225 Used ONLY with MP43X8PED Used with MP43X11PED and MP35X11PED schneider-electric.us Cat. No. MP43X8PED MP43X11PED MP43X11PED MP35X11PED [14] MP43X11PED MP35X11PED [14] MP12X8PEDEXT [14] MP12X11PEDEXT [14] 2 I M E T E R N G E Q U I P M E N T [14] Order only. Not stocked in PDS. Order point: Lexington. For hubs and closing plates, see page 2-3. 2-8 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 53

Ring and Ringless Devices Class 4141 / Refer to Catalog 4100CT0701 schneider-electric.us MP Meter-Pak™ Meter Centers Dimensions and Knockouts for MP Meter-Pak Meter Centers T N E M P I U Q E G N R E T E M I 2 Symbol Conduit Size (in.) A 1/2 B 3/4 C 1 Knockouts D E 1-1/4 1-1/2 F 2 G 2-1/2 H 3 I 3-1/2 J 4 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 2-9 A Hub Opening Suppliedwith ACP Closing Plate18.5047037.5095312.283129.002297.28185AD,F,G and A orB300 Hub ProvisionC,D,FC,D,FMounting Holes(4) Locations(Supplied withoutMounting Channel)Box 1R7.28185C,D,FE,F,G,H,I,J and A-L Hub Provision48.12122224.346189.00229Typ.11.19284Top PositionOmitted on3-Gang UnitBox 2RC,D,FA-L Hub Opening Suppliedwith ACPL Closing PlateA,B7.2818536.469269.00229Typ.C,D,FTop LeftPositionOmitted on5-Gang Unit42.37107611.19284C,D,FABox 3RA-L Hub Opening Suppliedwith ACPL Closing PlatesA,BE,F,G,H,I,J and A-L Hub ProvisionC,D,F43.4111039.00229Typ.12.22310Top PositionOmitted on2-Gang Unit8.2821029.44748A-L Hub Opening Supplied with ACPL Closing PlatesBox 4RC,D,E,FA,BE,F,G,H,I,J and A-L Hub ProvisionC,D,F52.0013219.00229Typ.12.22310Box 5R29.447488.28210A-L Hub Opening Supplied with ACPL Closing PlatesC,D,E,FA,BE,F,G,H,I,J and A-L Hub ProvisionC,D,F9.00229Typ.43.41110312.22310Top LeftPositionOmitted on5-Gang Unit46.6811868.28210A-L Hub Opening Suppliedwith ACPL Closing PlatesA,B,CC,D,E,FE,F,G,H,I,J and A-L Hub ProvisionBox 6RC,D,E,FA-L Hub Opening Suppliedwith ACPL Closing Plates60.25153014.0035634.00864Box 7R9.6224419.43494E,F,G,H,I,J andA-L Hub ProvisionC,D,E,FA,BC,D,E,F53.12134914.00356Typ.13.43341Box 8R35.37898A-L Hub Opening Suppliedwith ACPL Closing Plates9.62244E,F,G,H,I,J andA-L Hub ProvisionC,D,E,FA,BC,D,E,F67.37171114.00356Typ.13.43341Box 9R35.37898A-L Hub Opening Suppliedwith ACPL Closing Plates9.62244E,F,G,H,I,J andA-L Hub ProvisionC,D,E,FA,B11/10/2017


page 54

EZ Meter-Pak™ Meter Centers Indoor/Rainproof EZM General Information Class 4141 / Refer to Catalog 4100CT0701 schneider-electric.us NEMA 3R Construction 240 Vac Maximum, for use on AC systems, suitable for use as Service Equipment. Utility Company Requirements Review local utility requirements to ensure that metering equipment meets their standards. EZ Meter-Pak meter center enclosures meet NEC wire bending requirements, and are designed for wall mounting only (not suitable for floor mounting). All unmetered conductor compartments may be sealed by the utility company. EZ Meter-Pak meter centers have UL Listed short circuit current ratings up to 100 kA at 240 Vac when properly applied. For three-tier series ratings refer to Data Bulletin 4100DB0301 and Instruction Bulletin 80043-303-22. Suitable incoming services for an EZM main device and available outgoing feeder(s) to downstream panelboards from EZM branch section(s)— Incoming Service to Main Device 120/240 Vac, 1Ø3W Available outgoing feeder(s) to downstream panelboards: • 120/240 Vac, 1Ø3W (4-jaw ring type meter sockets, two-pole circuit breakers), (5-jaw ringless meter sockets, two-pole circuit breakers). Incoming Service to Main Device 240/120 Vac, 3Ø4W Delta Available outgoing feeder(s) to downstream panelboards: • 120/240 Vac, 1Ø3W (Fed from transformer’s “A- Phase” and “C-Phase” only.) NOTE: Connection to High-Leg “B-Phase” not permitted for this service (4-jaw ring type meter sockets, two-pole circuit breakers) (5-jaw ringless meter sockets, two-pole circuit breakers) Standard 3Ø IN/1Ø OUT branch units are not suitable for use on this Delta System. Special branch units are available for this System by adding suffix: “CA” to catalog number (Typical Examples: EZM313125CA, EZM313125XCA, EZM313125CUXCA, EZM314225CA, EZM314225XCA, EZM314225CUXCA, EZM315225CA, EZM314225CUCA, etc.). three-pole circuit breakers). • 240/120 Vac, 3Ø4W Delta (7-jaw meter sockets, Incoming Service to Main Device 208Y/120 Vac, 3Ø4W Available outgoing feeder(s) to downstream panelboards: • 120/208 Vac, 1Ø3W (5-jaw meter sockets, two- • 208Y/120 Vac, 3Ø4W (7-jaw meter sockets, three- pole circuit breakers) pole circuit breakers). 800 A or 1200 A continuous horizontal cross bus. used with branch devices with main bus rated 800 A continuous. EZM General Information Main Devices • 400, 600 and 800 A main disconnects may be end-mounted with branch units having • 1000 and 1200 A main disconnect or terminal box must be center mounted when • 1600 A main disconnect or terminal box must be center mounted. • 2000 A main disconnect must be center mounted and requires use of branch units • 400, 800 and 1200 A Type EZM-TBU terminal boxes supplied with lug landings to Main Circuit Breaker ratings: 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1600 and 2000 A Main Fusible Switch ratings: 400, 600, 800, and 1200 A (1Ø3W only) Main Lugs Terminal Box ratings: 225, 400, 600, 800, 1200, 1600, and 2000 A having 1200 A continuous horizontal cross bus. meet EUSERC requirements. Branch Units • 125 and 225 A residential branch units are available in ring type or ringless type construction and are supplied with 800 A continuous aluminum horizontal cross bus as standard (Example: EZM314125). For optional 1200 A continuous copper horizontal cross bus with aluminum vertical connectors, add suffix “X” to catalog number (Example: EZM314125X). For optional 1200 A continuous all-copper bussing, add suffix “CUX” to catalog number (Example: EZM314125CUX). NOTE: 5-gang 225 A EZM, EZMR and EZMH residential branch units are supplied with 1200 A continuous Cross Bus as standard, do not add suffix “X” or “CUX” to these units (Examples: EZMR315225 or EZMR315225CU). Plug-in style residential meter sockets are available as ring type EZM without bypass, ringless type EZMR without bypass, and ringless type EZMH with horn bypass. Tenant circuit breakers must be ordered separately for these branch units. 125 A max. units make use of Type QO, QO-VH or QO-H two-pole tenant circuit breakers (40–125 A). 225 A max. units make use of Type QDP-TM, QBP-TM, QGP-TM and QJP-TM two-pole tenant circuit breakers (70–225 A), and may also make use of two- pole Type QO (40–125 A at 10 kA max.), two-pole Type QO-VH (40–60 A at 100 kA max.), or two-pole Type QO-H (40–60 A at 100 kA max.) tenant circuit breakers. • 225 A commercial branch units are available in ring type or ringless type construction and are supplied with 1200 A copper horizontal cross bus with aluminum vertical connectors as standard (Example: EZML314225). For optional 1200 A continuous all-copper bussing, add suffix “CU” to catalog number (Example: EZML314225CU). Plug-in style commercial meter sockets are available as ring type EZMT with test block bypass (meets EUSERC requirements), ringless type EZMR without bypass, and ringless type EZML with lever bypass. 225 A max. units make use of type QDP-TM, QBP-TM, QGP-TM and QJP-TM two- pole or three-pole tenant circuit breakers (70– 225 A), and may also make use of two-pole type QO (40–125 A at 10 kA max.), two-pole type QO-VH (40–60 A at 100 kA max.), or two-pole type QO-H (40–60 A at 100 kA max.) tenant circuit breakers. Note: QO, QO-VH and QO-H tenant circuit breakers used in 225 A branch units require the use of adapter EZM125QOA (purchased separately). • 400 A branch units are available in ringless type construction only, and are supplied with 1200 A continuous all-copper bussing as standard (Example: EZML332400). These branch units are supplied with factory-installed type LJL tenant circuit breakers that have a field adjustable ampere rating trip setting from 125 A min. to 400 A max. A tamper-evident seal kit is available where needed, order seal kit MICROTUSEAL (refer to NEC 240-6 [c]). 400 A branch units are available as Type EZML with plug-in style lever bypass type meter sockets, or Type EZMK with bolt-on style with manual bypass type meter sockets. • Units having 800 A continuous horizontal cross bus WILL CONNECT with units • Single phase units (three bus bars in horizontal cross bus) WILL NOT CONNECT For Load Center Three-Tiered Series Ratings used downstream from Metering Equipment, refer to Data Bulletins: 4100DB0301 and 2700DB9901. with three phase units (four bus bars in horizontal cross bus). having 1200 A continuous horizontal cross bus. 2-10 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 55

Indoor/Rainproof EZM General Information Class 4141 / Refer to Catalog 4100CT0701 EZ Meter-Pak™ Meter Centers schneider-electric.us Table 2.14: EZM Mains Devices Number Segment Device Name Service Feed Character EZM 1 3 Mains Rating Main Type Feed Direction Special Construction CB FS TB GCB JCB Blank C B T U E Blank CU MS Socket/Bypass Type Service Feed Load Feed Table 2.15: EZM Branch Devices Character Number Segment Device Name EZM Blank R H L T K 1 3 1 3 Meter Sockets Available 125 225 400 Blank CA CU D M10 X Maximum Tenant Circuit Breaker Amperage Number of Meter Sockets Special Construction Configuration Information EZM Description EZ Meter-Pak Meter Center 1Ph, 3W 3Ph, 4W 225 A 400 A 600 A 800 A 1000 A 1200 A 1600 A 2000 A Main Circuit Breaker Main Fusible Switch Terminal Box Main Circuit Breaker (65 kAIC) Main Circuit Breaker (100 kAIC) Overhead / Underground Overhead / Underground Underground Only Overhead Only Underground Only, Meets EUSERC Standards up to 1200 A max. Underground Only, Meets EUSERC Standards up to 1200 A max. Aluminum Horizontal Cross Bus Bar up to 1000A max. Copper Horizontal Cross Bus Bar Includes Energy Reduction Maintenance Switch 1 1000 CB U CU T N E M P I U Q E G N R E T E M I This table is for interpreting existing part numbers only. All possible combinations are not available. 2 EZM R 1 1 3 125 CU Description EZ Meter-Pak Meter Center Ring Type Ringless Type with 5th Jaw Ringless with Horn Bypass and 5th Jaw Lever Bypass with 5th Jaw, 7th Jaw if Three Phase Ring Type Test-Block Bypass EUSERC K-Base Bolt-On Type 1Ph, 3W 3Ph, 4W 1Ph, 3W 3Ph, 4W 1,2,3,4,5 or 6 125 A 225 A 400 A Aluminum Horizontal Cross Bus Bar For 240/120 Vac Delta Systems Copper Horizontal Cross Bus Bar Removable Drip Hood with Indoor Top Endwall with Knockouts 10-Inch Meter Centers 1200A Copper Horizontal Cross Bus Bar © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 2-11 11/10/2017


page 56

2 I M E T E R N G E Q U I P M E N T EZ Meter-Pak™ Meter Centers Selection Information Class 4141 / Refer to Catalog 4100CT0701 schneider-electric.us • Review local utility requirements to ensure that metering equipment meets their standards. • Check local utility to determine available fault current at the meter center. – Select meter center configuration, main lugs only (Six Disconnect Rule), or remote main, main circuit • Using the SCCR table: Selection Information breaker, or main fusible switch. – Read down to select SCCR equal to, or greater than desired rating. – Read across to select branch unit tenant circuit breaker type. – Continue reading across to select EZM main device type. Table 2.16: UL Listed Meter Center Short Circuit Current Ratings (SCCR) [1] Figures Figure 1 [4] Figure 2 [4] Short Circuit Current Rating Maximum) [2] (240 Vac [3] EZM Branch Unit Tenant Circuit Breaker Types Available (Branch Unit Amperes Number of Poles, Tenant Circuit Breaker max., Amperes Rating Range) EZM Meter Center Overcurrent Protection Devices EZM Main Device with Integral Mounted Main, Remote Mounted Main or without an Upstream Mounted Main (Six Disconnect Rule) EZ Meter-Pak (Six Disconnect Rule Applications)—See Figure 1  10 kA  22 kA  25 kA  42 kA  65 kA 100 kA QO (125 A, 2P, 40–125 A) QO (225 A, 2P, 40–125 A) [5] QB (225 A, 2P or 3P, 70–225 A) QO-VH (125 A, 2P, 40–125 A ) QO-VH (225 A, 2P, 40–60 A) [5] QD (225 A, 2P or 3P, 70–225 A) QOH (125 A, 2P, 40–125 A) QOH (225 A, 2P, 40–60 A) [5] QG (225 A, 2P or 3P, 70–225 A) QJ (225 A, 2P or 3P, 70–225 A) [6] LJL (125–400 A, 2P or 3P) [7] 400–2000 A Main Lugs Terminal Box (Tenant Circuit Breakers used as Service Disconnects—6 maximum) EZ Meter-Pak 225–2000 A Main Lugs Terminal Box Applications Protected by Remote Main—See Figure 2  10 kA  22 kA  25 kA  42 kA  65 kA 100 kA QO (125 A, 2P, 40–125 A) QO (225 A, 2P, 40–125 A) [5] QB (225 A 2P or 3P, 70–225 A) LJL (125–400 A, 2P or 3P) [7] QO-VH (125 A, 2P, 40–125 A) QO-VH (225 A, 2P, 40–60 A) [5] LJL (125–400 A, 2P or 3P) [7] QD (225 A 2P or 3P, 70–225 A) LJL (125–400 A, 2P or 3P) [7] QOH (125 A, 2P, 40–125 A) QOH (225 A, 2P, 40–60 A) [5] LJL (125–400 A, 2P or 3P) [7] QO-VH (125 A, 2P, 40–125 A) QO-VH (225 A, 2P, 40–60 A) [5] QD (225 A 2P or 3P, 70–225 A) QG (225 A 2P or 3P, 70–225 A) LJL (125–400 A, 2P or 3P) [7] QO-VH (125 A, 2P, 40–125 A) QO-VH (225 A, 2P, 40–60 A) [5] QD (225 A 2P or 3P, 70–225 A) LJL (125–400 A, 2P or 3P) [7] QJ (225 A 2P or 3P, 70–225 A ) [6] LJL (125–400 A 2P or 3P) [7] QO-VH (125 A, 2P, 40–125 A) QO-VH (225 A, 2P, 40–60 A) [5] QD (225 A 2P only, 70–225 A) LJL (125–400 A, 2P or 3P) [7] QD (225 A 3P only, 70–225 A) [6] Must be protected by an upstream disconnecting means rated 10 k AIR minimum Must be protected by an upstream disconnecting means rated 22 k AIR minimum Must be protected by an upstream disconnecting means rated 25 k AIR minimum Must be protected by an upstream disconnecting means rated 42 k AIR minimum Must be protected by a Square D circuit breaker Type LA (400 A max.) or MA (1000 A max.) Rated 42 k AIR minimum Must be protected by an upstream disconnecting means rated 65 k AIR minimum Must be protected by a Square D circuit breaker Type LH (400 A max.); MG or MJ (800 A max.); MH (1000 A max.); PG or PJ (1200 A max.); RG or RJ (2000 A max.). Must be protected by an upstream disconnecting means rated 100 k AIR minimum Must be protected by an upstream disconnection means with Class R (600 A max.); Class J (600 A max); Class T6 (800 A max.); Class T3 (1200 A max.) or Class L (1200 A max.). Must be protected by an upstream disconnection means with Class R (600 A max.); Class J (600 A max); Class T6 (800 A max.); Class T3 (1200 A max.) or Class L (1200 A max.) fuses or by a Square D circuit breaker Type MJ (800 A max.); MHF (1000 A max.); PJ (1200 A max.); or RJ (2000 A max.) rated 100 k AIR minimum. EZ Meter-Pak—Main Circuit Breaker Applications—See Figure 3 10 kA 65 kA 100 kA QO (125 A, 2P, 40–125 A) QO (225 A, 2P, 40–125 A) [5] QB (225 A 2P or 3P, 70–225 A) QO-VH (125 A, 2P, 40–125 A) QO-VH (225 A, 2P, 40–60 A) [5] QD (225 A 2P or 3P, 70–225 A) LJL (125–400 A, 2P or 3P) [7] QO-VH (125 A, 2P, 40–125 A) QO-VH (225 A, 2P, 40–60 A) [5] QD (225 A 2P only, 70–225 A) QD (225 A 3P only, 70–225 A) [6] LJL (125–400 A, 2P or 3P) [7] QD (225 A 2P only, 70–225 A) QD (225 A 3P only, 70–225 A) [6] LJL (125–400 A 2P or 3P) [7] 400–2000 A EZM Main Device with Type LH (400 A max.); MG or MJ (800 A max.); MH (1000 A max); PG or PJ (1200 A max.); RG or RJ (2000 A max.) 1000 A Main Device with catalog number suffix "CBU" supplied with Type MHF circuit breaker. 800–2000 A EZM Main Device with Type MJ (800 A max.); MHF (1000 A max.); PJ (1200 A max.) or RJ (2000 A max.) Figure 3 [4] EZ Meter-Pak—Main Fusible Switch Applications—See Figure 3 10 kA 100 kA QO (125 A, 2P, 40–125 A) QO (225 A, 2P, 40–125 A) [5] QB (225 A 2P or 3P, 70–225 A) QO-VH (125 A, 2P, 40–125 A) QO-VH (225 A, 2P, 40–60 A) [5] QD (225 A 2P, only, 70–225 A) QD (225 A 3P only, 70–225 A) [6] LJL (125–400 A, 2P or 3P) [7] 400–1200 A EZM Main Device (1Ø or 3Ø) with Class T (300 Vac) fuses installed. 400–1200 A EZM Main Device (1Ø or 3Ø) with Class T (300 Vac) fuses installed. [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] 2-12 Tenant circuit breakers of same frame size having higher AIR values may replace tenant circuit breakers as listed in this table and maintain the series rating. Meter center short circuit current rating is equal to the lowest short circuit current rating given in table for any circuit breaker installed in any meter panelboard in the meter center. Short circuit current rating is measured at the LINE SIDE terminals of the integral mounted or remote mounted main providing overcurrent protection for the EZM metering equipment lineup. For three-tier series ratings refer to Data Bulletin 4100DB0301 and Instruction Bulletin 80043-303-22. Requires use of EZM125QOA adapter (order separately). 3P only tenant circuit breaker(s) are limited to: 100 kA Max. at 208Y/120 Vac or 65 kA Max at 240/120 Vac. Supplied with factory-installed circuit breaker(s), with an adjustable trip range of 125–400 A. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved EZM Branch UnitsServiceDisconnects(6 Max.)TransformerLoadCenters(Main Lugs)EZM Main LugsTerminal BoxEZM Branch UnitsUpstream DisconnectionMeans and OvercurrentProtection as RequiredTransformerLoadCenters(Main Lugs)TenantCircuitBreakersEZM Main Lugs Terminal BoxEZM Branch UnitsTenantCircuitBreakersTransformerLoadCenters(Main Lugs)EZM Circuit Breaker Mainor EZM Main Fusible Switch11/10/2017


page 57

1 Phase Main Devices Class 4161 / Refer to Catalog 4100CT0701 EZ Meter-Pak™ Meter Centers schneider-electric.us 1Ø 3W 120/240 Vac EZ Meter-Pak Meter Centers— 1Ø, Indoor/Rainproof, UL Listed 1200 A Main CB/Fusible Switch Devices come Standard with 2-STEP Removable Service Entrance Endwalls Select EZM meter center short circuit current rating from Table 2.16 UL Listed Meter Center Short Circuit Current Ratings (SCCR), page 2-12. Using this table as a reference, make the following selections: 1. Select EZM 1Ø main device from Table 2.17 or Table 2.18, with an equal or higher short circuit rating than the application. 2. Select EZM 1Ø branch units from Table 2.19, Table 2.20 or Table 2.21. 3. Select proper 2P type QO, QO-VH, QOH, QBP-TM, QDP-TM, QGP-TM or QJP-TM branch circuit breakers for use as tenant mains in branch unit from Table 2.33 and Table 2.34. 4. Select accessories as required fromTable 2.35. 5. Dimensions; see page 2-24 and page 2-25. Select Main Devices—NEMA 3R Construction Table 2.17: Main Devices, Overhead Feed Ampere Rating Horizontal Cross Bus Rating and Bus Bar Material Main Circuit Breaker (1Ø Incoming and 1Ø Outgoing) Cat. No. [8] Width (in.) Factory-Installed Line Side Lug (Conductors per Phase and Neutral) Wire Size (AWG/kcmil) T N E M P I U Q E G N R E T E M I 2 Main Fusible Switches (1Ø Incoming and 1Ø Outgoing) Requires 300 Vac Class T Fuses (Order Separately) 400 600 800 1000 1200 1600 2000  400  600  800 1200  225  400  600  800  800 1600 2000 400 A, Al 600 A, Al 800 A, Al 1200 A, Cu 1200 A, Al 1200 A, Al/Cu 1200 A, Al/Cu 400 A, Al 600 A, Al 800 A, Al 1200 A, Al 800 A, Al 800 A, Al 800 A, Al 800 A, Al 800 A, Cu 1200 A, Al/Cu 1200 A, Cu 65 kA EZM1400CB [9] EZM1600CB[9] EZM1800CB[9] EZM11000CB[9] EZM11200GCBT [10] EZM11600GCBC [9][10] [11] — — — — — — — — — — — — Main Lug Terminal Boxes (1Ø Incoming and 1Ø Outgoing) 100 kA — — — — EZM11200JCBT [10] EZM11600JCBC [9][10] [11] EZM12000CB [9] [11] EZM1400FS[9] EZM1600FS[9] EZM1800FS[9] EZM11200FST [9] EZM1225TB [9][12] EZM1400TB [9] [13] EZM1600TB [9] [13] EZM1800TB [9] [13] EZM1800TBCU [9][13][14] EZM11600TB [9] [13][14] EZM12000TB [9][13] [11] 18.66 18.66 18.66 18.66 23.69 30.19 30.19 18.66 18.50 18.50 23.69 11.66 17.15 17.15 18.66 24.08 22.48 30.19 23.69 30.19 30.19 (1) 1–600 or (2) 1–250 (3) 3/0–500 (3) 3/0–500 (3) 3/0–500 (4) 3/0-500 (6) 1/0–750 or (12) 1/0–250 (6) 1/0–750 or (12) 1/0–250 (1) 1–600 or (2) 1–250 (3) 3/0–500 (3) 3/0–500 (4) 3/0–500 (1) 4–300 (2) 3/0–500 (2) 1/0–750 or (4) 1/0–300 (4) 3/0–500 (4) 3/0–500 (6) 1/0-600 or (12) 1/0-300 6 (Order Lugs Separately) (4) 3/0–500 (6) 1/0–750 or (12) 1/0–250 (6) 1/0-750 or (12) 1/0-250 EZM11200FST Main Circuit Breaker (1Ø Incoming and 1Ø Outgoing) with Energy Reduction Maintenance (ERMS) 1200 1600 2000 1200 A, Cu 1200 A, Cu 1200 A, Cu EMZ11200GCBTMS [15] EMZ11600GCBCMS [9] EMZ12000CBMS [9] EZM11200JCBTMS [15] EZM11600JCBCMS [9] — Does not meet EUSERC requirements. Overhead and underground feed. [8] [9] [10] Ampere rating of the circuit breaker supplied with this device can be changed to a LOWER value in the field by changing the setting on the circuit breaker. [11] [12] [13] Supplied with copper horizontal bus bars and aluminum vertical bus bars. 225 A terminal box supplied with isolated neutral that cannot be bonded Not suitable for use on the LINE side of service equipment. Terminal box is suitable for use on LINE or LOAD side of service equipment. Supplied with isolated neutral and provided with neutral bonding kit for use as required. Refer to page 2-12 for appropriate short circuit current ratings. Feed-thru lug kit available, see page 2-22. Top feed only. [14] [15] © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 2-13 11/10/2017


page 58

EZ Meter-Pak™ Meter Centers 1 Phase Main Devices Class 4161 / Refer to Catalog 4100CT0701 Table 2.18: Main Devices, Underground Feed Only Ampere Rating Horizontal Cross Bus Rating and Bus Bar Material Main Circuit Breakers (1Ø Incoming and 1Ø Outgoing)[16] Cat. No. 100 kA — — — 65 kA EZM1400CBU [17] EZM1600CBU [17] EZM1800CBU[17] 2 I M E T E R N G E Q U I P M E N T EZM11200GCBE 400 A, Al 600 A, Al 800 A Al 1200 A, Cu 1200 A, Al 1200 A, Al 1200 A, Al/Cu 1200 A, Al/Cu 400 A, Al 600 A, Al 600 A, Al 800 A, Al 800 A, Al 1200 A, Al 1200 A, Al  400  600  800 1000 1200 1200 1600 2000  400  600  600  800  800 1200 1200  400  800 1200 — — — — — — — — — — — — Main Fusible Switches (1Ø Incoming and 1Ø Outgoing) [16] Requires 300 Vac Class T Fuses (Order Separately) EZM11000CBU[18] EZM11200GCBU [19][20] [21] EZM11200JCBU [19][20] [21] EZM11200GCBE [20] EZM11600GCBU [19][20] [18] EZM11600JCBU [19][20] [18] EZM11200JCBE [20] EZM12000CBU [19][18] 20.46 26.19 26.19 34.19 23.69 32.39 22.48 30.19 EZM1400FSU EZM1600FSU[19] EZM1600FSE EZM1800FSU[19] EZM1800FSE EZM11200FSB[19] [21] EZM11200FSE 20.46 20.46 18.36 20.46 18.36 23.69 32.39 Main Lug Terminal Boxes (1Ø Incoming and 1Ø Outgoing) 800 A, Al 800 A, Al 1200 A, Al/Cu 17.16 25.16 33.16 Main Circuit Breaker (1Ø Incoming and 1Ø Outgoing) with Energy Reduction Maintenance Switch (ERMS) 26.39 32.39 30.19 30.19 EZM11200GCBUMS EZM11200GCBEMS EZM11600GCBUMS EZM12000CBUMS EZM11200JCBUMS EZM11200JCBEMS EZM11600JCBUMS EZM1400TBU [22] EZM1800TBU [22] EZM11200TBU [22] 1200 A, Al 1200 A, Al 1200 A, Al 1200 A, Al 1200 1200 1600 2000 — schneider-electric.us Width (in.) Factory-Installed Lug Landings for use with Crimp-Type Lugs (2-Hole Mounting) Qty. per Phase and Neutral, except non- EUSERC. [16] 1 (Order Lugs Separately) 2 (Order Lugs Separately) 2 (Order Lugs Separately) 2 (Order Lugs Separately) (4) 3/0–500 3 (Order Lugs Separately) 6 (Order Lugs Separately) 6 (Order Lugs Separately) 1 (Order Lugs Separately) 2 (Order Lugs Separately) 2 (Order Lugs Separately) 2 (Order Lugs Separately) 2 (Order Lugs Separately) (4) 3/0–500 3 (Order Lugs Separately) 1 (Order Lugs Separately) 2 (Order Lugs Separately) 3 (Order Lugs Separately) (4) 3/0–500 3 (Order Lugs Separately) 6 (Order Lugs Separately) 6 (Order Lugs Separately) [16] For mechanical lugs (3/0 AWG– 600 kcmil) order kit CMELK4. Kit includes 4 lugs only. Multiple kits may be required, consult factory. For crimp-type lugs refer to Anderson Electrical Connector Products Catalog AEC-40R. [17] Available by special order with main circuit breaker supplied with other standard ampere ratings, consult local Field Office (allow 6 weeks for delivery). [18] Supplied with copper horizontal bus bars and aluminum vertical bus bars. [19] Does not meet EUSERC requirements. [20] Ampere rating of the circuit breaker supplied with this device can be changed to a LOWER value in the field by changing the setting on the circuit breaker. [21] [22] For field installed Lug Landing Kit, order catalog number EZM1200ULL. Order lugs separately. Terminal box is suitable for use on LINE or LOAD side of service equipment. Supplied with isolated neutral and provided with neutral bonding kit for use as required. Refer to page 2-12 for appropriate short circuit current ratings. 2-14 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 59

1 Phase Branch Devices Class 4161 / Refer to Catalog 4100CT0701 EZ Meter-Pak™ Meter Centers schneider-electric.us 1 Phase Branch Devices—NEMA 3R Construction Table 2.19: Branch Units—1Ø Incoming and 1Ø Outgoing System Type Width (in.) Number of Meter Sockets Horizontal Cross Bus Rating and Bus Bar Material Ring Type 4-Jaw Meter Socket without Bypass [23] Ringless Type 5-Jaw Meter Socket without Bypass Ringless Type 5-Jaw with Horn Bypass Meter Socket 125 A Maximum (Order Type QO, QO-VH or QOH Circuit Breakers Separately) [24] 1Ø3W 120/240 Vac 2P Branch Circuit Breakers 12.25 3 4 5 6 800 A Al 1200 A Cu 800 A Al 1200 A Cu 800 A Al 1200 A Cu 800 A Al 1200 A Cu EZM113125 [25] EZM113125CUX EZM114125 [25] EZM114125CUX EZM115125 [25] EZM115125CUX EZM116125 [25] EZM116125CUX EZMR113125 [25] EZMR113125CUX EZMR114125 [25] EZMR114125CUX EZMR115125 [25] EZMR115125CUX EZMR116125 [25] EZMR116125CUX 225 A Maximum Branch Units (Order Type QBP-TM, QDP-TM, QGP-TM or QJP-TM Circuit Breakers Separately) [26] 1Ø3W 120/240 Vac 2P Branch Circuit Breakers 17.38 2 3 4 5 6 800 A Al 1200 A Cu 800 A Al 1200 A Cu 800 A Al 1200 A Cu 1200 A Al/Cu 1200 A Cu 1200 A Cu EZM112225 [25] EZM112225CUX EZM113225 [25] EZM113225CUX EZM114225 [25] EZM114225CUX EZM115225 EZM115225CU EZM116225 EZMR112225 [25] EZMR112225CUX EZMR113225 [25] EZMR113225CUX EZMR114225 [25] EZMR114225CUX EZMR115225 EZMR115225CU EZMR116225 EZMH114125 EZMH113125 [25] EZMH113125CUX EZMH114125 [25] EZMH114125CUX EZMH115125 [25] EZMH115125CUX EZMH116125 [25] EZMH116125CUX EZMH112225 [25] EZMH112225CUX EZMH113225 [25] EZMH113225CUX EZMH114225 [25] EZMH114225CUX EZMH115225 EZMH115225CU EZMH116225 T N E M P I U Q E G N R E T E M I Table 2.20: Branch Units—225 A Maximum Commercial (Order Type QBP-TM, QDP-TM, QGP-TM or QJP-TM Circuit Breakers Separately) [27] System Type Number of Meter Sockets Horizontal Cross Rating and Bus Bar Bus Material Ringless Type 5-Jaw Meter Socket with Lever Bypass and Jaw Release Width (in.) Cat. No. 1 2 3 4 1200 A Al/Cu 1200 A Cu 1200 A Al/Cu 1200 A Al/Cu 1200 A Cu 1200 A Al/Cu 1200 A Al/Cu 1200 A Cu 1200 A Al/Cu 1200 A Al/Cu 1200 A Cu EZML111225 EZML111225CU EZML111225D [29] EZML112225 EZML112225CU EZML112225D [29] EZML113225 EZML113225CU EZML113225D [29] EZML114225 EZML114225CU 1200 A Al/Cu EZML114225D [29] 19.44 19.44 19.44 19.44 1Ø3W 120/240 Vac 2P Branch Circuit Breakers EZMT111225 EZML113225 Ring Type 5-Jaw Meter Socket Meets EUSERC Requirements with Test Block Bypass. 2 Cat. No. EZMT111225 [28] — — EZMT112225 [28] — — EZMT113225 [28][30] — — — — — Width (in.) 22.42 — — 22.42 — — 22.42 — — — — — Table 2.21: Branch Units—400 A Maximum Commercial Main Rating Material 1200 A Cu 1200 A Cu Cross Bus and Bus Bar Meter Sockets System Type 120/240 Vac Number of 1Ø3W 2P Branch Circuit Breakers 1 2 Ringless Type 5-Jaw Meter Socket with Lever Bypass and Jaw Release. Includes Factory-Installed 400 A Type LJL Ringless Type K Bolt-on 4-Jaw Meter Socket with Manual Bypass. Includes Factory-Installed 400 A Type LJL Circuit Breaker [31] [32] Cat. No. Circuit Breaker [32] Cat. No. Width (in.) 23.21 23.21 EZMK111400 EZMK112400 Width (in.) 27.56 27.56 EZML111400 EZML112400 [23] Snap-on aluminum sealing rings supplied as standard. [24] Supplied with removable drip hood and equipped with an indoor top endwall with knockouts provided. For 1200 A main cross bus add suffix “X” to catalog number (Example: EZM314125X). Allow 6 weeks for delivery. [25] Type QO, QO-VH and QOH branch circuit breakers (40–60 A) may be installed with use of EZM125QOA adapter kits, see page 2-22. [26] 2P Type QO (40–125 A, 10 kA max. meter center SCCR) or QO-VH and QO-H (40–60 A, 100 kA max. meter center SCCR) may be installed using EZM125QOA adapter kit, see page 2-22. [27] [28] Supplied with bondable neutral, suitable for use as service equipment. Use main lugs terminal box type EZM-TBU for Six Disconnect Rule applications to feed this device. Supplied with copper horizontal bus bars and aluminum vertical bus bars. [29] Supplied with removable drip hood and equipped with an indoor top endwall with knockouts provided. [30] Does not meet EUSERC 48 in. minImum / 75 in. maximum meter height requirements for outdoor installations. The bottom meter socket is 37 inches above ground when the device is mounted with the top meter socket at 75 inches above ground. EUSERC indoor requirements are 36 in. minimum / 75 in. maximum. [31] Supplied with Class 320 lever bypass meter socket. Utilizes anti-inversion clip kit MMLRK, if required, refer to page 2-22. [32] LJL circuit breaker has adjustable trip settings from 125-400 A. Use seal kit MICROTUSEAL, if required. LJL circuit breaker terminal lug kit factory-installed and accommodates (2) 2/0-500 kcmil Cu-Al per phase. Alternate lug kit AL400L61K3 for LJL circuit breaker is available, see. page 2-22. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 2-15 11/10/2017


page 60

2 I M E T E R N G E Q U I P M E N T EZ Meter-Pak™ Meter Centers 3 Phase Main Devices Class 4162 / Refer to Catalog 4100CT0701 schneider-electric.us 3Ø4W 208Y/120 Vac or 240/120 Vac Delta EZ Meter-Pak Meter Centers—3Ø Indoor/Rainproof, UL Listed 1200 A Main CB/Fusible Switch Devices come Standard with 2-STEP Removable Service Entrance Endwalls Select EZM meter center short circuit current rating from Table 2.16. Using this table as a reference, make the following selections: 1. Select 3Ø EZM main device below with an equal or higher short circuit rating than the application from Table 2.22 and Table 2.23. 2. Select EZM 3Ø branch units from Table 2.24, Table 2.25, and Table 2.26. 3. Select proper 2P type QO, QO-VH, QOH, QBP-TM, QDP-TM, QGP-TM or QJP-TM or 3P QBP-TM, QDP-TM, QGP-TM or QJP-TM branch circuit breakers for use as tenant mains in branch unit; from Table 2.33 and Table 2.34. 4. Select accessories as required, from page 2-22. 5. Dimensions see page 2-24. 3 Phase Main Devices—NEMA 3R Construction Table 2.22: Main Devices, Overhead/Underground Feed Horizontal Cross Bus Rating and Bus Ampere Rating Main Circuit Breakers (3Ø Incoming and 3Ø Outgoing) 65 kA Short Circuit Current Rating (400–1600 A Max.), 100 kA Short Circuit Current Rating (2000 A Max.) Bar Material Cat. No.[33] Width (in.) Short Circuit Rating 65 kA 100 kA  400  600  800 1000 1200 1600 2000 400 A, Al 600 A, Al 800 A, Al 1200 A, Al 1200 A, Al 1200 A, Al/Cu 1200 A, Al/Cu EZM3400CB [34] EZM3600CB[34] EZM3800CB[34] EZM31000CB[34] EZM31200GCBT [35] [36] EZM31600GCBC[36] [37] 18.66 18.66 18.66 18.66 23.69 30.19 30.19 Main Fusible Switches (3Ø Incoming and 3Ø Outgoing) Requires 300 Vac Class T Fuses (Order Separately) 18.66 18.66 18.66 23.69 EZM3400FS[34] EZM3600FS[34] EZM3800FS[34] EZM31200FST [35] EZM31200JCBT [35] [36] EZM31600JCBC[36] [37] EZM32000CB [37] 400 A, Al 600 A, Al 800 A, Al 1200 A, Al  400  600  800 1200 — — — — — — — — — Main Lug Terminal Boxes (3Ø Incoming and 3Ø Outgoing) EZM31200FST 225 400 600 800 800 1600 2000 800 A, Al 800 A, Al 800 A, Al 800 A, Al 800 A, Cu 1200 A, Al/Cu 1200 A, Cu 11.66 17.15 17.15 18.66 24.08 22.48 30.19 Main Circuit Breakers (3Ø Incoming and 3Ø Outgoing) with Energy Reduction Maintenance Switch (ERMS) 23.69 30.19 30.19 EZM3225TB [38] EZM3400TB [39] EZM3600TB [39] EZM3800TB [39] EZM3800TBCU [39] [40] EZM31600TB [37] [40] [39] EZM32000TB [39] EZM31200GCBTMS[35] EZM31600GCBCMS[34] EZM31200JCBTMS[35] EZM31600JCBCMS[34] 1200 A, Cu 1200 A, Cu 1200 A, Cu EZM32000CBMS[34] — — — — — — — 1200 1600 2000 — Factory-Installed Line Side Lug Neutral) Wire Size (AWG–kcmil) (Conductors per Phase and (1) 1–600 or (2) 1–250 (3) 3/0–500 (3) 3/0–500 (3) 3/0–500 (4) 3/0-500 (6) 1/0–750 or (12) 1/0–250 (6) 1/0–750 or (12) 1/0–250 (1) 1–600 or (2 )1–250 (3) 3/0–500 (3) 3/0–500 (4) 3/0–500 (1) 4–300 (2) 3/0–500 (2) 1/0–750 or (4) 1/0–300 (4) 3/0–500 (4) 3/0–500 (6) 1/0-600 or (12) 1/0-300 6 (Order Lugs Separately) (4) 3/0–500 (6) 1/0–750 or (12) 1/0–250 (6) 1/0–750 or (12) 1/0–250 Top feed only. [33] Does not meet EUSERC requirements. [34] Overhead and underground feed. [35] [36] Ampere rating of the circuit breaker supplied with this device can be changed to a LOWER value in the field by changing the setting on the circuit breaker. [37] Supplied with copper horizontal bus bars and aluminum vertical bus bars. 225 A terminal box supplied with isolated neutral that cannot be bonded. [38] Terminal box is suitable for use on LINE or LOAD side of service equipment. Supplied with isolated neutral and provided with neutral bonding kit for use as required. Refer to page 2-12 for [39] appropriate short circuit current ratings. Feed-thru lug kit available, seeTable 2.35 [40] 2-16 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 61

3 Phase Main Devices Class 4162 / Refer to Catalog 4100CT0701 EZ Meter-Pak™ Meter Centers schneider-electric.us Table 2.23: Main Device, Underground Feed Only Ampere Rating Horizontal Cross Bus Rating and Bus Bar Material Main Circuit Breakers (3Ø Incoming and 3Ø Outgoing) Cat. No. Width (in.) Factory-Installed Lug Landings For use Mounting) Qty. per Phase and Neutral, with Crimp-Type Lugs (2-Hole except non-EUSERC device.[41] Short Circuit Rating 100 kA 65 kA EZM3400CBU [42] EZM3600CBU[42] EZM3800CBU [42] — — — — 400 600 800 1000 1200 1200 1600 2000 400 A, Al 600 A, Al 800 A, Al 1200 A, Cu 1200 A, Al 1200 A, Al 1200 A, Al/Cu 1200 A, Al/Cu 20.46 26.19 26.19 34.19 23.69 32.39 30.19 30.19 Main Fusible Switches (3Ø Incoming and 3Ø Outgoing) Requires 300 Vac Class T Fuses (Order Separately) 20.46 26.19 26.19 23.69 32.39 EZM31000CBU EZM31200JCBU [43] [44] [45] EZM31200JCBE [45] EZM31600JCBU [43] [45][46] EZM32000CBU [43][46] EZM3400FSU EZM3600FSU EZM3800FSU EZM31200FSB [43][44] EZM31200FSE EZM31200GCBU [43] [44] [45] EZM31200GCBE [45] EZM31600GCBU [43] [45][46] 400 A, Al 600 A, Al 800 A, Al 1200 A, Al 1200 A, Al  400  600  800 1200 1200 — — — — — — Main Lugs Terminal Boxes (3Ø Incoming and 3Ø Outgoing) EZM31200GCBU  400  800 1200 400 A, Al 800 A, Al 1200 A, Cu 17.16 25.16 33.16 Main Circuit Breaker (3Ø Incoming and 3Ø Outgoing) with Energy reduction Maintenance Switch (ERMS) 23.69 32.39 30.19 30.19 EZM31200GCBUMS EZM31200GCBEMS EZM31600GCBUMS EZM32000CBUMS EZM31200JCBUMS EZM31200JCBEMS EZM31600JCBUMS EZM3400TBU [47] EZM3800TBU [47] EZM31200TBU [47] 1200 A, Cu 1200 A, Cu 1200 A, Cu 1200 A, Cu 1200 1200 1600 2000 — — — — 1 (Order Lugs Separately) 2 (Order Lugs Separately) 2 (Order Lugs Separately) 3 (Order Lugs Separately) (4) 3/0-500 3 (Order Lugs Separately) 6 (Order Lugs Separately) 6 (Order Lugs Separately) 1 (Order Lugs Separately) 2 (Order Lugs Separately) 2 (Order Lugs Separately) (4) 3/0-500 3 (Order Lugs Separately) 1 (Order Lugs Separately) 2 (Order Lugs Separately) 3 (Order Lugs Separately) (4) 3/0–500 3 (Order Lugs Separately) 6 (Order Lugs Separately) 6 (Order Lugs Separately) T N E M P I U Q E G N R E T E M I 2 [41] For mechanical lugs (3/0 AWG– 600 kcmil) order kit CMELK4. Kit includes 4 lugs only. Multiple kits may be required, consult factory. For crimp-type lugs refer to Anderson Electrical Connector Products Catalog AEC-40R. For field installed Lug Landing Kit order catalog number EZM1200ULL. [42] Available by special order with main circuit breaker supplied with other standard ampere ratings, consult your nearest Field Sales Office (allow 6 weeks for delivery). [43] Does not meet EUSERC requirements. [44] [45] Ampere rating of the circuit breaker supplied with this device can be changed to a LOWER value in the field by changing the setting on the circuit breaker. [46] Supplied with copper horizontal bus bars and aluminum vertical bus bars. [47] Terminal box is suitable for use on LINE or LOAD side of service equipment. Supplied with isolated neutral and provided with neutral bonding kit for use as required. Refer to page 2-12 for appropriate short circuit current ratings. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 2-17 11/10/2017


page 62

EZ Meter-Pak™ Meter Centers 3 Phase Branch Devices Class 4162 / Refer to Catalog 4100CT0701 schneider-electric.us Table 2.24: Branch Units—3Ø Incoming and 1Ø Outgoing 3 Phase Branch Devices—NEMA 3R Construction System Type Width (in.) Number of Meter Sockets Horizontal Cross Bus and Bus Bar Material Rating [48] Ring Type 5-Jaw Meter Socket without Bypass[49] 125 A Maximum (Order Type QO, QO-VH or QOH Circuit Breakers Separately) [50] Cat. No. Ringless Type 5-Jaw Meter Socket without Bypass Ringless Type 5-Jaw Meter Socket with Horn Bypass EZMR313125 [48] EZMH313125 [48] 2 I M E T E R N G E Q U I P M E N T 3Ø4W 208Y/120 Vac 5-Jaw-Meter Socket 2P Branch Circuit Breakers 12.25 3 4 5 6 800 A Al 800 A Al 1200 A Cu 800 A Al 800 A Al 1200 A Cu 800 A Al 800 A Al 1200 A Cu 800 A Al 800 A Al 1200 A Cu EZM313125 [48] EZM313125M10 [51] EZM313125CUX EZM314125 [48] EZM314125M10 [51] EZM314125CUX EZM315125 [48] EZM315125M10 [51] EZM315125CUX EZM316125 [48] EZM316125M10 [51] EZM316125CUX 225 A Maximum (Order Type QBP-TM, QDP-TM,QGP-TM or QJP-TM Circuit Breakers Separately) [52] 3Ø4W 208Y/120 Vac 5-Jaw-Meter Socket 2P Branch Circuit Breakers 2 3 4 5 6 17.38 17.37 800 A Al 1200 A Cu 800 A Al 1200 A Cu 800 A Al 1200 A Cu 1200 A Al/Cu 1200 A Cu 1200 A Al/Cu 1200 A Cu 1200 A Al/Cu EZM312225 [48] EZM312225CUX EZM313225 [48] EZM313225CUX EZM314225 [48] EZM314225CUX EZM315225 EZM315225CU EZM316225 EZM316225CU EZM316225CA Table 2.25: Branch Units—225 A Maximum Commercial System Type Number of Meter Sockets Horizontal Cross Bus Bar Material Rating and Bus Ringless Type Meter Socket without Bypass Cat. No. Width (in.) — EZMR313125CUX EZMR314125 [48] — EZMR314125CUX EZMR315125 [48] — EZMR315125CUX EZMR316125 [48] — EZMR316125CUX EZMR312225 [48] EZMR312225CUX EZMR313225 [48] EZMR313225CUX EZMR314225 [48] EZMR314225CUX EZMR315225 EZMR315225CU EZMR316225 EZMR316225CU EZMR316225CA — EZMH313125CUX EZMH314125 [48] — EZMH314125CUX EZMH315125 [48] — EZMH315125CUX EZMH316125 [48] — EZMH316125CUX EZMH312225 [48] EZMH312225CUX EZMH313225 [48] EZMH313225CUX EZMH314225 [48] EZMH314225CUX EZMH315225 EZMH315225CU EZMH316225 EZMH316225CU EZMH316225CA Ring Type Meter Socket with Test Block Bypass. Meets EUSERC Requirements Ringless Type Meter Socket with Lever Bypass and Jaw Release Cat. No. Width (in.) Cat. No. — — — — — — — — — — — EZML312225 EZML312225CU EZML312225D [50] EZML313225 EZML313225CU EZML313225D [50] EZML314225 EZML314225CU EZML314225D [50] — 19.44 19.44 19.44 EZMT311225 [55] EZMT312225 [55] — — EZMT313225 [55][56] — — — — — Width (in.) 22.42 22.42 — — 22.42 — — — 22.42 — — 22.42 — — 22.42 — — — 3Ø Incoming and 1Ø Outgoing [53] (Order Type QBP-TM, QDP-TM,QGP-TM or QJP-TM circuit breakers separately) [54] 3Ø4W 208Y/120 Vac 5-Jaw Meter Sockets 2P Branch Circuit Breakers 1 2 3 4 1200 A Al/Cu 1200 A Al/Cu 1200 A Cu 1200 A Al/Cu 1200 A Al/Cu 1200 A Cu 1200 A Al/Cu 1200 A Al/Cu 1200 A Cu 1200 A Al/Cu — — — — — — — — — — EZMT311225 EZML313225 EZMT311225 Without Cover 3Ø Incoming and 3Ø Outgoing (Order QBP-TM, QDP-TM, QGP-TM or QJP-TM circuit breakers separately, see [54] 3Ø4W 240/120 Vac Delta or 208Y/120 Vac 7-Jaw Meter Socket 3P Branch Circuit Breakers 1 2 3 4 1200 A Al/Cu 1200 A Cu 1200 A Al/Cu 1200 A Al/Cu 1200 A Cu 1200 A Al/Cu 1200 A Al/Cu 1200 A Cu 1200 A Al/Cu 1200 A Al/Cu 1200 A Cu 1200 A Al/Cu — — — EZMR332225 EZMR332225CU — EZMR333225 EZMR333225CU EZMR334225 EZMR334225CU — — — — — 19.44 19.44 19.44 EZML331225 EZML331225CU EZML331225D [50] EZML332225 EZML332225CU EZML332225D [50] EZML333225 EZML333225CU EZML333225D [50] EZML334225 EZML334225CU EZML334225D [50] 19.44 19.44 19.44 19.44 EZMT331225 [55] — — EZMT332225 [55] — — EZMT333225 [55][56] — — — — — For 1200 A main cross bus, add suffix “X” to catalog number. Example: EZMR313125X.. Allow 6 weeks for delivery. [48] [49] Snap-On aluminum sealing rings supplied as standard. [50] Supplied with removable drip hood and equipped with an indoor top endwall with knockouts provided. [51] Distance between meter sockets as measured from centerline to centerline is 10 inches. [52] [53] 2P Type QO (40–125 A, 10 kA max. meter center SCCR) or QO-VH and QO-H (40–60 A, 100 kA max. meter center SCCR) may be installed using EZM125QOA adapter kit, see page 2-22. For 240/120 Vac Delta Systems add Suffix “CA” to catalog number (Example: EZM314125CA). All meter sockets are phased A and C only. Price remains the same as the base catalog number. Order only branch units, not stocked in PDS (6-week delivery). 2P Type QO (40–125 A, 10 kA max. meter center SCCR) or QO-VH and QO-H (40–60 A, 100 kA max. meter center SCCR) may be installed using EZM125QOA adapter kit, refer to. [54] [55] Supplied with bondable neutral, suitable for use as service equipment. Use main lugs terminal box type EZM-TBU for Six Disconnect Rule applications to feed this device. Supplied with copper horizontal bus bars and aluminum vertical bus bars. [56] Does not meet EUSERC 48 in. minImum / 75 in. maximum meter height requirements for outdoor installations. The bottom meter socket is 37 inches above ground when the device is mounted with the top meter socket at 75 inches above ground. EUSERC indoor requirements are 36 in. minimum / 75 in. maximum. For 400 A maximum Commercial Branch Units, see page 2-19. 2-18 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 63

3 Phase Branch Devices Class 4162 / Refer to Catalog 4100CT0701 EZ Meter-Pak™ Meter Centers schneider-electric.us Table 2.26: Branch Units—400 A Maximum Commercial System Type Number of Meter Sockets Horizontal Cross Bus Rating Ringless Type Meter Socket with Lever Bypass and Jaw Release—Includes Factory- Installed 400 A Type LJL Circuit Breaker. [57], [58] Ringless Type K Bolt-on Meter Socket with Manual Factory-Installed 400 A Type LJL Circuit Breaker. Bypass—Includes [58] EZMK311400 Starting Position AØ and BØ AØ and CØ BØ and CØ can be changed to can be changed to can be changed to Possible Ending Position (By moving only one “Z” connector) AØ and CØ AØ and BØ or BØ and CØ AØ and CØ 3Ø Incoming and 1Ø Outgoing [59] 3Ø4W 208Y/120 Vac 1 5-Jaw Meter Socket 2 2P Circuit Breakers 3Ø Incoming and 3Ø Outgoing 1 3Ø4W 240/120 Vac Delta or 208Y/120 Vac 7-Jaw Meter Socket 3P Circuit Breakers 2 Cat. No. Width (in.) Cat. No. 1200 A Cu 1200 A Cu EZML311400 EZML312400 1200 A Cu EZML331400 1200 A Cu EZML332400 23.21 23.21 23.21 23.21 EZMK311400 EZMK312400 EZMK331400 EZMK332400 Width (in.) 27.56 27.56 27.56 27.56 3Ø–1Ø OUT EZM Branch Unit Phase Balancing Flexibility The major benefit of factory phase balancing is that most jobs will not require field phase balancing. To see if meter socket phase balancing in the field is required (refer to wiring diagram for complete instructions): A. Determine if the load in amperes on each phase of the transformer using handle rating of tenant circuit breakers installed at each number of meter sockets. Use Phase Balancing Chart to determine total number of connections each meter socket makes on each phase of transformer. B. If phase balancing is required, determine which meter sockets should be changed to properly phase balance metering equipment lineup. C. Once meter socket(s) is selected to be phase balanced, remove individual meter socket cover from each meter socket to be phase balanced. The vertical bus bars running top to bottom in the branch unit behind each meter socket are phased: AØ, BØ, CØ, left to right. D. By moving only the line side meter socket “Z” shaped connectors per meter socket to be changed, phase balancing can easily be accomplished on-site: T N E M P I U Q E G N R E T E M I 2 Table 2.27: Example: To change an AØ and CØ meter socket to a BØ and CØ socket Starting Position Meter Socket Phaseing: AØ and CØ Step 2: Loosen hex nut from AØ line side meter socket jaw and slide “Z” connector down to free connector from stud. Step 1: Remove hex nut from AØ line side connection to vertical bus. Step 3: Rotate “Z” connector to right and align with stud on BØ vertical bus. Step 4: Slide “Z” connector up to engage stud on BØ vertical bus. Torque hex nut of meter socket jaw to 75 lb-in (8 N•m). Step 6: Replace hex nut (removed in Step 1) onto stud of BØ vertical bus and torque to 75 lb-in (9 N•m). Phase balancing of meter socket is complete: BØ and CØ. [57] Supplied with Class 320 lever bypass meter socket. Use anti-inversion clip kit, catalog number MMLRK, if required. See page 2-22. [58] LJL circuit breaker has adjustable trip settings from 125-400 A. Use seal kit MICROTUSEAL, if required. LJL circuit breaker terminal lug kit factory-installed and accommodates (2) 2/0-500 kcmil Cu-Al per phase. Alternate lug kit AL400L61K3 for LJL circuit breaker is available, see page 2-22. For 240/120 Vac Delta Systems add Suffix “CA” to catalog number (Example: EZML312400CA). All meter sockets are phased A and C only. Price remains the same as the base catalog number. “Order only” branch units, not stocked in PDS (4–6 week delivery). Order point Lexington. [59] © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 2-19 11/10/2017


page 64

EZ Meter-Pak™ Meter Centers 3 Phase Main Devices (Busway Side Tap) Class 4162 / Refer to Catalog 4100CT0701 schneider-electric.us EZM Main with Busway Side Tap EZ Meter-Pak metering equipment is available for use in high rise applications for connection to 800–5000 A I-Line™ or I-Line II plug-in busway installed as a vertical riser. Three phase only EZM main devices in the form of a main circuit breaker or main fusible switch are available with an integral busway tap extending from the right or left side of the main device and phased to align with the busway for either neutral front or neutral back installations. Busway Mains, 3Ø only (Indoor only) ordering instructions: Step 1: Determine height to center line of busway plug-in opening, check local utility requirements for minimum and maximum meter socket heights. Step 2: Determine side of EZM main section for busway tap to extend from (busway tap is an integral part of the main and extends to the left or right on the EZM device as viewed from the front). Step 3: Check phasing of busway riser to insure that it matches phasing of busway tap on main section (indicated as neutral front or neutral back as viewed from the front). Step 4: Select Cat. No. from tables below. Step 5: Busway main devices are build to order specials and require 4 to 6 weeks for delivery. Description EZ Meter-Pak Meter Center 3Ph, 4W EZM 3 800 CB NF BTR Main Circuit Breaker Main Fusible Switch Main Circuit Breaker (65 kAIC) Main Circuit Breaker (100KAIC) Neutral Front Neutral Back Bus Tap Left Bus Tap Right This table is for interpreting existing part numbers only. All possible combinations are not available. Mains Rating Table 2.28: EZM Busway Side Tap Mains Devices Number Segment Character EZM Device Name 3 Service Feed 400 A 600 A 800 A 1000 A 1200 A CB FS GB JB NF NB BTL BTR Bus Tap Location Neutral Position Main Type Table 2.29: 1200 A EZM Mains with Busway Side Tap (Three Phase Only—Note positioning left or right below) Ampere Rating Main Circuit Breaker with Busway Tap 65,000 RMS Symmetrical Amperes Maximum Short Circuit Current Rating Busway to LEFT of EZM Metering Equipment Lineup Horizontal Cross Neutral Front Neutral Front Neutral Back Bus Rating Width (in.) Busway to RIGHT of EZM Metering Equipment Lineup Neutral Back  400  600  800 1000 1200 18.66 18.66 18.66 18.66 23.36 400 A Al 600 A Al 800 A Al 1000 A Al 1200 A Cu EZM3400CBNFBTL EZM3600CBNFBTL EZM3800CBNFBTL EZM31000CBNFBTL [60] EZM31200GBNFBTL [60] EZM3400CBNBBTL EZM3600CBNBBTL EZM3800CBNBBTL EZM31000CBNBBTL [60] EZM31200GBNBBTL[60] EZM3400CBNFBTR EZM3600CBNFBTR EZM3800CBNFBTR EZM31000CBNFBTR [60] EZM31200GBNFBTR [60] EZM3400CBNBBTR EZM3600CBNBBTR EZM3800CBNBBTR EZM31000CBNBBTR [60] EZM31200GBNBBTR [60] 100,000 RMS Symmetrical Amperes Maximum Short Circuit Current Rating 1200 23.36 1200 A Cu EZM31200JBNFBTL [60] EZM31200JBNBBTL [60] EZM31200JBNFBTR [60] EZM31200JBNBBTR [60] Main Fusible Switch with Busway Tap Requires Class T (300 Vac) Fuses - Order Separately 100,000 RMS Symmetrical Amperes Maximum Short Circuit Current Rating  400  600  800 1200 18.66 18.66 18.66 22.36 400 A Al 600 A Al 800 A Al 1200 A Cu EZM3400FSNFBTL EZM3600FSNFBTL EZM3800FSNFBTL EZM31200FSNFBTL [60] EZM3400FSNBBTL EZM3600FSNBBTL EZM3800FSNBBTL EZM31200FSNBBTL [60] EZM3400FSNFBTR EZM3600FSNFBTR EZM3800FSNFBTR EZM31200FSNFBTR [60] EZM3400FSNBBTR EZM3600FSNBBTR EZM3800FSNBBTR EZM31200FSNBBTR [60] NOTE: Dimensions shown position the centerline of top meter socket of a 125 A, 5- Gang or 6-Gang branch unit at 72" above floor level. Check with utility to meet local requirements. Busway Transition Section EZM busway transition section provides no overcurrent protection for the downstream EZM branch units. Tenant main circuit breakers in these branch units must be selected as “fully rated” equipment. (Examples: QO for 10 kA, QO-VH for 22 kA or QOH for 42 kA.) Table 2.30: EZM Busway Transition Sections (3Ø only) Neutral Front I-Line™ Busway location RIGHT of EZM Transition Section LEFT of EZM Transition Section EZM3BUSRF EZM3BUSLF Ampere Rating 1200 1200 [60] Requires use of branch units supplied with 1200 A horizontal cross bus. 2-20 Neutral Back EZM3BUSRB EZM3BUSLB Width (in.) 12.00 12.00 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 5.75146CL ofBuswayPlan View DetailWall56.11142531.117904.11104Floor LevelTop of EZMMountingChannelEZMBus TapCL of BuswayPlug-in OpeningEZM3800CBNFBTRWidth(See Note)56.11142531.117904.11104Floor LevelTop of EZMMountingChannelEZMBus TapCL of BuswayPlug-in OpeningEZM3800FSNBBTLWidth(See Note)4.1110456.11142516.1140955.1114001.0025Floor LevelTop of EZMMountingChannelEZMBus TapCL of BuswayPlug-in OpeningEZM3BUSRF and EZM3BUSRB4.1110456.11142516.1140955.1114001.0025Floor LevelTop of EZMMountingChannelEZMBus TapCL of BuswayPlug-in OpeningEZM3BUSLF and EZM3BUSLBWidthWidth11/10/2017


page 65

3 Phase Main Devices (Busway Center Tap) Class 4162 / Refer to Catalog 4100CT0701 EZ Meter-Pak™ Meter Centers schneider-electric.us EZM Main with Center-Mounted Busway Tap The EZM Main with center-mounted busway tap is a space-saving design for high rise applications that is installed as an integral component of the vertical riser busway and allows standard EZM branches to be mounted from both sides. See online digest updates for availability or contact your local field sales office for additional information EZM Busway Center Tap Mains The EZM Busway Center Tap mains offer provides a convenient space saving method for connecting EZM Branch Meter sections to I-Line II Busway in vertical riser applications. The mains are connected "inline" with the Busway column conserving precious electrical room space. 1. The Part Number Coding Table is to be used for interpreting existing part numbers only. All possible combinations are not available. Please contact product support for additional references needed. 2. Outgoing Feeder Bus Joint-Pak is included with each EZM CTM Section. 3. EZM Horizontal Cross Bus is 1200 A Copper Only 4. Busway Center Tap Mains are fully NEMA 3R Rated. 5. Mains Devices are fully sealable by utility. 6. EZM Branch units are installed using the mounting kit - EZMCTMKIT. 7. Short circuit current rating = 150,000 symmetrical amps. 8. EZM CTM is configured for neutral front only (G-> N-> C-> B->A-> G) as viewed front to rear. 9. Compatible with I-LINE II Busway rated 2000–5000 A. 10. Includes factory installed PowerPact M- and P-frame Circuit Breakers and Switches (Rated 600–1200 A.) 11. Fully compatible with all standard EZ Meter-Pak Branch Devices and Extenders. Table 2.31: Part Number Coding Number Segment Device Name System Connection (Phase Order: Front to Back) Maximum Current of Main Service Disconnect Type of Main Service Disconnect (with AIC Rating) Material of I-Line II Amperage of I-Line II Character EZM 3 600 800 1000 1200 GCB JCB FS C A 20 25 30 32 40 50 Table 2.32: EZM Busway Center Tap Mains C 20 3 JCB EZM 1000 Description EZM Busway Center Tap Main 3 Phase (N, C, B, A) 600 A 800 A 1000 A 1200 A 65 kAIC Circuit Breaker 100 kAIC Circuit Breaker 100 kAIC Fused Switch Copper Aluminum 2000 A 2500 A 3000 A 3200 A 4000 A 5000 A This table is for interpreting existing part numbers only. All possible combinations are not available. Main CB Ampere Rating (A) I-Line II Busway Rating Material Cat. No. Height (in.) Width (in.) Depth (in.) MC Height (in.) T N E M P I U Q E G N R E T E M I 2 Main Circuit Breakers (3Ø Incoming and 3Ø Outgoing) 65 kA SCCR 2000A, Al 3000A, Al 4000A, Al 4000A, Al 4000A, Cu 2000A, Al 3000A, Al 3000A, Cu 3000A, Al 4000A, Al 4000A, Al 4000A, Al 4000A, Al 4000A, Cu 4000A, Al 4000A, Al 600 800 1000 1200 — — — EZM3600GCBA40 EZM3600GCBC40 EZM3800GCBA20 EZM3800GCBA30 EZM3800GCBC30 100 kA EZM3600JCBA20 EZM3600JCBA30 EZM3600JCBA40 — — — — — — — EZM3800JCBA30 EZM3800JCBA40 EZM3800GCBA40 EZM31000GCBA40 — — — — EZM31000JCBA40 EZM31000JCBC40 EZM31200GCBA40 — — EZM31200JCBA40 43.08 43.08 43.08 43.08 43.08 43.08 43.08 43.08 43.08 43.08 43.08 43.08 43.08 43.08 43.08 43.08 22.70 22.70 27.96 27.96 27.96 22.70 22.70 22.70 22.70 27.96 27.96 27.96 27.96 27.96 27.96 27.96 14.78 14.78 14.78 14.78 14.78 14.78 14.78 14.78 14.78 14.78 14.78 14.78 14.78 14.78 14.78 14.78 56.11 56.11 56.11 56.11 56.11 56.11 56.11 56.11 56.11 56.11 56.11 56.11 56.11 56.11 56.11 56.11 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 2-21 11/10/2017


page 66

EZ Meter-Pak™ Meter Centers Tenant Circuit Breakers and EZM Accessories Class 4162 / Refer to Catalog 4100CT0701 schneider-electric.us Table 2.33: 125 A Max. EZM Branch Unit Tenant Circuit Breakers Ampere Rating Tenant Circuit Breakers and EZM Accessories 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 125 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 125 150 175 200 225 70 80 90 100 110 125 150 175 200 225 10 k AIR QO240 QO250 QO260 QO270 QO280 QO290 QO2100 QO2110 QO2125 10 k AIR QO240 [61] QO250 [61] QO260 [61] QBP22070TM QBP22080TM QBP22090TM QBP22100TM QBP22110TM QBP22125TM QBP22150TM QBP22175TM QBP22200TM QBP22225TM QBP32070TM QBP32080TM QBP32090TM QBP32100TM QBP32110TM QBP32125TM QBP32150TM QBP32175TM QBP32200TM QBP32225TM 22 k AIR QO240VH QO250VH QO260VH QO270VH QO280VH QO290VH QO2100VH QO2110VH QO2125VH 25 k AIR QO240VH [61] [62] QO250VH [61] [62] QO260VH [61] [62] QDP22070TM QDP22080TM QDP22090TM QDP22100TM QDP22110TM QDP22125TM QDP22150TM QDP22175TM QDP22200TM QDP22225TM QDP32070TM QDP32080TM QDP32090TM QDP32100TM QDP32110TM QDP32125TM QDP32150TM QDP32175TM QDP32200TM QDP32225TM 42 k AIR QOH240 QOH250 QOH260 QOH270 QOH280 QOH290 QOH2100 QOH2110 QOH2125 65 k AIR QOH240 [61] [63] QOH250 [61] [63] QOH260 [61] [63] QGP22070TM QGP22080TM QGP22090TM QGP22100TM QGP22110TM QGP22125TM QGP22150TM QGP22175TM QGP22200TM QGP22225TM QGP32070TM QGP32080TM QGP32090TM QGP32100TM QGP32110TM QGP32125TM QGP32150TM QGP32175TM QGP32200TM QGP32225TM 100 k AIR — — — — — — — — — 100 k AIR — — — QJP22070TM QJP22080TM QJP22090TM QJP22100TM QJP22110TM QJP22125TM QJP22150TM QJP22175TM QJP22200TM QJP22225TM QJP32070TM [64] QJP32080TM [64] QJP32090TM [64] QJP32100TM[64] QJP32110TM [64] QJP32125TM [64] QJP32150TM [64] QJP32175TM [64] QJP32200TM [64] QJP32225TM [64] Table 2.34: 225 A Max. EZM Branch Unit Tenant Circuit Breakers Ampere Rating 2 I M E T E R N G E Q U I P M E N T Poles 2 QO2100VH, Plug-on Type Circuit Breaker Poles 2 3 QDP22200TM [61] Must use EZM125QOA adapter. [62] QO-VH tenant circuit breaker is rated 22 k AIR max. [63] QOH tenant circuit breaker is rated 42 k AIR max. [64] 2-22 3-pole QJP tenant circuit breaker is rated 65 k AIR max. at 240/120 Vac, 3Ø4W High Leg Delta, or 100 k AIR max. at 208Y/120 Vac, 3Ø4W. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 67

schneider-electric.us Table 2.35: Accessories Accessory 1200 A Bus Extension (Indoor/ Outdoor Cu bus) 1200 A Bussed Corner Sections (Indoor Cu bus only) 1200 A Transition Sections— Old to New (10.7 in. wide Cu bus) Mounting Channel Secondary Surge Arrester Mounting kit Stud Kit for EZM-TB 400–600 A terminal box Al/Cu Lug Kits (Each kit includes three, 2-barrel lugs.) Feed -Thru for EZM-TB 800 A Terminal Box Feed-Thru for EZM-TB 1600 A Terminal Box EZM Mains Right Side Closure Cap EZM Mains Left Side Closure Cap Fifth Jaw Kit Horn Bypass Kit Slider Type Manual Circuit Closer Anti-inversion Clip QO Adapter for bolt-on Q-frame tenant circuit breakers LJL Circuit Breaker Alternate Lug (DE2) LJL Circuit Breaker Seal Kit Meter Socket Closing Plates Sealing Rings Barrel Lock Kit Tenant Circuit Breaker Filler Plates Lug Landing Kit Branch Section Mounting Kit for Riser Applications. Tenant Circuit Breakers and EZM Accessories Class 4162 / Refer to Catalog 4100CT0701 EZ Meter-Pak™ Meter Centers Description 1Ø3W Bus Extension (6 in.wide) 1Ø3W Bus Extension (12 in.wide) 3Ø4W Bus Extension (6 in. wide) 3Ø4W Bus Extension (12 in. wide) 1Ø3W Inside Corner (14.75 in. wide) 1Ø3W Outside Corner (6.20 in. wide) 3Ø4W Inside Corner (14.75 in. wide) 3Ø4W Outside Corner (6.20 in. wide) Add right of old style 1Ø EZM lineup Add right of old style 3Ø EZM lineup Add left of old style 1Ø EZM lineup Add left of old style 3Ø EZM lineup 72" long For use with 1 or 2-SDSA1175 or 1-SDSA3650 (order surge arrester separately) Includes (2) 1/2 in.-13 studs per pad and mounting hardware. Four pads per kit. (1) 1/0–600 kcmil or (2) 1/0–250 kcmil per lug (2) 3/0–500 kcmil per lug (2) 2–600 kcmil per lug (4) 750 kcmil Al/Cu lugs per phase and neutral. Al wire 600 A max. Cu wire 800 A max. (24) additional lugs, 600 kcmil Al/Cu, (6) per phase and neutral. Replacement right side end cap for EZM Cross Bus Opening Replacement left side end cap for EZM Cross Bus Opening 1 per kit Use with Type EZMR 1Ø meter socket only For (1) 125–225 A ring-type socket only—indoor/outdoor Rejects 100 A and 200 A watt-hour meters in Class 320 meter sockets in Type EZML branch units. For 2P Type QO (40–125 A, 10 kA max. meter center SCCR) or QO-VH and QOH (40–60 A, 100 kA max. meter center SCCR) Kit includes (3) separate lugs for (1) #2 AWG - 500 kcmil Al or (1) #2 AWG - 600 kcmil Cu per lug. Tamper-evident kit to seal LJL trip dial cover, (1) per circuit breaker, if required. Meets NEC 240-6 [c] Lexan Closing Plate—EZM, EZMR, EZMH, EZMT Metal Closing plate—EZMR, EZMH, EZML Snap-on (Stainless Steel) Screw-Type (Aluminum) Latch-Type (Aluminum)-standard For use on ringless EZM or MP branch unit covers, includes 6 each of head protectors, lock nuts and sealing caps. (Barrel lock not included.) 125 A Branches—2P Type QO (2 per opening) 225 A Branches—2P and 3P Q-Frame For use with EZM 1200 A Mains suffix -CBU or -FSB. Order lugs separately. This kit is needed when installing and connecting meter center branch sections to EZ-Meter Pak busway center tap mains in multi-floor riser applications (1 per branch section) Cat. No. EZM1EXT6 EZM1EXT EZM3EXT6 EZM3EXT EZM1CORNER EZM1ELBOW EZM3CORNER EZM3ELBOW EZM1TRANR EZM3TRANR EZM1TRANL EZM3TRANL EZM72MC MMSAMK [65] EZMSK2 MMLK250 MMLK500 MMLK600 EZM600FTLK3 EZM1600FTLK3 EZMSCAP EZMCAP 5J [66] MMHB MM200MB [67] [68] MMLRK EZM125QOA AL400L61K3 MICROTUSEAL 29007 RSG4 ARP00026 29008W 2920910001 MMBLC QOFP EZM1200ULL EZMCTMKIT T N E M P I U Q E G N R E T E M I 2 [65] Consult your nearest Schneider Electric sales office for details. [66] All sockets include 5th Jaw factory-installed except EZM11__ devices. [67] Meter center short circuit current rating is 10,000 RMS symmetrical amperes with manual circuit closers installed (bypass is not designed for use as continuous duty). [68] For use on ring type meter sockets only. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 2-23 11/10/2017


page 68

EZ Meter-Pak™ Meter Centers Dimensions Class 4162 / Refer to Catalog 4100CT0701 schneider-electric.us Table 2.36: Main Device Dimensions (in.) Dimensions for EZ Meter-Pak Meter Centers 2 I M E T E R N G E Q U I P M E N T Main Device Branch Device Cat. No. EZM11000CB EZM11000CBU EZM11200G/JCBT EZM11200G/JCBE EZM11200FST EZM11200FSE EZM11200G/JCBU EZM11200FSB EZM11200TBU EZM11200GCBUMS EZM11200GCBEMS EZM11200GCBTMS EZM11200JCBUMS EZM11200JCBEMS EZM11200JCBTMS EZM11600G/JCBC EZM11600G/JCBU EZM11600TB EZM11600GCBUMS EZM11600GCBCMS EZM11600JCBUMS EZM11600JCBCMS EZM12000CB EZM12000CBU EZM12000TB EZM12000CBMS EZM12000CBUMS EZM1225TB [71] EZM1400CB EZM1400CBU EZM1400FS EZM1400FSU EZM1400TB EZM1400TBU EZM1600CB EZM1600CBU EZM16000FS EZM1600FSU EZM1600TB EZM1800CB EZM1800CBU EZM1800FS EZM1800FSU EZM1800TB EZM1800TBCU EZM1800TBU EZM1EXT [71] EZM1EXT6 [71] EZM1CORNER [69][71][72] Height (H) 53.91 70.05 46.90 66.20 46.90 66.20 65.30 65.30 44.71 65.30 66.27 46.93 65.30 66.27 46.93 68.70 68.70 55.09 68.91 68.91 68.91 68.91 68.70 68.70 71.09 68.91 68.91 21.81 53.97 69.03 53.97 69.03 30.46 35.71 53.97 69.03 53.97 69.03 30.46 53.97 69.03 53.97 69.03 53.97 51.76 39.96 19.34 19.34 19.50 Width (W) 18.66 34.19 23.69 32.39 23.69 32.39 23.69 23.69 33.16 23.69 32.39 23.69 23.69 32.39 23.69 30.19 30.19 22.48 30.19 30.19 30.19 30.19 30.19 30.19 30.19 30.19 30.19 11.66 18.66 20.46 18.66 20.46 17.15 17.16 18.66 20.46 18.66 20.46 17.15 18.66 20.46 18.66 20.46 18.66 22.48 25.16 11.66 6.00 14.40 Depth (D) 11.50 18.33 13.69 13.69 13.69 13.69 13.69 13.69 11.68 13.63 13.70 13.63 13.63 13.70 13.63 18.33 18.33 13.00 18.31 18.31 18.31 18.31 18.33 18.33 21.46 18.31 18.31 6.37 11.50 11.50 11.50 11.50 7.09 8.00 11.50 11.50 11.50 11.50 7.09 11.50 11.50 11.50 11.50 11.50 7.09 11.68 6.37 6.37 8.02 MC Channel (MC) 34.30 46.99 13.75 50.09 13.75 50.09 49.11 49.11 31.17 49.12 50.09 13.75 49.12 50.09 13.75 38.13 49.12 27.92 44.50 44.50 44.50 44.50 44.25 44.25 37.62 44.50 44.50 13.00 34.30 49.37 34.30 49.37 16.29 27.17 34.30 49.37 34.30 49.37 16.29 34.30 49.37 34.30 49.37 34.30 28.01 31.17 11.85 11.85 11.85 Cat. No. EZM1ELBOW [69] [70] [71] EZM31000CB EZM31000CBU EZM31200G/JCBT EZM31200G/JCBE EZM31200TBU EZM31200G/JCBU EZM31200FSB EZM31200FST EZM31200FSE EZM31200GCBUMS EZM31200GCBEMS EZM31200GCBTMS EZM31200JCBUMS EZM31200JCBEMS EZM31200JCBTMS EZM31600G/JCBC EZM31600G/JCBU EZM31600TB EZM31600GCBUMS EZM31600GCBCMS EZM31600JCBUMS EZM31600JCBCMS EZM32000CB EZM32000CBU EZM32000TB EZM32000CBMS EZM32000CBUMS EZM3225TB [71] EZM3400CB EZM3400CBU EZM3400FS EZM3400FSU EZM3400TB EZM3400TBU EZM3600CB EZM3600CBU EZM36000FS EZM3600FSU EZM3600TB EZM3800CB EZM3800CBU EZM3800FS EZM3800FSU EZM3800TB EZM3800TBCU EZM3800TBU EZM3EXT [71] EZM3EXT6 [71] EZM3CORNER [69] [71] [72] Height (H) 19.50 53.91 70.05 46.90 66.20 44.71 65.30 65.30 46.90 66.20 65.30 66.27 46.93 65.30 66.27 46.93 68.70 68.70 55.09 68.91 68.91 68.91 68.91 68.70 68.70 71.09 68.91 68.91 21.81 53.97 69.03 53.97 69.03 30.46 35.71 53.97 69.03 53.97 69.03 30.46 53.97 69.03 53.97 69.03 53.97 51.76 39.96 19.34 19.34 19.50 Width (W) 14.52 18.66 34.19 23.69 32.39 33.16 23.69 23.69 23.69 32.39 23.69 32.39 23.69 23.69 32.39 23.69 30.19 30.19 22.48 30.19 30.19 30.19 30.19 30.19 30.19 30.19 30.19 30.19 11.66 18.66 20.46 18.66 20.46 17.15 17.16 18.66 20.46 18.66 20.46 17.15 18.66 20.46 18.66 20.46 18.66 22.48 25.16 11.66 6.00 14.40 Depth (D) 8.01 11.50 18.33 13.69 13.69 11.68 13.69 13.69 13.69 13.69 13.63 13.70 13.63 13.63 13.70 13.63 18.33 18.33 13.00 18.31 18.31 18.31 18.31 18.33 18.33 21.46 18.31 18.31 6.37 11.50 11.50 11.50 11.50 7.09 8.00 11.50 11.50 11.50 11.50 7.09 11.50 11.50 11.50 11.50 11.50 7.09 11.68 6.37 6.37 8.02 MC Channel (MC) 11.85 34.30 46.99 13.75 50.09 31.17 49.11 49.11 13.75 51.09 49.12 50.09 13.75 49.12 50.09 13.75 38.13 49.12 27.92 44.50 44.50 44.50 44.50 44.25 44.25 37.62 44.50 44.50 13.00 34.30 49.37 34.30 49.37 16.29 27.17 34.30 49.37 34.30 49.37 16.29 34.30 49.37 34.30 49.37 34.30 28.01 31.17 11.85 11.85 11.85 Indoor only. [69] [70] Each leg of elbow section measures 6.17 in. corner of wall to start of next enclosure. [71] Device supplied without mounting channel, secure to wall by use of swingable mounting feet. [72] Each leg of this corner section measures 14.72 in. from wall to start of next enclosure. 2-24 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved MC (Mounting Channel)HWHWTBMC (Mounting Channel)11/10/2017


page 69

Dimensions Class 4162 / Refer to Catalog 4100CT0701 EZ Meter-Pak™ Meter Centers schneider-electric.us Table 2.37: Single Phase Branch Device Dimensions (in.) [73] Branch Device Cat. No. [available suffix] EZM112225 [X, CUX] EZM113125 [X, CUX] EZM113225 [X, CUX] EZM114125 [X, CUX] EZM114225 [X, CUX] EZM115125 [X, CUX] EZM115225 [CU] EZM116125 [X, CUX] EZM16225 EZMH112225 [X, CUX] EZMH113125 [X, CUX] EZMH113225 [X, CUX] EZMH114125 [X, CUX] EZMH114225 [X, CUX] EZMH115125 [X, CUX] EZMH115225 [CU] EZMH116125 [X, CUX] EZMH116225 EZMK111400 EZMK112400 EZML111225 [CU] EZML111225D Height (H) 43.41 42.37 43.41 48.12 52.00 57.12 61.00 66.12 69.94 43.41 42.37 43.41 48.12 52.00 57.12 61.00 66.12 69.94 45.55 72.99 39.06 39.06 Width (W) 17.38 12.25 17.38 12.25 17.38 12.25 17.38 12.25 17.387 17.38 12.25 17.38 12.25 17.38 12.25 17.38 12.25 17.37 27.56 27.56 19.44 19.44 Depth (D) 8.09 7.09 8.09 7.09 8.09 7.09 8.09 7.09 8.09 8.09 7.09 8.09 7.09 8.09 7.09 8.09 7.09 8.09 9.74 9.74 9.44 9.44 Channel MC (MC) 32.34 31.30 32.34 31.30 32.34 31.30 32.35 40.30 41.33 32.34 31.30 32.34 31.30 32.34 31.30 32.35 40.30 41.33 37.81 37.81 25.51 25.51 Top Meter (T) 22.18 13.18 13.18 9.93 12.77 9.93 12.77 9.93 12.72 22.18 13.18 13.18 9.93 12.77 9.93 12.77 9.93 12.72 24.51 22.26 25.67 25.67 Bottom Meter (B) 12.23 11.19 12.23 11.19 12.23 11.19 12.23 11.19 12.22 12.23 11.19 12.23 11.19 12.23 11.19 12.23 11.19 12.22 21.04 21.04 13.39 13.39 Cat. No. [available suffix] EZML111400 EZML112225 [CU] EZML112225D EZML112400 EZML113225 [CU] EZML113225D EZML114225 [CU] EZML114225D EZMR112225 [X, CUX] EZMR113125 [X, CUX] EZMR113225 [X, CUX] EZMR114125 [X, CUX] EZMR114225 [X, CUX] EZMR115125 [X, CUX] EZMR115225 [CU] EZMR116125 [X, CUX] EZMR116225 EZMT111225 EZMT112225 EZMT113225 Height (H) 44.55 39.06 39.06 69.61 53.06 53.06 67.06 67.06 43.41 42.37 43.41 48.12 52.00 57.12 61.00 66.12 69.94 25.45 60.56 79.56 Width (W) 23.21 19.44 19.44 23.21 19.44 19.44 19.44 19.44 17.38 12.25 17.38 12.25 17.38 12.25 17.38 12.25 17.37 22.42 22.42 22.42 Depth (D) 9.44 9.44 9.44 9.44 9.44 9.44 9.44 9.44 8.09 7.09 8.09 7.09 8.09 7.09 8.09 7.09 8.09 9.38 9.38 9.38 Channel MC (MC) 37.81 25.51 25.51 37.81 39.51 39.51 39.51 39.51 32.34 31.30 32.34 31.30 32.34 31.30 32.35 40.30 41.33 16.19 43.63 48.25 Top Meter (T) 24.02 11.67 11.67 20.64 11.67 11.67 11.67 11.67 22.18 13.18 13.18 9.93 12.77 9.93 12.77 9.93 12.72 4.67 12.67 12.67 Table 2.38: Three Phase Branch Device Dimensions (in.) [73] Cat. No. [available suffix] EZM312225 [X, CUX, CA, XCA, CUXCA] EZM313125 [X, CUX, CA, XCA, CUXCA] EZM313125M10 EZM313225 [X, CUX, CA, XCA, CUXCA] EZM314125 [X, CUX, CA, XCA, CUXCA] EZM314125M10 EZM314225 [X, CUX, CA, XCA, CUXCA] EZM315125 [X, CUX, CA, XCA, CUXCA] EZM315125M10 EZM315225 [CU, CA, CUCA] EZM316125 [X, CUX, CA, XCA, CUXCA] EZM316225 [CU, CA] EZMH312225 [X, CUX, CA, XCA] EZMH313125 [X, CUX, CA, XCA] EZMH313225 [X, CUX, CA, XCA] EZMH314125 [X, CUX, CA, XCA] EZMH314225 [X, CUX, CA, XCA] EZMH315125 [X, CUX, CA, XCA] EZMH315225 [CU, CA, CUCA] EZMH316125 [X, CUX, CA, XCA] EZMH316225 [CU, CA] EZMK311400 [CA] EZMK312400 [CA] EZMK331400 EZMK332400 EZML311400 [CA] EZML311225 [CU, CA, CUCA] EZML312225 [CU, CA, CUCA] EZML312225D [CA] EZML312400 [CA] EZML313225 [CU, CA, CUCA] EZML313225D [CA] Height (H) 43.41 42.37 42.37 43.41 48.12 52.12 52.00 57.12 62.12 61.00 66.12 69.94 43.41 42.37 43.41 48.12 52.00 57.12 61.00 66.12 69.94 45.55 72.99 45.55 72.99 45.55 39.06 39.06 39.06 69.61 53.06 53.06 Width (W) 17.38 12.25 12.25 17.38 12.25 12.25 17.38 12.25 12.25 17.38 12.25 17.37 17.38 12.25 17.38 12.25 17.38 12.25 17.38 12.25 17.37 27.56 27.56 27.56 27.56 23.21 19.44 19.44 19.44 23.21 19.44 19.44 Depth (D) 8.09 7.09 7.09 8.09 7.09 7.09 8.09 7.09 7.09 8.09 7.09 8.09 8.09 7.09 8.09 7.09 8.09 7.09 8.09 7.09 8.09 9.74 9.74 9.74 9.74 9.44 9.44 9.44 9.44 9.44 9.44 9.44 Channel MC (MC) 32.34 31.30 24.29 32.34 31.30 34.29 32.34 31.30 34.29 32.35 40.30 41.33 32.34 31.30 32.34 31.30 32.34 31.30 32.35 40.30 41.33 30.60 37.81 30.60 37.81 37.81 25.51 25.51 25.51 37.82 39.51 39.51 Top Meter (T) 22.18 13.18 10.18 13.18 9.93 9.93 12.77 9.93 9.93 12.77 9.93 12.72 22.18 13.18 13.18 9.93 12.77 9.93 12.77 9.93 12.72 24.51 22.26 24.51 22.26 24.02 25.67 11.67 11.67 20.64 11.67 11.67 Bottom Meter (B) 12.23 11.19 12.19 12.23 11.19 12.19 12.23 11.19 12.19 12.23 11.19 12.22 12.23 11.19 12.23 11.19 12.23 11.19 12.23 11.19 12.22 21.04 21.04 21.04 21.04 21.53 13.39 13.39 13.39 21.53 13.39 13.39 Cat. No. [available suffix] EZML314225 [CU, CA, CUCA] EZML314225D [CA] EZML331225 [CU] EZML331225D EZML331400 EZML332225 [CU] EZML332225D EZML332400 [CU] EZML333225 [CU] EZML333225D EZML334225 [CU] EZML334225D EZMR312225 [X, CUX, CA, XCA] EZMR313125 [X, CUX, CA, XCA] EZMR313225 [X, CUX, CA, XCA] EZMR314125 [X, CUX, CA, XCA] EZMR314225 [X, CUX, CA, XCA] EZMR315125 [X, CUX, CA, XCA] EZMR315225 [CU, CA, CUXCA] EZMR316125 [X, CUX, CA, XCA] EZMR316225 [CU, CA] EZMR332225 [CU] EZMR333225 [CU] EZMR334225 [CU] EZMT311225 [CA] EZMT312225 [CA] EZMT313225 [CA] EZMT331225 EZMT332225 EZMT333225 Heig- ht (H) 67.06 67.06 39.06 39.06 45.55 39.06 39.06 69.61 53.06 53.06 67.06 67.06 43.41 42.37 43.41 48.12 52.00 57.12 61.00 66.12 69.94 39.06 53.06 67.06 25.45 60.56 79.56 25.12 60.56 79.56 Width (W) 19.44 19.44 19.44 19.44 23.21 19.44 19.44 23.21 19.44 19.44 19.44 19.44 17.38 12.25 17.38 12.25 17.38 12.25 17.38 12.25 17.37 19.44 19.44 19.44 22.42 22.42 22.42 22.42 22.42 22.42 Depth (D) 9.44 9.44 9.44 9.44 9.44 9.44 9.44 9.44 9.44 9.44 9.44 9.44 8.09 8.09 8.09 7.09 8.09 7.09 8.09 7.09 8.09 9.44 9.44 9.44 9.38 9.38 9.38 9.38 9.38 9.38 Channel MC (MC) 39.51 39.51 25.51 25.51 37.81 35.51 35.51 37.82 39.51 39.51 39.51 39.51 32.34 31.30 32.34 31.30 32.34 31.30 32.35 40.30 41.33 25.51 39.51 39.51 16.19 43.63 48.25 16.19 43.63 48.25 Top Meter (T) 11.67 11.67 25.67 25.67 24.02 11.67 11.67 20.64 11.67 11.67 11.67 11.67 22.18 13.18 13.18 9.93 12.77 9.93 12.77 9.93 12.72 11.67 11.67 11.67 4.67 12.67 12.67 4.67 12.67 12.67 [73] Standard branch units are available without suffix added. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved T N E M P I U Q E G N R E T E M I 2 Bottom Meter (B) 21.53 13.39 13.39 21.53 13.39 13.39 13.39 13.39 12.23 11.19 12.23 11.19 12.23 11.19 12.23 11.19 12.22 20.45 28.89 28.89 Bottom Meter (B) 13.39 13.39 13.39 13.39 21.53 13.39 13.39 21.53 13.39 13.39 13.39 13.39 12.23 11.19 12.23 11.19 12.23 11.19 12.23 11.19 12.22 13.39 13.39 13.39 20.45 28.89 28.89 20.45 28.89 28.89 2-25 HWTBMC (Mounting Channel)11/10/2017


page 70

EZ Meter-Pak™ Meter Centers Dimensions Class 4162 / Refer to Catalog 4100CT0701 schneider-electric.us 2 I M E T E R N G E Q U I P M E N T 2-26 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 71

Table of Contents Section 3 Safety Switches 3-2 EZ Selector - Selection Assistance Safety Switches EZ Selector - Selection Assistance Light Duty Safety Switches Light Duty—Visible Blades 10 kA Short Circuit Current Rating General Duty Safety Switches General Duty—Up to 100 kA Short Circuit Current Rating 240 Volt—Single Throw Fusible Switches 240 Volt—Single Throw Non-Fusible Switches UL Listed Maximum Short Circuit Current Ratings — AC Only Accessories and Lug Data Field-Installed Fuse Puller Kits Field-Installed Electrical Interlock Kits Equipment Grounding Kits Field-Installed Lug Kit 400 A – 600 A Terminal Lug Data Dimensions for General Duty Safety Switches Heavy Duty Safety Switches 240 Volt—Single Throw Fusible Switches 600 Volt—Single Throw Fusible Switches 600 Volt—Single Throw Non-Fusible Switches UL Listed Maximum Short Circuit Current Ratings—AC only Special Applications Receptacle Switches Accessories and Special Features Dimensions for Heavy Duty Safety Switches NEMA Type 1 and 3R NEMA Type 4, 4X, 5, 7, 9, and 12 Double Throw Safety Switches Fusible and Non-Fusible Overview 240 Volt — Double Throw Safety Switches 600 Volt — Double Throw Safety Switches Accessories and Lug Data Application Data Terminal Lug Data Dimensions for Double Throw Safety Switches Series F Devices 30–100 A Series A, E, and T4 Devices Photovoltaic Disconnect Switches 1000 Vdc Photovoltaic Heavy Duty Disconnect Switch © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved S E H C T I W S Y T E F A S 3 3-2 3-3 3-3 3-3 3-3 3-3 3-4 3-4 3-5 3-5 3-5 3-5 3-5 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-11 3-13 3-14 3-20 3-20 3-21 3-23 3-23 3-24 3-25 3-26 3-28 3-29 3-30 3-30 3-31 3-32 3-32 3-1 Light DutyGeneral DutyHeavy DutyStainless Steel Heavy Duty11/10/2017


page 72

3 S A F E T Y S W I T C H E S EZ Selector - Selection Assistance Safety Switches EZ Selector - Selection Assistance Class 4162 / Refer to Catalog 4100CT0701 schneider-electric.us Safety Switches EZ Selector - Selection Assistance EZ Selector Steps to select a safety switch. 1. Select product type: • General duty safety switch • Heavy duty safety switch • Double throw safety switch 2. Select switch type. 3. Select fuse type: fused, non-fused, cartridge, class T or plug 4. Select maximum voltage: 240 Vac, 600 Vac 5. Select amperes: • General/light duty – 30 A, 60 A, 100 A, 200 A, 400 A, 800 A • Heavy duty – 30 A, 60 A, 100 A, 200 A, 225 A, 400 A, 600 A, 800 A, 1200 A • Double throw – 30 A, 60 A, 100 A, 200 A, 400 A, 600 A 6. Select number of poles: • General/light duty – 1, 2 or 3 • Heavy duty – 2, 3, 4 or 6 • General/light duty – 2, 3, 4 or 6 7. Select if neutral is needed. 8. Select enclosure type: (stainless steel 304) (stainless steel 304), NEMA 4, 4X, 5 (stainless steel 316) • General/light duty – NEMA 1, NEMA 3R • Heavy duty – NEMA1, NEMA 12K, NEMA 3R, 5, 12, NEMA 4, 4X, 5 • Double throw – NEMA1, NEMA 12K, NEMA 3R, 5, 12, NEMA 4, 4X, 5 • Optional enclosure types for special heavy duty applications. Additional Information • Search “Safety Switches” from our technical FAQs page: www.schneider-electric.us/ • Refer to catalog 3100CT1602. en/faqs/home/ 3-2 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 73

schneider-electric.us Class 3130 / Refer to Catalog 3100CT1602 Light Duty Safety Switches Light Duty—Visible Blades 10 kA Short Circuit Current Rating The Square D light duty enclosed switch is ideal for home applications in disconnecting power to workshops, hobby rooms, furnaces, and garages. The light duty safety switch has visible blades and a ground lug as standard features. Table 3.1: Fusible System Amperes Fuse NEMA Type 1 Indoor Cat. No. 2 Wire (1 Blades and Fuseholders, 1 Neutral)—120 Vac Horsepower Ratings 120 Vac Max. 1Ø Std. 1Ø 240 Vac Std. 1Ø Max. 1Ø L221N 3 Wire (2 Blades and Fuseholders, 1 Neutral)—120/240 Vac 30 Plug L111N — 30 Plug Cart L211N L221N 1/2 1/2 — 2 2 — 1-1/2 1-1/2 — 3 3 General Duty—Up To 100 kA Short Circuit Current Rating General duty safety switches are designed for residential and commercial applications where durability and economy are prime considerations. Typical loads are lighting, air conditioning, and appliances. They are suitable for use as service equipment when equipped with a factory or field-installed neutral assembly or a field-installed service grounding kit, (see page 3-5) as applicable. General duty safety switches are UL Listed, File E2875, and meet or exceed the NEMA Standard KS1. 240 Volt—Single Throw Fusible Switches Table 3.2: Fusible S E H C T I W S Y T E F A S Horsepower Ratings System Amperes Fuse NEMA Type 1 Indoor NEMA Type 3R [1] Rainproof Class R Fuse Kits [2] 2 Wire (1 Blade and Fuseholder, 1 Neutral)—120 Vac Cat. No. Cat. No. Cat. No.  30  30 Plug Cart. Use Light Duty Device for this Application (see above) Use three-wire devices for this application. 3 Wire (2 Blades and Fuseholders, 1 Neutral)—120/240 Vac (Plug), 240 Vac (Cart.) Maximum D223N  30  30  60 100 200 400 600 [5] Plug Cart. Cart. Cart. Cart. Cart. Cart. D211N D221N D222N D223N D225N D226N D211NRB D221NRB D222NRB D223NRB D225NR D226NR — DRK30 RFK03H RFK10 HRK1020 DRK40 DRK600 D224N [4] D224NRB [4] 4 Wire (3 Blades and Fuseholders, 1 Neutral)—240 Vac Maximum  30  60 100 200 400 400 [7] 600 [5] 600 [7] 800 [7] Cart. Cart. Cart. Cart. Cart. Class T Cart. Class T Class T D321N D322N D323N D324N [4] D325N D325NT D326N D326NT T327N D321NRB D322NRB D323NRB D324NRB [4] D325NR D325NTR D326NR D326NTR T327NR DRK30 RFK03H RFK10 HRK1020 DRK40 — DRK600 — — Std. (Fast Acting One-Time Fuses) 1Ø — — 3Ø — —  1-1/2  1-1/2  3  7-1/2 15 — —  1-1/2  3  7-1/2 15 — — — — — — 3[3] 7-1/2[3] 15[3] 25[3] — —   3 7-1/2[6] 15[6] 25[6]  50  50  75  75 100 Max. (Dual Element Time-Delay Fuses) 3 1Ø — —  3  3 10 15 — — —  3 10 15 — — — — — — 3Ø — — —  7-1/2 [3] 15[3] 30[3] 60[3] — —   7-1/ 2 15[6] 30[6] 60[6] 125 — 150 — — Bolt-on hubs —Refer to Rainproof Bolt-On Hubs, Table 1.27, page 3-14. [1] [2] When properly installed, the Class R Fuse Kit rejects all but Class R fuses. [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] For corner grounded delta systems only. Use switching poles for ungrounded conductors. See data bulletin 2700DB0202 for additional information. For 200% neutral, order (1) additional neutral kit SN20A and (1) neutral jumper kit SN20NI. Order Class J Fuse Kit GDJK600 if using Class J fuses. If corner grounded delta, use outer switching poles for ungrounded conductors. D325NT, D325NTR, D326NT, D326NTR, T327N and T327NR accept only 300Vac Class T fuses. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 3-3 11/10/2017


page 74

General Duty Safety Switches General Duty—Up to 100 kA Short Circuit Current Rating Class 3130 / Refer to Catalog 3100CT1602 240 Volt—Single Throw Non-Fusible Switches Table 3.3: Non-Fusible System Amperes NEMA Type 1 Indoor 2 Wire (2 Blades)—240 Vac Maximum Cat. No. Cat. No. NEMA Type 3R Rainproof [8] — — QO260NATS [9] [10] QO2000NS [9] [10] DU221RB DU222RB QO200TR [9] [10] [11] QO2000NRB [9] [11] 3 Wire (3 Blades)—240 Vac Maximum  30  60  60 100 200 400 600 Use 3P Switch Use 3P Switch Use 3P Switch  30  60 100 200 400 600 DU321 DU322 DU323 [12] DU324 [13] DU325 DU326 [14] schneider-electric.us Horsepower Ratings (Max.) 1Ø  3 10 10 20 — — —  3 10 15 15 — — 3Ø — — — — — — —   7-1/2  15  40  60 125 150 Use 3P Switch Use 3P Switch Use 3P Switch DU321RB DU322RB DU323RB [12] DU324RB [13] — — 3 S A F E T Y S W I T C H E S UL Listed Maximum Short Circuit Current Ratings — AC Only Table 3.4: Fusible Safety Switch Short Circuit Current Rating Fuse Class Plug H, K J [15], R T [16] UL Listed Short Circuit Rating 10 kA 10 kA 100 kA 100 kA Non-Fusible Safety Switches Systems equal or less than 10 kAIR SCCR —Any brand of circuit breaker or fuse not exceeding the ampere rating of the switch may be used in conjunction with a non-fusible safety switch. Systems above 10 kAIR SCCR—The UL Listed short circuit current rating for Square D non-fusible switches is based upon the switch being used in conjunction with fuses or Square D circuit breakers or Mag-Gard motor circuit protectors. Table 3.5: Non-Fusible Safety Switch Short Circuit Current Rating Fuse Class or Circuit Breaker Type [17] Any Brand Circuit Breaker H or J PowerPact Circuit Breaker H, K J, R T UL Listed Short Circuit Rating 10 kA Up to 65 kA [18] 10 kA 100 kA [19] 100 kA [20] If a neutral assembly is required, order and field install SN0610. If a neutral assembly is required, order and field install a SN20A Neutral Assembly Kit. For a 200% neutral application, order and field install (2) SN20A Neutral Assembly Kits and (1) SN20NI Neutral Jumper Kit. If a neutral assembly is required, order and field install D600SN. Bolt-on hubs—Refer to Hubs, page 3-14. Enclosed molded case switch—Refer to Section 1. Includes factory-installed grounding kit. [8] [9] [10] [11] Not service entrance rated—Refer to Table 3.34 for more information. [12] [13] [14] [15] Only applicable to 200 A - 600 A except D325NT, D325NTR, D326NT and D326NTR. [16] Only applicable to D325NT, D325NTR, D326NT, D326NTR, T327N and T327NR. [17] Ampere rating of fuse or circuit breaker not to exceed switch ampere rating. [18] Only applicable to DU324 and DU324RB. HD, JD = 25 kA maximum. [19] SCCR = 50 kA, applicable to DU222RB, DU322 and DU322RB. [20] Only applicable to DU323, DU323RB, DU325 and DU326. 3-4 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 75

Switch Amperes Rating Fusible Series F 60 Series F 100–200 Electrical Interlock Kit Cat. No. [21] EIK031 or EIK032 EIK1 or EIK2 PK3GTA1 GTK0610 PK0TGA2 Accessories and Lug Data Class 3130 / Refer to Catalog 3100CT1602 schneider-electric.us General Duty Safety Switches Field-Installed Fuse Puller Kits Kit consists of three fuse pullers as required for a 3P, fusible, 60 or 100 A general duty switch. Kits can be installed only in 60 or 100 A Series F fusible switches. Fuse Puller Kit Series F Fusible Switches Only Table 3.6: Fuse Puller Kits Switch Ampere Rating 60 100 Series No. F F Cat. No. FPK03 FPK0610 Electrical interlocks for Series F 100–200 A general duty safety switches & Series F 60 A fusible general duty safety switches are available in kit form for field installation. Each kit contains instructions for proper field mounting. A pivot arm operates from switch mechanism, breaking the control circuit before the main switch blades break. Switches with electrical interlocks installed are UL Listed. Table 3.8: Electrical Interlock Contact Ratings [22] Table 3.7: Electrical Interlock Kit Field-Installed Electrical Interlock Kits Interlock Type 1 N. O. / 1 N. C. (-1 Suffix [23]) Contact 2 N. O. / 2 N. C. (-2 Suffix [24]) Contacts Volts 120 240 120 240 AC 50 or 60Hz Make 40.00 A 20.00 A 30.00 A 15.00 A Break 15.00 A 10.00 A 3.00 A 1.5 A Cont. 15.00 A 15.00 A 10.00 A 10.00 A Volts 115 230 115 230 DC Make / Break 0.50 A 0.25 A 1.00 A 0.30 A Cont. 15.00 A 15.00 A 10.00 A 10.00 A Equipment Grounding Kits Table 3.9: Equipment Grounding Kits Switch Ampere Rating 30[25] 30 60 [26] 100 200 400, 600 800 Cat. No. Std. PK3GTA1 GTK03 GTK0610 PKOGTA2 PKOGTA2 [27] PKOGTA3 Field-Installed Lug Kit 400 A – 600 A Table 3.10: Field-Installed Lug Kit 400 A – 600 A Switch Ampere Rating Lug Kit Cat. No. 400 or 600 Series [28] GD4060LK Terminal Lug Data Table 3.11: Terminal Lug Data [29] Lug Wire Range (AWG) (1) 14 – 10 Cu or (1) 12 – 8 Al (3) 14 – 4 Cu or (3) 12 – 4 Al or (6) 14 – 12 Cu or (6) 12 – 10 Al (2) 14 – 4 Cu or (2) 12 – 4 Al (4) 14 – 12 Cu or (4) 12 – 10 Al (2) 14 – 1/0 Cu or (2) 12 – 1/0 Al (2) 14 – 6 Cu or (2) 12 – 6 Al (2) 10 – 2/0 Cu or (2) 6 – 2/0 Cu Al (2) 10 – 2/0 Cu or (2) 6 – 2/0 Cu Al (6) 6 – 3/0 Al/Cu Max. Wire Range/NEC 1-1/0-600 kcmil 2-1/0-500 kcmil 4-1/0-250 kcmil Lug Wire Range 2-1/0-600 kcmil 4-1/0-250 kcmil S E H C T I W S Y T E F A S 3 Amperes Conductors Per Phase  30[30]  30  60 100 200 400 NEMA Type 1 400 NEMA Type 3R 600 800 1 1 1 1 1 1 or 2 2 2 3 Wire Bending Space Per NEC Table 312.6 Wire Range AWG/kcmil 12–8 (Al) or 14–8 (Cu) 12–6 (Al) or 14–6 (Cu) 12–3 (Al) or 14–3 (Cu) 12–1 (Al) or 14–1 (Cu) 6 –250 (Al/Cu) 1/0 –600 (Al/Cu) or 1/0 –300 (Al/Cu) 1/0–250 (Al/Cu) 4 –500 (Al/Cu) 3/0 –500 (Al/Cu) Lug Wire Range AWG/kcmil 12–8 (Al) or 14–8 (Cu) 12–6 (Al) or 14–6 (Cu) 12–2 (Al) or 14–2 (Cu) 12–1/0 (Al) or 14–1/0 (Cu) 6 –300 (Al/Cu) (1) 1/0 –750 (Al/Cu) or (2) 1/0 –300 (Al/Cu) (1) 1 –600 (Al/Cu) or (2) 1/0 –250 (Al/Cu) 4 –600 (Al/Cu) 3/0 –500 (Al/Cu) [21] Electrical interlock kit catalog numbers with -1 suffix indicate one normally open and one normally closed contact; -2 indicates two normally open and two normally closed contacts. Kits are UL Listed. -1 Suffix uses a 9007A01 limit switch. -2 Suffix uses a 9007C03 limit switch. Light duty safety switches. 60 A non-fusible switches accept PK3GTA1. Two required if ground conductors are run in parrellel. [22] Single-pole single-throw interlock kits are rated 1/2 hp at 110 and 220 Vac. [23] [24] [25] [26] [27] [28] Not suitable for use on 400 A NEMA Type 3R. [29] [30] 30–100 A switches suitable for 60oC or 75oC conductors. 200–800 A switches suitable for 75oC conductors. Light duty switches only. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 3-5 11/10/2017


page 76

General Duty Safety Switches Dimensions for General Duty Safety Switches Class 3130 / Refer to Catalog 3100CT1602 schneider-electric.us Dimensions for General Duty Safety Switches Table 3.12: Approximate Dimensions Cat.No. L111N L211N L221N D211N D211NRB D221N D221NRB D222N D222NRB D223N D223NRB D224N D224NRB D225N D225NR D226N D226NR D321N D321NRB D322N D322NRB D323NRB D323N D324N D324NRB D325N D325NT D325NR D325NTR D326N D326NT D326NR D326NTR DU221RB DU222RB DU321 DU321RB DU322 DU322RB DU323 DU324 DU323RB DU324RB DU325 DU326 QO200TR QO260NATS QO2000NRB QO2000NS T327N T327NR Series E2 E2 E2 E3 E2 E3 E3 F1 F1 F3 F3 F1 F1 E3 E1 E3 E1 E3 E3 F1 F1 F3 F3 F1 F1 E3 E3 E1 E1 E3 E3 E1 E1 E2 E1 E2 E2 E1 E1 F3 F3 F1 F1 E3 E3 G3 E2 E1 E1 E1 E1 H in. 7.63 7.63 7.63  9.25  9.63  9.25  9.63 14.63 14.88 17.50 17.50 29.00 29.25 45.12 30.63 49.13 49.13  9.25  9.63 14.63 14.88 17.50 17.50 29.00 29.25 45.12 45.12 30.63 30.63 49.13 49.13 49.13 49.13  9.63  9.63  9.25  9.63  9.25  9.63 17.50 17.50 29.00 29.25 45.12 49.13  6.50  9.25 14.00 13.38 49.13 49.13 mm  194  194  194  235  245  235  245  372  378  445  445  737  743 1146  778 1248 1248 235  245  372  378  445  445  737  743 1146 1146  778  778 1248 1248 1248 1246  245  245  235  245  235  245  445  445  737  743 1146 1248  165  235  356  340 1248 1248 W in.  5.00  5.00  5.00  6.75  7.25  6.75  7.25  6.50  6.63  8.50  8.50 17.25 17.25 24.00 21.38 24.00 24.75  6.75  7.25  6.50  6.63  8.50  8.50 17.25 17.25 24.00 24.00 21.38 21.38 24.00 24.00 24.75 24.75  7.25  7.25  6.75  7.25  6.75  7.25  8.50  8.50 17.25 17.25 24.00 24.00  4.63  4.88  7.75  6.13 24.00 24.75 mm 127 127 127 171 184 171 184 165 168 216 216 438 438 610 543 610 629 171 184 165 168 216 216 438 438 610 610 543 543 610 610 629 629 184 184 171 184 171 184 216 216 438 438 610 610 118 124 197 156 610 629 W/H in.  6.13  6.13  6.13  7.25  7.75  7.25  7.75  7.45  7.45 10.50 10.50 19.00 19.00 24.88 22.25 24.88 25.13  7.25  7.75  7.45  7.45 10.50 10.50 19.00 19.00 24.88 24.88 22.25 22.25 24.88 24.88 25.13 25.13  7.75  7.75  7.25  7.75  7.25  7.75 10.50 10.50 19.00 19.00 24.88 24.88 — — — — 24.88 25.13 D in. 4.00 4.00 4.00  3.63  3.75  3.63  3.75  4.88  4.88  6.50  6.50  8.25  8.25  8.88 10.13  8.88  8.88  3.63  3.75  4.88  4.88  6.50  6.50  8.25  8.25  8.88  8.88 10.13 10.13  8.88  8.88  8.88  8.88  3.75  3.75  3.63  3.75  3.63  3.75  6.50  6.50  8.25  8.25  8.88  8.88  3.88  3.25  4.50  3.50  8.88  8.88 mm 102 102 102  92  95  92  95 124 124 165 165 210 210 226 257 226 226  92  95 124 124 165 165 210 210 226 226 257 257 226 226 226 226  95  95  92  95  92  95 165 165 210 210 226 226  99  83 114  89 226 226 mm 156 156 156 184 197 184 197 189 189 267 267 483 483 632 565 632 638 184 197 189 189 267 267 483 483 632 632 565 565 632 632 638 638 197 197 184 197 184 197 267 267 483 483 632 632 — — — — 632 638 Std. Pack 1 1 1 5 5 5 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 5 5 5 5 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 1 1 1 1 1 3-6 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 77

240 Volt—Single Throw Fusible Switches Class 3130 / Refer to Catalog 3100CT1602 Heavy Duty Safety Switches schneider-electric.us Heavy Duty Safety Switches Visible blade heavy duty safety switches are designed for application where maximum performance and continuity of service are required. All heavy duty safety switches feature quick-make, quick-break operating mechanism, a dual cover interlock and a color coded indicator handle. They are suitable for use as service equipment when equipped with a field- or factory-installed neutral assembly or equipment grounding kit, unless a 600Y/347 V or 480 Y/277 V, 1000 A or greater, solidly grounded WYE system is used, per NEC 230-95. Heavy duty safety switches are UL Listed (except as noted). Files E2875 and E154828 meet or exceed the NEMA Standard KS1. For UL Listed short circuit current ratings, see UL Listed Maximum Short Circuit Current Ratings-AC only, page 3-10. NEMA Type 1 NEMA Type 3R NEMA Type Stainless Steel NEMA Type 12 4, 4X, 5 Table 3.13: 240 Volt—Single Throw Fusible System Amperes NEMA Type 1 Indoor NEMA Type 3R (Bolt-on Hubs Rainproof [1]) NEMA Type 4, 4X, 5, [2] 304 Stainless Steel [3]) Dust tight, Watertight, Corrosion Resistant (Watertight Hubs [1]) NEMA Type 12K With Knockouts (Watertight Hubs [1]) Without NEMA Type 3R, 5 or 12 [4] Knockouts (Watertight Hubs [1]) Horsepower Ratings 240 Vac (Using Fast Std. Acting, One Time Fuses) Max. (Using Dual Element, Time Delay Fuses) 250 Vdc [5] 2-Wire (2 Blades and Fuseholders)—240 Vac, 250 Vdc Cat. No. Cat. No. Use three-wire devices For two-wire applications 3-Wire (2 Blades and Fuseholders, 1 Neutral)—240 Vac, 250 Vdc 3-Wire (3 Blades and Fuseholders)—240 Vac, 250 Vdc Use four-wire devices For three-wire applications 4-Wire (3 Blades and Fuseholders, 1 Neutral)—240 Vac, 250 Vdc   30   30   60  100  200  400  600  800 1200   30   60  100  200  400  600  800 1200   30   60  100  200  400  600  800 1200   30   60  100  200  400  600  800 1200 H225 H226 H227 H228 H221N H222N H223N H224N H225N H226N H227N H228N H325 H326 H327 H328 H321N H322N H323N H324N H325N H326N H327N H328N Cat. No. H221DS — H222DS H223DS H224DS H225DS H226DS — — Cat. No. Cat. No. H221A — — H223A H224A — — — — H221AWK H2212AWK [7] H222AWK H223AWK H224AWK H225AWK H226AWK H227AWK H228AWK See Field-Installed Neutral Assemblies, page 3-16 Use two-wire devices, H225NDS H226NDS — — H321DS H322DS H323DS H324DS H325DS H326DS — — — — — — H321A H322A H323A H324A — — — — H225NAWK H226NAWK H227NAWK H228NAWK H321AWK H322AWK H323AWK H324AWK H325AWK H326AWK H327AWK H328AWK 1Ø 1-1/2 1-1/2  3 7-1/2 15 — — 50 50    1-1/2 3 7-1/2 15 — — 50 50 1-1/2  3 7-1/2 15 — — 50 50 H225R H226R H227R H228R H221NRB H222NRB H223NRB H224NRB H225NR H226NR H227NR [9] H228NR [9] H325R H326R H327R [9] H328R [9] H321NRB H322NRB H323NRB H324NRB H325NR H326NR H327NR [9] H328NR [9] Use three-wire devices, See Field-Installed Neutral Assemblies, page 3-16 H325NDS H326NDS — — — — — — H325NAWK H326NAWK H327NAWK H328NAWK 1-1/2 3 7-1/2 15 — — 50 50 S E H C T I W S Y T E F A S 3 3Ø 1Ø 3Ø  3 [6] —  7-1/2 [6] 15 [6] 25 [6] — 75 [6]  — —  3 [6]  7-1/2 [6] 15 [6] 25 [6] 50 [6] 75 [6] — —   3   7-1/2  15  25  50  75 100 100     7-1/2   3  15  25  50  75 100 100  3  3 10 15 — — — — —  3 10 15 — — — — —   3 10 15 — — — — —  3 10 15 — — — — —   7-1/2 [6] —  15 [6]  30 [8]  60 [6] — 200 [6]  — —   7-1/2 [8]  15 [6]  30 [6]  60 [6] 125 [6] 200 [6] — —   7-1/2  15  30  60 125 200 250 250     7-1/2  15  30  60 125 200 250 250  5  5 10 20 40 50 50 50 50  5 10 20 40 50 50 50 50  5 10 20 40 50 50 50 50  5 10 20 40 50 50 50 50 4-Wire (4 Blades and Fuseholders)  30  60 100 200 400 600 Use 600 Vac devices. See 600 Volt—Single Throw Fusible Switches, page 3-8. Accessories: see page 3-14 Dimensions: NEMA Type 1 and 3R, see page 3-20 Dimensions: NEMA Type 4, 4X and 5 Stainless and NEMA Type 12, see page 3-21 [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] For Rainproof Bolt-On Hubs and Watertight Hubs see Hubs, page 3-14. Complete rating is NEMA Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 5 and 12. For NEMA Type 3R applications, remove drain screw from bottom endwall. See 316 Grade Stainless Steel—NEMA Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 5, 12, page 3-11. Also suitable for NEMA Type 3R application by removing drain screw from bottom endwall. For switching dc, use two outside switching poles. For corner grounded delta systems, use switching poles for ungrounded conductors. See data bulletin 2700DB0202 for additional information. 60 ampere switch with 30 ampere fuse spacing and clips. Must use 60 A enclosure accessories including electrical interlocks. For corner grounded delta systems, use switching poles for ungrounded conductors. Suitable for NEMA Type 5 applications with drain screw installed. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 3-7 11/10/2017


page 78

Heavy Duty Safety Switches 600 Volt—Single Throw Fusible Switches Class 3130 / Refer to Catalog 3100CT1602 schneider-electric.us 600 Volt—Single Throw Fusible 480 Vac Horsepower Ratings 600 Vac Max. (Using Dual Element, Time Delay Fuses) dc [14] 3Ø 250 600 Table 3.14: 600 Volt—Single Throw Fusible System Amperes NEMA Type 1 Indoor 3R NEMA Type Rainproof (Bolt-on Hubs [10]) NEMA Type 4, 4X, 5 [11] 304 Stainless Steel (316 stainless [12]) Dust tight, Watertight, Corrosion Resistant (Watertight Hubs [10]) NEMA Type 12K With Knockouts (Watertight Hubs [10]) NEMA Type 3R, 5 or 12 [13] Without Knockouts (Watertight Hubs [10]) Cat. No. 2-Wire (2 Blades and Fuseholders)—600 Vac, 600 Vdc Cat. No. Cat. No. Cat. No. Cat. No. H267R [16] H268R [16] 3-Wire (3 Blades and Fuseholders)—600 Vac, 600 Vdc H361RB   30   60  100  200  400  600  800 1200   30   30   60  100  200  400  600  800 1200 H361 H361-2 [16] [17] H265 H266 H267 H268 H362 H363 H364 H365 H366 H367 H368 H265R H266R H3612RB [17] H362RB H363RB H364RB H365R H366R H367R [16] H368R [16] Use three-wire devices for two-wire applications H265DS H266DS — — H361DS — — — — — H361A H265AWK H266AWK H267AWK H268AWK H361AWK H361-2A [17] H3612AWK [17] H362DS H363DS H364DS H365DS H366DS — — H362A H363A H364A — — — — H362AWK H363AWK H364AWK H365AWK H366AWK H367AWK H368AWK 4-Wire (3 Blades and Fuseholders, 1 Neutral)—600 Vac, 600 Vdc   30   60  100  200  400  600  800 1200 H361N H362N H363N H364N H365N H366N H367N H368N H361NRB H362NRB H363NRB H364NRB H365NR H366NR H367NR [16] H368NR [16] 4-Wire (4 Blades and Fuseholders)—600 Vac, 600 Vdc [18]  30  60 100 200 400 600 — — — — — — 6-Wire (6 Blades and Fuseholders)—600 Vac[18] — — H461 H462 H463 H464 H465 H466 100 200 — — Use three-wire devices, See Field-Installed Neutral Assemblies, page 3-16 H364NDS H365NDS H366NDS — — H461DS H462DS H463DS H464DS — — H663DS H664DS H364NA — — — — — — — — — — — — H364NAWK H365NAWK H366NAWK H367NAWK H368NAWK H461AWK H462AWK H463AWK H464AWK H465AWK — H663AWK H664AWK 3 S A F E T Y S W I T C H E S Std. (Using Fast Acting, One Time Fuses) 3Ø — — — — 100 [15] 150 [15] Max. (Using Dual Element, Time Delay Fuses) 3Ø — — — — 250 [15] 400 [15] — —   5   5  15  25  50 100 150 200 200   5  15  25  50 100 150 200 — —  15  15  30  60 125 250 400 500 500  15  30  60 125 250 400 500 Std. (Using Fast Acting, One Time Fuses) 3Ø — — — — — — — —   7-1/2   7-1/2  15  30  60 125 200 250 250   7-1/2  15  30  60 125 200 250   7-1/2 200 2Ø  15  25  50 100 150 3Ø  25 500 2Ø  20  40  60 125 250 400 3Ø  60 250 2Ø  10  20  30  60 125 200 3Ø  30 — — — — — — — — 50 50 50 50 — 50 — 50  5 15 — 15 — 30 — 50 50 40 50 50 50 50 — 50 — 50 — 15 — 30 — 50 50 40 50 50 50 50 — 50 — 50  5 10 20 40 50 50 15 30 30 50 50 50 — — — — — — — —  20  20  50 100 150 350 500 500 500  20  50  75 150 350 500 500 500 2Ø  25  50  75 150 350 500 3Ø  75 — — For applications requiring motor disconnect capability, see Electrical Interlock Kits, page 3-15 Accessories: see page 3-14 Dimensions: NEMA Type 1 and 3R, see page 3-20 Dimensions: NEMA Type 4, 4X and 5 Stainless and NEMA Type 12, see page 3-21 Class H, R, J, and L Fuse Provisions: Class H or K Fuse Provisions: Fusible Square D 30–600 A heavy duty safety switches accept Class H or K fuses as standard. With Class H or K fuses installed, the switch is UL Listed for use on systems with up to 10 kA available fault current. Class R Fuse Provisions: Fusible Square D 30–600 A heavy duty safety switches will accept Class R fuses as standard. A field-installed rejection kit is available which, when installed, rejects all but Class R fuses. With the installation of the rejection kit and Class R fuses, the switch is UL Listed for use on systems with up to 200 kA available fault current. See Class R Fuse Kits, page 3-15. Class J Fuse Provisions: Provisions for installing Class J fuses are included in 30–400 A 600 Volt, and 100–400 A 240 Volt, fusible heavy duty safety switches. Conversion to Class J fuse spacing requires relocating the load side fuse base assembly from the standard Class H fuse location to an alternate position as marked in the enclosure. With Class J fuses installed, the switch is UL Listed for use on systems with up to 200 kA available fault current. Switches rated 600 A, 240 or 600 Volt, require the addition of an adapter kit, H600J. One kit per three-pole switch. Class L Fuse Provisions: Fusible 800 A and 1200 A safety switches use Class L bolt-in fuses and are rated for use on systems with up to 200 kA at 600 Vac maximum. 1200 A switches accept class L fuses from 601–1200 A, 800 A switches accept class L fuses from 601–800 A. Class R Fuse For Rainproof Bolt-On Hubs and Watertight Hubs see Hubs, page 3-14. [10] [11] Complete rating is NEMA Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 5 and 12.. [12] See Table 3.18 316 Grade Stainless Steel 3 Pole 600 Vac, 600 Vdc, page 3-11. [13] Also suitable for NEMA Type 3R application by removing drain screw from bottom endwall. [14] [15] [16] Suitable for NEMA Type 5 applications with drain screw installed. [17] [18] Not suitable for use as service equipment. 3-8 60 A switch with 30 A fuse spacing and clips. Must use 60 A enclosure accessories including electrical interlocks. For switching dc, use two outside switching poles. For corner grounded delta systems, use switching poles for ungrounded conductors. See data bulletin 2700DB0202 for additional information. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 79

schneider-electric.us 600 Volt—Single Throw Non-Fusible Switches Class 3110 / Refer to Catalog 3100CT1602 Heavy Duty Safety Switches Table 3.15: 600 Volt—Single Throw Non-Fusible 600 Volt—Single Throw Non-Fusible System Amperes 2-Wire (2 Blades)—600 Vac, 600 Vdc NEMA Type 1 Indoor Cat. No. HU265 HU266 HU267 HU268 3-Wire (3 Blades)—600 Vac, 600 Vdc HU361 HU361EI[25]   30   60  100  200  400  600  800 1200   30   30   30   60   60  100  200  400  600  800 1200   30   60  100  200  400  600   30   60  100  200 — — HU362 HU363 HU364 HU365 HU366 HU367 HU368 HU465 HU466 — — — — 4-Wire (4 Blades)—600 Vac, 600 Vdc [27] HU461 [28] HU462 [28] HU463 [28] HU464 [28] 6-Wire (6 Blades)—600 Vac [27] NEMA Type 3R Rainproof [19] NEMA Type 4, 4X, 5 [20] 304 Stainless Steel [21] Dust tight, Watertight Corrosion Resistant [19] NEMA Type NEMA Type 3R, 5 12K With or 12 [22] Without Knockouts [19] Knockouts [19] Cat. No. Cat. No. Cat. No. Cat. No. Use three-wire devices for two-wire applications. HU265DS HU266DS — — HU361DS HU361DSEI [25] — HU362DS HU362DSEI[25] HU363DS HU364DS HU365DS HU366DS — — HU461DS HU462DS HU463DS HU464DS — — HU661DS HU662DS HU663DS HU664DS — — — — HU265AWK HU266AWK HU267AWK HU268AWK HU361A HU361AWK HU361AEI [25] HU3612A[26] HU361AWKEI[25] HU3612AWK[26] HU362A HU363A HU364A — — — — — HU362AWK — HU363AWK HU364AWK HU365AWK HU366AWK HU367AWK HU368AWK — — — — — — — — — — HU461AWK [29] HU462AWK HU463AWK HU464AWK HU465AWK — HU661AWK HU662AWK HU663AWK HU664AWK HU265R HU266R HU267R [24] HU268R [24] HU361RB HU361RBEI [25] HU3612RB [26] HU362RB — HU363RB HU364RB HU365R HU366R HU367R [24] HU368R [24] — — — — — — — — — — 240 3Ø 1Ø — — — — — — — — — 125 — 200 — — — —  10  5  10  5  10  5  20 10  20 10  40 20 15  60 — 125 — 200 — — — — 3Ø 2Ø  10 10  20 20 30  40 50  60 — 125 — 200 3Ø —  10 —  20 —  50 —  60 1Ø — — — — — — — — 7-1/2 7-1/2 7-1/2 25 25 40 50 — — — — 2Ø 20 40 50 50 — — — — — — Horsepower Ratings (Max.) Volts ac 480 600 1Ø 3Ø 3Ø dc [23] 250 600 — — — — — — — — — — — — 250 — — 400 — — — 50 — — 50 — 10 10 10 30 30 40 50  30  20  30  20  30  20  60  50  60  50 100  75 125 150 250 — 350 400 — 500 500 500 50 — 50 500 2Ø 3Ø 3Ø  30 25  20  60 50  50  75 50  75 125 150 50 250 — 350 400 — 500 3Ø 3Ø  20 —  30  50 —  60  75 —  75 125 — 150 — — — — 50 50 — —  5  5  5 10 10 20 40 50 50 — — — — — — 50 50 50 50 15 15 15 30 30 50 50 50 50 50 50 10[30] 15[30] 30 30 50 50 50 10 20 40 50 50 — — — — S E H C T I W S Y T E F A S — — — — 3 For switching dc, use two outside switching poles. For Rainproof Bolt-On Hubs and Watertight Hubs see Hubs, page 3-14. For 316 stainless, see 316 Grade Stainless Steel—NEMA Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 5, 12, page 3-11. [19] [20] Complete rating is NEMA Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 5 and 12. [21] [22] Also suitable for NEMA Type 3R application by removing drain screw from bottom endwall. [23] [24] Suitable for NEMA Type 5 applications with drain screw installed. [25] Switches with EI suffix are stocked with factory-installed electrical interlocks with one normally-open and one normally-closed contact. [26] Use 60 A enclosure accessories, including electrical interlocks. [27] Not suitable for use as service equipment. [28] No knockouts are provided. [29] Requires 60 A accessories. See NEMA Type 4, 4X, 5, 7, 9, and 12, page 3-21 for series rating. [30] HU461AWK (Series F6) is rated 5 hp@250 Vdc, 15 hp@600 Vdc. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 3-9 11/10/2017


page 80

Heavy Duty Safety Switches NOTE: Consult the wiring diagram of the switch to verify the UL Listed short circuit current rating. UL Listed Maximum Short Circuit Current Ratings—AC only Class 3110 / Refer to Catalog 3100CT1602 schneider-electric.us UL Listed Maximum Short Circuit Current Ratings—AC only Table 3.16: Fusible Safety Switches Heavy Duty Safety Switch Type Fusible UL Listed Fuse Class H, K R, J, L UL Listed Short Circuit Current Ratings   10 kA 200 kA [31] Non-Fusible Safety Switches Systems equal or less than 10 kAIR SCCR —Any brand of circuit breaker or fuse not exceeding the ampere rating of the switch may be used in conjunction with a non- fusible safety switch. Systems above 10 kAIR SCCR—The UL Listed short circuit current rating for Square D non-fusible switches is based upon the switch being used in conjunction with fuses or Square D circuit breakers or Mag-Gard motor circuit protectors. Table 3.17: Non-Fusible Safety Switches [32] [33] Switch Rating (A) Fuse or Circuit Breaker Type [34] With Upstream Fuse Protection H, K R,T,J,L With Upstream Circuit Breaker Protection All All 30–100 30–100 30–100 30–100 30–100 30–100 30–100 200 200 200 200 200 400 400 400–600 400–600 400–600 400–600 400–600 Any brand circuit breaker HD HG HJ HL HR FA FH HD, JD HG, JG HJ, JJ HL, JL HR, JR LA LH LD LG LJ LL LR 240 Vac 10 kA 200 kA 10 kA 25 kA 65 kA 65 kA 65 kA 65 kA 14 kA 18 kA 25 kA 65 kA 65 kA 65 kA 65 kA 22 kA 25 kA 25 kA 65 kA 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA 3-Phase 480 Vac 10 kA 200 kA 600 Vac 10 kA 200 kA 250 Vdc / 600 Vdc Up to 10 kA 10 kA 18 kA 35 kA 35 kA 35 kA 35 kA 14 kA 18 kA 18 kA 35 kA 35 kA 35 kA 35 kA 22 kA 25 kA 18 kA 35 kA 65 kA 65 kA 65 kA 10 kA 14 kA 18 kA 25 kA 35 kA 35 kA 14 kA 18 kA 14 kA 18 kA 25 kA 35 kA 35 kA 22 kA 25 kA 14 kA 18 kA 25 kA 50 kA 65 kA Up to 10 kA 3 S A F E T Y S W I T C H E S For NEMA Type 4X Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester switches, see page 3-11. [31] On 600 V, 200 A switches, 100,000 A max. on corner grounded delta when protected by Class J or R fuses. [32] [33] NEMA Type 7/9 SCCR 10 kAIR 600 Vac maximum. [34] Ampere rating of fuse or circuit breaker not to exceed switch ampere rating. 3-10 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 81

Special Applications Class 3110 / Refer to Catalog 3100CT1602 schneider-electric.us Heavy Duty Safety Switches Special Application Heavy Duty Safety Switches 316 Grade Stainless Steel—NEMA Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 5, 12 316 stainless steel enclosure safety switches offer superior corrosion resistance to a wider range of chemicals than 304 stainless switches. 316 better resists chloride and is often used in marine, waste treatment and transportation applications. Use watertight hubs, see Hubs, page 3-14. Equipment grounding lugs are supplied as standard through 200 A. See Table 3.42 Terminal Lug Data, page 3-19 for wire Termination data for grounding lugs. (For 304 stainless switches, see 240 Volt, page 3-7 and 600 Volt, page 3-8. Table 3.18: 316 Grade Stainless Steel 3 Pole 600 Vac, 600 Vdc Amperes Cat. No 480 Vac[35] Horsepower Ratings– 3Ø 600 Vac [35] Fusible—3P, 600 Vac, 600 Vdc  30  60 100 200 400 600 H361SS H362SS H363SS H364SS H365SS H366SS Non-Fusible—3P, 600 Vac, 600 Vdc Std.  5 15 25 50 100 150 Max.  15  30  60 125 250 400 Std. 7-1/2 15 30 60 125 200 Max.  20  50  75 150 350 500 600 Vdc [36] Max. 15 30 50 50 50 50 — — — — — —  20  50  75 125 250 400  30  60 100 200 400 600 HU361SS HU362SS HU363SS HU364SS HU365SS HU366SS  30  60 100 150 350 500 Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester Enclosures—NEMA Type 4X Fiberglass reinforced polyester enclosures are watertight, corrosion resistant, and impervious to windblown dust, rain, and splashing liquid. The molded fiberglass is extremely stable in a wide range of operating temperatures and can withstand heavy impact. Switches are furnished with hubs, conduit provisions Table 3.43, and equipment grounding lugs. See CAD drawings of the switch to verify the UL listed short circuit current rating or the enclosed safety switch catalog. UL Listed. 15 30 50 50 50 50 — — — — — — S E H C T I W S Y T E F A S 3 H361SS H363DF Table 3.19: Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester Enclosures NEMA Type 4X 3 Pole 600 Vac, 600 Vdc Amperes Cat. No. Solid Neutral Assembly Kit Fusible—3P, 600 Vac, 600 Vdc  30  60 100 200 H361DF H362DF H363DF H364DF Non-Fusible—3P, 600 Vac, 600 Vdc  30  60 100 200 HU361DF HU362DF HU363DF HU364DF SN03 SN03 SN0610 — SN03 SN03 SN0610 — Class R Fuse Kits Cat. No. RFK06 RFK06H RFK10 HRK1020 — — — — Electrical Interlock Kits Field-Installed Cat. No. 1 NO/1 NC Contacts 2 NO/2 NC Contacts 480 Vac [35] Std. Max. 9999TC10 9999TC10 9999TC10 9999R8 9999TC10 9999TC10 9999TC10 9999R8 9999TC20 9999TC20 9999TC20 9999R9 9999TC20 9999TC20 9999TC20 9999R9  5 15 25 50 — — — —  15  30  60 125  20  50  75 125 Horsepower Ratings– 3Ø 600 Vac [35] 600 Vdc [36] Std. 7-1/2 15 30 60 — — — — Max. Max.  20  50  75 150  30  60 75 150 15 30 50 50 15 30 50 50 Hubs[37] 3/4 1-1/4 2 2-1/2 3/4 1-1/4 2 2-1/2 [35] Std.—Using fast acting, one time fuses. Max.—Using dual element time delay fuses. [36] [37] For switching dc use two switching poles. Two hubs and hub drilling template are provided for field installation. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 3-11 11/10/2017


page 82

3 S A F E T Y S W I T C H E S Heavy Duty Safety Switches Special Applications Class 3110 / Refer to Catalog 3100CT1602 KrydonTM Enclosures—NEMA Type 4X Krydon enclosures are compression molded of fiberglass reinforced polyester, specially formulated to withstand attack from almost any corrosive atmosphere found in the toughest industrial application. Switches are furnished with watertight hubs and equipment grounding lugs. See CAD drawing of the switch to verify the UL listed short circuit current rating or the enclosed safety switch catalog. UL Listed. schneider-electric.us H361DX Table 3.20: KrydonTM Enclosures — NEMA Type 4X 3 Pole 600 Vac, 600 Vdc Electrical Interlock Kits Field-Installed Cat. No. 2 NO/2 Solid Neutral Assembly Kit Class R Fuse Amperes Cat. No. Kits Cat. No. 1 NO/1 NC Contact NC Contacts Fusible—3P, 600 Vac, 600 Vdc H361DX H362DX H363DX  30  60 100 Non-Fusible—3P, 600 Vac, 600 Vdc  30  60 100 HU361DX HU362DX HU363DX H60SN H60SN SN0610 H60SN H60SN SN0610 RFK06 RFK06H RFK10 — — — 9999TC10 9999TC10 9999TC10 9999TC10 9999TC10 9999TC10 9999TC20 9999TC20 9999TC20 9999TC20 9999TC20 9999TC20 Horsepower Ratings– 3Ø 480 Vac [39] Std. Max.  5 15 25 — — — 15 30 60 20 50 75 600 Vac [39] 600 Vdc [40] Hubs [38] Std. 7-1/2 15 30 — — — Max. Max. 20  50  75  30  60 75 15 30 50 15 30 50 3/4 1-1/4 2 3/4 1-1/4 2 NEMA Type 7 and 9 An enclosed automatic molded case switch for use in Divisions 1 and 2 of the following: Class I, Groups C and D; Class II, Groups E, F and G; or Class III, Hazardous Locations as defined in NECTM Article 500. Furnished with threaded conduit openings in both top and bottom endwall. Suitable for use as service equipment and listed as “Raintight’’ for outdoor applications. cULus Listed. Equipment grounding lugs supplied as standard. See CAD drawing of the switch to verify the UL listed short circuit current rating or the enclosed safety switch catalog. Table 3.21: NEMA Type 7/9, 3 Pole Molded Case Switch, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc [41], Short Circuit Current Rating 10 kA AIR H60XFA Amperes  60  60 100 100 225 225 Enclosed Molded Case Switch [42] Cat. No. H60XFA H60XFA1212 [44] H100XFA H100XFA1212[44] H225XJG[45] H225XJGAA[45] [44] Solid Neutral Assembly Cat. No. 100SNA 100SNA 100SNA 100SNA 225SNA 225SNA Horsepower Ratings—3Ø 240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac 15 15 30 30 60 60 30 30 60 60 125 125 50 50 75 75 150 150 Size of Threaded Conduit Openings Provided (in.) [43] 3/4 3/4 1-1/4 1-1/4 2-1/2 2-1/2 Two hubs and hub drilling template are provided for field installation. [38] [39] Std.—Using fast acting one time fuses. Max.—Using dual element time delay fuses. [40] [41] [42] [43] [44] [45] Not cULus listed due to wire bending space. 3-12 For switching dc, use two outside switching poles. For switching dc, use two outside switching poles. Not for use on dc motor applications. Includes PKDB1, breather and drain kit, required for rainproof application. Threaded conduit opening provided in top and bottom endwall. Includes 1NO/1NC auxiliary contacts. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 83

Receptacle Switches Class 3110 / Refer to Catalog 3100CT1602 schneider-electric.us Heavy Duty Safety Switches Interlocked Receptacle Switches Interlocked Receptacle Switches [46] are furnished with a factory-installed three-phase four-wire Appleton PowertiteTM, Crouse-Hinds Style 2 ArktiteTM, or HubbellockTM receptacle. The fourth wire is connected to the switch equipment grounding terminal and is not a solid neutral termination. Interlocking linkage between the receptacle and switch mechanism prevents insertion or removal of the plug while the switch is in the “ON’’ position or insertion of any plug other than specified. Grounding lugs are included. See wiring diagram of the switch to verify the UL listed short circuit current rating or the enclosed safety switch catalog. Appleton Powertite Receptacle • UL Listed and CSA Certified • Available in 30 -100 A, 600 Vac/250 Vdc, fused or non-fused, NEMA Type 1, NEMA Type 4/4X/5 stainless steel and NEMA Type 12/3R • Suitable for use as service equipment (USA only) • Receptacles are epoxy powder coated over copper-free cast aluminum Table 3.22: Appleton Powertite Receptacle Switches Amperes NEMA Type 1 Fusible—3P, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc NEMA Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 5, 12 Stainless Enclosure 304 Steel NEMA Type 12, 3R Use with Plug [47] 480 Vac [48] Horsepower Ratings–3Ø 600 Vac [48] 250 Vdc[49] Std. Max. Std. Max. Std. Max. H362AWA Interlocked Receptacle Switch with Appleton Powertite Receptacle  30  60 100 H361DSWA H362DSWA H363DSWA Non-Fusible—3P, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc H361WA H362WA H363WA H361AWA H362AWA H363AWA ACP3034BC ACP6034BC ACP1034CD 5 15 25  30  60 100 HU361WA HU361DSWA HU361AWA ACP3034BC — HU362WA HU362DSWA HU362AWA ACP6034BC — HU363WA HU363DSWA HU363AWA ACP1034CD — 15 30 60 20 50 75 7-1/2 15 30  20  50  75  5 10 20 — — —  30 —  60 — 100 — — — —  5 10 20 Table 3.23: Appleton Powertite 600 Vac Short Circuit Current Rating Fusible—3P, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc Amperes  30  60 100 10 kAIR Fuses H, K H, K H, K Non-Fusible—3P, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc  30  60 100 H, K H, K H, K 100 kAIR Fuses 200 kAIR Fuses 14 kAIR Circuit Breaker 18kAIR Circuit Breaker — — — J, R, T[50] — — J, R J, R J, R J, R, T J, R, T J, R, T — — — FA FA FA — — — FH FH FH Type 4/4X/5 stainless steel and NEMA Type 12/3R Crouse-Hinds Arktite Receptacle • UL Listed • Available in 30 -100 A, 600 Vac/250 Vdc, fused or non-fused, NEMA Type 1, NEMA • Suitable for use as service equipment • Receptacles are cast aluminum, copper free for NEMA Type 1 and NEMA Type 12/3R • Receptacles are epoxy powder coated, copper free cast aluminum for NEMA Type 4/ safety switches 4X/5 stainless steel safety switches Table 3.24: Crouse-Hinds Arktite Safety Switch S E H C T I W S Y T E F A S 3 Amperes NEMA Type 1 Cat. No. Fusible—3P, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc NEMA Type 4, 4X, 5 304 Stainless Steel Enclosure Cat. No. NEMA Type 12, 3R Use with Plug Horsepower Ratings–3Ø 480 Vac [48] 600 Vac [48] 250 Vdc [49] Cat. No. Cat. No. Std. Max. Std. Max. Std. Max. H362AWC Interlocked Receptacle Switch with Crouse-Hinds Arktite Receptacle  30  60 100  60 100 H361WC H361DSWC H362WC H362DSWC H363WC H363DSWC H361AWC H362AWC H363AWC APJ3485 APJ6485 APJ10487 Non-Fusible—3P, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc  30 HU361WC HU361DSWC HU361AWC APJ3485 HU362WC HU362DSWC HU362AWC APJ6485 HU363WC HU363DSWC HU363AWC APJ10487 —  5 15 25 — — 15 30 60 20 50 60 7-1/2 15 30  20  50  75 5 10 20 — — —  30 —  60 — 100 — — — — 5 10 20 [46] Accessories and Special Features, page 3-14 [47] Receptacle UL listed for use with AppletonTM ACP or CPH plugs; UL Classified for use with Crouse-Hinds APJ Arktite™ plugs. (see Table 3.24. [48] Std.—Using fast acting one time fuses. Max.—Using dual element time delay fuses. [49] [50] SCCR when using 60 Amp Max fuse. For switching dc, use two outside switching poles. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 3-13 11/10/2017


page 84

Heavy Duty Safety Switches Accessories and Special Features Class 3110 / Refer to Catalog 3100CT1602 Table 3.25: Crouse-Hinds 600 Vac Short Circuit Current Rating schneider-electric.us Fusible—3P, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc Amperes  30  60 100 10 kAIR Fuses H, K H, K H, K Non-Fusible—3P, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc  30  60 100 H, K H, K H, K 100 kAIR Fuses 200 kAIR Fuses 14 kAIR Circuit Breaker 18kAIR Circuit Breaker — — — J, R, T [51] — — J, R J, R J, R J, R, T J, R, T J, R, T — — — FA FA FA — — — FH FH FH NEMA Type 12 Hubbellock Receptacle • UL Listed • Available in 30 -100 A, 600 Vac/250 Vdc, fused or non-fused, NEMA Type 1, and • Suitable for use as service equipment [52] • Receptacles are zinc plated steel for NEMA Type 1 and 12 safety switches • Short Circuit Current Rating for fusible switches is 10 kAIR maximum when used with • Short Circuit Current Rating for non-fusible switches is 10 kAIR maximum when Table 3.26: Hubbellock Receptacle Safety Switch protected by Class H, K, J, R or T fuses Class H, K, J or R fuses H362AWH Interlocked Receptacle Switch with Hubbell™ Hubbellock Receptacle Watertight Hubs Amperes NEMA Type 1 Cat. No. Fusible—3P, 600 Vac 60 H362WH Non-Fusible—3P, 600 Vac HU362WH 60 NEMA Type 12 Cat. No. Use with Plug[53] Cat. No. H362AWH SD12781 Horsepower Ratings—3Ø 480 Vac [54] 600 Vac [54] Std. 15 Max. 30 Std. 15 Max. 50 — SD12781 HU362AWH 60 Square D by Schneider Electric brand heavy duty safety switches are UL listed for use with the following accessories: Rainproof Bolt-On Hubs • UL Listed for indoor or rainproof applications • Suitable for use with conduit having ANSI standard taper pipe thread • NEMA Type 3R switches with catalog number ending in RB have a bolt-on closing cap 50 — factory installed – Accepts 3/4 in. through 2-1/2 in. bolt-on hubs – No gaskets required • NEMA Type 3R switches with R suffix have blank top endwalls – Accepts 3 in. through 4 in. bolt on hubs – Gaskets provided – Conduit entry holes must be cut in the field Table 3.27: Rainproof Bolt-On Hubs [55] Conduit 1-1/2 1-1/4 3/4 1 Size 2 2-1/2 3 4 B400 B300 B150 B125 B100 B075 B250 B200 Hub Cat. No Watertight Hubs • UL Listed for dusttight and watertight applications • Suitable for use with conduit having ANSI standard taper pipe thread • Watertight hubs are field installed on NEMA Type 4/4X/5 stainless steel and NEMA • Watertight hubs are available in zinc or chrome plated finish • Gaskets provided Table 3.28: Watertight Hubs [56] 1 Type 12/3R and 12K enclosures Conduit 1-1/2 1-1/4 2-1/2 3-1/2 1/2 3/4 2 3 4 Closing Cap BCAP H050 H075 H100 H125 H150 H200 H250 H300 H350 H400 H050CP H075CP H100CP H125CP H150CP H200CP — — — — Size Standard- Zinc Hub Cat. No Chrome Plated Hub Cat. No. [51] SCCR when using 60 Amp Max fuse. [52] Receptacle only rated for NEMA Type 1 and 12 applications. [53] Hubbell plug is furnished with a Kellems grip for 1-1/2 in. to 1-21/64 in. cable diameter. [54] Std.—Using fast acting one time fuses. Max.—Using dual element time delay fuses. [55] Gaskets are provided on 3 in. and larger hubs. [56] Gaskets are provided. 3-14 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 85

Accessories and Special Features Class 3110 / Refer to Catalog 3100CT1602 schneider-electric.us Heavy Duty Safety Switches EIK2 Electrical Interlock Kit Electrical Interlock Kits Electrical interlocks for heavy duty safety switches 30 A through 1200 A are available factory installed or in kit form for field installation. A pivot arm operates from the switch mechanism, breaking the control circuit before the main switch blades break. For factory- installed electrical interlocks add EI (for one contact) or EI2 (for two contacts) suffix to catalog number. See Supplemental Digest Section 2 for electrical interlock contact ratings. UL Listed, factory or field installed. Table 3.29: Electrical Interlock Kit [57] [58] Switch’s Amperes Rating Series Number [59] Electrical Interlock Kit Cat. No. [60] 30 60 (600 V) 60 (240 V) 100–200 30–100 Receptable Switches 30–200 Four- and Six-Pole Switches 400–1200 F5–F6 F5–F6 F5–F6 F5–F6 F5–F7 F5–F6 E4–E5 EIK031 EIK032 EIK1 EIK2 EIK031 EIK032 EIK1 EIK2 EIK1 EIK2 EIK1 EIK2 EIK40601 EIK40602 Class R Fuse Kits When installed, this kit rejects all but Class R fuses. Kits are available for field installation. One kit required for a three pole switch. For factory installation, add “CLR’’ suffix to catalog number. Table 3.30: 240 Vac — Class R Fuse Kits [61] Amperes 30 60 100 200 400–600 Series Number F5–F6 F5–F6 F5–F6 F5–F6 E4–E5 Table 3.31: 600 Vac — Class R Fuse Kits [61] [62] Series Number Amperes 30 [63] 30 A Receptacle Switches Four-Pole Switches 30 A 60 100 200 400–600 F5–F6 F7 F5–F6 F5–F7 F5–F7 F5–F6 E4–E5 Class R Fuse Kit Cat. No. RFK03L RFK03H RFK10 HRK1020 HRK4060 Class R Fuse Kit Cat. No. RFK03H RFK06 RFK06 RFK06H RFK10 HRK1020 HRK4060 Internal Barrier Kits Internal Barrier Kits provide an additional barrier that helps prevent accidental contact with live parts. Field-installed transparent barriers do not restrict visual inspection of the switch. Barriers provide IEC529 IP2X “finger safe” protection when door of enclosed disconnect switch is open. Convenient door allows use of test probes without accessing fuses and replacement of fuses without removing barrier. For use with three-pole switches. Table 3.32: Internal Barrier Kits Cat. No. SS03 SS06 SS10 SS20 Description Interior Barrier for 30 A and 240 V 60 A Safety Switch [64] Interior Barrier for 600 V, 60 A Safety Switch Interior Barrier for 240 / 600 V, 100 A Safety Switch Interior Barrier for 240 / 600 V, 200 A Safety Switch Safety Switch Application (F Series Only) 240 / 600 Vac – 30 A 240 Vac – 60 A 600 Vac – 60 A 240 / 600 Vac – 100 A 240 / 600 Vac – 200 A For series not shown in table refer to the switch wiring diagram. [57] [58] Electrical interlocks for NEMA Type 4X fiberblass reinforced polyester and KrydonTM see Table 3.19 and Table 3.20 respectively. [59] See page 3-20 and page 3-21 for safety switch series. [60] Electrical interlock kit catalog numbers ending in 1 indicates one normally open and one normally closed contact. These kits use a 9007A01 industrial snap switch. Electrical interlock kit catalog numbers ending in 2 indicates two normally open and two normally closed contacts. These kits use a 9007C03 industrial snap switch. For series not shown in the table, refer to the switch wiring diagram. [61] [62] Class R Fuse Kits for Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester enclosures and KrydonTM enclosures see Table 3, page 3-11 and Table 5, page 3-12 respectively. [63] H361-2, H361-2A, H361-2AWK and H361-2RB use RFK06. [64] Requires arc shield on 240 V switches be changed to 600 V arc suppressor. Contact the Customer Care Center at 1–888–778–2733 fo the arc suppressor part number. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 3-15 S E H C T I W S Y T E F A S 3 11/10/2017


page 86

Heavy Duty Safety Switches Accessories and Special Features Class 3110 / Refer to Catalog 3100CT1602 schneider-electric.us Fuse Puller Kits Fuse Puller Kits are standard equipment on the following 30 A - 100 A switches: NEMA Type 12 and 12K, NEMA Type 4/4X/5 stainless steel, NEMA Type 4X fiberglass reinforced polyester and KrydonTM. Fuse Puller Kit available for field installation on NEMA Type 1 and NEMA Type 3R, 30 A – 100 A switches. One Fuse Puller Kit required for a 3 pole fusible 240 V or 600 V heavy duty switch. Fuse Puller Kits can be field installed on switches manufactured since February 1980. Fuse Puller Kits 30 60 60 100 F5–F7 F5–F7 (600 V) F5 (240 V) F5–F7 Amperes Series Number [65] Fuse Puller Kit Cat. No. FPK03 [66] FPK0610 FPK03 FPK0610 Solid Neutral Assembly Kits Table 3.33: Solid Neutral Assembly Kits[65] [67] [68] [69] Amperes Series Number [70] Standard Neutral Kit Cat. No. 30 60 100 200 [72] 400 and 600 800 1200 3 S A F E T Y S W I T C H E S F5–F6 F5–F6, (600 V) F5–F6 (240 V) F5–F6, F5–F6 E4–E5 E4 E4 SN03 [71] SN0610 SN03 SN0610 SN20A H600SN H800SNE4 H1200SNE4 Terminal Data AWG/kcmil (2) 14-3 Al/Cu plus (1) 14-3 Al/Cu Svc Ground (2) 14-1/0 Al/Cu plus (2) 14-6 Al/Cu Svc Ground (2) 14-3 Al/Cu plus (1) 14-3 Al/Cu Svc Ground (2) 14-1/0 Al/Cu plus (2) 14-6 Al/Cu Svc Ground (2) 6-250 Al/Cu plus (1) 14-10 Al/Cu Svc Ground (4) 1-750 Al/Cu plus (1) 4-300 Al/Cu Svc Ground (6) 3/0-750 Al/Cu plus (2) 6-350 Al/Cu Svc Ground Optional Copper Only Neutral Kit Cat. No. SN03C [71] SN0610C SN03C SN0610C SN20C H600SNC – Terminal Data AWG/kcmil (2) 14-6 Cu plus (1) 14-6 Cu Svc Ground (2) 14-1/0 Cu plus (2) 14-6 Cu Svc Ground (2) 14-1/0 Cu plus (2) 14-6 Cu Svc Ground (2) 14-1/0 Cu plus (2) 14-6 Cu Svc Ground (2) 6-250 Cu plus (1) 14-1/0 Cu Svc Ground (2) 1-600 Cu and (2) 4-350 Cu plus (2) 6-250 Cu Svc Ground – (8) 3/0-750 Al/Cu plus (2) 6-350 Al/Cu Svc Ground Equipment Grounding Kits Equipment grounding kits are available for factory or field installation. For factory installation of equipment grounding kit, add suffix GL to standard Cat. No. (Example: H361GL). – – Table 3.34: Equipment Grounding Kits and Terminal Data [73] [74] Amperes Series Number 30 60 60 100 200 400 and 600 800 1200 F5–F6 F5–F6 (600 V) F5–F6 (240 V) F5–F6 F5–F6 E4–E5 E4 E4 Standard Cat. No. GTK03 [75] GTK0610 GTK03 GTK0610 PKOGTA2 PKOGTA2 [77] PKOGTA7 PKOGTA8 Terminal Data AWG/kcmil (2) 14-4 Cu or (2) 12-4 Al or and or and (4) 14-12 Cu or (4) 12-10 Al (2) 14-1/0 Cu or (2) 12-1/0 Al (2) 14-6 Cu or (2) 12-6 Al (2) 14-4 Cu or (2) 12-4 Al (4) 14-12 Cu or (4) 12-10 Al (2) 14-1/0 Cu or (2) 12-1/0 Al (2) 14-6 Cu or (2) 12-6 Al (2) 10-2/0 Cu or (2) 6-2/0 Al (2) 10-2/0 Cu or (2) 6-2/0 Al (4) 4-350 Al/Cu (8) 4-350 Al/Cu Optional Copper Only Cat. No. GTK03C [75] [76] GTK0610C GTK03C GTK0610C PKOGTC2 PKOGTC3 — — Terminal Data AWG/kcmil (2) 14-6 Cu (2) 14-1/0 Cu and (2) 14-6 Cu (2) 14-6 Cu (2) 14-1/0 Cu and (2) 14-6 Cu (2) 14-4 Cu (4) 14-1/0 Cu — — For series not shown in chart refer to the switch wiring diagram. 30 A 4 pole, H361-2 and H361-2RB Series F5, H361WA and H361WC Series F6 use FPK0610. For solid Neutral Assembly Kits for Krydon TM enclosure see Table 3.20. For Solid Neutral Assembly Kits for Fiberglass Reinforced Ployester enclosures see Table 3.19. [65] [66] [67] [68] [69] Neutrals cannot be installed in 4 or 6 pole switches or receptable switches. [70] See page 3-20 and page 3-21 for safety switch series. [71] [72] [73] [74] Equipment Ground Kits (Al/Cu) are factory installed standard in 30-200 A Series F NEMA Type 4/4X/5 (stainless steel), 12 and 12K. Equipment Ground Kits are standard factory installed on The following 30 A Series F5-F6 switches use SN0610 or SN0610C: H3612, H3612RB, H3612A, H3612AWK, HU3612, HU3612RB, HU3612A and HU3612AWK. For 200% neutral, order (2) SN20A Neutral Kits and (1) SN20NI Neutral Jumper Kit. For series not shown in table refer to the switch wiring diagram. [75] H2212AWK accepts GTK03 or GTK03C. H3612A or AWK accepts GTK03C. H3612 and H3612RB accepts GTK0610 HU3612AWK accepts GTK03C. HU3612A accepts GTK0610C. all receptacle switches and all Series F 30-200 A, 4 and 6 pole switches. HU3612RB accepts GTK0610 or GTK0610C. [76] Optional copper equipment grounding kit for the 4 and 6 pole 30 A F Series: H461DS, H461AWK, HU461DS, HU661DS and HU661AWK accepts GTK03C HU461AWK accepts GTK0610C. [77] 3-16 Two required if equipment grounding conductors are run in parallel. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 87

Accessories and Special Features Class 3110 / Refer to Catalog 3100CT1602 schneider-electric.us Heavy Duty Safety Switches Special Paint and Touch-Up Paint UL Listed heavy duty switches are available painted with special safety colors. To order safety colored switches, add suffixes from the Safety Colors table to the standard switch catalog number. Not available on NEMA Type 4X Fiberglass, Krydon, NEMA Type 4/4X/5 Stainless Steel nor NEMA Type 7 and 9 switches. All colors comply with OSHA Standard 1910.144 and ANSI Specification Z535.1 for marking physical hazards. Table 3.35: Safety Colors [78] Safety Color Black Red Orange Yellow Green Suffix SP0 SP2 SP3 SP4 SP5 Safety Color Blue Purple Gray Gray ANSI 61 White Suffix SP6 SP7 SP8 [79] SP861 SP9 Table 3.36: Square D Gray Touch-Up Paint Description 12 oz. Aerosol Paint Can, Square D ANSI-49 Gray Touch-Up Paint Cat. No. PK49SP NOTE: Minimum quantity of 6 required. Lock-Off Guard Kits [80] [81] Available factory- or field-installed the lock-off guard works by covering the lockout/ tagout opening whenever the switch is in the ON position. This prevents a padlock from being inadvertantly inserted into the switch lockplate. The device is designed to help prevent accidental misapplication of a lockout device. These kits are marked cURus (UL Component Recognized) for field or factory installation. Table 3.37: Lock-Off Guard Kits Switch Rating 30 A 60 A 240 V 60 A 600 V 100 and 200 A Cat. No. LOGK1 LOGK2 Optional Lock-OFF Guard Kit Installed Key Interlock System Key Interlock Systems Factory-installed only on heavy duty safety switches and double throw safety switches. Interlocks are used to prevent the authorized operator from making an unauthorized operation. Not available on NEMA Type 4X Fiberglass, Krydon or NEMA Type 7 and 9 switches. The key interlock system is a simple and easy method of applying individual key interlock units and assemblies to the above equipment so as to require operation in a predetermined sequence. UL Listed. Quoting: Contact Schneider Electric for catalog number, availability, and pricing prior to quoting a job. Detailed information is required before an order can be processed. Please see Supplemental Digest Section 2 for further information. Use these suffixes on switch catalog numbers: • KI = 1 lock per switch • KI2 = 1 lock with 2 cylinders (2 keys) per switch • KIKI = 2 separate locks per switch Lock-ON Provisions Lock-OFF provisions are standard on all heavy duty safety switches. Provision for one 3/ 8 inch hasp padlock is available factory-installed on 30–1200 A, NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4-4X- 5 stainless steel 12 and 12K switches. Not avaliable on NEMA Type 4X, Fiberglass, Krydon or NEMA Type 7 and 9 switches. This modification will allow the switch to be locked in the “ON’’ position. UL Listed. To order, add suffix SPLO to standard catalog number. Example: H364-SPLO [78] A minimum quantity of 10 is required. [79] Standard Square D ANSI 49 grey paint, when selecting this suffix, switches will receive additional coat of paint. [80] Available factory assembled or as a field installable kit on NEMA Type 1, 3R, 12 or 12K switches. Not available for use on NEMA Type 4X Fiberglass, Krydon, NEMA Type 4/4X/5 Stainless Steel nor NEMA Type 7 and 9 switches. For factory installation add suffix LOG to the standard switch catalog number. [81] © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 3-17 S E H C T I W S Y T E F A S 3 11/10/2017


page 88

Heavy Duty Safety Switches Accessories and Special Features Class 3110 / Refer to Catalog 3100CT1602 schneider-electric.us Cover Viewing Window Optional cover viewing window is positioned over the blades to allow visual verification of “ON-OFF” status. Available on 30 through 1200 A heavy duty switches, NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4/4X/5 Stainless Steel, 12 and 12K. (Not avaliable on NEMA Type 4X, Fiberglass, Krydon or NEMA Type 7 and 9 switches). Add VW suffix to the catalog number for factory installation. Voltage Monitors Voltage monitors installed on safety switches indicate when voltage is present, helping to prevent arc-flash hazards and electric shocks during maintenance work. Voltage monitors can be combined with other safety features such as Key Interlock, Viewing Windows or Lock-ON provisions. • UL Listed • Factory installed only • Order the voltage monitors by adding the appropriate suffix shown in the table below • Not available on NEMA Type 7 and 9 and NEMA Type 4X Fiberglass and KrydonTM Table 3.38: Voltage Monitors [82] [83] [84] to the switch catalog number switches Description Suffix [85] Line Side Monitor Load Side Monitor SI LI LI2 Line and Load Side Monitors Copper Lug Kits Lug kits that accept only copper wire are available for field or factory installation: • UL Listed • UL Marine Listed – UL Marine listing is applicable ONLY to 30 - 200 A, NEMA Type 12/3R, NEMA Type 12K and NEMA Type 4/4X/5 stainless steel, safety switches – When copper only lugs kits are factory installed the switch will bear the UL Marine mark and be suitable for use on vessels over 65 feet long – When the copper only lugs kits are field installed the switch will not bear the UL Marine mark and would not be suitable for use on vessels over 65 feet long switches • Not available for use on NEMA Type 4X Fiberglass, Krydon or NEMA Type 7 and 9 • For field installation, order copper lug kits. See Table below • For factory installation of copper lugs, add the suffix SLC to the standard catalog Table 3.39: Copper Lug Kits [86] number Amperes 30–60 100 200 400 600  800 1200 Lug Kit Cat. No. CL0306F CL10F CL20F CL40F CL60F — — Lug Wire Range AWG/kcmil (1) 14-8 Cu solid or 14-4 Cu stranded (1) 14-8 Cu solid or 14-1/0 Cu stranded (1) 6-250 Cu (1) 1-600 Cu plus (1) 6-250 Cu (1) 4-350 Cu — — 3 S A F E T Y S W I T C H E S [82] Available on 30–1200 A Heavy Duty Safety Switches. [83] Order 600 Vac Heavy Duty Safety Switch for all 30–60 A 240 Vac applications. [84] Available on 30–200 A Double Throw Safety Switches. Two and three-pole, 200 A Type 3R switches are not available with these voltage monitors. [85] In addition to the suffix shown in the table above, a 3 must be added to the switch catalog number for all 30 and 60 A switches, i.e. H361AWK becomes H3613AWKLI. 30 and 60 A switches require 100 A enclosure accessories. Double Throw Safety Switches are exempt from this requirement. [86] One kit includes all phase line/load lugs for a 3-pole switch. CL0306F, CL10F and CL20F includes six lugs. CL40F and CL60F includes twelve lugs. 3-18 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Al/Cu to Cu Only 11/10/2017


page 89

Accessories and Special Features Class 3110 / Refer to Catalog 3100CT1602 schneider-electric.us Heavy Duty Safety Switches Double Lug Kits 200 A heavy duty F-series switches are supplied standard with lugs suitable for one wire per phase. For two wires per phase and neutral, order the Double Lug Kit. Not UL Listed. Not listed on switch’s wiring diagram as an accessory. Table 3.40: Double Lug Kits Amperes Cat. No. [87] Lug Wire Range per Phase and Neutral AWG/kcmil Wire Range Wire Bending Space per NEC Table 312.6 AWG/kcmil 200 AL20DTF (2) 6 –300 Cu/Al (2) 6 –250 Cu/Al Compression Lug Kits — 800 A and 1200 A Safety Switches • UL Listed. • Compression Lug Kits contain • Compression Lug Kits available for field VCEL07512H1 Versa-CrimpTM installation compression lugs • Compression Lug Kits available for factory installation; Add suffix LK to standard catalog number • Order one Compression Lug Kit per switching pole and/or neutral (see Table below) Table 3.41: Compression Lug Kits Lug Kit Cat. No. Amperes  800 1200 H8LKE2 H12LKE2 Conductors per Phase (3) Line and (3) Load (4) Line and (4) Load Lug Wire Range kcmil 500-750 kcmil (AI) 500 kcmil (CU) 500-750 kcmil (AI) or or 500 kcmil (CU) Table 3.42: Terminal Lug Data [88] Rating (A) Wires Per Phase and Neutral 30 60 [92] 100 [93] 200 [94] 400[95] 600 800 1200 1 2 1 1 1 1 or 2 2 3 4 Wire Range Wire Bending Space per NEC Table 312.6 AWG/kcmil 12–6 (Al) 14–6 (Cu) 12–10 (Al) 14–10 (Cu) 12–3 (Al) 14–3 (Cu) 12–1/0 (Al) or or or or or 14–1/0 (Cu) 6–250 (Al/Cu) 1/0–750 (Al/Cu) 1/0–300 (Al/Cu) 3/0–500 (Al/Cu) 3/0–750 (Al/Cu) 3/0–750 (Al/Cu) 3/0–500 (Al/Cu) 3/0–750 (Al/Cu) 3/0–750 (Al/Cu) Table 3.43: Conduit Provisions Top and Bottom Endwall NEMA Type 4X Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester and Krydon [99] Amperes  30  60 100 200 Lug Wire Range AWG/kcmil Optional [89]Compression Lug Field-Installed Optional Copper Only [89] Compression Lug Field- Installed [90] 12–2 (Al) or 14–2 (Cu) 12–2 (Al) 14–2 (Cu) 12–1/0 (Al) or or or 14–1/0 (Cu) 6–300 (Al/Cu) 1/0–750 (Al/Cu) 1/0–300 (Al/Cu) C10–14,[91] D8–14–SK, or E6–14 C10–14,[91] D8–14–SK, or E6–14 — — VCEL02114S1 VCELC02114S1 VCEL030516H1 [96] VCELC030516H1[97] VCEL030516H1 VCEL07512H1 or and VCEL05012H1 VCEL05012H1 H8LKE2[98] H12LKE2[98]  3/4 in. 1-1/4 in. 2 in. 2-1/2 in. VCELC030516H1 VCELC07512H1 or and VCELC05012H1 VCELC05012H1 — — NEMA Type 7 and 9 [100] — 3/4 in. 1-1/4 in. 2-1/2 in. S E H C T I W S Y T E F A S 3 For NEMA Type 1, 12/3R, 12K and 4/4X/5 stainless steel switches only. 30–100 A switches suitable for 60°C or 75°C conductors. 200–1200 A switches suitable for 75°C conductors. [87] Kit contains 3 lugs. Order two kits for line and load lugs. [88] [89] Hubbell Versa-Crimp™ unless otherwise noted. [90] [91] Order from Thomas and Betts. [92] H60XFA and H60XFA1212 — use 75°C copper wire only. #6 AWG copper wire required for 60 A rating. [93] H100XFA and H100XFA1212 — use 75°C copper wire only. #3 AWG copper wire required for 100 A rating. [94] H225XJG and H225XJGAA — use 75°C copper wire only. Lug wire range is #3 AWG – 350 kcmil. Not UL Listed due to inadequate wire bending space (5” on ON end, 6” on OFF end). [95] Maximum wire bending space allows for (1) 600 kcmil or (2) 300 kcmil Al/Cu on NEMA Type 4/4X/5 stainless steel and NEMA Type 12 switches. [96] Order two PK516KN mounting kits when installing VCEL030516H1 lugs. Only one kit is required on 2 pole switches. PK516KN consists of (4) 5/16-18 Keps Nuts. [97] Order two PK516KN mounting kits when installing VCEL030516H1 or VCELC030516H1 lugs. Only one kit is required on 2 pole switches. PK516KN consists of (4) 5/16-18 Keps Nuts. [98] [99] Hubs and hub drilling templates are provided for field-installation. [100] Threaded conduit opening. For 800 and 1200 A compression lug kits see Table 3.41 for additional information. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 3-19 11/10/2017


page 90

Heavy Duty Safety Switches Dimensions for Heavy Duty Safety Switches Class 3110 / Refer to Catalog 3100CT1602 schneider-electric.us NEMA Type 1 and 3R See Table 3.42 Terminal Lug Data, page 3-19 for terminal lug data for the series switches listed in the dimension table below. 3 Table 3.44: Approximate Dimensions Typical NEMA Type 1 Typical NEMA Type 3R Series F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 E4 E5 E4 E5 E4 E4 E4 E4 E4 E5 E4 E5 E4 E4 E4 E4 F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 E4 E5 E4 E5 E4 E4 E4 E4 F5 F5 F5 F6 F6 F5 F5 F6 F6 F5 F5 F5 F6 F6 H in. 14.60 14.88 14.60 14.88 21.25 21.25 29.00 29.25 50.25 50.31 50.25 50.31 69.13 69.13 69.13 69.13 50.25 50.31 50.25 50.31 69.13 69.13 69.13 69.13 14.60 14.88 14.60 14.88 21.25 21.25 29.00 29.25 50.25 50.31 50.25 50.31 69.13 69.13 69.13 69.13 14.60 17.50 14.88 18.19 18.19 17.50 17.50 18.19 16.75 18.19 21.25 21.25 21.85 21.85 mm  371  378  371  378  540  540  737  743 1276 1278 1276 1278 1756 1756 1756 1756 1276 1278 1276 1278 1756 1756 1756 1756  371  378  371  378  540  540  737  743 1276 1278 1276 1278 1756 1756 1756 1756  371  445 378 462 462  445  445 462  425  462 540 540  462  555 W in.  6.50  6.63  6.50  6.63  8.50  8.50 17.13 17.25 27.63 27.76 27.63 27.76 36.62 36.62 36.62 36.62 27.63 27.76 27.63 27.76 36.62 36.62 36.62 36.62  6.50  6.63  6.50  6.63  8.50  8.50 17.13 17.25 27.88 27.76 27.63 27.76 36.62 36.62 36.62 36.62  6.50  9.00  6.63  9.00  9.00  9.00  9.00  9.00  9.00  9.00  8.50  8.50  9.00  9.00 mm 165 168 165 168 216 216 435 438 702 705 702 705 930 930 930 930 702 705 702 705 930 930 930 930 165 168 165 168 216 216 435 438 708 705 702 705 930 930 930 930 165 229 168 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 216 216 229 229 D in.  4.88  4.88  4.88  4.88  6.38  6.38 8.25 8.50 10.13 9.53 10.13 9.53 17.75 17.75 17.75 17.75 10.13 9.53 10.13 9.53 17.75 17.75 17.75 17.75  4.88  4.88  4.88  4.88  6.38  6.38 8.25 8.50 10.13 9.53 10.13 9.53 17.75 17.75 17.75 17.75  4.88  6.38  4.88  6.81  6.81  6.38  6.38  6.81  7.00  6.81  6.38  6.38  6.81  6.81 mm 124 124 124 124 162 162 210 216 257 242 257 242 451 451 451 451 257 242 257 242 451 451 451 451 124 124 124 124 162 162 210 216 257 242 257 242 451 451 451 451 124 162 124 173 173 162 162 173 178 173 162 162 173 173 W/H in.  7.55  7.55  7.55  7.55 10.50 10.50 18.50 18.63 27.63 27.88 27.63 27.88 36.62 36.62 36.62 36.62 27.63 27.88 27.63 27.88 36.62 36.62 36.62 36.62  7.55  7.55  7.55  7.55 10.50 10.50 18.50 18.63 27.88 27.88 27.63 27.88 36.62 36.62 36.62 36.62  7.55 10.50  7.55 10.50 10.50 10.50 10.50 10.50 10.50 10.50 10.50 10.50 10.50 10.50 mm 192 192 192 192 267 267 470 473 702 708 702 708 930 930 930 930 702 708 702 708 930 930 930 930 192 192 192 192 267 267 470 473 708 708 702 708 930 930 930 930 192 267 192 267 267 267 267 267 267 267 267 267 267 267 Cat. No. H221N H221NRB H222N H222NRB H223N H223NRB H224N H224NRB H225, N H225NR, R H226, N H226NR, R H227, N H227NR, R H228, N H228NR, R S A F E T Y S W I T C H E S H265 H265R H266 H266R H267 H267R H268 H268R H321N H321NRB H322N H322NRB H323N H323NRB H324N H324NRB H325, N H325R, NR H326, N H326R, NR H327, N H327R, NR H328, N H328R, NR H361, N H361-2 H361NRB, RB H361WA H361WC H362, N H362NRB, RB H362WA H362WC H362WH H363, N H363NRB, RB H363WA H363WC 3-20 Cat. No. H364, N H364RB, NRB H365, N H365R, NR H366, N H366NR, R H367, N H367NR, R H368, N H368NR, R H461 H462 H463 H464 H465 H466 HU265 HU265R HU266 HU266R HU267 HU267R HU268 HU268R HU361 HU361RB HU361WA HU361WC HU362 HU362RB HU362WA HU362WC HU362WH HU363 HU363RB HU363WA HU363WC HU364 HU364RB HU365 HU365R HU366 HU366R HU367 HU367R HU368 HU368R HU461 HU462 HU463 HU464 HU465 HU466 Ser- ies F5 F5 E4 E5 E4 E5 E4 E4 E4 E4 F5 F5 F5 F5 E4 E4 E4 E5 E4 E5 E4 E4 E4 E4 F5 F5 F6 F6 F5 F5 F6 F6 F5 F5 F5 F6 F6 F5 F5 E4 E5 E4 E5 E4 E4 E4 E4 F5 F5 F5 F5 E4 E4 H in. 29.00 29.25 50.25 50.31 50.25 50.31 69.13 69.13 69.13 69.13 20.50 20.50 20.50 29.00 50.25 50.25 50.25 50.31 50.25 50.31 69.13 69.13 69.13 69.13 14.60 14.88 18.19 18.19 17.50 17.50 18.19 16.75 18.19 21.25 21.25 21.85 21.85 29.00 29.25 50.25 50.31 50.25 50.31 69.13 69.13 69.13 69.13 20.50 20.50 20.50 29.00 50.25 50.25 mm  737  743 1276 1278 1276 1278 1756 1756 1756 1756  521  521  521  737 1276 1276 1276 1278 1276 1278 1756 1756 1756 1756  371  378  462  462  445  445 462 425  462  540  540 462 555  737  743 1276 1278 1276 1278 1756 1756 1756 1756  521  521  521  737 1276 1276 W in. 17.13 17.25 27.63 27.76 27.63 27.76 36.62 36.62 36.62 36.62 14.75 14.75 14.75 23.25 33.88 33.88 27.63 27.76 27.63 27.76 36.62 36.62 36.62 36.62  6.50  6.63  9.00  9.00  9.00  9.00  9.00  9.00  9.00  8.50  8.50  9.00  9.00 17.13 17.25 27.63 27.76 27.63 27.76 36.62 36.62 36.62 36.62 14.75 14.75 14.75 23.25 33.88 33.88 mm 435 438 702 705 702 705 930 930 930 930 375 375 375 591 861 861 702 705 702 705 930 930 930 930 165 168 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 216 216 229 229 435 438 702 705 702 705 930 930 930 930 375 375 375 591 861 861 D in. 8.25 8.50 10.13 9.53 10.13 9.53 17.75 17.75 17.75 17.75  6.85  6.85  6.85  8.75 10.13 10.13 10.13 9.53 10.13 9.53 17.75 17.75 17.75 17.75  4.88  4.88  6.81  6.81  6.38  6.38  6.81  7.00  6.81  6.38  6.38  6.81  6.81  8.25  8.50 10.13 9.53 10.13 9.53 17.75 17.75 17.75 17.75  6.85  6.85  6.85  8.75 10.13 10.13 mm 210 216 257 242 257 242 451 451 451 451 174 174 174 222 257 257 257 242 257 242 451 451 451 451 124 124 173 173 162 162 173 178 173 162 162 173 173 210 216 257 242 257 242 451 451 451 451 174 174 174 222 257 257 W/H in. 18.50 18.63 27.63 27.88 27.63 27.88 36.62 36.62 36.62 36.62 16.13 16.13 16.13 24.88 33.88 33.88 27.63 27.88 27.63 27.88 36.62 36.62 36.62 36.62  7.55  7.55 10.50 10.50 10.50 10.50 10.50 10.50 10.50 10.50 10.50 10.50 10.50 18.50 18.63 27.63 27.88 27.63 27.88 36.62 36.62 36.62 36.62 16.13 16.13 16.13 24.88 33.88 33.88 mm 470 473 702 708 702 708 930 930 930 930 410 410 410 632 861 861 702 708 702 708 930 930 930 930 192 192 267 267 267 267 267 267 267 267 267 267 267 470 473 702 708 702 708 930 930 930 930 410 410 410 632 861 861 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved HW/HDWHW/HDW11/10/2017


page 91

schneider-electric.us Dimensions for Heavy Duty Safety Switches Class 3110 / Refer to Catalog 3100CT1602 Heavy Duty Safety Switches NEMA Type 4, 4X, 5, 7, 9, and 12 See Table 3.42 Terminal Lug Data, page 3-19 for terminal lug data for the series switches listed in the dimension table below. Table 3.45: Approximate Dimensions H W/H W D Series Typical NEMA Type 4, 4X, 5, 12, 12K (Stainless has flat front) Typical NEMA Type 4X Fiberglass and Krydon Typical NEMA Type 7, 9 S E H C T I W S Y T E F A S 3 Cat. No. H60XFA H100XFA H221AWK,A H221DS H221-2AWK H222AWK,A H223AWK,A H222DS H223DS H224A,AWK H224DS H225AWK,DS H225NAWK,NDS H225XJG H226AWK,DS H226NAWK,NDS H227AWK,NAWK H228AWK,NAWK H265AWK,DS H266AWK,A,DS H267AWK,NAWK H268AWK,NAWK H321AWK,A H321DS H322AWK,A H322DS H323AWK,A H323DS H324A,AWK H324DS H325NAWK,NDS H325AWK,DS H326AWK,DS H326NAWK,NDS H327AWK,NAWK H328AWK,NAWK H361-2AWK,A H361AWA H361AWC H361AWK,A H361DS H361DSWA H361DSWC H361DF H361DX H361SS H362AWA H362AWC H362AWH H362AWK,A H362DS H362DSWA H362DSWC H362DF H362DX H362SS H363AWA H363AWC H363AWK,A H363DS H363DSWA H363DSWC H363DF H363DX H363SS H364A,AWK H364DS,NDS H364NA,NAWK H364DF H364SS H365AWK,DS,SS H365NAWK,NDS H366AWK,DS H366NAWK,NDS,SS H367AWK,NAWK H368AWK,NAWK H461AWK H461DS H462AWK H462DS H463AWK H463DS H464AWK H464DS H465AWK H663AWK H663DS H664AWK H664DS HU265AWK,DS HU266AWK,DS HU267AWK HU268AWK HU361AWA HU361AWC HU361AWK,A HU361DS HU361DSWA HU361DSWC E1 E1 F6 F6 F6 F6 F6 F6 F6 F6 F6 E4 E4 A1 E5 E5 E4 E4 E5 E5 E4 E4 F6 F6 F6 F6 F6 F6 F6 F6 E5 E5 E5 E5 E4 E4 F7 F7 F6 F6 F7 F7 F1 F1 F6 F6 F7 F7 F6 F6 F6 F7 F7 F1 F1 F6 F7 F7 F6 F6 F7 F7 F1 F1 F6 F6 F6 F6 E1 F6 E5 E5 E5 E5 E4 E4 F6 F6 F6 F6 F6 F6 F6 F6 E5 F6 F6 F6 F6 E5 E5 E4 E4 F7 F7 F6 F6 F7 F7 in. 15.93 15.93 14.60 14.93 16.50 14.60 14.93 20.50 20.82 29.00 29.00 46.25 46.25 22.56 46.25 46.25 69.13 69.13 46.25 46.25 69.13 69.13 14.60 14.93 14.60 14.93 20.50 20.82 29.00 29.00 46.25 46.25 46.25 46.25 69.13 69.13 16.50 16.50 14.60 14.93 16.87 16.87 16.50 19.40 14.93 16.50 16.50 16.50 16.50 16.50 16.87 16.87 16.87 16.50 19.40 16.87 20.50 20.50 20.50 20.82 20.82 20.82 24.80 25.25 20.82 29.00 29.00 29.00 31.30 29.00 46.25 46.25 46.25 46.25 69.13 69.13 20.50 20.82 20.50 20.82 20.50 20.82 29.00 29.00 46.25 20.50 20.82 29.00 29.00 46.25 46.25 69.13 69.13 16.50 16.50 14.60 14.93 16.87 16.87 mm  405  405  371  379  419  371  379  521  529  737  737 1175 1175  573 1175 1175 1756 1756 1175 1175 1756 1756  371  379  371  379  521  529  737  737 1175 1175 1175 1175 1756 1756 419 419  371  379 428 428  419  493 379  419  419  419  419  419  428 428 428  419  493 428 521 521  521  529 529 529  630  641 529  737  737  737  795 737 1175 1175 1175 1175 1756 1756 521 529 521  529  521  529  737  737 1175  521  529  737  737 1175 1175 1756 1756 419 419  371  379 428 428 in.  9.87  9.87  6.63  7.22  9.00  6.63  7.22  9.00  9.36 17.25 17.75 26.25 26.25 10.88 26.25 26.25 36.62 36.62 26.25 26.25 36.62 36.62  6.63  7.22  6.63  7.22  9.00  9.36 17.25 17.75 26.25 26.25 26.25 26.25 36.62 36.62 9.00 9.00  6.63  7.22 8.92 8.92 11.00 11.40 7.22  9.00  9.00  9.00  9.00  9.00  8.92 8.92 8.92 11.00 11.40 8.92 9.00 9.00  9.00  9.36 9.36 9.36 13.70 11.40 9.36 17.25 17.75 17.25 26.30 17.75 26.25 26.25 26.25 26.25 36.62 36.62 14.75 15.08 14.75 15.08 14.75 15.08 23.25 23.75 32.50 14.75 15.08 23.25 23.75 26.25 26.25 36.62 36.62 9.00 9.00  6.63  7.22 8.92 8.92 mm 251 251 168 183 229 168 183 229 238 438 451 667 667 276 667 667 930 930 667 667 930 930 168 183 168 183 229 238 438 451 667 667 667 667 930 930 229 229 168 183 227 227 279 290 183 229 229 229 229 229 227 227 227 279 290 227 229 229 229 238 238 238 348 290 238 438 451 438 668 451 667 667 667 667 930 930 375 383 375 383 375 383 591 603 826 375 383 591 603 667 667 930 930 229 229 168 183 227 227 in.  6.96  6.96  4.96  5.11  7.00  4.96  5.11  7.00  6.97  8.75  8.88 10.13 10.13  7.75 10.13 10.13 17.75 17.75 10.13 10.13 17.75 17.75  4.96  5.11  4.96  5.11  7.00  6.97  8.75  8.88 10.13 10.13 10.13 10.13 17.75 17.75 7.00 7.00  4.96  5.11 5.11 5.11  8.80  8.60 5.11  7.00  7.00  7.00  7.00  7.00  6.97 5.11 5.11 8.80  8.60 6.97 7.00 7.00  7.00  6.97 6.97 6.97 12.00  8.60 6.97  8.75  8.88  8.75 11.80 8.88 10.13 10.13 10.13 10.13 17.75 17.75 6.80 6.97 6.80  6.97  6.80  6.97  8.75  8.88 10.13  6.80  6.97  8.75  8.88 10.13 10.13 17.75 17.75 7.00 7.00  4.96  5.11 5.11 5.11 mm 177 177 125 130 178 125 130 178 177 216 226 259 259 197 259 259 451 451 259 259 451 451 125 130 125 130 178 177 216 226 259 259 259 259 451 451 178 178 125 130 130 130 224 218 130 178 178 178 178 178 177 130 130 224 218 177 178 178 178 177 177 177 305 218 177 216 226 216 300 226 259 259 259 259 451 451 173 177 173 177 173 177 222 226 259 173 177 222 226 259 259 451 451 178 178 125 130 130 130 in.  9.87  9.87  7.55  8.67 10.50  7.55  8.67 10.50 11.25 18.63 19.25 26.25 26.25 10.88 26.25 26.25 36.62 36.62 26.25 26.25 36.62 36.62  7.55  8.67  7.55  8.67 10.50 11.25 18.63 19.25 26.25 26.25 26.25 26.25 36.62 36.62 10.50 10.50  7.55  8.67 10.81 10.79 11.00 11.40 8.67 10.50 10.50 10.50 10.50 10.50 10.81 10.81 10.79 11.00 11.40 10.81 10.50 10.50 10.50 11.25 11.25 11.25 13.70 11.40 11.25 18.63 19.25 18.63 26.30 19.25 26.25 26.25 26.25 26.25 36.62 36.62 16.13 16.85 16.13 16.85 16.13 16.85 24.88 25.25 32.50 16.13 16.85 24.88 25.25 26.25 26.25 36.62 36.62 10.50 10.50  7.55  8.67 10.81 10.79 mm 251 251 192 220 267 192 220 267 286 473 489 667 667 276 667 667 930 930 667 667 930 930 192 220 192 220 267 286 473 489 667 667 667 667 930 930 267 267 192 220 275 274 279 290 220 267 267 267 267 267 275 275 274 279 290 275 267 267 267 286 286 286 348 290 286 473 489 473 668 489 667 667 667 667 930 930 410 428 410 428 410 428 632 641 826 410 428 632 641 667 667 930 930 267 267 192 220 275 274 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 3-21 HW/HDWHWDHWD11/10/2017


page 92

Heavy Duty Safety Switches Dimensions for Heavy Duty Safety Switches Class 3110 / Refer to Catalog 3100CT1602 schneider-electric.us Table 3.45 Approximate Dimensions (cont'd.) Cat. No. HU361DF HU361DX HU361SS HU362AWA HU362AWC HU362AWH HU362AWK,A HU362DS HU362DSWA HU362DSWC HU362DF HU362DX HU362SS HU363AWA HU363AWC HU363AWK,A HU363DS HU363DSWA HU363DSWC HU363DF HU363DX HU363SS HU364A,AWK HU364DF HU364DS HU364SS HU365AWK,DS,SS HU366AWK,DS,SS HU367AWK HU368AWK HU461AWK HU461DS HU462AWK HU462DS HU463AWK HU463DS HU464AWK HU464DS HU465AWK HU661AWK HU661DS HU662AWK HU662DS HU663AWK HU663DS HU664AWK HU664DS Series F1 F1 F6 F7 F7 F6 F6 F6 F7 F7 F1 F1 F6 F7 F7 F6 F6 F7 F7 F1 F1 F6 F6 E1 F6 F6 E5 E5 E4 E4 F6 F6 F6 F6 F6 F6 F6 F6 E5 F6 F6 F6 F6 F6 F6 F6 F6 H in. 16.50 19.40 14.93 16.50 16.50 16.50 16.50 16.87 16.87 16.87 16.50 19.40 16.87 20.50 20.50 20.50 20.82 20.82 20.82 24.80 25.25 20.82 29.00 31.30 29.00 29.00 46.25 46.25 69.13 69.13 20.50 20.82 21.25 20.82 20.50 20.82 29.00 29.00 46.25 20.50 20.82 20.50 20.82 20.50 20.82 29.00 29.00 mm  419  493 379  419  419  419  419  428 428 428  419  493 428 521 521  521  529 529 529  630 641 529  737 795  737 737 1175 1175 1756 1756 521  529 540  529  521  529  737  737 1175  521  529  521  529  521  529  737  737 W in. 11.00 11.40 7.22  9.00  9.00  9.00  9.00  8.92 8.92 8.92 11.00 11.40 8.92 9.00 9.00  9.00  9.36 9.36 9.36 13.70 11.40 9.36 17.25 26.30 17.75 17.75 26.25 26.25 36.62 36.62 14.75 15.08 16.13 15.08 14.75 15.08 23.25 23.75 32.50 14.75 15.08 14.75 15.08 14.75 15.08 23.25 23.75 mm 279 290 183 229 229 229 229 227 227 227 279 290 227 229 229 229 238 238 238 348 290 238 438 668 451 451 667 667 930 930 375 383 410 383 375 383 591 603 826 375 383 375 383 375 383 591 603 D in.  8.80  8.60 5.11  7.00  7.00  7.00  7.00  6.97 5.11 5.11  8.80  8.60 6.97 7.00 7.00  7.00  6.97 6.97 6.97 12.00 8.60 6.97  8.75 11.80  8.88 8.88 10.13 10.13 17.75 17.75  6.80  6.97  6.80  6.97  6.80  6.97  8.75  8.88 10.13  6.80  6.97  6.80  6.97  6.80  6.97  8.75  8.88 mm 224 218 130 178 178 178 178 177 130 130 224 218 177 178 178 178 177 177 177 305 218 177 216 300 226 226 259 259 451 451 173 177 173 177 173 177 222 226 259 173 177 173 177 173 177 222 226 W/H in. 11.00 11.40 8.67 10.50 10.50 10.50 10.50 10.81 10.81 10.79 11.00 11.40 10.81 10.50 10.50 10.50 11.25 11.25 11.25 13.70 11.40 11.25 18.63 26.30 19.25 19.25 26.25 26.25 36.62 36.62 16.13 16.85 16.13 16.85 16.13 16.85 24.88 25.25 32.50 16.13 16.85 16.13 16.85 16.13 16.85 24.88 25.25 mm 279 290 220 267 267 267 267 275 275 274 279 290 275 267 267 267 286 286 286 348 290 286 473 668 489 489 667 667 930 930 411 428 410 428 410 428 632 641 826 410 428 410 428 410 428 632 641 3 S A F E T Y S W I T C H E S 3-22 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 93

Fusible and Non-Fusible Overview Class 3110 / Refer to Catalog 3100CT1602 Double Throw Safety Switches schneider-electric.us ANSI/NFPA 70 are field replaceable (non-fusible) Class R, J, or T fuses—see table for rating) 30–100 A Types DT, DTU (Series F) • Fusible (DT) and non-fusible (DTU) switches available • Manually-operated switch suitable for use in accordance with article 702 of the NEC, • Standards: UL 98, Type KS1, CSA, and NOM • Modular design—switch handle, lock-plate, switch mechanism; line and load bases • UL Listed short circuit current ratings up to 200 kA (using with (fusible) or protected by • Load make/break rated • Horsepower rated • Dual cover interlock • May be padlocked ON (I) or OFF (O) • Lock-off accepts up to three padlocks • Side-opening door • Quick make / quick break mechanism • Meets NEMA requirements as heavy duty switch • Field-installed electrical interlock kits • Field-installed neutral assembly kits (2P and 3P switches) • UL Listed as suitable for use as service equipment • Supplied as standard for switching one load between two power sources, and may be field-converted to switch one power source between two loads. nameplate ampere rating Electrical Code, ANSI / NFPA 70 30 (Series T4), 200–600 A Types 82,000 and 200 A DTU (Series E, A) • Non-fusible • Designed for manual transfer of one load between two power sources • UL Listed switches are suitable for use in accordance with Article 702 of the National • All 82,000 and DTU double throw switches are continuous duty rated for their • The 82,000 and DTU (Series E, A) switches are load make/break rated • UL Listed as suitable for use as service equipment • Horsepower rated only as footnoted Field-Installable Accessories • Neutral • Electrical Interlock • Grounding Terminals S E H C T I W S Y T E F A S 3 30–100 A DT, DTU (Series F) NEMA Type 1 82,000 Line NEMA Type 1 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 3-23 11/10/2017


page 94

Double Throw Safety Switches 240 Volt — Double Throw Safety Switches Class 3110 / Refer to Catalog 3100CT1602 schneider-electric.us Double-Throw Safety Switches Table 3.46: 240 V Double Throw Safety Switches System Amperes Current Series Fusible—2P, 240 Vac—250 Vdc NEMA Type 1 NEMA Type 3R Cat. No. Cat. No. NEMA Type 304 Stainless 4,4X,5 Steel Cat. No. NEMA Type 12 Gasketed Horsepower Ratings [1][2] 240 Vac Std. Max. 250 Vdc[3] Cat. No. 1Ø 3Ø 1Ø 3Ø Fusible—3P, 240 Vac—250 Vdc 3 100 30 60 100 S A F E T Y S W I T C H E S Non-Fusible—2P, 240 Vac—250 Vdc 60 100 30 200 400 Non-Fusible—3P, 240 Vac—250 Vdc 30 60 100 30 200 200 400 600 30 200 400 600 Non-Fusible—4P, 240 Vac F F F F F F T4 E A F F F T4 E E A A T4 E A A DT223 DT223RB DT321 DT322 DT321RB DT322RB DT323 DT323RB DTU222 — DTU223 DTU223RB 92251 [7] 82254 82255 [7] DTU321 DTU322 — DTU224NRB [7] [8] 82255R [7] — — DTU323 DTU323RB 92351 [7] 82354 [7] DTU324N [7] [8] — — DTU324NRB [7] [8] 82355 [7] DTU326 92451 82454 [9] 82455 DTU426 82355R [7] DTU326R — 82454R [9] 82455R DTU426R — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —  7.5 15 [4] 15 30 [4] 20 1.5 [5] 3 [5]  3 [4]  7.5 [4]  3 [5] 10 [5]  7.5 [4] 15 [4] 7.5 [5] 15 [4] 15 [5] 30 [4] — — — — — — H82254 H82255 [7] — — — — H82354 [7] — H82355 [7] — — H82454 [10] H82455 — — — — 15 — — — — — — — — — — — — —  5 10 20 10 [6] 20 [6] — — — — — — — — 10 15 — — — — — — — — 3 [4] —   5 [5] 10 [5] 10 [4] 15 [4]  5 [6] 10 [6] — 15 [5] 30 [4] 20 [6] — 15 15 — 125 — 15 [10] — 125 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 50 — — — 50 600 V Double Throw: page 3-25 Accessories: page 3-26 Application Data: Application Data, page 3-28 Dimensions, 30–100 A (Series F): page 3-30 Dimensions, 30, 200–600 A (Series E, T4, A): page 3-31 The starting current of motors or more than standard horsepower may require the use of fuses with appropriate time delay characteristics. Std.—Using fast acting one time fuses. Max.—Using dual element time delay fuses. For switching dc, use two switching poles. If used on corner grounded delta systems, install neutral and use outer switching pole for ungrounded conductors. See data bulletin 2700DB0202 for additional information. Use outer switching poles. Maximum rating. 240 Vac only. Not Vdc rated. Neutral included with device. 240 Vac, 250 Vdc. [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] Hp rating applies only to H82454. 3-24 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved LineLineLoadLineLineLoadLineLineLoadLineLineLoad11/10/2017


page 95

600 Volt — Double Throw Safety Switches Class 3110 / Refer to Catalog 3100CT1602 Double Throw Safety Switches schneider-electric.us Table 3.47: 600 V Double Throw Safety Switches Double Throw Safety Switches System Amperes Current Series Fusible 3P, 600 Vac—600 Vdc  30  60 100 Non-Fusible 3P, 600 Vac—600 Vdc  30  60 100 200 400 600 Non-Fusible 4P, 600 Vac—600 Vdc  60 100 200 400 600 Non-Fusible 6P, 600 Vac—600 Vdc  60 100 F F F F F F E A A F F E A A F F NEMA Type 1 Cat. No. DT361 DT362 NEMA Type 3R Cat. No. DT361RB DT362RB DT363 DT363RB DTU361 DTU362 DTU361RB DTU362RB NEMA Type 304 Stainless 4,4X,5 Steel Cat. No. NEMA Type 12 Gasketed Cat. No. — — — — — — — — DTU362DS DTU362AWK[22] 240 Vac Horsepower Ratings [11][12] 600 Vac 480 Vac Max 3Ø Std 3Ø [14] Max 3Ø[14] Vdc [13] 250 600 Std 3Ø — — — —  5 [15] 15 [17] 25 [19] 15 [15] 30 [17] 60 [19] Std 3Ø  7.5 15 Max 3Ø 20 50  5 — 15 [16] 30 [18] 50 [20] — — 30 75 — 1Ø [13] [21]  5 10 3Ø [14] [21] 10 20[23] 1Ø [13] [21] 7.5 25 3Ø [14] [21] 20 50 [24] 1Ø [13] [21] 10 30 3Ø [21] 30 60 [25] 100 [26] — — 350 3Ø 60  5 10 15 30 20 50 — — 50 10 — — — 30 S E H C T I W S Y T E F A S 3 DTU363 DTU363RB DTU363DS DTU363AWK[22] 20 40[26] 40 75[26] 40 82344RB [27] 82344 [27] 82345 [30] 82345R[30] DTU366[30] DTU366R[30] 82344DS [27] [28] 82345DS[30] — DTU462[31] DTU462DS [31] H82344 [27] H82345[30] DTU366AWK[30] DTU462AWK[22] [31] — — — 2Ø 20 — — 125 3Ø 20 — — — 2Ø 40 15 [29] — 250 3Ø 50 — — — 2Ø 50 DTU463 [31] Use NEMA Type 12 DTU463DS [31] DTU463AWK[22] [31] 30 40 50 75 50 100 20 50 82444R[30] 82444[30] 82445[30] 82445R[30] DTU466[30] DTU466R[30] — — — — 82444DS[30] — — — — H82444 [22] [31] [32] [30] H82445[30] — DTU662AWK[22] [31] — — — 1Ø — — — 125 3Ø 20 — — — 1Ø — — — 250 3Ø 50 — — — 1Ø — — — 350 3Ø 60 — — 50 10 — — — 30 DTU663AWK[22] [31] — 40 — 75 — 100 20 50 240 V Double Throw: page 3-24 Accessories: page 3-26 Application Data: page 3-28 Dimensions, 30–100 A (Series F): page 3-30 Dimensions, 30, 200–600 A (Series E, T4, A): page 3-31 If used on corner grounded delta systems, install neutral and use outer switching pole for ungrounded conductors.See data bulletin 2700DB0202 for additional information. 480 Vac 1 Phase HP = 3 Std, 7.5 Max 10 Std, 15 Max 480 Vac 1 Phase HP = 5 Std, 20 Max 25 Std, 30 Max 480 Vac 1 Phase HP = 10 Std, 30 Max 40 Std, 50 Max The starting current of motors of more than standard horsepower may require the use of fuses with appropriate time delay characteristics. [11] [12] Std.—Using fast acting one time fuses. Max.—Using dual element time delay fuses. (Non-fusible switches have max rating unless noted.) [13] Use outer switching poles. [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] Maximum HP [22] Complete rating on switch is NEMA Type 3R, 5 or 12. For 3R applications, remove drain screw from bottom endwall. [23] Maximum HP is 15 for corner grounded delta systems. [24] Maximum HP is 30 for corner grounded delta systems. [25] Use 75oC #4 Cu or #2 Al conductors only on DTU362 and DTU362RB. [26] Use 75oC #1 Cu conductors only. [27] [28] Not UL Listed. [29] Standard Hp rating. 250 Vdc maximum. [30] [31] Not suitable for use as service equipment. [32] 480 Vac, 250 Vdc maximum. 480 Vac, 250 Vdc maximum © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 3-25 LineLineLoadLineLineLoadLineLineLoadLineLineLoad11/10/2017


page 96

Double Throw Safety Switches Accessories and Lug Data Class 3110 / Refer to Catalog 3100CT1602 schneider-electric.us Accessories Table 3.48: Electrical Interlocks (For Electrical Interlock Contact Ratings, see Supplemental Digest Section 2) Switch 30–100 A Type DT, DTU (Series F) 200 A Type 82000 and DTU (Series E)[36] 400 A Type 82000 (Series A) 600 A Type DTU (Series A) Field-Installed Electrical Interlock Kit Cat. No.[33] EIK1, EIK2[34][35] [37] EK400DTU2 DS200EK2D Table 3.49: Neutral Assembly Switch 30–100 A Type DT, DTU (Series F) (2- and 3- pole switches only) 30 A (Series T4) (2- and 3-pole switches only) 200 A Type 82000 (Series E) (2 and 3 pole switches only)[39] 200A Type DTU (Series E) 3 400 A Type 82000 (Series A) 600 A Type DTU (Series A) S A F E T Y S W I T C H E S Field-Installed Standard Neutral Kit Cat. No. SN0310 Terminal AWG/kcmil Data (3) 14-1/0 Al/Cu plus (2) 14-6 Al/Cu Svc Ground [38] [38] Factory Installed DT400N DT600NKD (3) 14-4 Al/Cu plus (2) 14-4 Al/Cu Svc Ground (3) 6-300 Al/Cu plus (1) 6-2/0 Al or 10-2/0 Cu Svc Ground (3) 4-300 Al/Cu plus (1) 4-300 Al/Cu Svc Ground (1) 1/0 - 600 Al/Cu or (2) 1/0 - 250 Al/Cu plus (2) 6-300 Al/Cu Svc Ground (6) 250-500 Al/Cu plus (1) 6-250 Al/Cu Svc Ground Field-Installed Copper only Neutral Kit Cat. No. SN0310C — — — — — Terminal AWG/kcmil Data (3) 14-1/0 Cu plus (2) 14-6 Cu Svc Ground — — — — — Table 3.50: Service Grounding Kit—Required for service equipment use Switch 30–60 A Type DT, DTU (Series F) 100 A Type DT, DTU (Series F) 30 A Type 92,000 (Series T4) 200 A Type 82000 and DTU (Series E) 400 A Type 82000 (series A) 600 A Type DTU (Series A) Field-Installed Service Grounding Lug Kit Cat. No. Terminal Data AWG/kcmil Included Included DT30SG DT100SG PKOGTA2 (2 required) DS468GKD (3) 14-2 Al/Cu or (6) 14-10 Al/Cu (3) 14 - 1/0 Al/Cu (4) 14-4 Al/Cu (3) 14–1/0 Al/Cu (4) 10–2/0 Cu or (4) 6–2/0 Al (2) 6–250 Al/Cu [40] Table 3.51: Class R Fuse Kits When properly installed, this kit rejects all but Class R fuses. Kits are available for field installation. For factory installation add suffix CLR to the switch catalog number. Switch Series Number Class R Fuse Kits—240 V (two kits per 3P switch) Class R Fuse Kit Cat. No. 30 A 60 A 100 A F5 F5 F5 Class R Fuse Kits—600 V (two kits per 3P switch) 30 A 60 A 100 A F5 F5 F5 RFK03 RFK06 RFK10 RFK06 RFK06H RFK10 Viewing Windows: Accessory available on 30–100 A DTU switches only. Add the suffix VW to the catalog number. Key Interlock Systems: For factory-installed key interlocks, refer to page 3-17. Phenolic Legend Plate: For factory-installed phenolic legend plates, refer to Supplemental Digest section 2. Lock-ON Provisions: Standard feature on 30–100 A type DT and DTU (Series F), 82,000 (400 A only) and type 92,000 switches. Feature available as factory installed option for Type 82,000 (200 A only) and 200 A DTU (Series E) switches. Add the suffix SPLO to the catalog number. [33] Electrical interlock kit catalog numbers with “1” suffix indicate one normally open and normally closed contact; “2” indicates two normally open and two normally closed contacts. See Table 3.29 Electrical Interlock Kit, page 3-15 for electrical interlock ratings. 30–100 A Type DT, DTU (Series F) switches contain (2) separate switching mechanisms. Each mechanism will accept an electrical interlock. Some applications may therefore require (2) electrical interlocks. [35] Double throw switches 92251, 92351, and 92451 are not available with factory or field installed electrical interlocks. [36] Electrical interlock EK400DTU2 can be added to 200 A, 4-pole Type 82000 switches in the field. [37] Type 82000 and DTU switches are available with electrical interlock factory-installed only. Not UL listed. Electrical interlocks are furnished with 2 N.O./N.C. contacts and are installed in both “ON” positions. To order, add suffix EI to standard switch catalog number. For 200 A Type 82000 and 30 A Type 92000 switches, a neutral assembly is available factory installed on 2P and 3P switches. Not UL Listed. To order, add suffix N to the standard catalog number. Terminated data = (3) 4 - 250 Al / Cu plug, (1) 4 - 250 Al / Cu SVC ground. [34] [38] [39] Neutral assembly catalog number DT200N can be added to 4P, 200 A, Type 82000 switches in the field. [40] 3-26 (3) 6-250 ground lugs are provided as standard. DS468GKD provides an additional (2) 6-250 ground lugs. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 97

Accessories and Lug Data Class 3110 / Refer to Catalog 3100CT1602 schneider-electric.us Double Throw Safety Switches Rainproof Bolt-On Hubs • UL Listed for indoor or rainproof applications • Suitable for use with conduit having ANSI standard taper pipe thread • NEMA Type 3R switches with catalog number ending in RB have a bolt-on closing cap factory installed – Accepts 3/4 in. through 2-1/2 in. bolt-on hubs – No gaskets required • NEMA Type 3R switches with R suffix have blank top endwalls – Accepts 3 in. through 4 in. bolt on hubs – Gaskets provided – Conduit entry holes must be cut in the field Table 3.52: Rainproof Bolt-On Hubs [41] Conduit 1-1/4 1-1/2 Size 3/4 1 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 Closing Cap BCAP B350 B400 B150 B125 B100 B075 B300 B250 B200 Hub Cat. No Watertight Hubs • UL Listed for dusttight and watertight applications • Suitable for use with conduit having ANSI standard taper pipe thread • Watertight hubs are field installed on NEMA Type 4/4X/5 stainless steel and NEMA • Watertight hubs are available in zinc or chrome plated finish • Gaskets provided Table 3.53: Watertight Hubs [42] Type 12/3R and 12K enclosures Conduit Size Standard- Zinc Hub Cat. No Chrome Plated Hub Cat. No. 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 H050 H075 H100 H125 H150 H200 H250 H300 H350 H400 H050CP H075CP H100CP H125CP H150CP H200CP — — — — Watertight Hubs 240 V Double Throw: page 3-24 600 V Double Throw: page 3-25 Application Data: page 3-28 Dimensions, 30–100 A (Series F): page 3-30 Dimensions, 30, 200–600 A (Series E, T4, A): page 3-31 [41] Gaskets are provided on 3 in. and larger hubs. [42] Gaskets are provided. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 3-27 S E H C T I W S Y T E F A S 3 11/10/2017


page 98

Double Throw Safety Switches Application Data Class 3110 / Refer to Catalog 3100CT1602 schneider-electric.us Application Data for Double Throw Safety Switches Situations Requiring Fuses 30–100 A Type DT (Series F): Select DT switches from 240 Volt Double-Throw Safety Switches, page 3-24 and 600 Volt Double Throw Safety Switches, page 3-25 which have provisions for accepting fuses. 30 A, 200–600 A Type 82,000 (Series E, T4, A), all DTU devices: Use the non-fusible double throw switches from 240 Volt Double-Throw Safety Switches, page 3-24 and 600 Volt Double Throw Safety Switches, page 3-25 in conjunction with standard fusible devices, and install them according to diagram 1 or 2, below. Table 3.54: UL Listed Short Circuit Current Ratings Switch Type Amperes Type 92000 Type DT (Series F) Type DTU[45] (Series F) DTU224NRB and DTU324NRB (Series E) DTU324N (Series E) Type 82,000 Type DTU (Series A) 30 A 30–100 A 30–100 A 200 A 200 A All 600 A Voltage Rating 240 V 240 V or 600 V 240 V or 600 V 240 V 240 V 240 V or 600 V 240 V or 600 V UL Listed Fuse Class H, K H, K R, J H or K R, J or T H, K H, K R, J H, J H, K R, J, T Short Circuit Current Rating [43] (A) 10,000 [44]  10,000 200,000  10,000 [44] 200,000  10,000[46]  10,000[46] 100,000 10,000[46] 10,000 100,000 [43] Rating applies to AC only. The UL Listed short circuit current rating for non-fusible switches is based on the switch being used in conjunction with the corresponding fuse type. Evaluation of non-fusible switches in conjunction with molded case circuit breakers has not been performed. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved [44] Any brand of circuit breaker or fuse not exceeding the ampere rating of the switch may be used ahead of a non-fusible safety switch when there is up to 10 kA short circuit current available. [45] The DTU361 and DTU361RB are also suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than (A) 18 kA, 600 Vac maximum when protected by Type FH circuit breaker rated 30 A maximum or (B) 14 kA, 600 Vac maximum when protected by Type FA circuit breaker rated 30 A maximum. [46] Any brand of circuit breaker or fuse not exceeding the ampere rating of the switch may be used ahead of a non-fusible safety switch when there is up to 10 kA short circuit current available. 3-28 Diagram 1Diagram 2LineLineNon-Fusible Double Throw SwitchLoadFusible SingleThrow Switch or Circuit BreakerLineLineLoadFusible Single ThrowSwitch or Circuit BreakerFusible Single ThrowSwitch or Circuit BreakerNon-Fusible Double Throw Switch11/10/2017


page 99

Terminal Lug Data Class 3110 / Refer to Catalog 3100CT1602 schneider-electric.us Double Throw Safety Switches Terminal Lug Data Table 3.55: Terminal Lug Data for Type DT, DTU (Series F) Double Throw Safety Switches [47] Switch Type 30–60 A Type DT, DTU (Series F) 100 A Type DT, DTU (Series F) Wires per Phase 1 1 NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 Wire Range Wire Bending Space Per NEC Table 373-6 AWG/kcmil Lug Standard Wire Range AWG/kcmil Optional Compression Lug Field-Installed Optional Copper Only Lug 12–2 Al or 14–2 Cu 12–2 Al or 14–2 Cu 12–1/0 Al or 14–1/0 Cu 12–1/0 Al or 14–1/0 Cu C10-14, D8-14-SK, or E6-14 [48] VCEL02114S1[49] See Table 3.39 Copper Lug Kits, page 3-18 and Double Lug Kits, page 3- 19 for appropriate kit. Order two kits per switch. Table 3.56: Terminal Lug Data for Types 82,000 and for A and E-Series DTU devices [47] Amperes Wires per Phase 30 A (Series T4) 200 400 600 1 1 1 or 2 2 Wire Range Wire Bending Space Per NEC Table 373-6 AWG/kcmil 14–8 Al/Cu 6–300 Al/Cu 1/0–600 Al/Cu or 1/0–300 Al/Cu 250–500 Al/Cu 240 V Double Throw: page 3-24 600 V Double Throw: page 3-25 Accessories: page 3-26 Dimensions, 30–100 A (Series F): page 3-30 Dimensions, 30, 200–600 A (Series E, T4, A): page 3-31 Lug Wire Range AWG/kcmil Optional Compression Lugs Field-Installed 12–2 Al 14–2 Cu or 6–300 Al/Cu 1/0 - 750 Al/Cu 1/0 - 300 Al/Cu 250–500 Al/Cu or — VCEL030516H1[49] — — S E H C T I W S Y T E F A S 3 30-100 A switches suitable for 60° C or 75° C conductors. 200-600 A switches suitable for 75° C conductors. [47] [48] Order from Thomas and Betts [49] Hubbell Versa-CrimpTM catalog numbers. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 3-29 11/10/2017


page 100

Double Throw Safety Switches Dimensions for Double Throw Safety Switches Class 3110 / Refer to Catalog 3100CT1602 schneider-electric.us Series F Devices 30–100 A Table 3.57: 30–100 A Type DT, DTU (Series F)—Approximate Dimensions Cat. No. DT223 DT223RB DT321 DT321RB DT322 DT322RB DT323 DT323RB DT361 DT361RB DT362 DT362RB DT363 DT363RB DTU222 DTU223 DTU362AWK DTU362DS DTU362RB DTU363 DTU363AWK DTU363DS DTU363RB DTU462 DTU462AWK DTU462DS DTU463 DTU463AWK DTU463DS DTU662AWK DTU663AWK DTU223RB DTU321 DTU322 DTU323 DTU323RB DTU361 DTU361RB DTU362 Series F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 F6 F6 F5 F5 F6 F6 F5 F5 F6 F6 F5 F6 F6 F6 F6 H in. 38.00 38.00 38.00 38.00 38.00 38.00 38.00 38.00 38.00 38.00 38.00 38.00 38.00 38.00 29.94 29.94 30.50 29.94 29.94 29.94 30.50 29.94 30.50 29.94 29.94 30.26 30.50 29.94 29.94 30.26 30.50 29.94 30.26 30.26 29.94 30.26 30.26 30.26 30.26 mm 965 965 965 965 965 965 965 965 965 965 965 965 965 965 760 760 775 760 760 760 775 760 775 760 760 769 775 760 760 769 775 760 769 769 760 769 769 769 769 W in. 9.88 6.87 10.25 10.25 10.25 10.25 9.88 6.87 10.25 10.25 10.25 10.25 9.88 6.87 10.25 10.25 10.25 10.25 10.25 10.25 10.25 10.25 10.25 10.25 10.25 10.25 10.25 10.25 10.25 10.25 10.25 10.25 15.50 15.50 10.25 15.50 15.50 15.50 15.50 mm 251 174 260 260 260 260 251 174 260 260 260 260 251 174 260 260 260 260 260 260 260 260 260 260 260 260 260 260 260 260 260 260 394 394 260 394 394 394 394 W/H in. 11.13 8.12 11.50 11.80 11.50 11.80 11.13 8.12 11.50 11.80 11.50 11.80 11.13 8.12 11.96 11.96 11.96 11.96 11.96 11.96 11.96 11.96 11.96 11.96 11.96 11.50 11.96 11.96 11.96 11.50 11.96 11.96 16.75 16.75 11.96 16.75 16.75 16.75 16.75 mm 283 206 292 300 292 300 283 206 292 300 292 300 283 206 304 304 304 304 304 304 304 304 304 304 304 292 304 304 304 292 304 304 425 425 304 425 425 425 425 D in. 6.75 6.60 6.75 6.60 6.75 6.60 6.75 6.60 6.75 6.60 6.75 6.60 6.75 6.60 6.93 6.93 6.93 6.93 6.93 6.93 6.93 6.93 6.93 6.93 6.93 7.12 6.93 6.93 6.93 7.12 6.93 6.93 7.12 7.12 6.93 7.12 7.12 7.12 7.12 mm 171 168 171 168 171 168 171 168 171 168 171 168 171 168 176 176 176 176 176 176 176 176 176 176 176 181 176 176 176 181 176 176 181 181 176 181 181 181 181 240 V Double Throw: page 3-24 600 V Double Throw: page 3-25 Accessories: page 3-26 Application Data: page 3-28 Dimensions, 30, 200–600 A (Series E, T4, A): page 3-31 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved NEMA Type 1 NEMA Type 3R NEMA Type 4, 4X, 5, and 12 3-30 WW/HDHWW/HDHWW/HDH11/10/2017


page 101

schneider-electric.us Dimensions for Double Throw Safety Switches Class 3110 / Refer to Catalog 3100CT1602 Double Throw Safety Switches Series A, E, and T4 Devices Table 3.58: 200–600 A Types 82,000 and E-Series DTU and 30 A devices— Approximate Dimensions Cat. No. Series DTU224NRB 82254 82254NW 82344 82344RB 82354 92251 82344DS DTU324N DTU324NRB H82344 H82444 H82454 82454 82444 82454R 82444R H82254 H82354 82444DS 82255 82255R 82345 82345DS 82345R 82355 82355R 82445 82445R 82455 82455R H82255 H82345 H82355 H82445 H82455 DTU326 DTU426 DTU366 DTU466 DTU326R DTU426R DTU366R DTU466R DTU366AWK H in. 32.50 30.88 30.88 30.88 32.50 30.88 10.00 30.88 32.50 32.50 32.50 32.50 32.50 38.00 38.00 38.00 38.00 32.50 32.50 38.00 38.50 39.00 38.50 39.00 39.00 38.50 39.00 38.50 39.00 38.50 39.00 39.00 39.00 39.00 39.00 39.00 63.31 63.31 63.31 63.31 63.76 63.76 63.76 63.76 63.76 mm 826 784 784 784 826 784 254 784 826 826 826 826 826 965 965 965 965 826 826 965 978 991 978 991 991 978 991 978 991 978 991 991 991 991 991 991 1608 1608 1608 1608 1619 1619 1619 1619 1619 W in. 20.63 15.75 20.00 20.00 20.63 20.00  8.00 20.00 24.50 24.50 24.50 30.21 30.21 29.62 29.62 29.62 29.62 24.50 24.50 29.62 26.10 26.62 26.10 26.62 26.62 26.10 26.62 30.10 30.21 30.10 30.21 26.62 26.62 26.62 30.21 30.21 23.66 27.00 23.66 27.00 23.66 27.00 23.66 27.00 23.66 mm 524 400 508 508 524 508 203 508 622 622 622 767 767 753 753 753 753 622 622 753 663 676 663 676 676 663 676 765 767 765 767 676 676 676 767 767 601 686 601 686 601 686 601 686 601 W/H in. 24.00 19.63 23.88 23.88 24.00 23.88  9.75 23.88 26.25 26.25 26.25 33.61 33.61 33.02 33.02 33.02 33.02 26.25 26.25 33.02 29.51 30.02 29.51 30.02 30.02 29.51 30.02 33.50 33.61 33.50 33.61 30.02 30.02 30.02 33.61 33.61 24.46 27.80 24.46 27.80 24.46 27.80 24.46 27.80 24.46 mm 610 499 607 607 610 607 248 607 667 667 667 854 854 839 839 839 839 667 667 839 750 763 750 763 763 750 763 851 854 851 854 763 763 763 854 854 621 706 621 706 621 706 621 706 621 D in. 10.63  9.75 11.75 11.75 10.63 11.75  4.75 11.75 10.63 10.63 10.63 10.63 10.63 10.63 10.63 10.63 10.63 10.63 10.63 10.63 10.63 10.63 10.63 10.63 10.63 10.63 10.63 10.63 10.63 10.63 10.63 10.63 10.63 10.63 10.63 10.63  8.88  8.88  8.88  8.88  8.88  8.88  8.88  8.88  8.88 mm 270 248 298 298 270 298 121 298 270 270 270 270 270 270 270 270 270 270 270 270 270 270 270 270 270 270 270 270 270 270 270 270 270 270 270 270 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 226 S E H C T I W S Y T E F A S 3 E1 E1 E1 E2 E1 E1 T4 E1 E1 E1 E2 E2 E3 E3 E3 E3 E3 E3 E3 E3 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 NEMA Type 1 DTU—200 A NEMA Type 3R 240 V Double Throw: page 3-24 600 V Double Throw: page 3-25 Accessories: page 3-26 Application Data: page 3-28 Dimensions, 30–100 A (Series F): page 3-30 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 3-31 WW/HDHWHDW/H11/10/2017


page 102

3 S A F E T Y S W I T C H E S Photovoltaic Disconnect Switches 1000 Vdc Photovoltaic Heavy Duty Disconnect Switch Class 3110 schneider-electric.us 1000 Vdc Photovoltaic Heavy Duty Disconnect Switch Put over 100 years of Schneider Electric’s experience as a global specialist in energy management to work on your photovoltaic (PV) project. The Square D 1000 Vdc disconnect switch is the perfect solution for your 1000 Vdc, PV disconnect applications. It is compact and available in both a 100 and 200 amp non-fusible versions. IEC 60947-1 and UL 98 certified (file E343341). Extended Life Expectancy • Exceeds IEC 60947-3 mechanical endurance requirements by factor of 18 • Exceeds IEC 60947-1 electrical endurance requirements by factor of 10 • Exceeds NEMA KS-1 mechanical endurance requirements by factor of 3. Designed for Harsh PV Environments • NEMA Type 3 and IP63 enclosure • Resists windblown dirt/dust • Exceeds NEMA Type 1, 3R and 12 • Operating range of -37°C to 50°C • Specially designed PV paint reduces solar gain • Preconfigured solar solution • Familiar enclosed safety switch • Suitable for both grounded and Easy to Install ungrounded PV up to 35% over standard grey enclosures design Table 3.59: 1000 Vdc Photovoltaic Heavy Duty Disconnect Switches [1] [2] [3] [4] 3 Pole Grounded [5] System 4 Pole Ungrounded NEMA Type 1, 3R, 12, 3 and IP63 Amperes Cat. No. Height (in.) Dimensions Width (in.) Depth (in.) 100 REHU393IP 22.13 18.63 8.75 200 REHU394IP 22.13 18.63 8.75 100 REHU493IP 29.00 18.63 8.75 200 REHU494IP 29.00 18.63 8.75 Table 3.60: 200 A Enclosed Switch—Approximate Dimensions Switch 100 A 200 A H in. 21.75 29.00 mm 552 737 W in. 18.86 18.86 mm 479 479 D in.  8.75  8.75 mm 197 197 200 A Enclosed Switch Dimensions Order EIK1PV for single contact field-installed kit. Order EIK2PV for double contact field-installed kit. Terminal block accommodates (2) 250 max Cu or (1) 1/0 max Cu wiring; Order SN20CPV for field-installed kit. Order REHGNDKIT for field installable ground lug kit. Terminal blocks standard with 3 pole switches; accommodates (2) 1/0 max Al/Cu or (2) 6 max Al/Cu wiring. [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] 3-32 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 103

Table of Contents Section 4 Power Monitoring and Control 4-2 PowerLogic™ Energy and Power Management Systems Power Monitoring Software StruxureWare Power Monitoring Expert Software StruxureWare PowerSCADA Expert Power Quality Meters — ION8650 ION8650 Power and Energy Meters ION7550 and ION7650 Power and Energy Meters Series 4000 Circuit Monitor PowerLogic ION7400 Utility Feeder Meter PowerLogic PM8000 Power and Energy Meters Power Quality Meter Selection Power and Energy Meters — PM5000 Series Series 5000 Power Meters ION6200 Power and Energy Meter Series 3500 Energy and Power Meter PowerLogic PM3000 Power and Energy Meters iEM3000 Energy Meters Power and Energy Meter Selection PowerLogic Energy Meter PowerLogic EM4200 Enercept Meter PowerLogic Enercept™ Meter Multi Circuit Energy Meters PowerLogic Branch Circuit Power Meter PowerLogic Multi-Circuit Meter PowerLogic Submeter Display Communications Com’X Data Loggers and Energy Servers Link150 Ethernet Gateway Engineering Services Integration and Equipment System Integration Factory Assembled Equipment PowerLogic High Density Metering Support Services Sepam Digital Protective Relays Arc Flash Protection and Mitigation Systems ReactiVar™ Reactive Power Compensation and Harmonic Mitigation Low Voltage Fixed Capacitors LV Standard Automatic Capacitor Banks LV Anti-Resonant and Filtering Automatic Capacitor Banks Current Transformer Selection Information LV Transient Free Reactive Compensation Capacitor Banks Medium Voltage Fixed Capacitors Medium Voltage Metal Enclosed Capacitor Systems High Voltage Reactive Power Compensation Systems AccuSine™ PCS+ Active Harmonic Filter PFV+ Active Harmonic Filter Current Transformers Hybrid VAR Compensator (HVC) VarSet Low-Voltage Capacitor Banks © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved I D N A G N R O T I N O M R E W O P L O R T N O C 4 4-4 4-4 4-6 4-7 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-10 4-11 4-12 4-14 4-14 4-14 4-15 4-16 4-17 4-19 4-20 4-20 4-21 4-22 4-23 4-26 4-26 4-27 4-27 4-28 4-29 4-31 4-31 4-31 4-33 4-34 4-35 4-37 4-39 4-39 4-40 4-41 4-41 4-42 4-42 4-43 4-44 4-44 4-45 4-45 4-46 4-47 4-48 4-49 4-1 ION8650 Power and Energy MetersSepam Series 80Vamp 321 Arc Flash Protection and MitigationReactiVar Low VoltageAutomatic Capacitor BankAccuSine PCS+AccuSine PFV+CM400T with VFD DisplayStruxureWare Power MonitoringExpert SoftwareION7550 and ION7650Power and Energy MetersPowerLogic PM8000Power and Energy MetersEthernet GatewaysCom’X Data Loggersand Energy ServersVarSet Low-Voltage Capacitor Banks11/10/2017


page 104

PowerLogic™ Energy and Power Management Systems Introduction schneider-electric.us Join the Next Generation of Power and Energy Management More performance. More intelligence. More integration. Our industry-leading systems offer the latest in technological advancements to help you simultaneously maximize reliability, availability, and quality, as well as improve operational and cost efficiency for your entire enterprise. You’ll benefit from: • Holistic approach Our solutions aggregate data from all your energy assets, including power, building, and process systems, into one user-friendly view so you can make more informed decisions and address problems efficiently. • Actionable intelligence • Proactive capabilities Our solutions provide real-time and historical information to multiple stakeholders anywhere in the world, including easy-to-use analytics, alarms and controls, as well as regulatory compliance and financial reporting. Our sophisticated products help you analyze and identify future needs so you can develop a long-term plan for things like energy purchasing, demand response, load changes, and equipment maintenance or replacement. 4 C O N T R O L P O W E R M O N I T O R N G A N D I Don’t settle for fragmented views and unreliable data Maximize performance with a fully integrated power management solution You’ll benefit from our decades of expertise in electrical system management, hardware and software development, and integration. Our solutions are designed for compatibility so your installation is both optimized and more efficient. Our systems are modular and interoperable for better continuity of supply, enhanced safety for people and equipment, and more effective monitoring and control. Plus, our full range of in-person and remote services keep your system operating at peak performance. 4-2 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Advanced Power ManagementSuperior Energy ManagementDelivers power quality, availability, and reliabilityDelivers cost and operational efficiencies11/10/2017


page 105

Introduction schneider-electric.us PowerLogic™ Energy and Power Management Systems Application Data Presentment & Management Data Acquisition, Alarms & Monitoring Enterprise Data Centers; Industrial Buildings, Property Management, Utilities Online Energy Analysis Utilities Supervisory Control & Data Acquisition Water/Wastewater, Heavy Process Industry, Data Centers, Critical Power Power Monitoring System Industrial, large commercial buildings, Military Bases, Healthcare • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • see Engineering Services, page 4-29 see Engineering Services, page 4-29 see Engineering Services, page 4-29 Cost Management Ensure Power Quality Network Management Engineering Services Meter Application Automatic Meter Reading Revenue Metering WAGES Utility Pulses Sub-billing Measurement & Verification Cost Allocation & Utility Billing Energy Usage Analysis Procurement Optimization Allocate Energy Costs Interval Benchmarking & Profiling Total Load Aggregation Energy Efficiency Emissions Tracking Power Factor Correction Peak Demand Reduction Demand Response & Curtailment Improve Maintenance Practices Commissioning & Troubleshooting Equipment Monitoring: transformers, MCCs, switchgear, switchboards, circuit breaker status, protective equipment, capacitors, generators, panelboards, PDU, UPS, etc. Facility Planning Identify Equipment Capacity Determine Transformer Stress Equipment Asset Optimization Improve Efficiency Balance Circuit Loading Balance Generator Usage Optimize Chiller & Mechanical Equipment System Monitoring & Analysis Transient Voltage Detection Sag/Swell Disturbance Monitoring Power Quality & Harmonic Analysis Power Quality Compliance Alarm & System Diagnositics Electrical Distribution Alarm & Event Analysis Waveform capture viewing Remote alarm notification Energy Services Total Energy Control Services Peak Shaving/Generator Control Load Management/ Shedding WAGES Advanced Reliability Services Auto Throw Over (ATO) Emergency Power Supply System Test Reporting Sequence of Events Recording (1ms time/ stamp) GPS Time Stamping Power System Control Network Protection Consulting Services System Studies (SC/TCC/ Arc Flash) Power System Assessments © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • see Engineering Services, page 4-29 Tenant Submetering Commercial Buildings, Government Buildings, Military Bases • • • • • • • • • I D N A G N R O T I N O M R E W O P L O R T N O C 4 see Engineering Services, page 4-29 see Engineering Services, page 4-29 4-3 11/10/2017


page 106

PowerLogic™ Energy and Power Management Systems Power Monitoring Software schneider-electric.us • Manage power quality, availability, and reliability • Optimize use of your electrical and infrastructure • Drive energy efficiency initiatives and improve assets financial performance 4 C O N T R O L P O W E R M O N I T O R N G A N D I Modular Design: Power Monitoring Expert also features many application modules that add specific functionality to extend the base platform. Available modules include • Energy Analysis • UPS Performance • Breaker Performance • Energy Cost Allocation & Billing • Automated Generator Testing ISO50001 operations quickly energy related costs optimize performance StruxureWare Power Monitoring Expert Software StruxureWare Power Monitoring Expert StruxureWare™ Power Monitoring Expert is an integrated power & energy management software platform that enables you to optimize your power distribution infrastructure, maximize operational efficiency, and improve your bottom-line performance. This complete, interoperable, and scalable solution will help you • Maximize facility uptime and reliability • Analyze and mitigate power quality related issues • Track and optimize equipment performance • Analyze energy consumption, uncover savings opportunities and accurately allocate • Enable compliance with power quality and energy standards such as ANSI/IEEE and Typical Applications • Monitor the facility electrical network to verify reliable operation and proactively • Maximize facility uptime by improving response to power-related events and restore • Perform root cause analysis to power-related disturbances through sequence of • Analyze and isolate the source of power quality problems • Analyze total energy use from all electrical and piped utilities identify waste and • Improve sustainability performance with greenhouse gas emissions tracking and • Identify billing discrepancies and avoid contract penalties by validating utility bills to • Allocate energy costs to departments to drive accountability, awareness and support • Reduce peak demand and power factor penalties with monitoring, alerts, and • Negotiate rates with energy suppliers and enable participation in demand response • Confirm return on investment for infrastructure improvements with advanced reporting • Optimize existing infrastructure capacity and avoid over-building • Prolong asset life with proactive maintenance and optimization Functional Components: • Power quality analytics energy action programs like ISO50001 industry compliance reporting corrective actions programs and analysis events reporting verify accuracy reduce cost – Monitor events and waveform plotting system-wide – Monitor harmonics, K-factor, crest factor, symmetrical components – Diagnose and isolate PQ problems to increase reliability – Automatically detect and report on voltage disturbances – Quickly evaluate PQ events plotted on standard ITIC curve • Customized real-time monitoring – Access real-time status of sensitive power distribution components – Trend chart tools with customized views to reveal patterns and anomalies quickly • Data analytics and visualization – Smart dashboards with configurable presentation widgets and kiosk options – Powerful graphics templates and libraries – Automated power quality reports and waveform analysis tools – Comprehensive templates for energy and power reporting, with flexible report distribution options • Alarm and event management cause analyses • Robust technical infrastructure – Powerful alarm triggering, notification, and analysis tools – Accurate time-stamped sequence of events reporting for power system event root – Solid data acquisition architecture including ready-to-use communications drivers with many electrical distribution devices – Fully compatible with current operating systems and databases – Interoperable with integration to other systems and devices through open data and protocol standards (ODBC, OPC, XML, Modbus, Web/SOAP Services) – Scalable to thousands of metered points through flexible deployment options 4-4 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 107

Power Monitoring Software PowerLogic™ Energy and Power Management Systems schneider-electric.us Segment Editions: Power Monitoring Expert also features segment-specific solutions for data centers, healthcare, industry and buildings, delivering pre-engineered functionality customized to meet your needs. unplanned outages StruxureWare Power Monitoring Expert Data Center Edition • Decrease the number and duration of • Manage power capacity and reduncancy • Improve effectiveness of maintenance • Improve power distribution efficiency • Support energy cost allocation and billing activities StruxureWare Power Monitoring Expert Data Healthcare Edition • Improve energy availability • Manage power system reliability • Perform power quality analysis and • Support energy efficiency initiatives to management improve financial performance StruxureWare Power Monitoring Expert Data Buildings Edition • Ensure electrical system health • Optimize operational efficiency • Gain energy insight • Improve energy accountability Description Power Monitoring Expert Standard Edition BASE license (includes 1 Engineering Client) Power Monitoring Expert Data Center Edition BASE license (includes 1 Engineering Client) Power Monitoring Expert Healthcare Edition BASE license (includes 1 Engineering Client) Power Monitoring Expert Buildings Edition BASE license (includes 1 Engineering Client) 5 Device Pack for Power Monitoring Expert software 25 Device Pack for Power Monitoring Expert software 50 Device Pack for Power Monitoring Expert software 100 Device Pack for Power Monitoring Expert software 200 Device Pack for Power Monitoring Expert software Unlimited Devices for Power Monitoring Expert software Engineering Client for Power Monitoring Expert software Web Client for Power Monitoring Expert software Unlimited Engineering and Web Clients for Power Monitoring Expert software Event Notification Module for Power Monitoring Expert software Cost Allocation & Billing Module for Power Monitoring Expert software Breaker Performance Module for Power Monitoring Expert software Energy Analysis Module for Power Monitoring Expert software Energy Awareness Module for Power Monitoring Expert software UPS Performance Module for Power Monitoring Expert software EPSS Module for Power Monitoring Expert software (HealthCare) Generator Performance Module for Power Monitoring Expert software (Data Centers) IT Billing Module for Power Monitoring Expert software (Data Centers) Power Capacity Module for Power Monitoring Expert software (Data Centers) Power Efficiency Module for Power Monitoring Expert software (Data Centers) SQL Server 2012 License - 2 COREs Catalog Number PSWSANCZZSPEZZ PSWSDNCZZSPEZZ PSWSHNCZZSPEZZ PSWSBNCZZSPEZZ PSWDANCZZNPEZZ PSWDBNCZZNPEZZ PSWDCNCZZNPEZZ PSWDDNCZZNPEZZ PSWDFNCZZNPEZZ PSWDZNCZZSPEZZ PSWCENCZZNPEZZ PSWCWNCZZNPEZZ PSWCZNCZZSPEZZ PSWMVNCZZSPEZZ PSWMBNCZZSPEZZ PSWMXNCZZSPEZZ PSWMZNCZZSPEZZ PSWMYNCZZSPEZZ PSWMUNCZZSPEZZ PSWMENCZZSPEZZ PSWMGNCZZSPEZZ PSWMTNCZZSPEZZ PSWMPNCZZSPEZZ PSWMNNCZZSPEZZ IE7SQLCZSNPEZZ © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 4-5 I D N A G N R O T I N O M R E W O P L O R T N O C 4 11/10/2017


page 108

PowerLogic™ Energy and Power Management Systems Power Monitoring Software schneider-electric.us use StruxureWare PowerSCADA Expert • Increase uptime of power systems • Provides accurate and actionable information in real time • Highlights issues, remediation, and their impacts StruxureWare™ PowerSCADA Expert is electrical distribution network monitoring and control software that provides vital tools to enhance your power system reliability and operational efficiency. Its powerful architecture combines our proven expertise in electrical distribution with the speed and control of high-performance SCADA to reduce outages while increasing power system efficiency. An excellent fit for virtually every industry and application, PowerSCADA Expert delivers exceptional scalability so that it can grow to match your changing business requirements while driving down the total cost of ownership. Components interact seamlessly across Schneider Electric’s extensive product portfolio and third party suppliers. • Dynamic electrical network view to improve production, reduce costs and boost safety • Highly reliable monitoring and control tailored to unique electrical network needs • Detailed electrical information across the multi-vendor network • Fast issue resolution and reporting to improve electrical network quality and energy • Report KPIs, energy costs, and filtered alarming • Real-time visualization of the network • Disturbance waveform views for analysis and control for remediation For quoting and pricing, please contact PowerLogic Sales at 615-287-3535. PowerLogic ION EEM Software PowerLogic™ ION EEM is a complete Enterprise Energy and Sustainability Management System (EESMS) to provide energy data warehousing capabilities, integrating data from multiple sites and disparate systems. For example, the EESMS will be capable of integrating data from building and process systems, power management systems, energy billing and pricing systems, business and accounting systems, weather services, spot-market energy pricing feeds etc. to facilitate green economic policies (such as reducing CO2 emissions), energy conservation measures, or sustainability targets. Typical applications: • Display visually rich energy intelligence dashboards to drive energy behavior change. • Allocate costs and usage across facilities, departments, and other organizational units. • Benchmark, measure and verify energy key performance indicators for performance • Track and manage environmental impact carbon/GHG emissions and carbon inventories (by source, scope and pollutant), using appropriate global emission factors. versus target. savings and return on investments. financial impact prior to implementation. • Reduce peak demand surcharges and power factor penalties. • Identify billing discrepancies. • Model energy accurately using statistical regression techniques. • Forecast energy needs and compare rates for efficient procurement. • Facilitate participation in load curtailment programs. • Track performance of energy and sustainability programs, and assess cumulative • Manage energy and sustainability projects and scenarios and assess potential • Store and manage energy invoices in a central repository. Key features: • True enterprise-level software architecture: data quality assurance, data warehouse, • Web portal: personalized dashboards, key performance indicators, charts, trends, • Reporting: rich and customized content, support for complex data and graphics, • Trending: advanced visualization, dimensional analysis, prediction, statistical rollups • Modeling: regression analysis, normalization, correlation, integration of all relevant • Billing: built-in rate engine and rate wizard • Power quality analysis: wide-area event monitoring, classification, filtering, correlation • Alarms and events: triggering on complex conditions, notification, logging • Integration: data acquisition systems, weather and pricing feeds, other enterprise • Greenhouse Gas Emissions (CO2) Reporting For quoting and pricing, please contact PowerLogic Sales at 615-287-3535. applications (e.g. BAC, ERP) drivers and contextual data web framework real-time conditions scheduled distribution Personalized dashboards help management and operations personnel monitor all aspects of energy use Produce aggregate billing, load profile, cost allocation, power quality, forecasting or budget reports to help inform stakeholders and track results against goals. 4-6 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 109

Power Quality Meters — ION8650 PowerLogic™ Energy and Power Management Systems schneider-electric.us symmetrical components metering standards including ANSI C12.20 0.2 and Class 2, 10, & 20 ION8650 Power and Energy Meters The web-enabled PowerLogic ION8650 is used to monitor electric distribution networks, service entrances and substations. It enables businesses to manage complex energy supply contracts that include power quality guarantees. Low-range current accuracy makes it ideal for independent power producers and cogeneration applications that require the accurate bi-directional measurement of energy. It is well suited to load curtailment, equipment monitoring and control and energy pulsing and totalization applications. Integrate it with Power Management Software applications. ION8650 Power and Energy Meter Features Feature set C includes: • 9S, 35S, 36S socket and switchboard cases • True RMS 3-phase voltage, current, power and meets stringent ANSI revenue • Power quality: sag/swell, individual, even, odd, total harmonics to the 31st and • 32MB log/event memory, min/max for any parameter, historical logs up to 80 channels, • Transformer/line loss compensation and Instrument transformer correction • Communications: Ethernet, Serial, Modem, Internet and Ethernet to serial gateway and ION, DNP 3.0, Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP, MV-90 protocols, IEC 61850 • C model limited to IR + 2 other ports at one time. Ports can be enabled/disabled by • Dial-out capability when memory is near full • Multi-user, multi-level security with control and customized access to sensitive data for • Data push capability through SMTP (email) • 65 setpoints — math, logic, trig, log, linearization formulas • Password protection and anti-tamper seal protection • Built-in I/O: 4 KYZ digital outs and 3 form A digital ins, 4 KYZ digital outs and 1 form A digital out and 1 form A digital in, an optional external I/O expander provides additional I/O timestamp resolution to 0.001 seconds and GPS time synchronization user up to 50 users Feature set B adds the following to feature set C: • Harmonics—individual, total even, total odd up to the 63rd • 64MB standard memory • Historical logs up to 320 channels • Modbus RTU Master on serial ports • Cycle setpoint minimum response time Feature set A adds the following to feature sets C and B: • Waveform capture up to 1024 samples/cycle, PQ compliance monitoring, flicker to EN50160 Ed2, IEC 61000-4-7/4-15 (also configurable to IEEE519 2014, IEEE159, SEMI) CBEMA/ITIC • Transient detection to 6517µs at 60Hz; • Harmonics: magnitude, phase and inter-harmonics to the 50th • 128MB standard memory • Max 96 cycles of waveform logs and 800 channels of historical logs Table 4.1: Typical PowerLogic ION8650 Power and Energy Meter Ordering Configurations Description ION8650, feature set A, 9S socket base, 5 A nominal current inputs, 10MB memory, 127–177 Vac, 60 Hz, communications card with: 10BaseT, RS-232/485, RS-485, Optical port, 4 Digital Outputs, 3 Digital Inputs ION8650, feature set A, 35S socket base, 5 A nominal current inputs, 10MB memory, 120–480 Vac, 60 Hz, communications card with: 10Base T, RS-232/485, RS-485, Optical port, 4 Digital Outputs, 3 Digital Inputs ION8650, feature set C, 9S socket base, 5 A nominal current inputs, 2MB memory, 120–277 Vac, 60 Hz, communications card with: RS-232/ 485, RS-485, Optical port, 4 Digital Outputs, 3 Digital Inputs ION8650, feature set C, 35S socket base, 5 A nominal current inputs, 2MB memory, 120–277 Vac, 60 Hz, communications card with: RS-232/ 485, RS-485, Optical port, 4 Digital Outputs, 3 Digital Inputs Catalog No. S8650A0C0E6E1B0A S8650A1C0E6E1B0A S8650C0C0E6A0B0A S8650C1C0E6A0B0A © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 4-7 I D N A G N R O T I N O M R E W O P L O R T N O C 4 11/10/2017


page 110

PowerLogic™ Energy and Power Management Systems Power Quality Meters — ION7550 / ION7650 schneider-electric.us ION7550 and ION7650 Power and Energy Meters Used at key distribution points and sensitive loads, the web-enabled PowerLogic ION7550 and PowerLogic ION7650 meters combine a wealth of advanced features from power quality analysis capabilities, revenue accuracy and multiple communications options, through web compatibility, and control capabilities. Both are compatible with PowerLogic Power Management Software applications and can be integrated with other energy management or building control systems through multiple communication channels and protocols. The meters are ideal for compliance monitoring, disturbance analysis, cost allocation and billing, demand and power factor control and equipment monitoring and control. The meters have a high visibility, adjustable front panel display that can depict TOU, harmonics, event logs, phasers, and instantaneous power parameters. They meet stringent ANSI C12.20 0.2, Class 10 & 20 revenue metering standards. PowerLogic ION7550 and ION7650 Power and Energy Meter Features: • 3.5” x 4.5” (87 x 112 mm) backlit LCD display • True RMS 3-phase voltage, current, and power that meets stringent ANSI C12.20 0.2, • Power quality: sag/swell, harmonics - individual, even, odd, total to the 63rd, waveform • 5MB log/event memory (10MB optional), waveform logging up to 96 cycles, up to 800 channels historical, min/max, timestamp resolution to 0.001 seconds, GPS time synchronization and historical trends through front panel capture at 256 samples/cycle • Communications: fiber, Ethernet, serial, internal modem, optical port, and a gateway functionality, ION, DNP 3.0, Modbus RTU - master & slave, Modbus TCP, MV-90, and IEC 61850. IEC 61850 only available with Ethernet options Class 2, 10, & 20 up to 16 users math, logic, trig, log, linearization formulas • Dial-out capability when memory is near full • Data push capability through SMTP (email) • Multi-user, multi-level security with control and customized access to sensitive data for • 65 configurable 1/2 cycle setpoints for single, multi-condition and dial out on alarm and • Password protection and anti-tamper seal protection enhance meter security • Extensive standard I/O includes: 8 digital inputs, 4 digital outputs and 3 onboard relays • Disturbance direction detection determines disturbance location and direction relative • Alarm setpoint learning analyzes the circuit and recommends optimum alarm setpoints • Customize metering or analysis functions at your work station, without hard wiring via The ION7650 has all the features of the ION7550 and adds: • Waveform capture up to 1024 samples/cycle • Transient detection to 17µs at 60Hz • Harmonics: magnitude, phase and inter-harmonics to the 40th • Flicker to EN50160 and IEC 61000-4-7/4-15 (also configurable for IEEE 519-1992, • Symmetrical components • Power quality measurements per IEC 61000-4-30 Class A, Ed. 2 to minimize nuisance or missed alarms. IEEE159, SEMI), plus CBEMA/ITIC ION Frameworks technology. to the meter. 4 C O N T R O L P O W E R M O N I T O R N G A N D I Table 4.2: Typical PowerLogic ION7550/7650 Power and Energy Meter Ordering Configurations Description Typical PowerLogic ION7550 Power and Energy Meter Ordering Configurations Integrated display, with 256 samples/cycle, 5 MB logging memory, 5 A inputs, standard power supply, standard comms. (1 RS232/RS485 port, 1 RS485, 1 Type 2 optical port) plus Ethernet, standard I/O Integrated display, with 256 samples/cycle, 5 MB logging memory, 5 A inputs, standard power supply, standard comms. (1 RS232/RS485 port, 1 RS485, 1 Type 2 optical port), standard I/O Typical PowerLogic ION7650 Power and Energy Meter Ordering Configurations Integrated display, with 1024 samples/cycle, 10 MB logging memory, 5 A inputs, standard power supply, standard comms. (1 RS232/RS485 port, 1 RS485, 1 Type 2 optical port) plus Ethernet, standard I/O, EN50160 compliance monitoring Integrated display, with 512 samples/cycle, 5 MB logging memory, 5 A inputs, standard power supply, standard comms. (1 RS232/RS485 port, 1 RS485, 1 Type 2 optical port) plus Ethernet, standard I/O Integrated display, with 512 samples/cycle, 5 MB logging memory, 5 A inputs, standard power supply, standard comms. (1 RS232/RS485 port, 1 RS485, 1 Type 2 optical port) plus Ethernet and 56k modem, standard I/O Integrated display, with 512 samples/cycle, 5 MB logging memory, 5 A inputs, standard power supply, standard comms. (1 RS232/RS485 port, 1 RS485, 1 Type 2 optical port), standard I/O Integrated display, with 1024 samples/cycle, 10 MB logging memory, 5 A inputs, standard power supply, standard comms. (1 RS232/RS485 port, 1 RS485, 1 Type 2 optical port) plus Ethernet, standard I/O Catalog No. S7550A0C0B6E0A0A S7550A0C0B6A0A0A S7650B1C0B6E0A0E S7650A0C0B6E0A0A S7650A0C0B6C1A0A S7650A0C0B6A0A0A S7650B1C0B6E0A0A NOTE: Please refer to www.schneider-electric.us for the most complete and up-to- date list of feature availability. Some features are optional. 4-8 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 111

Power Quality Meters — CM4000T PowerLogic™ Energy and Power Management Systems schneider-electric.us CM4000T with VFD Display pages to 4 days in advance Series 4000 Circuit Monitor The award winning, Web-enabled PowerLogic Series 4000 Circuit Monitor (CM4000T) is the most advanced permanently mounted circuit monitor in the industry today. Designed for critical power and large energy users who cannot afford to be shut down, the CM4000T provides the ability to monitor, troubleshoot and preempt power quality problems. Transients (disturbances lasting less than one cycle) are particularly difficult to detect, due to their short duration. The CM4000T detects and captures oscillatory and impulsive transients (up to 10,000V peak, line-to-line at 5 MHz per channel) as short as one microsecond in duration. The CM4000T automatically performs a high-speed transient waveform capture and a longer disturbance capture to show the conditions surrounding an event. The CM4000T maintains a complete historical record of the number of transients per phase, along with the magnitude, duration and time of occurrence of each. It also performs a stress calculation to determine the circuits that have received the greatest stress from transient overvoltages. • Waveform capture with up to 512 samples/cycle • Built-in Trending and Forecasting functionality allows you to forecast energy usage up • Sag/Swell disturbance monitoring • Two option card slots for field installable cards • Optional field installable Ethernet communications card with standard and custom web • Alarm Setpoint Learning feature allowing optimum threshold setting (patent pending) • Multiple alarms: standard, digital, Boolean, high-speed, and disturbance alarms • Waveshape alarm monitoring • High speed transient voltage detection at 5 MHz per channel with field installable CVMT current/voltage module • True RMS Metering through the 255th harmonic • Extended waveform capture (up to 110 seconds) • Field installable Digital/Analog I/O cards and flexible I/O extender modules • Harmonic powerflows up to the 40th harmonic • Standard KYZ pulse output • Standard 32 MB of non-volatile memory • Integrated power quality standards including EN50160, IEC 61000-4-15 (Flicker) • Sequence of events recording using GPS synchronization technology • Oscillatory transient detection and recording • UL Listed, CSA Approved, NOM Approved, FCC compliant PowerLogic Series 4000 Circuit Monitor Optional Displays • High visibility remote VF (vacuum fluorescence) display • Displays metering data, min/max values, alarms, inputs • Remote LC (liquid crystal) display with backlighting also available • Optional user configurable display screens Table 4.3: Series 4000 Circuit Monitors Description Catalog No. Series 4000 Circuit Monitors Instrumentation, On-board Data Logging, Waveform Capture, Disturbance Recording, Configurable I/O, 0.04% Accuracy, Impulsive Transient Detection and Flicker (IEC 61000-4-15) Series 4000 Circuit Monitor Accessories Field installable I/O card with 3 relay outputs, 1 pulse output (KYZ) and 4 status inputs I/O Extender module with 4 DC status inputs, 2 DC digital outputs, 1 analog input and 1 analog output I/O Extender module with 4 status inputs and 4 analog inputs (4–20 mA) I/O Extender module with 8 status inputs I/O Extender module with no pre-installed I/O [1] Ethernet Communications Card; 100 MB Fiber or 10/100 MB UTP Ethernet port and 1 RS-485 master port Current/Voltage module with high speed transient detection 4-line x 20—character liquid crystal display with backlighting 4-line x 20—character vacuum fluorescent display with proximity sensor 4 foot display cable 12 foot display cable 30 foot display cable CM4000T IOC44 IOX2411 IOX0404 IOX08 IOX ECC21 CVMT CMDLC CMDVF CAB4 CAB12 CAB30 ECC21 IOC44 I/O Card I D N A G N R O T I N O M R E W O P L O R T N O C 4 Table 4.4: SER Time Synchronization Description PowerLogic Satellite Time System, Circuit Monitor and SEPAM GPS Time Synchronization, 100 microsecond accuracy Satellite Time Reference Module CyTime Sequence of Events Recorder, 24 Vdc power / 24 Vdc inputs, 32 inputs, web server SER 3200 EZ connector for IRIG-B signal Smart Antenna Module Smart Antenna Module Interface Cable—200 FT Power Supply, 24DC/50W, DIN-mountable Catalog No. STS3000 STRM 9788SER3200 9788EZCIRIGB SAM SAIF200 PS080 [1] Contact your nearest Square D/Schneider Electric sales office for additional I/O options. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 4-9 11/10/2017


page 112

PowerLogic™ Energy and Power Management Systems Power Quality Meters — ION7400 schneider-electric.us PowerLogic ION7400 Utility Feeder Meter The PowerLogic ION7400 utility feeder meter is a highly accurate, extremely reliable power and energy meter with unmatched flexibility and usability. The meter combines accurate 3-phase energy and power measurements with data logging, power quality analysis, alarming and I/O capabilities not typically available in such a compact meter. The panel or DIN mounted ION7400 meter is flexible enough to fit into a utility’s existing billing or SCADA system, providing industry leading cost management (Class 0.2) and network management (Class S PQ) data. It is compliant with stringent international standards that guarantee their metering accuracy and power quality measurements. Ideal for installations that are responsible for maintaining the operation and profitability of a facility. PowerLogic ION7400 Applications and benefits • Maximize profits by providing the highest output possible with the least amount of risk to availability. systems and equipment. • Optimize availability and reliability of electrical • Monitor power quality (PQ) for compliance and to • Meters fully supported by StruxureWare Power prevent problems. Monitoring Expert and PowerSCADA Expert Software. Main Characteristics • Precision metering • PQ compliance reporting and basic PQ analysis • Used with StruxureWare Power Monitoring Expert software, provides detailed PQ reporting across entire network certified manufacturing. • Onboard data and event logging • Alarming and control • Excellent quality: ISO 9001 and ISO 14000 Table 4.5: PowerLogic ION7400 Meters Description ION7400 Panel mount meter (integrated display with optical port and 2 energy pulse LEDs) DIN rail mount - utility meter base METSEION7400 Catalog Number METSEION7403 Table 4.6: PowerLogic ION7400 Accessories Description Catalog Number Remote display, 3 metre cable, mounting hardware for 30mm hole (nut & centering pin), mounting hardware for DIN96 cutout (92x92mm) adapter plate Digital I/O module (6 digital inputs & 2 relay outputs) Analog I/O module (4 analog inputs & 2 analog outputs) Display Cable, 10 meters METSECAB10 METSEPM89RD96 METSEPM89M2600 METSEPM89M0024 4-10 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 113

Power Quality Meters — PM8000 PowerLogic™ Energy and Power Management Systems schneider-electric.us PowerLogic ION7400 showing active alarms. PowerLogic ION7400 with harmonics display. PowerLogic ION7400 with phasor display. Table 4.7: PowerLogic ION7400 Features Description General Use on LV and MV systems Current accuracy (5A Nominal) Voltage accuracy (90-690 V AC L-L, 50, 60, 400 Hz) Active energy accuracy Number of samples/cycle or sample frequency Instantaneous rms values Current, voltage, frequency Active, reactive, apparent power Power factor Current measurement range (autoranging) Energy values Active, reactive, apparent energy Settable accumulation modes Demand values Current Active, reactive, apparent power Predicted active, reactive, apparent power Synchronisation of the measurement window Setting of calculation mode Power quality measurements Harmonic distortion Total and per phase Total and per phase Present and max. values Present and max. values Block, sliding Current and voltage Via front panel and web page Via StruxurWare software 1/2 cycle data Individual harmonics Waveform capture Detection of voltage swells and sags Flicker Fast acquistion EN 50160 compliance checking Customizable data outputs (using logic and math functions) Data recording Min/max of instantaneous values Data logs Event logs Trending/forecasting SER (Sequence of event recording) Time stamping GPS synchronization (+/- 1 ms) Memory (in Mbytes) Display and I/O Front panel display 89 mm (3.5 in.) TFT Wiring self-test Pulse output Digital Analogue Digital or analogue outputs (max, including pulse output) ION7400 ■ 0.1 % reading 0.1 % reading 0.2 % 256 ■ ■ ■ 0.05 - 10A ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 63 127 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 512 10 MB for Frameworks ■ ■ 1 6 in / 2 out 4 in / 2 out 1 digital 8 relay 8 analog I D N A G N R O T I N O M R E W O P L O R T N O C Communication RS 485 port 10/100BaseTX Serial port (Modbus, ION, DNP3) Ethernet port (Modbus/TCP, ION TCP, DNP3 TCP, IEC 61850 [2]) ANSI C12.19 Optical port Standards IEC 61000-4-30, IEC 61000-4-7, IEC 61000-4-15, IEC 61326-1, ANSI C12.20, IEC 62052-11, IEC 62053-22, CLC/ TR50579 PowerLogic PM8000 Power and Energy Meters These compact meters help ensure the reliability and efficiency of your facility by making the management of power quality, availability, and reliability easy. Measure, understand, and act on insightful power and energy data gathered from your entire system. 1 2 ■ ■ ■ 4 [2] All the communication ports may be used simultaneously. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 4-11 11/10/2017


page 114

PowerLogic™ Energy and Power Management Systems Power Quality Meters — Selection Address power issues before they cause problems • Monitor harmonics to mitigate excessive heating • Use trending and alarming to detect fluctuations in current pull of critical equipment to prevent motor failure and premature failure of transformers sequence of events • Utilize millisecond time stamping to analyze • Identify root cause by analyzing electrical faults with patented disturbance direction detection • Identify power quality issues per EN 50160, including frequency inconsistency, voltage fluctuations and unbalance, and harmonic contribution • Allocate costs for water, air, gas, electricity, and steam (WAGES) across departments, phases of industrial process, or cost centers • Utilize time-of-use calendar to capture electrical consumption for specific times, including on/off peak and holidays Table 4.8: PM8000 Power and Energy Meter Catalog Numbers Description PM8000 Panel Mount Meter with Integrated Display PM8000 DIN Rail Mount Meter without Display Catalog Number METSEPM8240 METSEPM8243 PM8000 DIN Rail Mount Meter + Remote Display Remote Display, Color LCD, 96 x 96 I/O module, 2 relay outputs, 6 digital inputs I/O module, 2 analog outputs, 4 analog inputs Display Cable, 10 meters Display Cable, 3 meters Display Cable, 1 meters Sealing kit Mounting adapter kit (ANSI 4") Replacement hardware kit, PM8000 meter Replacement hardware kit, PM8000 remote display METSEPM8244 METSEPM89RD96 METSEPM89M2600 METSEPM89M0024 METSECAB10 METSECAB3 METSECAB1 METSEPM8000SK METSEPMAK METSEPM8HWK METSEPM8RDHWK schneider-electric.us The best choice for power management PM8000 meters combine accurate 3-phase energy and power measurements with data logging, power quality analysis, alarming and I/O capabilities not typically available in such compact meters. Four-metered current inputs allow direct measurement of 3-phase currents and neutral current for enhanced view of harmonics. Dual Ethernet ports support daisy-chaining, removing need for an Ethernet switch inside power equipment, while redundant ring topology provides enhanced availability. Modular, field installable I/ O provides expandable scalability. Patented ION technology combines convenient, pre- configured functionality with the ability to customize the meter configuration to meet unique requirements. This embedded capability can save the expense and complexity of additional equipment, both today and tomorrow. Plus, simple installation and networking make energy information quickly accessible, while integration with StruxureWare™ software and your energy management system make it immediately actionable. Present and max. values Present and max. values Block, sliding Current and voltage Via front panel and web page Via StruxureWare software Total and per phase Total and per phase Table 4.9: PM8000 Series Features Intermediate meter General Use on LV and MV systems Current accuracy (5A Nominal) Voltage accuracy (57 V LN/100 V LL to 400 V LN/690 V LL) Active energy accuracy Number of samples/cycle or sample frequency Instantaneous rms values Current, voltage, frequency Active, reactive, apparent power Power factor Current measurement range (autoranging) Energy values Active, reactive, apparent energy Settable accumulation modes Demand values Current Active, reactive, apparent power Predicted active, reactive, apparent power Synchronization of the measurement window Setting of calculation mode Power quality measurements Harmonic distortion 1/2 cycle data Individual harmonics Waveform capture Detection of voltage swells and sags Fast acquisition EN 50160 compliance checking Customizable data outputs (using logic and math functions) Data recording Min/max of instantaneous values Data logs Event logs Trending/forecasting SER (Sequence of event recording) Time stamping GPS synchronization (+/- 1 ms) Memory (in Mbytes) Display and I/O Front panel display Wiring self-test Pulse output Digital or analog inputs(max) Digital or analog outputs (max, including pulse output) Communication RS 485 port Ethernet ports Serial port (Modbus, ION, DNP3) Ethernet port (Modbus/TCP, ION TCP, DNP3 TCP, IEC 61850) Ethernet gateway Alarm notification via email HTTP web server SNMP with custom MIB and traps for alarms SMTP email NTP time synchronization FTP File transfer Power Quality Meter Selection ■ 0.1 % reading 0.1 % reading 0.2 % 256 ■ ■ ■ 0.05–10 A ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 63 127 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 512 27 digital 16 analog 1 digital 8 relay 8 analog ■ ■ 1 1 2 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Features [3] Inputs, outputs and control power 3-phase / single-phase Digital in and out / analog in and out A • / • 16 / 4 ION8650 B • / • 16 / 4 C • / • 16 / 4 ION7650 ION7550 CM4000T ION7400 PM8000 • / • 20 / 8 • / • 20 / 8 • / • 24 / 4 • / • 36/24 • / • 36/24 [3] Specifications represent maximum capabilities with all options installed. Some options are not available concurrently. This is not a complete feature list, please refer to detailed product specifications. 4-12 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 115

Power Quality Meters — Selection PowerLogic™ Energy and Power Management Systems A AC/DC • • / • • / • 0.2(1) • • / A 17 μs • / - • / • / • • • ION8650 B AC/DC • • / • • / • 0.2(1) • • / S • - • / - • / • / - - • / - / • • • 0.001 •/•/•/- • / • • / • • • • • / - / • • • 0.001 •/•/•/- • / • • / - • • • schneider-electric.us Features [4] Power supply options Power and energy measurements Voltage, current, frequency, power factor Power / Demand Energy / time-of-use (energy per shift) IEC / ANSI energy accuracy class (% of reading) Loss compensation Power quality analysis EN50160 compliance reporting / IEC 61000-4-30 Class A or S Flicker measurement Transient detection duration Sag and swell monitoring / disturbance direction detection Harmonic distortion: total/ individual / inter Waveform capture On-board data and event logging Trending / forecasting / billing Minimum and maximum Events and alarms with timestamps Timestamp resolution (seconds) Time sync: Network / GPS / IRIG-B / DCF77-B Setpoints, alarms and control Log alarm conditions / call out on alarm Trigger data logging / waveform capture Trigger relay or digital output Special features Custom programming Downloadable firmware Communications Ports: Ethernet: Copper / Fiber Ethernet-to-serial gateway Telephone modem Modem-to-serial gateway Infrared port RS485/RS232 Misc: Web server / Email / SNMP / XML Protocols: Modbus / DNP / MV-90 / DLMS Protocols: IEC61850 / Jbus / M-Bus / LON / BACnet C AC/DC ION7650 AC/DC ION7550 AC/DC CM4000T AC/DC ION7400 AC/DC PM8000 AC/DC • • / • • / • 0.2 - • • / • • / • 0.2 - • • / • • / • 0.2(1) • - / - - - • / - • / • / - - • / - / • • • 0.001 •/•/•/- • / • • / - • • • • • / • • / • 0.2 • • / A 17 μs • / • • / • / • • • • / • / • • • 0.001 • / • / - / - • / • • / • • • • • • / • • / • 0.2 • - / - - - • / • • / • / - • • / • / • • • 0.001 • / • / - / - • / • • / • • • • • • / • • / • 0.2 - • / - • 200 ns • / • • / • / - • • / • / • • • 0.001 • / • / - / • • / • • / • • • • • / S - - • / • • / • / - • • / • / • • • 0.001 • / • / • / - • / • • / • • • • • / S - - • / • • / • / - • • / • / • • • 0.001 • / • / • / - • / • • / • • • • 2 / - • - - - • / - • / • / • / • • / • / • / - • / - / - / - / - • / • • • • • • / • • / • / - / • • / • / • / - • / - / - / - / - • / • • • • • / • • / • • / • / - / • • / • / • / - • / - / - / - / - • / • • • • • / • • / • • / • / - / • • / • / • / - • / - / - / - / - • / • • • • • / • • / • • / • / • / • • / • / • / - • / - / - / - / - • / • • • • • / • • / • • / • / • / • • / • / • / - • / - / - / - / - • / • • - - - • / • • / • / - / • • / - / - / - - / - / - / - / - 2 / - 2 / - - - • • / - • / • / • / • • / • / • / - • / - / - / - / - NOTE: 1. The ION8650 is two times more accurate than the 0.2 IEC/ANSI accuracy classes according to the same conditions used to specify the 0.2 accuracy class. ION8800, ION8650, ION8600, ION7650, ION7550, PM8000 also offer Modbus Master capabilities. 2. I D N A G N R O T I N O M R E W O P L O R T N O C 4 [4] Specifications represent maximum capabilities with all options installed. Some options are not available concurrently. This is not a complete feature list, please refer to detailed product specifications. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 4-13 11/10/2017


page 116

PowerLogic™ Energy and Power Management Systems Power and Energy Meters — PM5000 Series schneider-electric.us Series 5000 Power Meters The PowerLogic PM5000 series power meters are the new benchmark in affordable, precision metering. It is the ideal fit for high-end cost management applications, providing measurement capabilities needed to allocate energy usage, perform tenant metering and sub-billing, pin-point energy savings, optimize equipment efficiency and utilization, and perform a high level assessment of the power quality in electrical networks. All meters provide Modbus serial communications. PM5500 level meters are also capable of simultaneous ModBus TCP and BTL-certified BACnet IP communications over Ethernet. • Panel instrumentation (OEMs) • Sub-billing and cost allocation • Remote monitoring of an electrical installation • Harmonic monitoring (THD) Table 4.10: Series 5000 Power Meters Description Catalog No. PM5000 Series Power Meter PowerLogic ION6200 Series METSEPM5563RD[5] METSEPM5110 METSEPM5330 METSEPM5340 METSEPM5560 METSEPM5563 METSEPM5RD Power Meter, Class 0.5 Serial Port Meter, Class 0.5 Alarms TOU Serial Port Power Meter, Class 0.5 Alarms TOU Ethernet Port Power Meter Class 0.2 Serial Port and Dual Ethernet Power Meter without Display Class 0.2 Serial Port and Dual Ethernet Remote Display for METSEPM5563 Power Meter with Remote Display Class 0.2 Serial Port and Dual Ethernet ION6200 Power and Energy Meter The modular PowerLogic ION6200 is a low-cost, ultra-compact meter that offers outstanding versatility and functionality. It is simple to use, and has a big, bright LED display. It offers four-quadrant power, demand, energy, power factor and frequency measurements, and is available in a variety of flexible configurations. It is available as a low-cost base model to which enhanced functionality can be added over the long term. The PowerLogic ION6200 is ideal for customers who need revenue-accurate and/or certified measurements and want easy integration with power distribution assemblies and building automation systems. A Megawatt version is available for applications requiring readings in megawatts and kilovolts. It is well suited for sub-metering, energy cost tracking load profiling, and substation panel metering and is an ideal replacement for analog meters. It can be used for stand-alone metering in custom panels, switchboards, switchgear, gensets, motor control centers and UPS systems. The meter consists of a base unit with options card and a power supply pack, with a remote display being optional. PowerLogic ION6200 Power and Energy Meter Features • Only two inches deep, and fits a standard ANSI four-inch switchboard cutout, or as a TRAN model with no display and can be fastened to a flat surface with a 4” (10cm) ANSI bolt pattern or mounted to a DIN rail. A remote display module (RMD) can be ordered for the TRAN and mounted through an ANSI 4” (10cm) and DIN 96 cutout. parameters • LED display with twelve 3/4” (19mm) high digits that display all basic power • Pulse Outputs: optional kWh, kVARh and/or kVAh pulsing • Via two Form A outputs • Communications: optional RS-485 port with Modbus RTU and ION compatible • 64 samples per cycle true RMS • 3-phase voltage and current inputs The standard ION6200 is available with the following: Voltage L-N average and per phase, Voltage L-L average and per phase, Current average and per phase. Option EP#1, includes the standard measurements and provides the following additional parameters:I4, kW/mW total, kWh/mWh total, kW/mW peak, Current demand average and per phase, Current peak demand average and per phase, Power factor total. Optional Enhanced Package, includes the standard measurements and provides the following additional parameters: kW/mW per phase, kVAR/mVAR total and per phase, kVA/mVA total and per phase, kWh/mWh and del/rec per phase, kVARh/mVARh total and del/rec per phase, kVAh/mVAh total and per phase, kW/mW demand, kVAR/ mVAR demand and peak, kVA/mVA demand and peak, Power Factor per phase, Voltage THD per phase, Current THD per phase. Table 4.11: Typical PowerLogic ION6200 Ordering Configurations Description Integrated display, 10 A inputs, standard 100–240 Vac power supply, RS485 port (Modbus RTU), 2 pulse outputs, Enhanced Package #2 TRAN Model, with remote display, 10 A inputs, standard 100–240 Vac power supply, RS485 port (Modbus RTU), 2 pulse outputs, Enhanced Package #2 TRAN Model, (no display), 10 A inputs, standard 100–240 Vac power supply, RS485 port (Modbus RTU), 2 pulse outputs, Enhanced Package #2 NOTE: Please refer to www.schneider-electric.us for the most complete and up-to- date list of feature availability. Some features are optional. Catalog No. S6200A0A0B0A0B0R S6200R1A0B0A0B0R S6200T1A0B0A0B0R METSEPM5563RD includes both METSEPM5563 and METSEPM5RD. [5] 4-14 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 117

Power and Energy Meters — EM3500 Series PowerLogic™ Energy and Power Management Systems schneider-electric.us EM3500 Series Energy and Power Meter Series 3500 Energy and Power Meter The EM3500 series Energy and Power Meter combines exceptional performance and easy installation to deliver a cost-effective solution for power monitoring applications. The EM3500 series can be installed on standard DIN rail or surface mounted, and has bi-directional monitoring designed expressly for renewable energy applications. • Pulse output and phase alarms • Data logging capability in some models • Modbus and BACnet output options Table 4.12: Series 3500 Energy and Power Meters Description Power Meter, DIN-rail, Pulse Output Only, for LVCTs Power Meter, DIN-rail Pulse Output Only, for METSECTR Rope CTs Power Meter, DIN-rail Modbus Output for LVCTs Power Meter, DIN-rail, Modbus Output, for METSECTR Rope CTs Power Meter, DIN-rail Modbus Output, Bi-Directional, Logging for LVCTs Power Meter, DIN-rail Modbus Output, Bi-Directional, Logging for METSECTR Rope CTs Power Meter, DIN-rail, BACnet Output, Logging for LVCTs Power Meter, DIN-rail, BACnet Output, Logging for METSECTR Rope CTs Power Meter, DIN-rail, BACnet Output, for LVCTs Power Meter, DIN-rail, BACnet Output, for METSECTR Rope CTs Catalog Number METSEEM3502 METSEEM3502A METSEEM3550 METSEEM3550A METSEEM3555 METSEEM3555A METSEEM3560 METSEEM3560A METSEEM3561 METSEEM3561A METSECTR Series Rope-Style Current Transformers The METSECTR series works with the EM3500A, EM4236, and iEM35xx series power and energy meters. These meters have a built in power supply and integrator, so CT connecton is fast and simple. The coil opens at the connector juncton for fast and easy installaton onto an existng cable or buss-bar. The flexible core makes it easy to fit in tght enclosure • Agency Approvals cURus, ANSI/IEEE 57.13, CE, RoHS • Accuracy ±1% from 50 A to 5000 A • Insulation up to 600 Vac Table 4.13: METSECTR Series Rope-Style Current Transformers Description Rogowski CT, 300 mm (12”), 600 Vac, 5 kA, U018 equivalent Rogowski CT, 460 mm (18”), 600 Vac, 5 kA, U018 equivalent Rogowski CT, 600 mm (24”), 600 Vac, 5 kA, U018 equivalent Rogowski CT, 900 mm (35”), 600 Vac, 5 kA, U018 equivalent LVCT Series Current Transformers LVCT current transducers provide a 0.333 V output for use with EM3500 series meters. Available in both solid and split core styles. • Solid core accuracy ±0.5 of reading from 5% to 120% of rated current • Split core accuracy 1% from 10% to 100% of rated current • Leads 22 AWG, 600 Vac, UL 1015 bonded pair, 6 ft. (1.8 m) standard length Table 4.14: LVCT Series Current Transformers Catalog Number METSECTR30500 METSECTR46500 METSECTR60500 METSECTR90500 Description Catalog Number Split core Low-Voltage CT, Split Core, Size 0, 50 A:0.33 V Low-Voltage CT, Split Core, Size 1, 100 A:0.33 V Low-Voltage CT, Split Core, Size 2, 100 A:0.33 V Low-Voltage CT, Split Core, Size 1, 200 A:0.33 V Low-Voltage CT, Split Core, Size 2, 200 A:0.33 V Low-Voltage CT, Split Core, Size 2, 300 A:0.33 V Low-Voltage CT, Split Core, Size 3, 400 A:0.33 V Low-Voltage CT, Split Core, Size 3, 600 A:0.33 V Low-Voltage CT, Split Core, Size 3, 800 A:0.33 V Low-Voltage CT, Split Core, Size 4, 800 A:0.33 V Low-Voltage CT, Split Core, Size 4, 1000 A:0.33 V Low-Voltage CT, Split Core, Size 4, 1200 A:0.33 V Low-Voltage CT, Split Core, Size 4, 1600 A:0.33 V Low-Voltage CT, Split Core, Size 4, 2000 A:0.33 V Low-Voltage CT, Split Core, Size 4, 2400 A:0.33 V Solid core Low-Voltage CT, Solid Core, Size 0, 50 A:0.33 V Low-Voltage CT, Solid Core, Size 0, 100 A:0.33 V Low-Voltage CT, Solid Core, Size 2, 200 A:0.33 V Low-Voltage CT, Solid Core, Size 3, 400 A:0.33 V LVCT00050S LVCT00101S LVCT00102S LVCT00201S LVCT00202S LVCT00302S LVCT00403S LVCT00603S LVCT00803S LVCT00804S LVCT01004S LVCT01204S LVCT01604S LVCT02004S LVCT02404S LVCT20050S LVCT20100S LVCT20202S LVCT20403S 4-15 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved I D N A G N R O T I N O M R E W O P L O R T N O C 4 11/10/2017


page 118

PowerLogic™ Energy and Power Management Systems Power and Energy Meters — PM3000 Series schneider-electric.us PowerLogic PM3000 Power and Energy Meters PM3000 series power meters are a cost-attractive, feature-rich range of DIN rail- mounted power meters that offers all the measurement capabilities required to monitor an electrical installation. Ideal for power metering and network monitoring applications that seek to improve the availability and reliability of your electrical distribution system, the meters are also fully capable of supporting sub billing and cost allocation applications. Four different models are available. Choose from models that provide Display Only, Display + Pulse Output, Display + Modbus, and Display + Modbus + DI/DO + Logging. All models use 1A/5A CTs. Table 4.15: PM3000 Features Available Features Performance Standard IEC61557-12 PMD/Sx/K55/0.5 General Use on LV and HV systems Number of samples per cycle CT input 1A/5A VT input Multi-tariff Multi-lingual backlit display Instantaneous rms Values Current, voltage Per phase and average Active, reactive, apparent power Total and per phase Power factor Total and per phase Energy Values Active, reactive and apparent energy; import and export Demand Values Current, power (active, reactive, apparent) demand; present Current, power (active, reactive, apparent) demand; peak Power Quality Measurements THD Current and voltage Data Recording Min/max of the instantaneous values Power demand logs Energy consumption log (day, week, month) Alarms with time stamping Digital inputs/digital outputs Communication RS-485 port Modbus protocol PM3200 Range PM3200 PM3210 PM3250 PM3255 • • 32 • • 4 • • • • • • • • • 32 • • 4 • • • • • • • • • 5 0/1 • • 32 • • 4 • • • • • • • • • 5 • • • • 32 • • 4 • • • • • • • • • • • 15 2/2 • • Table 4.16: PM3000 Series Power Meters Description PM3200 3PH energy meter, DIN rail mount, 1A or 5A CT, Class 0.5S, no communications, MID compliant PM3210 3PH energy meter, DIN rail mount, 1A or 5A CT, Class 0.5S, pulse out, MID compliant, THD, one (1) DO PM3250 3PH energy meter, DIN rail mount, 1A or 5A CT, Class 0.5S, Modbus, THD PM3255 3PH energy meter, DIN rail mount, 1A or 5A CT, Class 0.5S, Modbus, MID compliant, THD, two (2) DI, two (2) DO Catalog Number METSEPM3200 METSEPM3210 METSEPM3250 METSEPM3255 PM3000 Series Power Meter 4 C O N T R O L P O W E R M O N I T O R N G A N D I 4-16 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 119

Power and Energy Meters — iEM3000 PowerLogic™ Energy and Power Management Systems schneider-electric.us iEM3000 Energy Meters The economical iEM3000 energy meters are ideal for helping facilities become more energy efficient. These feature-rich meters reduce installation and commissioning costs thanks to their efficient design and include native support for a variety of protocols, including Modbus, BACnet, LON, and M-Bus, for seamless integration into networks. Choose from models supporting a variety of current-sensing methods, including standard 1A/5A current transformers, 0.333 V low-voltage CTs, and METSECTR Rogowski coils. There are also direct connect models with internal current sensors that save installation time. The compact size is ideal for new and retrofit installations. Whether metering for energy awareness, billing, or advanced energy programs requiring full-featured, multi- tariff energy meters, there is an iEM3000 meter that fits the application. iEM3100 iEM3200 iEM3300 Table 4.17: iEM3000 Features Function Current Input / Accuracy 63A Direct / Class 1 1A or 5A CT / Class 0.5S 125A Direct / Class 1 0.333V or 1.0V LVCT / Class 0.5S Rogowski coil / Class 0.5S Protocol M-Bus Modbus BACnet LonWorks Measurement MID compliant 4 quadrant energy Multi Tariff Internal clock External control Digital I/O Number of inputs/outputs Acti 9 iEM3000 Series Three-Phase Meters iEM3110 iEM3210 iEM3310 iEM3135 iEM3235 iEM3335 iEM3150 iEM3250 iEM3350 iEM3175 iEM3275 iEM3375 iEM3155 iEM3255 iEM3355 iEM3455 iEM3555 iEM3165 iEM3265 iEM3365 iEM3465 iEM3565 • • • • 4 2 • • • • 4 4 • • • 4 4 • • • 4 4 -/1 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1 iEM3000 Series Energy Meter NOTE: • For meter part number replace “i” in model name with “A9M”. (Example: iEM3150 = A9MEM3150) • DIN rail housing size is 18mm x 5 width. • Digital input is selectable for Tariff control or • Digital output is selectable for kWh pulse or (iEM33xx is 18mm x 7 width.) kW alarm. (iEM3x10 is kWh pulse only.) WAGES consumption Measurement parameters • Total and partial kWh shows consumption behavior • Four-quadrant metering differentiates energy • Target green technologies (delivered/received) • Reduce utility penalties (active/reactive) • Additional parameters (P, Q, S, 3xI, V, PF, F) to monitor network balance and overload behavior Smart Alarm • kW overload alarm helps prevent utility demand charges workday/weekend) Multiple Tariffs • Save up to four different time slots to manage multiple tariffs (peak/off-peak, • Control tariffs via digital inputs, internal clock, or communication Digital Inputs • Use the meter as a pulse counter for another meter (WAGES monitoring) • Manage double-source applications (e.g., utility main plus on-site generator) • Monitor circuit breaker status or cabinet door opening Digital Outputs • Use to trip a light or sound an alarm • Configure as a pulse output Table 4.18: iEM3000 Series Energy Meters Description Catalog Number iEM3100 3PH energy meter, DIN rail mount, direct connect 63A, Class 1 iEM3110 3PH energy meter, DIN rail mount, direct connect 63A, Class 1, pulse out, MID, one (1) DO iEM3135 3PH energy meter, DIN rail mount, direct connect 63A, Class 1, M-Bus, MID, 4-quadrant energy, one (1) DI, one (1) DO iEM3150 3PH energy meter, DIN rail mount, direct connect 63A, Class 1, Modbus iEM3155 3PH energy meter, DIN rail mount, direct connect 63A, Class 1, Modbus, MID, 4-quadrant energy, one (1) DI, one (1) DO iEM3165 3PH energy meter, DIN rail mount, direct connect 63A, Class 1, BACnet, MID, 4-quadrant energy, one (1) DI, one (1) DO iEM3175 3PH energy meter, DIN rail mount, direct connect 63A, Class 1, LON, MID, 4-quadrant energy, one (1) DI, one (1) DO iEM3200 3PH energy meter, DIN rail mount, 1A or 5A CT, Class 0.5S iEM3210 3PH energy meter, DIN rail mount, 1A or 5A CT, Class 0.5S, pulse out, MID one (1) DO iEM3235 3PH energy meter, DIN rail mount, 1A or 5A CT, Class 0.5S, M-Bus, MID, 4-quadrant energy, one (1) DI, one (1) DO iEM3250 3PH energy meter, DIN rail mount, 1A or 5A CT, Class 0.5S, Modbus iEM3255 3PH energy meter, DIN rail mount, 1A or 5A CT, Class 0.5S, Modbus, MID, 4-quadrant energy, one (1) DI, one (1) DO iEM3265 3PH energy meter, DIN rail mount, 1A or 5A CT, Class 0.5S, BACnet, MID, 4-quadrant energy, one (1) DI, one (1) DO iEM3275 3PH energy meter, DIN rail mount, 1A or 5A CT, Class 0.5S, LON, MID, 4-quadrant energy, one (1) DI, one (1) DO iEM3300 3PH energy meter, DIN rail mount, direct connect 125A, Class 1 iEM3310 3PH energy meter, DIN rail mount, direct connect 125A, Class 1, pulse out, MID, one (1) DO iEM3335 3PH energy meter, DIN rail mount, direct connect 125A, Class 1, M-Bus, MID, 4-quadrant energy, one (1) DI, one (1) DO iEM3350 3PH energy meter, DIN rail mount, direct connect 125A, Class 1, Modbus iEM3355 3PH energy meter, DIN rail mount, direct connect 125A, Class 1, Modbus, MID, 4-quadrant energy, one (1) DI, one (1) DO iEM3365 3PH energy meter, DIN rail mount, direct connect 125A, Class 1, BACnet, MID, 4-quadrant energy, one (1) DI, one (1) DO iEM3375 3PH energy meter, DIN rail mount, direct connect 125A, Class 1, LON, MID, 4-quadrant energy, one (1) DI, one (1) DO iEM3455 3PH energy meter, DIN rail mount, LVCT, Class 0.5S, Modbus, MID, 4-quadrant energy, one (1) DI, one (1) DO iEM3465 3PH energy meter, DIN rail mount, LVCT, Class 0.5S, BACnet, MID, 4-quadrant energy, one (1) DI, one (1) DO iEM3555 3PH energy meter, DIN rail mount, Rogowski coil, Class 0.5S, Modbus, MID, 4-quadrant energy, one (1) DI, one (1) DO iEM3565 3PH energy meter, DIN rail mount, Rogowski coil, Class 0.5S, BACnet, MID, 4-quadrant energy, one (1) DI, one (1) DO A9MEM3100 A9MEM3110 A9MEM3135 A9MEM3150 A9MEM3155 A9MEM3165 A9MEM3175 A9MEM3200 A9MEM3210 A9MEM3235 A9MEM3250 A9MEM3255 A9MEM3265 A9MEM3275 A9MEM3300 A9MEM3310 A9MEM3335 A9MEM3350 A9MEM3355 A9MEM3365 A9MEM3375 A9MEM3455 A9MEM3465 A9MEM3555 A9MEM3565 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 4-17 I D N A G N R O T I N O M R E W O P L O R T N O C 4 11/10/2017


page 120

4 C O N T R O L P O W E R M O N I T O R N G A N D I PowerLogic™ Energy and Power Management Systems Power and Energy Meters — iEM3000 Multiple Meter Unit Enclosures for iEM3000 Energy Meters schneider-electric.us Schneider Electric’s Multi-Meter Unit (MMU) enclosures are the ideal complement for the iEM3000 Series of energy meters. This compact solution saves wall space and is scalable for the exact number of meters required. Factory-assembled, pre-wired, and tested enclosures can speed installation, reduce the amount of field wiring, and save time troubleshooting. Multi-meter unit enclosures and iEM3000 meters provide the highest quality, best value hardware for tenant sub-metering, and are designed for contractor convenience and simplicity. MMU enclosures are available in three sizes: • Small MMU enclosures with capacity for up to 4 iEM3000 meters. • Medium size MMU enclosures with capacity for up to 8 iEM3000 meters, plus one • Extra-large MMU enclosures with capacity for up to 24 iEM3000 meters, plus one gateway/data logger/energy server. gateway/ data logger/energy server. Multi meter units are configured to order as described below. 4-18 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved SeriesMMU = Multi-meter unitNEMA Rating1 = NEMA Type 1Enclosure Capacity04 = 4 meters, 16"H x 12"W x 6"D08 = 8 meters, 20"H x 20"W x 6"D24 = 24 meters, 30"H x 24"W x 6"DSystem Type1 = Prewired for single-phase 208Y/120V L-L-N metering2 = Prewired for single-phase 120V or 277V L-N metering2 = Prewired for single-phase 120/240V L-L-N metering2 = Prewired for three-phase 208Y/120V or 480Y/277V L-L-L-N meteringMeter Type (Sensor, Serial Protocol)A = iEM3455 (LVCT, Modbus)B = iEM3465 (LVCT, BACnet)C = iEM3555 (Rogowski, Modbus)D = iEM3565 (Rogowski, BACnet)Gateway/Data Logger/Energy ServerN = None (Required if Meter Type is B or D, or Meter Capacity = 04)L = EGX150 gatewayD = EBX210 data loggerE = EBX510 energy serverX = EGX300 energy serverB = EGX300 energy server with Tenant Bill 32 applicationT = EGX300 energy server with Tenant Bill64 applicationNumber of Meters Installed01 = 1 meterxx = up to capacity limitMMU10808AD111/10/2017


page 121

Power and Energy Meters — Selection PowerLogic™ Energy and Power Management Systems schneider-electric.us Features [6] Inputs, outputs and control power 3-phase / single-phase Digital in and out / analog in and out Power supply options Power and energy measurements Voltage, current, frequency, power factor Power / Demand Energy / time-of-use (energy per shift) IEC / ANSI energy accuracy class (% of reading) Loss compensation Power quality analysis EN50160 compliance reporting / IEC 61000-4-30 Class A or S Flicker measurement Transient detection duration Sag and swell monitoring / disturbance direction detection Harmonic distortion: total/ individual / inter Waveform capture On-board data and event logging Trending / forecasting / billing Minimum and maximum Events and alarms with timestamps Timestamp resolution (seconds) Time sync: Network / GPS / IRIG-B / DCF77-B Setpoints, alarms and control Log alarm conditions / call out on alarm Trigger data logging / waveform capture Trigger relay or digital output Special features Custom programming Downloadable firmware Communications Ports: Ethernet: Copper / Fiber Ethernet-to-serial gateway Telephone modem Modem-to-serial gateway Infrared port RS485/RS232 Misc: Web server / Email / SNMP / XML Protocols: Modbus / DNP / MV-90 / DLMS Protocols: IEC61850 / Jbus / M-Bus / LON / BACnet Power and Energy Meter Selection PM5110 PM5330 PM5340 PM5500 ION6200 EM3500 PM3000 iEM3000 • / • 1 / 0 AC/DC • / • 4 / 0 AC/DC • / • 4 / 0 AC/DC • / • 6 / 0 AC/DC • / • 2/- AC/DC • / • 2 or 3 / 0 AC/DC • / • up to 2/2 AC/DC • • / • • / - 0.5 - - / - - - - / - • / • / - - - / - / - • - 1 • • / • • / • 0.5 - - / - - - - / - • / • / - - - / - / - • • 1 • • / • • / • 0.5 - - / - - - - / - • / • / - - - / - / - • • 1 • • / • • / • 0.2 - - / - - - - / - • / • / - - - / - / - • • 1 • • / • • / - 0.5 - - / - - - - / - • / - / - - - / - / - - - - • • / • - / - 0.2 - - / - - - - / - - / - / - - - / - / - - - 1 • • / • • / • 0.5 - - / - - - - / - • / - / - - - / - / - • • 1 • / • up to 1/1 AC • • / – • / • 0.5 - - / - - - - / - - / - / - - - / - / - - - - - / - / - / - - / - / - / - - / - / - / - - / - / - / - - / - / - / - - / - / - / - - / - / - / - - / - / - / - - / - - / - - - • • / • - / - • - • • / • - / - • - • • / • - / - • - • - / - - / - - - - - / - - / - - - - • / - - / - • - - - / - • - - - / - - - - - • / - - / - / - / - • / - / - / - - / - / - / - / - - / - - - - - • / - - / - / - / - • / - / - / - - / - / - / - / - 1 / - - - - - - / - - / - / - / - • / - / - / - - / - / - / - / - 2/ - • - - - • / - • / - / - / - • / - / - / - - / - / - / - / • - / - - - - - • / - - / - / - / - • / - / - / - - / - / - / - / - - / - - - - - • / - - / - / - / - • / - / - / - - / - / - / - / • - / - - - - - • / - - / - / - / - • / - / - / - - / - / - / - / - - / - - - - - • / - - / - / - / - • / - / - / - - / - / • / • / • I D N A G N R O T I N O M R E W O P L O R T N O C 4 [6] Specifications represent maximum capabilities with all options installed. Some options are not available concurrently. This is not a complete feature list, please refer to detailed product specifications. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 4-19 11/10/2017


page 122

PowerLogic™ Energy and Power Management Systems PowerLogic Energy Meter schneider-electric.us PowerLogic Energy Meter The Energy Meter is ideal for stand-alone and systems-based submetering applications. It is easy to install and provides exceptional metering accuracy. Available in Basic and Extended Range models. The Basic model is designed for metering of 120/240 and 208Y/120 volt services. The Extended Range model will meter 120/240 volt up to 480 volt Wye connected services. Extended Range meters come with pulse output and phase loss output not available on the Basic unit. Optional Modbus™ RS-485 serial communications are provided with the Energy Meter Comms Board, EMCB. Optional kW demand is also provided by the EMCB. Meter up to 3 individual services with one Energy Meter. The Energy Meter will allow the addition of up to 3 sets of parallel CTs for metering multiple electric loads. Additional sets of CTs can be ordered separately. Please refer to the multiple CT application notes in the Energy Meter instruction bulletin for the proper installation procedures. Table 4.20: Extended Range 120/240 V to 480Y/277 V Catalog No. EME1010 EME1021 EME1032 EME2010 EME2021 EME2032 EME2043 EME2083 EME3010 EME3021 EME3032 EME3043 EME3083 EME3084 EME3164 Catalog No. EMCT010 EMCT021 EMCT032 EMCT043 EMCT083 EMCT084 EMCT164 Energy Meter Table 4.19: Basic 120/240 V to 208Y/120 V Description Basic 100 A, .518"x1.28" ID, 1 CT Basic 200 A, 0.75” x 1.10” ID, 1 CT Basic 300 A, .90"x1.90" ID, 1 CT Basic 100 A, .518"x1.28" ID, 2 CTs Basic 200 A, 0.75” x 1.10” ID, 2 CTs Basic 300 A, .90"x1.90" ID, 2 CTs Basic 400 A, 2.45"x2.89" ID, 2 CTs Basic 800 A, 2.45"x2.89" ID, 2 CTs Basic 100 A, .518"x1.28" ID, 3 CTs Basic 200 A, 0.75” x 1.10” ID, 3 CTs Basic 300 A, .90"x1.90" ID, 3 CTs Basic 400 A, 2.45"x2.89" ID, 3 CTs Basic 800 A, 2.45"x2.89" ID, 3 CTs Basic 800 A, 2.45"x5.50" ID, 3 CTs Basic 1600 A, 2.45"x5.50" ID, 3 CTs Catalog No. EMB1010 EMB1021 EMB1032 EMB2010 EMB2021 EMB2032 EMB2043 EMB2083 EMB3010 EMB3021 EMB3032 EMB3043 EMB3083 EMB3084 EMB3164 Description Extended Range 100 A, .518"x1.28" ID, 1 CT Extended Range 200 A, 0.75” x 1.10” ID, 1 CT Extended Range 300 A, .90"x1.90" ID, 1 CT Extended Range 100 A, n.518"x1.28" ID, 2 CTs Extended Range 200 A, 0.75” x 1.10” ID, 2 CTs Extended Range 300 A, .90"x1.90" ID, 2 CTs Extended Range 400 A, 2.45"x2.89" ID, 2 CTs Extended Range 800 A, 2.45"x2.89" ID, 2 CTs Extended Range 100 A, .518"x1.28" ID, 3 CTs Extended Range 200 A, 0.75” x 1.10” ID, 3 CTs Extended Range 300 A, .90"x1.90" ID, 3 CTs Extended Range 400 A, 2.45"x2.89" ID, 3 CTs Extended Range 800 A, 2.45"x2.89" ID, 3 CTs Extended Range 800 A, 2.45"x5.50" ID, 3 CTs Extended Range 1600 A, 2.45"x5.50" ID, 3 CTs Table 4.22: Additional CT Sets Description Table 4.21: Energy Meter Accessories Description Energy Meter Communication Board [7] Energy Meter Fuse Pack, Set of 1 Energy Meter Fuse Pack, Set of 2 Energy Meter Fuse Pack, Set of 3 Energy Meter Bonding Kit Catalog No. EMCB EMFP1 EMFP2 EMFP3 EMBOND EM4200 Series Enercept 100 A, .518” x 1.28” ID, 1 CT 200 A, 0.75” x 1.10” ID, 1 CT 300 A, .90” x 1.90” ID, 1 CT 400 A, 2.45” x 2.89” ID, 1 CT 800 A, 2.45” x 2.89” ID, 1 CT 800 A, 2.45” x 5.50” ID, 1 CT 1600 A, 2.45” x 5.50” ID, 1 CT NOTE: CT quantity and amperage must match meter model. Total of combined loads must not exceed rating of meter. All additional CTs shipped with 6 ft. white and black color-coded wire leads. PowerLogic EM4200 Enercept Meter Next generation Enercept meters provide a unique solution for measuring energy data. The small form factor enables retrofit installation in existing panels to save wall space, installation time, and material cost. They are compatible with O.333V LVCT split-core, solid-core and METSECTR rope-style current transducers 50–5000A and communicate using Modbus and BACnet protocols. Features • High reliability with ANSI C12.20 0.2% accuracy, IEC 62053-22 Class 0.2S, 90 to 480 • Compact size for easy in-panel mounting, DIN rail or screw mount options • Easy integration with a variety of CT form factors – split-core, solid-core, and Rope- • Seamless integration with StruxureWare Power Monitoring Expert (PME), • Configurable with or without power • Quick connection with auto protocol, baud rate, and uni-directional/bi-directional • Native Modbus and BACnet protocols along with uni-directional and bi-directional Table 4.23: EM4200 Enercept Meter StruxureWare Building Operation (SBO), and StruxureWare Building Expert (SBE) Style Rogowski (METSECTR), and compatibility from 5 to 5000A feature sets in one unit detection Vac Description Enercept Power Meter, Class 0.2S, Modbus/BACnet RS485, ANSI wire code, compatible with LVCT and Rogowski coils, order separately Catalog Number EM4236 [7] Energy Meter communication board (EMCB) can be used with all models of the Energy Meter. Order one EMCB for each Energy Meter where either kW demand and/or communication is specified. 4-20 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 123

PowerLogic Enercept™™ Meter PowerLogic™ Energy and Power Management Systems schneider-electric.us PowerLogic Enercept™ Meter The Enercept Meter is the ideal solution for submetering electric loads where space is at a premium. The compact design consists of three interconnected split-core CTs with the metering and communication electronics built into the CT housing. Simply snap on the CTs, connect the voltage inputs, the communication lines, and installation is complete. Both versions can be connected to either three-phase or single-phase circuits. Enercept meters employ the Modbus™ RTU 2-wire communication protocol, and can utilize the same communication network and Power Management Software applications as other PowerLogic devices. Data from the Enercept meters can be presented in tabular or graphical format, used for alarming and historical logging and trending, and to produce reports. Optional Submeter display (SMD) acts as a stand-alone operator interface supporting up to 32 meters (63 with a repeater). In addition, the Submeter display (SMD) can act as a network adapter allowing Enercept meters to be incorporated into a network. Enercept Meter Table 4.24: Enercept Meter Description Basic 100 A, 1.25" x 1.51" ID Basic 300 A, 1.25" x 1.51" ID Basic 400 A, 2.45" x 2.89" ID Basic 800 A, 2.45" x 2.89" ID Basic 800 A, 2.45" x 5.50" ID Basic 1600 A, 2.45" x 5.50" ID Basic 2400 A, 2.45" x 5.50" ID Enhanced 100 A, 1.25" x 1.51" ID Enhanced 300 A, 1.25" x 1.51" ID Enhanced 400 A, 2.45" x 2.89" ID Enhanced 800 A, 2.45" x 2.89" ID Enhanced 800 A, 2.45" x 5.50" ID Enhanced 1600 A, 2.45" x 5.50" ID Enhanced 2400 A, 2.45" x 5.50" ID Table 4.25: Accessories Description Submeter display mounted in enclosure Open style submeter display, no enclosure 2-Wire 232–485 Conv Enercept Mounting Brackets (Set of 3) Catalog No. 3020B012[8] 3020B032 [8] 3020B043 [8] 3020B083 [8] 3020B084 [8] 3020B164 [8] 3020B244 [8] 3020E012 3020E032 3020E043 3020E083 3020E084 3020E164 3020E244 Catalog No. SMD SMD OPN 30502W485C 3050EMBK-3 Table 4.26: Enercept Metering Quantities Basic[8] kWh, energy usage kW, real power kWh, kW per phase and total, min kW, max kW, kWd, kVAR, kVA, PF per phase and total voltage- V, L-L, L-N per phase and avg. Current - A, per phase and average Enhanced• I D N A G N R O T I N O M R E W O P L O R T N O C SA Split-Core Current Transformers PowerLogic Instrument Grade 5 Amp Split-Core Current Transformers The 3090 SCCT series of split-core current transformers provide secondary amperage proportional to the primary (sensed) current. For use with Circuit Monitors, Power Meters, data loggers, chart recorders and other instruments the 3090 SCCT series provides a cost-effective means to transform electrical service amperages to a 0–5A level compatible with monitoring equipment. 4 Table 4.27: Description Split Core CT—200 A (sz.2): 1.25" x 1.51 Split Core CT—300 A (sz.2): 1.25" x 1.51 Split Core CT—400 A (sz.3): 2.45" x 2.89 Split Core CT—600 A (sz.3): 2.45" x 2.89 Split Core CT—800 A (sz.3): 2.45" x 2.89 Split Core CT—800 A (sz.4): 2.45" x 5.05 Split Core CT—1200 A (sz.4): 2.45" x 5.50 Split Core CT—1600 A (sz.4): 2.45" x 5.50 NOTE: Max. Voltage without additional insulation 600 Vac. Do not apply 600 V Class current transformers to circuits having a phase-to-phase voltage greater than 600 V, unless adequate additional insulation is applied between the primary conductor and the current transformers. Square D assumes no responsibility for damage of equipment or personal injury caused by transformers operated on circuits above their published ratings. Catalog No. 3090SCCT022 3090SCCT032 3090SCCT043 3090SCCT063 3090SCCT083 3090SCCT084 3090SCCT124 3090SCCT164 [8] See Handout / Instruction Bulletin for derating properties. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 4-21 11/10/2017


page 124

4 C O N T R O L P O W E R M O N I T O R N G A N D I PowerLogic™ Energy and Power Management Systems Multi Circuit Energy Meters schneider-electric.us Multi Circuit Energy Meters The PowerLogic EM4800 and EM4000 multi-circuit energy meters combine accurate electricity sub-metering with advanced communications technology. They are ideal for multi-tenant or departmental metering and M&V applications within office towers, condominiums, apartment buildings, shopping centers and other multipoint environments, or small footprint retail. This meter is available separately or as part of a Square D integrated power center (IPC) for use in building retrofits or new construction. Each compact multipoint meter provides energy measurement for up to 24 (1CT) or 12 (2CT) single-phase circuits or 8 (3CT) 3-phase circuits. Select a model to match the desired CT type. The 0.333 V output CT option does not require shorting blocks, making it the ideal choice for retrofit installations. All meters have an accuracy of Class 0.5%, have onboard interval logging, and feature flexible communication options with an Ethernet port that supports multiple protocols: Modbus TCP/IP, HTTP, BACnet/IP, FTP, and SNTP. EM4800 series meters have a V.90 modem while EM4000 series meters provide Modbus RTU over RS-485. Table 4.28: Multi Circuit Energy Meters Description EM4800 series; Ethernet; modem; compatible with 80mA low-power CTs; 120V control power 60 Hz EM4800 series; Ethernet; modem; compatible with 333mV low-power CTs; 120V control power 60 Hz EM4800 series; Ethernet; modem; compatible with standard 5A CTs; 120V control power 60 Hz EM4000 series; Ethernet; Modbus RTU over RS-485; compatible with 80mA low-power CTs; 120V control power 60 Hz EM4000 series; Ethernet; Modbus RTU over RS-485; compatible with 80mA low-power CTs; 277V control power 60 Hz EM4000 series; Ethernet; Modbus RTU over RS-485; compatible with 333mV low-power CTs; 120V control power 60 Hz EM4000 series; Ethernet; Modbus RTU over RS-485; compatible with 333mV low-power CTs; 277V control power 60 Hz 200 A current transformer (CT), 80 mA secondary, solid-core (1 CT) 400 A current transformer (CT), 80 mA secondary, solid-core (1 CT) 600 A current transformer (CT), 80 mA secondary, solid-core (1 CT) 50 A .333 V Split Core Current Transformer with 0.75 in Window Size 100 A .333 V Split Core Current Transformer with 0.75 in Window Size 150 A .333 V Split Core Current Transformer with 0.75 in Window Size 200 A .333 V Split Core Current Transformer with 0.75 in Window Size 100 A .333 V Split Core Current Transformer with 1.25 in Window Size 150 A .333 V Split Core Current Transformer with 1.25 in Window Size 200 A .333 V Split Core Current Transformer with 1.25 in Window Size 400 A .333 V Split Core Current Transformer with 1.25 in Window Size 200 A .333 V Split Core Current Transformer with 2.00 in Window Size 400 A .333 V Split Core Current Transformer with 2.00 in Window Size 600 A .333 V Split Core Current Transformer with 2.00 in Window Size 600 A .333 V Split Core Current Transformer with 3 x 5 in Window Size 800 A .333 V Split Core Current Transformer with 3 x 5 in Window Size Catalog No. METSEEM488016 METSEEM483316 METSEEM480516 METSEEM408016 METSEEM408036 METSEEM403316 METSEEM403336 METSECT80200 METSECT80400 METSECT80600 ECT075050SC ECT075100SC ECT075150SC ECT075200SC ECT125100SC ECT125150SC ECT125200SC ECT125400SC ECT200200SC ECT200400SC ECT200600SC ECT300600SC ECT300800SC 4-22 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 125

PowerLogic Branch Circuit Power Meter PowerLogic™ Energy and Power Management Systems schneider-electric.us PowerLogic Branch Circuit Power Meter The ideal solution for data center managers, energy or facility managers, engineers and operational executives who are responsible for delivering power to critical applications. In corporate and hosted data center facilities, this technology helps you plan and optimize the critical power infrastructure to meet the demands of continuous availability. The PowerLogic BCPM is a highly accurate, full-featured metering product designed for the unique, multi-circuit and minimal space requirements of a high performance power distribution unit (PDU) or remote power panel (RPP). It offers class 1 (1%) power and energy system accuracy (including 50 A or 100 A CTs) on all branch channels. The BCPM monitors up to 84 branch circuits with a single device and also monitors the incoming power mains to provide information on a complete PDU. It also offers multi- phase measurement totals with flexible support for any configuration of multi-phase breakers. Full alarming capabilities ensure that potential issues are dealt with before they become problems. Unlike products designed for specific hardware, the flexible BCPM will fit any PDU or RPP design and supports both new and retrofit installations. It has exceptional dynamic range and accuracy, and optional feature sets to meet the energy challenges of mission critical data centers. Key Features: • Integrated Ethernet with advanced SNMP, BACnet, and Modbus TCP support on • Class 1% system accuracy (including 50 A or 100 A branch CTs • Flexible configuration of Logical Meters for multi-phase loads • Full PDU monitoring • Flexible configuration • Split core version for retrofit installations • Wide monitoring range • Low current monitoring • Advanced alarming • Easily integrates into a PowerLogic system or other existing networks using Modbus™ BCPME models communications I D N A G N R O T I N O M R E W O P L O R T N O C 50 A CT 100 A CT 200 A CT © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 4 4-23 11/10/2017


page 126

PowerLogic™ Energy and Power Management Systems PowerLogic Branch Circuit Power Meter schneider-electric.us Table 4.29: BCPM with Solid-Core CTs Description 42-circuit solid-core power & energy meter, 100A CTs (2 strips), ¾ in. spacing 84-circuit solid-core power & energy meter, 100A CTs (4 strips), ¾ in. spacing 42-circuit solid-core power & energy meter, 100A CTs (2 strips), 1 in. spacing 84-circuit solid-core power & energy meter, 100A CTs (4 strips), 1 in. spacing 24-circuit solid-core power & energy meter, 100A CTs (2 strips), 18 mm spacing 36-circuit solid-core power & energy meter, 100A CTs (2 strips), 18 mm spacing 42-circuit solid-core power & energy meter, 100A CTs (2 strips), 18 mm spacing 48-circuit solid-core power & energy meter, 100A CTs (4 strips), 18 mm spacing 72-circuit solid-core power & energy meter, 100A CTs (4 strips), 18 mm spacing 84-circuit solid-core power & energy meter, 100A CTs (4 strips), 18 mm spacing 42-circuit solid-core branch current, mains power meter, 100A CTs (2 strips), ¾ in. spacing 84-circuit solid-core branch current, mains power meter, 100A CTs (4 strips), ¾ in. spacing 42-circuit solid-core branch current, mains power meter, 100A CTs (2 strips), 1 in. spacing 84-circuit solid-core branch current, mains power meter, 100A CTs (4 strips), 1 in. spacing 24-circuit solid-core branch current, mains power meter, 100A CTs (2 strips), 18 mm spacing 36-circuit solid-core branch current, mains power meter, 100A CTs (2 strips), 18 mm spacing 42-circuit solid-core branch current, mains power meter, 100A CTs (2 strips), 18 mm spacing 48-circuit solid-core branch current, mains power meter, 100A CTs (4 strips), 18 mm spacing 72-circuit solid-core branch current, mains power meter, 100A CTs (4 strips), 18 mm spacing 84-circuit solid-core branch current, mains power meter, 100A CTs (4 strips), 18 mm spacing 42-circuit solid-core branch current meter, 100A CTs (2 strips), ¾ in. spacing 84-circuit solid-core branch current meter, 100A CTs (4 strips), ¾ in. spacing 42-circuit solid-core branch current meter, 100A CTs (2 strips), 1 in. spacing 84-circuit solid-core branch current meter, 100A CTs (4 strips), 1 in. spacing 24-circuit solid-core branch current meter, 100A CTs (2 strips), 18 mm spacing 36-circuit solid-core branch current meter, 100A CTs (2 strips), 18 mm spacing 42-circuit solid-core branch current meter, 100A CTs (2 strips), 18 mm spacing 48-circuit solid-core branch current meter, 100A CTs (4 strips), 18 mm spacing 72-circuit solid-core branch current meter, 100A CTs (4 strips), 18 mm spacing 84-circuit solid-core branch current meter, 100A CTs (4 strips), 18 mm spacing 42-circuit solid-core power & energy meter w/Ethernet, 100A CTs (2 strips), ¾ in. spacing 84-circuit solid-core power & energy meter w/Ethernet, 100A CTs (4 strips), ¾ in. spacing 42-circuit solid-core power & energy meter w/Ethernet, 100A CTs (2 strips), 1 in. spacing 84-circuit solid-core power & energy meter w/Ethernet, 100A CTs (4 strips), 1 in. mm spacing 24-circuit solid-core power & energy meter w/Ethernet, 100A CTs (2 strips), 18 mm spacing 36-circuit solid-core power & energy meter w/Ethernet, 100A CTs (2 strips), 18 mm spacing 42-circuit solid-core power & energy meter w/Ethernet, 100A CTs (2 strips), 18 mm spacing 48-circuit solid-core power & energy meter w/Ethernet, 100A CTs (4 strips), 18 mm spacing 72-circuit solid-core power & energy meter w/Ethernet, 100A CTs (4 strips), 18 mm spacing 84-circuit solid-core power & energy meter w/Ethernet, 100A CTs (4 strips), 18 mm spacing Catalog Number BCPMA042S BCPMA084S BCPMA142S BCPMA184S BCPMA224S BCPMA236S BCPMA242S BCPMA248S BCPMA272S BCPMA284S BCPMB042S BCPMB084S BCPMB142S BCPMB184S BCPMB224S BCPMB236S BCPMB242S BCPMB248S BCPMB272S BCPMB284S BCPMC042S BCPMC084S BCPMC142S BCPMC184S BCPMC224S BCPMC236S BCPMC242S BCPMC248S BCPMC272S BCPMC284S BCPME042S BCPME084S BCPME142S BCPME184S BCPME224S BCPME236S BCPME242S BCPME248S BCPME272S BCPME284S Typical BCPMSC panelboard installation 4 C O N T R O L P O W E R M O N I T O R N G A N D I 4-24 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 127

PowerLogic Branch Circuit Power Meter PowerLogic™ Energy and Power Management Systems schneider-electric.us Table 4.30: BCPM with Split-Core CTs Description 42-circuit split-core power and energy meter, CTs and cables sold separately 84-circuit split-core power and energy meter, CTs and cables sold separately 30-circuit split-core power and energy meter, (30) 50A CTs & (2) 4 ft. cables 42-circuit split-core power and energy meter, (42) 50A CTs & (2) 4 ft. cables 60-circuit split-core power and energy meter, (60) 50A CTs & (4) 4 ft. cables 42-circuit split core power and energy meter, all boards on backplate, CTs and cables sold separately 84-circuit split-core power and energy meter, with (84) 50A CTs & (4) 4 ft. cables 42-circuit split-core branch current, mains power meter, CTs and cables sold separately 84-circuit split-core branch current, mains power meter, CTs and cables sold separately 30-circuit split-core branch current, mains power meter, (30) 50A CTs & (2) 4 ft. cables 42-circuit split-core branch current, mains power meter, (42) 50A CTs & (2) 4 ft. cables 60-circuit split-core branch current, mains power meter, (60) 50A CTs & (4) 4 ft. cables 42-circuit split-core branch current, mains, all boards on backplate, CTs and cables sold separately 84-circuit split-core branch current, mains power meter, (84) 50A CTs & (4) 4 ft. cables 42-circuit split-core current meter, CTs and cables sold separately 84-circuit split-core current meter, CTs and cables sold separately 30-circuit split-core current meter, (30) 50A CTs & (2) 4 ft. cables 42 circuit split-core current meter, (42) 50A CTs & (2) 4 ft. cables 60-circuit split-core current meter, (60) 50A CTs & (4) 4 ft. cables 42-circuit split-core current meter, all boards on backplate, CTs and cables sold separately 84-circuit split-core current meter, (84) 50A CTs & (4) 4 ft. cables 42-circuit split-core power and energy meter w/Ethernet, CTs and cables sold separately 84-circuit split-core power and energy meter w/Ethernet, CTs and cables sold separately 30-circuit split-core power and energy meter w/Ethernet, (30) 50A CTs & (2) 4 ft. cables 42-circuit split-core power and energy meter w/Ethernet, (42) 50A CTs & (2) 4 ft. cables 60-circuit split-core power and energy meter w/Ethernet, (60) 50A CTs & (4) 4 ft. cables 84-circuit split-core power and energy meter w/Ethernet, (84) 50A CTs & (4) 4 ft. cables Catalog Number BCPMSCA1S BCPMSCA2S BCPMSCA30S BCPMSCA42S BCPMSCA60S BCPMSCAY63S BCPMSCA84S BCPMSCB1S BCPMSCB2S BCPMSCB30S BCPMSCB42S BCPMSCB60S BCPMSCBY63S BCPMSCB84S BCPMSCC1S BCPMSCC2S BCPMSCC30S BCPMSCC42S BCPMSCC60S BCPMSCCY63S BCPMSCC84S BCPMSCE1S BCPMSCE2S BCPMSCE30S BCPMSCE42S BCPMSCE60S BCPMSCE84S Table 4.33: BCPM Split-Core Branch CTs and Adapter Boards Description BCPM adapter boards, quantity 2, for split core BCPM BCPM 50A split core CTs, Quantity 6, 1.8 m lead lengths BCPM 50A split core CTs, quantity 6, 6 m lead lengths BCPM 100A split core CTs, Quantity 6, 1.8 m lead lengths BCPM 100A split core CTs, Quantity 6, 6 m lead lengths BCPM 200A split core CTs, Quantity 1, 1.8 m lead lengths BCPM 200A split core CTs, Quantity 1, 6 m lead lengths Catalog Number BCPMSCADPBS BCPMSCCT0 BCPMSCCT0R20 BCPMSCCT1 BCPMSCCT1R20 BCPMSCCT3 BCPMSCCT3R20 Table 4.34: Additional Accessories for use with BCPM Products Description BCPM circuit board cover CT repair kit for solid core BCPM (includes one CT) Additional 100A split core CT for use with solid core repair kit Modbus to BACnet protocol converter Flat Ribbon cable (quantity 1) for BCPM, length = 0.45 m Flat Ribbon cable (quantity 1) for BCPM, length = 1.2 m Flat Ribbon cable (quantity 1) for BCPM, length = 1.5 m Flat Ribbon cable (quantity 1) for BCPM, length = 1.8 m Flat Ribbon cable (quantity 1) for BCPM, length = 2.4 m Flat Ribbon cable (quantity 1) for BCPM, length = 3.0 m Flat Ribbon cable (quantity 1) for BCPM, length = 6.1 m Round Ribbon cable (quantity 1) for BCPM, length = 1.2 m Round Ribbon cable (quantity 1) for BCPM, length = 3 m Round Ribbon cable (quantity 1) for BCPM, length = 6.1 m Round Ribbon cable (quantity 1) for BCPM, length = 0.5 m Round Ribbon cable (quantity 1) for BCPM, length = 0.8 m Catalog Number BCPMCOVERS BCPMREPAIR H6803R-0100 4 E8951 CBL008 CBL016 CBL017 CBL018 CBL019 CBL020 CBL021 CBL022 CBL023 CBL024 CBL031 CBL033 I D N A G N R O T I N O M R E W O P L O R T N O C Table 4.31: 1/3 V Low-Voltage Split-Core CTs for Aux Inputs (Mains) Amperage Rating Inside Dimensions Catalog Number 10 x 11 mm 16 x 20 mm 32 x 32 mm 30 x 31 mm 30 x 31 mm 30 x 31 mm 62 x 73 mm 62 x 73 mm 62 x 73 mm 62 x 139 mm 62 x 139 mm 62 x 139 mm 62 x 139 mm 62 x 139 mm 62 x 139 mm LVCT00050S 50A LVCT00101S 200A LVCT00202S 200A LVCT00102S 100A LVCT00202S 200A LVCT00302S 300A LVCT00403S 400A LVCT00603S 600A LVCT00803S 800A LVCT00804S 800A LVCT01004S 1000A LVCT01204S 1200A LVCT01604S 1600A LVCT02004S 2000A LVCT02404S 2400A Table 4.32: 1/3 V Low-Voltage Solid-Core CTs for Aux Inputs (Mains) Amperage Rating Inside Dimensions 50A 100A 200A 400A 10 mm 10 mm 25 mm 31 mm Catalog Number LVCT20050S LVCT20100S LVCT20202S LVCT20403S © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 4-25 11/10/2017


page 128

PowerLogic™ Energy and Power Management Systems PowerLogic Multi-Circuit Meter schneider-electric.us 3-phase, 4-wire (with neutral current 4 C O N T R O L P O W E R M O N I T O R N G A N D I PowerLogic Multi-Circuit Meter Designed for OEM style placement in electrical distribution equipment the MCM8364 is configurable to meter 1 or 3 phases of up to eight individual loads, six loads if neutral monitoring is required. The MCM will monitor up to 10,000 amps per service using standard 5 Amp CTs. All of the metered circuits must share a common voltage source. The MCM8364 is a great solution for monitoring critical power distribution equipment and provides 24 different electrical metering quantities plus an additional nine Modbus register alarms. With one RS-485 connection, the multi-circuit meter provides Modbus RTU communications output that communicates to each individual metered circuit. Up to 30 multi-circuit meters can be addressed on the same Modbus network. The multi-circuit meter can provide warnings to the central monitoring computer via its Modbus output using the MNode software provided or can be integrated into PowerLogic SMS software. The MCM also works with the submeter display as shown below. Electrical Data: Energy Consumption (kWHr), Real Power (kW), Reactive Power (kVAR), Apparent Power (kVA), Power Factor Total, Voltage, L-L, avg. of 3 phases, Voltage, L-N, avg. of 3 phases, Current, average of 3 phases, Real Power (kW) phase A, B, & C, Power Factor, phase A, B,&C, Line to Line Voltage, phase A-B, B-C, A-C, Line to Neutral Voltage, phase A-N, B-N, C-N, Current, phase A, B, & C, Frequency (measured from phase A) (Hz). Modbus Alarms: Over Voltage, Under Voltage, Over Current, Under Current, Over kVA, Under kVA, Phase Loss A, Phase Loss B, Phase Loss C Table 4.35: Description Catalog No. MCM8364 Multi-Circuit Meter 8364 PowerLogic Submeter Display The PowerLogic Submeter Display (SMD) is a comprehensive electrical submetering display that provides a view of electrical parameters from multiple metering products with one networked LCD. In addition to viewing system data on the display itself, you can also view data on a remote PC via a network connection. Touch pad buttons provide a convenient way to view downstream devices on the power-monitoring network. The display is RS-485 Modbus RTU compatible. It has additional RS-485 and RS-232 Modbus ports for networking to additional displays or to a master PC. The submeter display is compatible with the following metering devices: BCM, BCPM, EM3500, MCM, & Enercept™ meters. Table 4.36: Description Submeter display mounted in enclosure Open style submeter display, no enclosure Catalog No. SMD SMD OPN Submeter Display 4-26 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 129

Communications schneider-electric.us Class 3030 PowerLogic™ Energy and Power Management Systems Com’X Data Loggers and Energy Servers Powerful data logging with flexible communication options Connect your entire power system with Com’X data loggers and energy servers. Com’X surpasses conventional gateways and data loggers by incorporating multiple capabilities into one compact device. In addition to being a real-time gateway to downstream devices, Com’x logs all essential WAGES and environmental readings through a broad range of downstream data feeds and local I/O. Logged data can be automatically pushed to a hosted platform or downloaded for report generation. Ethernet and Wi-Fi ready, Com’x leverages on the building’s existing IT infrastructure to reduce cost. Its GPRS capability makes it ideal for sites with no access to IT networks. Easy configuration and commissioning Configuration and commissioning is made easy by automatic device detection, and IP address setting and allocation. No additional software is needed for the intuitive, web- based configuration pages. A device library enables quick configuration for more than 70 Modbus devices and also provides for custom configuration of additional devices. Configuration via Wi-Fi lets technicians use tablets or notebooks to work comfortably away from switchboard rooms. Com’X 510 Energy Sever Com’X 510 Energy Dashboard Embedded energy management software The Com’X 510 Energy Server further includes embedded web pages that display data in a meaningful way so you can make informed decisions about your energy usage. Web pages display real-time data in easy to understand tabular and summary formats. In addition, you can access simple analysis of historical data in bar graph or trending formats. Pages are accessible via any standard web browser without plug-ins or additional components. Table 4.37: Com'X Data Loggers, Energy Services, and Accessories Description Catalog Number Com’X200 Data logger with internal 100 to 230 VAC power supply Com’X210 Data logger, requires 24 VDC power supply Com’X510 Energy server, requires 24 VDC power supply Wi-Fi USB stick Zigbee USB stick GPRS modem with SIM card GPRS modem without SIM card External GPRS antenna EBX200 EBX210 EXB510 EBXAGPRS EBXAANT5M EBXAUSBWIFI EXBAUSBZIGBEE EBXAGPRSSIM I D N A G N R O T I N O M R E W O P L O R T N O C 4 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 4-27 11/10/2017


page 130

PowerLogic™ Energy and Power Management Systems Communications — Link150 Ethernet Gateway Class 3030 schneider-electric.us Link150 Ethernet Gateway Communications for high-speed access to critical information The Link150 gateway provides fast, reliable Ethernet connectivity in the most demanding applications, from a single building to a multi-site enterprise. This gateway supports meters, monitors, protective relays, trip units, motor controls and other devices that need to communicate data quickly and efficiently. It is your simple, cost-effective serial line to full Ethernet connectivity. Applications • Energy management • Power distribution • Building automation • Factory automation Link150 Ethernet Gateway Link150 has embedded web pages for easy setup and maintenance Security • Secure user interface including user’s name and password for login • Advanced security features to allow users to specify which Modbus TCP/IP master devices may access attached serial slave devices – Modbus TCP/IP filtering feature – Allows user to specify the level of access for each master device as Read-only or Full access • Web pages provide easy configuration and setup Advantages • Easy to install and setup • Easy to maintain • Compatible with Schneider Electric software offerings (StruxureWare Power • Compatible with Com'X 200/210 and Com'X 510 Energy Servers • Reliable Modbus to Ethernet protocol conversion Table 4.38: Ethernet Gateway Monitoring Expert, StruxureWare PowerSCADA Expert, etc.) Type Link150 Ethernet gateway Modbus 3 m cable RJ–45 to free wires Catalog Number EGX150 VW3A8306D30 Modbus 3 m cable RJ–45 to free wires 4-28 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 131

Engineering Services schneider-electric.us PowerLogic™ Energy and Power Management Systems • Motor starting/torque-speed • Safe motor re-energization • Harmonic analysis Consulting and Analysis Power System Engineering The Square D Power System Engineering team offers a wide range of engineering services to improve the safety, efficiency and reliability of your power distribution system. The team is comprised of registered professional engineers, safety trained and equipped, to perform a variety of engineering functions. Power System Studies The Square D Power System Engineering Team provides expertise for a variety of electrical power system studies. Some of the more common system studies include… • Short-circuit analysis • Time-current coordination • Motor starting/voltage drop Arc Flash Analysis Square D offers on-site services to perform arc flash analysis for a facility, complex, office, or campus. An Arc flash analysis is used to determine … • Flash Protection Boundary • Incident Energy Value • Hazard/Risk Category Features of Square D arc flash analysis include… • Time current coordination analysis showing both existing and recommended over/current device settings • Short-circuit study to ensure adequacy of equipment • Onsite verification and documentation of equipment • Arc flash labels (populated with the results of the arc • Arc flash label affixation • NFPA 70E—Safe Workplace Practices Training provided by OSHA authorized outreach instructors • Recommendations and solutions to reduce potential • Appropriate Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) • Low cost arc flash reduction methods • Transient analysis • Power factor correction analysis • Other system specific analysis arc flash hazards flash analysis) problems Power Quality Studies Square D offers onsite power quality engineering studies and solutions to eliminate process disruptions, power system shutdowns, and equipment damage due to electrical power system disturbances. A power quality study is used to... • Determine compliance with the IEEE 519- • Reduce economic effects of poor power quality • Identify disturbances originating on electric utility Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electrical Power Systems guidelines system and improvements to reduce the number and severity • Identify most cost-effective solution to power quality • Solve process disruptions due to power disturbances Power System Assessment Square D offers engineering services to meet a variety of power system needs … • Basic codes and standards • Protective coordination • Maintenance program review • Recommendations for power • Power quality troubleshooting • Power factor and harmonics • Electrical safety hazards • Short-circuit withstand overview • Single-line documentation of • Power monitoring recommendations • Loading measurements power system and analysis compliance assessment system optimization analysis Power System Improvement Projects Square D offers engineering services for … • New equipment installation • Existing equipment modification • Ground Fault Schemes for multiple source distribution systems • High Resistance Grounding (HRG) Conversion • Automatic Transfer Control Schemes & Generator Operations Square D professional engineers - safety trained and equipped - will listen to your concerns and goals, define the problem or enhancement, and engineer the solution that best satisfies your needs. For additional information on power system engineering services and pricing, contact your nearest Square D/Schneider Electric office. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 4-29 I D N A G N R O T I N O M R E W O P L O R T N O C 4 11/10/2017


page 132

PowerLogic™ Energy and Power Management Systems Engineering Services schneider-electric.us Advanced Microgrid Solutions and Distributed Energy Resource Management With our custom solutions and proven expertise, we deliver advanced microgrids that offer the advantages of grid independence – without forfeiting the benefits of being part of the central grid. Our flexible microgrid architecture features a scalable set of grid components designed to efficiently manage your entire energy infrastructure, including distributed generation, energy storage, and load demand, while giving you the ability to easily adapt the system to your changing needs. Learn more at www.microgrids. schneider-electric.us. Microgrids deliver energy flexibility 4 C O N T R O L P O W E R M O N I T O R N G A N D I Industrial Energy Efficiency Schneider Electric Certified Energy Managers (CEM’s) work on-site with knowledgeable plant personnel to develop a long-term, comprehensive, “Energy Action Plan”, that serves as the blueprint for energy savings. Unlike performance contracts or one-time energy audits, the Total Energy ControlSM program offers a strategic partnership for energy-intensive industrials who want to improve energy efficiency. • Total Energy Control – Comprehensive integration of all three areas affecting energy efficiency — Procurement (electricity and gas) — Demand management — Optimization of process and plant utilities • Program deliverables: — Long-term Energy Action Plan — Energy efficiency projects — Ongoing accountability for results Engineered Solutions Schneider Electric provides an engineered solution approach to your specific power system applications. Our total solutions for power monitoring and power system controls allow greater safety, reliability, and energy efficiency of your power systems. As a long standing industry leader in Power Monitoring and Control Systems, we understand your power system requirements and needs. All of our Engineered Solutions are tailored to your specific system requirements. Schneider Electric is your total Solution provider. Power Monitoring Applications Increased Reliability and Energy Efficiency are key results produced from our Power Monitoring Applications. Schneider Electric power monitoring applications provide detailed reporting, testing and analysis capabilities for your systems and related components. • EPSS Emergency Power Supply Systems– The PowerLogic EPSS Test Report provides information regarding the health and status of the emergency power supply system, including automatic transfer switches and generators. • SER Sequence of Events Recording– The PowerLogic Sequence of Events Recorder (SER) Module is a root-cause analysis tool for rapid response for problem resolution that is ideal for pinpointing the cause of a service disruption in very large complex power systems. • WAGES Water, Air Gas, Electric, Steam– PowerLogic energy and power management systems can provide instantaneous readings, alarm notifications, and graphical diagrams for monitoring electrical and piped utilities (Water, Air, Gas, Electric, Steam). • ENM Event Notification Module– The PowerLogic Event Notification Module allows automatic paging to alphanumeric pagers, cell phones and PCs. Power System Control Applications Automated solutions for increased Reliability and Energy Efficiency: Schneider Electric engineers provide Power System Control Applications with automated solutions for addressing your system reliability and efficiency control needs. Our offer covers Automatic Throwover Schemes, Load Shedding/Peak Shaving, and Load Preservation and Mircrogrids. • Automatic Throwover Systems – Automatic selection of available utility or generator • Load Shedding/Peak Shaving – Control peak demand levels or ensure service continuity to critical load or operate breakers in accordance with user specified sequences and time delays such as bringing large motors online across several billing kw demand periods to avoid demand penalties. • Load Preservation – Fast acting sophisticated control systems designed to stabilize critical power systems to the greatest extend possible by monitoring frequency and power sources from utility plus generator capacity versus total circuit load. sources to maintain service continuity to connected loads. PowerLogic Engineers provide graphic solutions for realtime monitoring of power systems. 4-30 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 133

Integration and Equipment PowerLogic™ Energy and Power Management Systems schneider-electric.us PowerLogic Engineers design power control systems that meet your operational requirements Startup System Integration System Design and Engineering Our Square D Engineering Services solution specialists can work with you to design or upgrade your existing system to best achieve your energy and power management objectives and informational needs. With expertise in electrical systems, communications, and automatic control systems, we can integrate, install, and commission your system for optimal performance. • System Design and Bill of Material Recommendations • Power Monitoring and Control • WAGES (Water, Air, Gas, Electric, Steam) • Enterprise web-based monitoring • Specification development, drawings, documentation • Enclosure panel design and build • Metering Connection Verification/Testing • Power distribution automation • On-Site Installation Assistance, Component Configuration & • Turn-key project management • Third Party Device and communication interfaces • Configured Workstations, User Software Interfaces • Interactive Graphic Design to mimic facility layout, one-lines, • Custom Software, Reports & Applications – Billing and Event For additional information, contact your nearest Square D / Schneider Electric office. Factory Assembled Equipment Square D™ PowerLogic™ Factory Assembled Equipment offers a wide range of designs for metering, communications, and control applications to simplify retrofit installations. Our equipment is designed to order as a free-standing or wallmounted system. With PowerLogic™ Factory Assembled Equipment, you’ll receive professionally crafted, factory tested, pre-wired equipment that will greatly improve the speed of your system startup. All backed by the Square D™ quality standard of excellence. • Assemblies include meters & devices wired to terminal blocks, disconnects, and shorting blocks or test switches • Tailored to any system voltage : – 208/120 V, 480/277 V & 600/347 V Wye – 240 V, 480 V & 600 V Delta – Utilization of PT's required for higher voltage levels PowerLogic Engineers specialize in the design and setup of Emergency Power Supply Systems (EPSS). equipment status Notification installation • Wall mountable and easy to install using concealed holes in the back of the enclosure. • Complete with necessary documentation and mounting hardware for quick and easy • Carbon steel construction, with industry standard ANSI 61 gray powder coat finish • Equipped with concealed hinged door, and universal pad-lockable latch. • Custom engraved nameplates available for all units. Table 4.39: Industrial Enclosure Types 12 & 4, UL & CUL 508A Listed Analog Inputs Available Meter Types Analog Outputs N/A ION6200 N/A PM5563RD N/A N/A Up to 4 / Meter Up to 2 / Meter PM8244 Up to 1 / Meter Up to 1 / Meter CM4000T Up to 4 / Meter Up to 4 / Meter ION 7550 & 7560 • Supports Single or Multiple Voltage Sources for Indoor (Types 1 and 12) & Outdoor • Available with 1–4 meters per panel. Serial & Ethernet Communications are options • EGX & ION RTU Communication Enclosures with 1–4 devices per panel also Digital Outputs Up to 2/ Meter Up to 2 / Meter Up to 5 / Meter Up to 7 / Meter Up to 7 / Meter N/A Up to 4 / Meter Up to 15 / Meter Up to 8 / Meter Up to 16 / Meter (Type 4) applications for all units Digital Inputs available © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 4-31 I D N A G N R O T I N O M R E W O P L O R T N O C 4 11/10/2017


page 134

PowerLogic™ Energy and Power Management Systems Integration and Equipment schneider-electric.us units. and 36S for E5600. 2 Digital Inputs and 2 Digital Outputs. Light Industrial Enclosure Type 1, UL & CUL 508A Listed • Available for the following meter types: PM8244, PM5563RD, and ION6200 • Supports Single Voltage Source only for Indoor (Type 1) applications. • Available with 1–12 meters per panel. Serial Communications are standard for all • No Digital or Analog I/O is available for this option. Service Entrance/Utility Socket Enclosure Type 3R, UL & CUL 508A Listed • Available for ION8600 only, with up to 3 Digital Inputs and 4 Digital Outputs and E5600 • Supports Single Voltage Source only for Indoor & Outdoor (Type 3R) applications. • Units are Ring Type with removable cover. • Available with 1 meter per panel. Serial & Ethernet Communications options available. • Supports Form 9S, 35S, 36S, 39S and 76S configurations for ION8600 and forms 9S • Options available for remote mounted CTs • Options available for integrated, bar type CTs • Optional Test Switch. Additional engineered to order products are available for a wide variety of design solutions. • Switchgear Transfer Control Panels • Generator Control Panels • Load Shed Control Panels • Sequence of Events Recording (SER) Panels • Control System Mimic Panels • Lighting Control Interface Panels • Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) Control Panels (Hot Standby, Relay Control, • Emergency Power Supply Systems (EPSS) Control Panels • Water, Air, Gas, Electrical, and Steam (WAGES) Monitoring Panels • Input Status Monitoring & Alarming Panels • Remote Annunciator Control Panels • Remote Operator Control Panels • Serial, Ethernet, and Cellular Wireless Systems • Server Rack and Network Equipment (Servers, Switches, UPS’s) for Energy • Industrialized PC’s, Touch Screens (Magelis), and Human Machine Interfaces (HMI’s) • Designed to fit any environment – Indoor (Type 1 & 12) & Outdoor (Type 3R & 4) For additional information and pricing please contact your local PowerLogic sales specialist or PowerLogic Inside Sales Support at 615-287-3535. Equipment pricing and literature available for download on our website at www.powerlogic.com/ products/enclosures. To better serve you please have the following information on hand when calling. • Enclosure type (Indoor or Outdoor) and Environment details (Corrosive or Non- • Power System Voltage Level and Type (Direct Current (DC) or Alternating Current • Digital & Analog Input and Output requirements • Device Type and Quantity per enclosure • Ethernet and Serial Communication Requirements • For Drawout Retrofits, need existing cradle type (i.e. GE, Westinghouse, etc.) with Custom System Graphics. Data Concentration etc. ...) Corrosive) (AC)) Management Systems. applications 4 C O N T R O L P O W E R M O N I T O R N G A N D I 4-32 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 135

Integration and Equipment PowerLogic™ Energy and Power Management Systems schneider-electric.us provides future system expansion. PowerLogic High Density Metering High Density Metering (HDM) is engineered to answer the metering and billing needs of multi-tenant properties: Features and Benefits • HDM comes standard with PowerLogic PM5000 series. • Lockable, 16 gauge NEMA Type 1 enclosure provides tamper-resistant security. • NEMA Type 3R also available. Please consult factory. • Mounting channel and surface-mount flanges simplify installation. • Factory installed cover plates are included to cover empty meter spaces. • Factory installed wiring harness simplifies installation of additional meters and • Each High Density Metering cabinet is provided with RS485 Modbus® or Modbus Ethernet TCP communications. For wireless communications, please consult factory. • Supports 120/208V & 277/480V WYE, and 240V & 480V Delta System Types, 1Ph or • CTs required. Must select separately. High Density Meter System Includes: • Enclosure • Power Meters, installed • Installation bulletin for Enclosure • Wall hanging bracket • Installation bulletin for Meters 3Ph Number of Meters [9] 1–8 1–8 1 1–8 Enclosure Rating Type 1 or Type 3R Type 1 or Type 3R Type 1 or Type 3R Type 1 or Type 3R Description High Density Meter Enclosure with PM5110 meters; Modbus RTU serial communications; Ideal for single or three phase indoor commercial building applications High Density Meter Enclosure with PM5330 meters; Modbus RTU serial communications; Ideal for single or three phase indoor commercial building applications High Density Meter Enclosure with PM5340 meters; Modbus TCP Ethernet Communications; Ideal for single or three phase indoor commercial building applications High Density Meter Enclosure with PM5560 meters; Dual wiring for both Modbus RTU serial and Modbus TCP Ethernet communicaions; Ideal for single or three phase indoor commercial building applications High Density Metering factory assembled enclosure for multi-tenant properties Table 4.40: High Density Metering Cabinet Enclosure Size Category Meter HDM HDM HDM HDM PM5110 PM5330 PM5340 PM5560 1, 4 or 8 1, 4 or 8 1 1, 4 or 8 I D N A G N R O T I N O M R E W O P Table 4.41: Accessories Description 50 Amp HDM Solid Core Current Transformer, 1.13” window size 100 Amp HDM Solid Core Current Transformer, 1.13” window size 125 Amp HDM Solid Core Current Transformer, 1.13” window size 150 Amp HDM Solid Core Current Transformer, 1.13” window size 200 Amp HDM Solid Core Current Transformer, 1.13” window size 250 Amp HDM Solid Core Current Transformer, 1.13” window size 400 Amp HDM Solid Core Current Transformer, 1.13” window size L O R T N O C Catalog No. HDMCT050S1 HDMCT100S1 HDMCT125S1 HDMCT150S1 HDMCT200S1 HDMCT250S1 HDMCT400S1 4 [9] Meters Ordering Notes: Please indicate the number of meters to be pre-installed when placing your order. You may order any number of meters in the enclosure between one and the maximum number of meters each cabinet will hold. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 4-33 7.42[189]4.75[121]7.40[188]7.12[180.85]8.00[203]1.43[36]1.95[50]11.33[288]Side ViewFront ViewBack ViewTop View1X Enclosure Dimensionsin.[mm]Dual Dimensions:Top View for 1X and 4X4X Enclosure Dimensions8X Enclosure Dimensions7.42[189]Side ViewBack ViewFront View7.12[181]8.5[215.9]0.33[8.382]21.13[536.7]24.75[628.7]16.0[406.4]14.00[355.6]14.88[378]0.25 / [6.4]7.38[187.5]0.78 / [19.8]0.38 / [9.652]21.88 / [555.8]0.38 / [9.7]4.8[122]13.8[350]13.8[350]1.95[50]1.43[36]30.8[782]11/10/2017


page 136

4 C O N T R O L P O W E R M O N I T O R N G A N D I PowerLogic™ Energy and Power Management Systems Support Services schneider-electric.us Technical Engineering Support Services No power management system is complete without it. Technical support should go beyond basic troubleshooting. Continued optimization and maintenance extends the life of your system and ensures it’s working efficiently and effectively. Our number one priority is to help you protect your investment and get the most out of it. • Proactive diagnostics and maintenance • Access to our self-help web portal and knowledge base • Email, telephone, and remote VPN troubleshooting assistance • On-demand and in-person training A variety of service levels available based on your needs and budget, plus options add- ons such as onsite maintenance or 24x7 support, allows you to build the support that’s right for your system. Premium + Our most comprehensive service level is ideal for large organizations with mission critical systems, multiple locations and/or in-house energy management expertise. Premium Great for the experienced manager with complex power management systems and/or multiple locations, you can choose Premium support and partner with a dedicated engineer to help you drive improved system performance. Priority Sign up for Priority support and benefit from the expertise of our senior technical engineers. They can remotely connect to your system and resolve issues while you observe or work on other tasks. Standard We stand behind our products. If you have the time and knowledge to do-it-yourself, then we’re happy to assist you with troubleshooting or answer your questions at no extra cost. Priority Support: Excellent Service, Free Software Upgrades, Training Discounts & More! Energy Performance Services Unleash Your System’s True Potential with the Power of Partnership Energy Performance Services helps you improve and sustain energy performance, reduce costs, and support compliance efforts. From facility insight to optimization solutions, let us customize an energy management program that’s right for you. Contact your representative and ask them about power quality analysis or an energy health check. Solutions to fit your needs: • Facility Insight Solutions—These core energy health checks designed to evaluate your • Optimization Solutions—Let our team of experts monitor or fine-tune your systems to Choose from remote or onsite solutions to ensure sustained results year over year. Various funding options available. Visit www.schneider-electric.com/eps or contact us at 615-287-3535. Power Management University (PMU) Attending a PMU sponsored course will enable attendees to better utilize their Schneider-Electric power monitoring solution thus enabling them to realize energy savings as quick as possible. PMU offers a variety of options with instructor led options being 80% hands-on, with each student having their own lab workstation. Below is a list of the different training options offered by PMU. maximize energy savings, efficiency and power quality. existing systems Course Factory Courses: Software Solutions Power Monitoring Fundamentals Bundle (includes 12-mo. On-Demand Campus access) Power Monitoring Fundamentals (without 12-mo. On-demand Campus access) Power Monitoring Designer Power Monitoring Administrator Other Software Courses Hardware Installation and Troubleshooting PowerSCADA Expert Administrator Online Training Solutions On-Demand Campus (one-year subscription—online access) SMSTrainer (one-year subscription—online access) EEMTrainer (one-year subscription—online access) webED, custom webinar training for up to five people (call or email for more information) Course No. 3000PMUFUNDSPMCR 3000PMUFUNDSPM 3000PMUPROG 3000PMUADMINSPM 3000PLUC100 3000PMUPLSADMIN Length 4 Days 4 Days 4 Days 4 Days 4 Days 4 Days 3000PMUDEMAND12 3000PMUSMSTRAINER 3000PMUEEMTRAINER 3000PLUCWEBCST 12 months 12 months 12 months 3–4 hours 4-34 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 137

Series 20, 40, 60, and 80 Features Sepam Digital Protective Relays schneider-electric.us The Sepam Range Sepam protection relays are time-tested, high-performance devices that ensure dependability. This range of products was designed with a simple idea in mind: All users should be able to find a solution corresponding exactly to their needs with the right balance between performance, simplicity and cost. With Series 10, 20, 40 and 80, the Sepam range does just this. This family of relays offers a solution for every application need, specifically targeting industrial installations. These multi-functional protection devices allow an easy and hassle-free startup with simple-to-use programming software. Sepam relays also comply with the latest communication protocols on the market, including IEC61850, DNP3 and Modbus. In addition, all relays within this range come with a standard 10 year warranty and conformal coating for protection against harsh environments. Features and Benefits • Compact devices with clearly defined connection terminals allowing for easy • User-friendly software with built-in manuals for every relay and support for offline • Application-specific design ensuring appropriate protection for any given application • Low power CT options for the use of relays on new installations where the load is low • Field-upgradable technology allows user to stay up-to-date on the latest hardware and programming installation software I D N A G N R O T I N O M R E W O P L O R T N O C 4 Sepam Series 10 The Sepam Series 10 relays are suitable for basic protection applications involving current metering. Applications covered: • Substation • Transformer Sepam Series 20 The Series 20 consists of high-performing solutions suited for standard applications requiring current or voltage metering. Applications covered: • Substation • Transformer • Motor • Busbar Sepam Series 40 The Series 40 family of protection relays are designed for demanding applications requiring current, voltage and/or frequency metering. Applications covered: • Substation • Transformer • Motor • Generator Sepam Series 80 The Series 80 relays are for custom applications requiring enhanced protection of electrical distribution networks. Applications covered: • Substation • Transformer • Motor • Generator • Busbar • Capacitor Sepam Series 10 Sepam Series 20 and 40 Sepam Series 80 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 4-35 11/10/2017


page 138

Sepam Digital Protective Relays Series 20, 40, 60, and 80 Features Table 4.42: Protection Configurations Protection Configurations Four relay series with increasing protection capabilities for six types of applications to provide all possible protection configurations schneider-electric.us Protection Functions Characteristics Logic input/outputs Temperature sensors Channels Communication Ports Control Other 4 C O N T R O L P O W E R M O N I T O R N G A N D I Series 10 Series 20 Series 40 Series 80 49RMS, 50/51, 50G/ 51G, 50N/51N, 68, 86 26/63, 27/27S, 27D, 27R, 30, 37, 38/49T, 46, 48, 49RMS, 50/51, 50BF, 50G/51G, 50N/ 51N, 51LR, 59, 59N, 66, 68, 79, 81H, 81L, 81R, 86, 94/69, CPLU 50/51, CPLU 50N/51N 25, 26/63, 27/27S, 27D, 27R, 30, 32R, 32Q/40, 37, 38/49T, 46, 47, 48, 49RMS, 50/51, 50BF, 50G/51G, 50N/51N, 50V/51V, 51LR, 59, 59N, 60/60FL, 66, 67, 67N/ 67NC, 68, 79, 81H, 81L, 81R, 86, 94/69, 21FL, 46BC, CPLU 50/51, CPLU 50N/51N 12, 14, 21B, 24, 25, 26/63, 27/27S, 27D, 27R, 30, 32P, 32Q/40, 37, 37P, 38/49T, 40, 46, 47, 48, 49RMS, 50/27, 50/51, 50BF, 50G/51G, 50N/51N, 50V/51V, 51C, 51LR, 59, 59N, 60/60FL, 64G, 64REF, a 66, 67, 67N/67NC, 68, 74, 78PS, 79, 81H, 81L, 81R, 86, 87M, 87T, 94/96 Inputs 0-4 Outputs 3-7 Current 3I + Io 0 — — 0–1 Inputs 0–10 Outputs 4–8 0–8 Current 3I + Io Voltage 3 V + Vo LPCT [1] 1–2 Inputs 0–10 Outputs 4–8 0–16 Current 3I + Io Voltage 3 V + Vo LPCT [1] 1–2 Inputs 0–42 Outputs 5–23 0–16 Current 2x 3I + 2x Io Voltage 2x 3 V + Vo LPCT [1] 2–4 ModBus, IEC 103 ModBus, IEC 103, DNP3, IEC 61850 ModBus, IEC 103, DNP3, IEC 61850 ModBus, IEC 103, DNP3, IEC 61850 — — Matrix [2] — — — — — Matrix [2] — — — Redundancy — Matrix [2] Logic equation editor — — Backup 48 hours (capacitor) Redundancy Goose Message Matrix [2] Logic equation editor Logipam [3] Front memory cartridge with settings Backup lithium battery [4] Table 4.43: ANSI Codes Definition Overspeed (2 set points) Underspeed (2 set points) Underimpedance Fault Locator Overfluxing (V/Hz) Synch-check Thermostat / Buchholz Undervoltage (L-L/L-N) Positive-sequence undervoltage Remanent undervoltage Annunciation Directional real overpower Directional reactive overpower Code 12 14 21B 21FL 24 25 26/63 27/27S 27D 27R 30 32P 32Q/40 37 37P 38/49T 40 46 46BC 47 48 49RMS 50/27 50/51 50BF Phase undercurrent Directional active underpower Temperature mounting Field loss (underimpedance) Unbalance/negative sequence Broken conductor detection Negative sequence overvoltage Excessive starting time Thermal overload Inadvertent energization Phase overcurrent Breaker failure 50G/51G Ground sensitive Code 50N/51N 50V/51V 51C 51LR 59 59 59N 60/60FL 64G 64REF 66 67 67N/67NC 68 74 78PS 79 81H 81L 81R 86 87M 87T 94/69 CLPU 50/51 CLPU 50N/ 51N Definition Ground fault Voltage restrained overcurrent Capacitor bank unbalance Locked rotor Overvoltage (L-L or L-N) Overvoltage (L-L) Neutral voltage displacement CT/VT supervision 100% stator earth fault Restricted earth fault Starts per hour Directional phase overcurrent Directonal ground fault Logic discrimination / zone selective interlocking Circuit connnection supervision Pole slip Recloser (4 cycles) Overfrequency Underfrequency Rate of change of frequency (df/dt) Latching / acknowledgement Machine differential Two-winding transformer differential Circuit breaker / contactor control Cold load pick-up with phase overcurrent protection Cold load pick-up with earth fault protection LPCT: low-power current transducer complying with standard IEC 60044-8. Control matrix for simple assignment of information from the protection, control and monitoring functions. Logipam ladder language (PC programming environment) to make full use of Sepam Series 80 functions. Standard lithium battery 1/2 AA format 3,6 V front face exchangeable. [1] [2] [3] [4] 4-36 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 139

VAMP V321 schneider-electric.us Arc Flash Protection and Mitigation Systems market. VAMP V321 Arc Flash Mitigation System • VAMP V321 is the fastest and most advanced arc flash mitigation system on the • As a fast-acting arc flash mitigation system, VAMP V321 reduces the level of incident • VAMP V321 is a modular system consisting of a central unit, input/ouput (I/O) units energy within a switchgear, thereby reducing equipment damage. and arc flash sensors. Its modular design gives it the flexibility to expand and adapt to various applications in an electrical distribution system. VAMP V321 Arc Flash Mitigation System System Features • Operates on light and/or overcurrent conditions • Operating time of 2 ms or less • Supports up to 16 I/O units and 170 arc flash sensors • Four programmable arc protection zones per central unit • Fully configurable using VAMPSet software • Mimic bus display • Supports nearly every communication protocol on the market • Phase current measuring • Ground fault current measuring • Circuit breaker fail protection (50BF) VAMP V321 I/O Units The I/O units are used to connect sensors to the central unit in the VAMP V321 system. These units are classified as either light sensor or current I/O units. I D N A G N R O T I N O M R E W O P L O R T N O C 4 sensors and 1 trip contact sensors and 3 trip contacts • VAM 12L, VAM 12LD: Light-sensing point sensor I/O units with connections for 10 arc • VAM 10L, VAM 10LD: Light-sensing point sensor I/O units with connections for 10 arc • VAM 3L, VAM 3LX: Light-sensing fiber arc sensor I/O units with connections for 3 fiber • VAM 4C, VAM 4CD: Dedicated I/O units used to measure current from alternative All VAMP V321 I/O units provide active indication when appropriately placed inside the switchgear enclosure. They are connected to each other using intra-unit cabling supplied by Schneider Electric. loops and 1 trip contact locations VAMP V321 Sensors and Accessories VA1EH-x VA1DA-x © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 4-37 VAM 12LD I/O UnitVAM 10LD I/O UnitVAM 4CD I/O UnitVAM 12L I/O UnitVAM 10L I/O UnitVAM 4C I/O UnitVAM 3LX I/O UnitVAM 3L I/O Unit11/10/2017


page 140

Arc Flash Protection and Mitigation Systems VAMP V321 schneider-electric.us compartment window. • Point sensor VA1EH-x (pipe) Installed typically in the tube or next to the • Point sensor VA1DA-x (surface) Compartment wall or mounting plate installation. • Arc SLm-x Used when a large number of compartments are to be monitored. • VX001 Modular Cable Intra-unit cabling that is used to connect the I/O units to the VAMP V321 is currently available in solution-based projects. Please contact a Schneider Electric representative for more information. USEnergySalesSupport@Schneider-Electric.com central unit. Arc SLm-x VX001 4 C O N T R O L P O W E R M O N I T O R N G A N D I 4-38 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 141

Reactive Power Compensation and Harmonic Mitigation schneider-electric.us ReactiVar™ Reactive Power Compensation and Harmonic Mitigation Solutions How can reactive power compensation and harmonic mitigation solutions be part of your energy efficiency programs? Power factor is a measure of how efficiently you are using electricity. In an electric power system, a load with low power factor draws more current than a load with a high power factor for the same amount of real power transferred. Utility customers with a low power factor could realize an increase or penalty in their electric bill. Over time, these penalties may reach into thousands of dollars, depending upon the utility’s rate structure. Harmonics may disrupt normal operation of other devices and increase operating costs. Symptoms of problematic harmonic levels include overheating of transformers, motors and cables, thermal tripping of protective devices, logic faults of digital devices and drives. Harmonics can cause vibrations and noise in electrical machines (motors, transformers, reactors). The life span of many devices can be reduced by elevated operating temperature. Schneider Electric provides different solutions to meet different application requirements. Table 4.44: Descriptions, Applications, and Features Product Description LV MV Application ReactiVar Fixed Power Factor Capacitors ReactiVar Standard Automatic Power Factor Capacitor Banks (AV5000/MV5000) ReactiVar Anti-Resonant Automatic Power Factor Capacitor Banks (AV6000/MV6000) ReactiVar Harmonic Filtering Automatic Power Factor Capacitor Banks (AV7000/MV7000) ReactiVar Transient Free Reactive Compensation Systems (AT6000/AT7000) AccuSine™ (PCS) Active Harmonic Filter ReactiVar Hybrid VAR Compensator (HVC) X X X X X X X X X X X Power Factor correction Power Factor correction Power Factor Correction and Harmonics Filtering Power Factor Correction and Harmonics Filtering Power Factor Correction and Harmonics Filtering X [1] X [1] Active Harmonic Filtering Reactive Power Compensation (Real-time) Product Features Suited for applications where the load does not change or where the capacitor is switched with the load, such as on the load side of a motor contactor. Suited for centralized power factor correction in applications where plant loading is constantly changing, resulting in the need for varying amounts of reactive power. Designed for electrical networks with little or no harmonic content. Suited for centralized power factor correction in applications containing harmonic energies that would otherwise damage standard fixed or automatic capacitor banks. Provides power factor correction as well as harmonic filtering with specific harmonic order (5th) in industrial networks. Enhanced technology utilizing solid state switching elements that replace standard electromechanical contactors. Provides quicker response to load fluctuations with transient free capacitor switching. Monitors a distorted electrical signal and determines the frequency and magnitude of harmonics in the signal. Cancels the harmonic content with the dynamic injection of opposing phase current in the distribution system or individual load. Provides real-time reactive power compensation, and voltage support in networks with highly cyclical load profiles. [1] With transformer. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 4-39 I D N A G N R O T I N O M R E W O P L O R T N O C 4 11/10/2017


page 142

ReactiVar™ Low Voltage Fixed Capacitors schneider-electric.us Low Voltage Fixed Capacitors ReactiVar low voltage fixed capacitors are ideally suited for power factor correction applications where the load does not change or where the capacitor is switched with the load, such as on the load side of a motor starter. ReactiVar fixed capacitors are best suited for applications where there are no harmonic currents or voltages present. Application Note: Capacitors are low impedance path for the harmonic currents produced by variable frequency drives, motor soft starters, welders, computers, PLCs, robotics and other electronic equipment. These harmonic currents can cause the capacitor to overheat, and shorten its life. Furthermore, the resonant circuit formed by shunt capacitors coupled with system inductances (motors and transformers) can amplify harmonic currents and voltages in the electrical network. This amplification can cause nuisance fuse operation and/or damage to electrical equipment including capacitors and other electronic devices. If power factor correction is required in the network where harmonic is present, please contact your nearest Square D/Schneider Electric sales office for assistance. Table 4.46: Unfused 240 V 3 phase/ 60Hz unit [2] Recommended circuit protection device rating[4] Fuse 15 30 40 45 60 75 90 100 125 150 150 175 200 225 250 250 300 300 350 450 450 Circuit breaker 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 70 90 100 110 125 150 150 175 175 200 225 250 300 350 Recommended circuit protection device rating[4] kVAR rating @ 240 V 3 6 8 10 13 15 17.5 20 22.5 25 27.5 30 32.5 37.5 40 45 50 60 70 80 90 100 Regular duty Indoor NEMA 1 unit Catalog Number PFCD2003 PFCD2006 PFCD2008 PFCD2010 PFCD2013 PFCD2015 PFCD2017 PFCD2020 PFCD2023 PFCD2025 PFCD2028 PFCD2030 PFCD2033 PFCD2036 PFCD2040 PFCD2045 PFCD2050 PFCD2060 PFCD2070 PFCD2080 PFCD2090 PFCD2100 Rated Current (A) @ 240 V 7.2 15.6 20.5 24.1 31.3 36.1 40.9 48.1 55.3 61.4 68.6 72.2 79.4 86.6 96.2 108.3 120.3 144.4 169.6 194.9 218.9 239.4 Recom- mended copper wire size[3] AWG 14 10 8 8 6 6 6 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 1/0 2/0 2/0 4/0 300 kcmil 350 kcmil 400 kcmil 500 kcmil Recommended circuit protection device rating[4] Fuse 15 35 45 50 70 75 90 100 125 125 150 150 175 175 200 225 250 300 350 400 450 500 Circuit breaker 15 25 30 35 45 50 60 70 80 90 100 100 110 125 150 150 175 200 250 300 300 350 Table 4.48: Unfused 600V 3 phase/ 60Hz unit [2] high inrush current capabilities. and enhanced life (up to 130,000 hours). Features: • Heavy edge, slope metallizations and wave-cut profile to ensure • Special resistivity and profile metallization for better self-healing • Unique safety feature which disconnects the capacitors at the end • Less than 0.5w/kVAR losses, including discharage resistors. • Constructed with a dry type metalized polypropylene capacitor • Can be easily mounted inside panels or in a stand alone element with no liquid dielectrics. of their useful life electrically. configuration. copper wire unit Rated @ 208 V @ 208 V Current (A) kVAR rating Regular duty Indoor NEMA 1 Table 4.45: Unfused 208 V 3 phase/ 60Hz unit [2] Recom- mended size[3] AWG 14 10 10 8 8 6 4 4 3 2 2 1 1/0 2/0 2/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 Catalog Number PFCD1002 PFCD1005 PFCD1006 PFCD1007 PFCD1010 PFCD1013 PFCD1015 PFCD1017 PFCD1021 PFCD1025 PFCD1027 PFCD1030 PFCD1033 PFCD1037 PFCD1040 PFCD1045 PFCD1048 PFCD1053 PFCD1060 PFCD1070 PFCD1080 6.3 13.6 17.7 20.9 27.1 35.4 41.7 48 59.4 68.8 75.1 83.4 93.8 104.3 114.7 125.1 135.5 147 168.9 198.1 222 2 5 6 7.5 10 13 15 17 21 25 27 30 34 37.5 41 45 49 53 60 70 80 300 kcmil 350 kcmil 500 kcmil Table 4.47: Unfused 480V 3 phase/ 60Hz unit [2] Recommend- ed copper wire size[3] Regular duty NEMA 1 unit kVAR rating Current (A) Indoor Rated @ 480 V 6 8 10 12.5 15 17 20 25 27.5 30 33 35 40 45 50 60 65 70 75 80 90 100 125 150 175 200 Catalog Number PFCD4006 PFCD4008 PFCD4010 PFCD4012 PFCD4015 PFCD4017 PFCD4020 PFCD4025 PFCD4027 PFCD4030 PFCD4033 PFCD4035 PFCD4040 PFCD4045 PFCD4050 PFCD4060 PFCD4065 PFCD4070 PFCD4075 PFCD4080 PFCD4090 PFCD4100 PFCD4125 PFCD4150 PFCD4175 PFCD4200 @ 480 V 7.2 10.2 12 15 18 19.8 24 30 33 36 39.6 42 48 54 60 72 78 84 90 96 108 120 150 180 210 240 AWG 14 12 12 10 10 8 8 6 6 6 6 4 4 4 3 2 1 1 1/0 1/0 2/0 2/0 250 300 400 500 Fuse 15 20 25 30 40 40 50 60 70 75 80 90 100 110 125 150 175 175 200 200 225 250 300 400 450 500 Circuit breaker 15 15 20 25 30 30 35 45 50 50 60 60 70 75 90 100 110 125 125 150 150 175 225 250 300 350 kVAR rating 600 V 10 15 20 23 25 27 30 35 40 45 50 60 70 75 80 90 100 125 150 175 Regular duty Indoor NEMA 1 unit Catalog Number PFCD6010 PFCD6015 PFCD6020 PFCD6022 PFCD6025 PFCD6027 PFCD6030 PFCD6035 PFCD6040 PFCD6045 PFCD6050 PFCD6060 PFCD6070 PFCD6075 PFCD6080 PFCD6090 PFCD6100 PFCD6125 PFCD6150 PFCD6175 Rated Current (A) @ 600 V 9.6 14.4 19.2 22.1 24 26 28.8 33.6 38.4 43.2 48 57.6 67.2 72 76.8 86.4 96 120 144 168 Recom- mended size[3] copper wire AWG 12 10 10 8 8 8 8 6 6 4 4 3 3 2 1 1 1/0 3/0 4/0 300 kcmil For fused unit, add suffix “F” to the existing part number. Consult Schneider Electric sales office for pricing. Conductor should be copper and rated 90 °C min. Refer to local electrical codes for proper wire size Consult local electrical codes for proper sizing of molded case circuit breaker frame or disconnect switch rating [2] [3] [4] 4-40 Recommended circuit protection device rating[4] Fuse 20 30 40 50 50 50 60 70 80 90 100 125 150 150 150 175 200 250 300 350 Circuit Breaker 15 20 30 35 35 40 45 50 60 60 70 80 100 100 110 125 150 175 200 250 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 143

LV Standard Automatic Capacitor Banks ReactiVar™ schneider-electric.us The AV5000 is suitable for use where harmonic generating loads are less than 15% of the total connected load (AV5000 shown here). AV 6000 Capacitor Bank Low Voltage Standard Automatic Capacitor Banks The AV5000 standard automatic power factor correction banks are designed for centralized power factor correction to supply varying amounts of reactive power required to compensate for changing load conditions. The AV5000 banks are ideally suited for facility electrical distribution systems with TDD (total harmonic current distortion) < = 5% and THD(V) (total harmonic voltage distortion) < = 5%. An advanced power factor controller measures plant power factor via a single remote CT. Plus, it switches capacitor modules in and out of service to maintain a user selected target power factor. Main Features: • Modular construction; free standing QED switchboard enclosures (30wx36dx90h) and • Rugged design — units are constructed with removable steel panels over heavy • Standard offering available up to 400 kVAR at 208 Vac, 1000 kVAR at 480 or 600 Vac • Main lugs or main breaker section at your choice • Dry capacitor element design eliminates risk of fluid leakage, environmental hazard • Capacitor rated contactors are designed specifically for the switching of capacitive currents and feature a patented capacitor precharge circuit that exceeds air-core reactor transient dampening allow for easy future expansion gauge steel frame and drip pans sophistication energized and much more • Different power factor controller options provide a choice in functionality and control • Backlit display on controller displays actual power factor (PF), alarms, number of steps • Available in NEMA 1 and NEMA 3R enclosures Low Voltage Anti-Resonant and Filtering Automatic Capacitor Banks ReactiVar AV6000 anti-resonant and AV7000 harmonic filtering automatic switched capacitor banks are specifically designed for networks containing harmonic energies which would otherwise damage standard fixed or automatic capacitor banks. The problem: Harmonics are caused by non-linear loads such as variable frequency drives, motor soft starters, welders, uninterruptable power supplies, robotics, PLCs and other electronic devices. Harmonics are higher-than-60 Hz current and voltage components in the electrical distribution system. Capacitors are a low impedance path for these higher frequency components and thus absorb the harmonic energies. Combinations of capacitors and system inductances (motors and transformers) can form series and parallel tuned circuits which can resonate at certain frequencies. The harmonics caused by non-linear loads can excite a standard capacitor bank into resonance. The resonance can magnify currents and voltages, causing system wide damage and equipment failure. This problem is growing in today's distribution systems. The Solution: Anti-Resonant Automatic Capacitor Banks The AV6000 anti- resonance capacitor bank's primary function is power factor correction. Iron core reactors are added in series with the capacitor modules. The 3 phase reactors are custom designed and manufactured under tight tolerance specifically for the AV6000. The reactors tune the bank below the first dominant harmonic (usually the 5th, or 300 Hz). Below the tuning point, the system appears capacitive and thus corrects power factor. Above the tuning point, the system appears Inductive and thus resonance is minimized. The AV6000 design has the added advantage of removing up to 50% of the 5th harmonic to reduce overall voltage distortion. Harmonic Filtering Automatic Capacitor Banks Although the AV7000 looks identical to the AV6000, its primary function is harmonic mitigation, with power factor correction being a secondary benefit. The distinction between an AV6000 and an AV7000 is the tuning point. By definition, if the tuning point of the capacitor/reactor combination is within ±10% of the target harmonic it is intended to absorb, it is referred to as a filter. If the tuning point is outside the ±10% limit, it is referred to as an anti-resonant system. Schneider Electric power quality solution experts should be consulted prior to recommending AV7000 to customers. Main Features: • Standard offering available up to 480 kVAR at 208 V, 1200 kVAR at 480 or 600 Vac • Capacitor modules are designed with higher than standard voltage and current ratings to provide long life on systems with high harmonic energies. Reactors are designed to operate at 115 °C rise over a maximum 40 °C ambient temperature. • In addition to the standard features provided in the AV5000 systems, the reactors in the AV6000 and AV7000 have an embedded thermistor temperature detector. The stage will shut down and annunciate if the reactor is overheated, usually a result of excessive harmonic energies Application Assistance: Schneider Electric power quality experts can provide engineering assistance for the application of capacitors in harmonic rich environments. Specialists can assess the likelihood of application problems and arrange for more detailed study if required. Solutions can include computer modeling and system simulation. Our application engineers can arrange for systems studies, provide custom engineering proposal, perform installation and commissioning, as required by the application. Please contact Schneider Electric power quality experts or email us at pqc@squared.com. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 4-41 I D N A G N R O T I N O M R E W O P L O R T N O C 4 11/10/2017


page 144

ReactiVar™ Current Transformer Selection Information schneider-electric.us CT Selection The current transformer is located on a phase A bus or cable at the main service entrance as illustrated in Diagram 1. CT catalog number: TRAI• • • •SC ♦ ♦ where • • • • is current rate code of bus/cable and ♦ ♦ is window size code. Codes are listed in table 4.42. e.g. TRAI1000SC07 is a CT for 1000 A bus with 7"x4" window. Table 4.49: CT Selection Table Current Rating of Bus/Cable Window Size 7" x 4" Size Code 11" x 4" Size Code Amperes 300 400 500 600 750 800 1000 1200 1500 1600 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 5000 6000 Rating Code • • • • 0300 0400 0500 0600 0750 0800 1000 1200 1500 1600 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 5000 6000 ♦ ♦ 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 N/A N/A ♦ ♦ 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 Low Voltage Transient Free Reactive Compensation Capacitor Banks Square D™ ReactiVar Transient Free Reactive Compensation (TFRC) anti-resonant (AT/BT6000) systems and filtering system (AT/BT7000) are ideally suited for use on electrical systems where connected equipment is extremely sensitive to variations in the supply voltage. The problem: Capacitor systems featuring electromechanical contactors could generate voltage transients on the electrical network when they switch capacitor stages on/off, even when current limiting or tuning reactors are employed. Transients can impair the operation of sensitive equipment, including programmable logic controllers, variable speed drives, computers and UPS systems. In sensitive networks such as hospitals, data processing centers, airports and many manufacturing environments, any transient, however slight, may not be acceptable. The solution: TFRC systems feature an advanced controller to precisely activate electronic switching elements to connect capacitor stages and avoid the creation of transients. Transient free switching also reduces wear on capacitors due to switching and will result in longer life for the overall capacitor system. With a response time of less than ten seconds to load changes, TFRC systems can reduce the kVAR or kVA demand quickly. Main Features: • Standard offering up to 1350 kVAR at 480 Vac • Transient free switching of capacitor steps • Electronic switching elements yield an unlimited number of switching operations • Different power factor controller options provide a choice in functionality and control • Backlit display on controller displays actual PF, alarms, number of steps energized • Heavy duty dry capacitor element design provides no risk of fluid leakage, no • The reactors have an embedded thermistor temperature detector. The stage will shut down and annunciate if the reactor is overheated which is usually a result of excessive harmonic energies • Units are constructed with removable heavy duty steel panels over heavy gauge steel • Available in NEMA 1 and NEMA 3R enclosures. environmental pollution and no need for drip pans and much more sophistication frame. AT6000 Transient Free Capacitor Bank 4-42 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 145

Medium Voltage Fixed Capacitors ReactiVar™ schneider-electric.us Low Voltage Capacitor Bank General Specifications Voltage: Ambient temperature: Average temperature limit: Elevation: Humidity: Overvoltage limit: Dielectric withstand test level: Overcurrent limit: Incoming: Main lug: 208, 240, 480, 600 Vac standard, other voltages available -5 °C to 40 °C <=40 °C within 24 hours, <35 °C over 1 year <=1800 meter (6000 feet) 0–95% non-condensing 110% maximum (continuously) 2.15 times rated voltage or 1000 V, whichever is higher for 10s 135% maximum (continuously) Top (standard), bottom. Copper mechanical standard, compression optional PowerPact™ with Micrologic™ trip unit. LI standard, LSI available NEMA 1 standard, N3R available ANSI 49 standard, ANSI 61, ANSI 70 optional CSA C22.2 No. 190, UL810 Main breaker (BT): Enclosure rating: Color: Standards: Typical low voltage capacitor bank dimension (reference only, subject to change without notice) Medium Voltage Fixed Capacitors The ReactiVar MVC fixed capacitors are ideally suited for power factor correction in applications where the load does not change or where the capacitor is switched with the load, such as the load side of a motor contactor. ReactiVar capacitor sizes are available up to 300 kVAR as individual units, and up to 900 kVAR in banks. Main Features: • Standard rating up to 900 kVAR, 4800 V (for specials, consult factory) • Extra low dielectric loss (<0.15w/kVAR), including discharge resistors • Internally mounted discharge resistors • Internally delta connected capacitor elements • Built to applicable NEMA, IEEE, and IEC standards • Available in indoor (Type 1/12) and outdoor (Type 3R) enclosures • Painted ASA 70 gray Application Note: Capacitors are low impedance path for the harmonic currents produced by variable frequency drives, motor soft starters, welders, computers, PLCs, robotics and other electronic equipment. These harmonic currents can cause the capacitor to overheat, and shorten its life. Furthermore, the resonant circuit formed by shunt capacitors coupled with system inductances (motors and transformers) can amplify harmonic currents and voltages in the electrical network. This amplification can cause nuisance fuse operation and/or damage to electrical equipment including capacitors and other electronic devices. If power factor correction is required in the network where harmonic is present, please contact your nearest Square D/Schneider Electric sales office for assistance. MVC systems are suitable for power factor correction of steady and harmonic-free motor loads. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 4-43 I D N A G N R O T I N O M R E W O P L O R T N O C 4 11/10/2017


page 146

ReactiVar™ Medium Voltage Metal Enclosed Capacitor Systems schneider-electric.us Medium Voltage Metal Enclosed Capacitor Systems The medium voltage capacitor systems are ideally suited for centralized power factor correction and/or harmonic filtering in applications. Various equipment topologies are available, from fixed stage to fully automatic—to cover project specific application, load characteristic and installation needs. ReactiVar brand covers metal enclosed systems built in North America (5/15 kV class). Global =S= Brand can be used for expanded voltage range. Main Features: • Designed and built per applicable ANSI/NEMA/IEEE and/or IEC standards • Standard metal enclosures available up to 20 mVAR, up to 34.5 kV, 50/60 Hz • Steel or Aluminum based enclosure bays • Externally or internally fused capacitors with excellent life due to high temperature withstand, small temperature rise, chemical stability, overvoltage and overcurrent withstand. • Current limiting capacitor fuses with blown fuse pop-up indicators • Inrush current limiting reactors or tuned (anti-resonant or filtered) iron core reactors • Key interlocking system forces sequential operation of the controls, • Fully rated three- or four-pole grounding switches • Schneider Electric NRC12 Power factor controller provides user with friendly interface, superior performance, simplified installation and set-up procedure, and real time monitoring and protection features for the capacitor system. • Available in Type 1 indoor and 3R outdoor enclosure types loads are less than 15% of the total connected load. MV5000 systems are suitable for use where harmonic generating MV6000 systems are suitable for use where harmonic generating MV7000 systems are suitable for use where harmonic generating loads are less than 50% of the total connected load. power compensation of rapidly fluctuating loads. loads exceed 50% of the total connected load. MVHVC High-Speed compensation systems are designed for reactive 4 C O N T R O L P O W E R M O N I T O R N G A N D I High Voltage Reactive Power Compensation Systems The high voltage reactive power compensation systems are ideally suited for installation at utility distribution and transmission grids. Various equipment topologies are available to cover project specific utility application, and installation needs. Typically these compensation systems are open style, rack mounted, installed in utility substation areas. Main Features: • Custom designed and built per requested applicable standards • Systems rated up to 230 kV, 50/60 Hz • Internally fused capacitors with excellent life due to high temperature withstand, small • Double wye ungrounded configuration with neutral CT protection • Inrush current limiting or tuned (anti-resonant or filtered) air core, open style reactors temperature rise, chemical stability, overvoltage and overcurrent withstand. 4-44 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 147

PCS+ Active Harmonic Filter Class 5820 schneider-electric.us AccuSine™ AccuSine PCS+ Active Harmonic Filter (AHF) AccuSine PCS+ Active Harmonic Filter (AHF) injects harmonic current to cancel harmonic current in the electrical distribution system. This reduced harmonic level results in improved electrical network reliability and reduced operating cost. AccuSine PCS+ is simple to size, install, set up and operate. In addition, AccuSine PCS+ eliminates the complex harmonic compliance limit calculations and removes nuisance harmonics from the electrical network. The Problem: Power electronic devices that have rapid and frequent load variations have become abundant today due to their many process control related and energy saving benefits. However, they also bring a few major drawbacks to electrical distribution systems; harmonics and rapid change of reactive power requirement. Harmonics may disrupt normal operation of other devices and increase operating costs. Symptoms of problematic harmonic levels include overheating of transformers, motors, drives, cables, thermal tripping of protective devices and logic faults of digital devices. In addition, the life span of many devices can be reduced by elevated operating temperature. The Solution: The AccuSine PCS+ AHF provides the simplest and most effective means to mitigate harmonics, to reduce process related voltage fluctuations. The AccuSine PCS+ AHF actively injects opposite harmonics current on the source side of the load and it: • Decreases harmonic related overheating of cables, switchgear and transformers • Reduces downtime caused by nuisance thermal tripping of protective devices • Increases electrical network reliability and reduces operating costs • Corrects to the 51st harmonic, reduce harmonics level to meet IEEE 519, IEC 61000 • Compensates entire network or specific loads depending on installation point Standard Features: • Real-time dynamic current injection for harmonic cancellation and VAR compensation (lead or lag power factor) • Load balancing capability • Parallel connection allows for easy retrofit and installation of multiple units for large • Response to load fluctuations within 2 cycles for harmonics, 1/4 cycle for power factor • Full color touch screen HMI (Human Machine Interface) • UL Type 1, UL Type 2, UL Type 12, IP31, and IP54 enclosures • Seismic rated per ICC IBC and ASCE 7 • UL, CE, ABS, and CSA certified AccuSine PCS+ Sizing For proper sizing of AccuSine units, contact the Schneider Electric sales office or e-mail powersolutions@schneider-electric.com. To expedite the product selection process, please have a single line diagram and/or details of the application including sizes of transformers, non-linear and linear loads, and any existing filters and capacitors. 3-4, and UK G5/4-1 standards. or load balancing networks I D N A G N R O T I N O M R E W O P L O R T N O C Table 4.50: PCS+ Active Harmonic Filter Selection Harmonic and PF Correction (380–480 V models, 50/60 Hz) Rated Current (A) Frequency (Hz) Catalog Number 60 50/60 120 200 300 50/60 50/60 50/60 PCSP060D5IP00 PCSP060D5N2 PCSP060D5IP31 PCSP060D5N12 PCSP060D5IP54 PCSP120D5IP00 PCSP120D5N2 PCSP120D5IP31 PCSP120D5N12 PCSP120D5IP54 PCSP200D5IP00 PCSP200D5N2 PCSP200D5IP31 PCSP200D5N12 PCSP200D5IP54 PCSP300D5IP00 PCSP300D5N2 PCSP300D5IP31 PCSP300D5N12 PCSP300D5IP54 Rating IP00 (UL Type Open) UL Type 2 IP31 UL Type 12 IP54 IP00 (UL Type Open) UL Type 2 IP31 UL Type 12 IP54 IP00 (UL Type Open) UL Type 2 IP31 UL Type 12 IP54 IP00 (UL Type Open) UL Type 2 IP31 UL Type 12 IP54 Enclosure Information Style Wall Mount Cable Entry Bottom Floor Standing Top or Bottom Wall Mount Bottom Floor Standing Top or Bottom Wall Mount Bottom Floor Standing Top or Bottom Wall Mount Bottom Floor Standing Top or Bottom 4 Frame Weight (kg) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 88 277 280 113 287 293 171 397 402 210 422 436 NOTE: Contact Schneider Electric sales office for other voltage models. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 4-45 11/10/2017


page 148

AccuSine™ PFV+ Active Harmonic Filter Class 5820 schneider-electric.us AccuSine PFV+ Active Harmonic Filter (AHF) AccuSine PFV+ is a very simple and effective means to eliminate leading or lagging power factor, reduce voltage fluctuations, enhance equipment operating life, and improve system power capacity. AccuSine PFV+ offers many features in one package that others require multiple models to accomplish. AccuSine PFV+ can help you solve: • Power factor • Imbalance (specifically important for motor applications) • Voltage stability (such as localized photovoltaic networks) • Flicker AccuSine PFV+ Sizing For proper sizing of AccuSine units, contact the Schneider Electric sales office or e-mail powersolutions@schneider-electric.com. To expedite the product selection process, please have a single line diagram and/or details of the application including sizes of transformers, non-linear and linear loads, and any existing filters and capacitors. 4 Table 4.51: AccuSine PFV+ Selection PF Correction and Load Balancing (380-480V models 50/60Hz) Rated Current (A) Catalog Number Frequency (Hz) C O N T R O L P O W E R M O N I T O R N G A N D I 60 50/60 120 50/60 200 50/60 300 50/60 EVCP060D5IP00 EVCP060D5N2 EVCP060D5IP31 EVCP060D5N12 EVCP060D5IP54 EVCP120D5IP00 EVCP120D5N2 EVCP120D5IP31 EVCP120D5N12 EVCP120D5IP54 EVCP200D5IP00 EVCP200D5N2 EVCP200D5IP31 EVCP200D5N12 EVCP200D5IP54 EVCP300D5IP00 EVCP300D5N2 EVCP300D5IP31 EVCP300D5N12 EVCP300D5IP54 Rating IP00 (UL Type Open) UL Type 2 IP31 UL Type 12 IP54 IP00 (UL Type Open) UL Type 2 IP31 UL Type 12 IP54 IP00 (UL Type Open) UL Type 2 IP31 UL Type 12 IP54 IP00 (UL Type Open) UL Type 2 IP31 UL Type 12 IP54 Enclosure Information Style Wall Mount Cable Entry Bottom Frame 1 Floor Standing Top or Bottom Wall Mount Bottom Floor Standing Top or Bottom Wall Mount Bottom Floor Standing Top or Bottom Wall Mount Bottom Floor Standing Top or Bottom 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Weight (kg) 88 277 280 113 287 293 171 397 402 210 422 436 Table 4.52: AccuSine PCS+ and AccuSine PFV+ Exterior Dimensions Exterior Dimensions Height (mm) Width (mm) 1300 2092 1400 2089 1323 2089 1560 2092 421 800 421 800 582 900 582 900 Frame Size 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4-46 assemblies. AccuSine+ Wall Mount Conversion Kit • Converts IP00 (UL Type Open) to IP20 (UL Type 1) wall mounted enclosed • Includes HMI mounting plate and cable entry enclosure for mounting on the bottom of Table 4.53: AccuSine+ Wall Mount Kits the IP00 assemblies. Catalog Number PCSPWMKIT60A PCSPWMKIT120A PCSPWMKIT300A PCSPWMKIT300A Unit Rating (A) 60 120 200 300 Assembled Dimensions — IP20 Height 1530 1730 1642 1882 Width 421 421 575 575 Depth 349 384 435 435 IP20 Cable Entry Assembly Enclosure Weight (kg) Weight (kg) 97.3 122.0 180.0 218.6 8.7 9.3 8.6 8.6 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 149

Current Transformers Class 5820 schneider-electric.us AccuSine™ Round Split-Core Current Transformer (CT) Selection: Two remote current transformers (CT) are required for three phase loads. Three CT’s are required for networks with line to neutral loads. Depending on installation, additional CTs may be required. Additional sizes are available. Table 4.54: Round Split-Core CT—UL Recognized Ampacity Catalog Number 1000 CT1000SC 3000 CT3000SC 5000 CTFC- L500058 A B C D A B C D A B C D Dimensions in 4 1.25 1.5 6.5 6 mm 101 32 38 165 152 32 38 216 203 32 38 267 1.25 1.5 8.5 8 1.25 1.5 10.5 Weight kg lbs 3.5 1.75 4.25 1.90 5.5 2.50 Accuracy Class Burden Capacity (VA) Secondary Current 1 1 1 10 45 45 5 5 5 I D N A G N R O T I N O M R E W O P L O R T N O C 4 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 4-47 11/10/2017


page 150

4 C O N T R O L P O W E R M O N I T O R N G A N D I AccuSine™ Hybrid VAR Compensator (HVC) Class 5890 schneider-electric.us controls) current of the distribution equipment) Hybrid VAR Compensator (HVC) The Hybrid VAR Compensator (HVC) is ideally suited for industrial facilities with power quality or production problems caused by rapidly changing reactive power demands typically associating with highly cyclical loads such as welders, mining conveyors and heavy stamping machines. The Problem: Rapid reactive power changes demand timely reactive power (VAR) compensation. Lack of timely and adequate VAR compensation can lead to voltage fluctuations in the electrical distribution system, impacting equipment operation, as well as product quality. Traditional capacitor systems have a minimum response time of five to thirty seconds for load fluctuations. As a result of this limitation, uncompensated reactive power demand by cyclical loads can produce voltage instability, cause flicker, increase losses, and result poor power factor which reduces the electric supply capacity. Problems can include: • Poor weld quality or reduced weld line productivity (due to restrikes or interlock weld • Failure to start motor loads (due to voltage sag on startup) • Undervoltage tripping of sensitive loads (Robots, PLCs, VFDs) • Lighting flicker and/or HID lighting shutdown • Overloaded distribution equipment (cyclical current pulses may exceed the rated • Poor power factor and associated utility demand charges The Solution: The Hybrid VAR Compensator is ideally suited for ultra fast reactive power compensation in many low and medium voltage distribution networks containing highly transient loads where conventional systems are not suitable. The HVC employs a fixed or automatic capacitor bank to provide reactive power at all times, while AccuSine PFV+ adjusts the output to meet system reactive power requirement in timely manner. AccuSine PFV+ provides dynamic VAR injection to meet reactive power requirement within 1/4 cycle, reduce voltage sags created by inductive load switching, welding operation, etc. HVC systems can alleviate most of the problems created by cyclical loads that require large amount of reactive power for short duration. HVC system can be applied in the low voltage and medium voltage system from 480 V up to 33 kV. Unique, cost-effective construction: The ReactiVar HVC is a custom engineered product designed for specific reactive power compensation requirements. It consists of both passive and active components. The passive component may consist of capacitors only or include tuned reactors. Depending on the application, the passive portion may include contactor or solid state switching device to permit some adjustment of the passive elements. The active component is provided by Schneider Electric’s AccuSine PFV+ unit. HVC systems also can prevent resonance by including custom designed iron core reactors in series with each three phase capacitor module when required. The series reactor/capacitor combinations prevent resonance by turning the network below the first dominant harmonic (usually the 5th and 300 Hz). In doing so, HVC can also reduce harmonic voltage distortion, which further improves overall network conditions. The HVC employs a fixed capacitor bank to inject leading reactive current (leading kVAR) into the network at all times, and an AccuSine PFV+ unit to precisely adjust the total output of the HVC according to the load reactive power demand profile. When load reactive demand is zero, the AccuSine PFV+ injects lagging reactive current to cancel the leading reactive current of the fixed capacitor bank such that the total output of the HVC is minimized. As the load kVAR demand increases, the AccuSine PFV+ adjusts its output such that the total output of the HVC precisely matches the load demand. If load demand increases above the fixed capacitor bank capability, then the AccuSine PFV+ injects leading reactive current. This continues until the full leading kVAR capacity of the AccuSine PFV+ is met. Thus, the HVC total output provides leading kVAR compensation to match load demand. To optimize system design, Schneider Electric expert will normally need to take real-time measurements on the network site. Please contact Schneider Electric power quality experts or email us at powersolutions@schneider-electric.com. transient or cyclical loads Main Features: • Real-time reactive power compensation for • Infinite VAR resolution • Transient free compensation • Improves voltage stability, reduces flicker • Constructed with 12 gauge steel frame 4-48 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved MainBreaker(Optional)AccuSinePFV+300 AmpereACTIVEPASSIVE100 kVAR100 kVAR100 kVARHVC Topology (Typical)11/10/2017


page 151

schneider-electric.us VarSet Low Voltage Capacitor Banks VarSet Low-Voltage Capacitor Banks 480 V 60 Hz 600 V 60 Hz Lugs Incoming Circuit Breaker Lugs Incoming Circuit Breaker Standard VLVAW2N Standard VLVAW3N Detuned VLVAF4P/ VLVFF4P 25 to 100 KVAR 125 to 250 KVAR 125 to 300 KVAR 75 to 200 KVAR 25 to 100 KVAR 125 to 250 KVAR 75 to 200 KVAR Key Features • Auxiliary transformer (120 V) included • Top cable entry and connections • NEMA 1 Options • Incoming circuit breaker protection option with rotary handle • Plinth accessory for floor mounting – Included for VLVAF4P and VLVFF4P version. – For VLVAW2N and VLVAW3N versions, order the following: for Enclosure VLVAW2N: order NSYSPF8100 and NSYSPS4100 for Enclosure VLVAW3N: order NSYSPF10100 and NSYSPS4100 Plinth for Floor Mounting • Communication option: NRC12 controller + modbus communication module. Order your reference with addition of suffix C. • Sprinkler proof: Included in 600 V offer Table 4.55: General Characteristics VarSet Environment Installation Humidity Maximum altitude Enclosure Degree of protection Color Degree of mechanical resistance Steps Step protection Electrical Characteristics Connection type Indoor up to 95% 2000 m NEMA 1 RAL 7035 IK10 With circuit breaker Three-phase < 2.5 W/kVAR without detuned reactors < 6 W/kVAR with detuned reactors 4.2 p.u. (60 Hz ref) 1.1 x Un, 8 h every 24 h I D N A G N R O T I N O M R E W O P L O R T N O C Power losses Tuning order (VarSet Detuned) Maximum permissible over voltage Standards CSA 22.2 No. 190 UL810, UL508a Incoming Connection Short Circuit Rating From 25 to 100 KVAR/no reactors From 125 to 300 KVAR/no reactors With Incoming Circuit Breaker 65 kA (480 V) 50 kA (600 V) 65 kA (480 V) 50 kA (600 V) 65 kA (480 V) 50 kA (600 V) With Lugs 25 kA 25 kA 4 25 kA With reactors NOTE: A Current Transformer is required for automatic Control. In order to have automatic control, a current transformer must be ordered in addition to the PFC bank. A current transformer (not included) is necessary to provide accurate network information to the VarSet’s controller in order to apply the correct quantity of kVAR at any given time. It is recommended to choose a Split Core Current Transformer Model 270R from the following list of options. NOTE: CT must be sized to your network and have a secondary rating of 5A. More details on the CT can be found in document 4210CT9701. NOTE: When selecting a CT, be sure to use proper rating factors for ambient temperature conditions. Table 4.56: Current Transformers Catalog Number 270R-501 270R-102 270R-152 270R-202 270R-302 [2] 270R-402 [2] Current Rating (Amperes)[1] 500:5 1000:5 1500:5 2000:5 3000:5 4000:5 [1] [2] Rating Factor 30 °C/80 °F Ambient Temp. = 1.33 Rating Factor 55 °C/131 °F Ambient Temp. = 1.0 Models -302 and -402 Rating Factor 30 °C/80 °F Ambient Temp. = 1.0 Rating Factor 55 °C/131 °F Ambient Temp. = 0.75 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 4-49 11/10/2017


page 152

4 C O N T R O L P O W E R M O N I T O R N G A N D I VarSet Low-Voltage Capacitor Banks Table 4.57: 480 V/60 Hz, Low-Polluted Network Table 4.58: 600 V/60 Hz, Low-Polluted Network VarSet Selection[3] schneider-electric.us Standard Power 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 275 300 Catalog Numbers Lugs VLVAW2N66025AA VLVAW2N66050AA VLVAW2N66075AA VLVAW2N66100AA VLVAW3N66125AA VLVAW3N66150AA VLVAW3N66175AA VLVAW3N66200AA VLVAW3N66225AA VLVAW3N66250AA VLVAW3N66275AB VLVAW3N66300AB Incoming CB VLVAW2N66025AB VLVAW2N66050AB VLVAW2N66075AB VLVAW2N66100AB VLVAW3N66125AB VLVAW3N66150AB VLVAW3N66175AB VLVAW3N66200AB VLVAW3N66225AB VLVAW3N66250AB VLVAW3N66275AB VLVAW3N66300AB Standard Power 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 Catalog Numbers Lugs VLVAW2N76025AA VLVAW2N76050AA VLVAW2N76075AA VLVAW2N76100AA VLVAW3N76125AA VLVAW3N76150AA VLVAW3N76175AA VLVAW3N76200AA VLVAW3N76225AA VLVAW3N76250AA Incoming CB VLVAW2N76025AB VLVAW2N76050AB VLVAW2N76075AB VLVAW2N76100AB VLVAW3N76125AB VLVAW3N76150AB VLVAW3N76175AB VLVAW3N76200AB VLVAW3N76225AB VLVAW3N76250AB Table 4.59: 480 V/60 Hz, Polluted Network, Detuned Reactors Table 4.60: 600 V/60 Hz, Polluted Network, Detuned Reactors Automatic Power 75 100 125 150 175 200 Fixed Power 75 100 125 150 175 200 Catalog Numbers Lugs Incoming CB VLVAF4P66075AA VLVAF4P66100AA VLVAF4P66125AA VLVAF4P66150AA VLVAF4P66175AA VLVAF4P66200AA VLVAF4P66075AB VLVAF4P66100AB VLVAF4P66125AB VLVAF4P66150AB VLVAF4P66175AB VLVAF4P66200AB Catalog Numbers Lugs VLVFF4P66075AA VLVFF4P66100AA VLVFF4P66125AA VLVFF4P66150AA VLVFF4P66175AA VLVFF4P66200AA Incoming CB VLVFF4P66075AB VLVFF4P66100AB VLVFF4P66125AB VLVFF4P66150AB VLVFF4P66175AB VLVFF4P66200AB Automatic Power 75 100 125 150 175 200 Fixed Power 75 100 125 150 175 200 Catalog Numbers Lugs Incoming CB VLVAF4P76075AA VLVAF4P76100AA VLVAF4P76125AA VLVAF4P76150AA VLVAF4P76175AA VLVAF4P76200AA VLVAF4P76075AB VLVAF4P76100AB VLVAF4P76125AB VLVAF4P76150AB VLVAF4P76175AB VLVAF4P76200AB Catalog Numbers Lugs VLVFF4P76075AA VLVFF4P76100AA VLVFF4P76125AA VLVFF4P76150AA VLVFF4P76175AA VLVFF4P76200AA Incoming CB VLVFF4P76075AB VLVFF4P76100AB VLVFF4P76125AB VLVFF4P76150AB VLVFF4P76175AB VLVFF4P76200AB Table 4.61: Physical and Electrical Steps (480 V and 600 V/60 Hz) Type kVAR Min Step Resolution 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 275 300 75 100 125 150 175 200 125 125 125 25 25 25 25 25 25 50 25 50 25 25 25 25 25 50 2x12,5 2x12.5 + 1x25 1x12,5 + 1x25 + 1x37,5 2x25 + 50 1x25 + 2x50 2x25 + 2x50 1x25 + 3x50 2x25 + 3x50 1x25 + 4x50 5x50 1x25 + 5x50 6x50 1x25 + 1x50 2x25 + 1x50 1x25 + 2x50 2x25 + 2x50 1x25 + 3x50 4x50 Standard Detuned Num Mechanical Steps (CBs) 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 2 3 3 4 4 4 Num Electrical Steps 2 4 6 4 5 6 7 5 9 5 11 6 3 4 5 6 7 4 Sequence Electrical Steps (Resolution) 1,111 1.1.2.2 1,233 1,122 1.2.2.2 1.1.2.2 1,222 11,222 1.2.2.2 1,111 1,222 1.1.1.1 1,222 1,122 1.2.2.2 1,122 1.2.2.2 1,111 12,5/25,0 12,5/25,0/37,5/50,0 12,5/25,0/37,5/50,0/62,5/ 75,0 25/50/75/100 25/50/75/100/125 25/50/75/100/125/150 25/50/75/100/125/150/175 25/50/75/100/125/150/ 175/200 25/50/75/100/125/150/175/ 200/225 50/100/150/200/250 25/50/75/100/125/150/175/ 200/225/250/275 50/100/150/200/250/300 25/50/75 25/50/75/100 25/50/75/100/125 25/50/75/100/125/150 25/50/75/100/125/150/175 50/100/150/200 [3] Low-Polluted Network = TDDi < 8%, THD(V) < 3% Polluted Network = TDDi < 20%, THD(V) < 7% 4-50 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 153

schneider-electric.us Table 4.62: VLVAW2N H W D D1 Weight VLVAW2N [4] 850 mm / 33.5 in. 800 mm / 31.5 in. 400 mm / 15.7 in. 1200 mm / 47.2 in. 80 kg / 175 lbs. Table 4.63: VLVAW3N H W D D1 Weight VLVAW3N [4] 1200 mm / 47.2 in. 1000 mm / 39.4 in. 400 mm / 15.7 in. 1400 mm / 55.1 in. 125 kg / 275 lbs. VarSet Low-Voltage Capacitor Banks VarSet Dimensions and Weights VLVAW2N VLVAW3N Table 4.64: VLVAF4P and VLVFF4P H W D D1 Weight VLVAF4P / VLVFF4P 1200 mm / 47.2 in. 1300 mm / 51.2 in. 400 mm / 15.7 in. 1200 mm / 47.2 in. 265 kg / 585 lbs. I D N A G N R O T I N O M R E W O P L O R T N O C VLVAF4P and VLVFF4P 4 [4] Does not include plinth for VLVAW2N and VLVAW3N, optional, which adds 100 mm to height. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 4-51 11/10/2017


page 154

VarSet Low-Voltage Capacitor Banks schneider-electric.us 4 C O N T R O L P O W E R M O N I T O R N G A N D I 4-52 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 155

Table of Contents Wiser™ Energy Efficiency Solutions Section 5 Advanced Products 5-2 Wiser™ Energy Efficiency Solutions Wiser Air Residential Solar Power Solutions Solar Inverters Conext™ CL-NA Three-Phase Grid-Tie Inverter Conext™ XW+NA Hybrid Inverter / Charger Conext™ SW-NA Hybrid Inverter / Charger Conext™ MPPT 80 600 Solar Charge Controller Conext™ MPPT 60 150 Solar Charge Controller 5-2 5-2 5-3 5-3 5-3 5-4 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-1 S T C U D O R P D E C N A V D A 5 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Solar Power SolutionsConext™ CLConext™ XW+Conext™ Solar Charge ControllerWiser™ Air11/10/2017


page 156

Wiser™ Energy Efficiency Solutions Wiser™ Energy Efficiency Solutions Wiser Air schneider-electric.us touch screen display to keep you informed. Wiser Air is a complete home energy management solution that gives you peace of mind through effortless control of comfort and savings. Wiser Air works with most heating and cooling low voltage systems and connects to your home Wi-Fi to allow you to see your energy use remotely, using a smart phone, tablet, or laptop. • Simplicity – Wiser Air is easy to install and has a sleek, intuitive design with familiar • Comfort – Enjoy features like Comfort Boost that quickly delivers comfort at the touch • Insight – See how your system is running from a distance, with Wiser Pulse that • Control – Control and manage your home energy use from anywhere with your smart of a button and helps you use energy more efficiently. glows a different color depending on different modes. phone, tablet or laptop. Wiser Air is a stand-alone, Wi-Fi thermostat. Model Faceplate Color Country of Use WISERAIR10BLKUS WISERAIR10WHTUS WISERAIR10BLKCA WISERAIR10WHTCA Black White Black White USA USA Canada Canada Wiser Air is designed for use with HVAC systems using 24 Vac control signaling. Connection to a WPA-2 encrypted WiFi network is necessary for communication. More information can be found at www.wiserair.com. Wiser Air Specifications Unit Dimensions Trim Plate Dimensions 4 in. (10.2 cm) H 4 in. (10.2 cm) W 1.2 in. (3 cm) D 4.8 in. (12.2 cm) H 6.3 in. (16 cm) W 0.1 in. (0.3 cm) D Wire Gauge Temperature Shipping Weight 1.32 lb (599 g) Humidity Sensor 18−22 AWG (0.33−0.82 mm²) Resolution: 1ºF (0.5°C) Control accuracy: 1ºF (0.5° C) Cooling setpoint range: 48 −95°F (9−35°C) Heating setpoint range: 45.5−92°F (7.5−33°C) Display range: 40−95°F (5 Remote sensor compatibility: 10 k NTC, −35°C) Type 2 Manufacturer calibrated: not required Precision: RH +/-3% Dehumidification range: N/ A Screen Power Requirements Output Ratings Operating Conditions Storage Conditions 2.1 in. (5.4 cm) H 2.8 in. (7.2 cm) W 640 x 480 RGB Input: ~24 Vac (+/-15%) 50/60 Hz Consumption: 6 VA Maximum rating: 100 VA, 4.17 A Class 2 circuits only Maximum output: 94 VA Relay rating: ~24 Vac, 50/ 60 Hz, 1 A Inrush = 3 A Connections: G, W, W2, Y, Y2, U, O/B Class 2 circuits only Temperature: 32−104ºF (0 −40ºC) Humidity: 0−75% R.H. non-condensing Temperature: -22−122ºF (-30−50ºC) Humidity: 0−75% R.H. non-condensing Indoor, Dry, Pollution Degree 2 Light Sensor Application: LCD-Auto dim Occupancy Sensor Application: LCD wake-up Wiser Pulse intensity Safety Standards EMC and Radio Standards Network CSA C22.2 No. 24–93 UL 873 RoHS EMC: FCC 15 Subpart B Radio: FCC 15 Subpart C ICES-003 RSS 210 Zigbee (on-board) Wi-fi (802, 11 b/g/n, 2.4 G Hz) Open ADR ready 5 A D V A N C E D P R O D U C T S 5-2 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 157

Solar Inverters Residential Solar Power Solutions schneider-electric.us Conext™ CL-NA Three-Phase Grid-Tie Inverter The Conext™ CL Series is a new line of three-phase string inverters designed for high efficiency, maximum flexibility, and easy installation and service. Electrolyte-free design with Schneider Electric’s rigorous reliability test procedures improve the long-term reliability. Integrated wiring box with multiple options allow for flexible and low-cost installations. Remote asset management and troubleshooting are easier than ever with Schneider Electric Conext SmartBox and Conext Insight portal. Decentralized architecture and system capability together with a broad range of medium voltage products make Conext CL the ideal choice for commercial buildings and decentralized power plants. Backed by global service infrastructure, leading manufacturing facilities, and expertise in energy management, the Conext CL Series is the inverter trusted for quality and reliability. Table 5.1: Conext™ CL-NA Series Electrical Specifications Schneider Electric Conext CL 18 / 25 / 40 kW String Inverter with Wiring Box 98.0% CEC efficiency Features • High conversion efficiency: 98.4% peak efficiency, • Large heatsink offers excellent heat dispersion • Integrated wiring box saves customer the cost of • Built-in Cloud Connect feature to allow direct without the need for a cooling fan external DC combiner box[1] connection to Conext Insight portal for free remote monitoring • Robust design through rigorous Multiple Environmental Over Stress Testing (MEOST), Highly Accelerated Life Test (HALT) and Temperature Humidity and Bias Testing (THB) issue and help to improve long-term reliability • Electrolyte-free design to guard against dried cap • Designed and qualified for applications in tropical environments through salt fog testing and use of conformal coating • SunSpect Alliance profile, wire line and wireless • Easy installation and service, including pre-wired wiring box, detachable inverter, and EasyConfig tool to allow for fast commissioning. (optional) communication Input (DC) Full Power MPPT Voltage Range Operating Voltage Range Max. Input Voltage, open circuit Number of MPPT / Strings per MPPT [3] Absolute Max. Short Circuit Current per MPPT Nominal DC Input Power Max. DC Input Power per MPPT [4] DC Connection (in wiring box) Output (AC) Rated Output Power (PF=1) Max. Apparent Power Nominal Output Voltage AC Voltage Range Frequency Frequency Range (adjustable) Max. Output Current Nominal Continuous Output Current Total Harmonic Distortion Power Factor (adjustable) AC Connection (in wiring box) Efficiency Peak CEC General Specifications Power Consumption at Night Time Enclosure Rating Cooling Inverter Weight Wiring Box Weight Inverter Dimensions (H x W x D) Wiring Box Dimensions (H x W x D) Ambient Air Temp. for Operation Max Operating Altitude w/o Derating Relative Humidity % Noise Emission (at 1 m distance) [1] [2] [3] [4] An external fuse protection shall be installed if base model from available product variants is chosen. Preliminary specification. Specifications are subject to change without notice. Base model 2/1. Under unbalanced condition. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved CL18000 NA CL25000 NA 300–800 V 250–1000 V 1000 V 2 / 4 36 A 19 kW 11.4 kW 500–800 V 250–1000 V 1000 V 2 / 4 36 A 26.5 kW 15.9 kW Base model: spring cage clamp connector; Essential and Optimum models: fuse holder 18 kW 18 kW 277 / 480 V 25 kW 25 kW 277 / 480 V CL40000 NA [2] 540–800 V 250–1000 V 1000 V 1 / 10 108 A 42 kW 42 kW Screw type fuse holder 40 kW 40 kW 277 / 480 V 244–305 V / 422–528 V 244–305 V / 422–528 V 244–305 V / 422–528 V 60 Hz 60 +/- 3 Hz 60 Hz 60 +/- 3 Hz 60 Hz 60 +/- 3 Hz 25 A 21.7 A < 3% 0.8 lead to 0.8 lag 33 A 30.1 A < 3% 0.8 lead to 0.8 lag 50 A 48.1 A < 3% 0.8 lead to 0.8 lag Bottom and side conduit / cable entry, spring cage clamp connector. 98.0% 97.5% 98.4% 98.0% 98.4% 98.0% < 3 W Type 4 (electronics) < 3 W Type 4 (electronics) < 3 W Type 4 (electronics) Fan cooled 119 lb. (54 kg) 33 lb. (15 kg) Fan cooled 119 lb. (54 kg) 33 lb. (15 kg) Fan cooled 137 lb. (62 kg) 51 lb. (23 kg) 28.1 x 26.5 x 10.5 in. (71.4 x 67.4 x 26.8 cm) 14.2 x 26.5 x 10.5 in. (36.1 x 67.4 x 26.8 cm) 28.1 x 26.5 x 10.5 in. (71.4 x 67.4 x 26.8 cm) 14.2 x 26.5 x 10.5 in. (36.1 x 67.4 x 26.8 cm) 28.1 x 26.7 x 12.0 in. (71.4 x 67.8 x 30.7 cm) 15.6 x 26.7 x 12.0 in. (39.6 x 67.8 x 30.7 cm) -13–140°F (-20–60°C) 6560 ft. (2000 m) 4...100 condensing < 55 dBA -13–140°F (-20–60°C) 6560 ft. (2000 m) 4...100 condensing < 55 dBA -13–140°F (-20–60°C) 6560 ft. (2000 m) 4...100 condensing < 58 dBA S T C U D O R P D E C N A V D A 5 5-3 11/10/2017


page 158

Residential Solar Power Solutions Solar Inverters schneider-electric.us assists small generators with heavy loads Conext™ XW+NA Hybrid Inverter / Charger One solution for global power needs Conext XW+ is an adapatable single- and three-phase inverter / charger system with grid-tie functionality and dual AC power inputs. Available solar charge controllers, monitoring, and automated generator control modules enable further adaptability. From a single Conext XW+ unit to clusters up to 102 kW, the Conext XW+ is a scalable system that allows for the integration of solar capacity as required. Adaptable and scalable, the Schneider Electric Conext XW+ system is the one solution for grid-interactive and off- grid, residential and commercial, solar and backup power applications. Features • Excellent load starting with high 30-minute and • Performs in hot environments up to 158°F (70°C) • Intelligent functionality enables solar prioritization, load shifting, peak shaving, and • Backup power with grid-tie functionality converts external DC power to AC power for • Single or three-phase systems from 7.0 to 102 kW • Supports DC coupled and AC coupled off-grid and grid-tie architectures • Supports charging of Lithium Ion battery packs • Field serviceable with replacement boards and • Monitor, troubleshoot, or upgrade firmware with Conext ComBox • Extensive quality and reliability testing • Highly Accelerated Life Testing (HALT) • Globally proven and recognized field performance • System configures quickly into compact wall-mounted system • Integrates both grid and generator power with dual AC inputs • Balance-of-system components integrates battery bank, solar charger controllers and • Commission the entire system with PC software tool and Conext ComBox export to the utility grid 5-second power spare parts generators Conext XW+NA Hybrid Inverter / Charger 5 A D V A N C E D P R O D U C T S 5-4 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 159

Solar Inverters Residential Solar Power Solutions schneider-electric.us Table 5.2: Conext™ XW+ Series (120/240 V) Electrical Specifications Inverter AC Output Output Power (continuous) at 77°F (25°C) Overload 30 min / 60 sec at 77°F (25°C) Output Power (continuous) at 104°F (40°C) Maximum Output Current 60 sec (rms) Output Frequency (selectable) Output Voltage Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) at Rated Power Idle Consumption Search Mode Input DC Voltage Range Max Input DC Current Charger DC Output Max. Output Charge Current Output Voltage Range Charge Control Charge Temperature Compensation Power Factor Corrected Charging Compatible Battery Types Battery Bank Range (scaled to PV array size) AC Input AC 1 (grid) Input Current (selectable limit) AC 2 (generator) Input Current (selectable limit) Automatic Transfer Relay Rating/Typical Transfer Time AC Input Voltage Limits (bypass/charge mode) AC Input Frequency Range (bypass/charge mode) AC Grid-Tie Output Grid Sell Current Range on AC1 (selectable limit) Grid Sell Voltage Range on AC1 Grid Sell Frequency Range on AC1 (auto adjust entering sell mode) Efficiency Peak CEC Weighted Efficiency General Specifications Part Number Product / Shipping Weight Product Dimensions (H x W x D) Shipping Dimensions (H x W x D) IP Degree of Protection Operating Air Temperature Range Warranty (depending on the country of installation) Features System Monitoring and Network Communications Intelligent Features Auxiliary Port Off-grid AC Coupling Multi-unit Operation Regulatory Approval Safety EMC Directive Interconnect Compatible Products Conext XW+ Power Distribution Panel Conext System Control Panel Conext Automation Generator Start Conext MPPT 60 150 Conext MPPT 80 600 Conext ComBox Conext Battery Monitor Conext Battery Fuse Combiner Box Conext Portable Installation / Configuration Tool XW+ 5548 NA 5500 W 7000 W / 9500 W 4500 W 82 A (120 V); 41 A (240 V) 50 / 60 Hz XW+ 6848 NA 6800 W 8500 W / 12000 W 6000 W 102 A (120 V); 52 A (240 V) 50 / 60 Hz L-N: 120 V +/- 3%; L-L: 240 V +/- 3% < 5% < 8 W 42–60 V (48 V nominal) 150 A 110 A 40–64 V (48 V Nominal) < 5% < 8 W 42–60 V (48 V nominal) 180 A 140 A 40–64 V (48 V Nominal) Three stage, two stage, boost, custom Battery temperature sensor included 0.98 Flooded (default), GEL, AGM, LiON, Custom [5] 0.98 440–10000 Ah 30–60 A (60 A default) 30–60 A (60 A default) 440–10000 Ah 30–60 A (60 A default) 30–60 A (60 A default) 60 A / 8 ms 60 A / 8 ms L-N: 78–140 V (120 V nominal) L-L: 160–270 V (240 V nominal) 55–65 Hz (default); 52–68 Hz (allowable) 0–40 A (120 V) 0–20 A (240 V) 0–48 A (120 V) 0–27 A (240 V) L-N: 105.5–132 V +/-1.5 V; L-L: 211–264 V +/- 3 V 59.4–60.4 +/-0.5 Hz 95.7% 93.0% 865–5548–01 118 lb. (53.5 kg) / 165 lb. (75 kg) 23 x 16 x 9 in. (58 x 41 x 23 cm) 28.0 x 22.5 x 15.5 in. (71.1 x 57.2 x 39.4 cm) 95.7% 92.5% 865–6848–01 121.7 lb. (55.2 kg) / 169 lb. (76.7 kg) 23 x 16 x 9 in. (58 x 41 x 23 cm) 28.0 x 22.5 x 15.5 in. (71.1 x 57.2 x 39.4 cm) NEMA Type 1 Indoor –13–158°F (–25–70°C) power derated above 77°F (25°C) 2 or 5 years 2 or 5 years Available Available Grid sell, peak load shave, generator support, prioritized consumption of battery or external DC energy 0–12 V, maximum 250 mA DC output, selectable triggers Frequency Control Single and split phase: up to four units in parallel, three phase: up to 12 units in multi-cluster configuration with external AC contractor UL1741, CSA 107.1 FCC and Industry Canada Class B IEEE 1547 and CSA 107.1 865–1014–01 865–1050 865–1060 865–1030–1 865–1032 865–1058 865–1080–01 865–1031–01 865–1155–01 S T C U D O R P D E C N A V D A 5 [5] Specifications subject to change without notice. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 5-5 11/10/2017


page 160

Residential Solar Power Solutions Solar Inverters schneider-electric.us Conext™ SW-NA Hybrid Inverter / Charger Conext SW delivers new value and price point to installers and system owners globally. Perfect for off-grid, backup power and self-consumption applications, it’s a pure sine wave, inverter/charger system with switchable 50/60 Hz frequencies, providing power for every need. North American Conext SW units feature 120/240 Vac output, and is capable of producing 120/240 Vac output from a 120 Vac input, without the need for an external transformer. For expanded off-grid capacity, the Conext SW is integrated with fuel-based generators as required to support loads larger than the generator’s output. It’s also self consumption ready, able to prioritize solar consumption over the grid, while maintaining zero grid export. The Conext SW works with the grid to avoid peak utility charges and support the grid when utility supply is limited. Accessories include pre-wired universal DC and AC distribution panels. Stacking two Conext SW units will double the system’s total output power and available solar charge controllers allow for the integration of solar capacity as required. Table 5.3: Conext SW Inverter/Charger Electrical Specifications Inverter Output Power (continuous) at 77°F (25°C) Output Power 30 min. at 77°F (25°C) Output Power (5 sec) at 77°F (25°C) Peak Current Output Frequency (selectable) Output Voltage Output Wave Form Optimal Efficiency Idle Consumption Search Mode Input DC Voltage Range AC Connections Charger Output Current Nominal Output Voltage Output Voltage Range Charge Control Charge Temperature Compensation Optimal Efficiency AC Input Power Factor Input Current Input AC Voltage Input AC Voltage Range Line to Neutral Dead Battery Charge General Specifications Compatible Battery Types Transfer Relay Rating Transfer Time (AC to Inverter to AC) Optimal Operating Temperature Range Storage Ambient Temperature Range Humidity Operation / Storage Ingress Protection Rating Altitude (operating) Product Weight Shipping Weight Product Dimensions (H x W x D) Shipping Dimensions (H x W x D) System Network and Remote Monitoring Warranty (Depending on the Country of Installation) Part Number Regulatory Approvals Safety Compatible Products Universal DC Distribution Panel AC Distribution Panel (120/240 V) AC Distribution Panel (230 V) Conext System Control Panel Conext Automation Generator Start Conext ComBox Conext MPPT 60 150 Solar Charge Controller Conext SW On/Off Remote Switch Conext SW Stacking Kit Conext Portable Installation and Configuration Tool SW 2524 NA SW 4024 NA SW 4048 NA 2400 W 2700 W 5000 W 24.3 A 50 / 60 Hz 3400 W 4000 W 7000 W 41 A 50 / 60 Hz 3800 W 4400 W 7000 W 41 A 50 / 60 Hz 120 / 240 Vac True Sine Wave 120 / 240 Vac True Sine Wave 120 / 240 Vac True Sine Wave 91.5% < 11 W 92% < 11 W 20–34 Vdc Single / Split Phase 20–34 Vdc Single / Split Phase 92% < 11 W 4–68 Vdc Single / Split Phase 65 A 24 Vdc 12–32 Vdc 3 stage 90 A 24 Vdc 12–32 Vdc 3 stage 45 A 48 Vdc 24–64 Vdc 3 stage Yes-BTS Included Yes-BTS Included Yes-BTS Included 90% > 0.98 9 A 90% > 0.98 13 A 120 / 240 Vac Split Phase 95–135 Vac Single Phase 135–270 Vac Single Phase Yes [6] Yes [6] 30 A 49.0 lb. (22.3 kg) 60.0 lb. (27.2 kg) FLA, Gel, AGM, Custom 30 A < 1 cycle (16.7 ms) -4–140°F (-20–60°C) -40–185°F (-40–85°C) < =95% RH, non-condensing Indoor Only, IP20 6562 ft. (2000 m) 62.0 lb. (28.1 kg) 77.1 lb. (35.0 kg) 90% > 0.98 13 A Yes [6] 30 A 62.0 lb. (28.1 kg) 77.1 lb. (35.0 kg) 16.5 x 13.4 x 7.6 in. (41.8 x 34.1 x 19.7 cm) 22.0 x 17.3 x 12.6 in. (56.0 x 44.0 x 32.0 cm) Available 2 or 5 years 865–2524 Available 2 or 5 years 865–4024 Available 2 or 5 years 865–4048 c(CSA) us mark, CSA C22.2 No. 107.1–01, UL1741 Ed. 2 865–5548–01 865–1017 865–1017–61 865–1050 865–1060 865–1058 865–1030–1 865–1052 865–1019–61 for 230 Vac, 865–1019 for 120/240 Vac 865–1155–01 Conext SW-NA Inverter / Charger cost of solar power minute and 5-second surge power Features • Higher return on investment • Excellent load start capabilities with high 30- • Harness the continuously declining production • Robust design through rigorous reliability testing • Available in 24 and 48 Vdc models. All models • Stack two units to double output power up to 8 kW • Supports AC and DC coupled off-grid and grid-tie • Intelligent functionality enables self-consumption support both 50 and 60 Hz output architectures (HALT) with solar prioritization, peak shaving, and assisting small generators with heavy loads Conext ComBox • Monitor, troubleshoot or upgrade firmware with • Global support and training • Replaceable boards and spare parts • Configures quickly into compact wall-mounted • Companion circuit breaker panels integrate inverter with battery bank and solar charge controllers system • Mounting bracket design makes hanging inverter on the wall easy Specifications to change without notice. [6] 5-6 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 161

Solar Inverters Residential Solar Power Solutions schneider-electric.us Conext™ MPPT 80 600 Solar Charge Controller The Conext MPPT 80 600 solar charge controller offers an industry-first set of integration features and top performance that allows for large photovoltaic (PV) array systems to be easily installed and connected to the battery bank at the lowest overall cost. Installing one MPPT 80 600 is faster than installing multiple smaller charge controller and lowers overall costs further by utilizing fewer PV strings, smaller wiring and conduit, and by eliminating the need for PV combiner boxes and DC circuit breakers. Longer distances from array site to battery bank are also easier to accommodate than with smaller charge controllers. Advanced Fast Sweep Maximum Power Point Tracking (MPPT) charging technology helps harvest the most energy available from the PV array, even in partial shade conditions. 80 A of battery charge current allows for the connection of PV arrays rated up to 600 V STC (2560 W for 24 V systems, 4800 W for 48 V systems). Table 5.4: Conext MPPT 80 600 Solar Charge Controller Electrical Specifications [7] MPPT 80 600 Inverter Nominal Battery Voltage PV Array Operating Voltage Max. PV Array Open Circuit Voltage Battery Voltage Operating Range Array Short-circuit Current Max. Charge Current Max. and Min. Wire Size in Conduit Max. Output Power Charger Regulation Method Supported Battery Types Efficiency Max. Power Conversion Efficiency General Specifications Power Consumption (night time) Battery Temperature Sensor Auxiliary Output Enclosure Material IP Degree of Protection Product Weight Shipping Weight Product Dimensions (H x W x D) Shipping Dimensions (H x W x D) Device Mounting Ambient Air Temperature for Operation Storage Temperature Range Operating Altitude System Network and Remote Monitoring Warranty Part Number Regulatory Approval Safety EMC Compatible Products Conext XW+ Interver/Charger (230 V) Conext XW+ Interver/Charger (120/240 V) Conext SW (230 V) Conext SW (120 V) Conext System Control Panel Conext Automatic Generator Start Conext ComBox Conext Portable Installation and Configuration Tool MPPT Solar Charge Controller sweep MPPT algorithm temperature compensated charging Features • Installs faster with fewer costly components • Improve battery life with selectable multi-stage • Harvest more energy with shade tolerant fast • Robust design through rigorous Multiple Environmental Over Stress Testing (MEOST) • Available remote monitoring and configuration • Compatible with any brand of PV module, any • Stand-alone application or full integration with • Fewer string wires • Smaller AWG wire • No need for combiner box or GFI circuit breaker Context XW inverter charger system grounding method 24 and 48 (default is 48 V) 195–550 V 600 V (including temperature correction factor) 16 to 67 V dc 35 A (28 A at STC) 80 A #6 to #14 AWG 2560 W (nominal 24 V), 4800 W (nominal 48 V) Three-stage [8] Two-stage [9] Flooded, GEL, AGM, Custom 94% (nominal 24 V), 96% (nominal 48 V) < 1 W Included Dry Contact Switching up to 60 Vdc, 30 Vac, 8 A Indoor, ventilated, sheet metal chassis with 2.2 and 2.8 cm knockouts and aluminum heat sink IP 20 29.8 lb. (13.5 kg) 38.3 lb. (17.4 kg) 30.0 x 8.6 x 8.6 in. (76.0 x 22.0 x 22.0 cm) 34.3 x 13.0 x 10.6 in. (87.0 x 33.0 x 27.0 cm) Vertical wall-mount -4–149°F (-20–65°C) -40–185°F (-40–85°C) Sea level to 6562 ft. (2000 m) Available 5 year standard 865–1032 CSA Certified (UL1741, CSA 107.1) and CE Marked for Low Voltage Directive (EN50178) FCC and Industry Canada (Class B), CE Marked for the EMC Directive (EN61000-6-1, -6-3), C-Tick Compliant XW 7048 E product no. 865-7048-61 XW 8548 E product no. 865-8548-61 XW 5548 NA product no. 865-5548-01 XW 6848 NA product no. 865-6848-01 SW 2524 product no. 865-2524-61 SW 4024 product no. 865-4024-61 SW 4048 product no. 865-4048-61 SW 2524 product no. 865-2524 SW 4024 product no. 865-4024 SW 4048 product no. 865-4048 865–1050 865–1060 865–1058 865–1155–01 S T C U D O R P D E C N A V D A 5 [7] [8] [9] Specifications are subject to change without notice. Bulk, absorption, float, plus manual equalization. Bulk, absorption, plus manual equalization. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 5-7 11/10/2017


page 162

Residential Solar Power Solutions Solar Inverters Conext™ MPPT 60 150 Solar Charge Controller The Conext MPPT 60 150 is a photovoltaic (PV) charge controller that tracks the maximum power point of a PV array to deliver the maximum available current for charging batteries. When charging, the MPPT 60 150 regulates battery voltage and output current based on the amount of energy available from the PV array and state-of- charge of the battery. schneider-electric.us Table 5.5: Conext MPPT 60 150 Solar Charge Controller MPPT Multi-Stage Charging Features • Maximum Power Point Tracking (MPPT) algorithm temperature compensated charging continually seeks the maximum power available from the PV array • Improve battery life with selectable multi-stage • Five year standard warranty • Stand-alone application or full integration with Context XW and Conext SW inverter charger system • Compatible with any brand of PV Module • Available remote monitoring and configuration • LCD screen with face plate buttons for configuration and system monitoring • Integrated PV ground fault protection for negative grounded arrays Electrical Specifications [10] Inverter Nominal Battery Voltage Battery Voltage Operating Range PV Array Operating Voltage Max. PV Array Open Circuit Voltage Max. Array Short-circuit Current Max. Charge Current Max. and Min. Wire Size in Conduit Max. Output Power Charger Regulation Method Supported Battery Types Efficiency Max. Power Conversion Efficiency General Specifications Power Consumption (night time) Battery Temperature Sensor Auxiliary Output Enclosure Material IP Degree of Protection Product Weight Shipping Weight Product Dimensions (H x W x D) Shipping Dimensions (H x W x D) Device Mounting Ambient Air Temperature for Operation Storage Temperature Range Operating Altitude System Network and Remote Monitoring Warranty Part Number Features Display Type Regulatory Approval Safety EMC Compatible Products Conext XW+ interver/charger (230 V) Conext XW+interver/charger (120/240 V) Conext SW (230 V) Conext SW (120 V) Conext System Control Panel Conext Automatic Generator Start Conext ComBox Conext Portable Installation and Configuration Tool MPPT 60 150 12, 24, 36, 48, 60 V 0–80 V dc 150 V (including temperature correction factor) 140 V 60 A [11] 60 A [12] #6 to #14 AWG 3500 W Three-stage [13] Two-stage [14] Flooded, GEL, AGM, Custom 93% (nominal 12 V), 96% (nominal 24 V), 97% (nominal 36 V), 98% (nominal 48 V), 99% (nominal 60 V) 2.5 W Included 5–13 V, up to 200 mA Indoor, ventilated, sheet metal chassis with 2.2 and 2.8 cm knockouts and aluminum heat sink IP 20 10.8 lb. (4.8 kg) 17.6 lb. (8.0 kg) 14.5 x 5.8 x 5.5 in. (36.8 x 14.6 x 13.8 cm) 19.0 x 9.0 x 9.8 in. (48.3 x 22.9 x 35.0 cm) Vertical wall-mount -4–113°F (-20–45°C) -40–185°F (-40–85°C) Sea level to 6562 ft. (2000 m) Available 5 year standard 865–1030–1 LCD, 2 lines, 16 digits CSA Certified (UL1741, CSA 107.1) and CE Marked for Low Voltage Directive (EN50178) FCC and Industry Canada (Class B), CE Marked for the EMC Directive (EN61000-6-1, -6-3), C-Tick Compliant XW 7048 E product no. 865-7048-61 XW 8548 E product no. 865-8548-61 XW 5548 NA product no. 865-5548-01 XW 6848 NA product no. 865-6848-01 SW 2524 product no. 865-2524-61 SW 4024 product no. 865-4024-61 SW 4048 product no. 865-4048-61 SW 2524 product no. 865-2524 SW 4024 product no. 865-4024 SW 4048 product no. 865-4048 865–1050 865–1060 865–1058 865–1155–01 48 A at STC. For all battery voltages except 60 V. [10] Specifications are subject to change without notice. [11] [12] [13] Bulk, absorption, float, plus manual equalization. [14] Bulk, absorption, plus manual equalization. 5-8 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 163

Table of Contents Section 6 Surge Protective Devices (SPDs) 6-2 Externally Mounted SPDs Overview EMA Series SPDs Replacement Modules EBA Series SPDs Internally Mounted SPDs Overview Internally Mounted—New Construction/Factory Assembled Internally Mounted SPDs—Retrofit/Ready to Install Internally Mounted—Retrofit/Ready to Install SurgelogicTM SurgeLoc for NQ Panelboards OEM/Assembler Kits Nipple-Mounted SPDs HWA SPDs XR Surge Protective Devices Mounting Brackets and Flush Mount Kits SDSA1175 and SDSA 3-Phase SPDs Residential SPDs 6-2 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-4 6-4 6-4 6-4 6-5 6-5 6-6 6-7 6-7 6-7 6-8 6-8 6-9 Whole House SPDs Plug on Neutral QO™ and Homeline™ Load Center SPDs QO™, NQ, and Homeline™ Load Center Surge Protective Devices 6-9 6-10 6-11 I S E C V E D E V ) S D P S ( I T C E T O R P E G R U S © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 6 6-1 RetrofitCommercial ApplicationsSurgelogic SurgeLocResidential & Light Commercial ApplicationsQO/HOM SPDsWhole House SPDsSDSA 3-PhaseEMA Series SPDsTMHEPD80EBA Series SPDs11/10/2017


page 164

Externally Mounted SPDs Overview Class 1310 / Refer to Catalog 1310CT0202 schneider-electric.us Externally Mounted Surge Protective Devices Surgelogic™ EMA and EBA series SPDs offer a full range of externally mounted surge suppression solutions. These units are designed to provide surge suppression from service entrance panels to point-of-use equipment. US and Canadian UL® Listed to the UL 1449 standard. Complies with requirements of NEC® Article 285 and CSA 22.2 No. 8-M1986 as appropriate. Complies with UL 96A 12th Edition Master Label requirements for Lightning Protection Systems. • 10 year product • 10 modes of • 200 kA SCCR • EMI/RFI filtering • Audible alarm with enable/ disable switch, dry contacts and surge counter standard (green) and fault condition (red) for each phase • UL 1449 Type 1 to be used in both Type 1 and Type 2 applications • Indicator LEDs; normal protection warranty • Standard. UL 1449 Type 1 SPDs can be located at any point in the electrical • Remote Monitor. This option displays the alarm status of the surge protective system, on the line or load side of the equipment overcurrent device. device up to 1000 feet from the unit. EMA Series SPDs EMA SPD products feature a design based on individual phase modules for a flexible, cost effective way to achieve superior surge suppression at every level of the electrical distribution system. Modularity results in lower life cycle costs and fast, easy service or replacement. EMA SPD Options: • Enhanced Filtering Module. Sine wave tracking circuitry provides enhanced EMI/ RFI filtering of -54 dB at 100 kHz and establishes the power surge clamping window relative to the sine wave voltage to increase performance at distribution and branch panel applications. • Disconnect Switch. The integral switch provides a mechanical means to electrically isolate the entire surge suppressor before opening the enclosure door to facilitate servicing of the unit’s components. Table 6.1: EMA SPDs Service Voltage 120/240 V, 1-phase, 3-wire + ground [1] 208Y/120 V, 3-phase, 4-wire + ground [2] [3] [1] Wye 240/120 V, 3-phase, 4-wire + ground [1] High-leg Delta 240 V, 3-phase, 3-wire + ground Delta 480Y/277 V, 3-phase, 4-wire + ground [3] [4] [1] Wye 480 V, 3-phase, 3-wire + ground [5] Delta Peak Surge Current Rating per Phase (kA) 120 160 240 320 480 120 160 240 320 480 120 160 240 320 480 100 120 160 200 240 320 480 120 160 240 320 480 100 120 160 200 240 320 480 NEMA 1 Cat. No. SSP01EMA12( ) SSP01EMA16( ) SSP01EMA24( ) SSP01EMA32( ) SSP01EMA48( ) SSP02EMA12( ) SSP02EMA16( ) SSP02EMA24( ) SSP02EMA32( ) SSP02EMA48( ) SSP03EMA12( ) SSP03EMA16( ) SSP03EMA24( ) SSP03EMA32( ) SSP03EMA48( ) SSP06EMA10( ) SSP06EMA12( ) SSP06EMA16( ) SSP06EMA20( ) SSP06EMA24( ) SSP06EMA32( ) SSP06EMA48( ) SSP04EMA12( ) SSP04EMA16( ) SSP04EMA24( ) SSP04EMA32( ) SSP04EMA48( ) SSP05EMA10( ) SSP05EMA12( ) SSP05EMA16( ) SSP05EMA20( ) SSP05EMA24( ) SSP05EMA32( ) SSP05EMA48( ) SSP01EMA12S( ) SSP01EMA16S( ) SSP01EMA24S( ) SSP01EMA32S( ) SSP01EMA48S( ) SSP02EMA12S( ) SSP02EMA16S( ) SSP02EMA24S( ) SSP02EMA32S( ) SSP02EMA48S( ) SSP03EMA12S( ) SSP03EMA16S( ) SSP03EMA24S( ) — — NEMA 4X Stainless Steel Cat. No. SSP06EMA10S( ) SSP06EMA12S( ) SSP06EMA16S( ) SSP06EMA20S( ) SSP06EMA24S( ) SSP06EMA32S( ) SSP06EMA48S( ) SSP04EMA12S( ) SSP04EMA16S( ) SSP04EMA24S( ) SSP04EMA32S( ) SSP04EMA48S( ) SSP05EMA10S( ) SSP05EMA12S( ) SSP05EMA16S( ) SSP05EMA20S( ) SSP05EMA24S( ) SSP05EMA32S( ) SSP05EMA48S( ) EMA Series SPDs 6 S U R G E P R O T E C T I V E D E V ( S P D S ) I C E S Do not use on ungrounded systems. Systems must be solidly grounded. 208Y/120 series also applies to the following voltage 220Y/127. Can be used on 4-wire or 3-wire grounded wye systems with or without neutral. 480Y/277 series applies to the following voltages 380Y/220, 400Y/230, and 415Y/240. 480 V Delta series also applies to the following voltage 480Y/277V HRG. [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] 6-2 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 165

Replacement Modules Refer to Catalog 6671CT9701 schneider-electric.us Table 6.1 EMA SPDs (cont'd.) Externally Mounted SPDs Service Voltage 600Y/347 V, 3-phase, 4-wire + ground, [6] [7] WYE 600 V, 3-phase, 3-wire + ground [8] Delta Peak Surge Current Rating per Phase (kA) 120 160 240 320 480 100 120 160 180 240 320 NEMA 1 Cat. No. SSP08EMA12( ) SSP08EMA16( ) SSP08EMA24( ) SSP08EMA32( ) SSP08EMA48( ) SSP09EMA10( ) SSP09EMA12( ) SSP09EMA16( ) SSP09EMA18( ) SSP09EMA20( ) SSP09EMA24( ) SSP09EMA32( ) NEMA 4X Stainless Steel Cat. No. SSP08EMA12S( ) SSP08EMA16S( ) SSP08EMA24S( ) SSP08EMA32S( ) SSP08EMA48S( ) SSP09EMA10S( ) SSP09EMA12S( ) SSP09EMA16S( ) SSP09EMA18S( ) SSP09EMA20S( ) SSP09EMA24S( ) SSP09EMA32S( ) External Modular Options ( ) (D) [9] (F) (DF) [9] Disconnect Switch Enhanced Filtering Module (not applicable for Delta, HRG or HLD) Disconnect Switch and Enhanced Filtering Module (not applicable for Delta, HRG or HLD) Accessory Description Remote Monitor Cat. No. TVS12RMU Replacement Modules All module assemblies are US and Canadian UL® Recognized to UL 1449 standards. Complies with requirements of NEC® Article 285 and CSA C22.2 No. 8-M1986 as appropriate. Table 6.2: EMA Replacement Modules Wye Replacement Module Delta/HRG Replacement Module System Voltage 120/240 V, 1-phase, 3-wire + ground 208Y/120 V, 3-phase, 4-wire + ground [11] Wye 240/120 V, 3-phase, 4-wire + ground [12] High-Leg Delta 240 V, 3-phase, 3-wire + ground Delta 480Y/277 V, 3-phase, 4-wire + ground [13] Wye 480 V, 3-phase, 3-wire + ground [14] Delta 600Y/347 V, 3-phase, 4-wire + ground Wye 600 V, 3-phase, 3-wire + ground [8] Delta Peak Surge Current Rating (kA) 120 160 240 120 160 240 120 160 240 100 120 160 200 240 120 160 240 100 120 160 200 240 120 160 240 100 120 160 180 Phase A MA1IMA12 MA1IMA16 MA1IMA24 MA1IMA12 MA1IMA16 MA1IMA24 MA1IMA12 MA1IMA16 MA1IMA24 MA6IMA10 MA6IMA12 MA6IMA16 MA6IMA20 MA6IMA24 MA4IMA12 MA4IMA16 MA4IMA24 MA5IMA10 MA5IMA12 MA5IMA16 MA5IMA20 MA5IMA24 MA8IMA12 MA8IMA16 MA8IMA24 MA9IMA10 MA9IMA12 MA9IMA16 MA9IMA18 Catalog Numbers [10] Phase B — — — MA1IMA12 MA1IMA16 MA1IMA24 MA3IMA12 MA3IMA16 MA3IMA24 MA6IMA10 MA6IMA12 MA6IMA16 MA6IMA20 MA6IMA24 MA4IMA12 MA4IMA16 MA4IMA24 MA5IMA10 MA5IMA12 MA5IMA16 MA5IMA20 MA5IMA24 MA8IMA12 MA8IMA16 MA8IMA24 MA9IMA10 MA9IMA12 MA9IMA16 MA9IMA18 Phase C MA1IMA12 MA1IMA16 MA1IMA24 MA1IMA12 MA1IMA16 MA1IMA24 MA1IMA12 MA1IMA16 MA1IMA24 MA6IMA10 MA6IMA12 MA6IMA16 MA6IMA20 MA6IMA24 MA4IMA12 MA4IMA16 MA4IMA24 MA5IMA10 MA5IMA12 MA5IMA16 MA5IMA20 MA5IMA24 MA8IMA12 MA8IMA16 MA8IMA24 MA9IMA10 MA9IMA12 MA9IMA16 MA9IMA18 I S E C V E D E V I T C E T O R P E G R U S ) S D P S ( Do not use on ungrounded systems. Systems must be solidly grounded. Can be used on 4-wire or 3-wire grounded wye systems with or without neutral. 600 V Delta series also applies to the following voltage 600Y/347V HRG. Not available in stainless steel for 320 and 480 kA. For UL 1449 Type 1 Modules, add suffix (1). Example: MA1IMA121 208Y/120 series also applies to the following voltage 220Y/127. [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] High-leg delta (Phase B modules are different than Phase A and Phase C modules). [13] [14] 480Y/277 series applies to the following voltages 380Y/220, 400Y/230, and 415Y/240. 480 V Delta series also applies to the following voltage 480Y/277V HRG. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 6 6-3 11/10/2017


page 166

Internally Mounted SPDs EBA Series SPDs Refer to Catalog 6671CT9701 schneider-electric.us EBA Series SPDs EBA SPD products consist of a consolidation of phase modules into one solid brick casting and offered at a competitive price for those who want superior surge suppression on a limited budget. EBA series are nipple-mounted SPDs that allow installation flexibility and retain superior performance. • 10 year product warranty • 10 modes of protection • 200 kA SCCR • -45 dB EMI/RFI Filtering • Audible alarm with enable/disable switch, dry contacts and surge counter standard • Indicator LEDs; normal (green) and fault condition (red) for each phase • NEMA 1 rated enclosure Table 6.3: EBA SPDs Peak Surge Current Rating per Phase (kA) 80 100 120 160 200 240 80 100 120 160 200 240 Service Voltage 120/240 V,1-phase, 3-wire + ground[15] 208Y/120 V, 3-phase, 4-wire + ground [16] [17] [15] Wye Accessory Description Remote Monitor NEMA 1 Cat. No. SSP01EBA08 SSP01EBA10 SSP01EBA12 SSP01EBA16 SSP01EBA20 SSP01EBA24 SSP02EBA08 SSP02EBA10 SSP02EBA12 SSP02EBA16 SSP02EBA20 SSP02EBA24 Cat. No. TVS12RMU Internally Mounted Surge Protective Devices Internally mounted surge protective devices are installed integrally to systems for service entrance and branch panel surge suppression. Internally mounted SPDs installed next to the supply bus provides maximum performance inside Square D™ systems. Built-in performance is the best way to ensure cost effective power quality (especially important for critical power facilities). US and Canadian UL® Recognized as a Type 2 (or 1 with optional suffix in catalog number) SPD Component Assembly to UL 1449 and UL 1283 standards. Complies with requirements of NEC® Article 285 and CSA C22.2 No. 8-M1986 as appropriate. Complies with UL 96A 12th Edition Master Label requirements for Lightning Protection Systems. Internally Mounted—New Construction / Factory Assembled Factory installed integral/internal Surgelogic™ SPD products make adding surge suppression to new construction projects easy. Refer to the sections listed below to identify the correct product for your application or contact Surgelogic™ TAG at 1-800- 577-7353 for assistance. EBA Series SPD Remote Monitor 6 S U R G E P R O T E C T I V E D E V ( S P D S ) I C E S 208Y/120 series also applies to the following voltage 220Y/127. [15] Do not use on ungrounded systems. Systems must be solidly grounded. [16] [17] Can be used on 3-wire or 4-wire grounded wye systems with or without neutral. 6-4 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 167

schneider-electric.us Internally Mounted SPDs—Retrofit/Ready to Install Refer to Catalog 6671CT9701 Internally Mounted SPDs Internally Mounted—Retrofit/Ready to Install To ensure high-performance surge suppression at critical power locations, a variety of Surgelogic™ products have been designed specifically for retrofitting into commonly used Square D™ systems. The QMB fusible switch, 6 in. MCC bucket, I-Line & Busway plug-on units and the new SurgeLoc for the NQ panelboards come read to install. Retrofitting SPD units into I-Line, QMB, MCC, Busway and NQ Panelborad applications is simple. • Audible alarm with enable/disable switch, dry contacts and surge counter standard • 200 kA SCCR • Indicator LEDs • EMI/RFI filtering Table 6.4: Internally Mounted—Retrofit / Ready To Install I-Line™ Surgelogic™ SPD Unit QMB Surgelogic™ SPD Unit Busway Surgelogic™ SPD Unit MCC Surgelogic™ SPD Unit SurgelogicTM SurgeLoc Voltage Surge Current Rating I-Line Branch Units [1] 120/240 V, 1-phase, 3-wire + ground 208Y/120 V, 3-phase, 4-wire + ground [5] [6] Wye 240/120 V, 3-phase, 4-wire + ground High-leg Delta 240 V, 3-phase, 3-wire + ground, Delta 480Y/277 V, 3-phase, 4-wire + ground [5] [7] Wye 480 V, 3-phase, 3-wire + ground, Delta [8] 600Y/347 V, 3-phase, 4-wire + ground [5] Wye 120 kA 160 kA 240 kA 120 kA 160 kA 240 kA 120 kA 160 kA 240 kA 120 kA 160 kA 240 kA 120 kA 160 kA 240 kA 120 kA 160 kA 240 kA 120 kA 160 kA 240 kA 120 kA 160 kA 180 kA Cat. No. HL1IMA12C( ) HL1IMA16C( ) HL1IMA24C( ) HL2IMA12C( ) HL2IMA16C( ) HL2IMA24C( ) HL3IMA12C( ) HL3IMA16C( ) HL3IMA24C( ) HL6IMA12C( ) HL6IMA16C( ) HL6IMA24C( ) HL4IMA12C( ) HL4IMA16C( ) HL4IMA24C( ) HL5IMA12C( ) HL5IMA16C( ) HL5IMA24C( ) — — — — — — Cat. No. HR1IMA12C HR1IMA16C HR1IMA24C HR2IMA12C HR2IMA16C HR2IMA24C HR3IMA12C HR3IMA16C HR3IMA24C HR6IMA12C HR6IMA16C HR6IMA24C HR4IMA12C HR4IMA16C HR4IMA24C HR5IMA12C HR5IMA16C HR5IMA24C HR8IMA12C HR8IMA16C HR8IMA24C HR9IMA12C HR9IMA16C HR9IMA18C 600V, 3-phase, 3-wire + ground, [9] — — — ( ) For a Type 1 SPD, add a “1” suffix to the catalog number. Delta Busway Units Model 6 MCC Units [3] Cat. No. [4] Cat. No. [4] MCC2IMA12 PIU2IMA16 MCC2IMA16 PIU2IMA24 MCC2IMA24 MCC3IMA12 PIU3IMA16 MCC3IMA16 PIU3IMA24 MCC3IMA24 — MCC4IMA12 PIU4IMA16 MCC4IMA16 PIU4IMA24 MCC4IMA24 QMB Branch Units [2] Cat. No. QMB1IMA12 QMB1IMA16 QMB1IMA24 QMB2IMA12 QMB2IMA16 QMB2IMA24 QMB3IMA12 QMB3IMA16 QMB3IMA24 — — — QMB4IMA12 QMB4IMA16 QMB4IMA24 — — — QMB8IMA12 QMB8IMA16 QMB8IMA24 MCC8IMA12 PIU8IMA16 MCC8IMA16 PIU8IMA24 MCC8IMA24 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — SurgelogicTM SurgeLoc for NQ Panelboards SurgelogicTM SurgeLoc is the industries first Field Installable Internally Mounted SPD in NQ panelboards - fully installed in aprox. 2 minutes. Surgelogic (TM) SurgeLoc can be ordered as factory assembled in NQ Panelboards or can be ordered from your local Schneider Electric distributor for retrofit opportunities for NQ panelboards. US and Canadian UL® Recognized to UL 1449 and UL 1283 standards. Complies with requirements of NEC® Article 285 and CSA 22.2 No. 8-M1986 as appropriate. Complies with UL 96A 12th Edition Master Label requirements for Lightning Protection Systems. • Retrofit into existing NQ Panelboards • 10 year product warranty • 10 modes of protection • 200 kA SCCR • Audible alarm with enable/disable switch, dry contacts and surge counter standard • Indicator LEDs; normal (green) and fault condition (red) for each phase ** FOR SURGELOC PART NUMBERS, PLEASE REFERENCE Table 6.5 Internally Mounted—Retrofit / Ready to Install, page 6-6. I S E C V E D E V I T C E T O R P E G R U S ) S D P S ( [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] Requires 13.5-inch mounting height. Requires 9-inch mounting height. Requires 6-inch mounting height. PE7 Discount Schedule. Can be used on 4-wire or 3-wire grounded wye systems with or without neutral. 208Y/120 series also applies to the following voltage 220Y/127. 480Y/277 series applies to the following voltages 380Y/220, 400Y/230, and 415Y/240. 480 V Delta series also applies to the following voltage: 480Y/277V HRG. 600 V Delta series also applies to the following voltage: 600Y/347V HRG. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 6 6-5 11/10/2017


page 168

Internally Mounted SPDs Internally Mounted SPDs—Retrofit/Ready to Install Refer to Catalog 6671CT9701 Table 6.5: Internally Mounted—Retrofit / Ready to Install schneider-electric.us Voltage 120/240 V, 1-phase, 3-wire + ground 208Y/120 V, 3-phase, 4-wire + ground [11] [12] Wye 240Y/120 V, 3-phase, 4-wire + ground High-leg Delta Surge Current Rating 80 kA 100 kA 120 kA 160 kA 200 kA 240 kA 80 kA 100 kA 120 kA 160 kA 200 kA 240 kA 80 kA 100 kA 120 kA 160 kA 200 kA 240 kA NQ Panelboard Units—SurgLoc [10] Cat. No. SSP01BIA08PBQ1 SSP01BIA10PBQ1 SSP01BIA12PBQ1 SSP01BIA16PBQ1 SSP01BIA20PBQ1 SSP01BIA24PBQ1 SSP02BIA08PBQ1 SSP02BIA10PBQ1 SSP02BIA12PBQ1 SSP02BIA16PBQ1 SSP02BIA20PBQ1 SSP02BIA24PBQ1 SSP03BIA08PBQ1 SSP03BIA10PBQ1 SSP03BIA12PBQ1 SSP03BIA16PBQ1 SSP03BIA20PBQ1 SSP03BIA24PBQ1 OEM/Assembler Kits Surgelogic™ OEM/assembler kits allow manufacturers to add industry-leading surge suppression directly to customized equipment. Manufacturers benefit from shorter wire lengths that optimize the clamping voltage of the SPD. Products come with a backplane- mounted SPD, mounting hardware and diagnostic display with 36-inch cables. Audible alarm, silence switch, remote monitoring contacts, and surge counter are standard. Available as UL 1449 Type 2 (or 1 with optional suffix in catalog number). US and Canadian UL® Recognized to UL 1449 and UL 1283 standards. Complies with requirements of NEC® Article 285 and CSA 22.2 No. 8-M1986 as appropriate. Complies with UL 96A 12th Edition Master Label requirements for Lightning Protection Systems. Table 6.6: OEM/Assembler Kits Service Voltage Peak Surge Current Rating per Phase (kA) 120/240 V, 1-phase, 3-wire + ground 208Y/120 V, 3-phase, 4-wire + ground [14] [15] Wye 240/120 V, 3-phase, 4-wire + ground High-leg Delta 240 V, 3-phase, 3-wire + ground [14] [16] Delta OEM Kit 480Y/277 V, 3-phase, 4-wire + ground [14] [16] Wye 480 V, 3-phase, 3-wire + ground [17] Delta 600Y/347 V, 3-phase, 4-wire + ground [14] Wye 600 V, 3-phase, 3-wire + ground [18] Delta 120 160 240 120 160 240 120 160 240 120 160 240 120 160 240 120 160 240 120 160 240 120 160 180 ( ) For a Type 1 SPD, add a “1” suffix to the catalog number. 6 S U R G E P R O T E C T I V E D E V ( S P D S ) I C E S 208/120 series also applies to the following voltage 220Y/127. [10] Requires 12 circuit positions (6 adjacent mounting spaces per side). [11] Can be used on 4-wire or 3-wire grounded neutral system. [12] [13] Note the last character of the catalog number is the letter “O”, not a zero. [14] Can be used on 4-wire or 3-wire grounded wye systems with or without neutral. [15] [16] [17] [18] 6-6 208Y/120 series also applies to the following voltage 220Y/127. 480Y/277 series applies to the following voltages 380Y/220, 400Y/230, and 415Y/240. 480 V Delta series also applies to the following voltage: 480Y/277V HRG. 600 V Delta series also applies to the following voltage: 600Y/347V HRG. Cat. No. [13] TVS1IMA12O( ) TVS1IMA16O( ) TVS1IMA24O( ) TVS2IMA12O( ) TVS2IMA16O( ) TVS2IMA24O( ) TVS3IMA12O( ) TVS3IMA16O( ) TVS3IMA24O( ) TVS6IMA12O( ) TVS6IMA16O( ) TVS6IMA24O( ) TVS4IMA12O( ) TVS4IMA16O( ) TVS4IMA24O( ) TVS5IMA12O( ) TVS5IMA16O( ) TVS5IMA24O( ) TVS8IMA12O( ) TVS8IMA16O( ) TVS8IMA24O( ) TVS9IMA12O( ) TVS9IMA16O( ) TVS9IMA18O( ) © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 169

HWA SPDs Refer to Catalog 6671CT9701 schneider-electric.us Nipple-Mounted SPDs HWA Surge Protective Devices Surgelogic™ HWA surge protective devices are compact, nipple-mounted parallel- connected surge suppressors that come in a variety of voltage configurations, including Delta. A surge suppression path is provided for each mode, and the product is rated NEMA Type 4X. Internal diagnostics continuously monitor the device status. US and Canadian UL® Listed as a Type 2 SPD to UL 1449 and UL 1283 standards. Complies with requirements of NEC® Article 285 and CSA C22.2 No. 8-M1986 as appropriate. Complies with UL 96A 12th Edition Master Label requirements for Lightning Protection Systems. • LEDs indicate operational status • Short circuit current rating 200 kA • Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications (NEMA Type 4X rated) • Convenient side-nipple mounting • Compact design provides easy mounting inside or outside the equipment cabinets • -54 dB EMI/RFI filtering • Sine wave tracking • Audible alarm indicates loss of • Dry contacts • Optional flush-mount kit TVSHWAFMK suppression (does not contain alarm enable/disable switch) Table 6.7: HWA Surge Protective Devices Service Voltage 120/240 V, 1-phase, 3-wire + ground [1] 208Y/120 V, 3-phase, 4-wire + ground [2] [3] [1] 240/120 V, 3-phase, 4-wire + ground [1] High-leg Delta 240 V, 3-phase, 3-wire + ground Delta 480Y/277 V, 3-phase, 4-wire + ground [2] [4] [1] 480 V, 3-phase, 3-wire + ground Delta 600Y/347 V, 3-phase, 4-wire + ground [1] 600 V, 3-phase, 3-wire + ground Delta Peak Surge Current Rating per Phase (kA) NEMA 4X Cat. No. 50 80 100 50 80 100 50 80 100 50 80 100 50 80 100 50 80 100 50 80 100 50 80 100 TVS1HWA50X TVS1HWA80X TVS1HWA10X TVS2HWA50X TVS2HWA80X TVS2HWA10X TVS3HWA50X TVS3HWA80X TVS3HWA10X TVS6HWA50X TVS6HWA80X TVS6HWA10X TVS4HWA50X TVS4HWA80X TVS4HWA10X TVS5HWA50X TVS5HWA80X TVS5HWA10X TVS8HWA50X TVS8HWA80X TVS8HWA10X TVS9HWA50X TVS9HWA80X TVS9HWA10X XR Surge Protective Devices The XR SPD provides high-quality surge suppression in a compact and versatile package. This product is ideal for panel builders as well as manufacturers and integrators of instrumentation cabinets for industrial, commercial, and residential applications for single-phase power systems. US and Canadian UL® Listed as Type 1 SPD to the UL 1449 standard. Complies with requirements of NEC® Article 285, CSA 233.1-87, and CSA C22.2 No. 8-M1986 as appropriate. • LEDs indicate operational • Short circuit current rating 25 • Convenient side nipple • Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications • Optional flush mount kit TVSXRFMK (NEMA Type 4X rated) status kA mounting Table 6.8: XR Nipple-Mounted Surge Protective Devices System Voltage 120/240 V, 1-phase, 3-wire + ground Peak Surge Current Rating per Phase (kA) 50 80 Cat. No. TVS120XR50S TVS120XR80S I S E C V E D E V I T C E T O R P E G R U S ) S D P S ( HWA Series XR Series [1] [2] [3] [4] Do not use on ungrounded systems. Systems must be solidly grounded. Can be used on 4-wire or 3-wire grounded wye systems with or without neutral. 208Y/120 series also applies to the following voltage 220Y/127. 480Y/277 series applies to the following voltages 380Y/220, 400Y/230, and 415Y/240. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 6 6-7 11/10/2017


page 170

Nipple-Mounted SPDs Mounting Brackets and Flush Mount Kits Refer to Catalog 6671CT9701 Mounting Brackets and Flush Mount Kits The nipple products shown in this catalog provide a convenient means of incorporating surge suppression within a new or existing cabinet. The mounting bracket and flush- mount kits are designed for easy mounting of nipple products. schneider-electric.us TVSHWAFMK Cat. No. QOSAMK Table 6.9: Mounting Bracket for Enclosures Description Mounting bracket for SDSA1175 or SDSA1175T Flush-mount kif for HWA SPDs SDSA1175 and SDSA 3-Phase Surge Protective Devices SDSA1175 are designed and listed for indoor or outdoor installation and surge suppression for single-phase three-wire 120/240 Vac or two-wire 120 Vac 60 Hz electrical services. This product is ideal for panel builders as well as manufacturers and integrators of instrumentation cabinets for industrial, commercial, and residential applications for single-phase power systems. Two SDSA1175 surge protection devices can be installed to provide suppression for 208Y/120 Vac three-phase four-wire services. SDSA 3-Phase SPDs are designed and listed for indoor or outdoor installation and surge suppression for three-phase electrical services up to 600 Vac. The SDSA 3-Phase series is used extensively in service entrance panels to provide an efficient and economical means of surge suppression and also ideal for point of use applications for that added level of protection. US and Canadian UL® Listed as Type 1 SPD to the UL 1449 standard. Complies with requirements of NEC® Article 285, CSA 233.1-87, and CSA C22.2 No. 8-M1986 as appropriate. • LED indicates operational status • Short circuit current rating 25 kA (SDSA1175), 200 kA (SDSA 3-Phase) • Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications (NEMA Type 4X rated) • Convenient back-nipple mounting Table 6.10: SDSA1175 and SDSA 3-Phase Surge Protective Devices System Voltage SDSA1175 120/240 V, 1-phase, 3-wire 120 V, 1-phase, 2-wire SDSA 3-Phase 208Y/120 V, 3-phase, 4-wire [5] [6] 240 V Delta, 3-phase, 3-wire [7] 480Y/277 V, 3-phase, 4-wire [8] [5] 480 V Delta, 3-phase, 3-wire 600Y/347 V, 3-phase, 4-wire [5] 600 V Delta, 3-phase, 3-wire Peak Surge Current Rating per Phase (kA) 36 36 40 40 40 40 40 40 Cat. No. SDSA1175 SDSA1175T SDSA2040 SDSA2040D SDSA4040 SDSA4040D SDSA3650 SDSA3650D QOSAMK SDSA1175 SDSA 3-Phase 6 S U R G E P R O T E C T I V E D E V ( S P D S ) I C E S Do not use on ungrounded systems. Systems must be solidly grounded. Applicable voltages: 220Y/127V, 208Y/120V. Applicable voltages: 240V Delta, 240/120V High-Leg Delta. Applicable voltages: 480Y/277V, 415Y/240V, 400Y/230V, 380Y/220V. [5] [6] [7] [8] 6-8 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 171

Whole House SPDs Refer to Catalog 6671CT9701 schneider-electric.us Residential SPDs Surgebreaker Plus Whole House Surge Protective Device The Surgebreaker Plus Whole House device is designed to deliver surge suppression that addresses the entire home. AC modules are connected to the circuit breaker load center and provide suppression for all equipment connected to the power system. This Whole House system incorporates AC modules as well as modules for other metallic lines coming into the home including telephone/DSL and coaxial video/data. US and Canadian UL® Listed as Type 2 SPD to the UL 1449 standard. Complies with requirements of NEC® Article 285, CSA 233.1-87, and CSA C22.2 No. 8-M1986 as appropriate. Telephone and coaxial video modules US and Canadian UL® Recognized to UL 497A 4th Edition and UL 497B 4th Edition. • 120/240 Vac, 80 kA/phase AC surge suppression • LED status indicators for AC surge suppression • Telephone surge suppression module supports one RJ45 cable up to four lines. • Coaxial surge suppression module supports one line of video/data • Network suppression module supports one RJ45 modem/fax/DSL Table 6.11: Whole House Surge Protective Devices Description Whole House NEMA 1 Included Modules AC, Telephone, Coax, Network SDSB80111 Cat. No. Table 6.12: SDSB80111 Replacement Modules Description Telephone Suppression Module Video Suppression Module Network Suppression Module Home Electronics Protective Device ** To purchase Telephone, Video or Network Replacement Modules - go online to: http://www.apc.com/products/family/index.cfm?id=219 Cat. No. PTEL2R PNETR6 HEPD80 PVR Surgebreaker Plus Whole House Accessories Add additional surge suppression or replace existing modules in Whole House products. Coaxial, telephone and network modules: US and Canadian UL® Recognized to UL 497A 4th Edition and UL 497B 4th Edition. HEPD Whole House Surge Protective Device HEPD Whole House devices are designed to deliver superior AC surge protection for the entire AC power system in a home. HEPDs are compact in size and are designed to protect AC wires in the home from surges that could affect home electronics and appliances not connected to surge strips. cULus Listed to the latest UL 1449 standard, UL Type 1 SPD, CSA C22.2 No. *-M1986, C233.1-87. • 120/240 Vac • Max surge current ratings avaliable: 50, 80 and 108 kA • NEMA 4X rate for indoor or outdoor applications • LED status indicators • Compatible with all brands of load centers • Flush Mount Kits sold separately - see table below • HEPD50: 3 year/$50,000 connected equipment warranty • HEPD80: 5 year/$75,000 connected equipment warranty Table 6.13: HEPD Whole House Surge Protective Devices Description Surge Current Rating 50kA Home Electronic Protective Device 80kA Home Electronic Protective Device Flush Mount Kit for HEPD80 Cat. No. HEPD50 HEPD80 HEPD80MKF 50 kA 80 kA I S E C V E D E V ) S D P S ( I T C E T O R P E G R U S 6 6-9 SDSB80111 HEPD50 HEPD80 HEPD80MKF HEPD80MKF © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 172

Residential SPDs Plug on Neutral QO™ and Homeline™ Load Center SPDs schneider-electric.us Plug-on Neutral QO™ and Homeline™ Load Center Surge Protective Devices The industry's first exclusive Plug on Neutral (PoN) Surge Protective Device (SPD). Square D™ load center PoN SPDs are a simple and quick installation. It's as easy as snap, click, done! PoN SPDs are easier to install than a standard circuit breaker. No wires are needed for installation. The PoN SPD simply plugs on to the bus and neutral bar. The surge suppressors use two-pole spaces in a QO™ or Homeline™ load center. US and Canadian UL® Listed as Type 2 SPD to the UL 1449 standard. Complies with requirements of NEC® Article 285, CSA 233.1-87, and CSA C22.2 No. 8-M1986 as appropriate. • Industry First: No wires or tools required • Installation Flexibility: Works on Plug-on Neutral design QO or HOM loadcenters using two-pole spaces • Whole House Protection: 50 kA surge • LED indicates operational status • Peace of mind: 5 year/ $50,000 connected equipment warranty current capacity per phase for installation Table 6.14: QO™, NQ, and Homeline™ Load Center Surge Protective Device Description Plug on Neutral QO™ Surgebreaker Plug on Neutral Homeline™ Surgebreaker QO250PSPD HOM250PSPD Cat. No. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved QO250PSPD HOM250PSPD 6 S U R G E P R O T E C T I V E D E V ( S P D S ) I C E S 6-10 11/10/2017


page 173

schneider-electric.us QO™, NQ, and Homeline™ Load Center Surge Protective Devices Refer to Catalog 6671CT9701 Residential SPDs QO™, NQ, and Homeline™ Load Center Surge Protective Devices Square D™ load center surge protective devices are easy to install plug-in units that install as quickly as a standard circuit breaker. The surge suppressors use two pole spaces in a QO™ or Homeline™ load center, or NQ panelboard. US and Canadian UL® Listed as Type 2 SPD to the UL 1449 standard. Complies with requirements of NEC® Article 285, CSA 233.1-87, and CSA C22.2 No. 8-M1986 as appropriate. • QO2175SB for QO™ load centers, spaces • Plug-on design requires two pole • LED indicates operational status • 22.5 kA per phase combination devices, and NQ panelboards • HOM2175SB for Homeline™ load centers and combination devices QO217SB HOM217SB Table 6.15: QO™, NQ, and Homeline™ Load Center Surge Protective Devices Description QO™ Surgebreaker for QO and NQ Homeline™ Surgebreaker Cat. No. QO2175SB HOM2175SB I S E C V E D E V I T C E T O R P E G R U S ) S D P S ( © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 6 6-11 11/10/2017


page 174

Residential SPDs QO™, NQ, and Homeline™ Load Center Surge Protective Devices Refer to Catalog 6671CT9701 schneider-electric.us 6 S U R G E P R O T E C T I V E D E V ( S P D S ) I C E S 6-12 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 175

Table of Contents Section 7 Miniature and Molded Case Circuit Breakers Selection Information 7-1 QO™ and QOU Miniature Circuit Breakers Homeline™ Circuit Breakers Multi 9™ Miniature Circuit Breakers PowerPact™ Molded Case Circuit Breakers Motor Circuit Protectors Automatic Switches 500 Vdc Circuit Breakers Mission Critical Circuit Breakers PowerPact™ Circuit Breaker Accessories Micrologic™ Electronic Trip Units Masterpact™ Universal Power Circuit Breakers Ground-Fault Protection Dimensions and Shipping Weights Circuit Breaker Enclosures 7-11 7-19 7-23 7-30 7-42 7-49 7-50 7-52 7-54 7-65 7-71 7-74 7-76 7-78 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7-1 7 E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I H-FrameB-FrameL-FrameM-FrameP-FrameR-FrameJ-Frame11/10/2017


page 176

Selection Information Miniature Circuit Breakers Class 500, 600 schneider-electric.us QO Miniature Circuit Breakers QO™ Circuit Breakers Circuit Breaker Type Number of Poles Current Range (A) Interrupting Ratings Plug-on QO Bolt-on Unit Mount QOB — 2 10–200 [2] 1 10–70 QO-H QOB-H — 2 — — 1 QO-VH — — 2 — — 3 3 10–100 15–100 15–70 15–125 15–100 15–70 QOB-VH — — 1 2, 3 [1] 15– 150 QH QHB QOT — — 1 — 3 10 10 — — — — 5 [5] — — — — — — — — X X — X X — X X X 10 10 — — — — 5 [5] — — — — — — — — — HACR [7] NOM X — X X — X X X 10 10 — 10 — — 5 [5] — — — — — — — — — X — X X — X X X 10 10 — 10 — — — — — — — — — — — — X — X X — X X — 22 22 — — — — — — — — — — — — — X X — X X — X X — 22 22 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 22 22 — 22 — — — — — — — — — — — — HACR [7] X — X X — X X — X — X X — X X — 22 22 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — X X — X X — 22 22 — 22 [4] — — — — — — — — — — — — X [9] — X [9] X [9] — X X — UL/CSA Rating (kA) (50/60 Hz) DC Ratings 120 Vac 120/240 Vac 208Y/120 240 Vac [3] 277 Vac 480Y/277 Vac 48 Vdc 60 Vdc 65 Vdc 125 Vdc 250 Vdc 500 Vdc IEC (Icu) IEC 60947-2 (50/60 Hz) [6] Special Ratings CCC Fed. Specs W-C-375B/GEN Other Standard Accessories and Modifications Shunt Trip [8] Undervoltage Trip Auxiliary Switches [8] Alarm Switch [8] Handle Operators Handle Padlock Attachment Trip System Type Thermal-magnetic Molded Case Switch Dimensions (1P Unit Mount) Dimensions (1P Unit Mount) in. (mm) Pages Height Width Depth QO- CAFI QOB- CAFI — 1, 2 15–20 10 10 — — — — — — — — — — — — — X HACR [7] — — — — — X X — QO- VHCAFI QOB- VHCAFI — 1, 2 15–20 22 22 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X X — X X — QO- DF QOB- DF — 1 15–20 10 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X QOVH- DF QOB- VHDF — 1 15–20 22 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X HACR [7] HACR [7] — — — — — X X — — — — — — X X — — 1,2 15– 30 65 65 — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — X — X X — X X — 15–30 15–30 65 65 — 65 — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — X X — X X — 10 10 — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — X — X X — X X — 3.5 (89) [1] 4.75 (121) 0.75 (19) [1] 2.92 (74) [1] page 7-11 7 I I I C R C U I T B R E A K E R S M N A T U R E A N D M O L D E D C A S E For dimensions for QOB2150VH, QOB3110VH, QOB3125VH and QOB3150VH, see page 7-76 2P 150–200 A requires 4P width. See the Supplemental Digest, Section 3 for 3Ø corner grounded systems. 22 kA @ 240 Vac for 3P only. 1P and 2P, 10–70 A and 3P 10–60 A only. See the Supplemental Digest Section 10 for circuit breakers with IEC ratings. HACR on QO, QOB 1P 10–70 A, 2P 15–100 A, 3P 10–100 A; QOB-VH 1P 15–70 A, 2P 15–125 A, 3P 15–100 A. Factory-installed option only. Factory-installed accessories are not available on QOB-VH 2P150 A and 3P 110–150 A. [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] 7-2 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 177

Miniature Circuit Breakers Class 500, 600 schneider-electric.us Selection Information QO-GFI, QO-EPD, QOU, QOM Miniature Circuit Breakers QO Circuit Breakers QOU Circuit Breakers QOM1 and QOM2 Main Circuit Breakers QO-GFI QOB-GFI — 1 15–30 — 2 15–60 — 3 15–50 QO- VHGFI QOB- VHGFI — 1 15–30 QO-EPD QO-EPE QOB-EPD QOB-EPE — 2 15–60 — 1 15–30 — 3 15–50 1 10–100 — — QOU 2 10–125 Circuit Breaker Type Number of Poles Current Range (A) Interrupting Ratings UL/CSA Rating (kA RMS) (50/60 Hz) DC Ratings Plug-on Bolt-on Unit Mount 120 Vac 120/240 Vac 208Y/120 240 Vac [11] 277 Vac 480Y/277 Vac 48 Vdc 60 Vdc 65 Vdc 125 Vdc 250 Vdc 500 Vdc 240 Vac 415 Vac IEC 60947-2 (50/60 Hz) Icu Special Ratings CCC Fed. Specs W-C-375B/GEN Other Standard Accessories and Modifications Shunt Trip Undervoltage Trip Auxiliary Switches Alarm Switch Handle Operators Handle Padlock Attachment Trip System Type Thermal-magnetic Molded Case Switch Dimensions (1P Unit Mount) Dimensions (1P Unit Mount) in. (mm) Height Width Depth 10 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — X X — X X — NOM 10 10 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X X — X X — 10 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — X X — X X — NOM 10 10 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X X — X X — — — 10 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X X — X X — 22 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X X — X X — 4.12 (103) 0.75 (19) — — — 10 — — — — — — — — — — — — — X X — X X — — — QYU [10] 1 10–30 — — QOM1-VH QOM2-VH — 2 50–125 — 2 100–225 — — — 5 — — — — — — — — — — X — X [16] — X[16] X [16] — X X — 22 22 — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — — — X X — 22 22 — — — — — — — — — — — — X — X [16] — — — — X X — 3 10–100 10 10 10 — — 5 [12] 5 [13] — — — — — — 10 10 — — — 5 [12] 5 [13] — — — — — — 10 10 — — — 5 [12] 5 [13] — — — — — — X [14] X [14] X [14] X X HACR [15] X X [16] — X [16] X [16] — X X — X [16] — X [16] X [16] — X X X X [16] — X [16] X [16] — X X X 4.05 (103) 0.75 (19) 2.92 (74) page 7-17 5.09 (129) [17] 5.00 (127) [17] 3.47 (88) [17] 5.60 (142) [17] 5.07 (129) [17] 3.60 (91) [17] See Section 1 E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I Pages NOTE: All circuit breakers on this chart are UL Listed and CSA Certified unless otherwise noted. 2.92 (74) page 7-11 For information regarding 3Ø corner grounded systems see the Supplemental Digest, Section 3. 1P and 2P, 10–70 A and 3P 10–60 A only. [10] QYU is a UL 1077 supplementary protector. [11] [12] [13] QOU is UL Listed for 60 Vdc per pole 80–100 A, 1P; 80–125 A, 2P; and 70–100 A, 3P. [14] [15] HACR on QOU 1P and 3P 15–100 A, 2P 15–125 A; [16] [17] QOM1 and QOM2 dimensions are for 2-pole unit. 15–70 A 1P and 2P, 15–60 A 3P Factory-installed option only. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7-3 7 11/10/2017


page 178

Selection Information Miniature Circuit Breakers Class 500, 600 schneider-electric.us HOM Circuit Breakers HOM Circuit Breakers HOM-CAFI — — 1, 2 15–20 HOM-DF — — 1 HOM-GFI — — 1 — — 2 HOM-EPD — — 1 — — 2 15–20 15–20 15–50 15–20 15–50 HOMT — — 1 15–50 [19] 10 10 — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — — X X — 10 — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — — X X — 10 — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — — — X — 10 10 — — — — — — — — — — — — X HACR [22] — — — — — — X — 10 — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — — — X — 3.13 (79) 1.00 (25) 2.98 (76) page 1-21 10 10 — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — — — X — 10 10 — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — — X [24] X — HOM 15–200 [18] — — 2 10 10 — — — — — — — — — — — — — 1 15–50 10 10 — — — — — — — — — — — — — X X HACR [22] NOM — — — — — X X — — — — — — X X — Height Width Depth Plug-on Bolt-on Unit Mount Circuit Breaker Type Number of Poles Current Range (A) Interrupting Ratings 120 Vac 120/240 Vac 208Y/120 240 Vac [20] 277 Vac 480Y/277 Vac 48 Vdc 60 Vdc 65 Vdc 125 Vdc 250 Vdc IEC (Icu) UL/CSA Rating (kA) (50/60 Hz) DC Ratings IEC 60947-2 (50/60 Hz) [21] Special Ratings CCC Fed. Specs W-C-375B/GEN Other Standard Accessories and Modifications Shunt Trip [23] Undervoltage Trip Auxiliary Switches [23] Alarm Switch [23] Handle Operators Handle Padlock Attachment Trip System Type Thermal-magnetic Molded Case Switch Dimensions (1P Unit Mount) Dimensions (1P Unit Mount) in. (mm) Pages 7 I I I C R C U I T B R E A K E R S M N A T U R E A N D M O L D E D C A S E 2P 150–200 A requires 4P width. [18] [19] HOMT tandem is 30 A maximum. HOMT quad tandem has 20 A maximum on outside poles, and 50 A maximum on the inside poles. [20] See the Supplemental Digest, Section 3 for 3Ø corner grounded systems. [21] See the Supplemental Digest Section 10 for circuit breakers with IEC ratings. [22] HACR on HOM 1P 15–50 A and 2P 15–100 A. [23] [24] Handle padlock attachment available for HOMT quad tandem only. 7-4 Factory-installed option only. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 179

Miniature Circuit Breakers Class 500, 600 schneider-electric.us Selection Information Multi 9, EDB Miniature Circuit Breakers Multi 9™ Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors EDB Circuit Breakers Plug-on Bolt-on Unit Mount Circuit Breaker Type Number of Poles Current Range (A) Interrupting Ratings — — 2 UL 489 C60BP 1 3 1 0.5–63 0.5–63 0.5–63 0.5–63 C60H-DC — EDB — — EGB — — EJB — 1 0.5–63 2 1 2, 3 1 2, 3 1 2, 3 0.5–63 15–70 15–125 15–70 15–125 15–70 15–125 14 kA up to 35 A, 10 kA from 40 to 63 A. 14 kA up to 32 A, 10 kA from 40 to 63 A. For information regarding 3Ø corner grounded systems see the Supplemental Digest, Section 3. 10 kA up to 32 A, 5 kA from 40 to 63 A. [25] C60 are recognized components per UL 1077. [26] [27] [28] [29] [30] Up to 35 A. [31] [32] [33] 10 kA up to 35 A. 2 poles must be wired in series for 500 Vdc. Factory-installed option only. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7-5 7 — — UL1077 C60SP [25] 2 1–63 14 [27] 14 [27] 14 [27] 10 [29] 10 [29] 3,4 1–63 14 [27] 14 [27] 14 [27] 10 [29] 10 [29] 10 — — — — — 20  5 — — — — — — 20  5 X — — — 20 — — — — 10 — X — — — — — — 5 5 5 5 5 5 [32] — — — — — 5 5 5 5 5 — — — X — X X X X X X X — UL/CSA Rating (kA RMS) (50/60 Hz) DC Ratings 120 Vac 120/240 Vac 240 Vac [28] 277 Vac 480Y/277 Vac 14 [26] 14 [26] 14 [26] — 10 [30] 14 [26] 14 [26] 14 [26] — 10 [31] 14 [26] 14 [26] 14 [26] — 10 [31] 14 [27] 14 [27] 14 [27] 10 [29] 48 Vdc 60 Vdc 65 Vdc 125 Vdc 250 Vdc 500 Vdc 240 Vac 415 Vac — 10 — — — — 10 — — 10 — 10 — — 20 10 — — — — — — 20 10 — — X — X — IEC X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X IEC 60947-2 (50/60 Hz) Icu Special Ratings CCC Fed. Specs W-C-375B/GEN Other Standard Accessories and Modifications Shunt Trip Undervoltage Trip Auxiliary Switches Alarm Switch Handle Operators Handle Padlock Attachment Trip System Type Thermal-magnetic Molded Case Switch Dimensions (1P Unit Mount) Dimensions (1P Unit Mount) in. (mm) Pages NOTE: All circuit breakers on this chart are UL Listed and CSA Certified unless otherwise noted. 3.19 (81) 0.71 (18) 2.76 (70) page 7-23 4.05 (103) 0.71 (18) 2.76 (70) Height Width Depth X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 0.71 (18) 1.42 (36) X X X X X X X X X X X X 3.19 (81) 2.56 (65) X — X — X — X — X — X — X — 25 18 18 18 — — — — — — — 20 10 — X 25 25 25 18 18 — — — — — — — — — X X [33] — X [33] X [33] — X X — X [33] — X [33] X [33] — X X — 100  65  65  65 — — — — — — — — — — X 100 100 100  65  65 — — — — — — — — — X X [33] — X [33] X [33] — X X — X [33] — X [33] X [33] — X X — 65 35 35 35 — — — — — — — — — — X 65 65 65 35 35 — — — — — — — — — X HACR X [33] — X [33] X [33] — X X — X [33] — X [33] X [33] — X X — 5.66 (144) 0.98 (25) 4.05 (103) See Section 9 E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I 11/10/2017


page 180

Selection Information Molded Case Circuit Breakers Class 500, 600, 800 schneider-electric.us PowerPact™ 125 A B-Frame PowerPact 150 A H-Frame Electronic Trip Version PowerPact 250 A J-Frame Electronic Trip Version B-, H-, J-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers X X X BJ HD 2, 3 HG 2, 3 HJ HL BD BG 15–150 15–150 240 Vac 480Y/277 Vac 480 Vac 600Y/347 Vac 600 Vac X X X X X — — X X X X X X — — X X X X X X — — X 2, 3 [34] 15–150 2, 3 [34] 15–150 1, 2, 3, 4 15–125 1, 2, 3, 4 15–125 1, 2, 3, 4 15–125 BK 1, 2 15–30 690 Vac 250 Vdc 500 Vdc 65 35 35 18 18 20 20 65 35 35 18 — — — 25 18 18 14 14 20 — 25 18 18 14 — — — 65 35 35 18 — — — 65 35 35 18 — — — 25 18 18 14 — — — 25 18 18 14 — — — 125 100 100 50 50 20 50 125 100 100 50 — — — 100 65 65 25 25 20 — 100 65 65 25 — — — 100 65 65 25 — — — 100 65 65 25 — — — 100 65 65 65 — — — 100 65 65 25 — — — 250 Vdc [36] 500 Vdc [36] 220/240 Vac 380/415 Vac 440/480 Vac 500/525 Vac Circuit Breaker Type Number of Poles Current Range (A) Interrupting Ratings UL/CSA/ NOM AC Rating (kA RMS) (50/60 Hz) UL/CSA/ NOM DC Ratings IEC AC Rating (kA RMS) (50/60 Hz) Icu/lcs [37] IEC DC Ratings Special Ratings CCC Fed. Specs W-C-375B/GEN HACR Connections/Terminations Unit Mount I-Line™ Rear Connection Drawout Optional Lugs Accessories and Modifications Shunt Trip Undervoltage Trip Auxiliary Switches Alarm Switch Motor Operator Handle Operators Mechanical Interlocks (3P) Handle Padlock Attachment Cylinder Lock (3P) Optional GF Protection Trip System Type Thermal-magnetic Instantaneous-only (MCP) Molded Case Switch (Automatic) Electronic Enclosures (page 7-76–page 7-78) General Purpose (NEMA 1) Raintight (NEMA 3R) Dust-tight (NEMA 12) Watertight (NEMA 4, 4X, 5) Explosion Proof (NEMA 7, 9) Height Dimensions (3P Unit Width Mount) Depth in. (mm) Pages (Unit Mount)/(I-Line) NOTE: All circuit breakers on this chart are UL Listed and CSA Certified unless otherwise noted. 5.4 (137) 3.2 (81) 3.5 (89) 6.4 (163) 4.1 (104) 3.4 (86) X X X X — X X X — — X X X X — X X X — — X X X X — X X X — — X X X X X X X X — — X X — — X X X X X — X — X — — X X X X X X X X — — X — X — — — — — — X — X — — — — — — X — X — — — — — — X — X — — — — — — page 7-31/Section 9 page 7-32/Section 9 X [38] X [38] X [38] X [38] X [38] X [38] X [39] X [39] X [38] X [38] — — X — — — — X X X X — X X X X — X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X — X [38] X [38] X [38] X [38] X X X X X X X X X X X X — X X X X — X [39] X [39] X [39] X [39] X [39] 15–150 HR 3 200 200 200 100 100 — — 150 125 125 75 20 — — X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X — — — — — — — — — X [39] JD 2, 3 [34] 70–250 [35] JG 2, 3 [34] 70–250 [35] JJ 2, 3 [34] 70–250 [35] JL 2, 3 [34] 70–250 [35] JR 3 70–250 [35] 25 18 18 14 14 20 — 25 18 18 14 — 20 20 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X — — X — — 65 35 35 18 18 20 20 65 35 18 20 — 20 20 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X — — X X [39] X X [39] X [39] X X X X X [40] X X X X X [40] 100 65 65 25 25 20 — 100 65 25 20 — 20 20 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X — — X X [39] — X [39] X X X X — 7.5 (191) 4.1 (104) 3.4 (86) 125 100 100 50 50 20 50 125 100 50 20 — 20 20 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X — — X X X 200 200 200 100 100 — — 150 125 125 75 20 — — X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X — — X X X X [39] X [39] X X X X — — — — — — page 7-32/Section 9 2P in a 3P module. [34] 70–250 A with electronic trip system [35] [36] Not available with electronic trip units [37] Dual UL and IEC ratings and CE markings on circuit breakers. For additional IEC ratings, see the Supplemental Digest, Section 10. [38] Not available in HD and HG 2P rating (2P module). [39] [40] Not UL Listed due to wire bending space. 7-6 3P only. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7 I I I C R C U I T B R E A K E R S M N A T U R E A N D M O L D E D C A S E 11/10/2017


page 181

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Class 500, 600, 800 schneider-electric.us Selection Information PowerPact™ Q-, L-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers PowerPact 250 A Q-Frame PowerPact 600 A L-Frame QB 2, 3 QD 2, 3 QG 2, 3 QJ 2, 3 70–250 [41] 70–250 [41] 70–250 [41] 70–250 [41] LD 3, 4 70–600 LG 3, 4 70–600 LJ 3, 4 70–600 LL 3, 4 70–600 LR 3, 4 70–600 Circuit Breaker Type Number of Poles Current Range (A) Interrupting Ratings UL/CSA/NOM AC Rating (kA RMS) (50/60 Hz) UL/CSA/NOM DC Ratings IEC AC Rating (kA RMS) (50/60 Hz) Icu/lcs [44] IEC DC Ratings Special Ratings 240 Vac 480Y/277 Vac 480 Vac 600Y/347 Vac 600 Vac 250 Vdc [42] 500 Vdc [43][42] 220/240 Vac 380/415 Vac 440/480 Vac 500/525 Vac 690 Vac 250 Vdc 500 Vdc CCC Fed. Specs W-C-375B/GEN HACR (2P, 3P) Connections/Terminations Unit Mount I-Line™ Rear Connection Drawout Optional Lugs Accessories and Modifications Shunt Trip Undervoltage Trip Auxiliary Switches Alarm Switch Motor Operator Handle Operators Mechanical Interlocks (3P) Handle Padlock Attachment Cylinder Lock (3P[45]) Optional GF Protection[46] Trip System Type Thermal-magnetic Instantaneous-only (MCP) Molded Case Switch (Automatic) Electronic Enclosures (page 7-76–page 7-78) General Purpose (NEMA 1) Raintight (NEMA 3R) Dust-tight (NEMA 12) Watertight (NEMA 4, 4X, 5) Explosion Proof (NEMA 7, 9) Height Width Depth 10 — — — — — — 10/5 10/5 — — — — — — X X X X — — — — — — — — — X X — — X — X — X X — — — 25 — — — — — — 10/5 10/5 — — — — — — X X X X — — — — — — — — — X X — — X — — — X X — — — 65 — — — — — — 10/5 10/5 — — — — — — X X X X — — — — — — — — — X X — — X — — — X X — — — 100 — — — — — — 10/5 10/5 — — — — — — X — X X — — — — — — — — — X X — — X — — — X X — — — 18/18 18/18 18/18 25 18 18 14 14 — — 25 — — — X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X — X — — — X 65 35 35 18 18 — 20 65 18 18 14 — — — X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X — X — X X X — — X [47] — — — — X [47] — — 100 65 65 25 25 — — 100 65 65 25 — — — X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X — X — X — X 125 100 100 50 50 — 50 125 100 100 50 — — — X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X — X — X X X 200 200 200 100 100 — — 150 125 125 75 20 — — X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X — X — X X X — — X [47] — — — — X [47] — — — — X [47] — — 13.38 (340) 5.51 (140) 4.33 (110) Dimensions (3P Unit Mount) in. (mm) Pages (Unit Mount)/(I-Line) NOTE: All circuit breakers on this chart are UL Listed and CSA Certified unless otherwise noted. page 7-36/Supplemental Section 9 6.47 (164) 4.5 (114) 3.93 (100) page 7-37/Supplemental Section 9 I-Line Q-frame circuit breakers are available 70–225 A only. 250 A Q-frame unit-mount circuit breakers are limited to Cu conductors only. [41] [42] Not available with electronic trip units [43] Ungrounded UPS systems only. See page 7-50. Special DC J-Frame only. [44] Dual UL and IEC ratings and CE markings on circuit breakers. For additional IEC ratings, see the Supplemental Digest, Section 10. [45] [46] Requires factory-installed “G” shunt trip and 3P module. [47] Enclosure rating 1, 3R, 5 and 12., Factory-installed option only. E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7-7 7 11/10/2017


page 182

Selection Information Molded Case Circuit Breakers Class 600, 612, 800 schneider-electric.us PowerPact 800 A M-Frame PowerPact 1200 A P-Frame PowerPact 3000 A R-Frame M-, P-, and R-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers Circuit Breaker Type Number of Poles Current Range (A) Interrupting Ratings UL/CSA/NOM Rating (kA RMS) (50/60 Hz) DC Ratings IEC (kA RMS) (50/60 Hz) Icu/Ics [49] Special Ratings 240 Vac 480Y/277 Vac 480 Vac 600Y/347 Vac 600 Vac 250 Vdc 500 Vdc [48] 240 Vac 415 Vac MG 2, 3 MJ 2, 3 PG 2, 3, 4 PJ 2, 3, 4 PK 2, 3, 4 PL 2, 3, 4 RG 2, 3, 4 RJ 2, 3, 4 RK 2, 3, 4 RL 2, 3, 4 300–800 300–800 100–1200 100–1200 100–1200 100–1200 240–3000 240–3000 240–3000 240–3000 65 35 35 18 18 — — 50/25 100 65 65 25 25 — — 65/35 65 35 35 18 18 — — 50/25 100 65 65 25 25 — — 65/35 65 50 50 50 50 — — 50/25 125 100 100 25 25 — — 125/65 65 35 35 18 18 — — 50/25 100 65 65 25 25 — — 65/35 65 65 65 65 65 — — 85/65 125 100 100 50 50 — — 125/65 35/20 50/25 35/20 50/25 50/25 85/45 35/20 50/25 70/55 85/45 CCC Fed. Specs W-C-375B/GEN HACR (2P, 3P) Connections/Terminations Unit Mount I-Line™ Rear Connection Drawout Optional Lugs Accessories and Modifications Shunt Trip Undervoltage Trip Auxiliary Switches Alarm Switch Motor Operator Handle Operators Mechanical Interlocks (3P) Handle Padlock Attachment Cylinder Lock (3P) Optional GF Protection Trip System Type Thermal-magnetic Instantaneous-only (MCP) Molded Case Switch (Automatic) Electronic Enclosures (page 7-76–page 7-78) General Purpose (NEMA 1) Raintight (NEMA 3R) Dust-tight (NEMA 12) Watertight (NEMA 4, 4X, 5) Explosion Proof (NEMA 7, 9) Dimensions (3P Unit Mount) 7 Height–in. (mm) Width—in. (mm) Depth—in. (mm) X X X X X — — X X X X X — — — X — — — — — X X X X X — X X X X X — — X X X X X — — — X — — — — — X X X X X — X X X X X — X [51] X X X X X X [51] X [51] X X — X — — X X X X X — — X X X X X — X [51] X X X X X X [51] X [51] X X — X — X X X X X X — — X X X X X — X [51] X X X X X X [51] X [51] X X — X — X X X X X X — — X X X X X — X [51] X X X X X X [51] X [51] X X — X — — X X X X X — — 12.80 (325) 8.30 (210) 8.10 (205) 16.20 (413) 8.30 (210) 8.10 (205) Pages (Unit Mount)/(I-Line) NOTE: All circuit breakers on this chart are UL Listed and CSA Certified unless otherwise noted. page 7-39, page 7-49/Section 9 page 7-38/Section 9 I I M N A T U R E A N D M O L D E D C A S E I C R C U I T B R E A K E R S [48] Ungrounded UPS systems only. See page 7-50. [49] Dual UL and IEC ratings and CE markings on circuit breakers. For additional IEC ratings, see the Supplemental Digest, Section 10. [50] [51] 7-8 1000 A and 1200 A only. 65/50 kA Icu/Ics for 450–600 A ratings. X X X X X[50] — — X X X X X — — — X — X — — X X — — — — — X X X X X X X X X X X [50] X X [50] X X [50] — — X X X X X — — — X — X — — X X — — — — — — — X X X X X — — — X — X — — X X — — — — — — — X X X X X — — — X — X — — X X — — — — — 15 (381) 16.50 (420) 14.40 (366) page 7-40, page 7-49/Section 9 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 183

Insulated Case Circuit Breakers Class 600, 800 schneider-electric.us Selection Information Masterpact NT, NW Molded Case Circuit Breakers Masterpact 1200 A Masterpact 6000 A Circuit Breaker Type Number of Poles Current Range Interrupting Ratings NT-N 3 , 4 100– 1200 NT-H 3, 4 100– 1200 NT-L1 3 100– 1200 NW-N 3 , 4 100– 2000 NW-H 3, 4 100– 2000 UL/CSA/NOM Rating (kA RMS) (50/60 Hz) DC Ratings IEC [53] (kA RMS) Icu/ Ics Special Ratings 240 Vac 480Y/277 Vac 480 Vac 600Y/347 Vac 600 Vac 250 Vdc 500 Vdc 240 Vac 415 Vac CCC Fed. Specs W-C-375B/GEN HACR (2P, 3P) Connections/Terminations Unit Mount I-Line™ Rear Connection Drawout Optional Lugs Accessories and Modifications Shunt Trip Undervoltage Trip Auxiliary Switches Alarm Switch Motor Operator Handle Operators Mechanical Interlocks Padlock Attachment Cylinder Lock Optional GF Protection Trip System Type Thermal-magnetic Instantaneous-only (MCP) Molded Case Switch (Automatic) Electronic Enclosures General Purpose (NEMA 1) Raintight (NEMA 3R) Dust-tight (NEMA 12) Watertight (NEMA 4, 4X, 5) Explosion Proof (NEMA 7, 9) 50 50 50 35 35 — — — — — — — X — X X — X X X X X — X X — X — — X X — — — — — 65 50 50 50 50 — — — — — — — X — X X — X X X X X — X X — X — — X X — — — — — 100 65 65 — — — — — — — — — X — X X — X X X X X — X X — X — — X X — — — — — NT-L 3 100– 1200 200 100 100 — — — — — — NT-LF [52] 3 100– 1200 200 100 100 — — — — — — — — — X — X X — X X X X X — X X — X — — X X — — — — — — — — X — X X — X X X X X — X X — X — — X X — — — — — 65 65 65 50 50 — — — — — — — X — X X — X X X X X — X X — X — — X X — — — — — NW-L 3 100– 2000 200 150 150 100 100 — — — — — — — X — X X — X X X X X — X X — X — — X X NW-LF [52] 3 100– 2000 200 150 150 100 100 — — — — — — — X — X X — X X X X X — X X — X — — X X NW-H 3 , 4 640– 3000 100 100 100 85 85 — — — — NW-L 3 640– 3000 200 150 150 100 100 — — — — — — — X — X X — X X X X X — X X — X — — X X — — — X — X X — X X X X X — X X — X — — X X 100 100 100 85 85 — — — — — — — X — X X — X X X X X — X X — X — — X X — — — — — — — — — — 17.28 (439) 17.74 (450) 18.38 (467) — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 17.28 (439) 17.74 (450) 18.38 (467) page 7-71 and Catalog 0613CT0001 NW-H 3 , 4 1200– 6000 NW-L 3 1200– 6000 100 100 100 85 85 — — — — — — — X — X X — X X X X X — X X — X — — X X 200 150 150 100 100 — — — — — — — X — X X — X X X X X — X X — X — — X X — — — — — — — — — — 17.28 (439) 30.94 (786) 18.38 (467) E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I Dimensions (3P Unit Mount) in. (mm) Pages NOTE: All circuit breakers on this chart are UL Listed and CSA Certified unless otherwise noted. page 7-71 and Catalog 0613CT0001 12.67 (322) 11.25 (286) 13.00 (331) Height Width Depth Tested to show arc flash hazard risk category as reference by NFPA70E. [52] [53] See Catalog 0613CT0001 for additional ratings and other information. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7-9 7 11/10/2017


page 184

Selection Information Molded Case Circuit Breakers Class 500, 600, 800 schneider-electric.us Q4 and L-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers 400 A L-Frame Circuit Breaker Type Number of Poles Current Range Interrupting Ratings UL/CSA/NOM Rating (kA RMS) (50/60 Hz) DC Ratings IEC Rating (kA RMS) Icu/lcs [56] IEC 50/60 Hz Special Ratings 240 Vac 480Y/277 Vac 480 Vac 600Y/347 Vac 600 Vac 250 Vdc [54] 500 Vdc [55][54] 240 Vac 415 Vac Q4 2, 3 250–400 LA 2, 3 125–400 LH 2, 3 125–400 25 — — — — — — — — 42 30 30 22 22 10 — — 20/5 65 35 35 25 25 50 20 — 20/5 For additional IEC ratings, see the Supplemental Digest Section 10. CCC Fed. Specs W-C-375B/GEN HACR (2P, 3P) Connections/Terminations Unit Mount I-Line™ Rear Connection Drawout Optional Lugs Accessories and Modifications Shunt Trip Undervoltage Trip Auxiliary Switches Alarm Switch Motor Operator Handle Operators Mechanical Interlocks (3P) Handle Padlock Attachment Cylinder Lock (3P) [54] Optional GF Protection [58] Trip System Type Thermal-magnetic Instantaneous-only (MCP) Molded Case Switch (Automatic) Electronic Enclosures (page 7-76–page 7-78) General Purpose (NEMA 1) Raintight (NEMA 3R) Dust-tight (NEMA 12) Watertight (NEMA 4, 4X, 5) Explosion Proof (NEMA 7, 9) — X — X X X — X X X X X X X — X X — X — — — X X X X — — X X X X X — X X X X X X X X [57] X X — X X — — X X X X — — X X X X X — X X X X X X X X [57] X X — X X X — X X X X — Dimensions (3P Unit Mount) in. (mm) Pages (Unit Mount)/(I-Line) NOTE: All circuit breakers on this chart are UL Listed and CSA Certified unless otherwise noted. Supplemental Digest Section 3 / Digest Section 9 5.84 (148) Height Width Depth 11 (279) 6 (152) Factory-installed option only. [54] [55] Ungrounded UPS systems only. See page 7-50. [56] Dual UL and IEC ratings and CE markings on circuit breakers. For additional IEC ratings, see the Supplemental Digest, Section 10. [57] Requires circuit breaker with WB suffix . [58] Requires factory-installed “G” Shunt trip and 3P module. 7-10 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7 I I I C R C U I T B R E A K E R S M N A T U R E A N D M O L D E D C A S E 11/10/2017


page 185

QO Plug-On Circuit Breakers Class 730, 731, 733 / Refer to Catalog: 0730CT9801 QO™ and QOU Miniature Circuit Breakers schneider-electric.us QO Plug-On Circuit Breakers Square D brand QO miniature circuit breakers are plug-on products for use in QO load centers, NQOD and NQ panelboards, NQOD and NQ OEM interiors or Speed-D™ switchboard distribution panels. Bolt-on QOB circuit breakers are for use in NQOD and NQ panelboards or interiors. [1] The Square D exclusive Qwik-Open™ mechanism, with a trip reaction within 1/60th of a second, is standard on all 1P 15 A and 20 A QO circuit breakers. Table 7.1: Plug-On Circuit Breakers Amperes Rating [2] 1P—120/240 Vac 2P—120/240 Vac Common Trip 2P—240 Vac [3] Common Trip 3P—240 Vac Common Trip 10 k AIR 10 A 15 A 20 A 25 A 30 A 35 A 40 A 45 A 50 A 60 A 70 A 80 A 90 A 100 A 110 A 125 A 150 A 175 A 200 A QO110 QO115 [4] [5] QO120 [4] [5] QO125 [4] QO130 [4] QO135 [4] QO140 [4] QO145 [4] QO150 [4] QO160 [4] QO170 [4] — — — — — — — — QO115VH [5] QO120VH [5] QO125VH QO130VH QO140VH QO150VH QO160VH QO170VH Molded Case Switch 60 A max.–240 Vac Molded Case Switch 100 A max.–240 Vac 22 k AIR [4] 15 A 20 A 25 A 30 A 40 A 50 A 60 A 70 A 80 A 90 A 100 A 110 A 125 A 150 A 175 A 200 A — — — — — — — — 42 k AIR [4]  40 A  45 A  50 A  60 A  70 A  80 A  90 A 100 A 110 A 125 A 65 k AIR [4] — — — — — — — — — —  15 A  20 A  25 A  30 A QH115 [5] QH120 [5] QH125 [8] QH130 QO210 QO215 [4] QO220 [4] QO225 [4] QO230 [4] QO235 [4] QO240 [4] QO245 [4] QO250 [4] QO260 [4] QO270 [4] QO280 [4] QO290 [4] QO2100 [4] QO2110 [4] QO2125 [4] QO2150 [4] [6] [7] QO2175 [4] [6] [7] QO2200 [4] [6] [7] — — QO215VH [9] QO220VH [9] QO225VH [9] QO230VH [9] QO240VH [9] QO250VH [9] QO260VH [9] QO270VH [9] QO280VH [9] QO290VH [9] QO2100VH [9] [10] QO2110VH [9] [10] QO2125VH [9] [10] QO2150VH [6] [9] [7] QO2175VH [6] [9] [7] QO2200VH [6] [9] [7] QOH240 [8] QOH245 [8] QOH250 [8] QOH26 [8] QOH270 QOH280 QOH290 QOH2100 QOH2110 [8] QOH2125 QH215 QH220 QH225 [8] QH230 — QO215H QO220H QO225H QO230H — QO240H — QO250H QO260H QO270H QO280H QO290H QO2100H QO310 QO315 [4] QO320 [4] QO325 [4] QO330 [4] QO335 [4] QO340 [4] QO345 [4] QO350 [4] QO360 [4] QO370 [4] QO380 [4] QO390 [4] QO3100 [4] — — — — — QO200 QO2000 [8] — — — — — QO300 QO3000 [8] — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — QO315VH [9] QO320VH [9] QO325VH [9] QO330VH [9] QO340VH [9] QO350VH [9] QO360VH [9] QO370VH [9] QO380VH [9] QO390VH [9] QO3100VH [9] — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — QH315 [4] QH320 QH325 [8] QH330 Refer topage 7-2 for Interrupting Ratings, Accessories, and Dimensions. QO 1P 1 Space Required QO 2P 2 Spaces Required QO 3P 3 Spaces Required QO2200 2P 200 A 4 Spaces Required [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] See Digest Section 1 for load centers, and Section 9 for panelboards and interiors. 10–30 A circuit breakers are suitable for use with 60oC or 75oC conductors. 35–125 A circuit breakers are suitable for use with 75oC conductors. UL Listed 5 k AIR on corner grounded Delta systems. UL Listed as HACR type for use with air conditioning, heating and refrigeration equipment haing motor group combinations and marked for use with HACR type circuit breakers. UL Listed as SWD (switching duty) rated. Suitable for switching 120 Vac fluorescent lighting loads. Requires four spaces (1 AWG–300 kcmil Al/Cu.) Suitable for switching 120 Vac fluorescent lighting loads. Not suitable for use in 3Ø panels. Use only in 1Ø panel rated 150 A or greater. Order only. Contact your local Field Office. UL Listed for use ahead of QO, QO-GFI, QO-EPD, QOT, QO-AFI, and QO-PL 10 k AIR circuit breakers to permit their application at 22 kA fault level. 100 A maximum branch mounted opposite. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7-11 7 E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I 11/10/2017


page 186

QO™ and QOU Miniature Circuit Breakers QO Plug-On Circuit Breakers Class 730, 731, 733 / Refer to Catalog: 0730CT9801 QO/QOB Ring Terminal Table 7.2: QO/QOB Ring Terminal—Factory-installed only Ampere Rating 10–30 A 35–60 A 35–50 A  70–110 A  60–100 A Poles 1, 2, 3 1,2 3 2 3 schneider-electric.us Suffix 5237 5238 5273 Wire Sizes for QO/QOB Circuit Breakers Table 7.3: Wire Sizes Circuit Breaker Type Ampere Rating [11] QO 1P QO 2P QO 3P QOB-VH QOT QO-AFI, QO-GFI or QO-EPD QO-PL 10–30 A 10–30 A 35–70 A 10–30 A 10–30 A 35–70 A 80–125 A 150–200 A 10–30 A 35–70 A 80–125 A 110–150 A 15–20 A 15–30 A 40, 50, 60 A 10–60 A Wire Size (AWG/kcmil) 14–8 Al/Cu (2) 14–10 Cu 8–2 Al/Cu 14–8 Al/Cu (2) 14–10 Cu 8–2 Al/Cu 4–2/0 Al/Cu 4–300 Al/Cu 14–8 Al/Cu, (2) 14-10 Cu 8–2 Al/Cu 4–2/0 Al/Cu 4–300 Al/Cu 12–8 Al 14–8 Cu 12–8 Al 14–8 Cu 12–4 Al 14–6 Cu 12–2 Al 14–2 Cu QOT Tandem Circuit Breakers Circuit limiting QOT tandem circuit breakers have a mounting cam as shown. Installation into a QO load center can only be made in those positions having a mounting pan rail slot. Meets Paragraph 408.54 of the NEC®. UL Listed as Class CTL Table 7.4: QOT Tandem Circuit Breakers Ampere Rating [12] Cat. No. [13] 1P—120/240 Vac 15 A and 15 A 15 A and 20 A 20 A and 20 A 2P—120/240 Vac Common Trip Order two QOT1515 or QOT2020 circuit breakers and handle tie QOTHT for common switching of center two poles. QOT1515 QOT1520 QOT2020 QOT 1P Tandem 1 Space Required Replacement Tandem Circuit Breakers Includes two circuit breakers (one QO2030 and one QO3020) and handle tie QOTHT. Table 7.5: Replacement Tandem Circuit Breakers Ampere Rating [12] 1P—120/240 Vac—1 Space Required 15 A and 15 A 15 A and 20 A 20 A and 20 A 20 A and 30 A 30 A and 20 A Two 1P Individual Trip—120/240 Vac—2 Spaces Required Cat. No. [13] QO1515 QO1520 QO2020 QO2030 QO3020 15 A and 15 A 15 A and 20 A 20 A and 20 A 20 A and 30 A 30 A and 20 A Order Two QO1515 or QO2020 circuit breakers and handle tie QOTHT — QO20303020 [14] — 7 I I M N A T U R E A N D M O L D E D C A S E I C R C U I T B R E A K E R S [11] [12] [13] UL Listed as HACR type for use with air conditioning, heating and refrigeration equipment haing motor group combinations and marked for use with HACR type circuit breakers. [14] 7-12 10–30 A circuit breakers are suitable for use with 60oC or 75oC conductors. 35–125 A circuit breakers are suitable for use with 75oC conductors. 10–30 A circuit breakers are suitable for use with 60oC or 75oC conductors. 35–125 A circuit breakers are suitable for use with 75oC conductors. Includes two circuit breakers (one QO2030 and one QO3020) and handle tie QOTHT. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Pan Rail SlotRail BeadMounting Cam11/10/2017


page 187

QO Plug-On Circuit Breakers Class 685, 690, 730, 912, 950 / Refer to Catalog: 0730CT9801 QO™ and QOU Miniature Circuit Breakers schneider-electric.us QO Arc-Fault Circuit Breaker QO arc-fault circuit breakers provide protection for Series and Parallel Type Arcing as required by the NEC and local code adoption, and comply with UL1699. Table 7.6: QO Arc Fault Circuit Breakers (One-Pole) Circuit Breaker Type [15] Ampere Rating 10 k AIR 1 Space Required One–Pole 120 Vac Two–Pole 120/240 Vac 22 k AIR 1 Space Required 10 k AIR 2 Space Required 22 k AIR 2 Space Required 1P QO-CAFI Plug-On Neutral 1P QO-CAFI Pigtail Combination Arc-fault Interrupter (Pigtail Neutral) Plug-On Neutral Combination Arc-fault Interrupter 15 20 15 20 QO115CAFI QO120CAFI QO115VHCAFI QO120VHCAFI QO215CAFI [16] QO220CAFI [16] QO215VHCAFI [16] QO220VHCAFI [16] QO115PCAFI QO120PCAFI QO115VHPCAFI QO120VHPCAFI QO-Dual Function Circuit Breaker QO Combination Arc Fault and Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters (Dual Function) provide overload and short circuit protection, plus arc fault and ground fault protection in accordance with the NEC, UL1699 and UL943. Table 7.7: QO-Dual Function Arc Fault Circuit Breakers Circuit Breaker Type [17] Combination Arc-fault and Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (Pigtail Neutral) Plug-On Neutral Combination Arc-fault and Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Ampere Rating 15 20 15 20 1P QO-DF Plug-on Neutral 1P QO-DF Pigtail 1P 120 Vac 10 k AIR 1 Space Required 1P 120 Vac 22 k AIR 1 Space Required QO115DF QO120DF QO115PDF QO120PDF QO115VHDF QO120VHDF QO115VHPDF QO120VHPDF QO-GFI Qwik-Gard™ circuit breakers provide overload and short circuit protection, combined with Class A ground fault protection. Class A denotes a ground fault circuit interrupter that will trip when a fault current to ground is 6 mA or more, for people protection. Do not connect to more than 250 feet of load conductor for the total one-way run to prevent nuisance tripping. Table 7.8: QO-GFI Circuit Breakers 1P QO-GFI 2P QO-GFI Ampere Rating [18] 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 Qwik-Gard Circuit Breakers With Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter 1P 120 Vac 10 k AIR 1 Space Required 22 k AIR 1 Space Required 2P Common Trip 120/240 Vac 10 k AIR 3P Common Trip 208Y/120 Vac 10 k AIR 2 Spaces Required 3 Spaces Required QO115GFI QO120GFI QO125GFI QO130GFI — — — QO115VHGFI QO120VHGFI QO125VHGFI QO130VHGFI — — — QO215GFI QO220GFI QO225GFI QO230GFI QO240GFI QO250GFI QO260GFI [19] QO315GFI QO320GFI QO330GFI QO340GFI QO350GFI — — QO-EPD/EPE QO-EPD/EPE circuit breakers provide overload and short circuit protection combined with Class B ground fault protection. They are designed to provide ground fault protection of equipment at a 30 mA level (EPD) or 100 mA level (EPE). They are not designed to protect people from electrical shock. Table 7.9: QO-EPD Circuit Breakers QO 1P With Shunt Trip Ampere Rating [20] 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 1P 120 Vac 10 k AIR 1 Space Required 2P Common Trip 120/240 Vac 10 k AIR 2 Spaces Required 3P Common Trip 240 Vac 10 k AIR 3 Spaces Required QO115EPD QO120EPD QO125EPD QO130EPD — — — QO215EPD QO220EPD QO225EPD QO230EPD QO240EPD QO250EPD QO260EPD [22] QO315EPD [21] QO320EPD [21] — QO330EPD [21] QO340EPD [21] QO350EPD [21] — QO315EPE [21] QO320EPE [21] — QO330EPE [21] QO340EPE [21] QO350EPE [21] — For 120/240 V only, not for 208Y/120 V. 10–30 A circuit breakers are suitable for use with 60oC or 75oC conductors. 35–60 A circuit breakers are suitable for use with 75oC conductors. [15] UL Listed as HACR type for use with air conditioning, heating and refrigeration equipment haing motor group combinations and marked for use with HACR type circuit breakers. [16] [17] UL Listed as HACR type for use with air conditioning, heating and refrigeration equipment haing motor group combinations and marked for use with HACR type circuit breakers. [18] [19] Suitable only for feeding 240 Vac and 208 Vac two-wire loads. Does not contain load neutral connection. [20] [21] See note in Instruction Bulletin when using in an enclosure with a QO403 or QON prefix. [22] Suitable only for feeding 240 Vac and 208 Vac two-wire loads. Does not contain load neutral connection. 10–30 A circuit breakers are suitable for use with 60oC or 75oC conductors. 35–60 A circuit breakers are suitable for use with 75oC conductors. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7-13 7 E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I 11/10/2017


page 188

QO™ and QOU Miniature Circuit Breakers QO Plug-On Circuit Breakers Class 685, 690, 730, 912, 950 / Refer to Catalog: 0730CT9801 QO-SWN Switch Neutral Common Trip 2008 NEC® 514.11 Table 7.10: QO-SWN Circuit Breakers Ampere Rating [23] 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 Two-wire QO-SWN Three-wire QO-SWN 2 Wire 120 Vac 10 k AIR 2 Spaces Required QO210SWN QO215SWN QO220SWN QO225SWN QO230SWN QO240SWN QO250SWN schneider-electric.us 3 Wire 120/240 Vac 3 Spaces Required 10 k AIR QO310SWN QO315SWN QO320SWN QO325SWN QO330SWN QO340SWN QO350SWN QO-HID HID circuit breakers are for use on circuits feeding fluorescent and high intensity discharge (HID) lighting systems such as mercury vapor, metal halide, or high pressure sodium. These circuit breakers are physically interchangeable with QO circuit breakers. Table 7.11: QO-HID Circuit Breakers 1P 120/240 Vac 1 Space Required Ampere Rating [23] 10 k AIR 2P Common Trip 120/240 Vac 10 k AIR 2 Spaces Required 3P Common Trip 240 Vac 10 k AIR 3 Spaces Required 15 20 25 30 40 50 QO115HID [24] QO125HID QO130HID QO140HID QO150HID QO215HID QO220HID QO225HID QO230HID QO240HID QO250HID QO315HID QO320HID QO325HID QO330HID — — QO-K Key operated QO circuit breakers are available in single-pole construction and can be mounted in any single-pole space which will accept a standard QO. These circuit breakers can be turned ON or OFF or to RESET with a special key (catalog number QOK10) included with the circuit breaker. These circuit breakers are UL Listed and available as shown in the table. Table 7.12: QO-K Circuit Breakers 120 Vac—10 k AIR (1 Space Required) Ampere Rating [23] 10 15 20 Cat. No. QO110K QO115K QO120K Ampere Rating [23] 25 30 Cat. No. QO125K QO130K QO-HM High magnetic trip circuit breakers are recommended for applications where high initial inrush may occur and for individual dimmer applications. Table 7.13: QO-HM Circuit Breakers 120 Vac—10 k AIR Ampere Rating [23] 15 A 20 A 1P QO115HM [25] [26] QO120HM [25] [26] Non-Automatic (Standard) Miniature Switches Miniature non-automatic switches have the same physical packaging as miniature circuit breakers, but open only when the handle is switched to the OFF position. Non-automatic switches provide no overcurrent protection or short circuit protection. They must not be used on systems that have an available fault current greater than the values listed in the table. Non-automatic switches are UL Listed per UL 1087 and are CSA certified. Table 7.14: QO Non-Automatic Miniature Switches, 240 Vac 10 kA Ampere Rating  60 100 2P QO200 QO2000 3P QO300 QO3000 QO-K Key Operated 7 I I M N A T U R E A N D M O L D E D C A S E I C R C U I T B R E A K E R S [23] 10–30 A circuit breakers are suitable for use with 60oC or 75oC conductors. 35–60 A circuit breakers are suitable for use with 75oC conductors. [24] UL Listed as SWD (switching duty) rated. Suitable for switching 120 Vac fluorescent lighting loads. [25] UL Listed as HACR type for use with air conditioning, heating and refrigeration equipment haing motor group combinations and marked for use with HACR type circuit breakers. [26] UL Listed as SWD (switching duty) rated. Suitable for switching 120 Vac fluorescent lighting loads. 7-14 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 189

Accessories Class 1130 / Refer to Catalog 1100CT0501 QO™ and QOU Miniature Circuit Breakers schneider-electric.us Table 7.15: Accessories for use with QO and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers Accessories for QO/QOB Circuit Breakers Description Handle Attachments Handle Tie Handle Clamp Handle Padlock Attachment for Padlocking in ON or OFF position Handle Padlock Attachment for Padlocking in OFF position Ring Terminal Sub-feed Lugs Mechanical Interlock Attachment With Retaining Kit Converts any two adjacent 120/240 Vac 1P QO circuit breakers to independent trip 2P Converts any two adjacent 120/240 Vac1P side-by-side QOT circuit breakers to independent trip 2P Clamp for holding QO 1P handle in ON or OFF position Clamp for holding QO or Q1 either 1P, 2P or 3P circuit breaker handles in ON or OFF position For padlocking 1P QO circuit breaker in ON or OFF position    Loose attachment    Fixed attachment For padlocking 1P side-by-side QOT circuit breaker in ON or OFF position For padlocking 2P QO-GFI circuit breakers in either ON or OFF position, fixed attachment. For 2P and 3P QO and Q1 standard circuit breakers which require padlocking in either ON or OFF position.    Loose attachment    Fixed attachment For padlocking 1P QO circuit breaker in OFF position only, fixed attachment. For padlocking 2P and 3P QO circuit breakers in OFF position only, fixed attachment. For padlocking 1P QO-GFI, QO-CAFI, QO-DF and QO-EPD circuit breakers in OFF position only, fixed attachment. For padlocking 2P QO-GFI, QO-CAFI and QO-EPD circuit breakers in OFF position only, fixed attachment. Ring terminals are available as a factory-installed option. 60 A 2P plug-on – 2 spaces required (6–2 Al/Cu) 125 A 2P plug-on – 2 spaces required (12–2/0 Al/Cu) 225 A 2P plug-on – 4 spaces required (4–300 Al/Cu) 125 A 3P plug-on – 3 spaces required (12–2/0 Al/Cu) For interlocking the handles of two 2P or one 2P and one 1P QO and Q1 circuit breakers mounted side-by-side so that only one circuit breaker can be ON at a time (Not QOU) QO2DTI mechanical interlock attachment with retaining kits for securing two adjacent back-fed circuit breakers in dual power supply applications. Can be used with (2) 2Ps or (1) 2P and (1) 1P QO circuit breakers in QO816L100 load centers. Cat. No. QO1HT QOTHT QO1LO HLO1 QOHPL QO1PA QOTHPA GFI2PA QO1HPL QO1PL QO1PAF QO2PAF QOGFI1PAF QOGFI2PAF See page 7–10 QO60SL QO2125SL QO2225SL [27] QO3125SL QO2DTI QO2DTIM Schedule DE2E DE2E DE2E DE2E DE2E DE2E DE2E DE2A DE2E DE2E DE2E DE2E DE2E DE2E DE2A DE2A DE2A DE2A DE3 DE2E DE2E Factory-Installed Accessories for use with QO and QOB Miniature Circuit Breakers Factory-installed electrical accessories take up an additional pole space on QO, QO- GFI, QO-EPD, QO-SWN and QOU circuit breakers. All AC electrical accessories shown below are rated for 50/60 Hz. Accessories are not available for QOB-VH (2P 150 A and 3P 110–150 A) circuit breakers or QO, QOU molded case switches. QO circuit breakers will accept only one accessory per circuit breaker. Undervoltage trip is not available on miniature circuit breakers. Factory-installed accessories are not available for QO-AFI or QO-CAFI Arc Fault Circuit Breakers or on QO2150, QO2175, or QO2200 circuit breakers. Table 7.16: Factory-Installed Accessories Accessory Description Rated Voltage Coil Burden Cat. No. Suffix Accesso- ry Shunt Trip Trips the circuit breaker from a remote location by means of a trip coil energized from a separate circuit. A 120 Vac shunt trip will operate at 55% or more of rated voltage. All other shunt trips will operate at 75% or more of rated voltage. Application • For use with momentary or maintained push button. • Not available on QO-GFI, QO- • Shunt trip terminals accept (2) 0.14– 0.12 AWG Cu. EPD. 12 Vac/Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc 60 VA 168 VA -1042 Auxiliary Switches 120 Vac 208 Vac 240 Vax 72 VA 228 VA 288 VA -1021 Alarm Switches Description AWG Cu leads. Monitors circuit breaker contact status and provides a remote signal indicating the circuit breaker contacts are OPEN or CLOSED. Application • Auxiliary switch terminals accept (2) 14–12 • Leads (EH): Yellow for “A’’, Blue for “B’’, Used with control circuits and is actuated only when the circuit breaker has tripped. Standard construction includes a normally-open contact. Application • Leads: Alarm switch terminals accept (2) Striped common 18 AWG Cu. 14–12 AWG Cu leads. Contact Comb. Max. Voltage Max. Cat. No. Suffix 1A 1B 1A 120 Vac 120 Vac 120 Vac 5 A 5 A -1200 -1201 5 A -2100 E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I [27] Not suitable for use in 3Ø panels. Use only in 1Ø panel rated 150 A or greater. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7-15 7 11/10/2017


page 190

QO™ and QOU Miniature Circuit Breakers QO™ Mounting Bases Class 652 / Catalog 0730CT9801, 0860CT0201 schneider-electric.us QO Mounting Bases Table 7.17: QO OEM Mounting Bases—UL Recognized Components Voltage System QO Plug-On Mounting Bases—For unit mounting QO, QO-GFI, QO-AFI and QO-EPD circuit breakers Mounting Bases Main Lug Rating Max. No. Cat. No. Spaces 1P 1P Main Wire Size AWG/kcmil 1Ø2W 240 Vac Max. 10 k AIC (Without Neutral Assembly) 1Ø3W 240 Vac Max. 10 k AIC 3Ø3W 240 Vac Max. 10 k AIC (Without Neutral Assy.) 3Ø4W 240 Vac Max. 10 k AIC  70 A 125 A 125 A 125 A 125 A 150 A 150 A  40 A  70 A 100 A 100 A 100 A 100 A 125 A 125 A 125 A 125 A 125 A 125 A 125 A 125 A 150 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 225 A 125 A 125 A 125 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 225 A  60 A 125 A 125 A 125 A 200 A 200 A 200 A 225 A  2  4  4  6  6  6  8  2  2  6  8 12 12 12 12 16 16 20 24 32 20 24 12 12 24 24 30 42 12 20 24 18 24 30 42  3 12 20 24 18 24 30 42  2  4  4  6  6  6  8  2  4 12 16 12 12 12 24 16 24 20 24 32 24 24 12 12 24 24 30 42 12 20 24 18 24 30 42  3 12 20 24 18 24 30 42 QON2L70 SK9948BW SK9842 SK9795 SK9801 SK9796BW SK9797 QON2L40 QON24L70 QON612L100 QON816L100 QON12L100 QON12L100SF[28] QON112L125I QON11224L125I QON116L125I QON11624L125I QON120L125I QON124L125I QON132L125I QON12024L125I QON124L150I QON124L200I QON12L200FTL [28] QON124L200I QON124L200DL [28] QON130L200I QON142L225I QON312L125 QON320L125 QON324L125 QON318L200 QON324L200 QON330L200 QON342L225 QON403L60N QON312L125I QON320L125I [29] QON324L125I QON318L200I QON324L200I QON330L200I [29] QON342L225I 14–4 Cu, 12–3 Al 12–1/0 Cu/Al 12–1/0 Cu/Al 12–1/0 Cu/Al 12–1/0 Cu/Al 8–3/0 Cu/Al 8–3/0 Cu/Al 14–6 Cu, 12–6 Al 14–4 Cu, 12–3 Al 8–1/0 Cu/Al 8–1/0 Cu/Al 12–2/0 Cu/Al 6–2/0 Cu/Al 4–2/0 Cu/Al 4–2/0 Cu/Al 4–2/0 Cu/Al 4–2/0 Cu/Al 4–2/0 Cu/Al 6–2/0 Cu/Al 4–2/0 Cu/Al 4–2/0 Cu/Al 4–250 Cu/Al 4–250 Cu/Al 4–250 Cu/Al 4–250 Cu/Al (2) 4–300 Cu/Al 4–250 Cu/Al 4–300 Cu/Al 4–2/0 Cu/Al 4–2/0 Cu/Al 4–2/0 Cu/Al 4–300 Cu/Al 4–300 Cu/Al 4–300 Cu/Al 4–300 Cu/Al 12–6 Cu/Al 4–2/0 Cu/Al 4–2/0 Cu/Al 4–2/0 Cu/Al 4–300 Cu/Al 4–300 Cu/Al 4–300 Cu/Al 4–300 Cu/Al 14–4 Cu 12–2 Al 14–4 Cu 12–2 Al 14–4 Cu 12–2 Al 12–1 Cu/Al SN12125 QON2L40 QON120L1251 7 QO Plug-On Mounting Bases—For unit mounting QO, QO-GFI and QO-EPD circuit breakers 1Ø2W 240 Vac Max. 10 k AIC (Without Neutral Assembly) QOB Bolt-On Mounting Bases—For unit mounting QOB, QOB-GFI, QOB-EPD circuit breakers 3Ø3W 240 Vac Max.10 k AIC (Without Neutral Assembly) QOMB1 QOMB2 QOMB3 70 A 70 A 70 A QON3B 100 A 1 2 3 1 2 3 3 3 Table 7.18: Solid Neutral Assemblies Main Lug Rating 125 A 125 A 200 A 200 A 225 A Branch Neutral Number of Terminals 12 20 12 30 42 Cat. No. SN12125 SN20 SN12200 SN30 SN42 Main Neutral Lug Wire Size Cu/Al 4–2/0 AWG 4–2/0 AWG 4 AWG–300 kcmil 4 AWG–300 kcmil 4 AWG–300 kcmil Branch Neutral Terminal Wire Size Cu 14–4 AWG 14–4 AWG 14–4 AWG 14–4 AWG 14–4 AWG Al 12–4 AWG 12–4 AWG 12–4 AWG 12–4 AWG 12–4 AWG Table 7.19: Accessories for US Mounting Base for UL489 C60 Description Main lug kit for US mounting bases, 1 lug per kit, for 6 AWG to 300 kcmil cable Terminal cover for US mounting base; provides IP20 ingress protection per IEC 60529; suitable for jumper bars or cable Cat. No. USMBLK USMBTC I I I C R C U I T B R E A K E R S M N A T U R E A N D M O L D E D C A S E [28] Device comes with factory-installed sub-feed lugs. [29] Also IEC rated and CE marked for IEC 60439-1. Use only Square D brand Type QOXC, QOXD, QOHX and QOE circuit breakers for 415Y/240 Vac max. systems. 7-16 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 191

schneider-electric.us QOU Miniature Circuit Breakers / QYU Supplementary Protectors Class 720 / Refer to Catalog 0730CT9801 QO™ and QOU Miniature Circuit Breakers (symmetrical rail 35 x 7.5 DIN/EN 50 022) Low Ampere QOU Miniature Circuit Breakers QOU unit mount miniature circuit breakers (cable-in/cable-out) are ideal for OEM applications. They have the Square D™ circuit breaker’s unique Visi-Trip™ feature and can be DIN rail-mounted or surface- or flush-mounted using mounting feet. Mounting feet not provided [30]. General Specifications Common to All Low Ampere QOU Circuit Breakers • For convenient flush mount, surface mount or DIN mount • Single handle with internal common trip • Terminal lug wire size (1) 14–2 AWG Cu or Al • Reversible line and load lugs • Field-installable quick connectors • UL Listed 48 Vdc (5 k AIR) • UL Listed as HACR Type: 10–70 A • High magnetic trip circuit breakers (QOU-HM) are recommended for applications • For DIN mounting rails, see IEC Starters and Relays, Section 18. Table 7.20: QOU Low Ampere Miniature Circuit Breakers where high initial inrush may occur and for individual dimmer applications. Ampere Rating 10 k AIR  10 A  15 A  20 A  25 A  30 A  35 A  40 A  45 A  50 A  60 A  70 A  15 A  20 A  25 A  30 A  35 A  40 A  45 A  50 A  60 A 22 k AIR 1P 120/240 Vac Cat. No. 2P 120/240 Vac 2P 240 Vac [31] 3P 240 Vac QOU110 QOU115 QOU120 QOU125 QOU130 QOU135 QOU140 QOU145 QOU150 QOU160 QOU170 QOU115VH QOU120VH QOU125VH QOU130VH QOU135VH QOU140VH QOU145VH QOU150VH QOU160VH QOU210 QOU215 QOU220 QOU225 QOU230 QOU235 QOU240 QOU245 QOU250 QOU260 QOU270 QOU215VH QOU220VH QOU225VH QOU230VH QOU235VH QOU240VH QOU245VH QOU250VH QOU260VH — QOU215H QOU220H QOU225H QOU230H — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — QOU310 QOU315 QOU320 QOU325 QOU330 QOU335 QOU340 QOU345 QOU350 QOU360 QOU370 QOU315VH QOU320VH QOU325VH QOU330VH — — — — — Table 7.21: QOU-HM Miniature Circuit Breakers (10 k AIR) Ampere Rating  15 A  20 A 1P 120/240 Vac QOU115HM QOU120HM Cat. No. 2P 120/240 Vac — — 2P 240 Vac — — 3P 240 Vac — — Table 7.22: QYU UL1077 Recognized Supplementary Protectors (5 k AIR) Ampere Rating  10 A  15 A  20 A  25 A  30 A 1P 277 Vac QYU110 QYU115 QYU120 QYU125 QYU130 Cat. No. 2P 120/240 Vac — — — — — 2P 240 Vac — — — — — 3P 240 Vac — — — — — E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I [30] See QOU Accessories, page 7-19. [31] QOU-H interrupting rating is 10 kA at 240 Vac. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7-17 7 Low Ampere QOU11/10/2017


page 192

QOU Miniature Circuit Breakers / QYU Supplementary Protectors Class 720 / Refer to Catalog 0730CT9801 schneider-electric.us High Ampere QOU Circuit Breakers General Specifications Common to All High Ampere QOU Circuit Breakers • Flush mount, surface mount, and DIN rail mount. • Internal common trip. • Non-reversible line and load lugs. • Terminal lug wire size (1) 12– 2/0 AWG Cu or Al. • UL Listed 60 Vdc per pole (5 k AIR). (Note: except switches) • UL Listed as HACR type, 80–125 A. • Non-automatic switches have the same physical packaging as miniature circuit breakers, but provide no overcurrent or short circuit protection. They are UL Listed per UL1087 and are CSA certified. Table 7.23: QOU High Ampere Miniature Circuit Breakers (10 k AIR) Ampere Rating  80 A  90 A 100 A 125 A 1P 120/240 Vac QOU180 QOU190 QOU1100 — Cat. No. 2P 120/240 Vac QOU280 QOU290 QOU2100 QOU2125 2P 240 Vac — — — — Table 7.24: QOU Non-Automatic Switches Ampere Rating  60 A 100 A 125 A 1P 120 Vac — — — 2P 120/240 Vac — — — Cat. No. 2P 240 Vac QOU200 QOU2000 QOU20001 Interrupting ratings see page 7-3 Accessories see page 7-19 Dimensions see page 7-76 3P 240 Vac QOU380 QOU390 QOU3100 — 3P 240 Vac QOU300 QOU3000 QOU30001 QO™ and QOU Miniature Circuit Breakers High Ampere QOU 7 I I I C R C U I T B R E A K E R S M N A T U R E A N D M O L D E D C A S E 7-18 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 193

QOU Accessories Class 720 / Refer to Catalog 0730CT9801 schneider-electric.us Homeline™ Circuit Breakers QOU Accessories Table 7.25: Accessories for QOU Low Ampere Circuit Breakers (Except as Noted) QOU14100JBAF 2P DIN-Mounted QOU Circuit Breaker Mounting Foot QOUMF1 Description Factory-installed ring tongue terminal, 10–32 screw, for 1P, 2P, 3P QOU, 10–60 A Hex drive 5/32 in. wire binding screw for QOU For padlocking 1P low ampere QOU circuit breaker in OFF or ON position For padlocking 2P and 3P low ampere QOU circuit breaker in OFF or ON position For padlocking 1P low ampere QOU circuit breaker in OFF position only For padlocking 2P and 3P low ampere QOU circuit breaker in OFF position only For padlocking 2P and 3P high ampere QOU circuit breaker in OFF position only Handle lock-out, ON or OFF position 4P 100 A Jumper bar assy. w/front wiring with base, cover and screw 4P 100 A Jumper bar assy. w/right side wiring with base, cover and screw 4P 100 A Jumper bar assy. w/left side wiring with base, cover and screw 1Ø, 4P, 100 A Jumper bar base with front wiring 1Ø, 4P, 100 A Jumper bar base with left side wiring 1Ø, 4P, 100 A Jumper bar base with right side wiring 4P Jumper bar cover Mounting screw for jumper bar cover 6P 150 A Jumper bar assy. w/front wiring with base, cover and screw 1Ø, 6P, 150 A Jumper bar base with front wiring 1Ø, 6P, 150 A Jumper bar base with left side wiring 1Ø, 6P, 150 A Jumper bar base with right side wiring 6P jumper bar cover Vertical rainproof cover 2P and 3P QO, QOU, FA and KA Horizontal rainproof cover 2P QO, QOU, and 3P Q2, EH 1P Fingersafe™ cover for high ampere QOU circuit breaker 1P Fingersafe cover for low ampere QOU circuit breaker Cover plate for one 2P QOU circuit breaker Cover plate for one 3P QOU circuit breaker Cover plate for two 2P QOU circuit breakers Cover plate for three 2P QOU circuit breakers Field-installable ring tongue terminal adaptor Quick connector end connection wiring Quick connector forward or reverse wiring 1P QOU mounting foot 2P QOU mounting foot 3P QOU mounting foot Tapped mounting foot for QOU, 1P and 2P 10–70 A, 3P 10–60 A Packaged with circuit breaker Individually packaged Bulk packed Order Qty. — — — — — — — — 1 1 1 40 40 40 40 40 1 40 40 40 40 1 10 1 10 1 40 1 40 1 40 1 40 1 40 1 40 1 80 1 40 1 40 1 80 1 40 1 24 1 80 Cat. No. Suffix -5283 Suffix -5280 QOU1PA QOU1PL QOU1PAFLA QOU2PAFLA Suffix -7100 HLO1 QOU14100JBAF QOU14100JBAR QOU14100JBAL QOU14100BAFB QOU14100BALB QOU14100BARB QOU14100CAB QOU1CMSB QOU16150JBAF QOU16150BAFB QOU16150BALB QOU16150BARB QOU16150CAB BCV [32] BCVB [32] BCH [32] BCHB [32] QOUHFSC1 QOUHFSC1B QOULFSC1 QOULFSC1B QOUCP2 QOUCP2B QOUCP3 QOUCP3B QOUCP4 QOUCP4B QOUCP6 QOUCP6B QOURT QOURTB QOUEC QOUECB QOUFR QOUFRB QOUMF1[32] QOUMF1B [32] QOUMF2 [32] QOUMF2B [32] QOUMF3 [32] QOUMF3B [32] Suffix -3100 QOUMFS1 QOUMFS1B Mechanical interlock attachment: Used to interlock two circuit breakers mounted side-by-side so that only one circuit breaker can be ON at a time. A 1P or 2P circuit breaker can be mounted on the left and interlocked with a 2P or 3P circuit breaker on the right. QOUQ Low Ampere Circuit Breakers QOUQ low ampere circuit breakers with four-point quick-connect terminals are provided with permanent factory-installed terminals which are affixed to the Load or OFF end of the circuit breaker. This special terminal will accommodate up to four 1/4-inch insulated female quick connect wire terminations. Total ampacity of these connections must not exceed the rating of the circuit breaker. QOU2DTILA [33] 1 Table 7.26: QOUQ Four-Point Quick-Connect Terminals Four-Point Quick-Connect Terminals Poles 1 2 3 Order Qty. 1 1 1 Cat. No. Change QOU to QOUQ The QOU uses the same electrical accessories as the QO. See the QO information for available electrical accessories. E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I [32] [33] For use on low and high ampere QOU. 10–70 A 1P and 2P, 10–60 A 3P. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7-19 7 11/10/2017


page 194

Homeline™ Circuit Breakers Plug-On Circuit Breakers Class 1170 / Refer to Catalog 1100CT0501 Homeline Plug-On Circuit Breakers The Square D Homeline circuit breakers are in a 1 in. wide format for 1-pole circuit breakers. They are designed to plug into Homeline load centers. schneider-electric.us Table 7.27: HOM Ampere Rating  15 A  20 A  25 A  30 A  35 A  40 A  45 A  50 A  60 A  70 A  80 A  90 A 100 A 110 A 125 A 150 A 175 A 200 A AIR 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA HOM 1P 1 Space Required HOM 2P 2 Spaces Required HOM2200BB Branch Circuit Breaker 4 Spaces Required 1P—120/240 Vac Cat. No. HOM115 [1][2] HOM120 [1][2] HOM125 [2] HOM130 [2] — HOM140 [2] — HOM150 [2] — — — — — — — — — — 2P—120/240 Vac Common Trip Cat. No. HOM215 [2] HOM220 [2] HOM225 [2] HOM230 [2] HOM235 [2] HOM240 [2] HOM245 [2] HOM250 [2] HOM260 [2] HOM270 [2] HOM280 [2] HOM290 [2] HOM2100 [2] HOM2110 [2] HOM2125 [2] HOM2150BB [2][3] HOM2175BB [2][3] HOM2200BB [2][3] Homeline High Magnetic (HM) Circuit Breakers High magnetic trip circuit breakers are recommended for applications where high initial inrush current may occur. Table 7.28: HOM-HM Amperes 15 A 20 A 1P—120/240 Vac HOM115HM [4] HOM120HM [4] 2Ps — — Homeline Combination Arc Fault Circuit Interruptors (HOM-CAFI) Homeline Combination Arc Fault Circuit Interrupters—Provide overload and short circuit protection, plus arc fault protection in accordance with the NEC and UL1699. Table 7.29: HOM-CAFI Circuit Breaker Type One-Pole Combination Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter with Pigtail Neutral Plug-On Neutral Combination Arc-Fault Interrupter Two-Pole Combination Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter with Pigtail Neutral Ampere Rating Poles 120 Vac 15 A 20 A 15 A 20 A 15 A 20 A 1 1 1 1 2 2 Cat. No. HOM115CAFI [4] HOM120CAFI [4] HOM115PCAFI [4] HOM120PCAFI [4] HOM215CAFI [4] [5] HOM220CAFI [4] [5] Homeline Dual Function Circuit Breaker (HOM-DF) Homeline Combination Arc Fault and Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters (Dual Function)— Provide overload and short circuit protection, plus arc fault and ground fault protection in a single device in accordance with the NEC, UL1699 and UL943. Table 7.30: HOM-DF Circuit Breaker Type Combination Arc-Fault and Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter with Pigtail Neutral Plug-On Neutral Combination Arc-Fault and Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Ampere Rating 15 A 20 A 15 A 20 A Poles 120 Vac 1 1 1 1 Cat. No. HOM115DF [4] HOM120DF [4] HOM115PDF [4] HOM120PDF [4] HOM 1P CAFI Plug-on Neutral HOM 1P CAFI Pigtail HOM 1P DF Plug-on Neutral HOM 1P DF Pigtail [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] 7-20 UL Listed as SWD (switching duty) rated. Suitable for switching 120 Vac fluorescent lighting loads. UL Listed as HACR type for use with air conditioning, heating and refrigeration equipment haing motor group combinations and marked for use with HACR type circuit breakers. Requires four spaces (1 AWG–300 kcmil Al/Cu). Use only in 1Ø panel rated 150 A or greater. UL Listed as HACR type for use with air conditioning, heating and refrigeration equipment haing motor group combinations and marked for use with HACR type circuit breakers. For 120/240 V only, not for 208Y/120 V. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 195

Plug-On Circuit Breakers Class 1170 / Refer to Catalog 1100CT0501 schneider-electric.us Homeline™ Circuit Breakers Homeline GFI (HOM-GFI) HOM-GFI circuit breakers provide overload and short circuit protection, combined with Class A ground fault protection. Class A denotes a ground fault circuit interrupter that will trip when a fault current to ground is 6 milliamperes or more. Table 7.31: HOM-GFI Ampere Rating 15 A 20 A 30 A 40 A 50 A AIR 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 1P—120 Vac 1 Space Required HOM115GFI HOM120GFI — — — 2P—120/240 Vac Common Trip 2 Spaces Required HOM215GFI HOM220GFI HOM230GFI HOM240GFI HOM250GFI Homeline Equipment Protection Device (HOM-EPD) Homeline Equipment Protection Device—Circuit Breakers with 30 mA Equipment Ground Fault Protection (UL Listed). HOM 1P GFI (With Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter) 1 Space Required HOM 2P GFI (With Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter) 2 Spaces Required Table 7.32: HOM-EPD—10 k AIR Amperes 15 A 20 A 25 A 30 A 40 A 50 A 1P—120 Vac HOM115EPD HOM120EPD 2P—120/240 Vac Common Trip HOM215EPD HOM220EPD HOM225EPD HOM230EPD HOM240EPD HOM250EPD HOMT Tandem and HOMT Quad Tandem Circuit Breakers Table 7.33: HOMT Tandem Circuit Breakers Ampere Rating [6] 1P Tandem—120/240 Vac (One Space Required) — — — — AIR 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA AIR 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA HOMT1515 [7] HOMT1520 [7] HOMT2020 [7] HOMT3015 [7] HOMT3020 [7] 2P Tandem—120/240 Vac (Two Spaces Required) HOMT1515215 [7] HOMT1515220 [7] HOMT1515225 [7] HOMT1515230 [7] HOMT1515240 [7] HOMT1515250 [7] HOMT2020220 [7] HOMT2020225 [7] HOMT2020230 [7] HOMT2020240 [7] HOMT2020250 [7] Table 7.34: HOMT Quad Tandem Circuit Breakers Ampere Rating [6] 15 and 15 A 15 and 20 A 20 and 20 A 30 and 15 A 30 and 20 A 1P (2) 15 A (2) 15 A (2) 15 A (2) 15 A (2) 15 A (2) 15 A (2) 20 A (2) 20 A (2) 20 A (2) 20 A (2) 20 A 2P 15 A 20 A 25 A 30 A 40 A 50 A 20 A 25 A 30 A 40 A 50 A NOTE: Typical catalog number (e.g. HOMT 1515230) represents two 1P, outer poles (two 15 A 1P CBs) and one 2P inner circuit breaker with common trip (one 30 A 2P CB). HOMT Quad Circuit Breaker 2 Spaces Required [6] [7] 15–20 A tandem or quad tandem circuit breakers are suitable for use with 60oC or 75oC conductors. 25– 50 A tandem or quad tandem circuit breakers are suitable for use with 75oC conductors only. UL Listed as HACR type for use with air conditioning, heating and refrigeration equipment haing motor group combinations and marked for use with HACR type circuit breakers. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7-21 7 E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I 11/10/2017


page 196

Homeline™ Circuit Breakers Plug-On Circuit Breakers Class 1170 / Refer to Catalog 1100CT0501 Homeline Circuit Breaker Wire Sizes Table 7.35: Circuit Breaker Wire Sizes Ampere Rating Breaker Type schneider-electric.us Wire Size (AWG/kcmil) [8] HOM 1P HOM 2P 15–30 A 40–50 A 15–30 A 35–70 A  80–125 A 150–200 A 15–30 A 40–50 A 15–20 A 15–50 A 4 AWG–300 kcmil 4 AWG–300 kcmil Quad Only HOMT and Quad 14–8 AWG 6–12 AWG 14–10 AWG 12–4 AWG Accessories for Homeline Circuit Breakers HOM-GFI - 1P HOM-GFI - 2P Aluminum 14–8 AWG 8–2 AWG 14–8 AWG 8–2 AWG 4–2/0 AWG Copper 14–8 AWG or (2) 14–10 AWG 8–2 AWG 14–8 AWG or (2) 14–10 AWG 8–2 AWG 4–2/0 AWG 14–8 AWG 6–14 AWG 14–10 AWG 14–6 AWG Cat. No. HOM1HT HOMTHT QO1LO HOM2HBD HOM1PA HOM2PALA HOM2PAHA HOM2PAVHA HOMELEC1PA HOMELEC2PALA HOMQPA QOM1PA [9] QOM2PA [9] HOML2125 HOML2225 [10] Table 7.36: Accessories Description Handle Attachments Handle Tie: Converts any two adjacent 120/240 Vac single HOM circuit breakers to independent trip 2P Handle Tie: Converts any two adjacent 120/240 Vac 1P side-by-side HOMT circuit breakers to independent trip 2P Handle Clamp: Clamp for holding HOM 1P handle in the ON or OFF position Handle Blocking Device: Attaches to standard HOM 2P circuit breakers for holding the handle in the OFF position Handle Padlock Attachment: For padlocking 1P Standard HOM breakers in the ON or OFF position Handle Padlock Attachment: For padlocking 2P Standard HOM circuit breakers in ON or OFF position Handle Padlock Attachment: For padlocking 1P CAFI, DF, GFI, and EPD HOM breakers in ON or OFF position Handle Padlock Attachment: For padlocking 2P CAFI, GFI, and EPD HOM breakers in ON or OFF position Handle Padlock Attachment: For padlocking center poles of Homeline Quad breakers in the OFF position Handle Padlock Attachment: For padlocking main circuit breakers in convertible load center in OFF position Sub-Feed Lugs 125 A 2P plug-on—2 spaces required 225 A 2P plug-on—4 spaces required 15–70 A 80–125 A 150–200 A 50–125 A 100–225 A 7 I I I C R C U I T B R E A K E R S M N A T U R E A N D M O L D E D C A S E 15–30 A circuit breakers are suitable for use with 60oC or 75oC conductors. 40–125 A circuit breakers are suitable for use with 75oC conductors. 50–125 A QOM1 frame size; 100–225 A QOM2 frame size. [8] [9] [10] Requires four spaces (1 AWG–300 kcmil Al/Cu). Use only in 1Ø panel rated 150 A or greater. 7-22 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 197

C60BP and C60BPR Circuit Breakers Class 860 / Refer to Catalog LVCATM9OEM_EN Multi 9™ Miniature Circuit Breakers schneider-electric.us UL489 / CSA C22.2 No 5 / IEC/EN 60947-2 / GB14048-2 Miniature Circuit Breakers C60BP 1P C60BP 2P C60BP 3P C60BPR 1P C60BPR 2P C60BPR 3P Multi 9 C60BP and C60BPR Miniature Circuit Breakers C60BP and C60BPR are multi-standard miniature circuit breakers and branch circuit protection as defined by UL489. They combine the following functions: • circuit protection against short-circuit curves • circuit protection against overload currents • tripping and fault indication by the addition of auxiliary accessories Breaking Capacity (kA rms) Number of 18 mm (0.71 in.) Poles UL 489 / CSA C22.2 No 5 Rating (A) 25°C/77°F IEC 60947-2 AIR Icu Voltage (Ue) 1P 2P 3P 2P/3P 0.5 to 35 40 to 63 Voltage (Ue) 1 to 25 30 to 35 1 to 35 40 to 63 277 Vac 240 Vac 120 Vac 60 Vdc 440 Vac 415 Vac 240 Vac 60 Vdc 14 10 10 — 480Y/277 Vac 14 10 10 10 — — 3 3 10 10 240 Vac 125 Vdc 440 Vac 415 Vac 240 Vac 10 10 10 — 14 14 14 10 6 6 6 6 10 10 10 10 20 20 20 20 20 20 125 Vdc — — — — 10 — — — C Table 7.37: C60BP and C60BPRCatalog Numbers Type Rating Curve 1P UL489 and Voltages CSA Z C D (= K) C60BP (Tunnel Terminal Connection ) 2P Curve D (= K) C 3P Curve D (= K) — — — — M9F44170 M9F42170 M9F43170 M9F44101 M9F42101 M9F43101 M9F42201 M9F43201 M9F42301 M9F43301 M9F44102 M9F42102 M9F43102 M9F42202 M9F43202 M9F42302 M9F43302 M9F44103 M9F42103 M9F43103 M9F42203 M9F43203 M9F42303 M9F43303 M9F44104 M9F42104 M9F43104 M9F42204 M9F43204 M9F42304 M9F43304 M9F44105 M9F42105 M9F43105 M9F42205 M9F43205 M9F42305 M9F43305 M9F44106 M9F42106 M9F43106 M9F42206 M9F43206 M9F42306 M9F43306 M9F44108 M9F42108 M9F43108 M9F42208 M9F43208 M9F42308 M9F43308 M9F44110 M9F42110 M9F43110 M9F42210 M9F43210 M9F42310 M9F43310 M9F44115 M9F42115 M9F43115 M9F42215 M9F43215 M9F42315 M9F43315 M9F44120 M9F42120 M9F43120 M9F42220 M9F43220 M9F42320 M9F43320 M9F44125 M9F42125 M9F43125 M9F42225 M9F43225 M9F42325 M9F43325 M9F44130 M9F42130 M9F43130 M9F42230 M9F43230 M9F42330 M9F43330 M9F44135 M9F42135 M9F43135 M9F42235 M9F43235 M9F42335 M9F43335 M9F44140 M9F42140 M9F43140 M9F42240 M9F43240 M9F42340 M9F43340 M9F44145 M9F42145 M9F43145 M9F42245 M9F43245 M9F43245 M9F43345 M9F44150 M9F42150 M9F43150 M9F42250 M9F43250 M9F42350 M9F43350 M9F44163 M9F42163 M9F43163 M9F42263 M9F43263 M9F42363 M9F43363 480Y/277 V and 240 V 240 V only (In) 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 63 C60BPR (Ring Tongue Terminal Connection) 1 2 4 6 8 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 63 M9F54101 M9F52101 M9F53101 M9F52201 M9F53201 M9F52301 M9F53301 M9F54102 M9F52102 M9F53102 M9F52202 M9F53202 M9F52302 M9F53302 M9F54104 M9F52104 M9F53104 M9F52204 M9F53204 M9F52304 M9F53304 M9F54106 M9F52106 M9F53106 M9F52206 M9F53206 M9F52306 M9F53306 M9F54108 M9F52108 M9F53108 M9F52208 M9F53208 M9F52308 M9F53308 M9F54110 M9F52110 M9F53110 M9F52210 M9F53210 M9F52310 M9F53310 M9F54115 M9F52115 M9F53115 M9F52215 M9F53215 M9F52315 M9F53315 M9F54120 M9F52120 M9F53120 M9F52220 M9F53220 M9F52320 M9F53320 M9F54125 M9F52125 M9F53125 M9F52225 M9F53225 M9F52325 M9F53325 M9F54130 M9F52130 M9F53130 M9F52230 M9F53230 M9F52330 M9F53330 M9F54135 M9F52135 M9F53135 M9F52235 M9F53235 M9F52335 M9F53335 M9F54140 M9F52140 M9F53140 M9F52240 M9F53240 M9F52340 M9F53340 M9F54145 M9F52145 M9F53145 M9F52245 M9F53245 M9F52345 M9F53345 M9F54150 M9F52150 M9F53150 M9F52250 M9F53250 M9F52350 M9F53350 M9F54163 M9F52163 M9F53163 M9F52263 M9F53263 M9F52363 M9F53363 480Y/277 V and 240 V 240 V only E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7-23 7 IEC11/10/2017


page 198

Multi 9™ Miniature Circuit Breakers C60SP Circuit Breakers Class 860 / Refer to Catalog LVCATM9OEM_EN schneider-electric.us UL1077 / CSA C22.2 No 235 / IEC/EN 60947-2 / GB14048-2 Multi 9 Miniature Circuit Breaker Multi 9 C60SP Miniature Circuit Breakers C60SP circuit breakers are multi-standard miniature circuit beakers and supplementary protection as defined by UL1077. They combine the following functions: • circuit protection against short-circuit curves • circuit protection against overload currents • tripping and fault indication by the addition of auxiliary accessories Breaking capacity (kA rms) Number of 18 mm (0.71 in.) Poles Rating (A) 25°C/77°F Voltage (Ue) 1P 2P 3P/4P 2P/3P /4P 0.5 to 32 40 to 63 Voltage (Ue) 1 to 25 32 2 to 32 40 to 63 AIR UL 489 / CSA C22.2 No 235 Icu IEC 60947-2 277 Vac 240 ac 120 Vac 65 Vdc 440 Vac 415 Vac 240 Vac 60 Vdc 10 5 14 10 480Y/277 Vac 14 10 240 Vac 10 10 10 5 14 14 14 10 10 10 125 Vdc 10 — — — — — 3 3 10 10 440 Vac 415 Vac 240 Vac 6 6 6 6 10 10 10 10 20 20 20 20 20 20 125 Vdc — — — — Table 7.38: C60SP Catalog Numbers Tunnel Terminal Connection Rating (In) Curve M9F21302 M9F22302 M9F23302 M9F21402 M9F22402 M9F23402 B M9F21170 M9F21101 M9F21102 M9F21103 M9F21104 M9F21105 M9F21106 M9F21108 M9F21110 M9F21113 M9F21116 M9F21120 M9F21125 M9F21132 M9F21140 M9F21145 M9F21150 M9F21163 — — — — — M9F21306 M9F21308 M9F21310 M9F21313 M9F21316 M9F21320 M9F21325 M9F21332 M9F21340 M9F21345 M9F21350 M9F21363 C 1P M9F22170 M9F22101 M9F22102 M9F22103 M9F22104 M9F22105 M9F22106 M9F22108 M9F22110 M9F22113 M9F22116 M9F22120 M9F22125 M9F22132 M9F22140 M9F22145 M9F22150 M9F22163 3P — — — — — M9F22306 M9F22308 M9F22310 M9F22313 M9F22316 M9F22320 M9F22325 M9F22332 M9F22340 M9F22345 M9F22350 M9F22363 D (= K) M9F23170 M9F23101 M9F23102 M9F23103 M9F23104 M9F23105 M9F23106 M9F23108 M9F23110 M9F23113 M9F23116 M9F23120 M9F23125 M9F23132 M9F23140 M9F23145 M9F23150 M9F23163 B — M9F21201 M9F21202 M9F21203 M9F21204 M9F21205 M9F21206 M9F21208 M9F21210 M9F21213 M9F21216 M9F21220 M9F21225 M9F21232 M9F2124 M9F21245 M9F21250 M9F21263 — — — — — M9F23306 M9F23308 M9F23310 M9F23313 M9F23316 M9F23320 M9F23325 M9F23332 M9F23340 M9F23345 M9F23350 M9F23363 — — — — — M9F21406 M9F21408 M9F21410 M9F21413 M9F21416 M9F21420 M9F21425 M9F21432 M9F21440 M9F21445 M9F21450 M9F21463 Curve C 2P — M9F22201 M9F22202 M9F22203 M9F22204 M9F22205 M9F22206 M9F22208 M9F22210 M9F22213 M9F22216 M9F22220 M9F22225 M9F22232 M9F22240 M9F22245 M9F22250 M9F22263 4P — — — — — M9F22406 M9F22408 M9F22410 M9F22413 M9F22416 M9F22420 M9F22425 M9F22432 M9F22440 M9F22445 M9F22450 M9F22463 D (= K) — M9F23201 M9F23202 M9F23203 M9F23204 M9F23205 M9F23206 M9F23208 M9F23210 M9F23213 M9F23216 M9F23220 M9F23225 M9F23232 M9F23240 M9F23245 M9F23250 M9F23263 — — — — — M9F23406 M9F23408 M9F23410 M9F23413 M9F23416 M9F23420 M9F23425 M9F23432 M9F23440 M9F23445 M9F23450 M9F23463 C60SP 1P C60SP 2P C60SP 3P C60SP 4P 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 45 50 63 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 45 50 63 7 I I I C R C U I T B R E A K E R S M N A T U R E A N D M O L D E D C A S E 7-24 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved IEC11/10/2017


page 199

C60H-DC Circuit Breakers Class 860 / Refer to Catalog LVCATM9OEM_EN Multi 9™ Miniature Circuit Breakers schneider-electric.us Multi 9 C60H-DC Miniature Circuit Breakers for DC Circuits C60H-DC circuit breakers are multi–standard miniature circuit beakers and supplementary protection as defined by UL1077, dedicated to direct current applications. They combine the following functions: • circuit protection against short-circuit curves • circuit protection against overload currents • tripping and fault indication by the addition of auxiliary accessories Breaking capacity (kA rms) Number of 18 mm AIR UL 1077SA C22.2 No 5 12–250 Vdc 12–250 Vdc 5 5 Icu IEC 60947-2 220 Vdc 220 Vdc 10 20 250 Vdc 6 440 Vdc 10 500 Vdc 6 UL1077, IEC/EN 60947-2, GB14048.2 Multi 9 Miniature Circuit Breakers C60H-DC 1P C60H-DC 2P (0.71 in.) Poles Rating (A) 25°C/77°F Voltage (Ue) 1P Voltage (Ue) 2 0.5 to 63 0.5 to 63 Table 7.39: C60H-DC Catalog Numbers Rating (In) B 0.5 1 2 3 4 6 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 — — — — — M9U11106 M9U11110 M9U11113 M9U11116 M9U11120 M9U11125 M9U11132 M9U11140 M9U11150 M9U11163 Curve C 1P M9U21170 M9U21101 M9U21102 M9U21103 M9U21104 M9U21106 M9U21110 M9U21113 M9U21116 M9U21120 M9U21125 M9U21132 M9U21140 M9U21150 M9U21163 K (= D) — M9U31101 M9U31102 M9U31103 M9U31104 M9U31106 M9U31110 M9U31113 M9U31116 M9U31120 M9U31125 M9U31132 M9U31140 M9U31150 M9U31163 110 Vdc 20 — B — — — — — M9U11206 M9U11210 M9U11213 M9U11216 M9U11220 M9U11225 M9U11232 M9U11240 M9U11250 M9U11263 Curve C 2P M9U21270 M9U31201 M9U21202 M9U21203 M9U21204 M9U21206 M9U21210 M9U21213 M9U21216 M9U21220 M9U21225 M9U21232 M9U21240 M9U21250 M9U21263 K (= D) — M9U31201 M9U31202 M9U31203 M9U31204 M9U31206 M9U31210 M9U31213 M9U31216 M9U31220 M9U31225 M9U31232 M9U31240 M9U31250 M9U31263 E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7-25 7 IEC11/10/2017


page 200

Multi 9™ Miniature Circuit Breakers GFP Ground Fault Protectors Class 860 / Refer to Catalog LVCATM9OEM_EN schneider-electric.us UL1053, IEC/EN 61008 Multi 9 Ground Fault Protectors Multi 9 GFP Ground Fault Protectors UL 1053 residual current circuit breakers already protected upstream by a short circuit and overload protection device are used for: • control and disconnection of electric circuits • protection of people against electric shock by direct and indirect contacts • protection of installations against insulation faults • enhanced continuity of supply, during a series of close lightning strokes, IT earthing system, equipment including interference suppression filters, variable speed controllers, frequency converters, electronic ballasts for lighting ejections. • enhanced earth leakage protection: in presence of harmonics or high frequency A-SI type GFPs are ideal for operation in environments with a humid atmosphere and/or polluted by aggressive agents: swimming pools, marinas, agri-food industries, water treatment stations, industrial sites, etc. Table 7.40: GFP UL 1053 Type A-SI Sensitivity (mA) Catalog No A-S1 Type Rating (A) UL 1053 IEC/ EN 61008 120 or 240 V 230 or 240 V 240 V 480Y/277 V 230/400 or 240/415 V Width in modules of 9 mm (0.354 in.) 25 40 63 25 40 63 100 26 86 260 26 260 26 26 86 260 26 260 26 86 86 260 30 100 300 30 300 30 30 100 300 30 300 30 100 100 300 M9R81225 M9R12225 M9R84225 M9R81240 M9R84240 M9R81263 — — — — — — — — — M9R41225 M9R44225 M9R41240 — — — M9R81425 M9R12425 M9R84425 M9R81440 M9R84440 M9R81463 M9R12463 M9R12491 M9R84491 4 8 Multi 9 GFP 2P Multi 9 GFP 4P 2P 4P 7 I I I C R C U I T B R E A K E R S M N A T U R E A N D M O L D E D C A S E 7-26 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved IEC11/10/2017


page 201

Multi 9 Circuit Breakers Busbar Offer Class 860 / Refer to Catalog LVCATM9OEM_EN Multi 9™ Miniature Circuit Breakers schneider-electric.us C60BP (UL489) Comb Busbars These comb busbars are aimed to be used only with C60BP circuit-breakers. They perform distribution and subdistribution of the electric power supply and allow rapid assembly and disassembly of equipment. Table 7.41: C60BP Comb Busbars Connection Accessories Function Comb Busbars • The comb busbars make it easier to install C60BP UL489 circuit breakers. • They must not be cut. Use Standard Comb Busbars Power supply by insulated connector • Use with rigid and flexible copper cable • 6 to 35 mm2 (AWG #10 to #2): Tooth Covers • Insulation of teeth remaining free End-Piece • Ensures the correct comb busbar insulation Insulated Connectors • Comb busbar power supply • Vertical incoming feeder Tightening torque: 3.5 N•m (31 lb.in.) Number of poles Catalogue numbers 1P M9XUP106 Number of 18 mm modules Set of Cuttable Comb Busbars 6 1 M9XUP312 12 2P M9XUP312 M9XUP312 M9XUP312 3P All M9R81425 M9XUPC04 6 1 12 6 1 12 — 4 All M9XCTC18 — 5 x 3 — — — — Number of poles x Catalogue numbers Number of 18 mm modules Set of Technical Specifications Acceptable current at 40°C (Ie) Resistance to short-circuit currents Voltage rating (Ue) Insulation voltage (Ui) Pollution degree Fire resistance Colour Standards 2P 3P 1P M9XCP157 M9XCP256 M9XCP357 57 1 56 1 57 1 1P+Aux M9XCA137 37 1 3P+Aux M9XCA348 37 1 All M9XCPC04 — 4 All M9XUTC18 — 5 x 3 — M9XCEC10 — — Standard comb busbars: 115 A Cuttable comb busbars: 80 A Compatible with the breaking capacity of Schneider Electric modular circuit breakers 480Y/277 V 1000 V AC 3 Self-extinguishability 960°C 30 s/30 s RAL 7035 UL508 E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7-27 7 IEC11/10/2017


page 202

Multi 9™ Miniature Circuit Breakers Multi 9 Circuit Breakers Busbar Offer Class 860 / Refer to Catalog LVCATM9OEM_EN C60SP (UL1077) Comb Busbars The comb busbars are used only for C60SP circuit breakers UL 1077 supplementary protection in conformity with standards: • UL 1077 / CSA C22.2 No. 235 / IEC 60947-2 / GB 14048-2. They perform distribution and subdistribution of the electric power supply and allow rapid assembly and disassembly of equipment. schneider-electric.us Table 7.42: C60SP Comb Busbars Connection Accessories Comb Busbars Tooth Cover End-Piece Function Number of poles Voltage rating (Ue) Catalogue numbers Number of 18 mm modules Set of Technical Specifications Insulation voltage (Ui) Impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Acceptable current at 40°C (Ie) • The comb busbars make it easier to install Schneider Electric circuit breakers UL1077 • Power supply directly in the cage of the circuit breaker. supplementary protection. • The Tooth Caps are insulated protectors which may be slipped onto the unused teeth of the comb busbar. • They come in strips with 1-pole spacing, but can be snapped apart to be used individually. 1P 480Y/277 Vac 10285 12 (8.5 in./216 mm) 1 2P 480Y/277 Vac 10286 12 (8.5 in./216 mm) 1 3P 480Y/277 Vac 10287 12 (8.5 i./216 mm) 1 690 Vac 12 kV under 240 V 5 kV under 480Y/277 V or 277 V 63 A with 1 central power supply point 100 A with 2 power supply points Power supply via cable directly in the cage of the device: • cross section max: 3 AWG (25 mm2) • cross section min: 10 AWG (5.27 mm2) All — 60488 — 20 — — — — — 7 I I I C R C U I T B R E A K E R S M N A T U R E A N D M O L D E D C A S E 7-28 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved IEC11/10/2017


page 203

C60 Accessories Class 860 / Refer to Catalog 0860CT0201 Multi 9™ Miniature Circuit Breakers schneider-electric.us Multi 9 C60 Accessories Electrical Accessories for C60 Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors Possible Combinations Mounted to the left of the circuit breaker with a maximum width of 54 mm. Ring Tongue Terminal Kit Spacer C60 Padlock Attachment Heavy-Duty Padlock Attachment Rotary Handle Front Mounting Kit for C60 1P, 2P, 3P, 4P (1 per circuit breaker) MGN26380 Locking Device Left Side Mount MGN26380 Locking Device Right Side Mount Multi-Pole Front Mounting Kit SD Alarm Switch OF Auxiliary Switch MX Shunt trip + Aux Switch MN Undervoltage Release C60 Table 7.43: Multi 9 C60 Electrical Accessories Control Voltage Descriptions Width in 9 mm Modules OF Auxiliary Switch (1a1b) SD Alarm Switch (1a1b) MX Shunt Trip + OF Auxiliary Switch (1a1b) MN Undervoltage Release Multi-9 GFP UL 1053 Listed Ground Fault Protectors Vac 12–277 12–277 24 48 24 48 120 240 110–240–277 Vdc 12–125 12–125 24 48 125 24 48 — — C60 UL/IEC Cat. No. M9A26924 M9A26927 M9A26948 M9A26947 M9A26946 M9A27108 M9A26961 M9A27107 M9A26960 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 120 to 480Y/277 Vac; 30, 100, and 300 mA; 2P and 4Ps. See Multi 9 GFP Ground Fault Protectors, page 7-26 or Catalog LVCATM9OEM_ EN Table 7.44: Multi 9 C60 Mechanical Accessories Descriptions Ring tongue terminal kit for UL1077 C60 Spacer for DIN rail, Not UL Recognized Padlock Attachment (1 per for 1P, 2P, 3P or 4P) Heavy-duty Padlock Attachment for C60, Locks OFF only Padlocking Device Left Side Mount, Locks OFF only [1] Padlocking Device Right Side Mount, Locks OFF only [2] For one pole 9 mm wide 2 per pack 2 per pack 1 per pack Front Mounting Kit Terminal Screw Shield (Not UL Recognized) Terminal cover (Not UL Recognized) Rotary Handle for C60 (Non UL Recognized) Operating Subassembly Door Interlock Handle Fixed Handle (Front or Lateral) Multi-pole Front Mounting Kit Rail Support (20 of 9 mm modules) Hinged Transparent Cover Bag of two 4P shields 1P 2P 3P 4P 1P 2P 3P 4P 2P/3P/4P C60 Cat. No. M9A17400 27062 26970 M9PAF MGN26380 MGN26381 MG26983 MG26984 MG26985 MG26989 26981 26975 26976 26975 + 26976 26978 27046 27047 27048 14211 14210 E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I [1] [2] Left-side mounted padlocking device cannot be used in conjunction with accessories SD, OF, MX or MN. Use right-side mounted padlocking device when accessories are required. Right-side mounted padlocking device cannot be used in conjunction with VIGI module. Use left-side mounted padlocking device when VIGI Module is required. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7-29 7 IndicationTripping11/10/2017


page 204

PowerPact™ Molded Case Circuit Breakers PowerPact Family Class 611, 612 schneider-electric.us heavy-duty commercial and industrial applications. The PowerPact Advantage • Proven Performance: Industry-leading circuit breaker innovation and protection for • Smart: Integrated metering options provide a cost-effective solution to reduce energy consumption, optimize energy costs, and improve energy availablility for your facilities. • Flexible: Full range of thermal-magnetic and electronic trip molded case circuit breakers from 15 A to 3000 A, delivering the ratings, configurations, and operators for your unique applications. • Simple: Common catalog numbers, standardized ratings, and a full range of field- installable accessories make product selection, installation and maintenance easier than ever. • Common Design Features: Mounting holes, door trim, and handle accessories Q-Frame 250 A R-Frame 3000 A P-Frame 1200 A L-Frame 600 A M-Frame 800 A Table 7.45: PowerPact Interrupting Ratings Voltage 240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac Interrupting Rating B 10 kA D 25 kA 18 kA 14 kA G 65 kA 35 kA 18 kA J 100 kA 65 kA 25 kA K 65 kA [1] 65 kA[2] 65 kA[2] L 125 kA 100 kA 50 kA [3] R 200 kA 200 kA 100 kA 1 Amperage[4] 5 0 Suffix Code A B S Suffix Code A 2A/2B Auxiliary Switch 110 Vac Shunt Trip B-Frame 125 A H-Frame 150 A J-Frame 250 A Electronic Trip Version Electronic Trip Version Table 7.46: Common Catalog Numbering System Voltage Termination Rating Frame Poles H G L 6 4 480 V 6 600 V 3 1 1Pole 2 2Pole 3 3Pole 4 4Pole Interrupting Rating 480 Vac — 18 kA 35 kA 65 kA 65 kA 100 kA 200 kA Frame Designation B 125 A Frame H 150 A Frame J 250 A Frame Q 250 A Frame L 600 A Frame M 800 A Frame P 1200 A Frame R 3000 A Frame B D G J K L R 240 Vac 10 kA 25 kA 65 kA 100 kA 100 kA 125 kA 200 kA 7 600Vac — 14 kA 18 kA 25 kA 65 kA 50 kA 100 kA Terminations A I-Line L Lugs on Both Ends F Bus Bar (No Lugs) M Lugs Line Side Only P Lugs Load End Only N Plug-in D Drawout S Rear Connected Studs Description B-Frame Circuit Breakers, page 7-31 H- and J-Frame Circuit Breakers, page 7-32 Q-Frame Circuit Breakers, page 7-36 L-Frame Circuit Breakers, page 7-37 P-Frame Circuit Breakers, page 7-39 R-Frame Circuit Breakers, page 7-40 PowerPact™ H- and J-Frame Electronic Motor Circuit Protectors, page 7-42 Motor Circuit Protectors and Motor Protector Circuit Breakers, page 7-45 Automatic Switches, page 7-49 500 Vdc Circuit Breakers, page 7-50 Mission Critical Circuit Breakers, page 7-52 PowerPact™ Circuit Breaker Accessories, page 7-54 Motor Operators and Rotary Handles, page 7-55 Locks, Installation Accessories, and Rear Connections, page 7-57 Mechanical Lugs, page 7-57 Compression Lugs and Power Distribution Connectors (PDC), page 7-60 Terminal Nuts, Terminal Pads, Terminal Shields and Accessories, page 7-62 Plug-In and Drawout Mountings, page 7-63 Micrologic™ Electronic Trip Units, page 7-65 Micrologic™ Trip Unit Accessories, page 7-69 I I I M N A T U R E A N D M O L D E D C A S E C R C U I T B R E A K E R S [1] [2] [3] [4] 7-30 B-Frame K interrupting rating is 100 kA at 240 Vac P-frame K interrupting is 50 kA at 480 and 600 Vac. P-frame L interrupting is 25 kA at 600 Vac. For amperage of M,-, P- or R-frame circuit breakers, add a zero to the three amperage digits; for example, 120 = 1200 A. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 205

B-Frame Circuit Breakers Class 0613 PowerPact™ Molded Case Circuit Breakers schneider-electric.us PowerPact B-Frame Circuit Breakers B-Frame Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit D G 1 Pole 347 Vac Interrupting Rating 3 Pole 600Y/347 Vac 4 Pole 600Y/347 Vac 2 Pole 600Y/347 Vac 4 Pole 600Y/347 Vac 3 Pole 600Y/347 Vac 2 Pole 600Y/347 Vac Table 7.47: PowerPact B-Frame 125 A Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers (600Y/347 Vac) with EverLink Lugs Cur- rent Rat- 1 Pole 1 Pole ing @ 347 Vac 347 Vac 40o C BDL16015 BDL26015 BDL36015 BDL46015 BGL16015 BGL26015 BGL36015 BGL46015 BJL16015 15 A BDL16020 BDL26020 BDL36020 BDL46020 BGL16020 BGL26020 BGL36020 BGL46020 BJL16020 20 A BDL16025 BDL26025 BDL36025 BDL46025 BGL16025 BGL26025 BGL36025 BGL46025 BJL16025 25 A BDL16030 BDL26030 BDL36030 BDL46030 BGL16030 BGL26030 BGL36030 BGL46030 BJL16030 30 A BDL16035 BDL26035 BDL36035 BDL46035 BGL16035 BGL26035 BGL36035 BGL46035 BJL16035 35 A BDL16040 BDL26040 BDL36040 BDL46040 BGL16040 BGL26040 BGL36040 BGL46040 BJL16040 40 A BDL16045 BDL16045 BDL36045 BDL46045 BGL16045 BGL26045 BGL36045 BGL46045 BJL16045 45 A BDL16050 BDL26050 BDL36050 BDL46050 BGL16050 BGL26050 BGL36050 BGL46050 BJL16050 50 A BDL16060 BDL26060 BDL36060 BDL46060 BGL16060 BGL26060 BGL36060 BGL46060 BJL16060 60 A BDL16070 BDL26070 BDL36070 BDL46070 BGL16070 BGL26070 BGL36070 BGL46070 BJL16070 70 A BDL16080 BDL26080 BDL36080 BDL46080 BGL16080 BGL26080 BGL36080 BGL46080 BJL16080 80 A 90 A BDL16090 BDL26090 BDL36090 BDL46090 BGL16090 BGL26090 BGL36090 BGL46090 BJL16090 100 A BDL16100 BDL26100 BDL36100 BDL46100 BGL16100 BGL26100 BGL36100 BGL46100 BJL16100 110 A BDL16110 BDL26110 BDL36110 BDL46110 BGL16110 BGL26110 BGL36110 BGL46110 BJL16110 125 A BDL16125 BDL26125 BDL36125 BDL46125 BGL16125 BGL26125 BGL36125 BGL46125 BJL16125 BJL26015 BJL26020 BJL26025 BJL26030 BJL26035 BJL26040 BJL26045 BJL26050 BJL26060 BJL26070 BJL26080 BJL26090 BJL26100 BJL26110 BJL26125 BJL36015 BJL36020 BJL36025 BJL36030 BJL36035 BJL36040 BJL36045 BJL36050 BJL36060 BJL36070 BJL36080 BJL36090 BJL36100 BJL36110 BJL36125 2 Pole 600Y/347 Vac J 3 Pole 600Y/347 Vac 4 Pole 600Y/347 Vac K 1 Pole 347 Vac 2 Pole 600Y/347 Vac BJL46015 BKL16015 BKL26015 BJL46020 BKL16020 BKL26020 BJL46025 BKL16025 BKL26025 BJL46030 BKL16030 BKL26030 BJL46035 BJL46040 BJL46045 BJL46050 BJL46060 BJL46070 BJL46080 BJL46090 BJL46100 BJL46110 BJL46125 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Table 7.48: B-Frame Termination Options Termination Letter A = I-Line (See Section 9) F = No Lugs (includes terminal nut kit on both ends) L =EverLink Lugs both ends M = Lugs ON end Terminal Nut Kit OFF end P = Lugs OFF end Terminal Nut Kit ON end B D L 3 6 1 0 0 For factory-installed termination, place termination letter in the third block of the circuit breaker catalog number. Table 7.50: B-Frame Lug Options Lug Option Suffix No Suffix = EverLink Lugs both ends LU = EverLink Lug with Control Wire Terminal ON end; EverLink Lug OFF end LV = EverLink Lug ON end; EverLink Lug with Control Wire Terminal OFF end LW = EverLink Lug with Control Wire Terminal both ends LC = Copper Mechanical Lugs both ends LH = Aluminum Mechanical Lugs both ends B D L 3 6 1 0 0 LU For factory-installed lug option, place suffix after the amperage in the circuit breaker catalog number. Table 7.49: B-Frame Interrupting Ratings Voltage 240 Vac 480/277 Vac 480 Vac 600Y/347 Vac D 25 kA 18 kA 18 kA 14 kA Interrupting Rating G 65 kA 35 kA 35 kA 18 kA J 100 kA 65 kA 65 kA 25 kA K 100 kA 65 kA 65 kA 65 kA Table 7.51: PowerPact B-Frame 125 A Magnetic Trip Values Current Rating @ 40o C 15 A 20 A 25 A 30 A 35 A 40 A 45 A 50 A 60 A 70 A 80 A 90 A 100 A 110 A 125 A Accessories see page 7-54 Optional Lugs see page 7-59 Dimensions see page 7-77 Fixed AC Magnetic Trip Hold 400 A 400 A 400 A 400 A 400 A 400 A 400 A 480 A 640 A 640 A 800 A 1000 A 1000 A 1000 A 1000 A Trip 600 A 600 A 600 A 600 A 600 A 600 A 600 A 720 A 960 A 960 A 1200 A 1500 A 1500 A 1500 A 1500 A E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7-31 7 11/10/2017


page 206

PowerPact™ Molded Case Circuit Breakers H- and J-Frame Circuit Breakers Class 611 / Refer to Catalog 0611CT1001 PowerPact H- and J-Frame Circuit Breakers schneider-electric.us HD and HG 2P Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit (2P HJ, HL in 3P module) H-Frame Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Table 7.52: H-Frame 150 A Thermal-Magnetic UL Current-Limiting [5] Circuit Breakers (600 Vac, 250 Vdc) [6] With Factory Sealed Trip Unit Suitable for Reverse Connection [7] Interrupting Rating G Standard (80% Rated) HGL26015 HGL26020 HGL26025 HGL26030 HGL26035 HGL26040 HGL26045 HGL26050 HGL26060 HGL26070 HGL26080 HGL26090 HGL26100 HGL26110 HGL26125 HGL26150 HGL36015 HGL36020 HGL36025 HGL36030 HGL36035 HGL36040 HGL36045 HGL36050 HGL36060 HGL36070 HGL36080 HGL36090 HGL36100 HGL36110 HGL36125 HGL36150 100% Rated HGL26015C HGL26020C HGL26025C HGL26030C HGL26035C HGL26040C HGL26045C HGL26050C HGL26060C HGL26070C HGL26080C HGL26090C HGL26100C HGL26110C HGL26125C HGL26150C HGL36015C HGL36020C HGL36025C HGL36030C HGL36035C HGL36040C HGL36045C HGL36050C HGL36060C HGL36070C HGL36080C HGL36090C HGL36100C HGL36110C HGL36125C HGL36150C J [6] L [6] Standard (80% Rated) 100% Rated Standard (80% Rated) 100% Rated HJL26015 HJL26020 HJL26025 HJL26030 HJL26035 HJL26040 HJL26045 HJL26050 HJL26060 HJL26070 HJL26080 HJL26090 HJL26100 HJL26110 HJL26125 HJL26150 HJL36015 HJL36020 HJL36025 HJL36030 HJL36035 HJL36040 HJL36045 HJL36050 HJL36060 HJL36070 HJL36080 HJL36090 HJL36100 HJL36110 HJL36125 HJL36150 HJL26015C HJL26020C HJL26025C HJL26030C HJL26035C HJL26040C HJL26045C HJL26050C HJL26060C HJL26070C HJL26080C HJL26090C HJL26100C HJL26110C HJL26125C HJL26150C HJL36015C HJL36020C HJL36025C HJL36030C HJL36035C HJL36040C HJL36045C HJL36050C HJL36060C HJL36070C HJL36080C HJL36090C HJL36100C HJL36110C HJL36125C HJL36150C HLL26015 HLL26020 HLL26025 HLL26030 HLL26035 HLL26040 HLL26045 HLL26050 HLL26060 HLL26070 HLL26080 HLL26090 HLL26100 HLL26110 HLL26125 HLL26150 HLL36015 HLL36020 HLL36025 HLL36030 HLL36035 HLL36040 HLL36045 HLL36050 HLL36060 HLL36070 HLL36080 HLL36090 HLL36100 HLL36110 HLL36125 HLL36150 HLL26015C HLL26020C HLL26025C HLL26030C HLL26035C HLL26040C HLL26045C HLL26050C HLL26060C HLL26070C HLL26080C HLL26090C HLL26100C HLL26110C HLL26125C HLL26150C HLL36015C HLL36020C HLL36025C HLL36030C HLL36035C HLL36040C HLL36045C HLL36050C HLL36060C HLL36070C HLL36080C HLL36090C HLL36100C HLL36110C HLL36125C HLL36150C 100% Rated HDL26015C HDL26020C HDL26025C HDL26030C HDL26035C HDL26040C HDL26045C HDL26050C HDL26060C HDL26070C HDL26080C HDL26090C HDL26100C HDL26110C HDL26125C HDL26150C HDL36015C HDL36020C HDL36025C HDL36030C HDL36035C HDL36040C HDL36045C HDL36050C HDL36060C HDL36070C HDL36080C HDL36090C HDL36100C HDL36110C HDL36125C HDL36150C Current Rating @ 40o C Fixed AC Magnetic Trip Hold Trip D Standard (80% Rated) H-Frame, 150A 2P, 600 Vac 50/60 Hz, 250 Vdc [8] 15 A 20 A 25 A 30 A 35 A 40 A 45 A 50 A 60 A 70 A 80 A 90 A 100 A 110 A 125 A 150 A 350 A 350 A 350 A 350 A 400 A 400 A 400 A 400 A 800 A 800 A 800 A 800 A 800 A 900 A 900 A 900 A  750 A  750 A  750 A  750 A  850 A  850 A  850 A  850 A 1450 A 1450 A 1450 A 1450 A 1700 A 1700 A 1700 A 1700 A HDL26015 HDL26020 HDL26025 HDL26030 HDL26035 HDL26040 HDL26045 HDL26050 HDL26060 HDL26070 HDL26080 HDL26090 HDL26100 HDL26110 HDL26125 HDL26150 H-Frame 150A 3P, 600 Vac 50/60 Hz, 250 Vdc 15 A 20 A 25 A 30 A 35 A 40 A 45 A 50 A 60 A 70 A 80 A 90 A 100 A 110 A 125 A 150 A 350 A 350 A 350 A 350 A 400 A 400 A 400 A 400 A 800 A 800 A 800 A 800 A 800 A 900 A 900 A 900 A  750 A  750 A  750 A  750 A  850 A  850 A  850 A  850 A 1450 A 1450 A 1450 A 1450 A 1700 A 1700 A 1700 A 1700 A HDL36015 HDL36020 HDL36025 HDL36030 HDL36035 HDL36040 HDL36045 HDL36050 HDL36060 HDL36070 HDL36080 HDL36090 HDL36100 HDL36110 HDL36125 HDL36150 7 I I I M N A T U R E A N D M O L D E D C A S E C R C U I T B R E A K E R S [5] [6] [7] [8] 7-32 Circuit breakers with J and L interrupting ratings are UL certified as current limiting. Standard lug kit: AL150HD. Terminal wire range: 14–3/0 AWG Al or Cu. See Supplemental Digest Section 3 for circuit breakers with field interchangeable trip units. HD and HG circuit breakers are true two-pole construction. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 207

H- and J-Frame Circuit Breakers Class 611 / Refer to Catalog 0611CT1001 PowerPact™ Molded Case Circuit Breakers schneider-electric.us Table 7.53: J-Frame 250 A Thermal-Magnetic UL Current-Limiting [9] Circuit Breakers (600 Vac, 250 Vdc) With Factory Sealed Trip Unit Suitable for Reverse Connection [10] Current Rating @ 40oC Adjustable AC Magnetic Trip Low High D Standard (80% Rated) 100% Rated Standard (80% Rated) G Interrupting Rating J [9] L [9] R [9] 100% Rated Standard (80% Rated) 100% Rated Standard (80% Rated) 100% Rated Standard (80% Rated) 100% Rated 750 A 875 A 1000 A 1125 A 1250 A 1500 A 1750 A 2000 A 2250 A 2500 A J-Frame 250A 2P, 600 Vac 50/60 Hz, 250 Vdc 150 A[11] 175 A[11] 200 A[12] 225 A[12] 250 A[12] J-Frame 250A 3P, 600 Vac 50/60 Hz, 250 Vdc 150 A[11] 175 A[11] 200 A[12] 225 A[12] 250 A[12] 1500 A 1750 A 2000 A 2250 A 2500 A 750 A 875 A 1000 A 1125 A 1250 A JDL26150 JDL26175 JDL26200 JDL26225 JDL26250 JDL36150 JDL36175 JDL36200 JDL36225 JDL36250 JDL26150C JDL26175C JDL26200C JDL26225C JDL26250C JDL36150C JDL36175C JDL36200C JDL36225C JDL36250C JGL26150 JGL26175 JGL26200 JGL26225 JGL26250 JGL36150 JGL36175 JGL36200 JGL36225 JGL36250 JGL26150C JGL26175C JGL26200C JGL26225C JGL26250C JGL36150C JGL36175C JGL36200C JGL36225C JGL36250C JLL26150 JLL26175 JLL26200 JLL26225 JLL26250 JJL36150 JJL36175 JJL36200 JJL36225 JJL36250 JLL26150C JLL26175C JLL26200C JLL26225C JLL26250C JJL36150C JJL36175C JJL36200C JJL36225C JJL36250C JLL26150 JLL26175 JLL26200 JLL26225 JLL26250 JLL36150 JLL36175 JLL36200 JLL36225 JLL36250 JLL26150C JLL26175C JLL26200C JLL26225C JLL26250C JLL36150C JLL36175C JLL36200C JLL36225C JLL36250C — — — — — — — — — — JRL36150 JRL36175 JRL36200 JRL36225 JRL36250 JRL36150C JRL36175C JRL36200C JRL36225C JRL36250C Table 7.54: H- and J-Frame Interrupting Ratings Voltage 240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac D 25 kA 18 kA 14 kA Interrupting Rating G 65 kA 35 kA 18 kA J 100 kA 65 kA 25 kA L 125 kA 100 kA 50 kA R 200 kA 200 kA 100 kA Plug-in Drawout Rear Connected Table 7.55: H- and J-Frame Termination Options Termination Letter A = I-Line (See Section 9) F = No Lugs (includes terminal nut kit on both ends) L = Lugs both ends M = Lugs ON end Terminal Nut Kit OFF end P = Lugs OFF end Terminal Nut Kit ON end N = Plug-in D = Drawout S = Rear Connected Accessories see page 7-54 Optional Lugs see page 7-59 Dimensions see page 7-77 Enclosures see page 7-78 H G L 3 6 1 0 0 For factory-installed termination, place termination letter in the third block of the circuit breaker catalog number. Circuit breakers with J, L, and R interrupting ratings are UL certified as current limiting. [9] [10] See Supplemental Digest Section 3 for circuit breakers with field interchangeable trip units. [11] [12] Standard lug kit: AL250JD. Terminal wire range: 3/0 AWG–350 kcmil Al or Cu. Standard lug kit: AL175JD. Terminal wire range: 4–4/0 AWG Al or Cu. E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7-33 7 11/10/2017


page 208

PowerPact™ Molded Case Circuit Breakers H- and J-Frame Circuit Breakers Class 611 / Refer to Catalog 0611CT1001 schneider-electric.us H-Frame Micrologic™ Trip Unit J-Frame Micrologic Trip Unit H-Frame Circuit Breaker Optional FDM and IFM Module Table 7.56: H-Frame 150 A and J-Frame 250 A Electronic Trip UL Current-Limiting [13] Standard (80% Rated) Circuit Breakers (600 Vac) With Factory Sealed Trip Unit [14] Suitable for Reverse Connection [15] Electronic Trip Unit Type Function Trip Unit 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz, 3P Sensor Rating D G J [13] L [13] R [13] Interrupting Rating (80% Rated) Micrologic Standard LI 3.2 [16] Micrologic Standard LSI 3.2S [16] [19] Micrologic Ammeter Micrologic Energy LSI 5.2A LSI 5.2E Micrologic Ammeter LSIG 6.2A [20] Micrologic Energy LSIG 6.2E 60 A [17] 100 A [17] 150 A [17] 250 A [18] 60 A [17] 100 A [17] 150 A [17] 250 A [18] 60 A [17] 100 A [17] 150 A [17] 250 A [18] 60 A [17] 100 A [17] 150 A [17] 250 A [18] 60 A [17] 100 A [17] 150 A [17] 250 A [18] 60 A [17] 100 A [17] 150 A [17] 250 A [18] HDL36060U31X HDL36100U31X HDL36150U31X JDL36250U31X HDL36060U33X HDL36100U33X HDL36150U33X JDL36250U33X HDL36060U43X HDL36100U43X HDL36150U43X JDL36250U43X HDL36060U53X HDL36100U53X HDL36150U53X JDL36250U53X HDL36060U44X HDL36100U44X HDL36150U44X JDL36250U44X HDL36060U54X HDL36100U54X HDL36150U54X JDL36250U54X HGL36060U31X HGL36100U31X HGL36150U31X JGL36250U31X HGL36060U33X HGL36100U33X HGL36150U33X JGL36250U33X HGL36060U43X HGL36100U43X HGL36150U43X JGL36250U43X HGL36060U53X HGL36100U53X HGL36150U53X JGL36250U53X HGL36060U44X HGL36100U44X HGL36150U44X JGL36250U44X HGL36060U54X HGL36100U54X HGL36150U54X JGL36250U54X HJL36060U31X HJL36100U31X HJL36150U31X JJL36250U31X HJL36060U33X HJL36100U33X HJL36150U33X JJL36250U33X HJL36060U43X HJL36100U43X HJL36150U43X JJL36250U43X HJL36060U53X HJL36100U53X HJL36150U53X JJL36250U53X HJL36060U44X HJL36100U44X HJL36150U44X JJL36250U44X HJL36060U54X HJL36100U54X HJL36150U54X JJL36250U54X HLL36060U31X HLL36100U31X HLL36150U31X JLL36250U31X HLL36060U33X HLL36100U33X HLL36150U33X JLL36250U33X HLL36060U43X HLL36100U43X HLL36150U43X JLL36250U43X HLL36060U53X HLL36100U53X HLL36150U53X JLL36250U53X HLL36060U44X HLL36100U44X HLL36150U44X JLL36250U44X HLL36060U54X HLL36100U54X HJL36150U54X JLL36250U54X HRL36060U31X HRL36100U31X HRL36150U31X JRL36250U31X HRL36060U33X HRL36100U33X HRL36150U33X JRL36250U33X HRL36060U43X HRL36100U43X HRL36150U43X JRL36250U43X HRL36060U53X HRL36100U53X HRL36150U53X JRL36250U53X HRL36060U44X HRL36100U44X HRL36150U44X JRL36250U44X HRL36060U54X HRL36100U54X HRL36150U54X JRL36250U54X Table 7.57: H-Frame 150 A and J-Frame 250 A Electronic Trip UL Current-Limiting [13] 100% Rated Circuit Breakers (600 Vac) With Factory Sealed Trip Unit [14] Suitable for Reverse Connection [15] Electronic Trip Unit Type Function Trip Unit 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz, 3P Micrologic Standard LI 3.2 [16] Micrologic Standard LSI 3.2S [16] [19] Micrologic Ammeter Micrologic Energy Micrologic Ammeter Micrologic Energy LSI 5.2A LSI 5.2E LSIG 6.2A [20] LSIG 6.2E Sensor Rating 60 A [17] 100 A [17] 150 A [17] 250 A [18] 60 A [17] 100 A [17] 150 A [17] 250 A [18] 60 A [17] 100 A [17] 150 A [17] 250 A [18] 60 A [17] 100 A [17] 150 A [17] 250 A [18] 60 A [17] 100 A [17] 150 A [17] 250 A [18] 60 A [17] 100 A [17] 150 A [17] 250 A [18] D G J [13] L [13] R [13] Interrupting Rating (100% Rated) HDL36060CU31X HDL36100CU31X HDL36150CU31X JDL36250CU31X HDL36060CU33X HDL36100CU33X HDL36150CU33X JDL36250CU33X HDL36060CU43X HDL36100CU43X HDL36150CU43X JDL36250CU43X HDL36060CU53X HDL36100CU53X HDL36150CU53X JDL36250CU53X HDL36060CU44X HDL36100CU44X HDL36150CU44X JDL36250CU44X HDL36060CU54X HDL36100CU54X HDL36150CU54X JDL36250CU54X HGL36060CU31X HGL36100CU31X HGL36150CU31X JGL36250CU31X HGL36060CU33X HGL36100CU33X HGL36150CU33X JGL36250CU33X HGL36060CU43X HGL36100CU43X HGL36150CU43X JGL36250CU43X HGL36060CU53X HGL36100CU53X HGL36150CU53X JGL36250CU53X HGL36060CU44X HGL36100CU44X HGL36150CU44X JGL36250CU44X HGL36060CU54X HGL36100CU54X HGL36150CU54X JGL36250CU54X HJL36060CU31X HJL36100CU31X HJL36150CU31X JJL36250CU31X HJL36060CU33X HJL36100CU33X HJL36150CU33X JJL36250CU33X HJL36060CU43X HJL36100CU43X HJL36150CU43X JJL36250CU43X HJL36060CU53X HJL36100CU53X HJL36150CU53X JJL36250CU53X HJL36060CU44X HJL36100CU44X HJL36150CU44X JJL36250CU44X HJL36060CU54X HJL36100CU54X HJL36150CU54X JJL36250CU54X HLL36060CU31X HLL36100CU31X HLL36150CU31X JLL36250CU31X HLL36060CU33X HLL36100CU33X HLL36150CU33X JLL36250CU33X HLL36060CU43X HLL36100CU43X HLL36150CU43X JLL36250CU43X HLL36060CU53X HLL36100CU53X HLL36150CU53X JLL36250CU53X HLL36060CU44X HLL36100CU44X HLL36150CU44X JLL36250CU44X HLL36060CU54X HLL36100CU54X HLL36150CU54X JLL36250CU54X HRL36060CU31X HRL36100CU31X HRL36150CU31X JRL36250CU31X HRL36060CU33X HRL36100CU33X HRL36150CU33X JRL36250CU33X HRL36060CU43X HRL36100CU43X HRL36150CU43X JRL36250CU43X HRL36060CU53X HRL36100CU53X HRL36150CU53X JRL36250CU53X HRL36060CU44X HRL36100CU44X HRL36150CU44X JRL36250CU44X HRL36060CU54X HRL36100CU54X HRL36150CU54X JRL36250CU54X For applications requiring communications see page 7-69. 3P circuit breakers with this trip unit can be used for 2P applications. [13] Circuit breakers with J, L, and R interrupting ratings are UL certified as current limiting. [14] See Supplemental Digest Section 3 for circuit breakers with field interchangeable trip units. [15] [16] [17] Standard lug kit: AL150HD. Terminal wire range: 14–3/0 AWG Al or Cu. [18] Standard lug kit: AL250JD. Terminal wire range: 3/0 AWG–350 kcmil Al or Cu. [19] [20] Fixed ST and LT delays. 3P circuit breakers with this trip unit can be used for 2P applications in order to have ground fault protection. Additional metering capabilities will not work properly on the unconnected phase. 7-34 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7 I I I C R C U I T B R E A K E R S M N A T U R E A N D M O L D E D C A S E rciMcigoloE2.5rI%A03>03>011>.929.39.49.59.189.79.69.Ir)oIx(5.125.23401865dsI)rIx(11/10/2017


page 209

H- and J-Frame Circuit Breakers Class 611 / Refer to Catalog 0611CT1001 PowerPact™ Molded Case Circuit Breakers schneider-electric.us Table 7.58: H- and J-Frame Termination Options Termination Letter A - I-Line (See Section 9) F = No Lugs (includes terminal nut kit on both ends) L = Lugs both ends M = Lugs ON end Terminal Nut Kit OFF end P = Lugs OFF end Terminal Nut Kit ON end N = Plug-in D = Drawout S = Rear Connected H D L 3 6 0 1 5 T For factory-installed termination, place termination letter in the third block of the circuit breaker catalog number. Table 7.59: H- and J-Frame Interrupting Ratings Voltage 240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac D 25 KA 18 kA 14 kA Interrupting Rating G 65 kA 35 kA 18 kA J 100 kA 65 kA 25 kA L 125 kA 100 kA 50 kA R 200 kA 200 kA 100 kA Accessories see page 7-54 Optional Lugs see page 7-59 Dimensions see page 7-77 Enclosures see page 7-78 E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7-35 7 11/10/2017


page 210

PowerPact™ Molded Case Circuit Breakers Q-Frame Circuit Breakers Class 0734 / Refer to Catalogs: 0734CT0201 schneider-electric.us Q-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers Table 7.60: PowerPact Q-Frame 250 A Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breaker (240 Vac) [21] Ampere Rating 2P, 240 Vac Fixed AC Magnetic Trip Trip Hold  70 A  80 A  90 A 100 A 110 A 125 A 150 A 175 A 200 A 225 A 250 A [22] 3P, 240 Vac  70 A  80 A  90 A 100 A 110 A 125 A 150 A 175 A 200 A 225 A 250 A [22] 1000 A 1000 A 1000 A 1200 A 1200 A 1200 A 1200 A 1200 A 1200 A 1200 A 1200 A 1000 A 1000 A 1000 A 1200 A 1200 A 1200 A 1200 A 1200 A 1200 A 1200 A 1200 A 1800 A 1800 A 1800 A 2400 A 2400 A 2400 A 2400 A 2400 A 2400 A 2400 A 2400 A 1800 A 1800 A 1800 A 2400 A 2400 A 2400 A 2400 A 2400 A 2400 A 2400 A 2400 A B QBL22070 QBL22080 QBL22090 QBL22100 QBL22110 QBL22125 QBL22150 QBL22175 QBL22200 QBL22225 QBL22250 QBL32070 QBL32080 QBL32090 QBL32100 QBL32110 QBL32125 QBL32150 QBL32175 QBL32200 QBL32225 QBL32250 Interrupting Rating G D Terminal Wire Range J QDL22070 QDL22080 QDL22090 QDL22100 QDL22110 QDL22125 QDL22150 QDL22175 QDL22200 QDL22225 QDL22250 QDL32070 QDL32080 QDL32090 QDL32100 QDL32110 QDL32125 QDL32150 QDL32175 QDL32200 QDL32225 QDL32250 QGL22070 QGL22080 QGL22090 QGL22100 QGL22110 QGL22125 QGL22150 QGL22175 QGL22200 QGL22225 QGL22250 QGL32070 QGL32080 QGL32090 QGL32100 QGL32110 QGL32125 QGL32150 QGL32175 QGL32200 QGL32225 QGL32250 QJL22070 QJL22080 QJL22090 QJL22100 QJL22110 QJL22125 QJL22150 QJL22175 QJL22200 QJL22225 QJL22250 QJL32070 QJL32080 QJL32090 QJL32100 QJL32110 QJL32125 QJL32150 QJL32175 QJL32200 QJL32225 QJL32250 #4 AWG - 300 kcmil Al/Cu #4 AWG - 300 kcmil Al/Cu Table 7.61: Q-Frame Termination Options A = I-Line (See Section 9) E = Bolt-on I-Line (See Section 9) F = No lugs L = Lugs both ends M = Lugs ON end, studs on OFF end P = Lugs OFF end, studs on ON end Termination Letter Q G L 3 2 2 0 0 For factory-installed termination, place termination letter in the third block of the circuit breaker catalog number. Table 7.62: Q-Frame Interrupting Ratings Voltage 240 Vac [23] Dimension see page 7-77 Enclosures see page 7-78 Interrupting Rating B 10 kA D 25 kA G 65 kA J 100 kA[24] QBL 2P 70–250 QBL 3P 70–250 A 7 I I M N A T U R E A N D M O L D E D C A S E I C R C U I T B R E A K E R S [21] Replacement lugs and electrical accessories are not available for PowerPact Q-frame circuit breakers. 250 A lugs are suitable for copper conductors only. [22] [23] Q-frame circuit breakers are 240 Vac only. [24] 7-36 3P QJ circuit breakers are rated at 208Y/120 Vac only. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 211

L-Frame Circuit Breakers Class 611 / Refer to Catalogs: 0611CT1001 PowerPact™ Molded Case Circuit Breakers schneider-electric.us Table 7.63: L-Frame 600 A Standard (80% Rated) UL Current-Limiting [25] Circuit Breakers with Lugs and Factory-Sealed Electronic Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Connection [26][27] PowerPact L-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers Electronic Trip Unit Type Function 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz, 3P Micrologic Standard Micrologic Standard Micrologic Ammeter Micrologic Energy Micrologic Ammeter Micrologic Energy LI LSI LSI LSI LSIG LSIG 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz, 4P Micrologic Standard Micrologic Standard Micrologic Ammeter Micrologic Energy Micrologic Ammeter Micrologic Energy LI LSI LSI LSI LSIG LSIG Trip Unit 3.3 [28] 3.3S [28] [31] 5.3A 5.3E 6.3A 6.3E [32] 3.3 3.3S[31] 5.3A 5.3E 6.3A 6.3E Sensor Rating 250 A 400 A 600 A 250 A 400 A 600 A 400 A 600 A 400 A 600 A 400 A 600 A 400 A 600 A 250 A 400 A 600 A 250 A 400 A 600 A 400 A 600 A 400 A 600 A 400 A 600 A 400 A 600 A D G J [25] L [25] R [25] Terminal Interrupting Rating (80% Rated) LDL36250U31X LDL36400U31X LDL36600U31X LDL36250U33X LDL36400U33X LDL36600U33X LDL36400U43X LDL36600U43X LDL36400U53X LDL36600U53X LDL36400U44X LDL36600U44X LDL36400U54X LDL36600U54X LDL46250U31X LDL46400U31X LDL46600U31X LDL46250U33X LDL46400U33X LDL46600U33X LDL46400U43X LDL46600U43X LDL46400U53X LDL46600U53X LDL46400U44X LDL46600U44X LDL46400U54X LDL46600U54X LGL36250U31X LGL36400U31X LGL36600U31X LGL36250U33X LGL36400U33X LGL36600U33X LGL36400U43X LGL36600U43X LGL36400U53X LGL36600U53X LGL36400U44X LGL36600U44X LGL36400U54X LGL36600U54X LGL46250U31X LGL46400U31X LGL46600U31X LGL46250U33X LGL46400U33X LGL46600U33X LGL46400U43X LGL46600U43X LGL46400U53X LGL46600U53X LGL46400U44X LGL46600U44X LGL46400U54X LGL46600U54X LJL36250U31X LJL36400U31X LJL36600U31X LJL36250U33X LJL36400U33X LJL36600U33X LJL36400U43X LJL36600U43X LJL36400U53X LJL36600U53X LJL36400U44X LJL36600U44X LJL36400U54X LJL36600U54X LJL46250U31X LJL46400U31X LJL46600U31X LJL46250U33X LJL46400U33X LJL46600U33X LJL46400U43X LJL46600U43X LJL46400U53X LJL46600U53X LJL46400U44X LJL46600U44X LJL46400U54X LJL46600U54X LLL36250U31X LLL36400U31X LLL36600U31X LLL36250U33X LLL36400U33X LLL36600U33X LLL36400U43X LLL36600U43X LLL36400U53X LLL36600U53X LLL36400U44X LLL36600U44X LLL36400U54X LLL36600U54X LLL46250U31X LLL46400U31X LLL46600U31X LLL46250U33X LLL46400U33X LLL46600U33X LLL46400U43X LLL46600U43X LLL46400U53X LLL46600U53X LLL46400U44X LLL46600U44X LLL46400U54X LLL46600U54X AL400L61K3 [29] AL600LS52K3 [30] AL400L61K3 [29] AL600LS52K3 [30] AL600LS52K3 [30] AL400L61K4 [29] AL600LS52K4 [30] AL400L61K4 [29] AL600LS52K4 [30] AL600LS52K4 [30] LRL36250U31X LRL36400U31X LRL36600U31X LRL36250U33X LRL36400U33X LRL36600U33X LRL36400U43X LRL36600U43X LRL36400U53X LRL36600U53X LRL36400U44X LRL36600U44X LRL36400U54X LRL36600U54X LRL46250U31X LRL46400U31X LRL46600U31X LRL46250U33X LRL46400U33X LRL46600U33X LRL46400U43X LRL46600U43X LRL46400U53X LRL46600U53X LRL46400U44X LRL46600U44X LRL46400U54X LRL46600U54X Table 7.64: L-Frame 600 A 100% Rated UL Current-Limiting [25] Circuit Breakers with Lugs and Factory-Sealed Electronic Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Connection [26][27] Electronic Trip Unit Function Type 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz, 3P Micrologic Standard Micrologic Standard Micrologic Ammeter Micrologic Energy Micrologic Ammeter Micrologic Energy 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz, 4P Micrologic Standard Micrologic Standard Micrologic Ammeter Micrologic Energy Micrologic Ammeter Micrologic Energy LI LSI LSI LSI LSIG LSIG LI LSI LSI LSI LSIG LSIG Trip Unit 3.3 [28] 3.3S [28] 6.3E [32] [31] 5.3A 5.3E 6.3A 3.3 3.3S 5.3A 5.3E 6.3A 6.3E L-Frame Circuit Breaker Sensor Rating 250 A 400 A 250 A 400 A 400 A 400 A 400 A 400 A 250 A 400 A 250 A 400 A 400 A 400 A 400 A 400 A D G J [25] L [25] R [25] Interrupting Rating (100% Rated) LDL36250CU31X LDL36400CU31X LDL36250CU33X LDL36400CU33X LDL36400CU43X LDL36400CU53X LDL36400CU44X LDL36400CU54X LDL46250CU31X LDL46400CU31X LDL46250CU33X LDL46400CU33X LDL46400CU43X LDL46400CU53X LDL46400CU44X LDL46400CU54X LGL36250CU31X LGL36400CU31X LGL36250CU33X LGL36400CU33X LGL36400CU43X LGL36400CU53X LGL36400CU44X LGL36400CU54X LGL46250CU31X LGL46400CU31X LGL46250CU33X LGL46400CU33X LGL46400CU43X LGL46400CU53X LGL46400CU44X LGL46400CU54X LJL36250CU31X LJL36400CU31X LJL36250CU33X LJL36400CU33X LJL36400CU43X LJL36400CU53X LJL36400CU44X LJL36400CU54X LJL46250CU31X LJL46400CU31X LJL46250CU33X LJL46400CU33X LJL46400CU43X LJL46400CU53X LJL46400CU44X LJL46400CU54X Table 7.65: Termination Options LLL36250CU31X LLL36400CU31X LLL36250CU33X LLL36400CU33X LLL36400CU43X LLL36400CU53X LLL36400CU44X LLL36400CU54X LLL46250CU31X LLL46400CU31X LLL46250CU33X LLL46400CU33X LLL46400CU43X LLL46400CU53X LLL46400CU44X LLL46400CU54X LRL36250CU31X LRL36400CU31X LRL36250CU33X LRL36400CU33X LRL36400CU43X LRL36400CU53X LRL36400CU44X LRL36400CU54X LRL46250CU31X LRL46400CU31X LRL46250CU33X LRL46400CU33X LRL46400CU43X LRL46400CU53X LRL46400CU44X LRL46400CU54X Terminal AL400L61K3 [29] AL600LS52K3 [30] AL400L61K3 [29] AL600LS52K3 [30] AL600LS52K3 [30] AL400L61K4 [29] AL600LS52K4 [30] AL400L61K4 [29] AL600LS52K4 [30] AL600LS52K4 [30] Termination Letter A F L M P N D S Termination Option I-Line (See Section 9) No lugs Lugs both ends Lugs ON end, terminal nut kit OFF end Lugs OFF end, terminal nut kit ON end Plug In Drawout Rear Connected For factory-installed termination, place termination letter in the third block of the circuit breaker catalog number. Termination Letter L G L 3 6 6 0 0 U 4 4 X For applications requiring communications see page 7-69. 3P circuit breakers with this trip unit can be used for 2P applications. [25] Circuit breakers with J, L, and R interrupting ratings are UL certified as current limiting. [26] See Supplemental Digest Section 3 for circuit breakers with field interchangeable trip units. [27] [28] [29] AL400L61K3 terminal wire ranges are (1) 2 AWG–600 kcmil Cu or 1) 2 AWG–500 kcmil Al. [30] AL600LS52K3 terminal wire range is (2) 2/0 AWG–500 kcmil Al/Cu. [31] [32] Fixed ST and LT delays. 3P circuit breakers with this trip unit can be used for 2P applications in order to have ground fault protection. Additional metering capabilities will not work properly on the unconnected phase. E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7-37 7 11/10/2017


page 212

PowerPact™ Molded Case Circuit Breakers M-Frame Circuit Breakers Class 612 / Refer to Catalog 0612CT0101 Accessories see page 7-54 Optional Lugs see page 7-59 Dimensions see page 7-77 Enclosures see page 7-78 schneider-electric.us Table 7.66: Interrupting Ratings Voltage 240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac D 25 kA 18 kA 14 kA Interrupting Rating G 65 kA 35 kA 18 kA J 100 kA 65 kA 25 kA L 125 kA 100 kA 50 kA R 200 kA 200 kA 100 kA PowerPact M-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers Table 7.67: M-Frame 800 A, Basic Electronic Trip System Type ET 1.0 [33] Factory- Sealed Trip Unit Electronic Trip Unit Type Function Sensor Rating Interrupting Rating G J Terminal Wire (AWG/kcmil) Range 2P, 600 Vac 50/60 Hz Basic Fixed Long-time, Adjustable Instantaneous Trip M-Frame Circuit Breaker 3P, 600 Vac 50/60 Hz Basic Fixed Long-time, Adjustable Instantaneous Trip 300 A 350 A 400 A 450 A 500 A 600 A 700 A 800 A 300 A 350 A 400 A 450 A 500 A 600 A 700 A 800 A MGL26300 MGL26350 MGL26400 MGL26450 MGL26500 MGL26600 MGL26700 MGL26800 MGL36300 MGL36350 MGL36400 MGL36450 MGL36500 MGL36600 MGL36700 MGL36800 MJL26300 MJL26350 MJL26400 MJL26450 MJL26500 MJL26600 MJL26700 MJL26800 MJL36300 MJL36350 MJL36400 MJL36450 MJL36500 MJL36600 MJL36700 MJL36800 AL800M23K (3) 3/0–500 Al/Cu AL800M23K (3) 3/0–500 Al/Cu Table 7.68: Termination Options Termination Letter Termination Option A F L M P I-Line (See Section 9) No lugs Lugs both ends Lugs ON end, terminal nut kit OFF end Lugs OFF end, terminal nut kit ON end M G L 3 6 4 0 0 For factory-installed termination, place termination letter in the third block of the circuit breaker catalog number. Interrupting Rating G 65 kA 35 kA 18 kA J 100 kA 65 kA 25 kA L 125 kA 100 kA 50 kA Table 7.69: Frame Interrupting Ratings Voltage 240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac D 25 kA 18 kA 14 kA Accessories see page 7-54 Optional Lugs see page 7-59 Dimensions see page 7-77 Enclosures see page 7-78 7 I I I C R C U I T B R E A K E R S M N A T U R E A N D M O L D E D C A S E [33] 7-38 The ET 1.0 trip unit cannot be field replaced or have the long-time trip point setting adjusted. It is considered an electronic equivalent of a thermal-magnetic circuit breaker. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 213

P-Frame Circuit Breakers Class 612 / Refer to Catalog 0612CT0101 PowerPact™ Molded Case Circuit Breakers schneider-electric.us Table 7.70: P-Frame Interrupting Ratings P-Frame Interrupting Rating Voltage 240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac G 65 kA 35 kA 18 kA J 100 kA 65 kA 25 kA K 65 kA 50 kA 50 kA L 125 kA 100 kA 25 kA Table 7.71: P-Frame Termination Options Termination Letter F = No Lugs (Includes terminal nut kit on both ends) L = Lugs both ends M = Lugs ON end, terminal nut kit OFF end P = Lugs OFF end, terminal nut kit ON end D = Drawout A = I-Line (See Section 9) P G L 3 6 0 4 0 U 4 1 A For factory-installed termination, place termination letter in the third block of the circuit breaker catalog number. Dimensions see page 7-77 Trip Unit Options see page 7-67 Optional Lugs see page 7-59 Alternate Rating Plugs see page 7-69 Enclosures see page 7-78 Accessories see page 7-54 PowerPact P-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers Table 7.72: P-Frame 1200 A (600 Vac, 50/60 Hz) 3P [34] Circuit Breaker with Electronic Trip Unit Type Electronic Trip Unit Function Fixed long- Basic Electronic Trip Unit (Not Interchangeable) time, Adjustable Instantane- ous Trip Unit E- T1.01 Micrologic Interchangeable Standard Trip Unit LI 3.0 LSI 5.0 LI 3.0A Micrologic Interchangeable Ammeter Trip Unit LSI 5.0A LSIG 6.0A LSI 5.0P LSIG 6.0P LSI 5.0H LSIG 6.0H Micrologic Interchangeable Power Trip Unit Micrologic Interchangeable Harmonic Trip Unit Sensor Rating  600 A  800 A 1000 A 1200 A  250 A  400 A  600 A  800 A 1000 A 1200 A  250 A  400 A  600 A  800 A 1000 A 1200 A  250 A  400 A  600 A  800 A 1000 A 1200 A  250 A  400 A  600 A  800 A 1000 A 1200 A  250 A  400 A  600 A  800 A 1000 A 1200 A  250 A  400 A  600 A  800 A 1000 A 1200 A  250 A  400 A  600 A  800 A 1000 A 1200 A 250 A 400 A 600 A 800 A 1000 A 1200 A 250 A 400 A 600 A 800 A 1000 A 1200 A Cat. No.[35] P■L36060 P■L36080 P■L36100 P■L36120 P■L36025(C)U31A P■L36040(C)U31A P■L36060(C)U31A P■L36080(C)U31A P■L36100(C)U31A P■L36120(C)U31A P■L36025(C)U33A P■L36040(C)U33A P■L36060(C)U33A P■L36080(C)U33A P■L36100(C)U33A P■L36120(C)U33A P■L36025(C)U41A P■L36040(C)U41A P■L36060(C)U41A P■L36080(C)U41A P■L36100(C)U41A P■L36120(C)U41A P■L36025(C)U43A P■L36040(C)U43A P■L36060(C)U43A P■L36080(C)U43A P■L36100(C)U43A P■L36120(C)U43A P■L36025(C)U44A P■L36040(C)U44A P■L36060(C)U44A P■L36080(C)U44A P■L36100(C)U44A P■L36120(C)U44A P■L36025(C)U63AE1 P■L36040(C)U63AE1 P■L36060(C)U63AE1 P■L36080(C)U63AE1 P■L36100(C)U63AE1 P■L36120(C)U63AE1 P■L36025(C)U64AE1 P■L36040(C)U64AE1 P■L36060(C)U64AE1 P■L36080(C)U64AE1 P■L36100(C)U64AE1 P■L36120(C)U64AE1 P■L36025(C)U73AE1 P■L36040(C)U73AE1 P■L36060(C)U73AE1 P■L36080(C)U73AE1 P■L36100(C)U73AE1 P■L36120(C)U73AE1 P■L36025(C)U74AE1 P■L36040(C)U74AE1 P■L36060(C)U74AE1 P■L36080(C)U74AE1 P■L36100(C)U74AE1 P■L36120(C)U74AE1 Terminal Wire Range AL800M23K (3) 3/0 AWG–500 kcmil Al or Cu AL1200P25K (4) 3/0 AWG–500 kcmil Al or Cu AL800M23K (3) 3/0 AWG–500 kcmil Al or Cu AL1200P25K (4) 3/0 AWG–500 kcmil Al or Cu AL800M23K (3) 3/0 AWG–500 kcmil Al or Cu AL1200P25K (4) 3/0 AWG–500 kcmil Al or Cu AL800M23K (3) 3/0 AWG–500 kcmil Al or Cu AL1200P25K (4) 3/0 AWG–500 kcmil Al or Cu AL800M23K (3) 3/0 AWG–500 kcmil Al or Cu AL1200P25K (4) 3/0 AWG–500 kcmil Al or Cu AL800M23K (3) 3/0 AWG–500 kcmil Al or Cu AL1200P25K (4) 3/0 AWG–500 kcmil Al or Cu AL800M23K (3) 3/0 AWG–500 kcmil Al or Cu AL1200P25K (4) 3/0 AWG–500 kcmil Al or Cu AL800M23K (3) 3/0 AWG–500 kcmil Al or Cu AL1200P25K (4) 3/0 AWG–500 kcmil Al or Cu AL800M23K (3) 3/0 AWG–500 kcmil Al or Cu AL1200P25K (4) 3/0 AWG–500 kcmil Al or Cu AL800M23K (3) 3/0 AWG–500 kcmil Al or Cu AL1200P25K (4) 3/0 AWG–500 kcmil Al or Cu [34] [35] For 2P and 4P information see Catalog 0612CT0101. To complete the catalog number: Replact the ■ with the appropriate interrupting rating (G, J, K or L). For all L interrupting ratings, change the 5th character (voltage rating) from a 6 (600 V) to a 4 (480V). The 480 V AIR is standard 100 kA. For 100% rated circuit breakers, add a “C” in the 9th character place. For example, the catalog number for a 100% rated trip unit with LI trip functions at 250 A would be PBL36025CU31A. 7-39 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I 7 11/10/2017


page 214

PowerPact™ Molded Case Circuit Breakers R-Frame Circuit Breakers Class 612 / Refer to Catalog 0612CT0101 Table 7.73: R-Frame Interrupting Ratings R-Frame Interrupting Rating Voltage 240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac G 65 kA 35 kA 18 kA J 100 kA 65 kA 25 kA K 65 kA 65 kA 65 kA L 125 kA 100 kA 50 kA schneider-electric.us PowerPact R-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers R-frame circuit breakers can be bus- or cable-connected. For cable connections, optional terminal pad kit RLTB or equivalent bus structure is required. Each RLTB kit contains terminal pads for one end of the circuit breaker only and has provisions for mounting a maximum of 8 lugs per phase (9 lugs for 3000 A). RLTB kits are included with 2500 A 100% rated circuit breakers. The RL3TB kits are included with the 3000 A, 80% and 100% rated circuit breakers. For other circuit breakers, order terminal pad kit (RLTB) and optional lugs separately. See page 7-59–page 7-61. Table 7.74: R-Frame 3000 A (600 Vac, 50/60 Hz) 3P Circuit Breaker with Electronic Trip Unit Electronic Trip Unit[36] Type Function Trip Unit Basic Electronic Trip Unit (Not Interchangeable) Fixed long-time, Adjustable Instantaneous ET1.0I Micrologic Interchangeable Standard Trip Unit LI 3.0 LSI 5.0 LI 3.0A Micrologic Interchangeable Ammeter Trip Unit LSI 5.0A LSIG 6.0A 7 LSI 5.0P Micrologic Interchangeable Power Trip Unit LSIG 6.0P Micrologic LSI 5.0H Sensor Rating 1200 A 1600 A 2000 A 2500 A 600 A 800 A 1000 A 1200 A 1600 A 2000 A 2500 A 3000 A 600 A 800 A 1000 A 1200 A 1600 A 2000 A 2500 A 3000 A 600 A 800 A 1000 A 1200 A 1600 A 2000 A 2500 A 3000 A 600 A 800 A 1000 A 1200 A 1600 A 2000 A 2500 A 3000 A 600 A 800 A 1000 A 1200 A 1600 A 2000 A 2500 A 3000 A 600 A 800 A 1000 A 1200 A 1600 A 2000 A 2500 A 3000 A 600 A 800 A 1000 A 1200 A 1600 A 2000 A 2500 A 3000 A 600 A Cat. No. [37] R■F36120 R■F36160 R■F36200 R■F36250 R■F36060(C)U31A R■F36080(C)U31A R■F36100(C)U31A R■F36120(C)U31A R■F36160(C)U31A R■F36200(C)U31A R■F36250(C)U31A R■F36300(C)U31A R■F36060(C)U33A R■F36080(C)U33A R■F36100(C)U33A R■F36120(C)U33A R■F36160(C)U33A R■F36200(C)U33A R■F36250(C)U33A R■F36300(C)U33A R■F36060(C)U41A R■F36080(C)U41A R■F36100(C)U41A R■F36120(C)U41A R■F36160(C)U41A R■F36200(C)U41A R■F36250(C)U41A R■F36300(C)U41A R■F36060(C)U43A R■F36080(C)U43A R■F36100(C)U43A R■F36120(C)U43A R■F36160(C)U43A R■F36200(C)U43A R■F36250(C)U43A R■F36300(C)U43A ■F36060(C)U44A R■F36080(C)U44A R■F36100(C)U44A R■F36120(C)U44A R■F36160(C)U44A R■F36200(C)U44A R■F36250(C)U44A R■F36300(C)U44A R■F36060(C)U63AE1 R■F36080(C)U63AE1 R■F36100(C)U63AE1 R■F36120(C)U63AE1 R■F36160(C)U63AE1 R■F36200(C)U63AE1 R■F36250(C)U63AE1 R■F36300(C)U63AE1 R■F36060(C)U64AE1 R■F36080(C)U64AE1 R■F36100(C)U64AE1 R■F36120(C)U64AE1 R■F36160(C)U64AE1 R■F36200(C)U64AE1 R■F36250(C)U64AE1 R■F36300(C)U64AE1 R■F36060(C)U73AE1 I I I C R C U I T B R E A K E R S M N A T U R E A N D M O L D E D C A S E [36] [37] 7-40 For 2P and 4P information see Catalog 0612CT0101. To complete the catalog number: Replact the ■ with the appropriate interrupting rating (G, J, K or L).; For 100% rated circuit breakers, add a “C” in the 9th character place. For example, the catalog number for a 100% rated trip unit with LI trip functions at 2500 A would be GF36025CU31A. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 215

R-Frame Circuit Breakers Class 612 / Refer to Catalog 0612CT0101 PowerPact™ Molded Case Circuit Breakers schneider-electric.us Table 7.74 R-Frame 3000 A (600 Vac, 50/60 Hz) 3P Circuit Breaker with Electronic Trip Unit (cont'd.) Electronic Trip Unit[38] Function Trip Unit Type Interchangeable Harmonic Trip Unit LSIG 6.0H Sensor Rating 800 A 1000 A 1200 A 1600 A 2000 A 2500 A 3000 A 600 A 800 A 1000 A 1200 A 1600 A 2000 A 2500 A 3000 A Cat. No. [39] R■F36080(C)U73AE1 R■F36100(C)U73AE1 R■F36120(C)U73AE1 R■F36160(C)U73AE1 R■F36200(C)U73AE1 R■F36250(C)U73AE1 R■F36300(C)U73AE1 R■F36060(C)U74AE1 R■F36080(C)U74AE1 R■F36100(C)U74AE1 R■F36120(C)U74AE1 R■F36160(C)U74AE1 R■F36200(C)U74AE1 R■F36250(C)U74AE1 R■F36300(C)U74AE1 [38] [39] For 2P and 4P information see Catalog 0612CT0101. To complete the catalog number: Replact the ■ with the appropriate interrupting rating (G, J, K or L).; For 100% rated circuit breakers, add a “C” in the 9th character place. For example, the catalog number for a 100% rated trip unit with LI trip functions at 2500 A would be GF36025CU31A. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7-41 7 E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I 11/10/2017


page 216

Motor Circuit Protectors PowerPact™ H- and J-Frame Electronic Motor Circuit Protectors Class 611 / Refer to Catalog 0611CT1001 schneider-electric.us Motor Circuit Protection Selection PowerPact H- and J-frame electronic Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) are magnetic-only instantaneous-trip circuit breakers. They are designed to offer short circuit protection and are National Electrical Code (NEC) compliant when installed as part of a combination controller having motor overload protection. MCP circuit breakers accept the same accessories and terminals as the equivalent thermal-magnetic circuit breakers. Determine the hp rating from the nameplate of the motor. Select a MCP with an ampere rating recommended for the hp and voltage involved. When using the automatic settings the MCP microprocessor automatically adjusts the trip settings for both current and time to align with the start-up characteristic for the motor type, whether it is a standard or energy-efficient motor. This includes a dampening means to accommodate a transient motor in-rush current without nuisance tripping of the circuit breaker. Table 7.75: H- and J-Frame Electronic Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Frame Sensor Rating H- Frame J-Frame 30 A 50 A 100 A 150 A 250 A Full Load Amperes Range 1.5–25 A 14–42 A 30–80 A 58–130 A 114–217 A Adjustable Instantane- ous Trip Range 9–325 A 84–546 A 180–1040 A 348–1690 A 684–2500 A Suffix M71 M72 M73 M74 M75 J (See SCCR Table Below) Cat. No. HJL36030M71 HJL36050M72 HJL36100M73 HJL36150M74 JJL36250M75 Interrupting Rating L (See SCCR Table Below) Cat. No. HLL36030M71 HLL36050M72 HLL36100M73 HLL36150M74 JLL36250M75 R (See SCCR Table Below) Cat. No. HRL36030M71 HRL36050M72 HRL36100M73 HRL36150M74 JRL36250M75 Table 7.76: Maximum Rating or Setting of Motor Protective Devices [1] Type of Motor A, B, C, D B, E Standard Energy Efficient Percentage of Full-load Current Setting 800% 1100% Not to Exceed[2] 1300% 1700% Table 7.77: MCP Selection by HP Ratings [3] of Induction-type Squirrel-Cage and Wound-Rotor Motors [4] 3Ø 60 Hz Voltages[5] Full-Load Amperes 200 Vac .5–5 5–10 10–25 20–40 40–60 230 Vac .5–7.5 5–15 15–30 25–50 50–75 460 Vac .75–15 10–30 25–60 50–100 100–150 575 Vac 1–20 15–40 30–75 60–125 125–200 1.5–25 14–42 30–80 58–130 114–217 Suffix M71 M72 M73 M74 M75 Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) Tested to meet NEC and UL508A requirements for short circuit current ratings as part of an approved combination controller. Table 7.78: Short Circuit Current Ratings (SCCR) Contactor/Starter Tesys D-line and F-line NEMA Type S 200–240 Vac 100 kA 100 kA J 480 Vac 65 kA 65 kA Interrupting Rating 600 Vac 25 kA 25 kA 200–240 Vac 125 kA 125 kA L 480 Vac 100 kA 100 kA 600 Vac 50 kA 50 kA See www.us.schneider-electric.us for specific ratings and combination ID numbers. To select combination starters and motor controllers using MCP’s Meeting NEC Article 430, refer to Section 16. Accessories see page 7-54 Lugs see page 7-59 Dimensions see page 7-77 Enclosures see page 7-78 7 I I I C R C U I T B R E A K E R S M N A T U R E A N D M O L D E D C A S E [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] 7-42 Based on 2005 NEC Table 430.52. See NEC Exception No. 1 to Table 430.52. The NEC 1300% maximum setting may be inadequate for instantaneous trip circuit breakers to withstand current surges typical of the magnetization current of autotransformer type reduced voltage starters, or open transition wye-delta starters during transfer from “start” to “run,” constant hp multi-speed motors, and motors labeled “high efficiency.” Based on 2005 NEC Table 430.250. Per NEC 430.3, part-winding motors should select two circuit breakers, each at not more than one-half the allowable trip setting for the horsepower rating. The two circuit breakers should operate simultaneously as a disconnecting means per NEC 430.103. Listed voltages are rated motor voltages. Corresponding system voltages are 200 Vac, 220–240 Vac, 440–480 Vac and 550–600 Vac. Select wire and circuit breakers based on horsepower rather than nameplate full-load current per NEC 430.6 (A) for general motor applications. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved StandardEnergy EfficientEnergie EfficaceEnergia EficienteStandardEnergy EfficientEnergie EfficaceEnergia EficienteItStandardEnergy EfficientEnergie EfficaceMotor Type / Tipo de Motor / Type de MoteurEnergia Eficiente11/10/2017


page 217

H-Frame and J-Frame MCP Selector Class 611 / Refer to Catalog 0611CT1001 Motor Circuit Protectors schneider-electric.us Table 7.79: Application of PowerPact™ H-Frame and J-Frame Electronic Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) H-, J-Frame Motor Circuit Protectors Horsepower Rating of Induction-Type Squirrel-Cage and Wound-Rotor Motors 3Ø 60 Hz Starter Size 200 Vac 230 Vac 480 Vac 00 0 1 2 3 4 5 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 5 7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 5 7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 Shaded area is not covered by J-frame electronic motor circuit protector. 100 575 Vac 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 5 7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 5 7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 NEC Full Load Amperes PowerPact H-Frame and J-Frame Electronic MCP 0.9 A 1.1 A 1.3 A 1.7 A 2.1 A 2.2 A 2.4 A 2.5 A 2.7 A 3 A 3.2 A 3.4 A 3.7 A 3.9 A 4.2 A 4.8 A 4.8 A 6 A 6.1 A 6.8 A 6.9 A 7.6 A 7.8 A 9 A 9.6 A 11 A 14 A 15.2 A 17 A 17.5 A 21 A 22 A 25.3 A 27 A 28 A 32 A 32.2 A 34 A 40 A 41 A 42 A 48.3 A 52 A 54 A 62 A 65 A 68 A 77 A 78.2 A 80 A 92 A 96 A 99 A 104 A 120 A 124 A 125 A 130 A 144 A 150 A 154 A 156 A 177.1 A 180 A 192 A 221 A 240 A 248 A HJL36030M71 HLL36030M71 and 1/2–10 hp HJL36050M72 and HLL36050M72 10–25 hp HJL36100M73 and HLL36100M73 15–50 hp HJL36150M74 and HLL36150M74 30–100 hp JJL36250M75 and JLL36250M75 50–150 hp E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7-43 7 11/10/2017


page 218

Motor Circuit Protectors Instantaneous Trip Circuit Breakers schneider-electric.us Instantaneous Trip Circuit Breakers Adjustable instantaneous-trip circuit breakers are intended for use in combination with motor starters with overload relays for the protection of motor circuits from short circuits. Other specific applications include rectifiers and resistance welders. These circuit breakers contain a magnetic trip element in each pole with the trip point adjustable from the front. Interrupting ratings are determined by testing the instantaneous-trip circuit breakers in combination with a contactor and overload relay. Select instantaneous-trip circuit breakers as follows: This selection table is suitable for motors, other than NEMA Design E, with locked-rotor indicating code letters per NEC® Table 430.7 (b) as follows: Table 7.80: Locked-Rotor Indicating Codes Motor Code Letter A–L A–K A–J A–H A–G A–F Horsepower 1/2 or less 3/4 to 1-1/2 2 to 3 5 to 25 30 to 125 150 or more • For other motors order a special thermal-magnetic circuit breaker with magnetic trip settings for the specific motor— specify motor horsepower, voltage, frequency, full- load current and code letter or locked rotor current. • Determine motor hp rating from the motor nameplate. • Refer to the tables and select an instantaneous-trip circuit breaker with an ampere rating recommended for the hp and voltage involved. • Select an adjustable trip setting of at least 800%, not to exceed 1300%, of the motor full-load amperes (FLA) for other than Design E motors. For Design E motors, select an adjustable trip setting of at least 1100% not to exceed 1700% of FLA. • The NEC 1300% maximum setting may be inadequate for instantaneous-trip circuit breakers to withstand current surges typical of the magnetization current of autotransformer type reduced voltage starters, or open transition wye-delta starters during transfer from “start” to “run,” constant hp multi-speed motors, and motors labeled “high efficiency.” Select thermal-magnetic circuit breakers from page 7-47 for those applications. • Part-winding motors, per NEC 430.3, should have two circuit breakers selected from the above at not more than one half the allowable trip setting for the horsepower rating. The two circuit breakers should operate simultaneously as a disconnecting means per NEC 430.103. • Based on NEC 430.52 and NEC Table 430.150. See page 7-45 for available Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers. 7 I I I C R C U I T B R E A K E R S M N A T U R E A N D M O L D E D C A S E 7-44 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 219

schneider-electric.us Motor Circuit Protectors and Motor Protector Circuit Breakers Class 580, 585, 680, 685 Motor Circuit Protectors Motor Circuit Protectors Mag-Gard™ Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) are instantaneous-trip magnetic-only circuit breakers. They have a single adjustment which simultaneously sets the magnetic trip level of each individual pole. Mag-Gard™ circuit breakers comply with NEC requirements for providing motor circuit protection when installed as part of a UL Listed combination controller having motor overload protection. Interrupting ratings are established for these UL Recognized Components only when they are used in combination with motor starters with properly sized overload relays and contactors. All Mag-Gard circuit breakers will accept the same lugs and accessories as equivalent circuit breakers. Mag-Gard circuit breakers are available with I-Line construction [6]. High-interruption (H) construction Mag-Gard circuit breakers (LHL) are also available. Table 7.81: Magnetic Only 3 Pole, 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz [6]—Three Device Solutions [7] Motor Circuit Protector Motor Protector Circuit Breaker 250 Vdc Multiplier Cat. No. Ampere Rating Trip Unit Adjustable [8] Trip Range (A) 500–1000 A 750–1600 A 1000–2000 A 1125–2250 A 1250–2500 A 1500–3000 A 1750–3500 A 2000–4000 A — 400 LAL LAL3640022M LAL3640028M LAL3640030M LAL3640031M LAL3640032M LAL3640033M LAL3640035M LAL3640036M For PowerPact L- and P-Frames, an instantaneous-only version of the electronic trip circuti breaker is also available for motor circuit protection. These MCPs comply with NEC® requirements for providing short-circuit protection when installed as part of a Listed combination controller having motor overload protection. High = 1.2 Low = 1.4 Table 7.82: Magnetic Only 3 Pole, 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz[6]—Three Device Solutions [7] Sensor Rating PowerPact L-Frame [6] PowerPact PJL, PLL [6] Trip Unit 1.3 M — — — —  400  600  600  800 1000 1200 Adjustable [8] Trip Range (A) 500–1200% 500–1200% 1200–10000 A 1200–10000 A 1500–10000 A 1800–10000 A LGL36400M37X LGL36600M37X G — — — — Interrupting Rating J LJL36400M37X LJL36600M37X PJL36060M68 PJL36080M68 PJL36100M69 PJL36120M70 L LLL36400M37X LLL36600M37X PLL34060M68 PLL34080M68 PLL34100M69 PLL34120M70 LRL36400M37X LRL36600M37X R — — — — Motor Protector Circuit Breakers Motor protection circuit breakers provide built-in thermal and magnetic protection. They are used in two-device motor feeder solutions to provide protection against short-circuits, overloads, and phase unbalance. Table 7.83: H-Frame (150 A), J-Frame (250 A) and L-Frame (600 A) Electronic Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (UL Ratings)— Two Device Solutions [9] Electronic Trip Interrupting Rating Unit Type Frame Sensor Rating Trip Unit Full Load Amperes Range (FLA) Isd (x FLA) G J L R Standard [10] H-Frame J-Frame L-Frame 30 50 100 150 250 400 600 2.2 M 2.3 M 14–25 14–42 30–80 58–130 114–217 190–348 312–520 5-13 x FLA 5-13 x FLA 5-13 x FLA 5-13 x FLA 5-13 x FLA 5-13 x FLA 5-13 x FLA HGL36030M38X HGL36050M38X HGL36100M38X HGL36150M38X JGL36250M38X LGL36400M38X LGL36600M38X HJL36030M38X HJL36050M38X HJL36100M38X HJL36150M38X JJL36250M38X LJL36400M38X LJL36600M38X HLL36030M38X HLL36050M38X HLL36100M38X HLL36150M38X JLL36250M38X LLL36400M38X LLL36600M38X HRL36030M38X HRL36050M38X HRL36100M38X HRL36150M38X JRL36250M38X LRL36400M38X LRL36600M38X Accessories see page 7-54 and Supplemental Digest Section 3 Optional Lugs see page 7-59 and Supplemental Digest Section 3 Dimensions see page 7-77 Enclosures see page 7-78 To select combination starters and motor controllers using MCP’s meeting NEC Article 430, refer to Section 16. [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] These electronic magnetic-only motor circuit protectors are available with I-Line constructions. Consult the factory. Three-device solutions are the traditional solutionss: motor circuit protector plus motor starter plus overload relay. UL magnetic trip tolerances are -20%/+30% from the nominal values shown. Two-device solutions (these electronic motor protector circuit breakers include short circuit and overload protection) —1 electronic motor circuit protector with a Micrologic 2.2 M plus —1 contactor The standard trip unit offers Class 5, 10 and 20 and phase unbalance or phase loss protection. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I 7-45 7 11/10/2017


page 220

Motor Circuit Protectors H-, J-, and LA-Frame MCP Selection Class 680 schneider-electric.us Table 7.84: PowerPact H- and L-Frame Motor Protector Circuit Breaker Hp Ratings of Induction Type Squirrel- 200 Vac 5 7-1/2 10 15 20 75 100 125 150 Wound Rotor Motors Cage and 3Ø 60 Hz 230 Vac 460 Vac 575 Vac 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 200 250 300 350 400 5 7-1/2 10 15 20 100 125 150 200 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 250 300 350 400 500 Full Load Amperes[11] 14 15.2 17 17.5 21 22 25.3 27 28 32 32.2 34 40 41 42 48.3 52 54 62 65 221 240 242 248 285 289 302 312 336 359 360 361 382 414 472 477 480 PowerPact Family Motor Protector Circuit Breaker Cat. No. [12] H( )L36030M38X H( )L36030M38X H( )L36030M38X H( )L36030M38X H( )L36030M38X H( )L36030M38X H( )L36030M38X H( )L36050M38X H( )L36050M38X H( )L36050M38X H( )L36050M38X H( )L36050M38X H( )L36050M38X H( )L36050M38X H( )L36050M38X H( )L36100M38X H( )L36100M38X H( )L36100M38X H( )L36100M38X H( )L36100M38X L( )L36400M38X L( )L36400M38X L( )L36400M38X L( )L36400M38X L( )L36400M38X L( )L36400M38X L( )L36400M38X L( )L36400M38X L( )L36400M38X L( )L36600M38X L( )L36600M38X L( )L36600M38X L( )L36600M38X L( )L36600M38X L( )L36600M38X L( )L36600M38X L( )L36600M38X Magnetic Trip Settings[13] MIN MAX 500% 1300% 500% 1300% 500% 1300% 500% 1300% 500% 1300% 500% 1300% 500% 1300% 500% 1300% 500% 1300% Table 7.85: LAL Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers for Single Motor Circuit Protection Hp Ratings of Induction Type Squirrel- Cage and Wound Rotor Motors 3Ø 60 Hz 230 Vac 460 Vac 575 Vac 250 300 Full Load Amperes[11] 221 240 242 248 285 289 302 312 Circuit Breaker Mag-Gard Cat. No. LAL3640033M LAL3640035M LAL3640035M LAL3640035M LAL3640036M LAL3640036M LAL3640036M LAL3640036M Magnetic Trip Settings[13] MIN  700%  700%  700%  700%  700%  700%  700%  600% MAX 1400% 1500% 1400% 1400% 1400% 1400% 1300% 1300% 200 250 100 125 200 Vac  75 100 7 I I I C R C U I T B R E A K E R S M N A T U R E A N D M O L D E D C A S E [11] Motor full-load currents are taken from NEC Table 430.150. Select wire and circuit breakers on basis of horsepower rather than nameplate full-load current per NEC 430.6 (A) for general motor applications. Do not use these values to select overload relay thermal units. See Digest Secti0on 14 for selection of thermal units when actual full load current is not known. The voltages listed are rated motor voltages. Corresponding nominal system voltages are 200–208, 220–240, 440–480 and 550–600 V. To complete catalog number, replace the blank with the appropriate rating (G, J, L or R). [12] [13] Only MIN and MAX settings are shown, intermediate settings are available on all circuit breakers. 7-46 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 221

Motor Protection Selection Tables Class 601 Motor Circuit Protectors schneider-electric.us Table 7.86: Selection Tables for Conductors, Safety Switches and Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Based on 2005 NEC® Tables 430.147, 430.148 & 430.150 Motor Circuit Protection Selection Horsepower Ratings Squirrel-Cage and Wound- Rotor Motors with Norm. Torque Characteristics Operating at Usual Speeds 3Ø 60 Hz 460 230 Vac Vac 575 Vac 200 Vac [22] 2 3 5 3 5 7-1/2 7-1/2 10 15 20 10 15 20 25 5 7-1/2 7-1/2 10 10 15 20 25 15 25 30 40 50 60 50 60 75 115 Vac 1/3 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 5 230 Vac 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 1Ø 10 Hz ac 200 Vac [22] 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 5 120 Vdc 3.4 1 1-1/2 2 3 7-1/2 5 7–1/2 10 10 7-1/2 10 Average Direct Current Motors Operating at Base Speed Full Load [14] Amperage Amperage of Thermal-Magnetic [15][16] Inverse Time Circuit Breaker For Motor Code Letter B to E Ordinary Service [20] Heavy Service and Energy Efficient [21] For Motor Code Letter F to V [19] 15 A 20 A 25 A 35 A 40 A 45 A 50 A 60 A 70 A 80 A 90 A 110 A 125 A 150 A 175 A 20 A 25 A 30 A 35 A 40 A 45 A 50 A 60 A 70 A 80 A 90 A 100 A 110 A 125 A 150 A 175 A 200 A 15 A 20 A 25 A 30 A 35 A 40 A 45 A 50 A 60 A 80 A 90 A 100 A 110 A 125 A 110 A QMB and Heavy Duty Switch with Time Delay Fuses [17] Minimum Size metallic Conduit 75° C, C Wire Field-Installed Sized for 125% FLA[18] AWG kcmil Conduit 3 W THHN THWN XHHW THW 14 1/2 in. N/A 30 A 12 1/2 in. N/A 10 1/2 in. N/A 60 A 8 1/2 in. [23] N/A 6 4 3 100 A 3/4 in. 1 in. 1 in. 1 in. 1 in. 1-1/4 in. 240 Vdc 2 3 5 7-1/2 10 15 20 6.9 A 7.2 A 7.6 A 7.8 A 7.9 A 8.0 A 8.5 A 9.0 A 9.2 A 9.5 A 9.6 A 9.8 A 10.0 A 11.0 A 11.5 A 12.0 A 12.2 A 13.2 A 13.8 A 14.0 A 15.2 A 16.0 A 17.0 A 17.5 A 19.6 A 20.0 A 21.0 A 22.0 A 24.0 A 25.0 A 25.3 A 27.0 A 28.0 A 29.0 A 32.0 A 32.2 A 34.0 A 38.0 A 40.0 A 41.0 A 42.0 A 46.0 A 48.3 A 50.0 A 52.0 A 54.0 A 55.0 A 56.0 A 57.5 A 58.0 A 62.0 A 62.1 A 65.0 A 68.0 A 72.0 A 76.0 A 77.0 A [15] [14] Motor full load currents thru 200 hp are taken from NEC Tables 430.147, 148 and 150. Above 200 hp from UL 98. Select wire size, circuit breakers, or fuses on basis of hp rather than nameplate full load current per NEC 430.6. Do not use these values to select overload relay thermal units. See Digest pages 16-129—16152 for selection of thermal units when actual full load current is not known. Voltages listed are rated motor voltages. Corresponding nominal system voltages are 110–120 V, 200–208 V, 220–240 V, 440–480 V and 550–600 V Thermal-magnetic circuit breaker ampere ratings recommended are approximate for average conditions, based on trip characteristics of Square D circuit breakers and NEC Table 430.52. Under some conditions, the next size larger switch or circuit breaker rating may be necessary to accommodate the motor starting current and is permitted by NEC 430.52(C)(1) Exception 2. High starting currents are anticipated with Design E and other energy efficient motors. For explanation of Code letter markings, see NEC 430.7(B). For Busway Plug-in units, see page 9-7. Type LC, LI, LX, LXI, and LE circuit breakers are NOT recommended for use on single motor branch circuits. [16] [17] Switch size only is shown in table. Selected fuses should not exceed maximum percent of full-load current as given in NEC Table 430.52. Above 50 hp dc switches are not hp rated by UL as Motor Circuit Switches, but as General Use Switches only and are not necessarily capable of interrupting the max. operating overload current of a motor. See NEC 100 for definition of General Use Switch. When protecting a 3Ø, Design E energy efficient motor, the switch is required by NEC 430.109 to have a hp rating of not less than 1.4 times that of a motor rated 3–100 hp, or not less than 1.3 times that of a motor rated over 100 hp. Switches shown in this table do not necessarily comply with that requirement. [18] NEC 430.22 for Single Motor, Smaller conductors may be permitted for light duty-cycle service per 430.22 (B) Exception No. 1. DC motors operating from rectified 1Ø power supply will [19] require larger conductors per 430.22 (A) Exception No. 1. For motor-generator arc welders, see 630.11 Thermal-magnetic breaker ampere ratings recommended are approximate for average conditions and based on trip characteristics of Square D circuit breakers and NEC Tables 430.7(B) and 430.52. [20] Ordinary service for normal starting duty only, acceleration time of 10 sec. or less. [21] Heavy service is jogging or plugging duty or cycling load with over 25 starts per hour or over 5 starts per minute. Energy efficient motors are polyphase motors defined in NEMA Standard MG1 and exhibit high starting current. 200 V motors are commonly used on 208 V services. 8 XHHW requires 3/4 in. conduit for 3W. [22] [23] E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7-47 7 11/10/2017


page 222

Motor Circuit Protectors Motor Protection Selection Tables Class 601 schneider-electric.us Table 7.86 Selection Tables for Conductors, Safety Switches and Thermal-Magnetic Circuit BreakersBased on 2005 NEC® Tables 430.147, 430.148 & 430.150 (cont'd.) Horsepower Ratings Amperage of Thermal-Magnetic [25][26] Squirrel-Cage and Wound- Rotor Motors with Norm. Torque Characteristics Operating at Usual Speeds 1Ø 10 Hz ac Average Direct Current Motors Operating at Base Speed Full Load [24] Amperage Inverse Time Circuit Breaker For Motor Code Letter B to E Ordinary Service [30] Heavy Service and Energy Efficient [31] QMB and Heavy Duty Switch with Time Delay Fuses [27] For Motor Code Letter F to V [29] Minimum Size metallic Conduit 75° C, C Wire Field-Installed Sized for 125% FLA[28] AWG kcmil Conduit 3 W THHN THWN XHHW THW 2 1 1/0 2/0 1 in. 1-1/4 in. 1-1/4 in. 1-1/2 in. 1-1/4 in. 1-1/2 in. 1-1/2 in. 1-1/2 in. 3/0 1-1/2 in. 2 in. 4/0 250 300 350 500 2 in. 2 in. 2 in. 2 in. 2 in. 2-1/2 in. 2-1/2 in. 2-1/2 in. 3 in. 3 in. (2) 3/0 (2) 2-1/2 in. (2) 2 in. (2) 4/0 (2) 2 in. (2) 2 in. 200 A 400 A 600 A (2)300 (2) 2 in. (2) 2-1/2 in. (2) 350 (2) 2-1/2 in. (2) 2-1/2 in. 225 A 250 A 300 A 350 A 400 A 500 A 600 A 700 A 800 A 900 A 1000 A 1200 A 200 A 225 A 250 A 250 A 300 A 350 A 400 A 450 A 500 A 600 A 700 A 800 A 900 A 1000 A 1200 A 1600 A — (3) 300 (3) 2 in. (3) 2-1/2 in. Contact your local Field Office for circuit breaker selection on constant horsepower multi- speed motors. 240 Vdc 25 30 40 50 575 Vac 115 Vac 200 Vac [32] 230 Vac 120 Vdc 7-1/2 100 10 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 400 500 78.2 A 80.0 A 89.0 A 92.0 A 96.0 A 99.0 A 100.0 A 104.0 A 106.0 A 120.0 A 124.0 A 125.0 A 130.0 A 140.0 A 144.0 A 150.0 A 154.0 A 156.0 A 173.0 A 177.0 A 180.0 A 192.0 A 221.0 A 240.0 A 242.0 A 248.0 A 285.0 A 289.0 A 302.0 A 312.0 A 336.0 A 359.0 A 360.0 A 361.0 A 382.0 A 414.0 A 472.0 A 477.0 A 480.0 A 552.0 A 590.0 A 602.0 A 125 A 150 A 175 A 200 A 225 A 250 A 300 A 350 A 400 A 450 A 500 A 600 A 800 A 900 A 200 Vac [32] 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 3Ø 60 Hz 230 460 Vac Vac 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 250 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 200 500 7 [25] [24] Motor full load currents thru 200 hp are taken from NEC Tables 430.147, 148 and 150. Above 200 hp from UL 98. Select wire size, circuit breakers, or fuses on basis of hp rather than nameplate full load current per NEC 430.6. Do not use these values to select overload relay thermal units. See Digest pages 16-129—16152 for selection of thermal units when actual full load current is not known. Voltages listed are rated motor voltages. Corresponding nominal system voltages are 110–120 V, 200–208 V, 220–240 V, 440–480 V and 550–600 V Thermal-magnetic circuit breaker ampere ratings recommended are approximate for average conditions, based on trip characteristics of Square D circuit breakers and NEC Table 430.52. Under some conditions, the next size larger switch or circuit breaker rating may be necessary to accommodate the motor starting current and is permitted by NEC 430.52(C)(1) Exception 2. High starting currents are anticipated with Design E and other energy efficient motors. For explanation of Code letter markings, see NEC 430.7(B). For Busway Plug-in units, see page 9-7. Type LC, LI, LX, LXI, and LE circuit breakers are NOT recommended for use on single motor branch circuits. [26] [27] Switch size only is shown in table. Selected fuses should not exceed maximum percent of full-load current as given in NEC Table 430.52. Above 50 hp dc switches are not hp rated by UL as Motor Circuit Switches, but as General Use Switches only and are not necessarily capable of interrupting the max. operating overload current of a motor. See NEC 100 for definition of General Use Switch. When protecting a 3Ø, Design E energy efficient motor, the switch is required by NEC 430.109 to have a hp rating of not less than 1.4 times that of a motor rated 3–100 hp, or not less than 1.3 times that of a motor rated over 100 hp. Switches shown in this table do not necessarily comply with that requirement. [28] NEC 430.22 for Single Motor, Smaller conductors may be permitted for light duty-cycle service per 430.22 (B) Exception No. 1. DC motors operating from rectified 1Ø power supply will require larger conductors per 430.22 (A) Exception No. 1. For motor-generator arc welders, see 630.11 Thermal-magnetic breaker ampere ratings recommended are approximate for average conditions and based on trip characteristics of Square D circuit breakers and NEC Tables 430.7(B) and 430.52. [30] Ordinary service for normal starting duty only, acceleration time of 10 sec. or less. [31] Heavy service is jogging or plugging duty or cycling load with over 25 starts per hour or over 5 starts per minute. Energy efficient motors are polyphase motors defined in NEMA Standard [29] I I I C R C U I T B R E A K E R S M N A T U R E A N D M O L D E D C A S E MG1 and exhibit high starting current. 200 V motors are commonly used on 208 V services. [32] 7-48 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 223

PowerPact Automatic Switches Class 600 / Refer to Catalog 0612CT0101 schneider-electric.us Automatic Switches PowerPact Automatic Switches Automatic molded case switches open instantaneously at a factory preset magnetic trip point, calibrated to protect only the molded case switch itself, when it is subjected to high fault currents. The trip point is nonadjustable and provides no overload or low level fault protection. Molded case switches open when the handle is switched to the OFF position or in response to an auxiliary tripping device such as a shunt trip. All molded case switches will accept the same lugs and accessories as equivalent thermal-magnetic circuit breakers, with the exception of Q-frame switches which do not have electrical accessories available. Automatic molded case switches are UL Listed per UL 489 and are CSA Certified. J-Frame Switch L-Frame Switch Table 7.87: PowerPact™ B-Frame Automatic Molded Case Switches, 600 Vac Circuit Breaker B-Frame Poles 2 [1] 3 Ampere Rating 125 A 125 A D Withstand Cat. No. BDL26000S12 BDL36000S12 Trip Point 1625 A 1625 A G Withstand J Withstand Cat. No. BGL26000S12 BGL36000S12 Trip Point 1625 A 1625 A Cat. No. BJL26000S12 BJL36000S12 Trip Point 1625 A 1625 A Table 7.88: H-, J-, and L-Frame PowerPact™ Automatic Molded Case Switches, 600 Vac Circuit Breaker Poles H-Frame J-Frame L-Frame 2 3 3 4 Ampere Rating 150 A 175 A 250 A 150 A 175 A 250 A 400 A 600 A 400 A 600 A G Withstand Cat. No. HGL26000S15 [1] JGL26000S17 JGL26000S25 HGL36000S15 JGL36000S17 JGL36000S25 LGL36000S40X LGL36000S60X LGL46000S40X LGL46000S60X Trip Point 2250 A 3125 A 3125 A 2250 A 3125 A 3125 A 4800 A 6600A 4800 A 6600A L Withstand R Withstand Cat. No. Trip Point Cat. No. Trip Point HLL26000S15 JLL26000S17 JLL26000S25 HLL36000S15 JLL36000S17 JLL36000S25 LLL36000S40X LLL36000S60X LLL46000S40X LLL46000S60X 2250 A 3125 A 3125 A 2250 A 3125 A 3125 A 4800 A 6600 A 4800 A 6600 A — — — — JRL36000S17 JRL36000S25 LRL36000S40X LRL36000S60X LRL46000S40X LRL46000S60X — — — — 3125 A 3125 A 4800 A 6600 A 4800 A 6600 A Terminal LV426973 LV426974 Terminal AL150HD AL175JD AL250JD AL150HD AL175JD AL250JD AL150HD AL250JD AL150HD AL250JD Wire Range 14–2/0 AWG Cu 14–2/0 AWG Cu Wire Range 14 AWG–3/0 AWG Al/Cu 4–4/0 AWG Al/Cu 3/0 AWG–350 kcmil Al/Cu 14 AWG–3/0 AWG Al/Cu 4–4/0 AWG Al/Cu 3/0 AWG–350 kcmil Al/Cu AL600LS52K3 (2) 2/0 AWG–500 kcmil Al/Cu AL600LS52K4 (2) 2/0 AWG–500 kcmil Al/Cu Table 7.89: P-Frame and R-Frame PowerPact™ Automatic Molded Case Switches [2], 600 Vac L Withstand Frame K Withstand J Withstand Poles Cat. No. Trip Point Cat. No. Trip Point P R 2 3 2 3 Ampere Rating 600 A 800 A 1000 A 1200 A 600 A 800 A 1000 A 1200 A 1200 A 1600 A 2000 A 2500 A 1200 A 1600 A 2000 A 2500 A 3000 A PJL26000S60 PJL26000S80 PJL26000S10 PJL26000S12 PJL36000S60 PJL36000S80 PJL36000S10 PJL36000S12 — — — — — — — — — 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA — — — — — — — — — PKL26000S60 PKL26000S80 PKL26000S10 PKL26000S12 PKL36000S60 PKL36000S80 PKL36000S10 PKL36000S12 RKF26000S12 RKF26000S16 RKF26000S20 RKF26000S25 RKF36000S12 RKF36000S16 RKF36000S20 RKF36000S25 RKF36000S30 24 kA 24 kA 24 kA 24 kA 24 kA 24 kA 24 kA 24 kA 57 kA 57 kA 57 kA 57 kA 57 kA 57 kA 57 kA 57 kA 57 kA Cat. No. PLL24000S60 [3] PLL24000S80 [3] PLL24000S10 [3] PLL24000S12 [3] PLL34000S60 [3] PLL34000S80 [3] PLL34000S10 [3] PLL34000S12 [3] RLF26000S12 RLF26000S16 RLF26000S20 RLF26000S25 RLF36000S12 RLF36000S16 RLF36000S20 RLF36000S25 RLF36000S30 Trip Point Terminal Wire Range AL800M23K AL1200P25K AL800M23K AL1200P25K (3) 3/0 AWG–500 kcmil Al or Cu (4) 3/0 AWG–500 kcmil Al or Cu (3) 3/0 AWG–500 kcmil Al or Cu (4) 3/0 AWG–500 kcmil Al or Cu R-frame circuit breakers can be bus-connected or cable-connected. For cable connections, RLTB kit or equivalent bus structure is required. Kit is included with 3000 A switches. For all others, see page 7-62. 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 48 kA 48 kA 48 kA 48 kA 48 kA 48 kA 48 kA 48 kA 48 kA Accessories see page 7-54 and Supplemental Digest Section 3 Optional Lugs see page 7-59 and Supplemental Digest Section 3 Dimensions see page 7-76 and page 7-77 Enclosures see page 7-78 Circuit Breaker Q-Frame [4] 2 3 Ampere Rating 225 A 225 A Table 7.90: Q-Frame (240 Vac) PowerPact™ Automatic Molded Case Switches Wire Range J Withstand Poles Trip Point Cat. No. QBL22000S22 QBL32000S22 4500 A 4500 A 4 AWG–300 kcmil Table 7.91: B-, H-, J-, L- P-, and R-Frame Withstand Ratings [5] Voltage 240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac D 25 kA 18 kA 14 kA G 65 kA 35 kA 18 kA J 100 kA 65 kA 25 kA Withstand K 65 kA 50 kA [6] 50 kA [6] L 125 kA 100 kA 50 kA R 200 kA 200 kA 100 kA [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] True 2P device. Others are a 2P in a 3P module. UL magnetic trip tolerances are -20% / +30% from the nominal values shown. P-frame L-interrupting is available in 480 Vac only. Withstand rating of 10 kA at 240 Vac. The withstand rating is the fault current at rated voltage that the molded case switch will withstand without damage when protected by a circuit breaker with an equal continuous current rating. B- and R-frame withstand is 65 kA. E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7-49 7 11/10/2017


page 224

500 Vdc Circuit Breakers UL Listed 500 Vdc Circuit Breakers Class 500, 600 schneider-electric.us 500 Vdc Circuit Breakers The UL Listed thermal-magnetic molded case circuit breakers shown below are specifically designed for use on ungrounded dc systems having a maximum short-circuit voltage of 500 Vdc or a maximum floating (unloaded) voltage of 600 Vdc. The circuit breakers are suitable for use only with UPS (ungrounded uninterruptable power supplies systems). This two-level voltage rating allows these circuit breakers to be applied to battery sources having a short-circuit availability of 20,000 amperes or 50,000 amperes for PowerPact H-, J-, and L-frame DC circuit breakers at 500 Vdc. PowerPact H-frame DC circuit breakers have a fixed magnetic trip system. PowerPact J- and L-frame DC circuit breakers are provided with an adjustable magnetic trip that is readily accessible by means of a single adjustment on the face of the circuit breaker. PowerPact H- and J-frame circuit breakers are UL Listed for the interrupting ratings shown only if applied with three poles connected in series (series connection is external to circuit breaker). (See figure for example of diagram.) PowerPact L-frame circuit breakers are UL Listed for the interrupting ratings shown with two or three poles connected in series (series connection is external to circuit breaker). NOTE: Due to external series connection, I-Line™ circuit breakers are not available for this application. Table 7.93: DC Molded Case Circuit Breakers Fixed Magnetic Adjustable Magnetic Trip Range—DC Amperes [1] Ampere Rating Circuit Breaker Cat. No. Interrupting @ 500 Vdc Rating Trip —DC Amperes Connection Diagram Table 7.92: Termination Options Termination Letter L F S Termination Option Lugs Both Ends No Lugs (bus bar connection) Rear Connection JGL37125D81–Place termination letter in third block of circuit breaker catalog number. 30 A 50 A 70 A 100 A 125 A 150 A 175 A 200 A 225 A 250 A 300 A 350 A 400 A 450 A 500 A 600 A 700 A 800 A 900 A 1000 A 1200 A 30A 50A 70A 100A 125A 150A 175A 200A 225A 250A 300A 350A 400A 450 A 500 A 600 A 700 A 800 A 900 A 1000 A 1200 A HGL37030D87 HGL37050D87 HGL37070D87 JGL37100D81 JGL37125D81 JGL37150D81 JGL37175D81 JGL37200D82 JGL37225D82 JGL37250D82 LGL37030D27 LGL37035D29 LGL37040D30 LGL37045D31 LGL37050D32 LGL37060D33 LGL47070D35 LGL47080D36 LGL47090D86 LGL47100D40 LGL47120D42 HLL37030D87 HLL37050D87 HLL37070D87 JLL37100D81 JLL37125D81 JLL37150D81 JLL37175D81 JLL37200D82 JLL37225D82 JLL37250D82 LLL37030D27 LLL37035D29 LLL37040D30 LLL36045D31 LLL37050D32 LLL37060D33 LLL47070D35 LLL47080D36 LLL47090D86 LLL47100D40 LLL47120D42 450 450 450 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 450 450 450 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Accessories see page 7-54 and Supplemental Digest Section 3 Optional Lugs see page 7-59 and Supplemental Digest Section 3 Dimensions see page 7-77 and Supplemental Digest Section 3 Enclosures see page 7-82 Low — — — 400 400 400 400 500 500 500 750 875 1000 1125 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 3000 — — — 400 400 400 400 500 500 500 750 875 1000 1125 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 3000 High — — — 600 600 600 600 850 850 850 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 6000 — — — 600 600 600 600 850 850 850 1500 1750 200 2250 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 6000 20 k AIR 20 k AIR 20 k AIR 20 k AIR 50 k AIR 50 k AIR 50 k AIR Magnetic trip tolerances are -20%/+30% from the nominal values shown. [1] 7-50 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7 I I I C R C U I T B R E A K E R S M N A T U R E A N D M O L D E D C A S E CAUTION/PRECAUCION/ATTENTIONConnect only as shown/Conectar solo asi/Brancher seulement comme suit:oroou- 600 V MAX.600 V MAX.+Load/Carga/Charge+600 V MAX.-Load/Carga/Charge11/10/2017


page 225

UL Listed 500 Vdc NW Circuit Breakers Class 500, 600 500 Vdc Circuit Breakers schneider-electric.us 500 Vdc Masterpact NW Circuit Breakers Table 7.94: Masterpact NW DC Circuit Breakers Ampere Rating 800 A 1000 A 1200 A 1400 A 1600 A 2000A 2500 A 3000 A 4000 A 800 A 1000 A 1200 A 1400 A 1600 A 2000A 2500 A 3000 A 4000 A Circuit Breaker Reference No. NW08NDC NW10NDC NW12NDC NW14NDC NW16NDC NW20NDC NW25NDC NW30NDC NW40NDC NW08HDC NW10HDC NW12HDC NW14HDC NW16HDC NW20HDC NW25HDC NW30HDC NW40HDC Interrupting Rating 500 Vdc (max 600 Vdc unloaded) 35 kA 35 kA 35 kA 35 kA 35 kA 35 kA 35 kA 35 kA 35 kA 85 kA 85 kA 85 kA 85 kA 85 kA 85 kA 85 kA 85 kA 85 kA Masterpact NW DC Circuit Breaker E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7-51 7 11/10/2017


page 226

Mission Critical Circuit Breakers Plug-in Drawout Rear Connected Table 7.95: PowerPact J- and L-Frame Mission Critical Circuit Breakers Ratings UL 489 Listed CSA Certified Voltage: 480 V Main circuit breaker in NQ and NF panelboards Available Configurations I-Line mounting Unit mount for OEM users Plug-in base for OEM users Drawout base ofr OEM users Selective Coordination Class 500, 600 schneider-electric.us Mission Critical Circuit Breakers Designed for selectively coordinated systems, mission critical circuit breakers maximize continuity of the electrical service by allowing the branch circuit breaker to clear the fault. Mission critical circuit breakers are engineered with technology that optimizes current, time and energy selectivity so the fault is cleared by the circuit breaker immediately upstream of the occurrence. This technology (see figure below) allows the remaining areas of the electrical system to continue operation without disruption. In addition to unique design attributes, Square D mission critical circuit breakers have also undergone rigorous testing procedures to certify the coordination with downstream circuit breakers —combining innovative engineering with validated test results. Apply Square D mission critical circuit breakers in emergency power distribution systems, data centers, hospitals or anywhere continuity of service is desired. The PowerPact™ J- and L-Frame Mission Critical circuit breakers deliver high levels of selective coordination in a flexible design that can be easily configured for a variety of applications. Tested to be selectively coordinated with the QO™ family of miniature circuit breakers and the ED, EG, and EJ circuit breakers, this solution provides peace of mind when power availability is critical. An electronic trip unit provides adjustable long-time settings in four sensor sizes, allowing coverage from 70 A through 600 A on a 120–240, 208Y/120, 240, 480Y/277, and 480 V systems. PowerPact Circuit Breakers with Micrologic Electronic Trip Units The advantages of being able to adjust the trip curve of a circuit breaker equipped with an electronic trip system are obvious. There are other advantages, such as being able to adjust or turn off the instantaneous trip function on some circuit beakers and models of trip units. Table 7.96: J-Frame 250 A Electronic Trip Mission Critical 100% Rated Circuit Breakers (480/277 Vac) with Factory Sealed Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Connection Electronic Trip Unit Type Standard Standard High Perf. Ammeter High Perf. Energy High Perf. Ammeter High Perf. Energy Trip Function LI LSI LSI LSI LSIG LSIG Trip Unit 3.2 W 3.2S-W 5.2A-W 5.2E-W 6.2A-W 6.2E-W Continuous Current 250 A 250 A 250 A 250 A 250 A 250 A D Interrupting JDL34250WU31X JDL34250WU33X JDL34250WU43X JDL34250WU53X JDL34250WU44X JDL34250WU54X Cat. No. G Interrupting JGL34250WU31X JGL34250WU33X JGL34250WU43X JGL34250WU53X JGL34250WU44X JGL34250WU54X J Interrupting JJL34250WU31X JJL34250WU33X JJL34250WU43X JJL34250WU53X JJL34250WU44X JJL34250WU54X L Interrupting JLL34250WU31X JLL34250WU33X JLL34250WU43X JLL34250WU53X JLL34250WU44X JLL34250WU54X Terminal AL250JD [1] AL250JD [1] AL250JD [1] AL250JD [1] AL250JD [1] AL250JD [1] Table 7.97: J-Frame Termination Options A = I-Line (See Section 9) F = No Lugs (includes terminal nut kit on both ends)[2] L = Lugs both ends M = Lugs ON end Terminal Nut Kit OFF end P = Lugs OFF end Terminal Nut Kit ON end N = Plug-in D = Drawout S = Rear Connected Termination Letter J G L 3 6 1 0 0 For factory-installed termination, place termination letter in the third block of the circuit breaker catalog number. Termination Letter Table 7.98: J-Frame Interrupting Ratings Voltage 240 Vac 480 Vac D 25 kA 18 kA Interrupting Rating G 65 kA 35 kA J 100 kA 65 kA L 125 kA 100 kA 7 I I I C R C U I T B R E A K E R S M N A T U R E A N D M O L D E D C A S E AL250JD terminal wire range is (1) 3/0 AWG–350 kcmil Al or Cu. Add TS suffix for circuit breaker without terminal nut kit. [1] [2] 7-52 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 227

Selective Coordination Class 500, 600 Mission Critical Circuit Breakers schneider-electric.us Table 7.99: L-Frame 600 A Electronic Trip Mission Critical Circuit Breakers (480/277 Vac) with Factory Sealed Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Connection [3] Electronic Trip Unit Type Trip Function Trip Unit Continuous Current D Interrupting G Interrupting Cat. No. J Interrupting L Interrupting. 480/277 Vac, 50/60 Hz, 3P Standard Standard High Perf. Ammeter High Perf. Energy High Perf. Ammeter High Perf. Energy 480/277 Vac, 50/60 Hz, 4P Standard Standard High Perf. Ammeter High Perf. Energy High Perf. Ammeter High Perf. Energy LI LSI LSI LSI LSIG LSIG LI LSI LSI LSI LSIG LSIG 3.3 W 3.3S-W 5.3A-W 5.3E-W 6.3A-W 6.3E-W 3.3 W 3.3S-W 5.3A-W 5.3E-W 6.3A-W 6.3E-W 250 A 400 A 600 A 250 A 400 A 600 A 400 A 600 A 400 A 600 A 400 A 600 A 400 A 600 A 250 A 400 A 600 A 250 A 400 A 600 A 400 A 600 A 400 A 600 A 400 A 600 A 400 A 600 A LDL34250WU31X LDL34400WU31X LDL34600WU31X LDL34250WU33X LDL34400WU33X LDL34600WU33X LDL34400WU43X LDL34600WU43X LDL34400WU53X LDL34600WU53X LDL34400WU44X LDL34600WU44X LDL34400WU54X LDL34600WU54X LDL44250WU31X LDL44400WU31X LDL44600WU31X LDL44250WU33X LDL44400WU33X LDL44600WU33X LDL44400WU43X LDL44600WU43X LDL44400WU53X LDL44600WU53X LDL44400WU44X LDL44600WU44X LDL44400WU54X LDL44600WU54X LGL34250WU31X LGL34400WU31X LGL34600WU31X LGL34250WU33X LGL34400WU33X LGL34600WU33X LGL34400WU43X LGL34600WU43X LGL34400WU53X LGL34600WU53X LGL34400WU44X LGL34600WU44X LGL34400WU54X LGL34600WU54X LGL44250WU31X LGL44400WU31X LGL44600WU31X LGL44250WU33X LGL44400WU33X LGL44600WU33X LGL44400WU43X LGL44600WU43X LGL44400WU53X LGL44600WU53X LGL44400WU44X LGL44600WU44X LGL44400WU54X LGL44600WU54X LJL34250WU31X LJL34400WU31X LJL34600WU31X LJL34250WU33X LJL34400WU33X LJL34600WU33X LJL34400WU43X LJL34600WU43X LJL34400WU53X LJL34600WU53X LJL34400WU44X LJL34600WU44X LJL34400WU54X LJL34600WU54X LJL44250WU31X LJL44400WU31X LJL44600WU31X LJL44250WU33X LJL44400WU33X LJL44600WU33X LJL44400WU43X LJL44600WU43X LJL44400WU53X LJL44600WU53X LJL44400WU44X LJL44600WU44X LJL44400WU54X LJL44600WU54X Accessories see page 7-54 Optional Lugs see page 7-59 Compression and PDC Lugs see Supplemental Digest, Section 3 Dimensions see page 7-77 Enclosures see page 7-78 LLL34250WU31X LLL34400WU31X LLL34300WU31X LLL34250WU33X LLL34400WU33X LLL34300WU33X LLL34400WU43X LLL34300WU43X LLL34400WU53X LLL34300WU53X LLL34400WU44X LLL34300WU44X LLL34400WU54X LLL34300WU54X LLL44250WU31X LLL44400WU31X LLL44300WU31X LLL44250WU33X LLL44400WU33X LLL44300WU33X LLL44400WU43X LLL44300WU43X LLL44400WU53X LLL44300WU53X LLL44400WU44X LLL44300WU44X LLL44400WU54X LLL44300WU54X Terminal AL400L61K3 [4] AL600LS52K3 [5] AL400L61K3 [4] AL600LS52K3 [5] AL600LS52K3 [5] AL600LS52K3 [5] AL600LS52K3 [5] AL600LS52K3 [5] AL400L61K4 [4] AL600LS52K4 [5] AL400L61K4 [4] AL600LS52K4 [5] AL600LS52K4 [5] AL600LS52K3 [5] AL600LS52K4 [5] AL600LS52K4 [5] [3] [4] [5] Standard rating (100%) for 250 A and 400 A only. Standard rating 80% for 600 A. AL400L61K3 terminal wire ranges are (1) #2 AWG–500 kcmil Al or (1) #2 AWG–600 kcmil Cu. AL600LS52K3 terminal wire ranges are (2) 2/0 AWG–500 kcmil Al or Cu. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7-53 7 E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I 11/10/2017


page 228

PowerPact™ Circuit Breaker Accessories Electrical Accessories Class 612 / Refer to Catalog 0612CT0101 Table 7.100: Electrical Accessories PowerPact Accessories Accessory Description Rated Voltage of: of: 1 auxiliary switch (OF) 1a1b 2 auxiliary switch (OF) 2a2b 3 auxiliary switch (OF) 3a3b Alarm Switch (SD) 1a1b Overcurrent trip switch (SDE) 1a1b Consisting OF Switch SDE Adapter Alarm switch and Overcurrent trip switch Consisting OF Switch SDE Adapter Auxiliary Switch/Alarm Switch/ Adapter (OF/SD/SDE) Kit One auxiliary switch (OF) 1a1b Two auxiliary switches (OF) 2a2b 3 auxiliary switches (OF) 3a3b Alarm Switch (SD) 1a1b Overcurrent trip switch (SDE) 1a1b Consisting of: OF Switch SDE Adapter Alarm switch and Overcurrent trip switch Consisting OF Switch of: SDE Adapter [3] Auxiliary and Alarm Switches (OF, SD, SDE) B-Frame H-, J-, L-, M-, P, and R-Frame Shunt Trip (MX) Provides circuit breaker contact status. Note: The location of the accessory in the circuit breaker determines its function. Standard Min Load = 10mA with 24V Low Level Min Load = 1mA with 24V B-Frame Trips the circuit breaker from a remote location by means of a trip coil energized from a separate supply voltage circuit. AC DC AC DC 24 48 110–130 220–240 208–277 380–480 525–600 12 24 30 48 60 125 250 24 48 12 24 30 48 60 125 250 48 110–130 220–240 208–277 380–415 380–480 525–600 100–130 220–250 380–480 48 100–130 200–250 220–240 Instantaneously opens the circuit breaker when the under-voltage trip supply voltage drops to a value between 35% and 70% of its rated voltage. Closing is allowed when the supply voltage of the undervoltage trip reaches 85% of rated voltage. Undervoltage trip with externally mounted adjustable time delay unit for UVR of 0.5, 0.9, 1.5, 3.0 seconds before circuit breaker trips Undervoltage trip with externally mounted non- adjustable time delay unit of 0.25 sec before circuit breaker trips. AC/DC AC/DC — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Factory Installed Cat. Suffix AA AB AC BC BD — — BE — — — AE AF AG BH BJ — — BK — — SK SL SA SD, SF SD SH SJ SN SO SU SP SV SR SS UK UL UA UC UD UF UH UJ UN UO UU UP UV UR US — — — — — — — — H-, J-, and L-Frame Undervoltage Trip (MN) H-, J-, and L-Frame Time Delay Unit 7 I I I C R C U I T B R E A K E R S M N A T U R E A N D M O L D E D C A S E [1] [2] [3] [4] P-frame drawout circuit breaker only. Not available on electrically operated P-frame. SDE Adapter used for H- and J-frame only. Field-installable kit includes time delay module only. Order undervoltage trip separately. 7-54 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved — 2x S29452 BK [2] 2x S29452 B-, H-, J-, and L-Frame B-Frame Field- Installable Cat. No. LV426950 — — Field- Installable Pre-Wired Cat. No. LV426951 — — LV426950 LV426952 H- and J- Frame Field- Installable Cat. No. S29450 2x S29450 — S29450 — S29450 S29451 L-Frame Field- Installable Cat. No. S29450 2x S29450 3x S29450 S29450 S29450 — — — 2x S29450 2x S29450 S29451 — S29452 2x S29452 — S29452 — S29452 S29451 — — — S29452 2x S29452 3x S29452 S29452 S29452 — — 2x S29452 S29451 S29384 S29385 S29386 — S29387 S29388 S29389 S29382 S29390 S29391 S29392 S29383 S29393 — — S29384 S29385 S29386 — S29387 S29388 S29389 S29382 S29390 S29391 S29392 S29383 S29393 LV426841 LV426842 LV426843 LV426861 LV426862 LV426863 LV426844 LV426846 LV426864 LV426866 LV426841 LV426861 LV426842 LV426862 LV426843 LV426863 LV426844 LV426864 S29394 S29394 LV426801 LV426802 LV426803 LV426804 LV426805 LV426806 LV426807 LV426821 LV426822 LV426823 LV426824 LV426825 LV426826 LV426827 LV426801 LV426821 LV426802 LV426822 LV426823 LV426835 LV426803 LV426815 S33680 [4] S33681 [4] S33682 [4] — S29426 [4] — — S29427 [4] S29404 S29405 S29406 S29407 — — S29408 S29409 S29402 S29410 S29411 S29412 S29403 S29413 S29414 S33680 [4] S33681 [4] S33682 [4] S29404 S29405 S29406 S29407 — — S29408 S29409 S29402 S29410 S29411 S29412 S29403 S29413 S29414 S33680 [4] S33681 [4] S33682 [4] — — S29426 [4] S29426 [4] — — S29427 [4] — — S29427 [4] — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — schneider-electric.us M-, P-, and R-Frame Factory Installed Cat. Suffix Field- Installable Cat. No. AA AB AC BC BD — — BE — — — AE AF AG BH BJ [2] — — S29450 2x S29450 3x S29450 S29450 S29450 — — 2x S29450 — — S33801 [1] S29452 2x S29452 3x S29452 S29452 S29452 — — — — SK SL SA SC SD SH — SN SK SK SL SL SA SC UK UL UA UC — — UH — — UK UK UL UL UA UC — — — — — — — — — — S33659 S33660 S33661 S33662 S33663 S33664 — S33658 S33659 S33659 S33660 S33660 S33661 S33662 S33668 S33669 S33670 S33671 S33673 — — — — S33668 S33668 S33669 S33669 S33670 S33671 S33680 [4] S33681 [4] S33682 [4] S33683 [4] — S33684 [4] S33685 [4] — 11/10/2017


page 229

Motor Operators and Rotary Handles Class 612 / Refer to Catalog 0612CT0101 PowerPact™ Circuit Breaker Accessories schneider-electric.us Table 7.101: Motor Operators for H-, J-, and L-Frame Circuit Breakers Description Rated Voltage Factory Installed Cat. No. Suffix Motors and Rotary Handles Standard motor for electrically-operated circuit breakers [6] Motor Operator Communicating motor for electrically- operated circuit breakers [7] Locking device Operations counter Adapter for I-Line circuit breaker AC DC 48–60 110–130 208–277 220–240 380–415 440–480 24–30 48–60 110–130 250 AC 220–240 Mounting hardware Ronis lock Profalux lock lock Mounting hardware plus Ronis ML MA MD MF MH MO MV MR MS NC — — — — — — H-Frame [5] Cat. No. S29440 S29433 S29434 — S29435 S29436 S29437 S29438 S29439 S429441 — S41940 S42888 S429449 — S37420 Field-Installable Kit J-Frame Cat. No. S31548 S31540 S31541 — S31542 S31543 S31544 S31545 S31546 S431549 — S41940 S42888 S429449 — S37420 L-Frame 600 A Cat. No. S432639 S432640 S432641 S432642 S432647 S432643 S432644 S432645 S432646 S432652 S32649 S41940 S42888 — S32648 — Table 7.102: Spring-Charging Motors for Electrically-Operated P-Frame Circuit Breakers Description Rated Voltage Factory Installed Cat. No. Suffix P-Frame (For Field Replacement Spring Charging Motor Cat. No. Only) Replacement Coils Opening/Closing Coil Cat. No. Standard motor for electrically- operated circuit breakers. Factory-installed includes motor and opening/closing coils. Spring-Charging Motor Communicating motor mechanism for electrically operated circuit breakers. Factory-installed includes motor and opening/closing coils. AC DC AC DC 48 100–130 220–240 380–415 24–30 48–60 110–130 200–250 48 100–130 220–240 380–415 24–30 48–60 110–130 200–250 ML MA MC MF MO MV MR MS NL NA NC NF NO NV NR NS S47391 S47395 S47396 S47398 S47390 S47391 S47392 S47393 S47391 S47395 S47396 S47398 S47390 S47391 S47392 S47393 S33660 S33661 S33662 S33664 S33659 S33660 S33661 S33662 S33034 S33035 S33036 S33038 S33033 S33034 S33035 S33036 [5] [6] [7] Not available in H-frame 2P modules. Factory and field-installed standard motor operators for H- and J-frame circuit breakers require the SDE switch and SDE adapter (both included). Factory and field-installed standard motor operators for L-frame circuit breakers require the SDE switch (included). Installation requires BSCM with NSX Cord. For ordering information see page 7-69. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I 7-55 7 11/10/2017


page 230

PowerPact™ Circuit Breaker Accessories Motor Operators and Rotary Handles Class 612 / Refer to Catalog 0612CT0101 Rotary Handles schneider-electric.us B-Frame Factory Installed Cat. No. Suffix RD10 — — — Field- Installable Cat. No. LV426930 — — — RD20 LV426931 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — LV426932 — — LV426933 — — — — — — — — — H- and J-Frame [8] Field- Installable Cat. No. S29337 Factory Installed Cat. No. Suffix RD10 Factory Installed Cat. No. Suffix RD10 L-Frame — RD12 RD13 RD20 RD22 RD23 — — RE10 — RE13 RE20 — RT10 — — — — — — — — S29337 + S29345 S29337 + S29346 S29339 S29339 + S29345 S29339 + S29346 S429341 29342 S29338 — S29338 + S29346 S29340 — S29343 S429344 S41940 S42888 S41950 S42878 S29445 S29346 — RD12 RD13 RD20 RD22 RD23 — — RE10 — RE13 RE20 — RT10 — — — — — — — Field- Installable Cat. No. S32597 — S32597 + S32605 S32597 + S29346 S32599 S32599 + S32605 S32599 + S29346 S32606 S32602 S32598 — S32598 + S29346 S32600 — S32603 S32604 S41940 S42888 S41950 S42878 S32605 S29346 P-Frame Factory Installed Cat. No. Suffix RD10 RD16 — — — — — — — RE10 RE16 — — S33875 — — — — — — — — Two early-break and two early make switches One early-break switch Two early-make switches Operating mechanism kit One early-break switch Two early-make switches Two early-break and two early make switches Two early make switches Operating mechanism kit Ronis 1351.500 Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z 2 Ronis keylocks with 1 key 2 Profalux keylocks with 1 key One early-break switch Two early-make switches Direct-Mounted Handle Door-Mounted Handle Table 7.103: Rotary Operated Handles Device Description Standard black handle Operating mechanism kit Direct Mounted Standard black handle with Red handle on yellow bezel MCC conversion accessory CNOMO conversion accessory Standard black handle Operating mechanism kit Door Mounted Standard black handle with: Red handle on yellow bezel Rotary Handle Replacement Kit Telescoping Key lock adapter Accessories Key locks Indication Auxiliary Switch 7 I I I C R C U I T B R E A K E R S M N A T U R E A N D M O L D E D C A S E Not available in H-frame 2P modules. [8] 7-56 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 231

schneider-electric.us Locks, Installation Accessories, and Rear Connections Class 612 / Refer to Catalog 0612CT0101 PowerPact™ Circuit Breaker Accessories Locks, Installation Accessories, and Rear Connectors Removable Padlock Attachment Fixed Padlock Attachment Table 7.104: Locks, Interlocking Device Description B-Frame Factory- Installed Cat. No. Suffix Field- Installable Cat. No. S29370 LV426905 LV426907 (I-Line) LV426906 LV426908 (I-Line) — — LV426994 — — — — — — — — — — — Factory- Installed Cat. No. Suffix H- and J-Frame Field- Installa- ble Cat. No. S29370 — Q-Frame Factory- Installed Cat. No. Suffix — Field- Instal- led Cat. No. L-Frame Field- Installa- ble Cat. No. S29370 Factory- Installed Cat. No. Suffix M- and P-Frame Field- Installa- ble Cat. No. S44936 — R-Frame Factory- Installed Cat. No. Suffix — Field- Installa- ble Cat. No. S33996 YP YQ YQ — — — — — — — — — — — — — S29371 S37422 H2PHLA S29369 S29354 — — — — — — — — — — — YP YQ YQ — — — — — — — — — — — — — QBPA S32631 QBPAF NJPAF — — — S32621 QBMIK S32614 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — YP YQ — — — JA JE [11][12] JK JB [13] JD [13] JG JL JC [13] JF [13] JN JP S32631 MPRPAF — S33890 — — — — — — — — — — — — YP YQ — — — JE [12] JK JB JD — JL JC JF JN JP S32631 MPRPAF — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Handle Padlocking Device Interlocking (Not UL listed) Removable (lock OFF only) Fixed (lock OFF or ON) Fixed (lock OFF only)[9] Fixed (lock OFF only)–2P Mechanical for circuit breakers with rotary handles[10] Mechanical for circuit breakers with toggles[10] Provision only, vertical mount, 1 or 2 locks Provisions only, vertical mounting one key interlock including padlock provision, open position only. Provision only, horizontal mount 1 lock, M- and P-frame 1 or 2 locks, R-frame Provision and 1 lock, vertical mount Kirk Kirk Kirk Ronis Profalux Kirk Kirk Ronis Profalux Kirk Kirk — YP YQ — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Key Lockng Provision and 1 lock, horizontal mount Provision and 2 locks keyed alike Provision and 2 locks keyed differently Handle Rubber Boot B-Frame LV426920 — — — H- and J-Frame Field-Installable Cat. No. Table 7.105: Installation Accessories for B-, H-, J-, and L-Frame Circuit Breakers Description Front Panel Escutcheon for Toggle Breakers Front Panel Escutcheon for Rotary Handle, Motor Operator, or extended escutcheon Phase Barriers (set of 6) Handle Rubber Boot[14] Sealing Accessories (for front cover screws) DIN rail mounting kit (requires 15 mm depth on a 35 mm DIN rail)[14] DIN rail adapter Handle Extensions (set of 5) Rear Insulation Kit (2P) Rear Insulation Kit (3P) Rear Insulation Kit (4P) Terminal Extensions-Spreaders (3P) Terminal Extensions-Spreaders (4P) 5 N-m Torque Limiting Bit, Set of 6 5 N-m Torque Limiting Bit, Set of 8 9 N-m Torque Limiting Bit, Set of 6 9 N-m Torque Limiting Bit, Set of 8 LV426921 LV426922 LV426923 LV426940 LV426941 LV426992 LV426993 LV426990 LV426991 S29315 S29317 S29329 S29319 S29375 S29305 S29375 Standard Standard L-Frame 32556 S32558 32570 S32560 S29375 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — S432553 S29313 — E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I 7-57 7 Not available on HD and HG 2P modules. [9] [10] Not available in M frame or HD and HG 2P modules. [11] Not available on M-frame. [12] Not available on I-Line. [13] Not available for M, P or P frame drawout. Only available on P frame electronic. [14] Not available in HD and HG 2P modules. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 232

Cat. No. S33718 S33929 S33717 S33857 S33932 S33933 S33934 S33935 S33997 S46998 S46996 L-Frame Factory- Installed Termination No. S S — — — — Field-Installable Cat. No. S32477 S32478 S432475 S432476 S32562 S32563 2- x 2- x 2- x 2- x PowerPact™ Circuit Breaker Accessories Locks, Installation Accessories, and Rear Connections Class 612 / Refer to Catalog 0612CT0101 schneider-electric.us Table 7.106: Installation Accessories for M-, P-, and R-Frame Circuit Breakers Field-Installable Description Frame M-, P-Frame R-Frame M-, P-Frame P-Frame P-Frame R-Frame M-, P-Frame M-, P-Frame Field- Installable Cat. No. — S37437 2x S37438 S37439 [16] S37440 — Poles 3 4 3 3 4 Door Escutcheon Terminal Covers Terminal Covers Door Escutcheon Replacement Handle Accessory Cover Toggle Handle Drawout Short lug cover 3P Short lug cover 4P Long lug cover 3P Long lug cover 4P Standard Standard Short Long J-Frame Factory- Installed Termination No. S S — — — — H-Frame Factory- Installed Termination No. S S — — — — Field- Installable Cat. No. — S37432 2x S37433 S37434 S37436 — Poles 2 3 2 or 3 3 — Table 7.107: Rear Connections Device Description Mixed Rear Connection Kit [15] Consisting of: Short rear connections (set of 2) Long rear connections (set of 2) Short terminal cover (3P) Short terminal cover (4P) Rear Connection Poles 2 3 2 or 3 3 4 7 I I I C R C U I T B R E A K E R S M N A T U R E A N D M O L D E D C A S E [15] Kit contains 4 short rear connections, 2 long rear connections (4 long rear connections for 4P), hardware, and 2 terminal covers.. [16] 7-58 For use with 3P circuit breakers only. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 233

Mechanical Lugs Class 612 / Refer to Catalog 0612CT0101 PowerPact™ Circuit Breaker Accessories schneider-electric.us Table 7.108: Mechanical Lug Kits for B-Frame Circuit Breakers [17] Mechanical Lugs Description Al Lugs for Use with Al or Cu Wire Cu Lugs for Use with Cu Wire Only EverLink Lug EverLink Lug with Control Wire Terminal Circuit Breaker Application Standard Ampere Rating Optional BD BG BJ BD BG BJ BD BG BJ BD BG BJ Ampere Rating 15-125 A 15-125 A 15-125 A 15-125 A BD BG BJ (1P) BD BG BJ (2P) BD BG BJ (3P) BD BG BJ (4P) 15 - 125 A 15 - 125 A 15 - 125 A 15 - 125 A 15 - 125 A 15 - 125 A 15 - 125 A BD BG BJ (2P) BD BG BJ (3P) BD BG BJ (4P) Number of Wires Per Lug and Wire Range (1) 14-2/0 AWG Al or Cu (1) 14-2/0 AWG Al or Cu (1) 14-1/0 AWG Cu (1) 14-1/0 AWG Cu (1) 14-3/0 AWG Cu (1) 14-3/0 AWG Cu (1) 14-3/0 AWG Cu (1) 14-3/0 AWG Cu (1) 14-3/0 AWG Cu (1) 14-3/0 AWG Cu (1) 14-3/0 AWG Cu Factory-Installed Cat. Suffix LH LH LC LC — — — — LU, LV, or LW [18] LU, LV, or LW [18] LU, LV, or LW [18] Table 7.109: Mechanical Lug Kits for H- and J-Frame Circuit Breakers [17] Description Circuit Breaker Application Ampere Rating Optional Standard Ampere Rating Al Lugs for Use with Al or Cu Wire Cu Lugs for Use with Cu Wire Only HD, HG, HJ, HL JD, JG, JJ, JL JD, JG, JJ, JL 15–150 A 150–175 A 200–250 A Control Wire Terminal for H-frame lug kit Control Wire Terminal for J-frame lug kit JD,JG,JJ,JL HD,HG,HJ,HL JD,JG,JJ,JL 150–175 A 15–150 A 150–250 A Number of Wires Per Lug and Wire Range (1) 14–3/0 AWG Al or Cu (1) 4-4/0 AWG Al or Cu (1) 3/0–350 kcmil Al or Cu (1) 14–2/0 AWG Cu (1) 1/0–300 kcmil Cu Field- Installable Cat. No. LV426988 LV426989 LV426986 LV426987 LV426972 — — — LV426973 LV426974 LV426975 Qty Per Kit 2 3 2 3 1 — — — 1 1 1 Kit Cat. No. AL150HD AL175JD AL250JD CU150HD CU250JD S37423 S37424 Qty Per Kit 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 Table 7.110: Mechanical Lug Kits for L-Frame Circuit Breakers [19] Descrip- tion Al Lugs for Use with Al or Cu Wire Cu Lugs for Use with Cu Wire Only Circuit Breaker Application Ampere Rating 250 400/600 400/600 250 400/600 400/600 Poles 3 4 3 4 3 3 4 3 4 3 Unit Mount X X X X X X X X X X I-Line X — — — X X — — — X Number of Wires Per Lug and Wire Range (1) 2 AWG–500 kcmil Al (1) 2 AWG–600 kcmil Cu (2) 2/0 AWG–500 kcmil Al or Cu (2) 3/0 AWG–500 kcmil Al or Cu (1) 2 AWG–600 kcmil Cu (2) 2/0 AWG–500 kcmil Cu (2) 3/0 AWG–500 kcmil Cu Kit Cat. No. AL400L61K3 AL400L61K4 AL600LS52K3 AL600LS52K4 AL600LF52K3 CU400L61K3 CU400L61K4 CU600LS52K3 CU600LS52K4 CU600LF52K3 J-Frame Lug L-Frame Lug Table 7.111: Mechanical Lug Kits for M-, P- and R-Frame Circuit Breakers [20] Descrip- tion Wires per Lug and Wire Range Circuit Breaker Application Cat. No. Standard Rating Optional Rating M- and P-Frame Lugs (800 A and below) P-Frame Lugs (Above 800 A) M-Frame, P-Frame P-Frame PG,PJ,PL R-Frame M-Frame, P-Frame P-Frame Al Lugs for AL or Cu Wire Cu Lugs for Cu Wire Only[24] — 800 A 1200 A MG, MJ, PG, PJ, PK, PL MG, MJ, PG, PJ, PK, PL — — MG, MJ, PG, PJ, PK, PL 1200 A — — 1200 A 2500 A — PG, PJ, PK, PL PG, PJ, PK, PL PG, PJ, PK, PL I-Line Unit Mount PJ MG, MJ, PG, 800 A PJ, PK, PL 1200 A MG, MJ, PG, PJ, PK, PL PG, PJ, PK, 1200 A PL I-Line 800 A 800 A 800 A 800 A 800 A 800– 1200 A 1200 A — — 100– 150 A — 800– 1200 A 800– 1200 A — (3) 3/0 AWG-500 kcmil (4) 3/0 AWG-500 kcmil (2) 3/0 AWG-600 kcmil (2) 3/0 AWG-750 kcmil 750 kcmil: compact AL only (4) 3/0 AWG-500 kcmil (3) 350-600 kcmil (3) 3/0 AWG-750 kcmil 750 kcmil: compact AL only (4) 3/0 AWG-600 kcmil (1) 3/0 AWG-750 kcmil (1) 1-1/0 AWG (3) 3/0 AWG-500 kcmil (4) 3/0 AWG-500 kcmil (4) 3/0 AWG-500 kcmil (4) 3/0 AWG-500 kcmil AL800M23K AL800M23K4 AL1200P24K [21] AL800P6K [21] AL800P6K4 [21] AL800P7K [21] AL800P7K4 [21] AL1200P25K [22] AL1200P25K4 [22] AL1200P6KU [22] AL1200P6KU4 [22] AL1200P7KU [22] AL1200P7KU4 [22] AL1200R53K AL2500RK [23] CU250P1K [25] CU800M23K CU800M23K4 CU1200P24K [21] CU1200P25K [22] CU1200P25K4 CU1200R53K R-Frame 1200 A Qty Per Kit 3 4 3 4 3 3 4 3 4 3 Lugs Per Kit 3 4 1 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 1 2 3 3 4 1 3 4 1 E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I For terminal nuts/bus bar connections see page 7-62. LU = ON end only, LV = OFF end only, LW = BOTH ends Lug kits for Legacy L-frame circuit breakers can be found in Supplemental Digest Section 11 (i.e. LA, LH circuit breakers). For lug with a tapped hole for control wire, add a “T” before the “K” in the catalog number (for example, AL800P6TK). [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] Does not fit onto ON end of unit-mount P-frame circuit breakers. [22] [23] All unit-mount R-frame circuit breakers require terminal pads for mounting lugs of any type. See page 7-62. [24] Not available with tapped hole for control wire. [25] For unit-mount circuit breaker only. This lug can only be used on low amp PJ frame breakers where the Instantaneous setting must not be turned OFF. The cables must be laced with rope per lug instructions. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7-59 7 11/10/2017


page 234

PowerPact™ Circuit Breaker Accessories Compression Lugs and Power Distribution Connectors (PDC) Class 612 / Refer to Catalog 0612CT0101 schneider-electric.us Compression Lugs P-Frame Compression Lug Kit R-Frame Compression Lug Kit J-Frame Compression Lug Circuit Breaker Table 7.112: Compression Lug Kits for PowerPact™ Circuit Breakers Description Compression Lug Kits for B-Frame Circuit Breakers Aluminum Compression Lug Kits Copper Compression Lug Kits Compression Lug Kits for H-Frame and J-Frame Circuit Breakers 8-1/0 AWG Al or Cu 8-1/0 AWG Al or Cu 6-1/0 AWG Cu 6-1/0 AWG Cu 125 A 125 A 125 A 125 A System Range Ampere Rating B-frame B-frame Type Aluminum Compression Lug Kits Copper Compression Lug Kits H-frame J-frame H-frame J-frame Compression Lug Kits for L-Frame Circuit Breakers 60 A 150 A 150 A 250 A 60 A 150 A 150 A 250 A 6–2 AWG Al or Cu 1/0–4/0 AWG Al or Cu 1–3/0 AWG Al or Cu 3/0–350 kcmil Al or Cu 6–1/0 AWG Cu 4–2/0 AWG Cu 6–1/0 AWG Cu 2/0–300 kcmil Cu 250 A 400 A 250 A 600 A 400 A 250 A 400 A 250 A 600 A 400 A 250 A 400 A 250 A 600 A 250 A 400 A 250 A 600 A 4-300 kcmil Al/Cu 4-300 kcmil Al/Cu 2/0-500 kcmil Al/Cu 2/0-500 kcmil Al/Cu 500-750 kcmil Al 500 kcmil Cu 4-300 kcmil Al/Cu 4-300 kcmil Al/Cu 2/0-500 kcmil Al/Cu 2/0-500 kcmil Al/Cu 500-750 kcmil Al 500 kcmil Cu 2/0-300 kcmil Cu 2/0-300 kcmil Cu 250-500 kcmil Cu 250-500 kcmil Cu 2/0-300 kcmil Cu 2/0-300 kcmil Cu 250-500 kcmil Cu 250-500 kcmil Cu Aluminum Compression Lug Kits L-frame Copper Compression Lug Kits L-frame Compression Lug Kits for M-Frame, P-Frame, and R-Frame Circuit Breakers M-, P-frame R-frame[27] M-, P-frame R-frame 250 A 300 A 400 A 400 A 600 A 800 A 1200 A 1200 A 1200 A 2000 A 2000 A 2500 A 400 A 600 A 800 A 1200 A 1200 A 2/0-300 kcmil 4/0-500 kcmil 2/0-300 kcmil 500-750 kcmil 4/0-500 kcmil 500-750 kcmil 2/0-300 kcmil 4/0-500 kcmil 500-750 kcmil 2/0-300 kcmil 4/0-500 kcmil 500-750 kcmil 4/0-500 kcmil 4/0-500 kcmil 500-750 kcmil 4/0-500 kcmil 500-750 kcmil Aluminum Compression Lug Kits Copper Compression Lug Kits 7 Mounting Type Dimension A (in) Max. Lugs per Terminal Unit Unit/I-line [26] Unit/I-line [26] Unit/I-line [26] Unit/I-line [26] I-line [26] Unit [26] Unit [26] I-Line [26] 1.3 1.3 1.4 1.4 1.2 2.5 1.2 2.5 1.0 1.2 0.7 1.1 1.2 2.5 1.2 2.5 1.2 2.5 3.7 3.9 4.3 3.7 3.9 4.3 3.8 4.0 4.4 —[27] —[27] —[27] 3.3 3.3 3.6 3.5 3.8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 4 4 4 8 8 8 [28] 1 2 2 4 4 Cat. No. LV426988 LV426989 LV426986 LV426987 YA060HD YA150HD YA150JD YA250J35 CYA060HD CYA150HD CYA150JD CYA250J3 YA400L31K3 YA600L32K3 YA400L51K3 YA600L52K3 YA400L71K3 YA400L31K4 YA600L32K4 YA400L51K4 YA600L52K4 YA400L71K4 CYA400L31K3 CYA600L32K3 CYA400L51K3 CYA600L52K3 CYA400L31K4 CYA600L32K4 CYA400L51K4 CYA600L52K4 YA250P3 YA300P5 YA400P3 YA400P7 YA600P5 YA800P7 YA1200R3 YA1200R5 YA1200R7 YA2000R3 YA2000R5 YA2500R7 CYA400P5 CYA600P5 CYA800P7 CYA1200R5 CYA1200R7 Qty. Per Kit 2 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 6 3 6 3 4 8 4 8 4 3 6 3 6 4 8 4 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I I C R C U I T B R E A K E R S M N A T U R E A N D M O L D E D C A S E [26] Not for use on I-Line™ circuit breakers unless wire bending space is adequate. [27] All unit-mount R-frame circuit breakers require terminal pads for mounting lugs of any type. See page 7-62. [28] 7-60 9 lugs for 3000 A circuit breakers © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 235

schneider-electric.us Compression Lugs and Power Distribution Connectors (PDC) Class 612 / Refer to Catalog 0612CT0101 PowerPact™ Circuit Breaker Accessories Power Distribution Connectors Table 7.113: Power Distribution Connectors for B-Frame, H-Frame, J-Frame and L- Frame Circuit Breakers [29] Use with Circuit Breaker Type (Wires Per Terminal) Dimension A Cat. No. PDC6HD6 PDC6JD4 PDC3HD2 PDC3JD20 Ampere Rating 125 A 125 A 15–150 A 15–150 A 150–250 A 150–250 A 150–600 A 150–600 A BD, BG, BJ HD, HG, HJ, HL [30] JD, JG, JJ, JL [30] LD, LG, LJ, LL [31] Wire Range (3) 14 - 2 AWG (6) 14 - 6 AWG (6) 14–6 AWG Cu (3) 14–2 AWG Cu (6) 14–4 AWG Cu (2) 14–1 AWG and (1) 3–2/0 AWG Cu (3) 14–1 AWG and (2) 3–2/0 AWG (12) 14–4 AWG (in.) 1.2 1 1.0 1.2 1.0 1.5 1.28 1.31 Qty. Per Kit 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 PDC3BD2 PDC6BD6 PDC6HD6 PDC3HD2 PDC6JD4 PDC3JD20 PDC5DG20L3 PDC12DG4L3 PDC12P4 PDC6P20 Crimp lugs or PDC connectors extension “A” past end of circuit breaker Table 7.114: Power Distribution Connectors for M-Frame and P-Frame Circuit Breakers [29] Use for multiple load connections on one circuit breaker in place of standard distribution block to save space and time. • Use on load end of circuit breaker only • Use in UL508 Industrial Control applications only. • Use in UL1995/CSA C22.2 No. 236 heating and cooling equipment. • For Cu wire only. Ampere Rating (Wires Per Terminal) Wire Range 250–1200 A (6) 12–2/0 AWG Cu (6) 12–2/0 AWG Cu 250–1200 A (12) 10–4 AWG Cu Cat. No. PDC6P20 PDC6P204 PDC12P4 Qty Per Kit 3 4 3 PDC12P44 4 [29] Not for use with I-Line™ circuit breakers. [30] Special Purpose—Not for General Use. Use on ON end of the circuit breaker only when ON end is used as Load end. Use on OFF end of the circuit breaker only when OFF end is used as Load end. [31] Kit includes long terminal shield and cover, which adds 1.65 inches to standard lug with short terminal shield. E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7-61 7 “A” See TableMolded Casew/MechanicalLugs“A” See Table11/10/2017


page 236

PowerPact™ Circuit Breaker Accessories Terminal Nuts, Terminal Pads, Terminal Shields and Accessories Class 612 / Refer to Catalog 0612CT0101 schneider-electric.us Terminal Accessories Table 7.115: Terminal Nuts for Bus Bar Connection of B-, H- and J-Frame Circuit Breakers Description B-Frame Terminal Nut Insert-Metric B-Frame Terminal Nut Insert-Metric H-Frame Terminal Nut Insert–English H-Frame Terminal Nut Insert–English H-Frame Terminal Nut Insert–Metric J-Frame Terminal Nut Insert–English J-Frame Terminal Nut Insert–English J-Frame Terminal Nut Insert–Metric Control Wire Terminal for H-Frame Terminal Nut Control Wire Terminal for J-Frame Terminal Nut BD/BG/BJ (2P) BD/BG/BJ (3P) HD/HG/HJ/HL HD/HG/HJ/HL HD/HG/HJ/HL JD/JG/JJ/JL JD/JG/JJ/JL JD/JG/JJ/JL HD/HG/HJ/HL JD/JG/JJ/JL Cat. No. LV426962 LV426963 S37425 S37444 S37426 S37427 S37445 S37428 S37429 S37430 Kit 2 3 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 Tap M6 M6 1/4-20 1/4-20 1/4-20 1/4-20 Frame M8 M6 Qty Per Table 7.116: Bus Bar Connections Hardware for L-, M-, and P-Frame Circuit Breakers Frame L-Frame M- and P-Frame Description Set of 4 terminal screws and washers for one side Bus Connector Kit for one pole, one end Term. No. Poles 4 1 F Cat. No. S36967 S33928 H-Frame Lug with Terminal Nut Insert Table 7.117: Terminal Pad Kits for R-Frame Circuit Breakers Terminal Nut Insert R-Frame Circuit Breaker Terminal Pad Kit Usage Lugs per Phase 9 Field-Installable Kits 3P Kit (One End Only) Cat. No. RL3TB 4P Kit (One End Only) Cat. No. RL3TB4 8 RLTB RLTB4 RLTB Terminal Pad Kit H-Frame Short Lug Shield J-Frame Short Lug Shield Phase barrier or terminal shield extension past end of circuit breaker 3000 A, 100% Rated 3000 A, Standard (80% Rated) 2500 A, 100% Rated 2500 A, Standard (80% Rated) All Other R-Frame Circuit Breakers For cable connection to RLTB, use AL2500RK lug. See page 7-60. Required for cable or bus Required for cable or bus Required for cable or bus Required for cable, optional for bus Required for cable, optional for bus Table 7.118: Terminal Shields and Phase Barriers Used With H- and J-Frame Mechanical Lugs Short Lug Shield[32] B-, H- and J- Frame Power Distribution Connectors and Compression Lugs B-Frame Long Lug Shield H-Frame Long Lug Shield J-Frame Long Lug Shield L-Frame M-, P-Frame R-Frame Description Frame H-Frame 60 A H-Frame 150 A J-Frame Max. Wire Size 3 AWG 3/0 AWG 350 kcmil Compatible with: Dimension B (in.) 0.50 0.50 0.24 Cat. No. S37446 S37447 S37448 PDC PDC3BD2 Compression Lugs Copper LV426986 Aluminum LV426988 PDC6BD6 LV426989 LV426987 1.9 LV426911 LV426912 (2P) LV426913 (3P) (4P) PDC6HD6 YA060HD PDC3HD2 PDC6JD4 PDC3JD2 YA150HD YA150JD [33] 3P Short Terminal Shield 3P Medium Terminal Shield 3P Long Terminal Shield 4P Medium Terminal Shield 4P Long Terminal Shield Phase Barriers A060HD CY- CY- A150HD CYA150JD CYA250J3 2.24 1.68 S37449 S37450 LTSS3P LTSM3P LTSL3P LTSM4P LTSL4P S33646 S33998 Qty Per Kit 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 Table 7.119: Miscellaneous H-, J-, and L-Frame Circuit Breaker Accessories Accessory Field-Installable Description Bag of screws for accessory cover, L-frame 1 spare toggle extension, L-frame Set of 10 identification labels Cat. No. S432552 32595 LV429226 Spare Parts R-Frame Phase Barrier [32] Short lug shields provide IP20 protection for mechanical lugs and are compatible with control wire terminals. [33] 7-62 J-frame terminal shield is not compatible with the YA250J35 compression terminal. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Molded Casew/MechanicalLugs“B” See Table“B” See Table11/10/2017


page 237

Plug-In and Drawout Mountings Class 611, 612 / Refer to Catalog 0611CT1001,0612CT0101 PowerPact™ Circuit Breaker Accessories schneider-electric.us Mountings Table 7.120: Plug-In and Drawout Mountings for H- and J-Frame Circuit Breakers (3P or 2P in a 3P module) Description Complete Factory- Assembled Circuit Breakers Plug-in base shipped with circuit breaker Drawout cradle shipped with circuit breaker H- and J-Frame Plug-In Mounting H- and J-Frame Drawout Mounting Special Order Options for Plug-In and Drawout Circuit Breakers Accessories for Plug-In and Drawout Plug-In Base Drawout Cradle Circuit breaker Only Plug-in base kit Circuit breaker only Plug-in base kit Cradle side plates (fixed part of chassis) Circuit breaker side plates (moving part of chassis) H-Frame Shutter Kit (set of two) J-Frame Shutter Kit (set of two) Secondary Disconnect Blocks Fixed part 9-wire connector (mounted on base) Moving part 9-wire connector (mounted on circuit breaker) Support for 2-moving connectors Extended escutcheon with extended toggle handle Two position indicating switches (connected/ disconnected) H-Frame Short Terminal Cover (3P J-Frame Short Terminal Cover (3P) Factory Installed Cat. No. N D HJ00 HJ00 Field- Installable Cat. No. S29278 S29278 S29282 S29283 S37442 S37443 S29273 S29274 S29275 S29284 S29287 S37436 S37440 Table 7.121: Plug-In and Drawout Mountings for L-Frame Circuit Breakers Description Poles Kit (stationary and moving parts) Stationary Part Moving Part Plug-in base Fixed part of chassis Circuit breaker only Moving part of chassis Short terminal covers 3 4 3 4 3 4 L-Frame Plug-In Mounting L-Frame Drawout Mounting Plug-in Mounting Field- Installed Cat. No. Factory- Installed Cat. No. Drawout Mounting Field- Installable Cat. No. Factory- Installed Cat. No. N N D D S32514 S32515 HJ00 HJ00 2x S32562 2x S32563 S32514 S32515 S32532 S32533 2x S32562 2x S32563 Table 7.122: Plug-In and Drawout Accessories for L-Frame Circuit Breakers L-Frame Disconnecting Blocks L-Frame Locking Device Chassis Accessories Secondary Disconnecting Blocks Shutters Description Fixed Part Moving Part Fixed + Moving 9-wire connector 9-wire connector Support for 3 moving connectors 9-wire manual auxiliary connector Two shutters for plug-in base Extended escutcheon for toggle Locking device (key lock is not included) Two position indicating switches (connected/disconnected) Field- Installable Cat. No. S29273 S32523 S32525 S29272 32521 S32534 S29286 29287 Table 7.123: Termination Options Termination Letter N = Plug-in D = Drawout Termination No. L G L 3 6 4 0 0 U 3 1 X For factory-installed termination, place termination letter in the third block of the circuit breaker catalog number. P-Frame Drawout Cradle Connections [34] Needs 2 kits per cradle. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Table 7.124: Drawout Cradle and Accessories for P-Frame Circuit Breakers Description Drawout Cradle Cradle Connectors Cradle Accessories Front Connected Flat (FCF) Rear Connected T Horizontal/Vertical (RCTH/RCTV) Modbus™ cradle communication module Safety shutters Secondary disconnects terminal shield Cradle position switch 1a/1b Form C— Connected/test/disconnected Low level cradle position switch 1a/1b Form C—Connected/test/disconnected Cell keying kit Disconnected position key locking—provision for Kirk or Federal Pioneer Lock Door interlock kit Racking interior kit Door escutcheon (for replacement only, included with circuit breaker) Transparent cover Push-in terminal kit (3 wires) Push-in terminal kit (6 wires) Finger cluster Cluster grease (12 oz. tube) Cat. No. Product Selector SFCF12 [34] SRCTV12 [34] S33852 S48933 S33763 S33170 S33171 S33767 S33772 S33786 S33788 S33857 S33859 S33098 S33099 S33166 S48899 E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I 7-63 7 11/10/2017


page 238

PowerPact™ Circuit Breaker Accessories Plug-In and Drawout Mountings Class 611, 612 / Refer to Catalog 0611CT1001,0612CT0101 schneider-electric.us 7 I I I C R C U I T B R E A K E R S M N A T U R E A N D M O L D E D C A S E 7-64 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 239

PowerPact H-, J-, and L-Frame Trip Units Class 611 / Refer to Catalog 0611CT1001 Micrologic™ Electronic Trip Units schneider-electric.us PowerPact H-, J-, and L-Frame Micrologic Trip Units Micrologic Standard Trip Unit Micrologic Ammeter and Energy Trip Unit Micrologic Trip Units [1] Micrologic Standard 3.2/3.3 Trip Units PowerPact™ H-, J-, and L-frame molded case circuit breakers may be specified with any of the following Micrologic Electronic Trip Units. • True RMS sensing • LI, LSI trip configurations • Field-interchangeable trip units • LED long-time pickup and trip indication • Test kits available • Thermal imaging Micrologic Ammeter 5.2A/5.3A/6.2A/6.3A Trip Units Includes all features listed for Micrologic standard trip unit, as well as: • Advanced user interface • Neutral protection • Incremental fine tuning of settings • Up to 12 alarms • Digital ammeter—phase and neutral (4-pole only) • Phase loading bar graph • Maintenance indicators including contact wear, number of operations, operating hours, • Cause of trip information for troubleshooting assistance • LCD Display • Zone-selective interlocking (ZSI) (short-time & ground-fault) • Optional Modbus™ communications—PowerLogic™ compatible Micrologic Energy 5.2E/5.3E/6.2E/6.3E Trip Units Includes all features listed for Micrologic ammeter trip unit, as well as: • Ground-fault trip with programmable ground fault alarm (available on 6.2E/6.3E only) • Power and energy measurement • Power quality measurements • Current demand and power demand measurements Table 7.125: Micrologic Trip Unit Settings for H- and J-Frame and load profiles Model Trip Function Trip Unit Standard Ammeter Energy LI LSI LSI LSIG LSI LSIG 3.2 3.2S 5.2A 6.2A 5.2E 6.2E Ampere Setting 15-20-25-30-35-40-45-50-60 35-40-45-50-60-70-80-90-100 50-60-70-80-90-100-110-125-150 70-80-100-125-150-175-200-225-250 15-20-25-30-35-40-45-50-60 35-40-45-50-60-70-80-90-100 50-60-70-80-90-100-110-125-150 70-80-100-125-150-175-200-225-250 15–60 35–100 50–150 70–250 15–60 35–100 50–150 70–250 15–60 35–100 50–150 70–250 15–60 35–100 50–150 70–250 Table 7.126: Micrologic Trip Unit Settings for L-Frame Model Trip Function Trip Unit Standard Ammeter Energy LI LSI LSI LSIG LSI LSIG 3.3 3.3S 5.3A 6.3A 5.3E 6.3E Ampere Setting 70-80-100-125-150-175-200-225-250 125-150-175-200-225-250-300-350-400 200-225-250-300-350-400-450-500-600 70-80-100-125-150-175-200-225-250 125-150-175-200-225-250-300-350-400 200-225-250-300-350-400-450-500-600 125–400 200–600 125–400 200–600 125–400 200–600 125–400 200–600 E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I [1] See Supplemental Digest Section 3 for circuit breakers with field-interchangeable trip units. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7-65 7 11/10/2017


page 240

Micrologic™ Electronic Trip Units PowerPact H-, J-, and L-Frame Trip Units Class 611 / Refer to Catalog 0611CT1001 Table 7.127: Micrologic Trip Units [2] for PowerPact H-, J-, and L-Frame Circuit Breakers x– Standard Feature o – Available Option schneider-electric.us Standard Ammeter 3.2/3/3 3.2S/3.3S 5.2A/5.3A 6.2A/6.3A 5.2E/5.3E 6.2E/6.3E Energy x x x x x x x x o x x x x x x x x o x x x x x x x x x x x o x o x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x o x o x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x o x o x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x o x o x x x x x x x Features LI LSI [3] LSIG / Ground-Fault Trip[4] Ground-Fault Alarm/Trip[4] Current Setting Directly in Amperes True RMS Sensing UL Listed Thermal Imaging LED for Long-time Pickup LED for Trip Indication LED for Green “Ready” Up to 12 Alarms Used Together Digital Ammeter Zone-selective Interlocking [5] Communications LCD Display Front Display Module FDM121 Advanced User Interface Neutral Protection[4] Contact Wear Indication [6] Incremental Fine Tuning of Settings Load Profile [6],[7] Power Measurement Power Quality Measurements 7 I I I C R C U I T B R E A K E R S M N A T U R E A N D M O L D E D C A S E DC not available with electronic trip units. The LSI with 3.2S/3.3S trip units have fixed short time and long time delays. Requires neutral current transformer on the three-phase four-wire loads. ZSI for H/J frames in only OUT. for L-frame ZSI is In and OUT. Indication available using the communication system only. % of hours in 4 current ranges: 0–49%, 50–79%, 80–89%, and >90% In. [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] 7-66 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 241

PowerPact P- and R-Frame Trip Units Class 612 / Refer to Catalog 0612CT0101 Micrologic™ Electronic Trip Units schneider-electric.us PowerPact P- and R-Frame Micrologic Trip Units Standard Trip Unit Ammeter Trip Unit Power Trip Unit Harmonic Trip Unit Adjustable Rating Plug PowerPact P- and R-Frame Micrologic Trip Units Micrologic (Standard) 3.0 and 5.0 Trip Units PowerPact™ P- and R-frame molded case circuit breakers may be specified with any of the following Micrologic Electronic Trip Units. • True RMS sensing • LI, LSI trip configurations • Field-interchangeable long-time rating plugs • LED long-time pickup indication • Test kits available • Thermal imaging Micrologic (Ammeter) 3.0A, 5.0A and 6.0A Trip Units Includes all features listed for Micrologic standard trip unit, as well as: • LSIG trip configurations • Digital ammeter—phase and neutral (4-pole only) • Phase loading bar graph • LED trip indication • Zone-selective interlocking (ZSI) (short-time & ground-fault) • Optional Modbus™ communications—PowerLogic™ compatible Micrologic (Power) 5.0P and 6.0P Trip Units Power measurement and advanced protection features includes all features listed for Micrologic ammeter trip unit, as well as: • LSI trip configuration with programmable ground fault alarm • LSIG (Ground-fault trip) with programmable ground fault alarm • Incremental “fine tuning” of L, S, I, and G pickup and delay settings • LCD dot matrix display and LED trip indication • Advanced user interface • Advanced protection IDMTL—selectable long-time delay bands • Neutral protection • Power measurement • Contact wear indication • Modbus communications—PowerLogic compatible • Local and remote settings Micrologic (Harmonic) 5.0H and 6.0H Trip Units Power quality measurement and advanced protection features. Includes all features listed for the Micrologic power trip unit, as well as: • Enhanced power measurements functions • Power quality measurements Adjustable Rating Plugs for PowerPact™ P-Frame and R-Frame and Masterpact™ NT and NW Circuit Breakers—Selection To provide maximum design flexibility, system protection, and field upgradeability, each Micrologic™ trip unit is equipped with an interchangeable long-time rating plug. Each trip unit requires an adjustable rating plug to determine the long-time pickup range of the circuit breaker. These plugs are factory installed on new trip units, or can be ordered separately for field-installable upgrades. Adjustable rating plugs are offered in eight different ranges of long-time pickup adjustments. The following chart show the ranges of adjustments. Each adjustment times the sensor rating (lr x In) of the circuit breaker sets the long-time pickup value of the circuit breaker. E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7-67 7 11/10/2017


page 242

Micrologic™ Electronic Trip Units PowerPact P- and R-Frame Trip Units Class 612 / Refer to Catalog 0612CT0101 schneider-electric.us Table 7.128: Micrologic Trip Unit and Options Model Protection Additional Features 2.0 (IEC only) 3.0 (UL/ANSI only) 5.0 2.0A (IEC only) 3.0A (UL/ANSI only) 5.0A 6.0A 5.0P 6.0P 5.0H 6.0H LSO LI LSI LSO LI LSI LSIG LSI LSIG LSI LSIG None Ammeter Field-Installable Cat. No.[8] S132R S131A S133A S142R [9] S141A [9] S143A [9] S144A [9] Metering, Adv. Protection Metering, Adv. Protection & Harmonic Analysis S163A [9][10] S164A [9][10] S173A [9][10] S174A [9][10] Table 7.129: Micrologic Trip Units x– Standard Feature o – Available Option Standard 3.0 5.0 x x x x x x x x x x x x Features LI LSI (Instantaneous can be turned off) LSIG / Ground-Fault Trip[11] Ground-Fault Alarm (No Trip)[11][12] Ground-Fault Alarm and Trip[11][12] Adjustable Rating Plugs True RMS Sensing UL Listed Thermal Imaging Phase Loading Bar Graph LED for Long-time Pickup LED for Trip Indication Digital Ammeter Zone-selective Interlocking Communications LCD Dot Matrix Display Advanced User Interface Protective Relay Functions Neutral Protection Contact Wear Indication Incremental Fine Tuning of Settings Selectable Long-time Delay Bands Power Measurement Power Quality Measurements Waveform Capture Ammeter Power 3.0A 5.0A 6.0A 5.0P 6.0P x x x x x x x x x x o x x x x x x x x x x o x x x x x x x x x x x o x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Harmonic 5.0H 6.0H x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Table 7.130: Long-Time Pickup Settings Rating Plug A B C D E F G H .40 .40 .42 .40 .60 .84 .66 .48 .45 .44 .50 .48 .70 .86 .68 .50 .50 .50 .53 .64 .75 .88 .70 .52 Long-time Pickup Settings .70 .60 .75 .56 .75 .58 .90 .70 .80 .90 .94 .90 .76 .72 .54 .58 .63 .63 .67 .80 .85 .92 .74 .56 Table 7.131: Special Options Description Factory-Installed Suffix Ship circuit breaker in closed position CT Characterization (Calibrated trip system) Alternate Maintenenace Setting (AMS) kit (use with 5.0/6.0 A, P or H and 5.3/6.3 A or E Micrologic trip units) Energy Reduction Maintenenace Setting (ERMS) kit (use with 5.0/6.0 P or H Micrologic trip units) YK Q — — 7 .80 .88 .83 .93 .93 .96 .78 .60 .90 .95 .95 .95 .95 .98 .80 .62 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 .82 .64 Field-Installable Cat. No. N/A N/A 84957 84956 I I I C R C U I T B R E A K E R S M N A T U R E A N D M O L D E D C A S E [8] The standard rating plug supplied with a trip unit will be the “A” rating plug. To specify an alternative adjustable rating plug, please add the letter designation to the end of the catalog number. Please refer to page 7-69for a complete listing of adjustable settings available with each plug. (Example: S143B would specify a “B” rating plug instead of the standard "A" plug.) Use suffix “N” if no rating plug is required, deduct. [9] When replacing a standard trip unit with Type A (Ammeter), P (Power metering) or H (Harmonic analysis) trip unit, order the 12-pin connector kit S33101 for the Masterpact NW and NT and the PowerPact P-frame drawout circuit breakers or kit S33100 for PowerPact P-frame and R-frame unit-mount and I-Line circuit breakers. See page 7-69. [10] Requires Circuit Breaker Communications Module. [11] Requires neutral current transformer in 3Ø4W systems. [12] Alarm history is available through the trip unit display and communications. Local indication of an alarm requires an M2C or M6C Programmable Contact Module. 7-68 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 243

Micrologic™ Trip Unit Accessories Class 612, 612 / Refer to Catalogs 0611CT1001 and 0612CT0101 Micrologic™ Electronic Trip Units schneider-electric.us Trip Unit Accessories Adjustable rating plug "A" is installed as standard on all Micrologic trip unit orders. However, an alternative selection may be specified from the "Assembled" table below, and factory installed with your trip unit order at no additional charge. To order, please attach the appropriate catalog suffix to the end of the trip unit Cat. No. (after specifying trip unit options). Adjustable rating plugs may also be purchased as field-installable components from the table below. Trip Unit Seal Table 7.134: Trip Unit Accessories Full Function Test Kit Table 7.132: Rating Plugs Rating Plug [13] A B C D E F G H Factory Installed Cat. Suffix A (standard) B C D E F G H Sensor Plug Field-Installable Cat. No. S48818 S48819 S48820 S48836 S48837 S48838 S48839 S48840 Table 7.133: Neutral Current Transformers For Use with Circuit Breaker H-Frame J-Frame L-Frame P-Frame R-Frame All Cat. No. S429521 S430562 S430563 S432575 S33575 [14] S33576 [14] S48916 [14] S34036 [14] S48896 [14] S48182 [14] NCTWIRING Sensor 60–100 150 250 250 400–600 400–1600 250 400–1600 2000 3000 All Device Pocket Tester UTA Tester Spare UTA Tester Bluetooth/Modbus for UTA Tester Spare Power Supply for UTA Tester 110–120 Vac Micrologic Cord for UTA Tester Micrologic 5/6 Cover, Transparent Micrologic 2/3 Cover, Transparent Micrologic 5/6 Cover, Transparent Micrologic 2/3 Cover, Transparent LCD Display for Micrologic 5 LCD Display for Micrologic 6 Hand-held Test Kit Primary Injection Test Adaptor Full-function Adapter Kit Full-function Test Kit Seven-pin Test Cable (for connection between test kit and trip unit)[15] Two-pin Test Cable (for connection between test kit and trip unit)[16] 230 Vac Filtered Power Cord[17] 120 Vac Filtered Power Cord[17] Trip Unit Battery for Trip Indicator Lights Power supply with: 24–30 Vdc input 48/60 Vdc input 125 Vdc input 110–130 Vac input 200–240 Vac input 380–415 Vac input Micrologic A Trip Unit Cover, clear Micrologic P/H Trip Unit Cover, opaque gray Trip Unit Seal (6 pieces) for compliance with NEC 240.6(c) 12-pin Trip Unit Connector for NT/NW Masterpact Circuit Breakers 12-pin Trip Unit Connector for P- and R-Frame Circuit Breakers Battery Back-up (12 Hours) Frame H/J/L H/J L H/J/L P/R P/R H/J/L/P/R P/R Cat. No. S434206 STRV00910 STRV00911 SVW3A8114 TRV00915 TRV00917 S429478 S429481 S432459 S432461 S429483 S429484 S33594 S33937 S48981 S33595 S48907 S48908 S48856 S48855 S33593 685823 685824 685825 685826 685827 685829 S33592 S47067 H/J/L/P/R MICROTUSEAL P/R S33101 S33100 685831 Table 7.135: Sensor Plugs for P- and R-Frame Circuit Breakers [18][19] Circuit Breaker Sensor Plug Range Sensor Plug Catalog No. P-Frame Circuit Breaker Circuit Breaker Frames Accepting Sensor Plug 400 As 600 As 630 A [20] 800 A 1000 A 1200 A 1250 A [20] 1600 A 250 A X X X X R-Frame Circuit Breaker 600 A X 800 As X X 1000 As X X X 250 A 400 A 600 A 800 A 1000 A 1200 A 630 A 800 A 1000 A 1250 A 1600 A 600 A 800 A 1000 A 1200 A 1600 A 2000 A 2500 A 3000 A 1600 A 2000 A 2500 A 3200 A S47052 S47053 S48823 S33092 S33093 S48824 S33091 S33092 S33093 S33094 S33095 S48823 S33092 S33093 S48824 S33095 S33982 S33983 S48825 S33095 S33982 S33983 S33984 UL IEC UL IEC [13] X 1200 A X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 1600 A 2000 A 2500 A 3000 A X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 3200 A X X X X E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I Long-time pickup amperes (Ir) = Sensor Rating (In) X Setting of rating plug. “Fine adjustment tuning” is included on Micrologic Power and Harmonic trip units, allowing for incremental settings of 1 A between the plug setting and.40 X Sensor Rating. Includes NCTWIRING kit. [14] [15] Used for testing Micrologic trip units. Included in the price of the Hand-held/Full-function Test Kits. Kit for replacement only. [16] Used for testing STR trip units. Included in the price of the Hand-held/Full-function Test Kits. Kit for replacement only. [17] [18] [19] See rating plug for long-time pickup range page 7-65. [20] Included with the Full-function Test Kit. Kit for replacement only. For use only with circuit breakers with date codes later than 07011. IEC Only. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7-69 7 11/10/2017


page 244

Micrologic™ Electronic Trip Units Micrologic™ Trip Unit Accessories Class 612, 612 / Refer to Catalogs 0611CT1001 and 0612CT0101 schneider-electric.us Trip Unit Accessories Table 7.136: Communication Modules, Display Screens, and Wiring Accessories Field-Installable Description IFM Modbus-SL Interface for LV Circuit Breaker Stacking Accessory (10 Stacking Accessories for IFM) IFE Interface (Ethernet Module) IFE Interface + Gateway (Ethernet and ModbuGateway) I/O Module (Input/Output ProgrammableModule) Circuit Breaker ULP Cord–BCM to COMS L = 0.35 m (1.15 ft) L = 1.3 m (4.27 ft) L = 3 m (9.24 ft) L = 0.3 m (0.98 ft) L = 0.6 m (1.97 ft) L = 1 m (3.28 ft) L = 2 m (6.56 ft) L = 3 m (9.84 ft) L = 5 m (16.40 ft) L = 1 m (3.28 ft) L = 3 m (9.84 ft) Kit Cat. No. STRV00210 TRV00217 LV434010 LV434011 LV434063 LV434195 LV434196 LV434197 TRV00803 TRV00806 TRV00810 TRV00820 TRV00830 TRV00850 TRV00870 TRV00880 S434204 S434303 STRV00211 VW3A8306DRC STRV00121 TRV00128 LV434128 Modbus Interface Module (IFM) Breaker Status and Control Module (BSCM) ULP Cable, 10 Cables (Male to Male RJ45) ULP Cable, 5 Cables (Male to Male RJ45) ULP Cable, 1 Cable (Male to Male RJ45) RJ45 Female/Female Connector, 10 Connectors ULP Line Terminator, 10 Terminators Insulated ULP Module and Circuit Breaker Cord (for System Voltage Greater than 480 Vac) (Cord with Female Socket) Two-Wire RS 485 Isolated Repeater Module Modbus Line Terminator, 2 Terminators FDM121 (1 Circuit Breaker to 1 Front Display) Surface-Mounting Accessory for FDM FDM128 (8 Circuit Breakers to 1 Front Display) Front Display Module (FDM) NSX Cord for Modbus Communications 7 I I I C R C U I T B R E A K E R S M N A T U R E A N D M O L D E D C A S E 7-70 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 245

Masterpact™ NT/NW Circuit Breakers schneider-electric.us Class 613 / Refer to Catalog 0613CT0001 Masterpact™ Universal Power Circuit Breakers Table 7.137: Trip Unit Field-Installable Accessories, Wire Harness [21] and ULP Cords for H-, J-, and L-Frame Circuit Breakers [22] Factory-Installed Cat. No. Suffix Field-Installable Kit Cat. No. — — EA EB EG [24] EH [24] — EK [24] EL [24] EN V V YH3 YH3 YH2 YH1 YH1 YH1 YH1 YH1 YH1 YH1 YH1 YH1 YH4 STRV00211 S434212 S434201 S434202 S434201BS S434202BS S434205 S434204BS S434303BS S434210 S429424 S429532 S434300 S434301 S434302 S434500 S434501 S434502 S434503 S434504 S434505 S434506 S434507 S434508 — R-Frame Unit Mount S64205 S64273 S64201 S64208 I-Line S64205 S64273 S64201 S64208 SDTAM Module (Remote indication relay for motor applications) ZSI Interface Module (Connects PowerPact H/J/L circuit breakers to PowerPact P/R and Masterpact NT/NW circuit breakers) L = 1.3 m (4.27 ft) L = 3 m (9.84 ft) L = 1.3 m (4.27 ft) L = 3 m (9.84 ft) L = 1.3 m (4.27 ft) L = 3 m (9.84 ft) Description External Accessories Isolated Modbus Repeater Module ZSI Interface Module Internal Accessories NSX Cord [23] (for Modbus Communication) BSCM (Breaker Status and Control Module) with NSX Cord [23] Replacement BSCM BSCM with NSX Cord for V > 480 Vac [23] 24 Vdc Terminal Block SDTAM 24/415 Vac/dc Module [25] SDX Module 24/415 Vac/dc [26] ZSI Wire Harness, H/J Frame ZSI Wire Harness, L-Frame ENCT Wire Harness OF Wire Harness SD/SDE Wire Harness SDx/SDTAM Wire Harness MN Wire Harness MX Wire Harness 24 Vdc Terminal Block Wire Harness [27] Motor Operator Wire Harness Communicating Motor Operator Wire Harness NSX Wire Harness [27] ENCT and ZSI Wire Harness Table 7.138: Trip Unit Field-Installable Accessories for P- and R-Frame Circuit Breakers Description Circuit Breaker Communication Module (BCM) (Modbus) Two Programmable Contacts Module (M2C) Six Programmable Contacts Module (M6C) External Voltage Sensing (EVS) Factory- Installed Cat. No. Suffix E1 V W YV Unit Mount S64205 S64273 S64204 S64203 I-Line S64205 S64273 S64204 S64203 P-Frame Motor Operated S64207 S64273 S64204 S64210 Field-Installable Kit Cat. No. Drawout S64206 S64273 S64202 S64209 With Rotary Handle S64205 S64273 S64204 S64210 Masterpact NT Masterpact NW NFPA70E Full-Featured Performance The Masterpact universal power circuit breaker offers a family of circuit protection products meeting the most common world standards, ANSI, UL and IEC. The basic design platform for each is common. The final result is UL, ANSI and IEC circuit breakers with the same basic external dimensions, features and accessories. • Complete product offering up to 200 k AIR without fuses • Circuit breakers tested to show arc flash hazard risk category as referenced by • 800 A to 6000 A frames, fixed and draw-out • Rated for AC voltage systems through 600 V (635 V ANSI) • Short-time withstand ratings up to 100 kA • Cradle position indicator: connected, test and disconnected • Simple, visual contact wear indicators • Full complement of field-installable accessories common to all standards • Four interchangeable Micrologic trip units to choose from • Available PowerLogic™ based power metering and monitoring capabilities • Available protective relay functions as defined by ANSI C37.2 and C37.90 The following charts show the Masterpact NW and NT ratings for ANSI and UL 489. See Pricing Guide 0613PL0001 and Catalog 0613CT0001. [21] Wire harness is required for I-Line applications, optional for unit-mount applications YH1 = all installed accessories but ZSI and ENCT YH2 = ENCT and all installed accessories YH3 = ZSI and all installed accessories YH4 = ZSI, ENCT and all installed accessories For proper selection, see catalog 0611CT1001. Installation requires IFM (STRV00210) for Modbus communication and/or FDM (STRV00121) for external display. If using with motor operator requires communicating motor operator (suffix NC). [22] [23] [24] [25] Remote indication relay for motor applications [26] Remote indication relay [27] I-Line wire harness is included for communication network accessories. Optional wire harness for unit mount requires YH1 suffix. E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7-71 7 11/10/2017


page 246

Masterpact™ Universal Power Circuit Breakers Table 7.139: Masterpact NW Circuit Breaker Ratings Masterpact™ NT/NW Circuit Breakers Class 613 / Refer to Catalog 0613CT0001 schneider-electric.us 800–1600 A 2000 A 3200/4000 A [1] ANSI C37 Certified/UL 1066 Listed N1 H1 H2 H3 42 42 42 L1 [2] 85 100 200 85 100 200 85 130 65 65 65 85 42 35 [5] 42 65 35 [5] 65 85 35 [5] 40 85 85 40 30 35 [5] 25 L1F [2] 200 200 130 H- 1 H2 H3 100 65 100 65 65 85 85 85 85 22 65 85 85 24 — — 85 22 65 40 40 L1 [2] 200 200 130 30 35 25 L1F [2] H1 H2 H3 100 200 100 200 130 85 65 65 65 85 85 85 22 65 85 85 L1 [2] 200 200 130 100 4000/5000 A L1 [2] 200 200 130 H2 H3 100 85 100 85 85 85 85 85 100 N 65 65 50 42 [3] 800/1200/1600/2000 A LF [2] 200 150 100 H 100 100 85 24 — — 85 117 — — 117 22 65 40 40 40 85 75 40 40 40 — — — — — Yes — — — — Yes — — — — — — — — 25–30 ms with no intentional delay (9 ms for L1, L1F, L and LF) 70 ms 100–250 A 400–800 A 800–1600 A 12,500 2800 1000–2000 A 1600–3200 A 2000–4000 A 2500–5000 A 10,000 1,000 10,000 1,000 5k 1k 5,000 1,000 100–250 A 400–800 A 600–1200 A 800–1600 A 1000–2000 A 12,500[7] 1200–2500 1600–3000 A A 10,000 2000–4000 2500–5000 A A 3000–6000 A 5,000 2800[7] 1,000 1,000 UL 489 Listed 2500/3000 A L [2] 200 150 100 30[3] [4] 35[3] [4] 25[6] 22 24 22 H 100 100 85 65 65 40 L [2] 200 150 100 65 65 40 4000/5000/ 6000 A H 100 100 85 L [2] 200 150 100 85 75 40 100 75 40 — — Yes — — — 65[3] 40 40 — Standard Frame Rating Interrupting Code 240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac Interrupting Current (kA RMS) 50/60 Hz Short-time Withstand Current (kA RMS) Built-in Instantaneous Override (kA RMS ±10%) Close and latch rating (kA RMS) Tested to show arc flash hazard risk category as referenced by NFPA70E Breaking time Closing time Sensor Rating Endurance Rating (C/O Cycles) With No Mainte- nance Mechanical Electrical 7 I I I C R C U I T B R E A K E R S M N A T U R E A N D M O L D E D C A S E 4000 A standard width circuit breaker is not available in L1 interrupting rating code or drawout construction (fixed mounting only). Drawout mounted only. 24 kA RMS for 800 A circuit breaker frame with 100 A or 250 A sensor. 65 kA RMS for 2000 A. None except 24 kA RMS for 800 A circuit breaker frame with 100 A or 250 A sensor. 40 kA RMS for 2000 A. The endurance rating for 2000 A, N/H/L/LF is 10,000 for mechanical and 1000 for electrical. [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] 7-72 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 247

Masterpact™ NT/NW Circuit Breakers Class 613 / Refer to Catalog 0613CT0001 Masterpact™ Universal Power Circuit Breakers schneider-electric.us Table 7.140: Masterpact NT Circuit Breaker Ratings ANSI C37 Certified/ UL 1066 Listed Standard Frame Rating Interrupting Code 800 A N1 42 42 — 42 — 40 — 25–30 ms with no intentional delay 100–250 A 400–800 A 12,500 2800 Interrupting Current (kA RMS) 50/60 Hz 240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac Short-time Withstand Current (kA RMS) Built-in Instantaneous Override (kA RMS ±10%) Close and latch rating (kA RMS) Tested to show the arc flash hazard risk category as referenced by NFPA70E Breaking time Closing time Sensor Rating Endurance Rating (C/O Cycles) With No Maintenance Mechanical Electrical NWMPRR Fixed mounted only. Drawout mounted only. [8] [9] [10] Unit comes with 10 mounting brackets included. [11] For replacement only. 800 A L1 100 65 — 10 10 10 — H 65 50 50 35 40 25 — L 200 100 — 10 10 10 — LF [9] 200 100 — 10 10 10 Yes N 50 50 35 35 40 25 — N 50 50 35 35 40 25 — UL 489 Listed 1200 A H 65 50 50 35 40 25 — L1 100 65 — 10 10 10 — L 200 100 — 10 10 10 — LF [9] 200 100 — 10 10 10 Yes N 50 50 35 35 40 25 — 1600 A [8] L1 H 100 65 65 50 N/A 50 35 10 10 40 10 25 — — L 200 100 N/A 10 10 10 — 25–30 ms with no intentional delay (9 ms for L and LF) < 50 ms 100–250 A 400–800 A 12,500 2800 600–1200 A — 12,500 2800 Table 7.141: Masterpact NW/NT Circuit Breaker Remote Racking Description Masterpact NW/NT Remote Racking Devices [10] Masterpact NW Remote Racking Device [10] Masterpact NT Remote Rackign Device [10] Mounting Bracket Kit for NW Remote Racking (contains 10 mounting brackets) [11] Mounting Bracket Kit for NT Remove Racking (contains 10 mounting brackets) [11] Control Unit for NW Remote Racking [11] 30 ft Control Cable for NW Remote Racking [11] Drive Shaft for NW Remote Racking [11] Drive Shaft for NT Remote Racking [11] 800–1600 A 12,500 2800 Cat. No. NWNTMPRRT NWMPRRT NTMPRRT S47100 S47104 S47101 S47102 S47103 S47105 E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7-73 7 11/10/2017


page 248

Ground-Fault Protection Vigirex™ Ground-Fault Relay System Class 931, 840, 960 schneider-electric.us Vigirex™ Ground-Fault Relay System The Vigirex ground-fault relays, with associated sensors (current transformers), measure the residual current in an electrical installation to detect levels which may be damaging. When used for protection, they cause an associated circuit breaker or switch to interrupt the supply of power to the protected system. They may also be used for monitoring only, with output to an alarm. The product line includes fixed sensitivities from 30 mA to 1 A and adjustable sensitivities up to 30 A. The Vigirex relays may be easily mounted on DIN rail or may be panel mounted in a meter cutout. Sensors for conductors range from a little more than an inch diameter toroids, to large rectangular sensors measuring 6 x 18 inches. The compact size of the relay and its sensor make it ideal for protection of OEM equipment as well as branch circuits. Table 7.142: Vigirex Ground-Fault Relays (UL 1053 Listed) Model DIN Rail Mounted Delay Reset Control Voltage Sensitivity RH99M 12–24 Vac/12–48 Vdc RH10M Instantaneous Manual 110–130 Vac RH21M RH99M Instantaneous or 60 msec (2 settings) Adjustable (9 settings): 0, 0.06, 0.15, 0.23, 0.31, 0.5, 0.8, 1.0, 4.5 sec Manual Manual Automatic Panel Mounted 220–240 Vac 12–24 Vac/12–48 Vdc 110–130 Vac 220–240 Vac 12–24 Vac/12–48 Vdc 110–130 Vac 220–240 Vac 12–24 Vac/12–48 Vdc 110–130 Vac 220–240 Vac 12–24 Vac/12–48 Vdc RH99P RH10P Instantaneous Manual 110–130 Vac RH21P RH99P Instantaneous or 60 msec (2 settings) Adjustable (9 settings): 0, 0.06, 0.15, 0.23, 0.31, 0.5, 0.8, 1.0, 4.5 sec Manual Manual Automatic 220–240 Vac 12–24 Vac/12–48 Vdc 110–130 Vac 220–240 Vac 12–24 Vac/12–48 Vdc 110–130 Vac 220–240 Vac 12–24 Vac/12–48 Vdc 110–130 Vac 220–240 Vac Table 7.143: Sensors for Vigirex Ground-Fault Relays 30 mA 100 mA 300 mA 500 mA 1 A 30 mA 100 mA 300 mA 500 mA 1 A 30 mA 100 mA 300 mA 500 mA 1 A 30 mA[1] or 300 mA (2 settings) Adjustable, (9 settings): 0.03[1], 0.1, 0.3, 0.5, 1, 3, 5, 10, 30 A 30 mA 100 mA 300 mA 500 mA 1 Amp 30 mA 100 mA 300 mA 500 mA 1 Amp 30 mA 100 mA 300 mA 500 mA 1 A 30 mA[1] or 300 mA (2 settings) Adjustable (9 settings): 0.03[1], 0.1, 0.3, 0.5, 1, 3, 5, 10, 30 A PA50 SA200 Sensors Closed Toroids, Type A Vigirex Sensor Iron Rings (Optional) Split toroids, Type TOA Rectangular Sensors Type TA30 PA50 IA80 MA120 SA200 GA300 TA30 PA50 IA80 MA120 TOA80 TOA120 280 x 115 470 x 160 Maximum Current [2] 65 A 85 A 160 A 250 A 400 A 630 A 65 A 85 A 160 A 250 A 160 A 250 A 1600 A 3200 A Inside Diameter in. 1.18 1.97 3.15 4.72 7.87 11.81 0.79 1.58 2.76 4.33 3.15 4.73 mm 30 50 80 120 200 300 20 40 70 110 80 120 11.02 x 4.53 18.50 x 6.30 280 x 115 470 x 160 Cat. No. 56300 56302 56305 56306 56307 56320 56322 56325 56326 56327 56330 56332 56335 56336 56337 56360 56362 56363 56370TD 56372TD 56373TD 56390TD 56392TD 56393TD 56400 56402 56405 56406 56407 56420 56422 56425 56426 56427 56430 56432 56435 56436 56437 56460 56462 56463 56470TD 56472TD 56473TD 56490TD 56492TD 56493TD Cat. No. 50437 50438 50439 50440 50441 50442 56055 56056 56057 56058 50420 50421 56053 56054 [1] [2] 7-74 30 mA is instantaneous only, except for RH99M and RH99P models. Their suffix TD indicates time delay at 30 mA. For models with no time delay (IEC compliant) consult catalog 0972CT0401. Use as a guideline for sizing wire through sensor. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 249

schneider-electric.us Add-On Ground-Fault and Earth-Leakage Modules Class 931, 940, 960 Ground-Fault Protection GFM250 with Optional GFM25CT I-Line J-Frame with ELM Installed Micrologic™ Add-on Ground-Fault Module (GFM) The Micrologic Ground-Fault Module (GFM) is a UL Listed/CSA Certified circuit breaker accessory which protects equipment from damage caused by ground faults. It is an add- on module which, when connected to a PowerPact H- or J-frame thermal-magnetic circuit breaker only, provides ground-fault sensing and ground-fault relay functions. HD/JD ground-fault modules feature: • Adjustable ground-fault pickup levels • Adjustable ground-fault time delays • Integral ground fault push-to-test feature • Ground-fault indicator (mechanical for local, contacts for remote) • All GFMs are supplied for I-Line™ mounting as standard, easily convertible to unit • Fault-powered (through the sensing current transformer) for electronics, shunt trip, • A 12 Vdc shunt trip module (Catalog No. S29382) is required in the circuit breaker. and integral test feature. Meets NEC 230.95(C) This may be field installed or factory installed when the circuit breaker is ordered with an -SN suffix. mount by removing the I-Line bracket • UL 1053 — Ground-fault Sensing and Relaying Equipment The GFM system requires the following: • H-frame (15–150 A) or J-frame (150–250 A) molded case circuit breaker • Shunt trip is required for the function of the GFM (may be factory-installed or field- • Bus bar connection (terminal nut inserts) for OFF end of circuit breaker • Optional neutral current transformer, catalog number GFM25CT (must be ordered for 4-wire applications).NOTE: Ground-fault modules cannot be used for alarming only. Table 7.144: Module/Enclosure Selection Chart[3] installed) Companion Circuit Breaker Prefix HD, HG, HJ, HL JD, JG, JJ, JL Accessories H & J Cat. No. [4] GFM150HD GFM250JD GFM25CT I-Line Switchboard LA LA Ground-fault Pickup Adjustment Range 20–100 A 40–200 A Optional Neutral Current Transformer (required for 4-wire loads) Earth Leakage Module (ELM) for PowerPact H- and J-Frame MCCBs The Earth Leakage Module (ELM) is an add-on module which, when connected to a PowerPact H- or J-frame MCCB, provides low-level ground-fault sensing and ground- fault relay functions. Because these ELMs are highly sensitive (30 mA to 3 A), they provide much greater protection than GFMs (20 Amps to 200 Amps sensitivity). The ELMs provide greater protection of control circuits and other sensitive equipment. The associated circuit breaker must have a 48 Vdc shunt trip, which may be field-installed (kit S29392) or factory-installed (suffix –SP) in the H- or J-Frame circuit breaker. Add-on Earth Leakage Module (ELM) Features: • Adjustable ground-fault pickup levels as low as 30 mA • Adjustable ground-fault time delays from instantaneous to 500 msec • Integral ground fault push-to-test feature • Ground-fault indicator; pop-up button for local status and contacts for remote • All ELMs are supplied for I-Line™ mounting and are easily convertible to unit-mount • Three poles; 240 to 600 Vac maximum: 3-wire applications only (no neutral) • Line-power obtained through internal bus to provide power for electronics, shunt trip, • A shunt trip is required in the circuit breaker; it may be field-installed or factory- • UL 1053 – Ground-fault Sensing and Relaying Equipment Table 7.145: ELM Selection Chart [5] installed in the PowerPact H and J circuit breakers. indication (to be used only with the tripping option) (Time delay can be applied to the 30 mA setting) by removing the I-Line brackets and integral test feature. Companion Circuit Breaker [6] Prefix HD, HG, HJ, HL JD, JG, JJ, JL Size 15–150 A 150–250 A Enclosure Space Required I-Line Switchboard LA LA Pick-Up Adjustment Range Catalog Number 30 mA–3 A 30 mA–3 A ELM150HD ELM250JD [3] [4] [5] [6] At 250 A, the GFM250JD can be used with 80% rated circuit breakers only. See Supplemental Digest Section 3 for additional GFMs. At 250 A, the ELM250JD can be used with 80% rated circuit breakers only. For Factory Installation of ELM Module: For termination designation (3rd letter of catalog number) use ONLY “M”. Add factory installed 48 Vdc shunt trip (suffix SP) to breaker plus suffix VL or VM. E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7-75 7 11/10/2017


page 250

Dimensions and Shipping Weights Miniature and Molded Case Circuit Breakers Class 931, 940, 960 schneider-electric.us Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 QO, QOB Figure 4 Figure 5 QO-GFI, QO- PL QO-EPD QOU, QYU Low Ampere Figure 6 Figure 7 Figure 8 Figure 9 QO-PLPS Miniature and Molded Case Circuit Breaker Dimensions Table 7.146: QO™, QOU, Multi 9™ Circuit Breakers Circuit Breaker Cat. No. Prefix Poles QO, QOB QOB-VH 150 A QOB-VH 110–150 A QO-PL QO-GFI QO-EPD QOU QYU Low Ampere QOU High Ampere Multi 9™ C60 QO-PLPS Power Supply 1 2 3 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 2 Fig. No. 1 2 3 2 3 4 5 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 9 A 0.75 1.50 2.25 3.0 4.50 0.75 1.50 2.25 0.75 1.50 2.25 0.75 1.50 2.25 0.71 1.42 2.13 2.84 1.45 B 3.00 [1] 3.00 [1] 3.00[1] 5.72 5.72 4.12[2] 4.12[2] 4.12 [2] 4.05[3] 4.05 [3] 4.05 [3] 4.45 4.45 4.45 3.19 3.19 3.19 3.19 4.35 Dimensions—Inches E C 2.25 2.31 2.25 2.31 2.31 2.25 3.78 2.53 3.78 2.53 2.25 2.31 2.25 2.31 2.25 2.31 2.38 2.25 2.25 2.38 2.25 2.38 2.25 2.37 2.25 2.37 2.25 2.37 1.77 1.73 1.73 1.77 1.77 1.73 1.77 1.73 2.42 — D 2.91 2.91 2.91 4.90 4.90 2.91 2.91 2.91 2.98 2.98 2.98 2.96 2.96 2.96 2.76 2.76 2.76 2.76 3.11 F — — — — — — — — 5.00[4] 5.00[4] 5.00[5] 6.78 6.78 6.78 — — — — — Table 7.147: QB, QD, QG, QJ, Q4, FA, LA, Circuit Breakers Figure 10 Figure 11 Figure 12 QOU High Ampere Q4L, LAL, LHL QB, QD, QG, QJ FAL, FHL 2 3 1 2 3 2 & 3 Circuit Breaker Cat. No. Prefix Poles Fig. No. 22 23 21 22 23 23 A 6.47 6.47 6.00 6.00 6.00 11.00 B 3.00 4.50 1.50 3.00 4.50 6.00 C 3.02 3.02 3.16 3.16 3.16 4.06 Dimensions—Inches D 3.93 3.93 4.13 4.13 4.13 5.84 E [6] [6] 0.44 0.44 0.44 0.88 F 4.25 4.25 5.13 5.13 5.13 9.25 G — 1.50 1.50 — 1.50 2.00 G 0.59 1.34 2.09 2.85 4.35 0.59 1.34 2.09 0.62 1.37 2.12 — — — — — — — — H — 0.75 — — 0.75 1.00 Table 7.148: Shipping Weights[7] Frame Size Approx. Shipping Weight (Lbs.) FAL, FHL 1P FAL, FHL 2P FAL, FHL 3P 2 3 5 Frame Size QB, QD, QG, QJ LAL, LHL Q4L Figure 13 Figure 14 Figure 15 Figure 16 C60 Figure 21 Figure 22 Approx. Shipping Weight (Lbs.) 4 15 15 Figure 23 7 I I I C R C U I T B R E A K E R S M N A T U R E A N D M O L D E D C A S E 35–70 A is 3.12 in; 80–100 A 2P and 70–100 A 3P are 3.50 in. QO-PL is 4.55 in. 80–100 A 1P and 80–125 A 2P are 4.45 in. 80–100 A 1P and 80–125 A 2P are 6.78 in. 70–100 A is 6.78 in. Dimensions E are 1.59 in at ON end and 0.63 in at OFF end. All weights are for 3P circuit breakers unless otherwise noted. [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] 7-76 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved BEAGBEAGBEAGDCABEGAGBEDCCDFBBAGEAGBEAGBEADCBABEABEABECDFBABABABABCDEBEFAEGC/LBEEFAC/LBDCGHHEEFA11/10/2017


page 251

Molded Case Circuit Breaker Dimensions Table 7.149: PowerPact B-, H-, J-, and L-Frame Circuit Breakers Dimensions — Inches Circuit Breaker Frame B-Frame H-Frame J-Frame L-Frame No. of Poles 1 2 3 4 3 3 3 2 [8] Fig. No. 35 36 37 38 25 26 27 28 A 6.79 6.22 6.22 6.22 6.40 6.40 7.52 13.38 B 1.06 2.12 3.19 4.25 2.74 4.12 4.12 5.51 C 3.15 3.15 3.15 3.15 2.87 2.87 2.87 3.75 D 4.01 4.01 4.01 4.01 4.36 4.36 5.00 6.61 E 0.20 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.74 0.74 1.30 2.22 F 6.33 4.48 4.48 4.48 4.92 4.92 4.92 7.87 G — — 1.06 2.12 — 1.38 1.38 1.77 Table 7.150: ED, EG, EJ, and GJ Circuit Breakers Circuit Breaker Cat. No. Prefix ED, EG, EJ ED, EG, EJ ED, EG, EJ GJ No. of Poles Fig. No. 1 2 3 3 29 30 31 32 A 0.98 1.96 2.94 3.54 B 5.66 5.66 5.66 4.72 Dimensions — Inches C 3.09 3.09 3.09 2.76 D 4.05 4.05 4.05 3.94 Table 7.151: PowerPact M-, P-, and R-Frame Circuit Breakers Circuit Breaker Frame M-Frame (800 A and below) P-Frame (1000–1200 A) R-Frame No. of Poles 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 Fig. No. 33 33 34 A 12.86 16.16 16.24 B  8.27  8.27 16.54 Dimensions — Inches E C 5.77 2.49  8.05 D 5.77 6.63  8.05 14.49 4.19 8.73 Table 7.152: Shipping Weights [9] Frame Size B-Frame 1P B-Frame 2P B-Frame 3P B-Frame 4P EDB 1P EDB 2P EDB 3P Approx. Shipping Weight (Lbs.) 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 Frame Size H-Frame 2P H-Frame 3P J-Frame L-Frame M-Frame P-Frame R-Frame (Without RLTB) Figure 29 Figure 30 Figure 31 Figure 35 Figure 36 Figure 32 Figure 33 Figure 34 Figure 37 Figure 38 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Class 931, 940, 960 schneider-electric.us Dimensions and Shipping Weights Figure 25 Figure 26 Figure 27 Figure 28 H 5.39 5.39 5.39 5.39 — — — — E 3.32 3.32 3.32 2.20 F  7.87  7.87 14.25 G  7.83  7.83 15.35 Approx. Shipping Weight (Lbs.) 4 5 5 14 29 32 52 E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I [8] [9] Only HD and HG are in 2P module, HJ, HL and HR 2P are in 3P module. All weights are for 3P circuit breakers unless otherwise noted. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7-77 7 ABEFCDAEFBGEGABCDFACDBGFAEBABEAEBCDAEBCDFEEADCGBGBFEADC1PCDBEAFH2PBEAFCDH3PBEAGFCDH4PGBEAFCDH11/10/2017


page 252

Circuit Breaker Enclosures Enclosures Class 610 schneider-electric.us Circuit Breaker Enclosures F- and L–Frame Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breaker Enclosures The enclosures for the F- and L-Frame thermal-magnetic circuit breakers are UL listed and CSA certified. The enclosures are suitable for service entrance equipment when neutral assembly is installed. The short circuit ratings of these enclosed circuit breakers are equal to the interrupter rating, at the supply voltage marked on the circuit breaker installed. F-Frame Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breaker Enclosures The FA100RB enclosure has a provision of 3/4 through 2 1/2 inch B-Type bolt-on hubs in the top end wall. For details and hub catalog numbers see page 3-10. Table 7.153: F-Frame Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breaker Enclosures Circuit Breaker Cat. No. Prefix Enclosure Cat. No. Rating Poles Neutral Assembly FA100S FAL, FHL, FCL FAL, FHL, FCL NEMA 1 Flush 15–100 A 1, 2, 3 FA100F NEMA 1 Surface FA100S NEMA 4, 4X, 5 [1] Type 304 Stainless Steel [2] NEMA 12K With Knockouts 15–100 A 1, 2, 3 FA100DS FA100A FA100AWK SN100FA PKOGTA2 Service Ground Kit Kit NEMA 3R FA100RB SN100FA PKOGTA2 NEMA 12/3R Without Knockouts [2] L-Frame Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breaker Enclosures The LA400R enclosure has a blank top end wall and requires field cut openings. For details and hub catalog numbers see page 3-10. Table 7.154: L-Frame Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breaker Enclosures Circuit Breaker Cat. No. Prefix Enclosure Cat. No. Rating Poles Neutral Assembly Kit Cat. No. Cat. No. NEMA 1 Flush LAL, LHL, Q4L LAL 125–225 A 225–400 A 125–400 2, 3 LA400F[3] 3 — LAL, LHL, Q4L 125–225 A 225–400 A 2, 3 NEMA 4, 4X, 5 [1] Type 304 Stainless Steel [2] LA400DS[6] Cat. No. NEMA 1 Surface LA400S[3] LA400LS [4] [5][6][7] NEMA 12K With Knockouts NEMA 3R LA400R — SN225KA 400SN SN400LA NEMA 12/3R Without Knockouts [2] — LA400AWK[6] SN225KA SN400LA PKOGTA2 Service Ground Kit Cat. No. PKOGTA2 FA100RB FA100DS 7 I I I C R C U I T B R E A K E R S M N A T U R E A N D M O L D E D C A S E Complete rating is NEMA 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 5, and 12. For NEMA 3R applications, remove drain screw from bottom endwall. Enclosures are provided with the Handle Padlock Attachment (HPALM) for field installation to lock the circuit breaker in the “ON” or “OFF” positions. Use copper conductors only. Maximum short circuit and voltage is 30 kAIR at 480 Vac. LAL or LHL circuit breakers with an MB or MT suffix are not compatible with these enclosures: LA400DS, LA400AWK, and LA400LS. Enclosure cover has an integral padlock provision to provide a means to lock the circuit breaker in the “ON” or “OFF” position. [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] 7-78 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 253

Enclosures Class 610 schneider-electric.us Circuit Breaker Enclosures PowerPact Circuit Breaker Enclosures The enclosures for the family of PowerPact circuit breakers H- through Q-frame are cULus listed unless otherwise noted. The enclosures are suitable for service entrance equipment when neutral assembly is installed. The short circuit current rating of the enclosed circuit breakers is equal to the rating of the circuit breaker installed unless otherwise noted. All enclosures will accept 100% rated circuit breakers unless otherwise noted. PowerPact H- and J-Frame Circuit Breaker Enclosures The enclosures' maximum short circuit ratings are 25 kAIR at 600 Vac, 65 kAIR at 480 Vac, 125 kAIR at 240 Vac and 20 kA at 250 Vdc unless otherwise noted. Enclosures accept 100% rated circuit breakers [8]. The enclosures are not compatible with earth- leakage or ground-fault modules. Table 7.155: PowerPact H- and J-Frame Circuit Breaker Enclosures Circuit Breaker Cat. No. Prefix Rating Poles HDL HDL, JDL HDL, HGL HJL, HLL HDL, HGL, HJL, HLL JDL, JGL, JJL, JLL HDL, HGL, HJL, HLL JDL, JGL, JJL, JLL 15–100 A 125–225 A 125–250 15–100 A 125–150 A 15–100 A 15–100 A 125–150 A 150–250 A 15–100 A 125–150 A 150–250 A 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 NEMA 1 Flush — — H150F J250F Enclosure Cat. No. NEMA 1 Surface HD100S [9][10][11] JD250S [12][10][11] H150S NEMA 3R — — H150R [13] J250S [14] J250R [13][15] NEMA 4, 4X, 5 [17] Type 304 Stainless Steel [18] NEMA 4, 4x, 5 [17] Type 316 Stainless Steel [18] NEMA 12/3R Without Knockouts [18] J250DS [19] J250SS [19] J250AWK [19] Neutral Assembly Kit Cat. No. Service Ground Kit Cat. No. SN100FA SN225KA SN400LA SN100FA SN400LA SN100FA SN400LA[16] SN100FA SN400LA [16] PKOGTA2 PKOGTA2 PKOGTH150 PKOGTH150 PKOGTJ250 PKOGTH150 PKOGTJ250 PowerPact L-Frame Circuit Breaker and Molded Case Switch Enclosures All enclosures accept 80% rated circuit breakers. The enclosures will also accept 100% rated circuit breakers to 400 amps. The enclosures have a blank top end wall and require field-cut openings. For details and hub catalog numbers see page 3–10. Table 7.156: PowerPact L-Frame Circuit Breaker Enclosures Circuit Breaker Cat. No. Prefix LDL, LGL, LJL, LLL, LRL LGL, LLL, LRL Rating 250–400 A 400–600 A 250–400 A 400–600 A Poles 3 3 NEMA 12/3R Enclosures Without Knockouts L600AWK [20][18][19] L600AWKMC [21][18] Cat. No. Neutral Assembly Kit SN400LA SN1000MA SN400LA SN1000MA Copper Only Neutral Assembly Kit SNC400LX SNC800LX SNC400LX SNC800LX Service Ground Kit PKOGTA4 PKOGTA4 PowerPact Q-Frame Circuit Breaker Enclosures The enclosures for the PowerPact Q Frame Circuit Breaker are UL listed. The short circuit ratings of these enclosed circuit breakers are equal to the interrupter ratings, at the supply voltage marked on the circuit breaker installed, unless otherwise noted. Table 7.157: PowerPact Q-Frame Circuit Breaker Enclosures Circuit Breaker Cat. No. Prefix Rating QBL, QDL, QGL, QJL [22] 70–225 A Poles 2 2, 3 NEMA 1 Flush — Q23225NF Enclosure Cat. No. NEMA 1Surface Q22200NS [23] Q23225NS NEMA 3R Q22200NRB [23] Q23225NRB Neutral Assembly Kit Cat. No. Service Ground Kit Cat. No. — PKOGTA2 For conduit entry through the top end wall use one of the following Square D conduit hubs: A200L for 2.00 in., A250L for 2.50 in., A300L for 3.00 in., A350L for 3.50 in. or A400L for 4.00 in. Use only 90°C (minimum) rated wire sized per ampacity of 75°C rated conductors for 100% rated circuit breakers. Rated for 240 Vac maximum. Short circuit current rating is 25 kAIR at 240 Vac. [8] [9] [10] Accepts standard 80% rated circuit breakers only. Not rated for 100% rated circuit breakers. [11] Use copper conductors only. [12] Rated 480 Vac maximum. Short circuit current rating is 18 kAIR at 480 V. [13] [14] Add suffix BE if no knockouts are required on the end walls. [15] [16] [17] Complete rating is NEMA 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 5, and 12. [18] [19] Add suffix VW for visibility to the standard, ammeter or energy trip unit of the PowerPact circuit breaker. [20] Will accept PowerPact L-frame circuit breakers and Motor Protectors with suffixes M38X [21] Will accept PowerPact L-frame Molded Case Switches. [22] When the QJL circuit breaker is installed in the enclosure, the enclosure is limited to Short Circuit Current ratings of 65 kAIR at 240 V and 100 kAIR at 208 V. [23] For access to the circuit breaker’s standard, ammeter or energy trip unit panel/LCD, add suffix T. For 200% neutral use copper wire only. For NEMA 3R applications, remove drain screw from bottom endwall. Limited to 200 A. E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7-79 7 11/10/2017


page 254

Circuit Breaker Enclosures Enclosures Class 610 PowerPact M- and P-Frame Circuit Breaker Enclosures All enclosures will accept 80% rated circuit breakers. The P1200 enclosures will accept 100% rated circuit breakers to 800 A. If a CT neutral is required, the enclosure will no longer accept a 200% neutral. The M800R and the P1200R enclosures have a blank top end wall and require field-cut openings. For details and hub catalog numbers see page 3-10. schneider-electric.us Table 7.158: PowerPact M- and P-Frame Circuit Breaker Enclosures Circuit Breaker Cat. No. Prefix Rating Poles Enclosure M800AWK P1200AWK AL800SN SN1200 — — S33576MK S33576MK PKOGTA4 PKOGTA4 PowerPact L-Frame 500 Vdc Circuit Breaker Enclosures The PowerPact L-frame circuit breaker enclosure's maximum short circuit rating is 20 kAIR at 250 Vdc and 50 kAIR at 500 Vdc. Listed for use ONLY on UPS systems. Table 7.159: DC CIrcuit Breaker Enclosures for LG and LL DC-Rated Circuit Breakers Circuit Breaker [28] Cat. No. Prefix LGL, LLL Ampere Rating 300–600 A 700–1200 A Poles 3 4 NEMA 1 Surface Enclosure Cat. No. L1200S L1200S Replacement Ground Lugs Cat. No. 8010440301 Service Ground Kit Cat. No. Standard Cat. No. Neutral Assembly Kit 200% Neutral Kit CT Neutral Kit [24][25] Service Ground Kit AL800SN SN1200 SN800SNI and 2 each SN1200 — S33576MK S33576MK PKOGTA4 PKOGTA4 NEMA 1 Flush NEMA 1 Surface NEMA 3R — M800S M800R NEMA 4, 4X, 5 [26] Type 304 Stainless NEMA 4, 4X, 5 [26] Type 316 Stainless — Steel [27] M800DS P1200S Steel [27] M800SS — — P1200R NEMA 12/3R Without Knockouts [27] MGL, MJL. PGL, PJL, PKL, PLL PGL, PJL, PKL, PLL 300–800 A 250–1200 A MGL, MJL. PGL, PJL, PKL, PLL PGL, PJL, PKL, PLL 300–800 A 250–1200 A 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 7 I I I C R C U I T B R E A K E R S M N A T U R E A N D M O L D E D C A S E [24] Order current transformer kit S33576 seperately. [25] Current transformers applicable only on PowerPact P circuit breakers. Current limitations are 400–800 A and 400–1200 A respectively for the M800 and P1200 family of enclosures. [26] Complete rating is NEMA 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 5, and 12. [27] [28] Use 500 Vdc or 250 Vdc rated circuit breakers only. 7-80 For NEMA 3R applications, remove drain screw from bottom endwall. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 255

Enclosures Class 610 schneider-electric.us Circuit Breaker Enclosures Enclosures for Special Applications Hazardous Locations: NEMA 7 And NEMA 9 Circuit Breaker Enclosures The NEMA 7 and 9 enclosures are cULus listed unless otherwise noted. They are rated for use in hazardous locations as defined in NEC Article 500. The short circuit current rating of the enclosed circuit breakers is equal to the rating of the circuit breaker installed unless otherwise noted. They are suitable for use as service entrance equipment when neutral is installed. Enclosures require the use of 75°C copper wire only. The NEMA 7 enclosures are suitable for rainproof applications when the included PKDB1 breather and drain kit is installed. Table 7.160: NEMA 7 and NEMA 9 Circuit Breaker Enclosures; Thermal-Magnetic F-Frame and PowerPact J-Frame Cicuit Breakers Circuit Breaker Cat. No. Prefix FAL, FHL FAL, FHL JDL, JGL Rating 15–60 A 15–100 A 150–225 A Poles 1, 2, 3 1, 2, 3 2, 3 Enclosure Catalog Number NEMA 9 Cast NEMA 7 Cast Aluminum Aluminum [29] [30] Neutral Assembly Kit Cat. No. Ground Kit Service Cat. No. FA060X FA100X J225X [31][32] FA060Y FA100Y J225Y [31][32] 100SNA 100SNA 225SNA Included Included Included Threaded Conduit Provisions, Inches 3/4 in. 1 1/4 in. 2 1/2 in. Enclosures for Walking Beam Circuit Breakers Table 7.161: Enclosures for Walking Beam Manually Operated Mechanical Interlock Circuit Breakers (UL Listed) [33] Circuit Breaker Cat. No. Prefix...Suffix FAL...WB, FHL...WB Ampere Rating 15–100 A Poles 2, 3 NEMA 1 Surface[34] Enclosure Cat. No. KA250SWB NEMA 3R[34][35] Enclosure Cat. No. KA250RWB Enclosed Motor-Operated Molded Case Circuit Breakers For information on Enclosed Motor-Operated Molded Case Circuit Breakers see Supplemental Digest Section 3. Enclosed Molded Case Switches For information on enclosed molded case switches, see Supplemental Digest Section 3. [29] NEMA 7 — Indoor Hazardous Locations — Division 1 and 2, Class I, Groups C and D; Class II, Groups E, F and G; Class III [30] NEMA 9 — Indoor Hazardous Locations — Division 1 and 2, Class ii, Groups E, F and G; Class iii [31] Short circuit current rating: 65 kAIR at 240 Vac, 25 kAIR at 480 Vac, and 18 kAIR at 600 Vac [32] Not cULus listed due to wire bending space. [33] Catalog number in table is enclosure only. For complete installation, the following must be ordered separately: WB Circuit Breakers (qty. 2, Supplemental Digest Section 3), Walking Beam Assembly (Supplemental Digest Section 3), Mounting Pan (Supplemental Digest Section 3) and Neutral and Service Ground Kits, below [34] Enclosure has blank top endwall. [35] For applications above 200 A requiring a neutral, use copper wire only. E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7-81 7 11/10/2017


page 256

Circuit Breaker Enclosures Enclosure Accessories and Dimensions Class 610 Enclosure Accessories Table 7.162: Neutral Kit Terminal Data Catalog Number Neutral Kit plus Load) AWG/kcmil AL/CU Terminal Lug Data -Total Available (Line schneider-electric.us All Copper Neutral Terminal Lug Data -Total Available (Line plus Load) AWG/kcmil 100SNA SN100FA SN225KA 225SNA 400SN SN400LA SN1000MA SNC400LX SNC800LX AL800SN SN1200 S33576MK (2) 14–1/0 Cu or (2) 12–1/0 Al plus (1) 14–4 Cu (4) 14–1/0 Cu or (4) 12–1/0 Al (2) 4–300 Al/Cu plus (2) 14–1/0 Al/Cu (4) 6–350 Al/Cu (2) 1–600 or (4) 1–250 Al/Cu, plus (2) 4–300 Al/Cu (2) 1–600 or (4) 1–250 Al/Cu, plus (2) 4–300 Al/Cu (6) 3/0–500 Al/Cu, plus (1) 1–4/0 Al/Cu — — (6) 3/0–500 Al/Cu, plus (2) 6–250 Al/Cu (8) 3/0–750 Al/Cu, plus (2) 6–350 Al/Cu (8) 3/0–500 Al/Cu, plus (2) 4–300 Al/Cu — — — — — — — (2) 2–-600 Cu, plus (2) 6–250 Cu (4) 2–600 Cu, plus (1) 2–4/0 Cu — — — Terminal Data AWG/kcmil 10–2/0 Cu or 6–2/0 Al 14–2 Al/Cu 6–300 Al/Cu 6–250 Al/Cu Lugs Per Kit 2 2 2 4 Table 7.163: Service Ground Kit Terminal Data Service Ground Kit Catalog Number PKOGTA2 PKOGTH150 PKOGTJ250 PKOGTA4 See Supplemental Digest Section 3 for special options for enclosures: • Stainless steel fronts • Pilot lights, push buttons • Lock-on SPL0 • Key interlock systems • Legend plates 7 I I I C R C U I T B R E A K E R S M N A T U R E A N D M O L D E D C A S E 7-82 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 257

Enclosure Accessories and Dimensions Class 610 Circuit Breaker Enclosures schneider-electric.us Enclosure Dimensions NEMA Type 1 NEMA Type 3R (Uses side hinge cover) NEMA Type 7, Type 9 Table 7.164: Dimensions NEMA Type 4, 4X, 5, 12, 12K Approximate Dimension Cat. No. FA100A, AWK FA100DS FA100F FA100RB FA100S FA060X FA060Y FA100X FA100Y HD100S H150F H150R H150S J250F J250R J250S J250DS J250SS J250AWK JD250S J225X J225Y KA250SWB KA250RWB L600AWK L600AWKVW L600AWKMC L1200S LA400AWK LA400DS LA400F LA400R LA400S LA400LS M800S M800R M800DS M800SS M800AWK P1200S P1200R P1200AWK Q22200NRB Q22200NS Q23225NF Q23225NRB Q23225NS Series E05 E05 E2 E2 E2 E1 E1 E1 E1 A01 A01 A01 A01 A01 A01 A01 A01 A01 A01 A01 A01 A01 E2 E2 A01 A01 A01 A01 E05 E05 E03 E03 E03 A01 A01 A01 A01 A01 A01 A01 A01 A01 E05 E05 E05 E05 E05 in. 19.50 19.50 19.50 18.00 18.13 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00 17.00 32.40 31.05 31.36 32.40 31.05 31.36 32.26 32.26 32.26 26.40 22.70 22.70 20.00 20.25 57.50 57.50 57.50 51.88 42.25 42.25 45.63 44.00 44.50 27.40 40-3/8 40-3/8 40-7/8 40-7/8 40-7/8 52-1/8 52-1/8 53 23.38 23.13 26.25 26.25 26.25 H mm 495 495 495 457 461 406 406 406 406 431.8 823 789 797 823 789 797 819 819 819 670.6 577 577 508 514 1461 1461 1461 1818 1073 1073 1159 1118 1130 696.0 1025.52 1025.52 1036.96 1036.96 1036.96 1323.98 1323.98 1346.20 594 588 667 667 667 in. 9.13 9.13 9.88 8.88 8.63 9.88 9.88 9.88 9.88 7.90 15.40 14.47 14.36 15.40 14.47 14.36 9.72 9.72 9.72 8.90 10.93 10.93 19.00 19.00 20.38 20.38 20.38 20.25 13.75 13.75 16.50 15.38 15.38 15.40 21 21 20-3/4 20-3/4 20-3/4 21 21 20-3/4 7.63 7.63  9.88 9.88 9.88 W mm 232 232 251 226 219 251 251 251 251 200.7 391 368 365 391 368 365 247 247 247 226.1 278 278 483 483 518 518 518 514 349 349 419 391 391 391.2 533.4 533.4 527.05 527.05 527.05 533.4 533.4 527.05 194 194 251 251 251 in. 4.88 4.88 4.13 4.88 4.13 7.00 7.00 7.00 7.00 4.75 6.00 6.28 6.00 6.00 6.28 6.00 7.94 7.94 7.94 5.50 7.70 7.70 5.63 7.12 8.25 8.25 8.25 7.75 7.25 7.25 6.50 7.88 6.50 6.625 9-3/4 9-3/4 9-1/2 9-1/2 9-1/2 9-3/4 9-3/4 9-1/2 4.75 4.25 4.75 5.50 4.75 D mm 124 124 105 124 105 178 178 178 178 120.7 152 160 152 152 160 152 202 202 202 139.7 196 196 143 181 210 210 210 197 184 184 165 200 165 168.3 247.65 247.65 241.3 241.3 241.3 247.65 247.65 241.3 121 108 121 140 121 E S A C D E D L O M D N A E R U T A I N M S R E K A E R B T I U C R I C I © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7-83 7 WWDHHWB enclosureuses 2 circuit breakersWDHWB enclosure uses 2 circuit breakersWHDWHD11/10/2017


page 258

Circuit Breaker Enclosures Enclosure Accessories and Dimensions Class 610 schneider-electric.us 7 I I I C R C U I T B R E A K E R S M N A T U R E A N D M O L D E D C A S E 7-84 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 259

Table of Contents Section 8 Operating Mechanisms and Disconnect Switches 8-2 Operating Mechanisms and Disconnect Switches Selection Guide UL 508 Motor Disconnect Switches Mini-Vario and Vario™ Assembled and Enclosed Switches Mini-Vario and Vario™ Accessories MD Motor Disconnect Switches UL 60947-4-1 and UL 98 Disconnect Switches 8-2 8-3 8-3 8-7 8-8 8-9 S E H C T I W S T C E N N O C S I D N A S M S I N A H C E M G N I T A R E P O D 8 Disconnect Switches, 16–125 A TeSys™ VLS Disconnect Switches 8-9 8-9 8-11 TeSys™ VLS Accessories 8-11 Fourth Pole Add-on 8-12 Add-on Blocks 8-13 Sequence and Maximum Combination of Add-on Blocks 8-16 Rotary Handles Shaft Extensions, Terminal Covers, Fuse Holders, and Fuse Blocks 8-18 8-19 8-22 8-23 8-24 Dimensions: 16–125 A Disconnect Switches Wiring Diagrams Technical Specifications, VLS Range, 16–125 A UL 98 IEC Style Disconnect Switches LK4 Nonfusible and GS2 Fusible Disconnect Switches LK4 Nonfusible Disconnect Switches GS2 Fusible Disconnect Switches Cable Operator Kits for GS2 Switches Accessories, LK4 Nonfusible and GS2 Fusible 8-24 8-24 8-26 8-27 8-27 8-27 8-28 8-28 8-32 8-32 8-33 8-34 8-37 8-39 8-39 8-41 8-45 8-45 8-46 8-47 8-48 8-49 8-49 8-1 Accessories Dimensions, LK4 Nonfusible and GS2 Fusible LK4JU3N / LK4MU3N / LK4QU3N, 100–400 A Nonfusible Disconnect Switches—Dimensions GS2QU3N, 400 A Fusible Disconnect Switches, Class J Fuses Flange Mounted and Cable Operated Disconnect Switches Accessories, Disconnect Switches Dimensions, Disconnect Switches Operating Mechanisms for Circuit Breakers Door Mounted Flexible Cable Mechanisms Door Closing Mechanisms Introduction Types M5, M6, M1, and M8 Single and Multi-Door Enclosures Types M5, M6, M1, and M8 Operating Mechanisms, Accessories Disconnect Switches and Circuit Breakers © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved UL508 Motor DisconnectSwitch UL98 Fusible SwitchUL508 VLS SwitchUL98 VLS Switch9422 Type R Circuit Breaker Mechanism9422 Type C Circuit Breaker Cable Operator9423 Door ClosingMechanisms UL98 Style Flange HandleDisconnect Switch 9421 Type L Circuit BreakerMechanism 11/10/2017


page 260

Operating Mechanisms and Disconnect Switches 8 Selection Guide Class 610 schneider-electric.us D O P E R A T I N G M E C H A N I S M S A N D I S C O N N E C T S W I T C H E S Class Type UL Rating Handle Type Mounting Voltage (max.) Current Ratings Horsepower Ratings (max.) Enclosure Type Accessories Approvals Page Class Type UL Rating Handle Type Mounting Load Voltage (max.) Current Ratings Horsepower Ratings (max.) Enclosure Type Accessories Approvals Page Selection Guide Motor disconnect Manual motor control MD switches UL 508 Rotary Vario switches UL 508 Rotary Nonfusible IEC style disconnect switches LK4 UL 98 Rotary VLS Disconnect switches Disconnect switches UL 508 Rotary UL 98 Rotary Fusible IEC style disconnect switches GS2 UL 98 Rotary — 600 Vac 30–60 7.5–40 Door or panel 600 Vac 10–115 2–60 — 600 Vac 30–1200 7.5–500 DIN Rail (Rear Mounting) Door Mounting DIN Rail (Rear Mounting) Door Mounting Flange with cable mechanism panel 690 Vac 16–63 A 1–30 690 Vac 63–125 A 3–60 600 Vac 30–800 7.5–500 Non-Metallic NEMA 1, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, and 12 NEMA 1, 12, 4, 4X Metallic: Plastic: IP55, NEMA Type 4X Handle ratings: NEMA 1, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 NEMA 1, 12, 3R, 4, and 4X; IEC IP65, IP66 NEMA 1, 12, 3R, 4, and 4X; IEC IP65, IP66 Handle ratings: NEMA 1, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 Power poles and auxiliary contacts Power poles and auxiliary contacts Auxiliary contacts and power lugs UL File E164864 IEC standard 60947-3 UL File E164864 NLRV CSA File LR 81630 Class 3211 05 page 8-8 page 8-3 UL File E191098 WP2X / WP2X7 CSA 703149 Class 4652 04 page 8-24 Power poles and auxiliary contacts UL File E487906 UL60947-4-1/CSA 22.2 n ° 60947-4-1-14 page 8-9 page 8-9 Power poles and auxiliary contacts Auxiliary contacts and power lugs UL File E487907 UL98/CSA 22.2 n° 4 UL File E191098 WP2X / WP2X7 CSA 703149 Class 4652 04 page 8-26 NEMA style fused or non-fusible disconnect switches 9422 UL98 Flange Adjustable rod or cable mechanism 9421 Circuit breaker operating mechanisms — Rotary 9422 Circuit breaker operating mechanisms — 9423 Door closing mechanisms — Adjustable rod or cable mechanism Flange Rotary, works in conjunction with 9422 handle mechanisms Panel or bracket mount 600 Vac 30–400 7.5–350 Handle ratings: NEMA 1, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 Panel 600 Vac 1200 — Handle ratings: NEMA 1, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 Circuit breaker frame sizes 100– Circuit breaker frame sizes 100– Panel 600 Vac 1200 — Handle ratings: NEMA 1, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 — — — — Handle ratings: NEMA 4 and 12 sheet steel or stainless Right or left-hand operation Auxiliary contacts Auxiliary contacts Auxiliary contacts UL File E52639 WHTY2 CSA LR44199 Class 4652-04 page 8-33 UL File E62922 DIHS2 CSA LR44199 Class 3211 07 page 8-39 UL File E62922 DIHS2 CSA LR44199 Class 3211 07 page 8-41 — page 8-45 8-2 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 261

schneider-electric.us Mini-Vario and Vario™ Assembled and Enclosed Switches Refer to Catalog 9421CT0301 UL 508 Motor Disconnect Switches Identification System Mini-Vario and Vario rotary manual motor-control switches from 12–175 A are suitable for on-load making and breaking of resistive or mixed resistive inductive circuits where frequent operation is required. They can also be used for direct switching of motors in utilization categories AC-3 and DC-3 specific to motors. Vario manual motor-control switches are suitable for isolator applications with fully visible indication (since the handle cannot be in the open position unless all the contacts are actually open and separated by the appropriate isolating distance), and the handles are padlockable. The Mini-Vario and Vario catalog numbers are described in Table 8.1. S E H C T I W S T C E N N O C S I D N A S M S I N A H C E M G N I T A R E P O D Table 8.1: Identification System Model (V-Vario, K-Operator) Operator Type/ Accessory Designation Single hole Red & Yellow Four hole Red & Yellow CD CF CCD Single hole Red & Yellow w/ CCF extension shaft Four hole Red & Yellow w/ extension shaft Blank No operator or accessory Z V CF N12 GE 8 BD Single hole Black and Gray BF VE Four hole Black and Gray Switch with Red handle installed on unit (one padlock only) VD Switch with Black handle installed on unit (no padlock provision) Accessory, power pole, neutral or ground VCFN12GE VN12 VN12/KCC1YZ VBDN12 VCDN12 VCCDN20 [1] [2] Switches/contacts are dual rated (UL/IEC). Auxiliary contacts are dual rated (UL/IEC 10/12 A). © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Switch Type (Switches and contacts are dual rated, UL/IEC). Blank N12 Mini-Vario 10/12 A N20 Mini-Vario 16/20 A 02 01 0 Vario 10/12 A Vario 16/20 A Vario 20/25 A Enclosure Type (if applicable) Blank No Enclosure GE Mini-Vario IP55 Non-Metallic 1 2 3 4 5 6 Vario 20/32 A Vario 25/40 A Vario 45/63 A Vario 63/80 A Vario 100/125 A Vario 115/175 A G30, A30, W30 Type 1/12/4/4X Metallic (Class 9421) GU Vario IP55 Non-Metallic Mini-Vario Table 8.2: Assembled Switches—Degree of Protection IP65, Type 1 and 12 Rating (A) UL 10 16 IEC 12 20 Complete Switches for Door Mounting (3- Padlock) Red/Yellow (Single Hole) Black/Gray (Single Hole) Catalog No. VCDN12 VCDN20 Catalog No. VBDN12 VBDN20 Complete Switches for Rear Mounting, Includes Extension Shaft (3-Padlock) Red/Yellow (Single Hole) Catalog No. VCCDN12 VCCDN20 Table 8.3: Mini-Vario Enclosed Switches Catalog No. VCFN12GE VCFN20GE Complete Switches Mounted in IP55 Non-Metallic Enclosure Description Red/Yellow Mounted In Sealable Enclosure, Non-UL Listed, Non-NEMA Rated Table 8.4: Component Parts Catalog No. VN12 [1] VN20 [1] VZN12 [1] VZN20 [1] VZN11 VZN14 VZN05 VZN06 VZN26 VZN08 Description 10/12 A switch only 16/20 A switch only Add on power pole for 10/12 A switch Add on power pole for 16/20 A switch Neutral Pole with early make, late break for VN12 or VN20 switch Grounding module for VN12 or VN20 N.O. late make auxiliary contact [2] N.C. early break auxiliary contact [2] Single-pole shroud for auxiliary contacts Three-pole shroud for VN12 or VN20 Table 8.5: Operators and Accessories Catalog No. KCC1YZ KCD1PZ KAD1PZ VZN17 VZN30 KZ32 KZ83 Description 45 x 45 mm Red & Yellow operator 60 x 60 mm Red & Yellow operator 60 x 60 mm Black & Gray operator 300–340 mm shaft extension 400–430 mm shaft extension Door interlocking plate for 45 or 60 mm operator Door mounting plate for 45 or 60 mm operator 8-3 11/10/2017


page 262

UL 508 Motor Disconnect Switches 8 D O P E R A T I N G M E C H A N I S M S A N D I S C O N N E C T S W I T C H E S Mini-Vario and Vario™ Assembled and Enclosed Switches Refer to Catalog 9421CT0301 schneider-electric.us Vario Table 8.6: NEMA Type 1 and 12 Assembled Switches for Door Mounting Rating (A) UL 10 16 20 20 25 45 63 100 115 IEC 12 20 25 32 40 63 80 125 175 Complete Switches (Switch and Handle) for Door Mounting (3-padlock) Red/Yellow (Four Hole) Catalog No. Black/Gray (Four Hole) Catalog No. Red/Yellow (Single Hole) Catalog No. Black/Gray (Single Hole) Catalog No. VCF02 VCF01 VCF0 VCF1 VCF2 VCF3 VCF4 VCF5 VCF6 VBF02 VBF01 VBF0 VBF1 VBF2 VBF3 VBF4 VBF5 VBF6 VCD02 VCD01 VCD0 VCD1 VCD2 — — — — VBD02 VBD01 VBD0 VBD1 VBD2 — — — — Table 8.7: NEMA Type 1 and 12 Assembled Switches for Rear Mounting Rating (A) UL 10 16 20 20 25 45 63 100 115 IEC 12 20 25 32 40 63 80 125 175 Complete Switches for Rear Mounting with Extension Shaft (3-Padlock)[3] Red/Yellow (Four Hole) Catalog No. Red/Yellow (Single Hole) Catalog No. Switches with Handles Installed on Unit, DIN Rail Mount Only Red/Yellow (1- Padlock) Catalog No. Black/Gray (No- Padlock) Catalog No. VCCF02 VCCF01 VCCF0 VCCF1 VCCF2 VCCF3 VCCF4 VCCF5 VCCF6 VCCD02 VCCD01 VCCD0 VCCD1 VCCD2 — — — — — — VVE0 VVE1 VVE2 VVE3 VVE4 — — — — VVD0 VVD1 VVD2 VVD3 VVD4 — — Vario Non-Metallic Enclosed Switches The Vario Motor Disconnect Switch is also offered as an enclosed switch. The three-pole version makes the Vario switch ideal for manual motor control applications. They are compact, easy to wire and connect, and come undrilled to allow cable entry positions. NOTE: VC•GUN enclosures are UL approved. Table 8.8: Non-Metallic Enclosed Switch [4] [5] Ampere Size UL/IEC 20/32 25/40 45/63 63/80 100/125 115/175 IP55-PVC 3-Pole, NEMA Type 1 & 12 Catalog No. VC1GUN VC2GUN VC3GUN VC4GUN VC5GUN VC6GUN Table 8.9: Dimensions Type VC1GUN VC2GUN VC2GUN VC3GUN VC4GUN VC5GUN VC6GUN No. of Poles 3 3 3 a b c d e f 6.5 (164) 4.8 (121) 3.4 (87) 5.6 (141) 3.9 (98) 5.2 (132) 7.6 (193) 6.5 (164) 3.4 (87) 6.7 (170) 5.6 (141) 5.2 (132) 11.5 (291) 9.5 (241) 5.0 (128) 10.6 (269) 8.6 (219) 7.5 (191) VC•GUN Complete switch includes handle operator, shaft, door interlock plate, and line terminal shroud. Assembled, includes switches mounted in enclosure with handle. Refer to Table 8.11 Vario Manual Motor Control Switches, IEC, page 8-5 and Table 8.12 Vario Manual Motor Control Switches, page 8-5 for horsepower ratings. [3] [4] [5] 8-4 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 263

schneider-electric.us Mini-Vario and Vario™ Assembled and Enclosed Switches Refer to Catalog 9421CT0301 UL 508 Motor Disconnect Switches Vario Metallic Enclosed Switches Vario switches meet UL508 requirements as both enclosed and open manual motor controllers. They are also marked “Suitable as Motor Disconnect” allowing installation on the load side of the motor branch circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protection. If motor branch circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protection is needed, use a GS1 or 9422 fusible switch or circuit breaker meeting NEC 430.52 requirements. Table 8.10: Metallic Enclosed Switches [6] [7] Rating (A) Horsepower Ratings UL 20 25 IEC 32 40 240 V 5 5 480 V 10 10 600 V 10 15 NEMA Type 1 Catalog No. 9421V1G30 9421V2G30 NEMA Type 12 Catalog No. 9421V1A30 9421V2A30 NEMA Type 4/4X [7] Catalog No. 9421V1W30 9421V2W30 S E H C T I W S T C E N N O C S I D N A S M S I N A H C E M G N I T A R E P O D 8 Class 9421 NEMA Type 1 V1G30, V2G30 Class 9421 NEMA Type 4, 4X, 12 V1W30, V2W30, V1A30, V2A30 Vario Manual Motor Control Switches The V1 and V2 come in metallic enclosures (NEMA Type 1, 4, 4X, and 12). The NEMA 1 enclosure comes with conduit knockouts top and bottom. To factory install a VZ7 auxiliary contact in these metallic enclosures, add Form X11 to the end of the catalog number (for example, 9421V1G30X11). To factory install a VZ20 auxiliary contact in these enclosures, add Form X20 to the end of the catalog number (for example, 9421V1W30X20). Table 8.11: Vario Manual Motor Control Switches, IEC Rating (A) IEC 12 20 25 32 40 63 80 125 175 kW Rating—3-Pole Switch Body 230 V 3 4 5.5 5.5 7.5 15 18.5 22 30 240 V 3 4 5.5 5.5 7.5 15 18.5 22 30 400 V 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 22 30 37 45 415 V 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 22 30 37 45 500 V 5.5 7.5 11 11 18.5 30 37 45 55 690 V 7.5 11 15 15 15 22 30 37 45 Manual Motor Control Switch Table 8.12: Vario Manual Motor Control Switches Rating (A) Horsepower Rating UL 10 16 20 20 25 45 63 100 115 240 V 2 3 5 5 5 10 15 25 30 480 V 5 7.5 10 10 10 20 30 50 50 600 V 5 7.5 10 10 15 30 40 50 60 Shaft Size mm 6 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 Table 8.13: Switch Body Rating (A) UL 10 16 20 20 25 45 63 100 115 IEC 12 20 25 32 40 63 80 125 175 Shaft Size mm 6 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 NOTE: Refer to Table 8.10 and Table 8.12 for horsepower ratings. 3-Pole Switch Body Type V02 V01 V0 V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 V6 3-Pole Switch Body Type V02 V01 V0 V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 V6 [6] [7] Assembled, includes switches mounted in enclosure with handle. For indoor use only. The NEMA Type 4/4X enclosure is made of #304 stainless steel with 3/4 in. T&B stainless steel hubs on the top and bottom. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 8-5 11/10/2017


page 264

Mini-Vario and Vario™ Assembled and Enclosed Switches Refer to Catalog 9421CT0301 schneider-electric.us Table 8.14: NEMA Type 1 and 12 Handle Operators: V02–V2 (6 mm Shaft), V3–V6 (8 mm Shaft) [8] Red/Yellow Single Red/Yellow Four Black/Gray Single Black/Gray Four UL 508 Motor Disconnect Switches 8 D O P E R A T I N G M E C H A N I S M S A N D I S C O N N E C T S W I T C H E S Single-Hole Operator Four-Hole Operator (All except KDF3PZ and KBF3PZ) Four-Hole Operator KDF3PZ and KBF3PZ Operator Type Switches V02–V2 V02–V2 No. of Padlocks 0 1 Operator Type V02–V2 V3–V4 V02–V2 V3–V4 0 0 3 3 Operator Type V5–V6 V5–V6 0 3 Low-Profile Handle KCD1YZ Switches V02–V2 V3–V4 No. of Padlocks 3 3 Operator Type Operator Type V5–V6 3 Red/Yellow Single Red/Yellow Four Black/Gray Single Black/Gray Four Red/Yellow Four Black/Gray Four Table 8.15: Low Profile Handle Operators [8] Red/Yellow Single Red/Yellow Four Hole 45 x 45 mm Catalog No. KCC1LZ KCC1YZ Hole 60 x 60 mm KDD1PZ KCD1PZ — — Hole 90 x 90 mm KDF3PZ KCF3PZ Hole 60 x 60 mm Catalog No. KCD1YZ — Hole 90 x 90 mm KCG2YZ Hole 45 x 45 mm Catalog No. KCE1LZ KCE1YZ Hole 60 x 60 mm KDF1PZ KDF2PZ KCF1PZ KCF2PZ Hole 90 x 90 mm KBF3PZ KAF3PZ Hole 60 x 60 mm Catalog No. KCF1YZ KCF2YZ Hole 90 x 90 mm KAG2XZ Red/Yellow Four Black/Gray Four Hole 45 x 45 mm Catalog No. KAC1BZ — Hole 60 x 60 mm KBD1PZ KAD1PZ — — Hole 45 x 45 mm Catalog No. KAE1BZ — Hole 60 x 60 mm KBF1PZ KBF2PZ KAF1PZ KAF2PZ Black/Gray Single Hole 60 x 60 Catalog No. KADIXZ — Black/Gray Four Hole 60 x 60 mm Catalog No. KAF1XZ KAF2XZ KZ67 Table 8.16: Gasket Kits Catalog No. Description KZ65 KZ66 KZ62 KZ67 45 x 45 mm gasket for V02-V2 for 4-hole type handles (order in quantities of 5)—IP65 60 x 60 mm gasket for V02-V2 for 4-hole type handles (order in quantities of 5)—IP65 60 x 60 mm gasket for V3-V4 for 4-hole type handles (order in quantities of 5)—IP65 90 x 90 mm gasket for V5-V6 for 4-hole type handles (order in quantities of 5)—IP65 Single-Hole Mounting Dimensions Four-Hole 60 x 60 Mounting Dimensions [9] Four-Hole 90 x 90 Mounting Dimensions [9] Table 8.17: Rear/Panel Mounting Switch Body Dimensions Dimensions Type Shaft Extension V02 to V2 V3 to V4 V5 to V6 VZ17 VZ30 VZ18 VZ31 VZ18 VZ31 in. 5.5–13.0 5.5–16.9 5.5–12.6 5.5–16.5 6.5–13.8 6.5–17.7 a b mm 140–330 140–430 140–320 140–420 165–350 165–450 in. 0.60 0.79 1.20 mm 15 20 30 c mm 60 60 100 in. 2.4 2.4 3.9 d in. 0.17 0.20 0.28 mm 4.2 5.2 7.0 [8] When using these handles for replacements on the non-metallic enclosed switches, the handle shaft that comes with the enclosure must be reused. See Section 15 of the Supplemental Digest. The door interlock plate included with VCC Kits has the same drilling as the handle operators. [9] 8-6 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 0.8822.50.512.70.123.05.5484813.00.510.221.891.8913.00.515.50.2268682.672.67abcdia. d1.51.734411/10/2017


page 265

Mini-Vario and Vario™ Accessories Refer to Catalog 9421CT0301 UL 508 Motor Disconnect Switches schneider-electric.us Mini-Vario and Vario™ Accessories Table 8.18: Door Mounting Switch Body Dimensions Switch Type V02 to V2 [10] V02 to V2 V3 to V4 V5 to V6 a in. 2.83 2.36 2.56 3.54 mm 72 60 65 90 Dimensions b in. 2.17 2.17 2.36 3.54 mm 55 55 60 90 c in. 2.91 2.91 3.27 4.92 mm 74 74 83 125 Weight Approx. lbs. 0.44 0.44 1.10 2.00 Table 8.19: Shaft Extension and Door Interlock S E H C T I W S T C E N N O C S I D N A S M S I N A H C E M G N I T A R E P O D 8 Door Interlock Plate KZ32 Shaft Extension Kit Add-On Contact Module Terminal Shroud for Main Switch VZ8 Terminal Shroud for Auxiliary Contact VZ29 Main Pole Module Switch Type V02 to V2 V3, V4 V5, V6 V02 to V2 V3, V4 V5, V6 Switch Type V02 to V2 V3, V4 V5, V6 Maximum Panel Depth in. 13.0 12.6 13.8 16.9 16.5 17.7 mm 330 320 351 429 419 450 Line Side Terminal Shroud For Main Switch VZ8 VZ9 VZ10 Extension Shaft Kit VZ17 VZ18 VZ18 VZ30 VZ31 VZ31 Interlock Door Plate KZ 32 KZ 74 KZ 74 KZ 32 KZ 74 KZ 74 Mounting Door Plate KZ83 KZ81 KZ81 KZ83 KZ81 KZ81 Terminal Shroud for Add-on Power Pole VZ26 VZ27 VZ28 Terminal Shroud for Auxiliary Contact VZ29 VZ29 VZ29 Table 8.20: Accessories Table 8.21: Add-On Contact Modules Switch Type V02 V01 V0 V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 V6 Main Pole Module VZ02 VZ01 VZ0 VZ1 VZ2 VZ3 VZ4 — — Main Pole VZ02 VZ01 VZ0 VZ1 VZ2 VZ3 VZ4 — — Auxiliary Contacts Rated UL/IEC 10/12 A 2 N.O. 1 N.O., 1 N.C. VZ7 Early Break, Late Make. VZ20 Ampere Rating UL/IEC 10/12 16/20 20/25 20/32 25/40 45/63 63/80 — — Table 8.22: Add-On Contact Modules Switch Type V02–V2 V3–V4 V5–V6 Modules Early Neutral Make/Late Break Catalog No. Grounding Module Auxiliary Contacts Catalog No. Catalog No. Description VZ11 VZ12 VZ13 VZ14 VZ15 VZ16 VZ7 VZ20 — 1 Late Make N.O. & 1 Early Break N.C. 2 N.O. Contacts — Table 8.23: Labeling Accessories Nameplate Holder with Nameplate Catalog No. Size 45 x 45 mm 60 x 60 mm 90 x 90 mm KZ13 KZ15 KZ103 Nameplate Holder Only Catalog No. KZ14 KZ16 KZ101 Nameplate Only Use With KZ14 KZ16 KZ1010 Table 8.24: Shrouds Switch Type V02–V2 V3–V4 V5–V6 — 3-Pole Shroud Catalog No. VZ8 VZ9 VZ10 — Single-Pole Shroud For Add-On Power Pole VZ02-VZ2, VZ11 & VZ14 VZ23, VZ4, VZ12 & VZ15 VZ13 & VZ16 For 2-Pole Aux. Contact Catalog No. KZ76 KZ77 KZ100 Catalog No. VZ26 VZ27 VZ28 VZ29 Table 8.25: Main Pole Module Dimensions Switch Type V 02 to V Z2 V Z3 to V Z4 a in. 0.63 0.79 mm 16 20 Dimensions b in. 2.9 3.3 mm 74 83 c in. 1.38 1.80 mm 35 46 Weight Approx. lbs. 0.10 0.22 [10] Dimensions for single-hole mounting. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 8-7 1.73441.5-6abc.2175.5.2175.52.68682.68681.89481.8948.51213.51213abc11/10/2017


page 266

UL 508 Motor Disconnect Switches 8 MD Motor Disconnect Switches Class 3110 / Refer to Catalog 3100CT0901 schneider-electric.us D O P E R A T I N G M E C H A N I S M S A N D I S C O N N E C T S W I T C H E S MD Motor Disconnect Switches The MD motor disconnect switch is listed UL 508 Suitable for Motor Control (UL File E164864) and conforms to IEC standard 60947-3. It is in a compact NEMA 4X enclosure suitable for use in NEMA 1, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, and 12 applications. The MD's key benefits are an extremely small footprint, a more economically efficient NEMA 4X solution, and a handle interlock preventing cover removal when the switch is in the ON position. Switch features: • Suitable for NEMA 1, 3R, 4, 4X, and 12 enclosure applications. • Complies with OSHA lockout/tagout requirements—accepts up to three 8 mm • For accessories, see Table 8.20. Table 8.26: MD Motor Disconnect Switch—Non-Metallic NEMA 1, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, and 12 Enclosure padlocks. Amperes Cat. No. 30 60 MD3304X MD3604X Table 8.27: MD Motor Disconnect Accessories Maximum Horsepower Ratings 220–240 7.5 20 Three-Phase Vac 440–480 20 40 600 25 40 Height (in.) 6.38 8.27 Width (in.) 3.9 4.94 Depth (in.) 4.37 4.37 Cat. No. MDSAN20 MDSAN11 MDS30P MD Motor Disconnect Switch Description 2 N.O. auxiliary contact module 1 N.O. and 1 N.C. auxiliary contact module 30 A add on power pole 8-8 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved DHW11/10/2017


page 267

TeSys™ VLS Disconnect Switches schneider-electric.us Refer to Catalog 9400CT1601 UL 60947-4-1 and UL 98 Disconnect Switches mounting • Versions: DIN rail mounting, door mounting, and rear • Wide range of accessories • Changeover switches • Conforming to UL 60947-4-1 (16–63 A) or UL 98 (63–125 A) specifications Style Width Ampere rating Three pole 4th pole—simultaneous closing 4th pole—early-make closing Fuse holder Mechanical 6-8 pole coupling system Mechanical interlock for line switching Disconnect Switches, 16–125 A 70 mm (2.75 in.) 63 ● ● ● 80 ● ● ● 25 ● ● ● ● ● ● DIN Rail, Rear Mounting 36 mm (1.42 in.) 16 32 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Interpreting the Catalog Number Some combinations are not available. Use this table only for interpreting the catalog number. Door Mounting 36 mm (1.42 in.) 16 32 ● ● ● ● ● ● 70 mm (2.75 in.) 63 ● ● ● 125 ● ● ● 100 ● ● ● 40 ● ● ● ● ● 63 ● ● ● ● ● 100 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 25 ● ● ● 40 ● ● ● 80 ● ● ● S E H C T I W S T C E N N O C S I D N A S M S I N A H C E M G N I T A R E P O D 125 ● ● ● 8 Table 8.28: Interpreting the Catalog Number Example Description VLS Disconnect switch 3P 1P = 1 pole 3P = 3 poles 016 016 = 16 A 025 = 25 A 032 = 32 A 040 = 40 A 063 = 63 A 080 = 80 A 100 = 100 A 125 = 125 A R D = Door mounting R = DIN rail mounting 1 1 = Small size (16–63 A), UL 508 2 = Large size (63–125 A), UL 98 Example Description VLSH Rotary handle 2 1 = Recessed, 65 x 65 mm 2 = Protruding, 65 x 65 mm 3 = Pistol grip, 75 mm dia. 4 = Protruding, 48 x 48 mm S H = Hole fixing S = Screw mounting Example Description VLSS Shafts Example Description VLS Additional Poles 150 Length: 150–500 mm 1P Number of Poles: 1P = 1 Pole 5 5 = 5 mm shaft opening 7 = 7 mm shaft opening R B = Black BC = Black, changeover BD = Black, defeatable R = Red RD = Red, defeatable 5 Cross-section: 5 = 5 mm 7 = 7 mm 040 Current: 016 = 16 A to 125 = 125 A R Mounting: R = DIN rail mounted D = Door mounted 1 Body Size: 1 = Small size (16–63 A) 2 = Large size (63–125 A) S Closing: S = Simultaneous closing E = Early Make closing Example Description VLS Ground and Neutral Terminals 1N 1G = 1 Pole Ground terminal 1N = 1 Pole Neutral terminal R R = DIN rail mounted D = Door mounted Example Description VLS Auxiliary contacts A A = Auxiliary contact 11 10 = 1 N.O. 11 = 1 N.O. + 1 N.C. R R = DIN rail mounted D = Door mounted 1 Blank = Size 1 and 2 1 = Size 1 2 = Size 2 1 1 = Small size (16–63 A), UL 508 2 = Large size (63–125 A), UL 98 S S = Simultaneous closing E = Early make closing © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 8-9 11/10/2017


page 268

UL 60947-4-1 and UL 98 Disconnect Switches 8 TeSys™ VLS Disconnect Switches Refer to Catalog 9400CT1601 schneider-electric.us D O P E R A T I N G M E C H A N I S M S A N D I S C O N N E C T S W I T C H E S VLS3P016R1– VLS3P063R1 VLS3P063R2– VLS3P125R2 VLS3P016D1– VLS3P040D1 VLS3P063D2– VLS3P125D2 Table 8.31: UL / CSA Ratings Horsepower Catalog number 1 phase 120 V 240 V UL 60947-4-1 and CSA 22.2 n° 60947-4-1-14 [1] VLS3P016•• VLS3P025•• VLS3P032•• VLS3P040•• 1 1.5 2 2 2 3 5 5 Product Overview Compact Size The three-pole 16–63 A disconnect switches are made up of a single unit body, a mere 36 mm (1.4 in.) wide, while those rated 63–125 A are only 70 mm (2.8 in.) wide. Accessory Flexibility Mounting and removal of the fourth pole and add-on blocks are simple and quick operations with no need for tools. Certifications All VLS disconnect switches are certified by cCSAus and are UL Listed for Canada and USA: • 16–63 A types: certified according to UL 60947-4-1 / CSA 22.2 n° 60947-4-1-14 • 63–125 A types: certified according to UL 98 / CSA 22.2 n° 4 standards Three-Pole Disconnect Switches Table 8.29: Certifications and Compliance (● = certification obtained) Catalog number standards IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-3 cULus per UL 60947-4-1 / CSA C22.2 n° 60947-4-1-14 UL Listed (File E487906) ● ● ● cULus per UL 98 / CSA C22.2 n° 4 UL Listed (File E487907) — — — — — ● ● VLS3P016R1– VLS3P040R1 VLS3P063R1 VLS3P016D1– VLS3P040D1 VLS3P063R2– VLS3P125R2 VLS3P063D2– VLS3P125D2 Compliant UL general use at 600 Vac (A) Table 8.30: Selection—Three-Pole Disconnect Switches Catalog number IEC rated operational current (Ie) AC22A (≤690 V), AC23A (≤415 V) (A) IEC conventional free air thermal current (Ith), AC21A (≤690 V) (A) 16 25 32 40 63 63 80 100 125 DIN rail mounting version, complete with black handle. For rear-mounting version, separately purchase the handle and shaft extension. Refer to page 8-16 and page 8-18. 16 VLS3P016R1 25 VLS3P025R1 32 VLS3P032R1 VLS3P040R1 40 45 VLS3P063R1 63 VLS3P063R2 80 VLS3P080R2 100 VLS3P100R2 VLS3P125R2 125 Door-mounting version (no shaft required). Separately purchase the handle. Refer to page page 8-16. VLS3P016D1 VLS3P025D1 VLS3P032D1 VLS3P040D1 VLS3P063D2 VLS3P080D2 VLS3P100D2 VLS3P125D2 16 25 32 40 60 60 100 100 100 16 25 32 40 63 80 100 125 16 25 32 40 60 100 100 100 16 25 32 40 63 80 100 125 3 phase 200–208 V 5 7.5 10 10 240 V 480 V 600 V General use at 600 Vac (A) Short-circuit rating at 600 Vac (kA) Max. fuse rating at 600 V (A) 5 7.5 10 15 10 15 20 20 10 20 20 25 16 25 32 40 5 5 5 5 30 (Type RK5) 30 (Type RK5) 45 (Type RK5) 45 (Type RK5) [1] Ratings are valid for VLS3P•••R• and VLS3P•••D• types, according to UL 60947-4-1 and CSA 22.2 n° 60947-4-1-14. UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E487907) as Manual Motor Controllers, while the UL designation is “General Purpose Switch. Interrupteur Usage General” and “Suitable As Motor Disconnect.” 8-10 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Strokes of VLS switch polesTravel 010°30°60°90°60°60°55°55°OffOnVLS3P016R1–VLS3P063R1VLS3P016D1–VLS3P040D1VLS3P063R2–VLS3P125R2VLS3P063D2–VLS3P125D211/10/2017


page 269

TeSys™ VLS Accessories schneider-electric.us Table 8.31 UL / CSA Ratings (cont'd.) Catalog number Refer to Catalog 9400CT1601 VLS3P063R1 UL 98 and CSA C22.2 n° 4 [2] VLS3P063•• VLS3P080•• VLS3P100•• VLS3P125•• 3 3 5 7.5 UL 60947-4-1 and UL 98 Disconnect Switches Horsepower 1 phase 120 V 2 240 V 7.5 3 phase 200–208 V 10 240 V 15 480 V 30 600 V 30 General use at 600 Vac (A) 60 Short-circuit rating at 600 Vac (kA) 5 Max. fuse rating at 600 V (A) 45 (Type RK5) 7.5 10 10 10 20 [3] 25 [3] 30 [3] 30 [3] 20 25 30 30 40 40 50 60 40 40 50 60 60 100 100 100 Fourth Pole Add-on Table 8.32: General Specifications—Fourth Pole Add-on IEC ampere ratings Available versions 50 50 50 50 16–125 A DIN rail mounting Door mounting Simultaneous closing with switch poles Early-make closing with respect to switch poles Compact and modular Size 60 100 100 100 S E H C T I W S T C E N N O C S I D N A S M S I N A H C E M G N I T A R E P O D 8 VLS1P•••R•S VLS1P•••R•E VLS1P040D1S VLS1P040D1E Table 8.33: Selection—Fourth Pole Add-on Catalog number IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith AC21A (≤690V) (A) IEC rated operational current Ie AC22A (≤690V), AC23A (≤415V) (A) 40 45 63 80 100 125 Simultaneous closing operation with respect to switch poles DIN Rail Mounting (VLS3P•••R•) 40 VLS1P040R1S [4] 63 VLS1P063R1S [5] 63 VLS1P063R2S 80 VLS1P080R2S 100 VLS1P100R2S VLS1P125R2S 125 Door Mounting (VLS3P•••D•) VLS1P040D1S [6] VLS1P063D2S VLS1P080D2S VLS1P100D2S VLS1P125D2S Early-make closing operation with respect to switch poles DIN Rail Mounting (VLS3P•••R•) 40 VLS1P040R1E [4] 63 VLS1P063R1E [6] VLS1P125R2E [7] 125 Door Mounting (VLS3P•••D•) VLS1P040D1E [6] VLS1P125D2E [8] NOTE: For Fourth Pole UL / CSA ratings, see page 8-10 —they are the same as the ratings for the corresponding single-phase contact switch. 40 63 80 100 125 40 63 80 100 125 40 45 125 40 125 40 125 Table 8.34: Certifications and Compliance for Fourth Pole Add-on Blocks (● = certification obtained) Catalog number VLS1P040R1E, VLS1P040R1S VLS1P063R1E, VLS1P063R1S VLS1P040D1E, VLS1P040D1S VLS1P125R2E, VLS1P125D2E VLS1P063R2S–VLS1P125R2S VLS1P063D2S–VLS1P125D2S Certification Standard cULus per UL 60947-4-1 / CSA C22.2 n° 60947-4-1-14 / UL Listed (File E487906) ● ● ● — — — cULus per UL 98 / CSA C22.2 n° 4 / UL Listed (File E487907) — — — ● ● ● IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-3 Compliant [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] Ratings are valid for VLS3P•••R• and VLS3P•••D• types, according to UL 98 and CSA C22.2 n° 4. UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E487907) as Open Type Switches – Open type unfused switch, while UL designation is “General Purpose Switch. Interrupteur Usage General.” Voltage value is not considered in UL98 / CSA 22.2 n° 4 standards, and so is not indicated in the UL product marking. For VLS3P016R1–040R1 only. For VLS3P063R1 only. For VLS3P016D1–040D1 only. For VLS3P063R2–125R2 only. For VLS3P063D2–125D2 only. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 8-11 Strokes of VLS poles (switch and add-on pole)Travel 010°30°60°90°60°60°55°55°55°48°OffOnVLS3P016R1/D1–VLS3P040R1/D1, VLS3P063R1Main polesVLS1P040R1S–VLS1P063R1SSimultaneous fourth-pole add on VLS1P040R1E/D1E, VLS1P063R1EEarly-make fourth-pole add onVLS3P063R2/D2–VLS3P125R2/D2Main polesVLS1P063R2S/D2S–VLS1P125R2S/D2SSimultaneous fourth-pole add onVLS1P125R2E/D2EEarly-make fourth-pole add on11/10/2017


page 270

UL 60947-4-1 and UL 98 Disconnect Switches 8 TeSys™ VLS Accessories Refer to Catalog 9400CT1601 schneider-electric.us D O P E R A T I N G M E C H A N I S M S A N D I S C O N N E C T S W I T C H E S Add-on Blocks Table 8.35: Operational Specifications Auxiliary contacts IEC conventional free air thermal current (Ith) UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation Tightening torque 10 A A600-Q600 0.8 N•m (7.1 lb-in.) Other devices Tightening torque VLS1NR1/D1, VLS1GR1/D1 terminals VLS1NR2/D2, VLS1GR2/D2 terminals VLS8C1/C2, VLS8M1/M2 1.8–2 N•m (16–18 lb-in) 5–6 N•m (45–54 lb-in) mounting: 0.5 N•m (4.4 lb-in) extension with handle: 0.8 N•m (7.1 lb-in) VLSA11RS VLSA11DS 1NO+1NC for VLS3P•••R• and VLS3P063R1 1NO+1NC for VLS3P•••D• 1EB (NO) for VLS3P016R1–VLS3P040R1, VLS3P063R1 1EB (NO) for VLS3P063R2–VLS3P125R2 Specifications Table 8.36: Selection—Add-on Blocks Catalog number Auxiliary contacts, simultaneous operation with respect to switch poles VLSA11RS VLSA11DS Auxiliary contacts, early-break operation with respect to switch poles VLSA10R1E VLSA10R2E Neutral terminal VLS1NR1 VLS1NR2 VLS1ND1 VLS1ND2 Earth/Ground terminal VLS1GR1 VLS1GR2 VLS1GD1 VLS1GD2 Mechanical interlock for line changeover (I-0-II) VLS8C1 VLS8C2 Mechanical coupling system for 6-8 pole disconnect switches VLS8M1 VLS8M2 For VLS3P016R1–VLS3P040R1, VLS3P063R1 For VLS3P063R2–VLS3P125R2 For VLS3P016D1–VLS3P040D1 For VLS3P063D2–VLS3P125D2 For VLS3P016R1–VLS3P040R1, VLS3P063R1 For VLS3P063R2–VLS3P125R2 For VLS3P016D1–VLS3P040D1 For VLS3P063D2–VLS3P125D2 For VLS3P016R1–VLS3P040R1, VLS3P063R1, and VLSH2S5BC: □ 5 mm (0.2 in.) [9] For VLS3P063R2–VLS3P125R2 and VLSH2S5BC: □ 5 mm (0.2 in.) [9] For VLS3P016R1–VLS3P040R1 and VLS3P063R1: □ 5 mm (0.2 in.) [9] For VLS3P063R2–VLS3P125R2: □ 7 mm (0.3 in.) [10] VLSA10R1E VLSA10R2E VLS1NR• VLS1GR• VLS1ND• VLS1GD• VLS8C• VLS8M• Use VLSS shaft extensions. [9] [10] Use VLSH3S7RD handles and VLSS•••7 extensions for a rear-mounting version. 8-12 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Strokes of VLS poles (switch with auxiliary contact blocks)Travel 0¡10°30°60°90°60°60°40°Travel 0¡160°Travel 1¡070°55°45°25°Travel 0¡155°Travel 1¡065°OffOnVLS3P016R1/D1, VLS3P040R1/D1, VLS3P063R1 Main polesVLSA11RS/DSAuxiliary contacts (1 NO + 1 NC)NONCVLSA10R1EAuxiliary contact(1EB – NO early break)VLS3P063R2/D2…VLS3P125R2/D2Main polesVLSA11RS/DSAuxiliary contacts (1 NO + 1 NC)NONCVLSA10R2EAuxiliary contact (1EB – NO early break)11/10/2017


page 271

S E H C T I W S T C E N N O C S I D N A S M S I N A H C E M G N I T A R E P O D 8 TeSys™ VLS Accessories schneider-electric.us Refer to Catalog 9400CT1601 UL 60947-4-1 and UL 98 Disconnect Switches Sequence and Maximum Combination of Add-on Blocks DIN Rail Mounting Disconnect Switches Table 8.37: VLS3P016R1–VLS3P040R1 (DIN Rail Mounting) VLS1NR1 VLS1GR1 VLSA11RS VLSA10R1E 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 — — — — — — 1 1 — — — — — VLS1P040R1E VLS1P040R1S 1 — 1 — — — — — 1 — Table 8.38: VLS3P063R1 (DIN Rail Mounting) VLS3P016R1 VLS3P025R1 VLS3P032R1 VLS3P040R1 VLS1P040R1E VLS1P040R1S — 1 — 1 — — — 1 — — VLSA10R1E VLSA11RS VLS1GR1 VLS1NR1 — — 1 — — 1 — — — — 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 — — — 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 VLS1NR1 VLS1GR1 VLSA11RS VLSA10R1E 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 — — — — — — 1 1 — — — — — VLS1P063R1E VLS1P063R1S 1 — 1 — — — — — 1 — Table 8.39: VLS3P063R2–VLS3P125R2 (DIN Rail Mounting) VLS3P063R1 VLS1P063R1E VLS1P063R1S — 1 — 1 — — — 1 — — VLSA10R1E VLSA11RS VLS1GR1 VLS1NR1 — — 1 — — 1 — — — — 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 — — — 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 VLS1NR2 VLS1GR2 VLSA11RS VLSA10R2E — — — — — — — 1 1 1 — — — — — — — 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 — — — — — — 1 1 — — — — — VLS1P125R2E VLS1P•••R•S 1 — 1 — — — — — 1 — VLS3P063R2 VLS3P080R2 VLS3P100R2 VLS3P125R2 VLS1P125R2E VLS1P•••R•S — 1 — 1 — — — 1 — — VLSA10R2E VLSA11RS VLS1GR2 VLS1NR2 — — 1 — — 1 — — — — 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 — — — — — — — — — — 1 1 1 — — — — — — — 1 1 1 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 8-13 11/10/2017


page 272

UL 60947-4-1 and UL 98 Disconnect Switches 8 TeSys™ VLS Accessories Refer to Catalog 9400CT1601 schneider-electric.us D O P E R A T I N G M E C H A N I S M S A N D I S C O N N E C T S W I T C H E S Table 8.40: VLS3P016D1–VLS3P040D1 (Door Mounting) Door Mounting Disconnect Switches VLS1ND1 VLS1GD1 VLSA11DS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 — 1 1 — VLS3P016D1 VLS3P025D1 VLS3P032D1 VLS3P040D1 VLS1P040D1E VLS1P040D1S 1 — 1 — — — Table 8.41: VLS3P063D2–VLS3P125D2 (Door Mounting) VLS1P040D1E VLS1P040D1S — 1 — 1 — — VLSA11DS VLS1GD1 VLS1ND1 1 1 1 — 1 — 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 VLS1ND2 VLS1GD2 VLSA11DS — — 1 — — 1 — — 1 — — 1 1 1 — 1 1 — VLS1P125D2E VLS1P125D2S 1 — 1 — — — VLS3P063D2 VLS3P080D2 VLS3P100D2 VLS3P125D2 VLS1P125D2E VLS1P125D2S — 1 — 1 — — VLSA11DS VLS1GD2 VLS1ND2 1 1 1 — 1 — — — — 1 — 1 — — — 1 — 1 8-14 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 273

TeSys™ VLS Accessories schneider-electric.us Refer to Catalog 9400CT1601 UL 60947-4-1 and UL 98 Disconnect Switches Table 8.42: VLS3P016R1–VLS3P040R1, VLS8C1–VLS8M1 (Rear Mounting) Mechanical Coupling and Mechanical Interlock for Line Changeover VLS1NR1 VLS1GR1 VLSA11RS VLSA10R1E 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 — — — — — — 1 1 — — — — VLS1P040R1E VLS1P040R1S 1 1 — 1 — — — — 1 — VLS8C1–VLS8M1 VLS3P016R1 + VLS3P016R1 VLS3P025R1 + VLS3P025R1 VLS3P032R1 + VLS3P032R1 VLS3P040R1 + VLS3P040R1 VLS1P040R1E VLS1P040R1S 1 — 1 — 1 — — — 1 — VLSA10R1E VLSA11RS VLS1GR1 VLS1NR1 — — — 1 — — 1 — — — 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 — — 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Table 8.43: VLS3P063R1 + VLS8C1–VLS8M1 (Rear Mounting) S E H C T I W S T C E N N O C S I D N A S M S I N A H C E M G N I T A R E P O D 8 VLS1NR1 VLS1GR1 VLSA11RS VLSA10R1E 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Table 8.44: VLS3P063R2–VLS3P125R2 + VLS8C2–VLS8M2 (Rear Mounting) — — — — 1 1 — — — — 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 — — VLS1P063R1E VLS1P063R1S 1 1 — 1 — — — — 1 — VLS8C1– VLS8M1 VLS3P063R1 + VLS3P063R1 VLS1P063R1E VLS1P063R1S 1 — 1 — 1 — — — 1 — VLSA10R1E VLSA11RS VLS1GR1 VLS1NR1 — — — 1 — — 1 — — — 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 — — 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 VLS1NR2 VLS1GR2 VLSA11RS VLSA10R2E — — — — — — — — 1 1 — — — — — — — — 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 — — — — — — 1 1 — — — — VLS1P125R2E VLS1P•••R•S 1 1 — 1 — — — — 1 — VLS8C2 - VLS8M2 VLS1P125R2E VLS3P063R2 + VLS3P063R2 VLS3P080R2 + VLS3P080R2 VLS3P100R2 + VLS3P100R2 VLS3P125R2 + VLS3P125R2 VLS1P•••R•S 1 — 1 — 1 — — — 1 — VLSA10R2E VLSA11RS VLS1GR2 VLS1NR2 — — — 1 — — 1 — — — 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 — — — — — — — — — — 1 1 — — — — — — — — 1 1 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 8-15 11/10/2017


page 274

UL 60947-4-1 and UL 98 Disconnect Switches 8 TeSys™ VLS Accessories Refer to Catalog 9400CT1601 schneider-electric.us D O P E R A T I N G M E C H A N I S M S A N D I S C O N N E C T S W I T C H E S VLSH1S5R (65 x 65 mm) VLSH2S5R (65 x 65 mm) VLSH3S7RD (75 mm dia.) VLSH4S5R (48 x 48 mm) Figure 8.1: Transformation of the DIN rail mounting version into the rear mounting version Specifications Rotary Handles Table 8.45: Selection—Rotary Handles (NEMA 1, 12, 3R, 4, and 4X. IEC IP65 unless otherwise specified) Catalog number Door Mounting and Rear Mounting Handles, Padlock-ready[11] Red/yellow, rotating VLSH1S5R VLSH2S5R VLSH2H5R For VLS3P•••R• and VLS3P•••D•. Screw mounting. Recessed selector. □ 5 mm (0.2 in.) [12]. For VLS3P•••R• and VLS3P•••D•. Screw mounting. Protruding selector. □ 5 mm (0.2 in.). [12] For VLS3P•••R• and VLS3P016D1–VLS3P040D1. Ring mounting. Protruding selector. □ 5 mm (0.2 in.). [12] [13] For VLS3P•••R•. Ring mounting. Protruding selector with release, defeatable per UL60947-4-1; □ 5 mm (0.2 in.). [12] For VLS3P063R2–VLS3P125R2, and VLS8M2. Screw mounting. Pistol grip with release, defeatable per 60947-4-1; □ 7 mm (0.3 in.). IEC IP66. [14] For For VLS3P•••R• and VLS3P•••D•. Screw mounting. Protruding selector. 48 mm square. □ 5 mm (0.2 in.). [12] VLSH2H5RD VLSH3S7RD VLSH4S5R Black, rotating VLSH1S5B VLSH2S5B VLSH2H5B VLSH2H5BD VLSH3S7BD For VLS3P•••R• and VLS3P•••D•. Screw mounting. Recessed selector. □ 5 mm (0.2 in.). [12] For VLS3P•••R• and VLS3P•••D•. Screw mounting. Protruding selector. □ 5 mm (0.2 in.). [12] For VLS3P•••R•, VLS3P063R1, VLS3P016D1–VLS3P040D1. Ring mounting. Protruding selector. □ 5 mm (0.2 in.). [12] [13] For VLS3P•••R•. Ring mounting. Protruding selector with release, defeatable per 60947-4-1. □ 5 mm (0.2 in.). [12] For VLS3P063R2–VLS3P125R2, and VLS8M2. Screw mounting. Pistol grip with release, defeatable per UL60947-4-1; □ 7 mm (0.3 in.). [14] For VLS8C• mechanical interlock mechanism (I-O-II). □ 5 mm (0.2 in.). [12] For For VLS3P•••R• and VLS3P•••D•. Screw mounting. Protruding selector. □ 5 mm (0.2 in.). [12] VLSH2S5BC VLSH4S5B Accessories for Rear Mounting Control For VLSH3S7RD and VLSH3S7BD handles. VLSHA7 Adapter, □ 7 mm (0.3 in.) for VLS3P063R2-–VLS3P125R2. VLSH2H5B (65 x 65 mm) VLSH2S5BC (65 x 65 mm) VLSH4S5B (48 x 48 mm) VLSHA7 Table 8.46: Certifications and Compliance (● = certification obtained) Catalog number cULus per UL60947-4-1 / CSA C22.2 n° 60947-4-1-14 UL Listed (File E487906) VLSA11RS/DS VLSA10R1E VLSA10R2E VLS1NR1/D1 VLS1NR2/D2 VLS1GR1/D1 VLS1GR2/D2 VLS8C1/M1 VLS8C2/M2 VLSH1S5R/B VLSH2S5R/B VLSH2H5R/B VLSH4S5R/B VLSH2S5RD/BD VLSH3S7RD/BD VLSH2H5BC VLSHA7 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL 60947-4-1, UL 98, CSA C22.2. UL Listed, cULus File E478582 CSA C22.2 n° 14-10 ● — ● — ● — ● ● ● ● ● — ● — cULus per UL98 / CSA C22.2 n° 4 UL Listed (File E487907) — — — — ● — ● — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● For VLS3P•••R• disconnect switches, separately purchase VLSS shaft extensions. [11] Catalog numbers ending in BD or RD are for rear mounting units only. [12] [13] Snap-on mounting of VLS3P016–VLS3P040D1 disconnect switches with the handle. [14] Separately purchase the VLSS•••7 shaft extension and a VLSHA7 handle having a 7 mm (0.3 in.) square section—not required for VLS8M2. 8-16 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved VLSH2H5BC650IIIVLS3P…R1+VLS8C…1 /+VLS8M…1VLSS…5VLS3P...R2+VLS8C…2 /+VLS8M…211/10/2017


page 275

schneider-electric.us Table 8.47: Operating Specifications Handle mounting Mounting handle interaxis (compatible with the pre-existing drillings of the most common types in the marketplace) VLSH1S5R/B VLSH2S5R/B VLSH2S5BC VLSH3S7RD/BD Padlocks Tightening torque Degree of protection Mounting ring types VLS8M1 VLSH3S7RD/BD All others TeSys™ VLS Accessories Refer to Catalog 9400CT1601 UL 60947-4-1 and UL 98 Disconnect Switches ring or screw 36 x 36 mm (1.4 x 1.4 in.) or 48 x 48 mm (1.9 x 1.9 in.) 36 x 36 mm (1.4 x1.4 in.) 1–3 for all handles Ø4–8 mm (Ø0.2–0.3 in.) 2.3 N•m (20.4 lb-in) 0.8 N•m (7 lb-in) 1.5 N•m (13.3 lb-in) 1 N•m (9 lb-in) IEC / EN: IP65 for all except VLSH3S7RD/BD, which are IP66. UL / CSA: VLSH1S5R/B and VLSH3S7RD/BD are Type 1, 12, 3R, 4, and 4X outdoor use with all VLS switch models. VLSH2S5R/B, VLSH2H5R/B, VLSH2H5RD/BD and VLSH2S5BC are Types 1, 12, 3R, 4, and 4X outdoor use with VLS3P016R1/D1–VLS3P040R1/D1 and VLS3P063R1 models, otherwise Type 1 only. S E H C T I W S T C E N N O C S I D N A S M S I N A H C E M G N I T A R E P O D 8 Figure 8.3: Door mounting version Certifications and Compliance: See Table 8.46 for details. Figure 8.2: Changing the DIN rail mounting version for rear mounting © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 8-17 VLSH2S5RD/BDVLS3P016R1VLS3P025R1VLS3P032R1VLS3P040R1VLS3P063R1VLSH2H5R/BVLSH2H5RD/BDVLSH1S5R/BVLSH4S5R/BVLSH2S5R/B( 5 mm)VLSS1505VLSS3005VLSS5005VLSH2H5R/BVLSH1S5BVLS3P063R2VLS3P080R2VLS3P100R2VLS3P125R2VLSHA7VLSS1507VLSS3007VLSH3S7RD/BDDDDEEEEEDDCBA( 5 mm)VLSH2H5R/BVLS3P016D1VLS3P025D1VLS3P032D1VLS3P040D1VLS3P016D1VLS3P025D1VLS3P032D1VLS3P040D1VLS3P063D2VLS3P080D2VLS3P100D2VLS3P125D2VLSH2S5R/BVLSH4S5R/BVLSH1S5R/BVLSH2H5R/BVLSH1S5B11/10/2017


page 276

UL 60947-4-1 and UL 98 Disconnect Switches 8 TeSys™ VLS Accessories Refer to Catalog 9400CT1601 schneider-electric.us Shaft Extensions, Terminal Covers, Fuse Holders, and Fuse Blocks Table 8.48: Selection—Shaft Extensions, Terminal Covers, Fuse Holders, and Fuse Blocks Catalog number Shaft extension for rear-mounting handles VLSH1S5R–VLSH2H5RD, VLSH1S5B–VLSH2H5BD, VLSH2H5BC; interlocking changeover type VLS8C1, VLS8C2; and mechanical disconnect switch system VLS8M1 VLSS1505 150 mm long; □ 5 mm (0.2 in.) Qty per package Specifications Weight, kg (lb) D O P E R A T I N G M E C H A N I S M S A N D I S C O N N E C T S W I T C H E S VLSS•••5 (5 mm) VLSS•••7 (7 mm) VLSS3005 300 mm long; □ 5 mm (0.2 in.) VLSS5005 500 mm long; □ 5 mm (0.2 in.) 1 1 Shaft extension for rear-mounting handles VLSH3S7RD/BD, and mechanical coupling system VLS8M2 VLSS1507 150 mm long; □ 7 mm (0.3 in.) 1 VLSS3007 300 mm long; □ 7 mm (0.3 in.) Set of 2 one-pole terminal covers for fourth pole VLSC1P1 VLSC1P2 For VLS1P040R1S, VLS1P040D1S, VLS1P040R1E, VLS1P040D1E, VLS1P063R1E, VLS1P063R1S For VLS1P063R2S–VLS1P125R2S, VLS1P063D2S–VLS1P125D2S, VLS1P125R2E, VLS1P125D2E VLSC VLSFH1UL Set of 2 three-pole terminal covers VLSC3P1 For VLS3P016R1–VLS3P040R1, VLS3P063R1, VLS3P016D1–VLS3P040D1 VLSC3P2 For VLS3P063R2–VLS3P125R2, VLS3P063D2–VLS3P125D2 Fuse holder/block for disconnect switches VLSFH1UL For VLS3P016R1–VLS3P032R1 (suitable for Class CC fuses) Table 8.49: Operational Specifications of Fuse Holder IEC rated insulation voltage, Ui IEC rated impulse withstand voltage, Uimp • The fuse holder/block connects directly to the disconnect switches. • Access to fuses only when the disconnect switches are in Off position. 1000 V 8 kV Terminal covers 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.032 (0.07) 0.068 (0.15) 0.090 (0.20) 0.090 (0.20) 0.160 (0.35) 0.009 (0.02) 0.012 (0.03) 0.018 (0.04) 0.030 (0.07) 0.135 (0.30) For disconnect switches For fourth pole Table 8.50: Certifications and Compliance (● = certification obtained) Catalog number VLSS1505, VLSS3005, VLSS5005 VLSS1507, VLSS3007 VLSC1P1, VLSC3P1 VLSC1P2, VLSC3P2 VLSFH1UL Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-3, UL60947-4-1, UL98, CSA C22.2. cULus per UL60947-4-1 / CSA C22.2 n° 60947-4-1-14 UL Listed (File E487906) ● ● — — ● cULus per UL98 / CSA C22.2 n° 4 UL Listed (File E487907) — — — — — 8-18 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved VLS3P…R1VLS3P...R2VLSC3P1VLSC3P2VLSC3P1VLSC3P2VLS3P…D1VLS3P...D2VLSC1P1VLSC1P2VLS1P…D1VLS1P…D2 VLSC1P1VLSC1P2VLS1P…R1VLS1P…R2 11/10/2017


page 277

schneider-electric.us Dimensions: 16–125 A Disconnect Switches Refer to Catalog 9400CT1601 UL 60947-4-1 and UL 98 Disconnect Switches Table 8.51: DIN Rail Mounting Disconnect Switches VLS3P016R1–VLS3P040R1, VLS3P063R1 VLS3P063R2–VLS3P125R2 Dim. = mm (in.) S E H C T I W S T C E N N O C S I D N A S M S I N A H C E M G N I T A R E P O D Table 8.52: Door Mounting Disconnect Switches VLS3P016D1–VLS3P040D1 VLS3P063D2–VLS3P125D2 8 Table 8.53: Add-on Blocks and Accessories For VLS3P016R1–VLS3P040R1, VLS3P063R1 Auxiliary contacts VLSA11RS, VLSA10R1E Fourth pole VLS1P040R1E/R1S, VLS1P063R1E/R1S VLS1NR1 neutral, VLS1GR1 ground terminals For VLS3P063R2–VLS3P125R2 Auxiliary contacts VLSA11RS VLSA10R2E Fourth pole VLS1P125R2E, VLS1P063R2S–VLS1P125R2S VLS1NR2 neutral, VLS1GR2 ground terminals Mechanical interlock VLS8C1 and mechanical coupling system VLS8M1 Mechanical interlock VLS8C2 and mechanical coupling system VLS8M2 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Dim. = mm (in.) Dim. = mm (in.) Dim. = mm (in.) Dim. = mm (in.) 8-19 45 (1.77)32.5(1.28)36(1.42)22(0.87)70 (2.75)14.2 (0.56)43.9 (1.73)5(0.20)74 (2.91)78 (3.07)43.9 (1.73)14.4 (0.57)45(1.77)41.9(1.65)94 (3.70)100 (3.94)5(0.20)70 (2.75)70 (2.75)38.2(1.50)55.5 (2.18)44.8 (1.76)78 (3.07)52.7 (2.07)19.9(0.78)36(1.42)100 (3.94)48.6 (1.91)65 (2.56)70 (2.75)20.8(0.82)78 (3.07)72.6 (2.86)41.6(1.64)43.6 (1.72)46.2 (1.82)VLSA10R1EVLSA11RS 12(0.47)9(0.35)43.6 (1.72)70 (2.75)78 (3.07)32.5(1.28)VLS3P016R1, VLS3P025R1, VLS3P032R1, VLS3P040R1, VLS3P063R1, VLSA11RS12(0.47)5(0.20)48.9 (1.93)46.2 (1.82)78 (3.07)72.6 (2.86)41.6(1.64)VLSA11RSVLSA10R2E12(0.47)9(0.35)70 (2.75)43.9 (1.73)100 (3.94)5(0.20)VLS3P063R2, VLS3P080R2, VLS3P100R2, VLS3P125R2, VLSA10R1E, VLSA10R2E, VLS1P063R2S, VLS1P080R2S, VLS1P100R2S, VLS1P125R2S, VLS1P125R223(0.90)78 (3.07)45(1.77)27(1.06)89 (3.50)72 (2.83)VLS8C1 - VLS8M1 45(1.77)27(1.06)89 (3.50)100 (3.94)140 (5.51)VLS8C2 - VLS8M211/10/2017


page 278

UL 60947-4-1 and UL 98 Disconnect Switches 8 For VLS3P016D1–VLS3P040D1 Auxiliary contacts VLSA11DS D O P E R A T I N G M E C H A N I S M S A N D I S C O N N E C T S W I T C H E S Dimensions: 16–125 A Disconnect Switches Refer to Catalog 9400CT1601 schneider-electric.us Fourth pole VLS1P040D1E–VLS1P040D1S VLS1ND1 neutral, VLS1GD1 ground terminals Fourth pole VLS1P125D2E, VLS1P063D2S–125D2S VLS1ND2 neutral, VLS1GD2 ground terminals For VLS3P063D2–VLS3P125D2 Auxiliary contacts VLSA11DS Table 8.54: Rotary handles VLSH1S5R/B VLSH2S5R/B VLSH2H5R/B VLSH2H5RD/BD VLSH3S7RD/BD VLSH2S5BC Dim. = mm (in.) Dim. = mm (in.) Dim. = mm (in.) Dim. = mm (in.) Dim. = mm (in.) VLSH4S5R/B 8-20 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved VLSA11DS78 (3.07)41.6(1.64)72.6 (2.86)8.5(0.33)46.2 (1.82)VLS3P016D1, VLS3P025D1, VLS3P032D1, VLS3P040D1, VLS1P040D1S, VLS1P040D1E 12(0.47)78 (3.07)43 (1.69)VLSA11DS8.5(0.33)46.2 (1.82)41.6(1.64)100 (3.94)72.6 (2.86)100 (3.94)23(0.90)48.6 (1.91)VLS1P063D2S, VLS1P080D2S, VLS1P100D2S, VLS1P125D2S, VLS1P125D2E, VLS1ND1, VLS1ND2, VLS1GD1, VLS1GD265 (2.56)65 (2.56)61.8 (2.43)23(0.90)22(0.87)1–4(0.04–0.16)Ø3 (0.12)36 (1.42)36 (1.42)Ø16 (0.63)28–32(1.10–1.26)28–32(1.10–1.26)36 (1.42)48 (1.89)36 (1.42)65 (2.56)65 (2.56)22(0.87)1–4(0.04–0.16)35(1.38)Ø3 (0.12)Ø16 (0.63)48 (1.89)65 (2.56)65 (2.56)35 (1.38)34.3 (1.35)1–4(0.04–0.16)37 (1.46)Ø32.9(1.29)24.3(0.96)Ø22.5(0.88)3.3 (0.13)Ø20(0.79)24.3(0.96)Ø22.5(0.88)65 (2.56)65 (2.56)1–4(0.04–0.16)35.5(1.40)35(1.38)Ø22(0.87)3.3 (0.13)98 (3.86)60 (2.36)36 (1.42)36 (1.42)Ø32(1.26)1–4(0.04–0.16)46(1.81)75 (2.95)Ø66 (2.60)Ø48 (1.89)Ø4.2 (0.16)65 (2.56)65 (2.56)22(0.87)1–4(0.04–0.16)35(1.38)36 (1.42)48 (1.89)36 (1.42)Ø3 (0.12)Ø16 (0.63)48 (1.89)48 (1.89)16(0.63)21.8(0.86)28–32(1.10–1.26)28–32(1.10–1.26)36 (1.42)36 (1.42)1–4(0.04–0.16)Ø3 (0.12)Ø16 (0.63)Dim. = mm (in.)11/10/2017


page 279

Dimensions: 16–125 A Disconnect Switches Refer to Catalog 9400CT1601 schneider-electric.us Shaft extensions for rear-mounting handles (for Dimension A, see Table 8.55) VLSS UL 60947-4-1 and UL 98 Disconnect Switches Dim. = mm (in.) S E H C T I W S T C E N N O C S I D N A S M S I N A H C E M G N I T A R E P O D Table 8.55: Dimension A for VLSS Shaft Extensions Dimension A for VLSS Shaft Extensions (see below) Extension VLSS1505 VLSS3005 VLSS5005 Length mm (in.) 150 (5.90) 300 (11.81) 500 (19.68) VLSS used with VLS8C1, VLS8C2, and VLS8M1 Maximum Dimension A, mm (in.) Type of handle VLSH 1S5• 194 (7.64) 344 (13.54) 544 (21.42) VLSH 2S5• 192 (7.56) 342 (13.46) 542 (21.34) VLSH 2H5R 197 (7.75) 347 (13.66) 547 (21.53) VLSH 2H5RD 211 (8.31) 361 (14.21) 561 (22.09) VLSH 2S5BC 192 (7.56) 342 (13.46) 542 (21.34) 8 Dim. = mm (in.) Table 8.56: Dimension A1 for VLSS used with VLS8C1, VLS8C2, and VLS8M1 Extension (5 mm) Length mm (in.) A1 maximum, mm (in.) Used with VLS8M1 Type of handle VLSH1S5• 211 (8.31) 361 (14.21) 561(22.09) VLSS1505 VLSS3005 VLSS5005 150 (5.90) 300 (11.81) 500 (19.68) VLSS•••7 used with VLSHA7 and VLSH3S7RD/BD Used with VLS8C1/VLS8C2 VLSH2S5• 209 (8.23) 359 (14.13) 559 (22.01) VLSH2H5R 214 (8.42) 364 (14.33) 564 (22.20) VLSH2H5RD 228 (8.98) 378 (14.88) 578 (22.75) VLSH2S5BC 209 (8.23) 359 (14.13) 559 (22.01) VLSS•••7 used with VLS8M2 and VLSH3S7RD/BD handle Dim. = mm (in.) Extension (7 mm) VLSS1507 VLSS2007 VLSS3007 Length mm (in.) 176 (6.93) 226 (8.90) 326 (12.83) B with VLSH3S7RD/BD handle mm (in.) 118–229 (4.64–9.01) 118–279 (4.64–10.99) 118–379 (4.64–14.92) B1 mm (in.) 119–205 (4.68–8.07) 119–255 (4.68–10.03) 119–355 (4.68–13.98) © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 8-21 VLSS…5VLSH…565 (2.56)5 (0.20)VLS3P016R1…063R165 (2.56)AVLSS..5VLSH..5VLS3P 063…125R265 (2.56)5 (0.20)65 (2.56)A23(0.90)VLS8M1VLSS…VLSH…A1VLS3P016R1–063R165 (2.56)78 (3.07)VLS8C2VLSS...5VLSH2S5BCA1VLS3P063R2, VLS3P080R2, VLS3P100R2, VLS3P125R220(0.90)65 (2.56)100 (3.94)VLS3P063R2–125R298 (3.86)60 (2.36)1–4(0.04–0.16)19(0.75)46 (1.81)75 (2.95)20 ±1(0.79 ±0.04)min. 10(0.39)48 (1.89)88 (3.46)73 (2.87)5 (0.20)40(1.57)VLSS•••7VLSH3S7RD/BDVLSHA7Ø66(2.60)BVLS8M2B1VLS3P063R2–125R2VLSS...7VLSH3S7RD, VLSH3S7BD1–4(0.04–0.16)19(0.75)46 (1.81)75 (2.95)20 ±1(0.79±0.04)min. 10(0.39)19(0.75)100 (3.94)11/10/2017


page 280

UL 60947-4-1 and UL 98 Disconnect Switches 8 D O P E R A T I N G M E C H A N I S M S A N D I S C O N N E C T S W I T C H E S Table 8.57: Terminal Cover and Fuse Holder Dimensions Terminal Cover Dimensions VLSC1P1, VLSC3P1 VLSC1P2, VLSC3P2 Table 8.58: Wiring Diagrams—VLS Disconnect Switches (16–125 A) Three-pole disconnectors VLS3P016•• – VLS3P125R2/D2 Fourth pole add-on VLS1P•••••S VLS1P•••••E Wiring Diagrams Refer to Catalog 9400CT1601 schneider-electric.us Fuse Holder Dimensions VLSFH1UL Dim. = mm (in.) Add-on Blocks and Accessories Auxiliary contacts VLSA11•S VLSA10R1E–VLSA10R2E Neutral terminal VLS1NR1/D1–VLS1NR2/ D2 Earth/Ground terminal VLS1GR1/D1–VLS1GR2/ D2 Fuse holder VLSFH1 8-22 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved VLSC3P1VLSC1P1 12(0.47)36(1.42)46 (1.81)26.4(1.04)9.9 (0.39)3.6(0.14)46 (1.81)37 (1.46)23(0.90)20.7(0.81)VLSC3P2VLSC1P2 10 (0.39)70 (2.75)52.5 (2.07)80.1 (3.15)75.2 (2.96)VLSC1P1 VLSC3P112(0.47)36(1.42)46 (1.81)12.7 (0.50)10(0.39)26.4(1.04)VLSC3P2VLSC1P2 70 (2.75)23(0.90)10(0.39)37.3(1.47)46 (1.81)8.6 (0.34)L1L2T1T2L3T3LineLoad7 L4LineLoad8 T47 L48 T4N7 L4LineLoad8 T47 L48 T41321142257686758NNPEPEL1L2T1T2L3T311/10/2017


page 281

schneider-electric.us Technical Specifications, VLS Range, 16– 125 A Refer to Catalog 9400CT1601 UL 60947-4-1 and UL 98 Disconnect Switches 3-pole: VLS3P… 4th pole: VLS1P… 025… 040… 032… 040… 040… 040… 063R1 063R1S 063R2 063R2S 080… 080… Model Contact Specifications IEC conventional free air thernal current, Ith (≤40 °C) IEC rated insulation voltage, Ui IEC rated impulse withstand voltage, Uimp IEC rated operational current, Ie AC21A AC22A AC23A IEC rated operational power AC23A 400 V 500 V 690 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 400 V 690 V IEC reactive power for capacitor control 400 V IEC protection against short-circuit Rated short-time withstand current (1 s), Icw Rated conditional short-circuit current With fuse class gG IEC making capacity (AC23A 400 V) IEC breaking capacity (AC23A 400 V) Mechanical life (depending on the application) Electrical life (IEC AC21A) UL/CSA general use at 600 V UL/CSA short-circuit rating at 600 V UL/CSA fuse class/max rating at 600 V UL/CSA Hp ratings Single phase Three phase Terminals Tightening torque Conductor section (solid/stranded) Ambient Conditions Temperature Maximum altitude Mounting position Mounting 120 V 240 V 200–208 V 240 V 480 V 600 V Type A B Screw Tool Operating Storage Normal Admissible A V kV A A A A A A A A A kW kW kvar A rms kA rms A A A cycles cycles A kA Type/A hp hp hp hp hp hp N•m lb-in mm² AWG °C °C m 016… 040… 16 1000 8 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 7.5 11 7.5 800 50 16 400 320 100,000 100,000 16 5 RK5/20 1 2 5 5 10 10 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 63 47 45 45 30 80 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 11 22 10 25 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 25 25 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 25 25 15 22 12.5 18.5 22 15 32 40 25 5 RK5/30 32 5 RK5/35 40 5 RK5/45 1.5 3 7.5 7.5 15 20 2 5 10 10 20 20 2 5 10 15 20 25 63 63 63 63 45 45 45 45 25 25 22 22 15 63 450 360 100,000 15,000 50 5 RK5/45 2 7.5 10 15 30 30 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 47 30 45 25 2500 63 1250 1000 30,000 30,000 60 50 –/100 3 7.5 20 20 40 40 Lug clamp IEC/EN 60947-1 designation: Pillar terminal. 5.6 mm (0.22 in.) 6.5 mm (0.26 in.) M4 Phillips 2 1.8–2 16–18 0.75–16 18–6 –25 to +55 –40 to +70 3000 Vertical Any Screw or 35 mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) 12.4 mm (0.49 in.) 10.4 mm (0.41 in.) M8 Metric Allen key 4 5–6 45–54 4–50 12–1 S E H C T I W S T C E N N O C S I D N A S M S I N A H C E M G N I T A R E P O D 8 100… 100… 100 125… 125… 125 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 80 47 55 45 40 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 100 47 55 45 50 100 125 100 50 –/100 100 50 –/100 3 10 25 30 40 40 5 10 30 30 50 60 100 50 –/100 7.5 10 25 30 50 40 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 8-23 BA11/10/2017


page 282

UL 98 IEC Style Disconnect Switches 8 LK4 Nonfusible and GS2 Fusible Disconnect Switches Refer to Catalog 9421CT0301 schneider-electric.us Table 8.59: Building a Complete GS or LK Switch To build a complete GS or LK switch, order the following parts: Choose a Switch + Shaft + Handle Assembly + Lugs if needed LK4 and GS2 Disconnect Switches D O P E R A T I N G M E C H A N I S M S A N D I S C O N N E C T S W I T C H E S 600 A, LK4SU3N Shaft 320 mm, GS2AE6 Black Handle, GS2AH150 Lugs Kit, GS1AW503 Example: LK4SU3N (600 A non-fusible switch) + GS2AE6 (320 mm Style D shaft) + GS2AH150 (black/black, locking) To add auxiliary contacts: For front-mounted contacts order LK4AD30N (front-mounted auxiliary contact holder) + GS2AM110. LK4 Nonfusible Disconnect Switches NOTE: Switches in the shaded area are now available as Kits. SeeTable 8.61. Table 8.60: LK Nonfusible IEC Style Disconnect Switches 100–400 A 30–100 A Compact Pole Rating (A) Catalog No. Maximum Horsepower Rating 600 V NOTE: Switches in the shaded area are now available as Kits. 240 V 480 V 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 30 60 100 100 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 LK4DU3CN[1] LK4GU3CN[1] LK4JU3CN[1] LK4JU3N LK4MU3N LK4QU3N LK4SU3N LK4TU3N LK4UU3N LK4WU3N 10 20 20 30 75 125 200 200 200 200 Short Circuit Current Rating 600 Vac Fuse SCCR kA J J J J J J J L L L 100 100 100 200 200 200 200 100 100 100 Shaft Style AL AL AL B B B D D D D 250 Vdc — — N/A 15 15 50 50 — — — 20 40 50 75 150 250 400 500 500 500 30 50 50 100 200 350 350 500 500 500 Table 8.61: Kits for Compact Switches LK4: 30, 60 and 100 A Rating (A) Kit Catalog Number Compact Switch 400 mm Shaft Pieces Included [2] Handle Color / NEMA Rating 30 A 60 A 100 A LK4DUKB1 LK4DU3CN LK4AE41CN LK4DUKB4 LK4DU3CN LK4AE41CN LK4DUKR1 LK4DU3CN LK4AE41CN LK4DUKR4 LK4DU3CN LK4AE41CN LK4GUKB1 LK4GU3CN LK4AE41CN LK4GUKB4 LK4GU3CN LK4AE41CN LK4GUKR1 LK4GU3CN LK4AE41CN LK4GUKR4 LK4GU3CN LK4AE41CN LK4JUKB1 LK4JU3CN LK4AE41CN LK4JUKB4 LK4JU3CN LK4AE41CN LK4JUKR1 LK4JU3CN LK4AE41CN LK4JUKR4 LK4JU3CN LK4AE41CN Black / NEMA 1, 12, 3R Black / NEMA 4, 4X Red / NEMA 1, 12, 3R Red / NEMA 4, 4X Black / NEMA 1, 12, 3R Black / NEMA 4, 4X Red / NEMA 1, 12, 3R Red / NEMA 4, 4X Black / NEMA 1, 12, 3R Black / NEMA 4, 4X Red / NEMA 1, 12, 3R Red / NEMA 4, 4X Handle Guide Cone LK4AH0110CN GS2AEH12 LK4AH0410CN GS2AEH12 LK4AH0120CN GS2AEH12 LK4AH0420CN GS2AEH12 LK4AH0110CN GS2AEH12 LK4AH0410CN GS2AEH12 LK4AH0120CN GS2AEH12 LK4AH0420CN GS2AEH12 LK4AH0110CN GS2AEH12 LK4AH0410CN GS2AEH12 LK4AH0120CN GS2AEH12 LK4AH0420CN GS2AEH12 No longer sold as components. Purchase Kits containing Switch, Handle, Shaft, and Guide Cone as listed inTable 8.61. Components are NOT sold separately. Only 400 mm shaft can be purchase separately. [1] [2] 8-24 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 283

schneider-electric.us LK4 Nonfusible and GS2 Fusible Disconnect Switches Refer to Catalog 9421CT0301 UL 98 IEC Style Disconnect Switches GS2AH130 Table 8.62: Handles and Shafts for LK Switches Rating (A) Handle Catalog No. Type NOTE: Switches in the shaded area are now available as Kits. 30–100 30–100 30–100 30–100 100–400 100–400 100–400 100–400 600 600 800–1200 800–1200 LK4AH110CN[4] LK4AH1120CN[4] LK4AH410CN[4] LK4AH420CN[4] GS2AH130 GS2AH140 GS2AH430 GS2AH440 GS2AH150 GS2AH160 GS2AH170 GS2AH180 1, 3R, 12 1, 3R, 12 4, 4X 4, 4X 1, 3R, 12 1, 3R, 12 4, 4X 4, 4X 1, 3R, 4, 4X, 1, 3R, 4, 4X, 1, 3R, 4, 4X, 1, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 12 12 12 GS2AH150 NOTE: Switches in the shaded area are now available as Kits. SeeTable 8.61. GS2AH170 S E H C T I W S T C E N N O C S I D N A S M S I N A H C E M G N I T A R E P O D Shaft 12.6 in. / 320 mm Catalog No. 15.7 in. / 400 mm Catalog No. Shaft 19.6 in. / 500 mm Catalog No. Guide Cone[3] Catalog No. Shaft Style Support Bracket Catalog No. 8 LK4AE12CN — — GS2AEH12 AL — GS2AE2 GS2AE21 GS2AE23 GS2AEH12 GS2AE6 GS2AE61 — GS2AEH12 B D GS2AESB — Color Black Red/Yellow Black Red/Yellow Black Red Black Red/Yellow Black Red/Yellow Black Red/Yellow Table 8.63: Auxiliary Contacts for LK Switches Switch Amperes 30–60 30–60 100–400 100–400 600–1200 600–1200 600–1200 Catalog No. MDSAN11 MDSAN20 LK4AD10N LK4AD20N LK4AD30N GS2AM110 GS2AM101 Description Aux Contact 1 N.O. and 1 N.C. Aux Contact 2 N.O. Aux Contact 1 N.O. and 1 N.C. Aux Contact 2 N.O. Aux Contact Holder Aux Contact 1 N.O. Aux Contact 1 N.C. Table 8.64: Terminal Shrouds for LK Switches Switch Amperes 30–60 100–200 100–200 400 400 600 [5] 800–1200 [5] Catalog No. LK4AP3CN LK4AP33TN LK4AP33BN LK4AP53TN LK4AP53BN LK4AP63N LK4AP83N Description Shroud Top and Bottom, 3-Pole Shroud Top LK4, 3-Pole, 100/200 A Shroud Bottom LK4, 3-Pole, 100/200 A Shroud Top LK4, 3-Pole, 400 A Shroud Bottom LK4, 3-Pole, 400 A Shroud Bottom LK4, 3-Pole, 600 A Shroud Bottom LK4, 3-Pole, 800–1200 A [3] [4] [5] Optional on shafts for LK4DU3CN, LK4GU3CN and LK4JU3CN. No longer sold as components. Purchase Kits containing Switch, Handle, Shaft, and Guide Cone as listed inTable 8.61. 600–1200 A standard with top shroud. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 8-25 11/10/2017


page 284

UL 98 IEC Style Disconnect Switches 8 LK4 Nonfusible and GS2 Fusible Disconnect Switches Refer to Catalog 9421CT0301 schneider-electric.us GS2 Fusible Disconnect Switches Table 8.65: GS Fusible IEC Style Disconnect Switches Pole Rating (A) Catalog No. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 30 30 30 30 60 100 200 400 600 800 GS1DDU3 GS1DU3 GS2EEU3 GS2EU3N GS2GU3N GS2JU3N GS2MU3N GS2QU3N GS2SU3 GS2TU3 Maximum Horsepower Rating 240 V 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 15 30 60 125 200 200 480 V 15 15 15 15 30 60 125 250 500 500 600 V 20 20 20 20 50 75 150 350 500 500 250 Vdc 5 5 5 5 10 20 40 50 — — Table 8.66: Handles and Shafts for GS Switches [6] Short Circuit Current Rating 600 Vac SCCR kA Shaft Style AG AG B B B B B B C C 100 100 100 100 100 200 200 200 200 200 Fuse CC J CC J J J J J J J Handle Rat- ing (A) Catalog No. D O P E R A T I N G M E C H A N I S M S A N D I S C O N N E C T S W I T C H E S GS2GU3N GS2AH110 GS2AH130 GS2AH150 Auxiliary Contacts GS1AD10 + GS2AM110 Shorting Links Shaft: 12.6 in. (320 mm) Catalog No. Shaft: 15.7 in. (400 mm) Catalog No. Shaft: 19.7 in. (500 mm) Catalog No. Shaft Guide Catalog No. Shaft Style Support Bracket [7] GS2AE8 GS2AE81 — GS2AEH12 AG — GS2AE2 GS2AE21 GS2AE23 GS2AEH12 B GS2AESB GS2AE5 GS2AE51 GS2AE53 GS2AEH12 C — Color Black Red/ Yellow Black Red/ Yellow Black Red/ Yellow Black Red/ Yellow Black Red/ Yellow 30–60 GS2AH110 30–60 GS2AH120 30–60 GS2AH410 30–60 GS2AH420 30– 400 30– 400 30– 400 30– 400 600– 800 600– 800 GS2AH130 GS2AH140 GS2AH430 GS2AH440 GS2AH150 GS2AH160 Type 1, 3R, 12 1, 3R, 12 4, 4X 4, 4X 1, 3R, 12 1, 3R, 12 4, 4X 4, 4X 1, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 1, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 NOTE: Hole adapter kit for GS1 to GS2 Handles: GS2AH100TO200. Table 8.67: Auxiliary Contacts for GS Switches [8] Switch Amperes 30–800 30–800 30 Catalog No. GS1AM110 GS1AM101 GS1AD10 Description Aux Contact 1 N.O. Aux Contact 1 N.C. Aux Contact Holder Table 8.68: Shorting Links For use on: GS2, 60 A GS2, 100 A GS2, 200 A GS2, 400 A GS2, 600–800 A Table 8.69: NFPA79 Kit For Use With: GS2Q3N GS2GU3N, GS2GLU3N, GS2JU3N, GS2JLU3N GS1DDU3, GS1DU3 Shorting Links per Kit 3 3 3 3 3 Catalog No. GS1AU203 GS1AU303 GS1AU403 GS1AU503 GS1AU803 Description NFPA 79 Internal Handle Kit 400 A Switch Shaft NFPA 79 Internal Handle Kit 60–200 A Switch Shaft NFPA 79 Internal Handle Kit for 5 mm Shafts Kit PartNumber GS2AD040N GS2AD030N GS1AD010 Table 8.70: Terminal Shrouds for GS Switches, Line or Load [9] Switch Amperes 30–100 200 400 600–800 Catalog No. — GS2AP43 GS2AP53 GS2AP73 Description Standard on product GS2, 3-Pole, 200 A GS2, 3-Pole, 400 A GS2, 3-Pole, 600–800 A GS2AH100TO200–GS1 to GS2 Handle Adapter if using GS1 holes. Not for use with flange disconnects. GS1DU3 and GS1DDU3 switches allow up to 4 auxiliary contacts without adding contact holder GS1AD10. For more than 4 contacts, GS1AD10 is required. Order one terminal shroud per side. For example, order one terminal shroud for either the line side or load side; order two terminal shrouds for both the line side and load side. [6] [7] [8] [9] 8-26 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 285

schneider-electric.us Accessories, LK4 Nonfusible and GS2 Fusible Refer to Catalog 9421CT0301 UL 98 IEC Style Disconnect Switches Cable Operator Kits for GS2 Switches Table 8.71: Cable Operator Kits for GS2 Switches [10] [11] Catalog No. Description 200 A and Below GS2AH36F GS2AH60F GS2AH120F GS2AH144F GS2AH180F 36 in. Cable Operator Kits for GS2 Switches, 200 A and Below 60 in. Cable Operator Kits for GS2 Switches, 200 A and Below 120 in. Cable Operator Kits for GS2 Switches, 200 A and Below 144 in. Cable Operator Kits for GS2 Switches, 200 A and Below 180 in. Cable Operator Kits for GS2 Switches, 200 A and Below 400 A GS2AH460F GS2AH4120F GS2AH4144F GS2AH4180F 60 in. Cable Operator Kits for GS2 Switches, 400 A 120 in. Cable Operator Kits for GS2 Switches, 400 A 144 in. Cable Operator Kits for GS2 Switches, 400 A 180 in. Cable Operator Kits for GS2 Switches, 400 A S E H C T I W S T C E N N O C S I D N A S M S I N A H C E M G N I T A R E P O D Flange Handle Cable Operator Kit Table 8.72: Handles for use with Cable Operator Kits Catalog No. NEMA Type Enclosure Type of Handle 9422A1 9422A2 9422A3 9422A4 Accessories Table 8.73: Terminal Lugs 1, 3, 3R, 4, (Sheet Steel) 4, 4X (Stainless) 1, 3, 3R, 4, (Sheet Steel) 4, 4X (Stainless) 6 in. 6 in. 4 in. 4 in. 8 For Use On: Rating No. of Wires per Lug No. of Lugs per Terminal LK4DU3CN LK4GU3CN LK4JU3N LK4MU3N LK4QU3N LK4SU3N LK4TU3N LK4UU3N LK4WU3N GS1DDU3 GS1DU3 GS2EEU3 GS2EU3N GS2GU3N GS2JU3N GS2MU3N GS2QU3N GS2SU3 GS2TU3 30 60 100 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 30 30 30 30 60 100 200 400 600 800 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Terminal Lugs Lug Size (AWG) #12–2/0 #12–2/0 6–300 kcmil 6–300 kcmil 350 MCM—6 600 MCM—4 250 MCM—1/0 2 x 2–600 kcmil 2 x 2–600 kcmil 2 x 2–600 kcmil 2 x 2–600 kcmil #14–#10 #14–#10 #14–#10 #14–#6 #10–#6 #12–#1 6–300 kcmil 350 MCM—6 600 MCM—4 250 MCM—1/0 2 x 2–600 kcmil 2 x 2–600 kcmil Wire Type Cu Cu Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu Cu Cu Cu Cu Cu Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Lugs per Kit — — 6 6 6 6 6 12 12 12 — — — — — — 6 6 6 6 6 Lug Kit Catalog Number Standard Standard GS1AW403 GS1AW403 GS1AW603 GS1AW606 GS1AW503 GS1AW903 GS1AW903 GS1AW903 Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard GS1AW403 GS1AW603 GS1AW606 GS1AW503 GS1AW503 Table 8.74: Power Distribution Lugs GS1 or GS2 Only For Use On: Rating No. of Wires per Lug GS1JU3 GS2MU3N GS2QU3N GS2MU3N GS2QU3N 100 200 400 200 400 6 12 12 6 6 Lug Size (AWG) #14–#6 #14–#4 #14–#4 #12–2/0 #12–2/0 Wire Type Cu Cu Cu Cu Cu Lugs per Kit 3 3 3 3 3 Lug Kit Catalog No. GS1AW306 [12] GS1AW406 GS1AW406 GS1AW506 GS1AW506 [10] Does not include handle. For handle, see Table 8.72. [11] Not compatible with GS2EEU3.. [12] Cannot be used on GS2JU3N. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 8-27 11/10/2017


page 286

UL 98 IEC Style Disconnect Switches 8 Dimensions, LK4 Nonfusible and GS2 Fusible Refer to Catalog 9421CT0301 schneider-electric.us D O P E R A T I N G M E C H A N I S M S A N D I S C O N N E C T S W I T C H E S LK4DU3CN and LK4GU3CN, 30–100 A Compact Nonfusible Disconnect Switches Handle for 30–100 A Compact Nonfusible Disconnect Switches LK4JU3N / LK4MU3N / LK4QU3N, 100–400 A Nonfusible Disconnect Switches—Dimensions Rating (A) 100–200 400 A 3.72 (94.6) 4.92 (128) B 10.1 (256) 16 (406) C 7.09 (1.80) 9.05 (230) D 1.97 (50) 2.56 (65) E 6.3 (160) 8.26 (210) F 6.3 (160) 10.2 (260) Dimensions = in. (mm) 8-28 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 2.5364.30.54313.83.13379.6(cid:127)42.07852.81.02265.169131.31.0226Handle Part No.Right-side or front operationDoor drilling with 4 fixing screwsDoor drilling with fixing nutLK4AH110CNLK4AH120CNLK4AH410CNLK4AH420CNEBFDCA(78) 1.57(40)(7)(31)3.07(78)1.10(28)4.925(125.1)1.74(44.2)3.07Ø0.271.22Ø4x ØHandle Part No.GS2AH130GS2AH140GS2AH430GS2AH440Dimensions:in.mm11/10/2017


page 287

schneider-electric.us Dimensions, LK4 Nonfusible and GS2 Fusible Refer to Catalog 9421CT0301 UL 98 IEC Style Disconnect Switches LK4SU3N, 600 A Nonfusible Disconnect Switches—Dimensions S E H C T I W S T C E N N O C S I D N A S M S I N A H C E M G N I T A R E P O D 8 AA 12.6 (320) Z 1.85 (47) Rating (A) 600 AC 18.12 (460) N1 2.34 (59.5) Handle for 600 A and 800 A Fusible Disconnect Switches 5.5 (140) Dimensions = in. (mm) N J 6.88 5.0 (175) 10.03 (255) 11 (280) (127.5) M F H LK4TU3N / LK4UU3N / LK4WU3N, 800–1200 A Nonfusible Disconnect Switches—Dimensions Rating (A) 800–1200 AC 18.12 (460) F 14.64 (372) H 5.5 (140) Dimensions = in. (mm) J M 6.83 (173.5) 13.66 (347) N 6.88 (175) N1 2.34 (59.5) Z 1.85 (47) © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 8-29 HZACMJN1NYXAAF0.51133.1580Front operationDirection of operationDoor drilling templateHandle Part No.GS2AH150GS2AH16011/10/2017


page 288

UL 98 IEC Style Disconnect Switches 8 Dimensions, LK4 Nonfusible and GS2 Fusible Refer to Catalog 9421CT0301 Handle for 800–1200 A Fusible Disconnect Switches schneider-electric.us D O P E R A T I N G M E C H A N I S M S A N D I S C O N N E C T S W I T C H E S Handle for 30 A and 60 A Fusible Disconnect Switches GS1DDU3, 30 A Fusible Disconnect Switches, Class CC Fuses and GS1DU3, 30 A Fusible Disconnect Switches, Class J Fuses— Dimensions Rating (A) F 30 / CC 3.78 (96) H 3.28 (83.5) 30 / J 4.13 (105) 3.89 (99) J 1.47 (37.5) 1.47 (37.5) Dimensions = in. (mm) J1 0.59 (15) 0.59 (15) N 3.13 (79.5) 3.13 (79.5) N1 AA 1 (25.5) 4.56 (116) 1 (25.5) 4.56 (116) Z 1.12 (28.5) 1.12 (28.5) GS2GU3N, 60 A Fusible Disconnect Switches, Class J Fuses 8-30 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Front operationDirection of operationDoor drilling templateHandle Part No.GS2AH170GS2AH180Dimensions: in.mmExample:GS1DU311/10/2017


page 289

schneider-electric.us Dimensions, LK4 Nonfusible and GS2 Fusible Refer to Catalog 9421CT0301 UL 98 IEC Style Disconnect Switches Handle for 100 A, 200 A, and 400 A Fusible Disconnect Switches GS2JU3N, 100 A Fusible Disconnect Switches, Class J Fuses S E H C T I W S T C E N N O C S I D N A S M S I N A H C E M G N I T A R E P O D 8 GS2MU3N, 200 A Fusible Disconnect Switches, Class J Fuses © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 8-31 11/10/2017


page 290

Flange Mounted and Cable Operated 8 Dimensions, LK4 Nonfusible and GS2 Fusible Refer to Catalog 9421CT0301 schneider-electric.us GS2QU3N, 400 A Fusible Disconnect Switches, Class J Fuses D O P E R A T I N G M E C H A N I S M S A N D I S C O N N E C T S W I T C H E S Handle for 600 A and 800 A Fusible Disconnect Switches GS2SU3, 600 A Fusible Disconnect Switches, Class J Fuses GS2TU3, 800 A Fusible Disconnect Switches, Class J Fuses 8-32 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 291

S E H C T I W S T C E N N O C S I D N A S M S I N A H C E M G N I T A R E P O D 8 Disconnect Switches Class 9422 / Refer to Catalog 9420CT9701 Flange Mounted and Cable Operated schneider-electric.us Disconnect Switches The 9422 disconnect switches are the ideal selections for the PV String Combiner Box internal disconnect switch and control panel applications. These switches are designed for variable depth, flange mounting, traditional side mounting and bracket mounting applications providing complete flexibility in the PV string combiner box designs. The switches are compatible with 9422A handle operators and 9423 door mechanisms and are UL 98 recognized (E52369 Vol. 1, Sec. 18) and CSA certified. See page 8-34, page 8-37, and page 8-38 for dimensional information. Table 8.75: 9422 Disconnect Switches, Flange Mounted and Variable Depth Disconnect Switch Size Variable Depth (in.) Maximum Horsepower Ratings AC Systems Volts (Motor Volts) 480 240 (230) (460) 208 (200) Vdc 600 (575) 250 600 6.625–18 7.5 7.5 30 A 60 A 6.625–18 15 30 60 20 50 75 125 150 5 10 20 40 15 30 50 50 — 25 40 15 30 60 75 125 250 350 50 50 100 A 6.625–18 200 A 400 A Fixed Depth [5] 400 A Variable Depth [5] 9.12–19.25 [3] 11.38 (A5 or A6 Handle) 15.87–19 (A7 or A8 Handle) [8] (A), Non- Fuse Clip Rating Interchangeable Type, For Class H, J, K or R Fuses Mechanism ONLY Switch and Operating (No Handle Mechanism) Switch Used with Cable Operators ONLY (No Handle Mechanism or Cable Operator) [1] Switch and Operating Mechanism with Handle Mechanism, Overpacked[2] Type A1 Handle Type A2 Handle 250 V 600 V — 30 60 — 60 — — 100 — 200 — — 400 — — 30 — 30 60 — 100 — 200 400 — 400 Cat. No. 9422TCN30 9422TCF30 9422TCF33 9422TDN60 9422TDF60 9422TDF63 9422TEN10 9422TEF10 9422TF1 9422TF2 9422TF3 [4] 9422TG1 [6][7] 9422TG2 [6][9] Cat. No. 9422TCN30C 9422TCF30C 9422TCF33C 9422TDN60C 9422TDF60C 9422TDF63C 9422TEN10C 9422TEF10C — — — — — Cat. No. Cat. No. 9422ATCN301 9422ATCF301 9422ATCF331 9422ATDN601 9422ATDF601 9422ATDF631 9422ATEN101 9422ATEF101 9422ATF11 9422ATF12 9422ATF13 [4] 9422ATCN302 9422ATCF302 9422ATCF332 9422ATDN602 9422ATDF602 9422ATDF632 9422ATEN102 9422ATEF102 9422ATF21 9422ATF22 9422ATF23 [4] For handle selection, see page 8- 34. Fuse Type None H, J, K, R None H, J, K, R None H, J, K, R None H, J, K, R None H, J, K, R The 9422 Bracket Mount Disconnect Switch is designed for combiner boxes and control panel applications. The Bracket Mount Disconnect Switch is shipped with the switch and external handle assembled to a bracket, ready for quick installation. A protective trim plate is provided to prevent any mounting screws from being accessible from the front. The trim plate also provides an attractive installation feature. The switches are fully compatible with the 9423 closing mechanisms. 9422TCN30 Table 8.76: 9422 Bracket Mounted Disconnect Switches Maximum Horsepower Rating Disconnect Switch Size AC Systems (Motor Volts) Vdc Fuse Type 208 (200) 240 (230) 480 (460) 600 (575) 250 600 (A), Non- Fuse Clip Rating Interchangeable Type for Class H, J, K, or R Fuses 250 V 600 V 30 A 7.5 7.5 15 20 5 15 60 A 100 A 200 A 15 25 40 15 30 30 50 10 30 60 75 20 50 60 125 150 40 50 Bracket Mounted Disconnect Switch None H, J, K, R J [10] None H, J, K, R J [10] None H, J, K, R J [10] None H, J, K, R J [10] — 30 60 60 — 60 — — — 100 100 — 200 — — — 30 30 — 30 60 60 — 100 100 — 200 400 Switch and Operating Mechanism Only Cat. No. 9422BTCN30 9422BTCF30 9422BTCF33 9422BTCF32 9422BTDN60 9422BTDF60 9422BTDF63 9422BTDF62 9422BTEN10 9422BTEF10 9422BTEF11 9422TFB1 9422TFB2 9422TFB3 See Table 8.81 for ordering information for the cable operator. Variable depth only — no cable operator. 9422 R2 will extend maximum mounting depth 7 inches, see Table 8.86for information. Accommodates Class J fuses only. Switches are fixed-depth or adjustable depending on handle selection. Commercially available enclosures may not accept 9422TG1 and 2 operating mechanisms. Contact enclosure manufacturer for availability of enclosures for use with these switches. Right hand flange mounting only and requires a special enclosure. Variable in increments of 0.63 inches. Right hand flange mounting only and requires a special enclosure. [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] Space saving design—Type J fuses mounted on the non-fused bracket. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 8-33 11/10/2017


page 292

Accessories, Disconnect Switches Class 9422 / Refer to Catalog 9420CT9701 Handle Information for 9422 Disconnect Switches The Handle Mechanism Kit contains all parts needed to mount the handle to the flange of the enclosure. Two flange mounting methods are offered. For right or left hand flange mounting use Types A1–A4 and Types A9–A10 kits. For right-hand mounting only, use Type A5–A8 handles. The type AP1 and AP2 handles are used exclusively on the PowerPact™ M and P operating mechanisms, 9422 RM1 and 9422 CMP. The dimensions are identical to 9422 A1. schneider-electric.us Flange Mounted and Cable Operated 8 D O P E R A T I N G M E C H A N I S M S A N D I S C O N N E C T S W I T C H E S Type A1 Table 8.77: 9422 Disconnect Switch and Circuit Breaker Handle Mechanisms NEMA Type 1, 3, 3R, 4, 12 Enclosures NEMA Type 4, 4X Stainless Steel Enclosures Handle Depth (in.) 4 [11] 6 [11] 6 [12] 10 [13] 10 Cat. No. 9422A3 9422A1 9422AP1 9422A9 9422AP9 9422A7 Cat. No. 9422A4 9422A2 9422AP2 9422A10 9422AP10 9422A8 12 [14] [15] Accessories Class R Fuse Kits When installed, this kit rejects all fuses except Class R. The kits are available for field installation. With rejection kit and Class R fuses installed, the switch is UL component recognized for use on systems with fault current up to 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes. Table 8.78: Class R Fuse Kits Disconnect Switch Type 30 A 60 A 100 A 200 A 400 A Switch Type TCF30 TCF33 TDF60 TDF63 TEF10 TF2 TF3 TG2 Fuse Clip Rating 250 V[16] 30 60 60 — 100 200 200 400 600 V — 30 30 60 100 200 200 400 Class R Kit Cat No. RFK03 [17] RFK06 [17] RFK06 [17] RFK06H [17] RFK10 [17] 9999SR4 9999SR4 9999SR5 Electrical Interlocks for Disconnect Switches Table 8.79: Electrical Interlocks Disconnect Switch Size 30 A 60 A 100 A 200 A 400 A Switch Type TCF, TCN, TDF, TDN, TEF, TEN BTCF, BTCN, BTDF, BTDN, BTEF, BTEN TF, ATF TF, ATF TG TG Electrical Interlocks Cat No. 9999TC10 [18] 9999TC20 [19] 9999TC11 [18] 9999TC21 [19] 9999R8 [18] 9999R9 [19] 9999R35 [18] 9999R36 [19] [11] Use with 30–200 A 9422 switches and all circuit breaker mechanisms. [12] Use only with 9422 RM1, 9422 CMP and PowerPact M and P operating mechanisms. [13] Use with Type D2 remote or dual adapter kit. [14] Use only with 400 A 9422TG1 and 9422TG2 disconnect switch. [15] Adjustable depth. [16] Use Discount Schedule DE1, not CP1. [17] Use Discount Schedule DE1 for price, not CP1. [18] [19] 8-34 1 N.C. or N.O. Contact depending on wiring. 2 N.C. or N.O. or 1 N.O. or 1 N.C. Contact depending on wiring. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 293

Accessories, Disconnect Switches Class 9422 / Refer to Catalog 9420CT9701 Flange Mounted and Cable Operated schneider-electric.us Internal Barrier Kits Provides an additional barrier that helps prevent accidental contact with live parts. Field- installed transparent barriers do not restrict visual inspection of the switch. Barriers provide IEC529 IP2X “finger safe” protection when door of enclosed disconnect switch is open. A convenient door allows use of test probes without accessing fuses and replacement of fuses without removing barrier. Barrier must be used with the skirt kit to enclose a panel mounted 9422 disconnect. Table 8.80: Internal Barrier Kits Disconnect Switch Size 30 A 60 A 100 A Barrier Cat. No. [20] SS06 SS06 SS10 Skirt Cat No. [20] SS0306SK SS0306SK SS10SK S E H C T I W S T C E N N O C S I D N A S M S I N A H C E M G N I T A R E P O D Cable Operators for 9422 Disconnect Switches Table 8.81: Cable Operators for 9422 Disconnect Switches Switch Type TCN30C, TCF30C, TCF33C, TDN60C, TDF60C, TDF63C, TEN10C, TEF10C Cable Mechanisms [21] Cable Length (inches) 36 48 60 120 Cat. No. 9422CFT30 9422CFT40 9422CFT50 9422CFT10 Table 8.82: Class 9422 Replacement / Refrofit Fuse Clip Kits 8 Cable Mechanisms with A1 Handle for NEMA Type 1, 3, 3R, 4, and 12 Enclosures Cat. No. 9422CFT31 — 9422CFT51 9422CFT11 Switch Type Fuse Type Fuse Clip Rating (Amperes) Line and Load Fuse Clip Kit (includes load base and fuse pullers) 600 V — 30 30 60 Lug Kits Copper Cat No. CL0306F CL10F — — Cat. No. 9422TC30 9422TC33 9422TC33 9422TD63 Lug Kits Al Cat No. AL0306F AL10F — — 9422CFT40 Disconnect Switch Size 30 A 60 A TCF30 TCN30 TCF33 TDN60 H, K, J, R H, K, J, R 250 V 30 60 60 — Table 8.83: Lug Data Disconnect Switch Size 30–60 A 100 A 200 A 400 A Wire Size (Min-Max) Cu #14–#2 #10–#0 #6–600 kcmil #4–500 kcmil Al #10–#2 #6–#0 #6–#600 kcmil — [20] Use Discount Schedule DE1 for price, not CP1. [21] Purchase handle mechanism separately (9422A1, A2, A3, or A4). © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 8-35 11/10/2017


page 294

Flange Mounted and Cable Operated 8 D O P E R A T I N G M E C H A N I S M S A N D I S C O N N E C T S W I T C H E S Accessories, Disconnect Switches Class 9422 / Refer to Catalog 9420CT9701 Table 8.84: Dimensions 30, 60, and 100 A Class 9422 Disconnect Switches schneider-electric.us Switch Type 30 A 60 A 100 A Maximum Voltage Fuse Type Dimension A Dimension B 30 A, 250 V 30 A, 600 V 30 A, 600 V 60 A, 250 V 60 A, 600 V 60 A, 600 V 100 A, 250 V 100 A, 600 V 100 A, 600 V H, K, R H, K, R J H, K, R H, K, R J H, K, R H, K, R J 1.625 4.25 1.625 2.25 4.75 1.625 — — 3.25 5.25 3.25 Table 8.85: Dimensions Type A in. (mm) C in. (mm) D in. (mm) Min. Enclosure Depth [22] in. (mm) — — BTCN, BTDN, BTEN BTCF, BTDF, BTEF TFB1 NOTE: Back panel support is recommended for Types TFB1, 2, & 3. Other devices may also require support if the flange is not sufficiently rigid. 8.00 (203) 10.00 (254) 12.00 (305) 6.56 (167) 8.56 (217) 9.50 (241) 9.50 (241) 11.50 (292) 1.88 (48) 3.88 (99) 11.88 (302) — — E in. (mm) Fusible Device F in. (mm) — 6.38 (162) 13.19 (335) The minimum enclosure depth is greater than Dimension D since additional space is needed when mounting the mechanism. [22] 8-36 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved DDisconnectDeviceONOFF0.38100.3810FCAE0.3810FusedNon Fusedand CircuitBreakerDisconnectDevice(2) 0.38 Dia. Mounting Holes 10(For back panel support if necessary.)11/10/2017


page 295

Dimensions, Disconnect Switches Class 9422 / Refer to Catalog 9420CT9701 Flange Mounted and Cable Operated schneider-electric.us Table 8.86: Dimensions (in. / mm) for 200 A Type TF Disconnect Switches Type Switch Size D [23] G Dimensions Fuse Clips (A) 200 None 200 Class J 200 A 600 V 200 Class H, K, R 200 A 250 V 200 Class H, K, R 200 A 600 V 200 Class J 400 A 600 V TF1 TF2 TF2 TF2 TF3 A 13.33 339 13.33 339 13.33 339 13.33 339 13.33 339 B 9.38 238 9.38 238 9.38 238 9.38 238 9.38 238 C 1.64 42 1.64 42 1.64 42 1.64 42 1.64 42 Min.–Max. 9.12–19.25 232 489 9.12–19.25 232 489 9.12–19.25 232 489 9.12–19.25 232 489 9.12–19.25 232 489 E 2.33 59 2.33 59 2.33 59 2.33 59 2.33 59 F 8.00 203 8.00 203 8.00 203 8.00 203 8.00 203 — 0.09 3 0.09 3 0.09 3 0.09 3 H — — — — — J — 2.77 70 4.14 105 6.64 169 2.77 70 K 9.44 240 9.44 240 9.44 240 9.44 240 9.44 240 L 6.50 165 6.50 165 6.50 165 6.50 165 6.50 165 N M 9.53 — 242 — 14.11 358 — 15.48 393 — 17.98 457 18.53 9.53 242 471 P — — — — — Q — 9.63 245 9.63 245 9.63 245 9.63 245 R 3.14 80 3.14 80 3.14 80 3.14 80 3.14 80 S 1.03 26 1.03 26 1.03 26 1.03 26 1.03 26 T 0.75 19 0.75 19 0.75 19 0.75 19 0.75 19 S E H C T I W S T C E N N O C S I D N A S M S I N A H C E M G N I T A R E P O D 8 [23] The dimensions shown may be extended 7 in. by using 9422R2 (two required per switch). © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 8-37 11/10/2017


page 296

Flange Mounted and Cable Operated 8 Table 8.87: Handle Mechanism—Type A7 and A8 D O P E R A T I N G M E C H A N I S M S A N D I S C O N N E C T S W I T C H E S Dimensions, Disconnect Switches Class 9422 / Refer to Catalog 9420CT9701 Disconnect Switches—400 A Type TG Outline Dimensions and General Location 400 A Disconnect Switches Nonfusible and Non-Interchangeable Fuse Clip Type Fusible Switches schneider-electric.us NOTE: Commercially available enclosures may not accept type TG operating mechanisms. Contact the enclosure manufacturer for availability of enclosures for use with these switches. Switch Type TG1, 2 B X 11.28 286 16.06 408 NOTE: B and X = Minimum to wall or barrier to ensure adequate wire bending space to lug surface when maximum wire size is used. Refer to NEC Article 430.10. Table 8.88: Nonfusible and Fusible Switches Dimension D = Distance from outside of flange to disconnect switch mounting surface. For Type TG1 or TG2 with: Type A7 or A8 adjustable depth handle mechanism D = to 19 483 15.87 403 0.63 16 In steps of NOTE: Copper lugs are standard on all Type TG disconnect switches. * D = Mounting depth measured from the switch mounting surface to the surface of flange. 8-38 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11.692971.88489.882513.6392EnclosureFlangeDefeaterGuideforClass 9423Type M1 KitOperatingLinkDoorDoor HookFigure 13.75 Max. 95 "On"CL of Operating Mechanism1.4437Figure 213.0033011.502923.00761.50384.881240.75190.38104.781214.2510823.816057.501910.50138.5021624.00610BX(2) Mtg. Holesin Switch Mtg.Surface(2) Switch Mtg.BracketsD30064-973 BFigure 3CL of Operating Handle(2) 0.34 Dia. 9 Holes5.5014024.006101.86478.13206*DWeldWeld13.5434412.1430823.8060425.006358.382136.971773.971011.40360.86220.6015BClass J Fuse400 A 600 VoltClass H, K, R Fuses400 A 250 VoltClass H, K, R Fuses400 A 600 VoltProvision for (2) 5/16 Mtg. ScrewsEnclosureCL of Operating MechanismDim. =in.mm11/10/2017


page 297

Door Mounted Class 9421 / Refer to Catalog 9420CT9701 Operating Mechanisms for Circuit Breakers schneider-electric.us Type L Circuit Breaker Mechanisms Type L door-mounted, variable depth operating mechanisms feature heavy duty, all metal construction with trip indication. All mechanisms can be padlocked in the Off position when the enclosure door is open. Further, the handle assemblies can be locked Off with up to three padlocks, which also locks the enclosure when the door is closed. (The 3 in. handle accepts one padlock.) Complete kits are rated for NEMA 1, 3R, and 12 enclosures. They include a handle assembly, operating mechanism, and shaft assembly. S E H C T I W S T C E N N O C S I D N A S M S I N A H C E M G N I T A R E P O D Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism 9421 Type L Table 8.89: Complete Kits Complete Kit Does Not Include Circuit Breaker Use With Circuit Breaker or Interrupter Type PowerPact™ B PowerPact H and J; NSF PowerPact D and L PowerPact M and P [2] No. of Poles 2–3 Frame Size (A) 125 2–3 2–3 3 250 600 1200 Includes Operating Mechanism and Handle Standard 6 in. Handle Long Shaft Kit Short 3 in. Handle Long Shaft Kit Standard Shaft Kit Cat. No. Mounting Depth [1] 9421LB1 9421LJ1 9421LD1 9421LW1 [3] 5.50– 10.75 5.50– 10.75 7.25– 12.06 9.00– 12.50 9421LB4 Cat. No. Mounting Depth [1] 5.50– 21.38 5.50– 21.38 7.25– 22.63 9.00– 23.50 9421LD4 9421LW4 9421LJ4 [4] 9421LB3 Cat. No. Mounting Depth [1] 5.50– 21.38 5.50– 9421LJ3 21.38 3 in. handles are not recommended for use with these circuit breakers. 8 Table 8.90: Component Parts Use With Circuit Breaker or Interrupter Type PowerPact B PowerPact H & J; NSF PowerPact D & L PowerPact M & P [2] No. of Poles 2–3 2–3 2–3 3 Frame Size (A) 125 250 600 1200 3 in. Handle Assemblies NEMA 1, 3R, 12 Standard Handle Assemblies NEMA 1, 3R, 12 Operating Mechanism Includes Lockout Cat. No. 9421LH3 [6] 9421LH3 [6] [7] [7] Cat. No. 9421LH6 [6] 9421LH6 [6] 9421LH6 [6] 9421LHP8 [6] Cat. No. 9421LB7 9421LJ7 9421LD7 9421LW7 Standard Shaft (Support Bracket Not Required) Mounting Depth [5] 5.50–10.75 5.50–10.25 7.25–12.06 7.19–11.63 Cat. No. 9421LS8 9421LS8 9421LS8 9421LS8 Long Shaft (Support Bracket Included) Mounting Depth [5] 5.50–21.38 5.50–21.38 7.25–22.63 7.19–22.25 Cat. No. 9421LS13 9421LS13 9421LS13 9421LS10 Table 8.91: NEMA 4 and 4X Handle Assemblies Use With Circuit Breaker or Interrupter Type PowerPact B PowerPact H and J; NSF PowerPact D and L PowerPact M and P No. of Poles 2–3 2–3 2–3 3 Frame Size (A) 125 250 600 1200 (Painted) Cat. No. 9421LH46 9421LH46 9421LH46 9421LHP48 Standard Handle Assemblies NEMA 1, 3R, 4, 12 NEMA 1, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 (Chrome Plated) Cat. No. 9421LC46 9421LC46 9421LC46 9421LCP48 Special 3 in. Version NEMA 1, 3R, 4, 12 (Painted) Cat. No. 9421LH43 9421LH43 NEMA 1, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 (Chrome Plated) Cat. No. 9421LC43 9421LC43 3 in. handles are not recommended for use with these circuit breakers. Table 8.92: Auxiliary and Alarm Switches for PowerPactTM Circuit Breakers [8] Description 1 Auxiliary Switch 1a 1b 2 Auxiliary Switch 2a 2b 3 Auxiliary Switch 3a 3b NOTE: The location of the accessory in the circuit breaker determines its function. 2 x S29450 3 x S29450 B-Frame LV26950 H- and J-Frame D- and L-Frame D- and L-Frame 2 x S29450 3 x S29450 2 x S29450 S29450 S29450 S29450 — — — 3 in. Handle Assembly Standard Handle Assembly [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] Mounting depth measured in inches from circuit breaker mounting surface (control panel) to outside of enclosure door. These circuit breaker operating mechanisms must use the 9421LHP** or LCP** handles only. Type LW1 and LW4 include an 8 in. handle (9421LHP8) rather than a 6 in. handle. Type LW1 and LW4 include an 8 in. handle (9421LHP8) rather than a 6 in. handle. Mounting depth measured in inches from circuit breaker mounting surface (control panel) to outside of enclosure door. For a red handle and yellow bezel, add suffix RY to catalog number, e.g., 9421LH6RY. 3 in. handles are not recommended for use with these circuit breakers. Discount Schedule: DE2. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 8-39 11/10/2017


page 298

Operating Mechanisms for Circuit Breakers Door Mounted Class 9421 / Refer to Catalog 9420CT9701 8 schneider-electric.us D O P E R A T I N G M E C H A N I S M S A N D I S C O N N E C T S W I T C H E S Panel Drilling for PowerPactTM H and J Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanisms: 9421LJ1, 9421LJ4, and 9421LJ7 Panel Drilling for PowerPactTM D and L Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanisms: 9421LD1, 9421LD4, and 9421LD7 Dimensions for Type L Operating Mechanisms Panel Drilling for PowerPactTM M and P Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanisms: 9421LW1, 9421LW4, and 9421LW7 Table 8.93: Shaft Cutting Dimensions Shaft Length Type Class Formula 9421 9421 9421 LJ1, LJ4, LJ7 L = H – 3.00 (76) LD1, LD4, LD7 L = H – 4.25 (108) LW1, LW4, LW7 L = H – 4.89 (124) H = Standard Shaft Max. Min. 5.5 10.75 (273) (138) 12.06 7.25 (306) (184) 11.63 7.19 (183) (295) H = Long Shaft Min. 5.5 (138) 7.25 (184) 7.19 (183) Max. 21.63 (543) 22.63 (575) 22.25 (565) 8-40 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 299

Flexible Cable Mechanisms Class 9422 / Refer to Catalog 9420CT9701 Operating Mechanisms for Circuit Breakers schneider-electric.us complete the operating mechanism) Flexible Cable Mechanisms • For use with Class 9422 handle operators (you must select a 9422A• handle to • Specially designed for tall, deep enclosures where placement flexibility is required Table 8.94: Flexible Cable Mechanisms for use with Schneider Electric™ (formerly Merlin Gerin™) Circuit Breakers and PowerPact™ 3-Pole Circuit Breakers Cable Mechanism Circuit Breaker Type No. of Poles Frame Size (A) S E H C T I W S T C E N N O C S I D N A S M S I N A H C E M G N I T A R E P O D 8 Length  36 in.  60 in.  84 in. 120 in.  36 in.  60 in.  84 in. 120 in.  36 in.  60 in. 120 in.  36 in.  60 in. 120 in.  36 in.  60 in. 120 in. 48 in. 50 in. 120 in. Catalog No. 9422CSB30 9422CSB50 9422CSB70 9422CSB10 9422CSF30 9422CSF50 9422CSF70 9422CSF10 9422CSF304 9422CSF504 9422CSF104 9422CSJ30 9422CSJ50 9422CSJ10 9422CSJ304 9422CSJ504 9422CSJ104 9422CMP40 9422CMP50 9422CMP10 PowerPact B-Frame MG-NSF PowerPact H- and J-Frame MG-NSF MG-NSJ PowerPact D- and L-Frame MG-NSJ PowerPact D- and L-Frame PowerPact M- and P-Frame [9] 2–3 2–3 4 3 4 3 125 250 250 600 600 1200 Flexible Cable Mechanism 9422CSJ30 NOTE: Refer to NEC Article 430-10 for minimum dimension X from circuit breaker top mounting hole to wall or barrier to ensure adequate wire bending space. NOTE: Bend radius in cable must never be less than 6 inches. Electrical clearances must be maintained between cable and live electrical parts. [9] Must use 9422AP1 or 9422AP2 Handle with this operating mechanism. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 8-41 11/10/2017


page 300

8 D O P E R A T I N G M E C H A N I S M S A N D I S C O N N E C T S W I T C H E S Operating Mechanisms for Circuit Breakers Flexible Cable Mechanisms Class 9422 / Refer to Catalog 9420CT9701 schneider-electric.us Dual Cable Operating Mechanisms for Square D™ Circuit Breakers Dual Cable Operating Mechanisms are designed for use with Square D brand PowerPact™ B, D, H, J, and L circuit breakers through 600 A frame sizes. The cable mechanisms allow for a single handle operator, Class 9422Ax, to operate both circuit breakers. The cable mechanism is designed especially for tall, deep enclosures where placement flexibility is required. There are numerous cable arrangements to choose from to accommodate many applications. Features • Separate cables for each circuit breaker • Rugged metal flange handle operator • Maximized flexibility of circuit breaker placement for existing and new applications • Control panel can be fed from two separate supply voltages (if required) • Dual mechanism allows both separate supply voltages to be controlled by a single handle to improve security features Table 8.95: Dual Cable Operating Mechanisms Selection Circuit Breaker Type PowerPact B PowerPact H & J MG NSF PowerPact D & L MG NSJ Cable Length in. / mm (quantity) 120 in. / 3048 mm (2) 36 in. / 914 mm (1) 60 in. / 1524 mm (1) 60 in. / 1524 mm (1-CSF 3 pole) 60 in. / 1524 mm (1-CSF 4 pole) 36 in. / 914 mm (1) 120 in. / 3048 mm (1) 36 in. / 914 mm (2) 60 in. / 1524 mm (1) 120 in. / 3048 mm (1) 120 in. / 3048 mm (2) 36 in. / 914 mm (1) 60 in. / 1524 mm (1) 60 in. / 1524 mm (1-CSF 3 pole) 60 in. / 1524 mm (1-CSF 4 pole) 36 in. / 914 mm (1) 120 in. / 3048 mm (1) 36 in. / 914 mm (2) 60 in. / 1524 mm (1) 120 in. / 3048 mm (1) 60 in. / 1524 mm (2) 60 in. / 1524 mm (2-CSJ) 120 in. / 3048 mm (2-CSJ) 60 in. / 1524 mm and 120 in. / 3048 mm (2-CSJ) 120 in. / 3048 mm (1-CSF) and 120 in. / 3048 mm (1-CSJ) 60 in. / 1524 mm (1-CSF) 60 in. / 1524 mm (1-CSJ) Catalog Number 9422CSBD1 9422CSBD35 9422CSBD55 9422CSBD31 9422CSBD33 9422CSBD51 9422CSFD1 9422CSFD35 9422CSFD345 9422CSFD31 9422CSFD33 9422CSFD51 9422CSFD55 9422CSJD50 [10] 9422CSJD10 [10] 9422CSJD51 [10] 9422CSFJD10 9422CSFJD50 Frame Size (max.) 125 A 250 A 600 A 250 A and 600 A Handle Mechanisms These handle mechanism kits are used with the circuit breaker variable depth and cable operating mechanisms. The kits contain all parts necessary for mounting the handle to the flange of the enclosure. Types A1/AP1 to A4 are suitable for right or left-hand flange mounting. For handle selection, see Table 8.77. NOTE: See Handle Information, page 8-34 for dimensional information. 9422CSFD33 Handle Mechanisms [10] Must use the 9422AP1 or 9422AP2 operating handle with this operating mechanism. 8-42 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 301

Flexible Cable Mechanisms Class 9422 / Refer to Catalog 9420CT9701 Operating Mechanisms for Circuit Breakers schneider-electric.us Flange-Mounted, Variable-Depth Operating Mechanisms Designed for installation in custom built control enclosures where main or branch circuit protective devices are required. All circuit breaker operating mechanisms are suitable for either right- or left-hand flange mounting, convertible on the job. NOTE: The operating mechanisms do not include handle mechanisms. You must select a 9422A• handle to complete the installation. Table 8.96: Variable-Depth Operating Mechanisms for Use with Schneider Electric™ Brand Circuit Breakers (Formerly Merlin Gerin™ Brand) Use with Operating Mechanism Circuit Breaker Frame Size No. of Poles Schneider Electric (formerly Merlin Gerin) Circuit Breakers and PowerPact™ Frame 3-Pole Circuit Breakers PowerPact B-Frame MG-NSF PowerPact H- and J-Frame MG-NSJ PowerPact D-and L-Frame PowerPact M- and P-Frame [12] 5.88–17.75 5.88–17.75 9.00–17.75 10.50–18.38 9422RB1 9422RQ1 9422RS1 9422RM1  125  250  600 1200 2–3 2–3 3 3 Frame Size A Variable Depth Mtg. Range (in.) [11] (Does Not Include Handle Mechanism) Cat. No. S E H C T I W S T C E N N O C S I D N A S M S I N A H C E M G N I T A R E P O D 8 9422 Type R Circuit Breaker Mechanism Table 8.97: Electrical Interlocks—Class 9999 Description Single Pole, Double Throw Double Pole, Double Throw Cat. No. 9999R26 9999R27 [11] Class 9422 Type R2 will extend mounting depth 7 inches—not recommended for use with the 9422RM1 operating mechanism (see Table 8.77). [12] These circuit breaker operating mechanisms must use the 9422APx handles. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 8-43 11/10/2017


page 302

Operating Mechanisms for Circuit Breakers Flexible Cable Mechanisms Class 9422 / Refer to Catalog 9420CT9701 8 schneider-electric.us D O P E R A T I N G M E C H A N I S M S A N D I S C O N N E C T S W I T C H E S Minimum to wall or barrier to insure adequate wire bending space to lug surface when the maximum wire size is used with standard lugs. Refer to NEC 430-10. Dimensions 8-44 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Dimensions: in.mm11/10/2017


page 303

Introduction Class 9423 / Refer to Catalog 9420CT9701 schneider-electric.us Door Closing Mechanisms Door Closing Mechanisms Class 9423 door closing mechanisms cover a range of enclosures with door openings up to a maximum of 91 in. high. The door closing mechanisms are designed to be used on control enclosures and interlocked with a Class 9422 disconnect device, although they all can be used independently. Three different systems are available, and their use is as recommended below. A complete system is available for interlocking all the doors of a multi-door enclosure with the master door when using the 6 in. or 8 in. vault handle mechanism. Note that the “Master Door” is defined to be the door of a single or multi-door enclosure which is interlocked directly with the disconnect device. The master door can be hinged on either the right or left hand side. It can be located in any position on a multi-door enclosure. An “Auxiliary Door” is defined to be any remaining doors of a multi-door enclosure which are interlocked with the master door by means of the overhead interlocking system as illustrated on page 8-45 and page 8-46. Selection Procedure 1. Determine enclosure construction (no. of doors, door height, hinge location, etc.). 2. Determine Class 9422 disconnect device to be used—either a disconnect switch or a circuit breaker mechanism. 3. Determine the location of the disconnect device and handle mechanism (right- or left-hand flange or center channel). 4. Select the door closing mechanism required. 5. Select the auxiliary door closing mechanisms and multi-door interlocking hardware, if required. (A complete system for interlocking all auxiliary doors of a multi-door enclosure with center channel is available for the medium and large enclosures.) S E H C T I W S T C E N N O C S I D N A S M S I N A H C E M G N I T A R E P O D 8 Table 8.98: Door Closing Mechanism 60 in. Maximum Door (Recommended) Standard Opening • 2 Point Locking is • A Third Roller Latch Kit is Available for 3 Point Locking • For 3/4 in. Door Depths 46–60 in. Door (Recommended) Opening • For use on Single or Multi-Door Enclosures • For use with Doors Hinged on Right or Left Side • Referred to as the 6 in. Vault Handle Mechanism • For 3/4 in. Door Depths 61–91 in. Door (Recommended) Multi-Door Enclosures Opening • For use on Single or • For use with Doors Hinged on Right or Left Side • Referred to as the 8 in. Vault Handle Mechanism • For 1-1/8 in. Door Depths Type M4 Latch bar not included, but most prepunched enclosures that accept Square D™ operating mechanisms supply a pre-drilled latch bar. The door closing mechanisms listed below are for use on small to medium size single door control enclosures. They are designed to be used in conjunction with Class 9422 flange-mounted disconnect switches and circuit breaker operating mechanisms; however, they can be used independently as well. When used on properly designed and gasketed NEMA Type 12 enclosures, they meet NFPA 79 standards. Table 8.99: Single Door Enclosures—NEMA Type 4 or 12 with 60 in. High Maximum Opening Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism Description Two point, roller latch, door closing mechanism for use on enclosures with doors hinged on the left side. Two point, roller latch, door closing mechanism for use on enclosures with doors hinged on the right side. Third roller latch kit for 3 point locking; for use where 3 point locking is desired or where the door opening is ≥39 in. For Use On: (Enclosure Type) NEMA Type 4 and 12 Sheet Steel NEMA Type 4 and 12 Stainless Steel NEMA Type 4 and 12 Sheet Steel NEMA Type 4 and 12 Stainless Steel NEMA Type 4 and 12 Sheet Steel NEMA Type 4 and 12 Stainless Steel Use in Conjunction With: Class 9422 Types A1, A3, A9 Class 9422 Types A2, A4, A10 Class 9422 Types A1, A3, A9 Class 9422 Types A2, A4, A10 Class 9423 Types M4, M9, M4L, M9L Class 9423 Types M24, M24L Door Latch Handle Length 4 in. 4 in. 6 in. 4 in. 4 in. 4 in. 6 in. 4 in. — — [1] Suitable for door depths of 1-1/8 in., 1-1/4 in., 1-3/8 in. and 1-1/2 in. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Suggested Maximum Door Opening Less than 39 in. Less than 39 in. 60 in. Door Depth 3/4 in. [1] 3/4 in. Cat. No. 9423M4 9423M10 9423M9 Less than 39 in. 3/4 in. 9423M24 Less than 39 in. Less than 39 in. 60 in. 3/4 in. [1] 3/4 in. 9423M4L 9423M10L 9423M9L Less than 39 in. 3/4 in. 9423M24L — — 3/4 in. 9423M3 3/4 in. 9423M23 8-45 11/10/2017


page 304

Door Closing Mechanisms 8 Types M5, M6, M1, and M8 Class 9423 / Refer to Catalog 9420CT9701 schneider-electric.us Vault Type for Single and Multi-Door Enclosures Table 8.100 shows the requirements for the door closing mechanism, the locking bar kit, and the mechanical interlock kit, if used. Table 8.100: Single or Multi-Door Enclosures—NEMA Type 12 with 40 in. to 60 in. Door Opening Single-Door Enclosure Without Interlocking 1—M6 door closing mechanism 1—Type M660 locking bar kit With Interlocking 1—M6 door closing mechanism 1—Type M660 locking bar kit 1—Type M5 (use with 9422A handles) Without Interlocking For each door: 1—M6 door closing mechanism 1—Type M660 locking bar kit Multi-Door Enclosure With Interlocking For Master door: 1—M6 door closing mechanism 1—Type M660 locking bar kit 1—Type M5 (for use with 9422A handles) For each Auxiliary door: 1—M6 door closing mechanism 1—Type M660 locking bar kit Necessary quantities of Types M2 and M7 for each door (see below) NOTE: All mechanisms listed on this page are suitable for either left or right hand mounting. D O P E R A T I N G M E C H A N I S M S A N D I S C O N N E C T S W I T C H E S Type M6 Door Closing Mechanism Table 8.101: Door Interlocks Description Type The Class 9423 Type M6 door closing mechanism is designed to close and seal 0.75 in. deep doors of single or multi-door NEMA Type 12 enclosures. The Type M6 can be used on doors hinged on either the left or right hand side. Recommended door openings are from 40–60 in. Vault type handle length is 6 in. The lock bar kit for the Type M6 door closing mechanism contains two lock bars and is available from stock. The bars can be cut to fit door openings through 60 in. One lock bar kit is required for each Type M6 ordered. The Class 9423 Type M5 mechanical interlock kit is designed to interlock a Class 9422 handle mechanism with the Type M6 door closing mechanism. This kit prevents the opening of the master door (or single door) with the disconnect handle in the “ON” position, making it mandatory to use a screwdriver to gain entry to the enclosure at any time, regardless of the disconnect handle position. Type M660 Locking Bar Kits Type M5 Table 8.102: Required Accessories for Auxiliary Doors Type Type M2 Description One Type M2 kit is required for each auxiliary door. This kit is required to interlock any auxiliary door(s) with the master door. The first auxiliary door requires 2 Type M7 kits. Additional auxiliary doors require only 1 Type M7 kit. The 0.25 in. diameter rod used to interconnect the M7 kits is furnished by the user. If the distance between any two Type M7 kits exceeds 36 in., an additional Type M7 kit should be installed to prevent the rod from buckling. Type M7 NOTE: A - Interlocking lever extension of the flange-mounted handle mechanism. NOTE: B - Actual enclosure opening—not door height. NOTE: C - Screwdriver interlock assembly can be ordered separately. Class 9423 Type CEQ2493. 8-46 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved A1/4 in. Dia. Rod (supplied by user)LockingBarLockingBarLockingBarAuxiliary DoorMaster Door(Single Door)LockingBarDoorOpeningType M8Type M1Type M7Type M2CB11/10/2017


page 305

Single and Multi-Door Enclosures Class 9423 / Refer to Catalog 9420CT9701 schneider-electric.us Door Closing Mechanisms Vault Type for Single and Multi-Door Enclosures Table 8.103 shows the requirements for the door closing mechanism, the locking bar kit, and the mechanical interlock kit, if used. Table 8.103: Single Or Multi-Door Enclosures—NEMA Type 12 with 61 in. to 91 in. Door Openings Single-Door Enclosure Without Interlocking 1—M8 door closing mechanism 1—Type M891 locking bar kit With Interlocking 1—M8 door closing mechanism 1—Type M891 locking bar kit 1—Type M1 (for use with 9422A handles) Without Interlocking For each door: 1—M8 door closing mechanism 1—Type M891 locking bar kit Multi-Door Enclosure With Interlocking For Master door: 1—M8 door closing mechanism 1—Type M891 locking bar kit 1—Type M1 (for use with 9422A handles) For each Auxiliary door: 1—M8 door closing mechanism 1—Type M891 locking bar kit Necessary quantities of Types M2 and M7 for each door (see below) NOTE: All mechanisms listed on this page are suitable for either left or right hand mounting. Table 8.104: Door Interlocks Type Type M8 Door Closing Mechanism Type M891 Locking Bar Kits Type M1 Description The Class 9423 Type M8 door closing mechanism is designed to close and seal 1.125 in. deep doors of single or multi-door NEMA Type 12 enclosures. The Type M8 can be used on doors hinged on either the left or right hand side. Recommended door openings are from 61–91 in. Vault type handle length is 8 in. The lock bar kit for the Type M8 door closing mechanism contains two lock bars and is available from stock. The bars can be cut to fit door openings through 91 in.. One lock bar kit is required for each Type M8 ordered. The Class 9423 Type M1 mechanical interlock kit is designed to interlock a Class 9422 handle mechanism with the Type M8 door closing mechanism. This kit prevents the opening of the master door (or single door) with the disconnect handle in the “ON” position, making it mandatory to use a screwdriver to gain entry to the enclosure at any time, regardless of the disconnect handle position. S E H C T I W S T C E N N O C S I D N A S M S I N A H C E M G N I T A R E P O D 8 Table 8.105: Required Accessories for Auxiliary Doors Type Type M2 Description One Type M2 kit is required for each auxiliary door. This kit is required to interlock any auxiliary door(s) with the master door. The first auxiliary door requires 2 Type M7 kits. Additional auxiliary doors require only 1 Type M7 kit. The 0.25 in. diameter rod used to interconnect the M7 kits is furnished by the user. If the distance between any two Type M7 kits exceeds 36 in., an additional Type M7 kit should be installed to prevent the rod from buckling. Type M7 NOTE: A - Interlocking lever extension of the flange-mounted handle mechanism. NOTE: B - Actual enclosure opening—not door height. NOTE: C - Screwdriver interlock assembly can be ordered separately. Class 9423 Type CEQ2493. © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 8-47 A1/4 in. Dia. Rod (supplied by user)LockingBarLockingBarLockingBarAuxiliary DoorMaster Door(Single Door)LockingBarDoorOpeningType M8Type M1Type M7Type M2CB11/10/2017


page 306

Door Closing Mechanisms 8 Types M5, M6, M1, and M8 Class 9423 / Refer to Catalog 9420CT9701 schneider-electric.us D O P E R A T I N G M E C H A N I S M S A N D I S C O N N E C T S W I T C H E S A minimum = 4–1/2 in. Enclosure Construction and General Location Information For Types M5 and M6 Drilling and location information below is complete for a single door enclosure with door hinged on left side, incorporating a Type M6, M5, and Class 9422 handle mechanism. Transpose all horizontal dimensions for doors hinged on right side. Dimension A • Single door enclosures: A minimum = 1 in. • Multi-door enclosures without overhead interlocking system: • Multi-door enclosures with overhead interlocking system: NOTE: Overhead interlocking system consists of the required number of Class 9423 Type M2 and M7 kits for interlocking the auxiliary doors with the master door. See page 8-46. Table 8.106: Dimension B (Minimums) Type TCF, TCN, TDF, TDN, TD TE, TEF, TEN TF TG RN1 RP1 RR2 RT1 Disconnect Device 60 A Disconnect Switch 100 A Disconnect Switch 200 A Disconnect Switch 400 A Disconnect Switch FAL, FHL, Circuit Breaker KAL, KHL Circuit Breaker ILL Circuit Breaker MAL, MHL, MEL, MXL Circuit Breaker 2-1/2 2-1/2 8-1/8 11-9/16 2-1/2 7-21/32 14-15/32 15-1/8 3-/16 5-1/4 11-5/8 15-1/16 4-27/32 11-5/32 17-31/32 18-5/8 C 3-3/16 3-3/16 3-3/16 6-3/4 3-3/16 3-3/16 3-3/16 3-3/16 A minimum = 1 in. If A = 1 Minimum B = If A = 4–1/2 Minimum B = 8-48 © 2017 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/10/2017


page 307